This is a modern-English version of The Mysterious Island, originally written by Verne, Jules.
It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling,
and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If
you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.
Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.
The Mysterious Island
by Jules Verne
[Redactor’s Note: The Mysterious Island (Number V013 in the T&M numerical listing of Verne’s works) is a translation of L’Île mystérieuse first published in England by Sampson and Low and in the United States by Scribner and Henry L. Shepard using the same translation of W. H. G. Kingston. English translators often altered their translations to suit current political views of Church and Empire. In the Kingston translation the chapters near the end of the book where Captain Nemo makes his appearance are altered beyond all recognition and all mention of Captain Nemo’s previous life as a “freedom fighter” for Indian independence is removed, in addition to other deletions. The present translation is by the American Stephen W. White. It first appeared in the Evening Telegraph of Philadelphia, PA and was later published as an Evening Telegraph Reprint Book (1876). The present version is prepared from a xerox copy of that book kindly provided by Mr. Sidney Kravitz of Dover, NJ. According to Taves and Michaluk “Although more faithful than any other translation, this one has never been reprinted”. And so after a lapse of 127 years this translation of The Mysterious Island is now again available to the public.
[Redactor’s Note: The Mysterious Island (Number V013 in the T&M numerical listing of Verne’s works) is a translation of L’Île mystérieuse first published in England by Sampson and Low and in the United States by Scribner and Henry L. Shepard using the same translation by W. H. G. Kingston. English translators often changed their translations to align with contemporary political views regarding the Church and Empire. In the Kingston translation, the chapters toward the end of the book where Captain Nemo appears are altered beyond recognition, and all references to Captain Nemo’s previous life as a “freedom fighter” for Indian independence are removed, along with other omissions. The current translation is by American Stephen W. White. It first appeared in the Evening Telegraph of Philadelphia, PA, and was later published as an Evening Telegraph Reprint Book (1876). This version is based on a xerox copy of that book graciously provided by Mr. Sidney Kravitz of Dover, NJ. According to Taves and Michaluk, “Although more faithful than any other translation, this one has never been reprinted.” And so, after a gap of 127 years, this translation of The Mysterious Island is now once again available to the public.
Since the text was hand set for a newspaper there are many printer’s errors (including upside-down characters). Where obvious these have been corrected, although an attempt has been made to retain the original spelling of words in use at that period. Where there is a doubt, words have been altered so that the spelling is consistent. In other cases, like “trajopan” where the inconsistency is traced to Verne’s original, the spelling is left unaltered. A table of contents based on the chapter headings has been added which also indicates the points at which the french version was divided into three parts. An updated translation by Sidney Kravitz is now available from Wesleyan University Press (2001).
Since the text was typeset for a newspaper, there are many printing errors (including upside-down characters). Where it was obvious, these have been corrected, though an attempt has been made to keep the original spelling of words from that time. Where there’s uncertainty, words have been changed so the spelling is consistent. In other cases, like “trajopan,” where the inconsistency comes from Verne’s original, the spelling remains unchanged. A table of contents based on the chapter headings has been added, which also indicates where the French version was divided into three parts. An updated translation by Sidney Kravitz is now available from Wesleyan University Press (2001).
JULES VERNE’S LAST STORY
Jules Verne's Final Story
THE
THE MYSTERIOUS ISLAND
ISLAND
WITH A MAP OF THE ISLAND AND A FULL GLOSSARY
WITH A MAP OF THE ISLAND AND A COMPLETE GLOSSARY
By JULES VERNE
By Jules Verne
AUTHOR OF “THE TOUR OF THE WORLD IN EIGHTY DAYS,” “A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH,” “TWENTY THOUSAND LEAGUES UNDER THE SEA,” ETC.,ETC.
AUTHOR OF “THE TOUR OF THE WORLD IN EIGHTY DAYS,” “A JOURNEY TO THE CENTER OF THE EARTH,” “TWENTY THOUSAND LEAGUES UNDER THE SEA,” ETC., ETC.
TRANSLATED EXPRESSLY FOR
TRANSLATED SPECIFICALLY FOR
“T H E E V E N I N G T E L E G R A P H,”
AND REPRINTED FROM THE COLUMNS OF THAT JOURNAL.
AND REPRINTED FROM THE COLUMNS OF THAT JOURNAL.
PHILADELPHIA:
PHILLY:
OFFICE OF THE EVENING TELEGAPH, 108 SOUTH THIRD ST.
OFFICE OF THE EVENING TELEGRAPH, 108 SOUTH THIRD ST.
1876
PRICE, 25 CENTS
THE MYSTERIOUS ISLAND
CONTENTS
PART I |
SHIPWRECKED IN THE AIR |
I | The Hurricane of 1865—Cries in the Air—A Balloon Caught By a Waterspout—Only the Sea in Sight—Five Passengers—What Took Place in the Basket—Land Ahead!—The End. |
II | An Episode of the Rebellion—The Engineer Cyrus Smith—Gideon Spilett—The Negro Neb—The Sailor Pencroft—The Youth, Herbert—An Unexpected Proposal—Rendezvous at 10 O’clock P.M.—Departure in the Storm. |
III | Five O’clock in the Afternoon—The Lost One—The Despair of Neb—Search to the Northward—The Island—A Night of Anguish—The Fog of the Morning—Neb Swimming—Sight of the Land—Fording the Channel. |
IV | The Lithodomes—The Mouth of the River—The “Chimneys”—Continuation of the Search—The Forest of Evergreens—Getting Firewood—Waiting for the Tide—On Top of the Cliff—The Timber-Float—The Return to the Coast. |
V | Arranging the Chimneys—The Important Question of Fire—The Match Box—Search Over the Shore—Return of the Reporter and Neb—One Match—The Crackling Fire—The Fish Supper—The First Night on Land. |
VI | The Castaways’ Inventory—No Effects—The Charred Linen—An Expedition Into the Forest—The Flora of the Woods—The Flight of the Jacamar—Tracks of Wild Beasts—The Couroucous—The Heath-Cock—Line-Fishing Extraordinary. |
VII | Neb Has Not Yet Returned—The Reflections of the Reporter—The Supper—Prospect of a Bad Night—The Storm Is Frightful—They Go Out Into the Night—Struggle with the Rain and Wind. |
VIII | Is Cyrus Smith Alive?—Neb’s Story—Footprints—An Insoluble Question—The First Words of Smith—Comparing the Footprints—Return to the Chimneys—Pencroff Dejected. |
IX | Cyrus Is Here-Pencroff’s Attempts—Rubbing Wood—Island or Continent—The Plans of the Engineer—Whereabouts in the Pacific—In the Depths of the Forest—The Pistachio Pine—A Pig Chase—A Smoke of Good Omen. |
X | The Engineer’s Invention—Island Or Continent?—Departure for the Mountain—The Forest—Volcanic Soil—The Tragopans—The Moufflons—The First Plateau—Encamping for the Night—The Summit of the Cone |
XI | At the Summit of the Cone—The Interior of the Crater—Sea Everywhere—No Land in Sight—A Bird’s Eve View of the Coast—Hydrography and Orography—Is the Island Inhabited?—A Geographical Baptism—Lincoln Island. |
XII | Regulation of Watches—Pencroff Is Satisfied—A Suspicious Smoke—The Course of Red Creek—The Flora of the Island—Its Fauna—Mountain Pheasants—A Kangaroo Chase—The Agouti—Lake Grant—Return to the Chimneys. |
XIII | Top’s Contribution—Making Bows and Arrows—A Brick-Kiln—A Pottery—Different Cooking Utensils—The First Boiled Meat—Mugwort—The Southern Cross—An Important Astronomical Observation. |
XIV | The Measure Of the Granite Wall—An Application of the Theorem of Similar Triangles—The Latitude of the Island—An Excursion to the North—An Oyster-Bed—Plans for the Future—The Sun’s Passage of the Meridian—The Co-ordinates of Lincoln Island. |
XV | Winter Sets In—The Metallurgic Question—The Exploration of Safety Island—A Seal Hunt—Capture of an Echidna—The Ai—The Catalonian Method—Making Iron and Steel. |
XVI | The Question of a Dwelling Discussed Again—Pencroff’s Ideas—An Exploration to the North of the Lake—The Western Boundary of the Plateau—The Serpents—The Outlet of the Lake—Top’s Alarm—Top Swimming—A Fight Under Water—The Dugong. |
XVII | A Visit to the Lake—The Direction of the Current—The Prospects of Cyrus Smith—The Dugong Fat—The Use of the Schistous Limestone—The Sulphate of Iron—How Glycerine Is Made—Soap—Saltpetre—Sulphuric Acid—Nitric Acid—The New Outlet. |
XVIII | Pencroff Doubts No More—The Old Outlet of the Lake—A Subterranean Descent—The Way Through the Granite—Top Has Disappeared—The Central Cavern—The Lower Well—Mystery—The Blows with the Pick—The Return. |
XIX | Smith’s Plan—The Front of Granite House—The Rope Ladder—Pencroff’s Ideas—The Aromatic Herbs—A Natural Warren—Getting Water—The View From the Windows of Granite House. |
XX | The Rainy Season—What to Wear-A Seal-Hunt—Candle-Making—-Work in the Granite House—The Two Causeways—Return From a Visit to the Oyster-Bed—What Herbert Found in His Pocket. |
XXI | Several Degrees Below Zero—Exploration of the Swamp Region to the Southeast—The View of the Sea—A Conversation Concerning the Future of the Pacific Ocean—The Incessant Labor of the Infusoria—What Will Become of This Globe—The Chase—The Swamp of the Tadorns. |
XXII. | The Traps—The Foxes—The Peccaries—The Wind Veers to the Northwest—The Snow-Storm—The Basket-Makers—The Coldest Snap of Winter—Crystallization of the Sugar-Maple—The Mysterious Shafts—The Projected Exploration—The Pellet of Lead. |
PART II |
THE ABANDONED |
XXIII | Concerning the Leaden Pellet—Making a Canoe—Hunting—In the Top of a Kauri—Nothing to Indicate the Presence of Man—The Turtle on its Back—The Turtle Disappears—Smith’s Explanation. |
XXIV | Trial of the Canoe—A Wreck on the Shore—The Tow—Jetsam Point—Inventory of the Box—What Pencroff Wanted—A Bible—A Verse from the Bible. |
XXV | The Departure—The Rising Tide—Elms and Other Trees—Different Plants—The Kingfisher—Appearance of the Forest—The Gigantic Eucalypti—Why They Are Called Fever-Trees—Monkeys—The Waterfall—Encampment for the Night. |
XXVI | Going Toward the Coast—Troops of Monkeys—A New Water-Course—Why the Tide Was Not Felt—A Forest on the Shore—Reptile Promontory—Spilett Makes Herbert Envious—The Bamboo Fusilade. |
XXVII | Proposal to Return By the South Coast—Its Configuration—Search for the Shipwrecked—A Waif in the Air—Discovery of a Small Natural Harbor—Midnight on the Mercy—A Drifting Canoe. |
XXVIII | Pencroff’s Halloos—A Night in the Chimneys—Herbert’s Arrow—Smith’s Plan—An Unexpected Solution—What Had Happened in Granite House—How the Colonists Obtained a New Domestic. |
XXIX | Projects to Be Carried Out—A Bridge Over the Mercy—To Make An Island of Prospect Plateau—The Draw-Bridge—The Corn Harvest—The Stream—The Causeway—The Poultry Yard—The Pigeon-House—The Two Wild Asses—Harnessed to the Wagon—Excursion to Balloon Harbor. |
XXX | Clothing—Seal-Skin Boots—Making Pyroxyline—Planting—The Fish—Turtles’ Eggs—Jup’s Education—The Corral-Hunting Moufflons—Other Useful Animals and Vegetables—Home Thoughts. |
XXXI | Bad Weather—The Hydraulic Elevator—Making Window Glass and Table Ware—The Bread Tree—Frequent Visits to the Corral—The Increase of the Herd—The Reporter’s Question—The Exact Position of Lincoln Island—Pencroff’s Proposal. |
XXXII | Ship Building—The Second Harvest—Ai Hunting—A New Plant—A Whale—The Harpoon From the Vineyard—Cutting Up This Cetacea—Use of the Whalebone—The End of May—PencroffIs Content. |
XXXIII | Winter—Fulling Cloth—The Mill—Pencroff’s Fixed Purpose—The Whalebones—The Use of An Albatross—Top and Jup—Storms—Damage to the Poultry-Yard—An Excursion to the Marsh—Smith Alone—Exploration of the Pits. |
XXXIV | Rigging the Launch—Attacked By Foxes—Jup Wounded—Jup Nursed—Jup Cured—Completion of the Launch—Pencroff’s Triumph—The Good Luck—Trial Trip, to the South of the Island—An Unexpected Document. |
XXXV | Departure Decided Upon—Preparations—The Three Passengers—The First Night—The Second Night—Tabor Island—Search on the Shore—Search in the Woods—No One—Animals—Plants—A House—Deserted. |
XXXVI | The Inventory—The Night—Some Letters—The Search Continued—Plants and Animals—Herbert in Danger—Aboard—The Departure—Bad Weather—A Glimmer of Intelligence—Lost At Sea—A Timely Light. |
XXXVII | The Return-Discussion—Smith and the Unknown—Balloon Harbor-The Devotion of the Engineer-A Touching Experience-Tears. |
XXXVIII | A Mystery to Be Solved—The First Words of the Unknown—Twelve Years on the Island—Confessions—Disappearance—Smith’s Confidence—Building a Wind-Mill—The First Bread—An Act of Devotion—Honest Hands. |
XXXIX | Always Apart—A Bequest of the Unknown’s—The Farm Established At the Corral—Twelve Years—The Boatswain’s Mate of the Britannia—Left on Tabor Island—The Hand of Smith—The Mysterious Paper |
XL | A Talk—Smith and Spilett—The Engineer’s Idea—The Electric Telegraph—The Wires—The Batter—the Alphabet—Fine Weather—The Prosperity of the Colony—Photography—A Snow Effect—Two Years on Lincoln Island. |
XLI | Thoughts of Home—Chances of Return—Plan to Explore the Coast—The Departure of the 16th of April—Serpentine Peninsula Seen From Sea—The Basaltic Cliffs of the Western Coast—Bad Weather—Night—A New Incident. |
XLII | Night At Sea—Shark Gulf—Confidences—Preparations for Winter—Early Advent of Bad Weather—Cold—In-Door Work—Six Months Later—A Speck on the Photograph—An Unexpected Event. |
PART III |
THE SECRET OF THE ISLAND |
XLIII | Lost Or Saved?—Ayrton Recalled—Important Discussion—It Is Not the Duncan—Suspicion And Precaution—Approach of the Ship—A Cannon Shot—The Brig Anchors in Sight of the Island—Night Fall. |
XLIV | Discussions—Presentiments—Ayrton’s Proposal—It Is Accepted—Ayrton and Pencroff on Safety Islet—Norfolk Convicts—Their Projects—Heroic Attempt of Ayrton—His Return—Six Against Fifty. |
XLV | The Mist Rises—The Engineer’s Disposition of Forces—Three Posts—Ayrton and Pencroft—The First Attack—Two Other Boat Loads—On the Islet—Six Convicts on Shore—The Brig Weighs Anchor—The Speedy’s Projectiles—Desperate Situation—Unexpected Denouement. |
XLVI | The Colonists on the Beach—Ayrton and Pencroff as Salvors—Talk At Breakfast—Pencroff’s Reasoning—Exploration of the Brig’s Hull in Detail—The Magazine Uninjured—New Riches—A Discovery—A Piece of a Broken Cylinder. |
XLVII | The Engineer’s Theory—Pencroff’s Magnificent Suppositions—A Battery in the Air—Four Projectiles—The Surviving Convicts—Ayrton Hesitates—Smith’s Generosity and Pencroff’s Dissatisfaction. |
XLVIII | The Projected Expedition—Ayrton At the Corral—Visit to Port Balloon—Pencroff’s Remarks—Despatch Sent to the Corral—No Answer From Ayrton—Setting Out Next Day—Why the Wire Did Not Act—A Detonation. |
XLIX | The Reporter and Pencroff in the Corral—Moving Herbert—Despair of the Sailor—Consultation of the Engineer and the Reporter—Mode of Treatment—A Glimmer of Hope—How to Warn Neb—A Faithful Messenger—Neb’s Reply. |
L | The Convicts in the Neighborhood of the Corral—Provisional Occupation—Continuation of Herbert’s Treatment—Pencroff’s Jubilation—Review of the Past—Future Prospects—Smith’s Ideas. |
LI | No News of Neb—A Proposal From Pencroff and Spilett—The Reporter’s Sorties—A Fragment Of Cloth—A Message—Hurried Departure—Arrival At Prospect Plateau. |
LII | Herbert Carried to Granite House—Neb Relates What Had Happened—Visit of Smith to the Plateau—Ruin and Devastation—The Colonists Helpless—Willow Bark—A Mortal Fever—Top Barks Again. |
LIII | An Inexplicable Mystery—Herbert’s Convalescence—The Unexplored Parts of the Island—Preparations for Departure—The First Day—Night—Second Day—The Kauris—Cassowaries—Footprints in the Sand—Arrival At Reptile End. |
LIV | Exploration of Reptile End—Camp At the Mouth of Fall River—By the Corral—The Reconnaissance—The Return—Forward—An Open Door—A Light in the Window—By Moonlight. |
LV | Ayrton’s Recital—Plans of His Old Comrades—Taking Possession of the Corral—The Rules of the Island—The Good Luck—Researches About Mount Franklin—The Upper Valleys—Subterranean Rumblings—Pencroff’s Answer—At the Bottom of the Crater—The Return |
LVI | After Three Years—The Question of a New Ship—Its Determination—Prosperity of the Colony—The Shipyard—The Cold Weather—Pencroff Resigned—Washing—Mount Franklin. |
LVII | The Awakening of the Volcano—The Fine Weather—Resumption of Work—The Evening of the 15th of October—A Telegraph—A Demand—An Answer—Departure for the Corral—The Notice—The Extra Wire—The Basalt Wall—At High Tide—At Low Tide—The Cavern—A Dazzling Light. |
LVIII | Captain Nemo—His First Words—History of a Hero of Liberty—Hatred of the Invaders—His Companions—The Life Under Water—Alone—The Last Refuge of the Nautilus—The Mysterious Genius of the Island. |
LIX | The Last Hours of Captain Nemo—His Dying Wishes—A Souvenir for His Friends—His Tomb—Some Counsel to the Colonists—The Supreme Moment—At the Bottom of the Sea. |
LX | The Reflections of the Colonists—Renewal of Work—The 1st of January, 1869—A Smoke From the Volcano—Symptoms of An Eruption Ayrton and Smith At the Corral—Exploration of the Crypt Dakkar—What Captain Nemo Had Said to the Engineer. |
LXI | Smith’s Recital—Hastening the Work—A Last Visit to the Corral—The Combat Between the Fire and the Water—The Aspect of the Island—They Decide to Launch the Ship—The Night of the 8th of March. |
LXII | An Isolated Rock in the Pacific—The Last Refuge of the Colonists—The Prospect of Death—Unexpected Succor—How and Why It Came—The Last Good Action—An Island on Terra Firma—The Tomb of Captain Nemo. |
THE MYSTERIOUS ISLAND.
By JULES VERNE.
CHAPTER I.
THE HURRICANE OF 1865—CRIES IN THE AIR—A BALLOON CAUGHT BY A WATERSPOUT—ONLY THE SEA IN SIGHT—FIVE PASSENGERS—WHAT TOOK PLACE IN THE BASKET—LAND AHEAD!—THE END.
THE HURRICANE OF 1865—CRIES IN THE AIR—A BALLOON CAUGHT BY A WATERSPOUT—ONLY THE SEA IN SIGHT—FIVE PASSENGERS—WHAT TOOK PLACE IN THE BASKET—LAND AHEAD!—THE END.
“Are we going up again?”
“Are we going up again?”
“No. On the contrary; we are going down!”
“No. Quite the opposite; we are going down!”
“Worse than that, Mr. Smith, we are falling!”
“Even worse, Mr. Smith, we’re falling!”
“For God’s sake throw over all the ballast!”
“Please, for the love of God, get rid of all the extra weight!”
“The last sack is empty!”
“The last bag is empty!”
“And the balloon rises again?”
“And the balloon goes up again?”
“No!”
“Nope!”
“I hear the splashing waves!”
“I hear the crashing waves!”
“The sea is under us!”
“The ocean is beneath us!”
“It is not five hundred feet off!”
“It’s not five hundred feet away!”
Then a strong, clear voice shouted:—
Then a strong, clear voice shouted:—
“Overboard with all we have, and God help us!”
“Overboard with everything we’ve got, and God help us!”
Such were the words which rang through the air above the vast wilderness of the Pacific, towards 4 o’clock in the afternoon of the 23d of March, 1865:—
Such were the words that echoed through the air above the vast wilderness of the Pacific, around 4 o'clock in the afternoon of March 23, 1865:—
Doubtless, no one has forgotten that terrible northeast gale which vented its fury during the equinox of that year. It was a hurricane lasting without intermission from the 18th to the 26th of March. Covering a space of 1,800 miles, drawn obliquely to the equator, between the 35° of north latitude and 40° south, it occasioned immense destruction both in America and Europe and Asia. Cities in ruins, forests uprooted, shores devastated by the mountains of water hurled upon them, hundreds of shipwrecks, large tracts of territory desolated by the waterspouts which destroyed everything in their path, thousands of persons crushed to the earth or engulfed in the sea; such were the witnesses to its fury left behind by this terrible hurricane. It surpassed in disaster those storms which ravaged Havana and Guadeloupe in 1810 and 1825.
No one has likely forgotten that awful northeast storm that unleashed its fury during the equinox that year. It was a hurricane that lasted without stopping from March 18th to March 26th. Stretching over 1,800 miles, slanting towards the equator, between 35° north latitude and 40° south, it caused massive destruction in America, Europe, and Asia. Cities were left in ruins, forests were uprooted, shores were devastated by towering waves crashing onto them, hundreds of ships were wrecked, and vast areas were laid waste by waterspouts that obliterated everything in their way. Thousands of people were either crushed to the ground or swallowed by the sea; these were the stark reminders of the hurricane's wrath. It surpassed the devastation of the storms that struck Havana and Guadeloupe in 1810 and 1825.
While these catastrophes were taking place upon the land and the sea, a scene not less thrilling was enacting in the disordered heavens.
While these disasters were happening on land and at sea, an equally exciting scene was unfolding in the chaotic sky.
A balloon, caught in the whirl of a column of air, borne like a ball on the summit of a waterspout, spinning around as in some aerial whirlpool, rushed through space with a velocity of ninety miles an hour. Below the balloon, dimly visible through the dense vapor, mingled with spray, which spread over the ocean, swung a basket containing five persons.
A balloon, caught in the swirl of a column of air, lifted like a ball on top of a waterspout, spun around like it was in an aerial whirlpool, sped through space at ninety miles an hour. Below the balloon, barely visible through the thick mist mixed with spray covering the ocean, hung a basket holding five people.
From whence came this aerial traveller, the sport of the awful tempest? Evidently it could not have been launched during the storm, and the storm had been raging five days, its symptoms manifesting themselves on the 18th. It must, therefore, have come from a great distance, as it could not have traversed less than 2,000 miles in twenty-four hours. The passengers, indeed, had been unable to determine the course traversed, as they had nothing with which to calculate their position; and it was a necessary effect, that, though borne along in the midst of this tempest; they were unconscious of its violence. They were whirled and spun about and carried up and down without any sense of motion. Their vision could not penetrate the thick fog massed together under the balloon. Around them everything was obscure. The clouds were so dense that they could not tell the day from the night. No reflection of light, no sound from the habitations of men, no roaring of the ocean had penetrated that profound obscurity in which they were suspended during their passage through the upper air. Only on their rapid descent had they become conscious of the danger threatening them by the waves.
From where did this airborne traveler come, tossed by the terrible storm? Clearly, it couldn't have been launched during the storm, which had been raging for five days, its symptoms appearing on the 18th. It must have come from a long way off, as it couldn't have traveled less than 2,000 miles in just twenty-four hours. The passengers, in fact, couldn’t determine the route they'd taken, since they had no way to measure their position; and it was a natural result that, even while being swept along in the storm, they were unaware of its force. They were spun around and lifted and dropped without feeling any movement. They couldn’t see through the thick fog surrounding the balloon. Everything around them was unclear. The clouds were so heavy that they couldn’t tell day from night. No light, no sounds from human dwellings, no crashing waves of the ocean made it through the deep darkness they were suspended in as they traveled through the upper atmosphere. Only during their fast descent did they realize the danger posed by the waves below.
Meanwhile the balloon, disencumbered of the heavy articles, such as munitions, arms, and provisions, had risen to a height of 4,500 feet, and the passengers having discovered that the sea was beneath them, and realizing that the dangers above were less formidable than those below, did not hesitate to throw overboard everything, no matter how necessary, at the same time endeavoring to lose none of that fluid, the soul of the apparatus, which sustained them above the abyss.
Meanwhile, the balloon, freed from heavy items like weapons, munitions, and supplies, had climbed to an altitude of 4,500 feet. The passengers realized that the sea was below them and understood that the threats from above were less significant than those below. They didn’t hesitate to throw everything overboard, regardless of its importance, while trying to ensure that they didn’t lose any of that essential gas, the lifeblood of the apparatus, that kept them suspended above the abyss.
The night passed in the midst of dangers that would have proved fatal to souls less courageous; and with the coming of day the hurricane showed signs of abatement. At dawn, the emptied clouds rose high into the heavens; and, in a few hours more, the whirlwind had spent its force. The wind, from a hurricane, had subsided into what sailors would call a “three reef breeze.”
The night went by with dangers that would have been deadly for those less brave; and as day broke, the hurricane began to lessen. At dawn, the clouds cleared and lifted into the sky; and, in a few more hours, the storm had lost its strength. The wind, once a hurricane, had calmed down to what sailors would refer to as a “three reef breeze.”
Toward eleven o’clock, the lower strata of the air had lightened visibly. The atmosphere exhaled that humidity which is noticeable after the passage of great meteors. It did not seem as if the storm had moved westward, but rather as if it was ended. Perhaps it had flowed off in electric sheets after the whirlwind had spent itself, as is the case with the typhoon in the Indian Ocean.
Toward eleven o’clock, the lower layers of the air had clearly brightened. The atmosphere carried that humidity that comes after a big meteor shower. It didn’t feel like the storm had shifted to the west, but more like it was over. Maybe it had dissipated in electric sheets after the whirlwind had run its course, like what happens with a typhoon in the Indian Ocean.
Now, however, it became evident that the balloon was again sinking slowly but surely. It seemed also as if it was gradually collapsing, and that its envelope was lengthening and passing from a spherical into an oval form. It held 50,000 cubic feet of gas, and therefore, whether soaring to a great height or moving along horizontally, it was able to maintain itself for a long time in the air. In this emergency the voyagers threw overboard the remaining articles which weighed down the balloon, the few provisions they had kept, and everything they had in their pockets, while one of the party hoisted himself into the ring to which was fastened the cords of the net, and endeavored to closely tie the lower end of the balloon. But it was evident that the gas was escaping, and that the voyagers could no longer keep the balloon afloat.
Now, it became clear that the balloon was sinking slowly but surely again. It also seemed like it was gradually collapsing, its envelope stretching and changing from a round shape to an oval one. It contained 50,000 cubic feet of gas, so whether it was soaring high or moving horizontally, it could stay in the air for a long time. In this situation, the travelers tossed overboard the remaining items that were weighing down the balloon, the few supplies they had left, and everything in their pockets. One of them climbed into the ring where the net's cords were attached and tried to securely tie the bottom of the balloon. But it was obvious that gas was leaking out, and the travelers could no longer keep the balloon up.
They were lost!
They were lost!
There was no land, not even an island, visible beneath them. The wide expanse of ocean offered no point of rest, nothing upon which they could cast anchor. It was a vast sea on which the waves were surging with incomparable violence. It was the limitless ocean, limitless even to them from their commanding height. It was a liquid plain, lashed and beaten by the hurricane, until it seemed like a circuit of tossing billows, covered with a net-work of foam. Not even a ship was in sight.
There was no land, not even an island, in sight beneath them. The vast ocean provided no place to rest, nothing they could anchor onto. It was an immense sea where the waves crashed with unmatched force. It was the endless ocean, limitless even from their elevated position. It was a smooth surface, whipped and battered by the storm, giving the appearance of a swirling mass of waves, topped with a web of foam. Not a single ship was visible.
In order, therefore, to save themselves from being swallowed up by the waves it was necessary to arrest this downward movement, let it cost what it might. And it was evidently to the accomplishment of this that the party were directing their efforts. But in spite of all they could do the balloon continued to descend, though at the same time moving rapidly along with the wind toward the southwest.
In order to avoid being overwhelmed by the waves, they needed to stop this downward movement, no matter the cost. It was clear that this was what the group was focused on. But despite their efforts, the balloon kept drifting down, while also moving quickly with the wind toward the southwest.
It was a terrible situation, this, of these unfortunate men. No longer masters of the balloon, their efforts availed them nothing. The envelope collapsed more and more, and the gas continued to escape. Faster and faster they fell, until at 1 o’clock they were not more than 600 feet above the sea. The gas poured out of a rent in the silk. By lightening the basket of everything the party had been able to continue their suspension in the air for several hours, but now the inevitable catastrophe could only be delayed, and unless some land appeared before nightfall, voyagers, balloon, and basket must disappear beneath the waves.
It was a horrible situation for these unfortunate men. No longer in control of the balloon, their efforts got them nowhere. The envelope kept collapsing, and the gas was still leaking out. They were falling faster and faster until, at 1 o’clock, they were only about 600 feet above the sea. The gas was escaping through a tear in the silk. By getting rid of everything from the basket, the group had managed to stay in the air for several hours, but now the inevitable disaster could only be postponed, and unless land appeared before nightfall, the travelers, the balloon, and the basket would vanish beneath the waves.
It was evident that these men were strong and able to face death. Not a murmur escaped their lips. They were determined to struggle to the last second to retard their fall, and they tried their last expedient. The basket, constructed of willow osiers, could not float, and they had no means of supporting it on the surface of the water. It was 2 o’clock, and the balloon was only 400 feet above the waves.
It was clear that these men were strong and ready to face death. Not a sound came from them. They were determined to fight until the very last moment to slow their descent, and they attempted their final solution. The basket, made of willow branches, couldn’t float, and they had no way to keep it on the water's surface. It was 2 o’clock, and the balloon was just 400 feet above the waves.
Then a voice was heard—the voice of a man whose heart knew no fear—responded to by others not less strong:—
Then a voice was heard—the voice of a man whose heart knew no fear—responded to by others equally strong:—
“Everything is thrown out?”
“Is everything getting thrown out?”
“No, we yet have 10,000 francs in gold.”
“No, we still have 10,000 francs in gold.”
A heavy bag fell into the sea.
A heavy bag dropped into the ocean.
“Does the balloon rise?”
"Will the balloon rise?"
“A little, but it will soon fall again.”
“A bit, but it will drop again soon.”
“Is there nothing else we can gut rid of?”
“Is there nothing else we can get rid of?”
“Not a thing.”
"Nothing."
“Yes there is; there’s the basket!”
“Yes, there is; there’s the basket!”
“Catch hold of the net then, and let it go.”
“Grab the net then, and release it.”
The cords which attached the basket to the hoop were cut, and the balloon, as the former fell into the sea, rose again 2,000 feet. This was, indeed, the last means of lightening the apparatus. The five passengers had clambered into the net around the hoop, and, clinging to its meshes, looked into the abyss below.
The ropes that connected the basket to the hoop were cut, and as the basket fell into the sea, the balloon shot up another 2,000 feet. This was truly the final way to lighten the load. The five passengers had scrambled into the net around the hoop and, holding on to its webbing, gazed into the void below.
Every one knows the statical sensibility of a balloon. It is only necessary to relieve it of the lightest object in order to have it rise. The apparatus floating in air acts like a mathematical balance. One can readily understand, then, that when disencumbered of every weight relatively great, its upward movement will be sudden and considerable. It was thus in the present instance. But after remaining poised for a moment at its height, the balloon began to descend. It was impossible to repair the rent, through which the gas was rushing, and the men having done everything they could do, must look to God for succor.
Everyone knows how sensitive a balloon is to weight. It takes only the lightest object being removed for it to rise. The balloon floating in the air acts like a scale. Therefore, it's easy to see that once it’s free of any relatively heavy weight, it will shoot up suddenly and significantly. That’s exactly what happened here. However, after hovering for a moment at its peak, the balloon started to float back down. It was impossible to fix the tear where the gas was escaping, and since the men had done all they could, they had to rely on God for help.
At 4 o’clock, when the balloon was only 500 feet above the sea, the loud barking of a dog, holding itself crouched beside its master in the meshes of the net, was heard.
At 4 o’clock, when the balloon was just 500 feet above the sea, the loud barking of a dog, crouching next to its owner in the net, was heard.
“Top has seen something!” cried one, and immediately afterwards another shouted:—
“Top has seen something!” one shouted, and right afterward another yelled:—
“Land! Land!”
"Land! Land!"
The balloon, which the wind had continued to carry towards the southwest, had since dawn passed over a distance of several hundred miles, and a high land began to be distinguishable in that direction. But it was still thirty miles to leeward, and even supposing they did not drift, it would take a full hour to reach it. An hour! Before that time could pass, would not the balloon be emptied of what gas remained? This was the momentous question.
The balloon, which the wind had kept blowing towards the southwest, had traveled several hundred miles since dawn, and they could now see a high land in that direction. But it was still thirty miles downwind, and even if they didn’t drift, it would take a whole hour to get there. An hour! By the time that passed, wouldn’t the balloon have lost all the gas it had left? This was the crucial question.
The party distinctly saw that solid point which they must reach at all hazards. They did not know whether it was an island or a continent, as they were uninformed as to what part of the world the tempest had hurried them. But they knew that this land, whether inhabited or desert, must be reached.
The group clearly recognized that there was a crucial destination they needed to reach at all costs. They weren’t sure if it was an island or a continent since they didn’t know where the storm had swept them away to. However, they understood that they had to get to this land, no matter if it was populated or barren.
At 4 o’clock it was plain that the balloon could not sustain itself much longer. It grazed the surface of the sea, and the crests of the higher waves several times lapped the base of the net, making it heavier; and, like a bird with a shot in its wing, could only half sustain itself.
At 4 o’clock, it was clear that the balloon couldn't hold on much longer. It skimmed the surface of the sea, and the tips of the taller waves several times splashed against the bottom of the net, making it heavier; and, like a bird with a bullet in its wing, it could only barely keep itself afloat.
A half hour later, and the land was scarcely a mile distant. But the balloon, exhausted, flabby, hanging in wrinkles, with only a little gas remaining in its upper portion, unable to sustain the weight of those clinging to the net, was plunging them in the sea, which lashed them with its furious billows. Occasionally the envelope of the balloon would belly out, and the wind taking it would carry it along like a ship. Perhaps by this means it would reach the shore. But when only two cables’ length away four voices joined in a terrible cry. The balloon, though seemingly unable to rise again, after having been struck by a tremendous wave, made a bound into the air, as if it had been suddenly lightened of some of its weight. It rose 1,500 feet, and encountering a sort of eddy in the air, instead of being carried directly to land, it was drawn along in a direction nearly parallel thereto. In a minute or two, however, it reapproached the shore in an oblique direction, and fell upon the sand above the reach of the breakers. The passengers, assisting each other, hastened to disengage themselves from the meshes of the net; and the balloon, relieved of their weight, was caught up by the wind, and, like a wounded bird recovering for an instant, disappeared into space.
Half an hour later, the land was barely a mile away. But the balloon, tired, sagging, covered in wrinkles, with only a little gas left in its top part, couldn’t support the weight of those clinging to the net, and was plunging them into the sea, which was battering them with its angry waves. Occasionally, the balloon's envelope would puff out, and the wind would catch it, carrying it along like a ship. Maybe this way it would reach the shore. But when it was only two cable lengths away, four voices let out a terrible cry. The balloon, even though it seemed unable to rise again after being hit by a huge wave, suddenly shot up into the air as if it had been suddenly lightened. It soared to 1,500 feet, and encountering a sort of air eddy, instead of going straight to shore, it was pushed along in a direction almost parallel to it. However, in a minute or two, it began to approach the shore at an angle and landed on the sand beyond the reach of the waves. The passengers, helping each other, hurried to free themselves from the tangled net, and the balloon, now relieved of their weight, was caught by the wind and, like an injured bird momentarily recovering, vanished into the sky.
The basket had contained five passengers and a dog, and but four had been thrown upon the shore. The fifth one, then, had been washed off by the great wave which had struck the net, and it was owing to this accident that the lightened balloon had been able to rise for the last time before falling upon the land. Scarcely had the four castaways felt the ground beneath their feet than all thinking of the one who was lost, cried:—“Perhaps he is trying to swim ashore. Save him! Let us save him!”
The basket had five passengers and a dog, but only four of them were thrown onto the shore. The fifth had been washed away by the huge wave that hit the net, and it was because of this accident that the lighter balloon could rise one last time before falling to the ground. As soon as the four survivors felt the ground under their feet, they all thought about the one who was missing and shouted, “Maybe he’s trying to swim to shore. We need to save him! Let’s save him!”
CHAPTER II.
AN EPISODE OF THE REBELLION-THE ENGINEER CYRUS SMITH—GIDEON SPILETT—THE NEGRO NEB—THE SAILOR PENCROFF—THE YOUTH, HERBERT—AN UNEXPECTED PROPOSAL—RENDEZVOUS AT 10 O’CLOCK P.M.—DEPARTURE IN THE STORM.
AN EPISODE OF THE REBELLION - THE ENGINEER CYRUS SMITH - GIDEON SPILETT - THE BLACK NEB - THE SAILOR PENCROFF - THE YOUNG MAN, HERBERT - AN UNEXPECTED PROPOSAL - MEETING AT 10 P.M. - DEPARTURE IN THE STORM.
They were neither professional aeronauts nor amateurs in aerial navigation whom the storm had thrown upon this coast. They were prisoners of war whose audacity had suggested this extraordinary manner of escape. A hundred times they would have perished, a hundred times their torn balloon would have precipitated them into the abyss, had not Providence preserved them for a strange destiny, and on the 20th of March, after having flown from Richmond, besieged by the troops of General Ulysses Grant, they found themselves 7,000 miles from the Virginia capital, the principal stronghold of the Secessionists during that terrible war. Their aerial voyage had lasted five days.
They weren’t professional balloonists or novice pilots caught up in the storm that hit this coast. They were prisoners of war who had devised this bold escape plan. They could have died a hundred times, and their damaged balloon could have sent them crashing down into oblivion, if not for fate saving them for a strange future. On March 20th, after flying from Richmond, besieged by General Ulysses Grant's troops, they found themselves 7,000 miles away from the Virginia capital, which was the main stronghold of the Secessionists during that brutal war. Their journey through the air had lasted five days.
Let us see by what curious circumstances this escape of prisoners was effected,—an escape which resulted in the catastrophe which we have seen.
Let’s look at the unusual events that led to this prison escape—an escape that caused the disaster we’ve just witnessed.
This same year, in the month of February, 1865, in one of those surprises by which General Grant, though in vain, endeavored to take Richmond, many of his officers were captured by the enemy and confined within the city. One of the most distinguished of those taken was a Federal staff officer named Cyrus Smith.
This same year, in February 1865, during one of those surprise attacks that General Grant, despite his efforts, used to try and capture Richmond, many of his officers were captured by the enemy and locked up in the city. One of the most notable among those captured was a Federal staff officer named Cyrus Smith.
Cyrus Smith was a native of Massachusetts, an engineer by profession, and a scientist of the first order, to whom the Government had given, during the war, the direction of the railways, which played such a great strategic part during the war.
Cyrus Smith was originally from Massachusetts, worked as an engineer, and was a top-notch scientist. During the war, the Government put him in charge of the railways, which were crucial for strategy throughout the conflict.
A true Yankee, thin, bony, lean, about forty-five years old, with streaks of grey appearing in his close cut hair and heavy moustache. He had one of those fine classical heads that seem as if made to be copied upon medals; bright eyes, a serious mouth, and the air of a practiced officer. He was one of these engineers who began of his own wish with the pick and shovel, as there are generals who have preferred to rise from the ranks. Thus, while possessing inventive genius, he had acquired manual dexterity, and his muscles showed remarkable firmness. He was as much a man of action as of study; he moved without effort, under the influence of a strong vitality and his sanguine temperament defied all misfortune. Highly educated, practical, “clear-headed,” his temperament was superb, and always retaining his presence of mind he combined in the highest degree the three conditions whose union regulates the energy of man: activity of body, strength of will, and determination. His motto might have been that of William of Orange in the XVIIth century—“I can undertake without hope, and persevere through failure.”
A true Yankee, thin, bony, and lean, around forty-five years old, with strands of grey in his closely cropped hair and heavy mustache. He had one of those impressive classical heads that look like they belong on a coin; bright eyes, a serious mouth, and the demeanor of a seasoned officer. He was one of those engineers who chose to start with the pick and shovel, just like some generals prefer to rise through the ranks. So, while he had inventive genius, he also gained manual skill, and his muscles were notably strong. He was equally a man of action and study; he moved effortlessly, energized by a strong vitality, and his optimistic temperament shrugged off misfortune. Highly educated and practical, "clear-headed," his temperament was outstanding, and he always kept his cool, combining in the best way the three factors that drive a person's energy: physical activity, willpower, and determination. His motto could have been that of William of Orange in the 17th century—"I can undertake without hope, and persevere through failure."
Cyrus Smith was also the personification of courage. He had been in every battle of the war. After having begun under General Grant, with the Illinois volunteers, he had fought at Paducah, at Belmont, at Pittsburg Landing, at the siege of Corinth, at Port Gibson, at the Black River, at Chattanooga, at the Wilderness, upon the Potomac, everywhere with bravery, a soldier worthy of the General who said “I never counted my dead.” And a hundred times Cyrus Smith would have been among the number of those whom the terrible Grant did not count; but in these combats, though he never spared himself, fortune always favored him, until the time he was wounded and taken prisoner at the siege of Richmond.
Cyrus Smith was the embodiment of courage. He had fought in every battle of the war. Starting under General Grant with the Illinois volunteers, he participated in battles at Paducah, Belmont, Pittsburg Landing, the siege of Corinth, Port Gibson, the Black River, Chattanooga, the Wilderness, and along the Potomac, always displaying bravery, a soldier deserving of the General who said, “I never counted my dead.” Hundreds of times, Cyrus Smith could have been among those the formidable Grant didn’t count; yet in these fights, even though he never held back, luck always smiled on him, until he was wounded and captured during the siege of Richmond.
At the same time with Cyrus Smith another important personage fell into the power of the Southerners. This was no other than the honorable Gideon Spilett, reporter to the New York Herald, who had been detailed to follow the fortunes of the war with the armies of the North.
At the same time as Cyrus Smith, another significant figure came into the hands of the Southerners. This was none other than the honorable Gideon Spilett, a reporter for the New York Herald, who had been assigned to cover the war with the Northern armies.
Gideon Spilett was of the race of astonishing chroniclers, English or American, such as Stanley and the like, who shrink from nothing in their endeavor to obtain exact information and to transmit it to their journal in the quickest manner. The journals of the United States, such as the New York Herald, are true powers, and their delegates are persons of importance. Gideon Spilett belonged in the first rank of these representatives.
Gideon Spilett was one of those incredible journalists, whether English or American, like Stanley and others, who stop at nothing to get accurate information and share it with their paper as quickly as possible. The newspapers in the United States, like the New York Herald, are real forces, and their representatives hold significant status. Gideon Spilett was at the top tier of these representatives.
A man of great merit; energetic, prompt, and ready; full of ideas, having been all over the world; soldier and artist; vehement in council; resolute in action; thinking nothing of pain, fatigue, or danger when seeking information, first for himself and afterwards for his journal; a master of recondite information of the unpublished, the unknown, the impossible. He was one of those cool observers who write amid the cannon balls, “reporting” under the bullets, and to whom all perils are welcome.
A man of great value; energetic, prompt, and ready; full of ideas, having traveled all over the world; a soldier and an artist; intense in discussions; determined in action; not afraid of pain, fatigue, or danger when searching for information, first for himself and later for his journal; a master of obscure knowledge, the unpublished, the unknown, the impossible. He was one of those calm observers who write amidst the chaos, “reporting” under fire, and to whom all dangers are welcome.
He also had been in all the battles, in the front rank, revolver in one hand and notebook in the other, his pencil never trembling in the midst of a cannonade. He did not tire the wires by incessant telegraphing, like those who speak when they have nothing to say, but each of his messages was short, condensed, clear, and to the purpose. For the rest, he did not lack humor. It was he who, after the affair of Black river, wishing at any price to keep his place at the telegraph wicket in order to announce the result, kept telegraphing for two hours the first chapters of the Bible. It cost the New York Herald $2,000, but the New York Herald had the first news.
He had also been in all the battles, at the front line, revolver in one hand and notebook in the other, his pencil steady amidst the cannon fire. He didn't overload the wires with constant telegraphing, like those who ramble on without much to say; each of his messages was short, concise, clear, and straight to the point. Besides that, he had a sense of humor. After the incident at Black River, eager to hold onto his spot at the telegraph station to report the outcome, he spent two hours telegraphing the first chapters of the Bible. It cost the New York Herald $2,000, but the New York Herald got the news first.
Gideon Spilett was tall. He was forty years old or more. Sandy-colored whiskers encircled his face. His eye was clear, lively, and quick moving. It was the eye of a man who was accustomed to take in everything at a glance. Strongly built, he was tempered by all climates as a bar of steel is tempered by cold water. For ten years Gideon Spilett had been connected with the New York Herald, which he had enriched with his notes and his drawings, as he wielded the pencil as well as the pen. When captured he was about making a description and a sketch of the battle. The last words written in his note-book were these:—“A Southerner is aiming at me and—.” And Gideon Spilett was missed; so, following his invariable custom, he escaped unscratched.
Gideon Spilett was tall and probably over forty. Sandy-colored facial hair framed his face. His eye was clear, lively, and quick-moving. It was the gaze of a man who could take in everything at a glance. Strongly built, he had been toughened by all types of weather, like steel tempered by cold water. For ten years, Gideon Spilett had worked with the New York Herald, where he contributed both notes and drawings, mastering both pencil and pen. When he was captured, he was in the middle of writing a description and sketching the battle. The last thing he wrote in his notebook was: “A Southerner is aiming at me and—.” And Gideon Spilett was missed; as usual, he managed to escape without a scratch.
Cyrus Smith and Gideon Spilett, who knew each other only by reputation, were both taken to Richmond. The engineer recovered rapidly from his wound, and it was during his convalescence he met the reporter. The two soon learned to appreciate each-other. Soon their one aim was to rejoin the army of Grant and fight again in the ranks for the preservation of the Union.
Cyrus Smith and Gideon Spilett, who only knew each other by their reputations, were both taken to Richmond. The engineer quickly recovered from his injury, and it was during his recovery that he met the reporter. The two soon came to appreciate one another. Before long, their shared goal became rejoining Grant's army and fighting again to preserve the Union.
The two Americans had decided to avail themselves of any chance; but although free to go and come within the city, Richmond was so closely guarded that an escape might be deemed impossible.
The two Americans had decided to take advantage of any opportunity; however, even though they were free to come and go within the city, Richmond was so heavily guarded that escaping seemed impossible.
During this time Cyrus Smith was rejoined by a devoted servant. This man was a negro, born upon the engineer’s estate, of slave parents, whom Smith, an abolitionist by conviction, had long since freed. The negro, though free, had no desire to leave his master, for whom he would have given his life. He was a man of thirty years, vigorous, agile, adroit, intelligent, quick, and self-possessed, sometimes ingenuous always smiling, ready and honest. He was named Nebuchadnezzar, but he answered to the nickname of Neb.
During this time, Cyrus Smith was joined again by a loyal servant. This man was a Black man, born on the engineer’s estate to enslaved parents, whom Smith, an abolitionist at heart, had freed long ago. Although he was free, the man had no desire to leave his master, for whom he would have given his life. He was thirty years old, strong, agile, skilled, intelligent, quick-witted, and composed, sometimes naive but always smiling, willing, and honest. His name was Nebuchadnezzar, but he went by the nickname Neb.
When Neb learned that his master had been taken prisoner he left Massachusetts without waiting a moment, arrived before Richmond, and, by a ruse, after having risked his life twenty times, he was able to get within the besieged city. The pleasure of Cyrus Smith on seeing again his servant, and the joy of Neb in finding his master, cannot be expressed. But while he had been able to get into Richmond it was much more difficult to get out, as the watch kept upon the Federal prisoners was very strict. It would require an extraordinary opportunity in order to attempt an escape with any chance of success; and that occasion not only did not present itself, but it was difficult to make. Meanwhile, Grant continued his energetic operations. The victory of Petersburg had been vigorously contested. His forces, reunited to those of Butler, had not as yet obtained any result before Richmond, and nothing indicated an early release to the prisoners. The reporter, whose tiresome captivity gave him no item worthy of note, grew impatient. He had but one idea; to get out of Richmond at any risk. Many times, indeed, he tried the experiment, and was stopped by obstacles insurmountable.
When Neb found out that his master had been captured, he left Massachusetts immediately, made his way to Richmond, and, through a clever trick, managed to enter the besieged city after risking his life multiple times. The joy Cyrus Smith felt upon seeing his servant again and Neb's happiness at reuniting with his master were beyond words. However, getting out of Richmond was much harder than getting in due to the strict guard on the Federal prisoners. It would take an extraordinary opportunity to attempt an escape with any chance of success, and that opportunity not only didn’t arise, but it was also hard to create. Meanwhile, Grant continued his strong operations. The fight for Petersburg had been fiercely contested. His forces, combined with Butler's, had not yet achieved any results in front of Richmond, and nothing suggested that the prisoners would be released anytime soon. The reporter, whose tedious captivity brought no news of note, grew restless. He was focused on one thing: escaping Richmond at any cost. He tried many times, but was continuously thwarted by insurmountable obstacles.
Meanwhile, the siege continued, and as the prisoners were anxious to escape in order to join the army of Grant, so there were certain of the besieged no less desirous to be free to join the army of the Secessionists; and among these was a certain Jonathan Forster, who was a violent Southerner. In truth, the Confederates were no more able to get out of the city than the Federal prisoners, as the army of Grant invested it around. The Mayor of Richmond had not for some time been able to communicate with General Lee, and it was of the highest importance to make the latter aware of the situation of the city, in order to hasten the march of the rescuing army. This Jonathan Forster had conceived the idea of passing over the lines of the besiegers in a balloon, and arriving by this means in the Confederate camp.
Meanwhile, the siege went on, and just as the prisoners were eager to escape to join Grant's army, there were some among the besieged who were equally desperate to break free and join the Confederate army; one of these was a man named Jonathan Forster, who was a staunch supporter of the South. In reality, the Confederates couldn't get out of the city any more than the Federal prisoners could, as Grant's army surrounded it. The Mayor of Richmond hadn't been able to get in touch with General Lee for some time, and it was crucial to inform him about the city's situation to speed up the arrival of the rescue army. Jonathan Forster came up with the idea of crossing the enemy lines in a balloon to reach the Confederate camp.
The Mayor authorized the undertaking, a balloon was made and placed at the disposal of Forster and five of his companions. They were provided with arms as they might have to defend themselves in descending, and food in case their aerial voyage should be prolonged. The departure of the balloon had been fixed for the 18th of March. It was to start in the night, and with a moderate breeze from the northeast, the party expected to arrive at the quarters of General Lee in a few hours. But the wind from the northeast was not a mere breeze. On the morning of the 18th there was every symptom of a storm, and soon the tempest broke forth, making it necessary for Forster to defer his departure, as it was impossible to risk the balloon and those whom it would carry, to the fury of the elements.
The Mayor approved the mission, a balloon was created and made available for Forster and five of his companions. They were given weapons as they might need to defend themselves during their descent, and food in case their flight took longer than expected. The launch of the balloon was scheduled for March 18th. It was set to depart at night, and with a light wind coming from the northeast, the group hoped to reach General Lee's location within a few hours. However, the northeastern wind turned out to be more than just a light breeze. On the morning of the 18th, there were clear signs of a storm, and soon the storm hit, forcing Forster to delay his departure, as it would be too dangerous to put the balloon and its passengers at the mercy of the raging elements.
The balloon, inflated in the great square of Richmond, was all ready, waiting for the first lull in the storm; and throughout the city there was great vexation at the settled bad weather. The night of the 19th and 20th passed, but in the morning the storm was only developed in intensity, and departure was impossible.
The balloon, blown up in the main square of Richmond, was all set, waiting for the first break in the storm; and there was a lot of frustration around the city due to the ongoing bad weather. The night of the 19th and 20th went by, but by morning the storm had only gotten stronger, making departure impossible.
On this day Cyrus Smith was accosted in one of the streets of Richmond by a man whom he did not know. It was a sailor named Pencroff, aged from thirty-five to forty years, strongly built, much sun-burnt, his eyes bright and glittering, but with a good countenance.
On this day, Cyrus Smith was approached in one of the streets of Richmond by a man he didn't recognize. It was a sailor named Pencroff, around thirty-five to forty years old, well-built, very sunburned, with bright, shining eyes and a friendly face.
This Pencroff was a Yankee who had sailed every sea, and who had experienced every kind of extraordinary adventure that a two-legged being without wings could encounter. It is needless to say that he was of an adventurous nature, ready to dare anything and to be astonished at nothing. Pencroff, in the early part of this year, had come to Richmond on business, having with him Herbert Brown, of New Jersey, a lad fifteen years old, the son of Pencroff’s captain, and an orphan whom he loved as his own child. Not having left the city at the beginning of the siege, he found himself, to his great displeasure, blocked. He also had but one idea: to get out. He knew the reputation of the engineer, and he knew with what impatience that determined man chaffed at his restraint. He did not therefore hesitate to address him without ceremony.
This Pencroff was a Yankee who had sailed every ocean and had gone through every kind of amazing adventure that a two-legged creature could have. It goes without saying that he had an adventurous spirit, always ready to take risks and never surprised by anything. Earlier this year, Pencroff had gone to Richmond on business, bringing along Herbert Brown from New Jersey, a fifteen-year-old boy, the son of Pencroff’s captain, and an orphan whom he cared for like his own child. Not having left the city at the start of the siege, he found himself, much to his annoyance, stuck there. He had only one goal: to escape. He knew the engineer's reputation and understood how easily that determined man grew impatient with his confinement. He didn't hesitate to speak to him directly.
“Mr. Smith, have you had enough of Richmond?”
“Mr. Smith, are you done with Richmond?”
The engineer looked fixedly at the man who spoke thus, and who added in a low voice:—
The engineer stared intently at the man who spoke like that and who added in a quiet voice:—
“Mr. Smith, do you want to escape?”
“Mr. Smith, do you want to get away?”
“How?” answered the engineer, quickly, and it was evidently an inconsiderate reply, for he had not yet examined the man who spoke.
“How?” replied the engineer quickly, and it was clearly a thoughtless response, as he had not yet looked at the man who was speaking.
“Mr. Smith, do you want to escape?”
“Mr. Smith, do you want to get away?”
““Who are you?” he demanded, in a cold voice.
“Who are you?” he asked, in a cold tone.
Pencroff made himself known.
Pencroff introduced himself.
“Sufficient,” replied Smith. “And by what means do you propose to escape?”
"Sufficient," replied Smith. "And how do you plan to escape?"
“By this idle balloon which is doing nothing, and seems to me all ready to take us!”—
“By this useless balloon that’s just sitting here, and looks like it’s all set to take us away!”—
The sailor had no need to finish his sentence. The engineer had understood all in a word. He seized Pencroff by the arm and hurried him to his house. There the sailor explained his project, which, in truth, was simple enough:—They risked only their lives in carrying it out. The storm was at its height, it is true; but a skilful and daring engineer like Smith would know well how to manage a balloon. He, himself, would not have hesitated to have started, had he known how—with Herbert, of course. He had seen many storms and he thought nothing of them.
The sailor didn’t need to finish his sentence. The engineer understood everything with a single word. He grabbed Pencroff by the arm and rushed him to his house. There, the sailor explained his plan, which was really quite simple: they were only risking their lives to carry it out. The storm was at its peak, it’s true; but a skilled and brave engineer like Smith would know how to handle a balloon. He himself wouldn’t have hesitated to go for it, if he had known how—with Herbert, of course. He had seen many storms before and didn’t think much of them.
Cyrus Smith listened to the sailor without saying a word, but with glistening eyes. This was the opportunity, and he was not the man to let it escape him. The project was very dangerous, but it could be accomplished. During the night, in spite of the guards, they might reach the balloon, creep into the basket, and then cut the lines which held it! Certainly they risked being shot, but on the other hand they might succeed, and but for this tempest—but without this tempest the balloon would have been gone and the long-sought opportunity would not have been present.
Cyrus Smith listened to the sailor in silence, his eyes shining with excitement. This was the moment he couldn’t let slip away. The plan was risky, but it was doable. During the night, despite the guards, they could make their way to the balloon, sneak into the basket, and then cut the ropes that held it down! Sure, they risked getting shot, but on the flip side, they might actually succeed, and if it weren’t for this storm—well, without this storm, the balloon would already be gone and this long-awaited chance wouldn’t even be here.
“I am not alone,” said Smith at length.
“I’m not alone,” Smith finally said.
“How many would you want to take?” demanded the sailor.
“How many do you want to take?” asked the sailor.
“Two; my friend Spilett, and my man Neb.”
“Two: my friend Spilett and my man Neb.”
“That would be three,” replied Pencroff; “and, with Herbert and myself, five. Well, the balloon can carry six?”
"That makes three," replied Pencroff. "And with Herbert and me, that's five. So, the balloon can carry six, right?"
“Very well. We will go!” said the engineer.
“Alright. Let's go!” said the engineer.
This “we” pledged the reporter, who was not a man to retreat, and who, when the project was told him, approved of it heartily. What astonished him was, that so simple a plan had not already occurred to himself. As to Neb, he followed his master wherever his master wanted to go.
This "we" promised the reporter, who was not someone to back down, and who, when the project was presented to him, fully supported it. What surprised him was that such a simple plan hadn't come to him before. As for Neb, he accompanied his master wherever his master wanted to go.
“To-night, then,” said Pencroff.
“Tonight, then,” said Pencroff.
“To-night, at ten o’clock,” replied Smith; “and pray heaven that this storm does not abate before we get off.”
“To-night, at ten o’clock,” replied Smith; “and hopefully this storm doesn’t let up before we leave.”
Pencroff took leave of the engineer, and returned to his lodging, where he found young Herbert Brown. This brave boy knew the plans of the sailor, and he was not without a certain anxiety as to the result of the proposal to the engineer. We see, therefore, five persons determined to throw themselves into the vortex of the storm.
Pencroff said goodbye to the engineer and went back to his place, where he found young Herbert Brown. This brave boy was aware of the sailor's plans and felt a bit anxious about the outcome of the proposal to the engineer. So, we see five people ready to dive into the chaos of the storm.
The storm did not abate. And neither Jonathan Forster nor his companion dreamed of confronting it in that frail basket. The journey would be terrible. The engineer feared but one thing; that the balloon, held to the ground and beaten down under the wind, would be torn into a thousand pieces. During many hours he wandered about the nearly deserted square, watching the apparatus. Pencroff, his hands in his pockets, yawning like a man who is unable to kill time, did the same; but in reality he also feared that the balloon would be torn to pieces, or break from its moorings and be carried off.
The storm didn’t let up. Neither Jonathan Forster nor his friend thought about facing it in that flimsy basket. The trip would be brutal. The engineer was afraid of one thing: that the balloon, held down and battered by the wind, would be ripped into a thousand pieces. For hours, he wandered around the nearly empty square, keeping an eye on the equipment. Pencroff, hands in his pockets and yawning like someone who can’t pass the time, did the same; but deep down, he also worried that the balloon would get torn apart or break free and be swept away.
Evening arrived and the night closed in dark and threatening. Thick masses of fog passed like clouds low down over the earth. Rain mingled with snow fell. The weather was cold. A sort of mist enveloped Richmond. It seemed as if in the face of this terrible tempest a truce had been agreed upon between the besiegers and besieged, and the cannon were silent before the heavy detonations of the storm. The streets of the city were deserted; it had not even seemed necessary, in such weather, to guard the square in which swung the balloon. Everything favored the departure of the prisoners; but this voyage, in the midst of the excited elements!—
Evening came, and the night settled in dark and ominous. Thick fog rolled in like low clouds drifting across the ground. Rain mixed with snow fell. The weather was chilly. A sort of mist cloaked Richmond. It felt as if, in the face of this fierce storm, a truce had been called between the attackers and defenders, and the cannons were silent in front of the booming thunder. The city streets were empty; it didn’t even seem necessary to guard the square where the balloon swung. Everything pointed towards the prisoners leaving; but this journey, amidst such wild weather!—
“Bad weather,” said Pencroff, holding his hat, which the wind was trying to take off, firmly to his head, “but pshaw, it can’t last, all the same.”
“Bad weather,” said Pencroff, holding his hat, which the wind was trying to blow away, firmly on his head, “but come on, it can't last forever.”
At half-past 9, Cyrus Smith and his companions glided by different routes to the square, which the gas lights, extinguished by the wind, left in profound darkness. They could not see even the huge balloon, as it lay pressed over against the ground. Beside the bags of ballast which held the cords of the net, the basket was held down by a strong cable passed through a ring fastened in the pavement, and the ends brought back on board.
At 9:30, Cyrus Smith and his friends made their way to the square through different paths, which the gas lights, blown out by the wind, left in total darkness. They couldn’t even see the massive balloon, as it lay flattened against the ground. Next to the bags of ballast that secured the net’s cords, the basket was anchored by a sturdy cable threaded through a ring embedded in the pavement, with the ends tied back on board.
The five prisoners came together at the basket. They had not been discovered, and such was the darkness that they could not see each other. Without saying a word, four of them took their places in the basket, while Pencroff, under the direction of the engineer, unfastened successively the bundles of ballast. It took but a few moments, and then the sailor joined his companions. The only thing that then held the balloon was the loop of the cable, and Cyrus Smith had but to give the word for them to let it slip. At that moment, a dog leaped with a bound into the basket. It was Top, the dog of the engineer, who, having broken his chain, had followed his master. Cyrus Smith, fearing to add to the weight, wanted to send the poor brute back, but Pencroff said, “Pshaw, it is but one more!” and at the same time threw overboard two bags of sand. Then, slipping the cable, the balloon, shooting off in an oblique direction, disappeared, after having dashed its basket against two chimneys, which it demolished in its rush.
The five prisoners gathered at the basket. They hadn’t been found, and it was so dark that they couldn’t see each other. Without a word, four of them took their places in the basket, while Pencroff, following the engineer’s instructions, gradually unfastened the bundles of ballast. It only took a moment, and then the sailor joined his friends. The only thing keeping the balloon in place was the loop of the cable, and Cyrus Smith just had to say the word for them to let it go. At that moment, a dog jumped into the basket. It was Top, the engineer's dog, who had broken free from his chain and followed his master. Cyrus Smith, worried about adding weight, wanted to send the poor dog back, but Pencroff said, “Oh, come on, it’s just one more!” and at the same time tossed two bags of sand overboard. Then, releasing the cable, the balloon shot off at an angle and disappeared after crashing its basket into two chimneys, which it destroyed in its path.
Then the storm burst upon them with frightful violence. The engineer did not dare to descend during the night, and when day dawned all sight of the earth was hidden by the mists. It was not until five days later that the breaking of the clouds enabled them to see the vast sea extending below them, lashed by the wind into a terrific fury.
Then the storm hit them with terrifying force. The engineer didn't dare to go down during the night, and when morning came, all view of the ground was covered by the mist. It wasn't until five days later that the clouds finally cleared enough for them to see the enormous sea below, whipped into a wild rage by the wind.
We have seen how, of these five men, who started on the 20th of March, four were thrown, four days later, on a desert coast, more than 6,000 miles from this country. And the one who was missing, the one to whose rescue the four survivors had hurried was their leader, Cyrus Smith.
We have seen how, out of these five men who set off on March 20th, four were cast onto a deserted coast four days later, over 6,000 miles from this country. And the missing one, the one the four survivors rushed to save, was their leader, Cyrus Smith.
[The 5th of April, Richmond fell into the hands of Grant, the Rebellion was repressed, Lee retreated into the West (sic) and the cause of the Union triumphed.]
[On April 5th, Richmond fell to Grant, the Rebellion was crushed, Lee retreated to the West (sic), and the Union's cause prevailed.]
CHAPTER III.
FIVE O’CLOCK IN THE AFTERNOON—THE LOST ONE—THE DESPAIR OF NEB—SEARCH TO THE NORTHWARD—THE ISLAND—A NIGHT OF ANGUISH—THE FOG OF THE MORNING—NEB SWIMMING—SIGHT OF THE LAND—FORDING THE CHANNEL.
FIVE O’CLOCK IN THE AFTERNOON—THE LOST ONE—THE DESPAIR OF NEB—SEARCH TO THE NORTH—THE ISLAND—A NIGHT OF ANGUISH—THE MORNING FOG—NEB SWIMMING—SIGHT OF THE LAND—FORGING THE CHANNEL.
The engineer, on the giving way of the net, had been swept away by a wave. His dog had disappeared at the same time. The faithful animal had of its own accord sprung to the rescue of its master.
The engineer, when the net gave way, was swept away by a wave. His dog disappeared at the same moment. The loyal animal had jumped in on its own to rescue its master.
“Forward!” cried the reporter, and all four, forgetting weakness and fatigue, began their search. Poor Neb wept with grief and despair at the thought of having lost all that he loved in the world.
“Forward!” shouted the reporter, and all four, pushing aside their weakness and exhaustion, started their search. Poor Neb cried with grief and despair at the thought of having lost everything he loved in the world.
Not more than two minutes had passed between the moment that Smith had disappeared, and the instant of his companions landing. They were, therefore, hopeful of being in time to rescue him.
Not more than two minutes had passed between the moment Smith had disappeared and the instant his companions landed. They were, therefore, hopeful of being in time to rescue him.
“Hunt, hunt for him,” cried Neb.
“Hunt, hunt for him,” shouted Neb.
“Yes, Neb, and we will find him,” replied Spilett.
“Yes, Neb, and we’ll find him,” replied Spilett.
“Alive?”
"Are you alive?"
“Alive!”
“Alive!”
“Can he swim?” demanded Pencroff.
“Can he swim?” Pencroff asked.
“Oh, yes,” responded Neb. “And, besides, Top is with him—”
“Oh, yes,” replied Neb. “And besides, Top is with him—”
The sailor, looking at the roaring sea, shook his head.
The sailor, staring at the crashing waves, shook his head.
It was at a point northward from this shore, and about half a mile from the place where the castaways had landed, that the engineer had disappeared, and if he had come ashore at the nearest point it was at least that distance from where they now were.
It was at a spot north of this shore, about half a mile from where the castaways had landed, that the engineer had vanished, and if he had come ashore at the closest point, it was at least that far from where they currently were.
It was nearly 6 o’clock. The fog had risen and made the night very dark. The castaways followed northward along the shore of that land upon which chance had thrown them. A land unknown, whose geographical situation they could not guess. They walked upon a sandy soil, mixed with stones, seemingly destitute of any kind of vegetation. The ground, very uneven, seemed in certain places to be riddled with small holes, making the march very painful. From these holes, great, heavy-flying birds rushed forth, and were lost in the darkness. Others, more active, rose in flocks, and fled away like the clouds. The sailor thought he recognized gulls and sea-mews, whose sharp cries were audible above the raging of the sea.
It was almost 6 o’clock. The fog had lifted and made the night very dark. The castaways headed north along the shore of the land where fate had brought them. It was an unfamiliar place, and they couldn’t pinpoint its location. They walked on sandy ground mixed with stones, which seemed completely barren of any vegetation. The terrain was quite uneven, with small holes in certain spots, making their journey very painful. From these holes, large, heavy birds flew out into the darkness. Others, more agile, took off in flocks and disappeared like clouds. The sailor thought he recognized gulls and seagulls, their sharp cries audible above the roar of the sea.
From time to time the castaways would stop and call, listening for an answering voice from the ocean. They thought, too, that if they were near the place where the engineer had been, washed ashore, and he had been unable to make any response, that, at least, the barking of the dog Top would have been heard. But no sound was distinguishable above the roaring of the waves and the thud of the surf. Then the little party would resume their march, searching all the windings of the shore.
From time to time, the castaways would stop and call out, listening for a voice in response from the ocean. They also thought that if they were close to where the engineer had washed ashore, he would have made some noise, and at the very least, they would have heard the barking of the dog, Top. But no sound could be heard above the crashing of the waves and the thud of the surf. Then the small group would continue their trek, searching every bend of the shore.
After a walk of twenty minutes the four castaways were suddenly stopped by a foaming line of breakers. They found themselves upon the extremity of a sharp point upon which the sea broke with fury.
After a twenty-minute walk, the four castaways were suddenly halted by a line of crashing waves. They had reached the tip of a sharp point where the sea surged with intensity.
“This is a promontory,” said the sailor, “and it will be necessary to turn back, keeping to the right in order to gain the main land.”
“This is a cliff,” said the sailor, “and we need to turn back, sticking to the right to reach the mainland.”
“But if he is there!” cried Neb, pointing towards the ocean, whose enormous waves showed white through the gloom.
“But what if he is out there!” Neb shouted, pointing towards the ocean, where the huge waves glimmered white through the darkness.
“Well, let us call again.”
"Well, let's call again."
And all together, uniting their voices, uttered a vigorous cry, but without response. They waited for a lull, and tried once more. And again there was no answer.
And all together, raising their voices, let out a strong shout, but there was no response. They paused for a moment and tried again. And once more, there was no answer.
Then the castaways turned back, following the opposite side of the promontory over ground equally sandy and rocky. However, Pencroff observed that the shore was bolder, that the land rose somewhat, and he thought that it might gradually slope up to the high hill which was dimly visible through the darkness. The birds were less numerous on this shore. The sea also seemed less surging and tempestuous, and it was noticeable that the agitation of the waves was subsiding. They hardly heard the sound of the surf, and doubtless, this side of the promontory formed a semi-circular bay, protected by its sharp point from the long roll of the sea.
Then the castaways turned back, following the other side of the promontory over ground that was equally sandy and rocky. However, Pencroff noticed that the shore was steeper, the land rose a bit, and he thought it might gradually slope up to the high hill that was faintly visible in the darkness. There were fewer birds on this shore. The sea also seemed calmer and less violent, and it was clear that the agitation of the waves was dying down. They could barely hear the sound of the surf, and surely, this side of the promontory formed a semi-circular bay, shielded by its sharp point from the long swell of the sea.
But by following this direction they were walking towards the south, which was going away from that place where Smith would have landed. After a tramp of a mile and a half, the shore presented no other curve which would permit of a return towards the north. It was evident that this promontory, the point of which they had turned, must be joined to the mainland. The castaways, although much fatigued, pushed on courageously, hoping each moment to find a sudden turn which would take them in the desired direction. What, then, was their disappointment when, after having walked nearly two miles, they found themselves again arrested by the sea, upon a high promontory of slippery rocks.
But by following this path, they were heading south, away from the spot where Smith would have landed. After walking about a mile and a half, the shore showed no other bend that would allow them to turn back north. It was clear that this promontory they had passed must be connected to the mainland. The castaways, despite being very tired, pressed on bravely, hoping at any moment to find a sudden turn that would lead them in the right direction. What a disappointment it was, then, when after nearly two miles of walking, they found themselves stopped by the sea again, on a high promontory of slippery rocks.
“We are on an island,” exclaimed Pencroff; “and we have measured it from end to end!”
“We're on an island,” Pencroff exclaimed; “and we've measured it from one end to the other!”
The words of the sailor were true. The castaways had been thrown, not upon a continent, but upon an island not more than two miles long, and of inconsiderable breadth.
The sailor's words were accurate. The castaways had landed, not on a continent, but on an island that was no more than two miles long and quite narrow.
This desert isle, covered with stones, without vegetation, desolate refuge of sea-birds, did it belong to a more important archipelago? They could not tell. The party in the balloon, when from their basket they saw the land through the clouds, had not been able to determine its size. But Pencroff, with the eyes of a sailor accustomed to piercing the gloom, thought, at the moment, that he could distinguish in the west confused masses, resembling a high coast. But at this time they were unable, on account of the obscurity, to determine to what system, whether simple or complex, their isle belonged. They were unable to get off, as the sea surrounded them, and it was necessary to wait until the next day to search for the engineer; who, alas! had made no cry to signal his presence.
This deserted island, covered in stones and devoid of vegetation, a desolate refuge for seabirds, did it belong to a more significant archipelago? They couldn’t say. The group in the balloon, when they looked down from their basket and saw the land through the clouds, hadn’t been able to figure out its size. But Pencroff, with the sharp eyes of a sailor used to seeing through the darkness, thought he could make out in the west some indistinct shapes that looked like a high coastline. At that moment, they were unable to determine what larger system, whether simple or complex, their island belonged to due to the obscurity. They couldn’t leave, as the sea surrounded them, and they had to wait until the next day to search for the engineer, who, unfortunately, hadn’t called out to signal his presence.
“The silence of Cyrus proves nothing,” said the reporter. “He may have fainted, or be wounded, and unable to reply, but we will not despair.”
“The silence of Cyrus proves nothing,” the reporter said. “He might have fainted or be hurt and unable to respond, but we won’t lose hope.”
The reporter then suggested the idea of lighting a fire upon the point of the island, which would serve as a signal for the engineer. But they searched in vain for wood or dry branches. Sand and stones were all they found.
The reporter then proposed lighting a fire at the point of the island, which would act as a signal for the engineer. However, they looked in vain for wood or dry branches. All they found were sand and stones.
One can understand the grief of Neb and his companions, who were strongly attached to their brave comrade. It was too evident that they could not help him now, and that they must wait till day. The engineer had escaped, and was already safe upon the land, or he was lost forever. The hours were long and dreadful, the cold was intense, and the castaways suffered keenly, but they did not realize it. They did not think of sleep. Thinking only of their chief, hoping, wishing to hope, they moved back and forth upon that arid island, constantly returning to the northern end, where they would be closest to the place of the catastrophe. They listened, they shouted, they tried to catch some call, and, as a lull would come, or the roar of the surf fall with the waves, their hallooes must have sounded far into the distance.
One can understand the grief of Neb and his friends, who were deeply attached to their brave comrade. It was clear that they couldn’t help him now and had to wait until morning. The engineer had either escaped and was safe on land or was gone forever. The hours felt long and terrible, the cold was biting, and the survivors were in great pain, but they didn’t fully realize it. They didn’t think about sleeping. Focused only on their leader, hoping and wishing to hold onto hope, they paced back and forth on that barren island, constantly returning to the northern end, where they would be closest to the site of the disaster. They listened, shouted, and tried to catch any call, and whenever there was a lull or the sound of the waves subsided, their calls must have echoed far into the distance.
Once the cry of Neb was answered by an echo; and Herbert made Pencroff notice it, saying:—“That proves that there is land not far to the west.”
Once Neb's cry was answered by an echo, and Herbert pointed it out to Pencroff, saying:—“That shows there’s land not too far to the west.”
The sailor nodded; he knew his eyes could not deceive him. He thought he had seen land, and it must be there. But this distant echo was the only answer to the cries of Neb, and the silence about the island remained unbroken. Meanwhile the sky was clearing slowly. Towards midnight, some stars shone out, and, had the engineer been there with his companions, he would have noticed that these stars did not belong to the northern hemisphere. The pole star was not visible in this new horizon, the constellations in the zenith were not such as they had been accustomed to see from North America, and the Southern Cross shone resplendent in the heavens.
The sailor nodded; he knew his eyes couldn't be misleading. He thought he had spotted land, and it had to be there. But this distant echo was the only response to Neb's cries, and the silence around the island remained unbroken. Meanwhile, the sky was slowly clearing. By midnight, a few stars appeared, and if the engineer had been there with his companions, he would have noticed that these stars didn't belong to the northern hemisphere. The North Star was not visible on this new horizon, the constellations overhead weren't what they were used to seeing from North America, and the Southern Cross shone brightly in the sky.
The night passed; and towards 5 o’clock in the morning the middle heavens began to brighten, though the horizon remained obscure; until with the first rays of day, a fog rose from the sea, so dense that the eye could scarcely penetrate twenty paces into its depths, and separated into great, heavy-moving masses. This was unfortunate, as the castaways were unable to distinguish anything about them. While the gaze of Neb and the reporter was directed towards the sea, the sailor and Herbert searched for the land in the west; but they could see nothing.
The night went by, and around 5 o'clock in the morning, the sky started to lighten, even though the horizon stayed dark. Then, with the first light of day, a thick fog rose from the sea, so dense that you could hardly see more than twenty paces into it, breaking up into large, heavy-moving clumps. This was unfortunate because the castaways couldn't make out anything around them. While Neb and the reporter looked out at the sea, the sailor and Herbert searched for land in the west, but they saw nothing.
“Never mind,” said Pencroff, “if I do not see the land. I feel that it is there,—just as sure as that we are not in Richmond.”
“Don’t worry,” said Pencroff, “even if I can’t see the land. I know it’s there—just as sure as we’re not in Richmond.”
But the fog, which was nothing more than a morning mist, soon rose. A clear sun warmed the upper air, its heat penetrating to the surface of the island. At half-past 6, three quarters of an hour after sunrise, the mist was nearly gone. Though still thick overhead, it dissolved, below, and soon all the island appeared, as from a cloud. Then the sea appeared, limitless towards the east, but bounded on the west by a high and abrupt coast.
But the fog, just a morning mist, quickly lifted. A bright sun warmed the upper air, its heat reaching the island's surface. By 6:30, about 45 minutes after sunrise, the mist was nearly gone. Although it was still thick above, it cleared below, and soon the entire island emerged as if from a cloud. Then the sea came into view, endless to the east but bordered on the west by a steep and rugged coastline.
Yes, the land was there! There, safety was at least provisionally assured. The island and the main land were separated by a channel half a mile wide, through which rushed a strong current. Into this current one of the party, without saying a word or consulting with his companions, precipitated himself. It was Neb. He was anxious to be upon that coast and to be pushing forward towards the north. No one could keep him back. Pencroff called to him in vain. The reporter prepared to follow, but the sailor ran to him, exclaiming:—
Yes, the land was there! There, safety was at least temporarily guaranteed. The island and the mainland were separated by a channel half a mile wide, through which a strong current flowed. Into this current, one of the group, without saying a word or consulting his companions, threw himself in. It was Neb. He was eager to get to that shore and to move north. No one could stop him. Pencroff called out to him in vain. The reporter got ready to follow, but the sailor rushed over to him, exclaiming:—
“Are you determined to cross this channel?”
“Are you set on crossing this channel?”
“I am,” replied Spilett.
"I am," Spilett replied.
“Well, then, listen to me a moment. Neb can rescue his master alone. If we throw ourselves into the channel we are in danger of being carried out to sea by this strong current. Now, if I am not mistaken it is caused by the ebb. You see the tide is going out. Have patience until low water and then we may ford it.”
“Well, listen to me for a moment. Neb can rescue his master on his own. If we jump into the water, we risk being swept out to sea by this strong current. Now, if I’m not wrong, it’s caused by the tide receding. You see, the tide is going out. Let’s wait until low tide, and then we can cross.”
“You are right,” answered the reporter; “we will keep together as much as possible.”
“You're right,” the reporter replied; “we'll stick together as much as we can.”
Meantime, Neb was swimming vigorously in a diagonal direction, against the current; his black shoulders were seen rising with each stroke. He was drawn backward with swiftness, but he was gaining towards the other shore. It took him more than half an hour to cross the half mile which separated the isle from the mainland, and when he reached the other side it was at a place a long distance from the point opposite to that which he had left.
Meanwhile, Neb was swimming hard in a diagonal direction, fighting against the current; his dark shoulders were visible rising with each stroke. He was being pulled back quickly, but he was making progress toward the other shore. It took him over half an hour to cross the half mile that separated the island from the mainland, and when he finally reached the other side, it was far from the spot directly across from where he had started.
Neb, having landed at the base of a high rocky wall, clambered quickly up its side, and, running, disappeared behind a point projecting into the sea, about the same height as the northern end of the island.
Neb, having landed at the foot of a steep rocky wall, quickly climbed up its side and, running, vanished behind a point jutting out into the sea, about the same height as the northern tip of the island.
Neb’s companions had watched with anxiety his daring attempt, and, when he was out of sight, they fixed their eyes upon that land from which they were going to demand refuge. They ate some of the shellfish which they found upon the sands; it was a poor meal, but then it was better than nothing.
Neb’s friends watched nervously as he made his bold move, and when he disappeared from view, they focused their gaze on the land from which they hoped to seek shelter. They ate some of the shellfish they found on the shore; it was a meager meal, but better than nothing.
The opposite coast formed an immense bay, terminated to the south by a sharp point bare of all vegetation, and having a most forbidding aspect. This point at its junction with the shore was abutted by high granite rocks. Towards the north, on the contrary, the bay widened, with a shore more rounded, extending from the southwest to the northeast, and ending in a narrow cape. Between these two points, the distance must have been about eight miles. A half mile from the shore the island, like an enormous whale, lay upon the sea. Its width could not have been greater than a quarter of a mile.
The opposite coast created a huge bay, ending to the south at a sharp point with no vegetation, which looked very uninviting. At the spot where this point met the shore, there were tall granite rocks. In contrast, to the north, the bay expanded, with a more rounded shore stretching from the southwest to the northeast, finishing in a narrow cape. The distance between these two points was about eight miles. Half a mile from the shore, the island lay on the sea like a massive whale, and its width was no more than a quarter of a mile.
Before the Island, the shore began with a sandy beach strewn with black rocks, at this moment beginning to appear above the receding tide. Beyond this rose, like a curtain, a perpendicular granite wall, at least 300 feet high and terminated by a ragged edge. This extended for about three miles, ending abruptly on the right in a smooth face, as if cut by the hand of man. To the left on the contrary, above the promontory, this kind of irregular cliff, composed of heaped-up rocks and glistening in the light, sank and gradually mingled with the rocks of the southern point.
Before the Island, the shore started with a sandy beach scattered with black rocks, which were just beginning to show as the tide pulled back. Beyond this, a vertical granite wall rose like a curtain, reaching at least 300 feet high and ending in a jagged edge. This stretched for about three miles, abruptly ending on the right in a smooth face, as if it had been cut by a person's hand. On the left, however, above the promontory, was an irregular cliff made up of piled rocks, gleaming in the light, which sloped down and gradually blended with the rocks of the southern point.
Upon the upper level of the coast not a tree was visible. It was a table-land, as barren though not as extensive as that around Cape Town, or at the Cape of Good Hope. At least so it appeared from the islet. To the right, however, and back of the smooth face of rock, some verdure appeared. The confused massing of large trees was easily distinguishable extending far as the eye could reach. This verdure gladdened the sight tired by the rough face of granite. Finally, back of and above the plateau, distant towards the northwest about seven miles, shone a white summit, reflecting the sun’s rays. It was the snowy cap of some lofty mountain.
On the upper level of the coast, there wasn’t a single tree in sight. It was a flat area, barren but not as wide as the land around Cape Town or the Cape of Good Hope. At least, that’s how it looked from the small island. To the right, behind the smooth rock face, some greenery appeared. The jumbled group of large trees was easy to spot, stretching as far as the eye could see. This greenery was a welcome sight after the harsh granite landscape. Finally, behind and above the plateau, about seven miles to the northwest, there was a bright white peak shining in the sun. It was the snow-capped top of a tall mountain.
It was not possible at present to say whether this land was an island or part of a continent; but the sight of the broken rocks heaped together on the left would have proved to a geologist their volcanic origin, as they were incontestably the result of igneous action.
It’s hard to tell right now if this land is an island or a part of a continent; however, the view of the broken rocks piled up on the left would clearly indicate to a geologist that they originated from volcanic activity, as they were undoubtedly the result of igneous processes.
Gideon Spilett, Pencroff, and Herbert looked earnestly upon this land where they were to live, perhaps for long years; upon which, if out of the track of ships, they might have to die.
Gideon Spilett, Pencroff, and Herbert gazed intently at the land where they would live, possibly for many years; on this land, far from the path of ships, they might even have to face their deaths.
“Well,” demanded Herbert, “what do you think of it, Pencroff?”
“Okay,” asked Herbert, “what do you think about it, Pencroff?”
“Well,” replied the sailor, “there’s good and bad in it, as with everything else. But we shall soon see; for look; what I told you. In three hours we can cross, and once over there, we will see what we can do towards finding Mr. Smith.”
“Well,” replied the sailor, “there’s good and bad in it, just like everything else. But we’ll find out soon enough; look at what I told you. In three hours, we can get across, and once we’re over there, we’ll see what we can do to find Mr. Smith.”
Pencroff was not wrong in his predictions. Three hours later, at low tide, the greater part of the sandy bed of the channel was bare. A narrow strip of water, easily crossed, was all that separated the island from the shore. And at 10 o’clock, Spilett and his two companions, stripped of their clothing, which they carried in packages on their heads, waded through the water, which was nowhere more than five feet deep. Herbert, where the water was too deep, swam like a fish, acquitting himself well; and all arrived without difficulty at the other shore. There, having dried themselves in the sun, they put on their clothes, which had not touched the water, and took counsel together.
Pencroff was right about his predictions. Three hours later, at low tide, most of the sandy bottom of the channel was exposed. A narrow strip of water, which was easy to cross, was all that separated the island from the shore. At 10 o’clock, Spilett and his two companions, without their clothes—which they carried on their heads in bundles—waded through the water, which was no deeper than five feet. Herbert swam like a fish where the water was too deep, handling it well; and they all made it to the other shore without any problems. There, after drying off in the sun, they put on their clothes, which hadn’t gotten wet, and discussed their plans.
CHAPTER IV.
THE LITHODOMES—THE MOUTH OF THE RIVER—THE “CHIMNEYS”—CONTINUATION OF THE SEARCH—THE FOREST OF EVERGREENS—GETTING FIREWOOD—WAITING FOR THE TIDE—ON TOP OF THE CLIFF—THE TIMBER-FLOAT—THE RETURN TO THE COAST.
THE LITHODOMES—THE MOUTH OF THE RIVER—THE “CHIMNEYS”—CONTINUING THE SEARCH—THE EVERGREEN FOREST—COLLECTING FIREWOOD—WAITING FOR THE TIDE—ATOP THE CLIFF—THE LOG FLOAT—RETURNING TO THE COAST.
Presently the reporter told the sailor to wait just where he was until he should come back, and without losing a moment, he walked back along the coast in the direction which Neb had taken some hours before, and disappeared quickly around a turn in the shore.
Currently, the reporter told the sailor to wait right where he was until he came back. Without wasting any time, he walked back along the coast in the direction Neb had gone a few hours earlier and quickly disappeared around a bend in the shore.
Herbert wished to go with him.
Herbert wanted to go with him.
“Stay, my boy,” said the sailor. “We must pitch our camp for the night, and try to find something to eat more satisfying than shellfish. Our friends will need food when they come back.”
“Hold on, kid,” said the sailor. “We need to set up camp for the night and see if we can find something better to eat than shellfish. Our friends will be hungry when they return.”
“I am ready, Pencroff,” said Herbert.
"I'm ready, Pencroff," Herbert said.
“Good,” said the sailor. “Let us set to work methodically. We are tired, cold, and hungry: we need shelter, fire, and food. There is plenty of wood in the forest, and we can get eggs from the nests; but we must find a house.”
“Good,” said the sailor. “Let’s get to work systematically. We’re tired, cold, and hungry: we need shelter, fire, and food. There’s plenty of wood in the forest, and we can get eggs from the nests; but we need to find a house.”
“Well,” said Herbert, “I will look for a cave in these rocks, and I shall certainly find some hole in which we can stow ourselves.”
“Well,” said Herbert, “I’ll look for a cave in these rocks, and I’ll definitely find some spot where we can hide.”
“Right,” said Pencroff; “let us start at once.”
“Alright,” said Pencroff; “let’s go right away.”
They walked along the base of the rocky wall, on the strand left bare by the receding waves. But instead of going northwards, they turned to the south. Pencroff had noticed, some hundreds of feet below the place where they had been thrown ashore, a narrow inlet in the coast, which he thought might be the mouth of a river or of a brook. Now it was important to pitch the camp in the neighborhood of fresh water; in that part of the island, too, Smith might be found.
They walked along the base of the rocky wall, on the beach left bare by the receding waves. But instead of heading north, they turned south. Pencroff had noticed, several hundred feet below where they had landed, a narrow inlet in the coast, which he thought could be the mouth of a river or a stream. Now it was important to set up camp near fresh water; in that part of the island, they might also find Smith.
The rock rose 300 feet, smooth and massive. It was a sturdy wall of the hardest granite, never corroded by the waves, and even at its base there was no cleft which might serve as a temporary abode. About the summit hovered a host of aquatic birds, mainly of the web-footed tribe, with long, narrow, pointed beaks. Swift and noisy, they cared little for the unaccustomed presence of man. A shot into the midst of the flock would have brought down a dozen; but neither Pencroff nor Herbert had a gun. Besides, gulls and sea-mews are barely eatable, and their eggs have a very disagreeable flavor.
The rock rose 300 feet, smooth and massive. It was a solid wall of the hardest granite, never worn down by the waves, and even at its base, there was no crevice that could serve as a temporary shelter. Around the peak hovered a crowd of water birds, mostly from the web-footed group, with long, narrow, pointed beaks. Fast and loud, they paid little attention to the unexpected presence of humans. A shot into the middle of the flock would have taken down a dozen; but neither Pencroff nor Herbert had a gun. Plus, gulls and sea-mews are barely edible, and their eggs have a very unappealing taste.
Meanwhile Herbert, who was now to the left, soon noticed some rocks thickly strewn with sea weed, which would evidently be submerged again in a few hours. On them lay hosts of bivalves, not to be disdained by hungry men. Herbert called to Pencroff, who came running to him.
Meanwhile, Herbert, now on the left, quickly spotted some rocks covered in seaweed, which would clearly be underwater again in a few hours. On them rested plenty of bivalves, definitely not to be overlooked by hungry men. Herbert called out to Pencroff, who hurried over to him.
“Ah, they are mussels,” said the sailor. “Now we can spare the eggs.”
“Ah, those are mussels,” said the sailor. “Now we can save the eggs.”
“They are not mussels,” said Herbert, examining the mollusks carefully, “they are lithodomes.”
“They're not mussels,” Herbert said, closely inspecting the mollusks, “they're lithodomes.”
“Can we eat them?” said Pencroff.
“Can we eat them?” Pencroff asked.
“Certainly.”
"Sure."
“Then let us eat some lithodomes.”
“Then let’s eat some clams.”
The sailor could rely on Herbert, who was versed in Natural History and very fond of it. He owed his acquaintance with this study in great part to his father, who had entered him in the classes of the best professors in Boston, where the child’s industry and intelligence had endeared him to all.
The sailor could trust Herbert, who knew a lot about Natural History and was really passionate about it. He owed his knowledge of this field mostly to his father, who enrolled him in classes with the best professors in Boston, where the child’s hard work and smarts had made him a favorite among everyone.
These lithodomes were oblong shell-fish, adhering in clusters to the rocks. They belonged to that species of boring mollusk which can perforate a hole in the hardest stone, and whose shell has the peculiarity of being rounded at both ends.
These lithodomes were elongated shellfish, grouped together on the rocks. They were part of that species of boring mollusk that can drill a hole in the toughest stone, and their shell is unique in that it is rounded at both ends.
Pencroff and Herbert made a good meal of these lithodomes. which lay gaping in the sun. They tasted like oysters, with a peppery flavor which left no desire for condiments of any kind.
Pencroff and Herbert enjoyed a great meal of these lithodomes, which were lying open in the sun. They tasted like oysters, with a spicy flavor that made any condiments unnecessary.
Their hunger was allayed for the moment, but their thirst was increased by the spicy flavor of the mollusks. The thing now was to find fresh water, which was not likely to fail them in a region so undulating. Pencroff and Herbert, after having taken the precaution to fill their pockets and handkerchiefs with lithodomes, regained the foot of the hill.
Their hunger was satisfied for now, but their thirst grew due to the spicy flavor of the mollusks. The next task was to find fresh water, which shouldn’t be too hard to find in such a hilly area. Pencroff and Herbert, after making sure to fill their pockets and handkerchiefs with lithodomes, made their way back to the foot of the hill.
Two hundred feet further on they reached the inlet, through which, as Pencroff had surmised, a little river was flowing with full current Here the rocky wall seemed to have been torn asunder by some volcanic convulsion. At its base lay a little creek, running at an acute angle. The water in this place was 100 feet across, while the banks on either side were scarcely 20 feet broad. The river buried itself at once between the two walls of granite, which began to decline as one went up stream.
Two hundred feet further, they arrived at the inlet, through which, as Pencroff had guessed, a small river was flowing with a strong current. Here, the rocky wall appeared to have been split apart by some volcanic eruption. At its base, there was a small creek running at an angle. The water here was 100 feet wide, while the banks on either side were barely 20 feet wide. The river quickly sank between the two granite walls, which gradually sloped down as they moved upstream.
“Here is water,” said Pencroff, “and over there is wood. Well, Herbert, now we only want the house.”
“Here’s water,” said Pencroff, “and over there’s wood. Well, Herbert, now we just need the house.”
The river water was clear. The sailor knew that as the tide was now low there would be no influx from the sea, and the water would be fresh. When this important point had been settled, Herbert looked for some cave which might give them shelter, but it was in vain. Everywhere the wall was smooth, flat, and perpendicular.
The river water was clear. The sailor knew that since the tide was low, there wouldn’t be any inflow from the sea, and the water would be fresh. Once this important point was confirmed, Herbert looked for a cave that could provide them shelter, but it was in vain. Everywhere the wall was smooth, flat, and vertical.
However, over at the mouth of the watercourse, and above high-water mark, the detritus had formed, not a grotto, but a pile of enormous rocks, such as are often met with in granitic countries, and which are called Chimneys.
However, at the mouth of the waterway, and above the high-water mark, the debris had formed not a grotto, but a heap of huge rocks, like those commonly found in granitic regions, which are referred to as Chimneys.
Pencroff and Herbert went down between the rocks, into those sandy corridors, lighted only by the huge cracks between the masses of granite, some of which only kept their equilibrium by a miracle. But with the light the wind came in, and with the wind the piercing cold of the outer air. Still, the sailor thought that by stopping up some of these openings with a mixture of stones and sand, the Chimneys might be rendered habitable. Their plan resembled the typographical sign, &, and by cutting off the upper curve of the sign, through which the south and the west wind rushed in, they could succeed without doubt in utilizing its lower portion.
Pencroff and Herbert made their way between the rocks into the sandy passageways, illuminated only by the large gaps between the granite blocks, some of which were barely staying in place. However, with the light came the wind, and with the wind came the biting cold from outside. Still, the sailor believed that by sealing some of these openings with a mix of stones and sand, they could make the Chimneys livable. Their plan looked like the typographical symbol &, and by blocking off the upper curve of the symbol, which let the south and west winds in, they could likely manage to use the lower part effectively.
“This is just what we want,” said Pencroff, and if we ever see Mr. Smith again, he will know how to take advantage of this labyrinth.”
“This is exactly what we need,” said Pencroff, and if we ever see Mr. Smith again, he’ll know how to make the most of this maze.”
“We shall see him again, Pencroff,” said Herbert, “and when he comes back he must find here a home that is tolerably comfortable. We can make this so if we can build a fireplace in the left corridor with an opening for the smoke.”
“We'll see him again, Pencroff,” said Herbert, “and when he comes back, he should find a home here that’s reasonably comfortable. We can make that happen if we build a fireplace in the left corridor with a vent for the smoke.”
“That we can do, my boy,” answered the sailor, “and these Chimneys will just serve our purpose. But first we must get together some firing. Wood will be useful, too, in blocking up these great holes through which the wind whistles so shrilly.”
“That we can do, my boy,” replied the sailor, “and these chimneys will be perfect for what we need. But first, we have to gather some fuel. Wood will also be helpful for filling in these big gaps where the wind whistles so loudly.”
Herbert and Pencroff left the Chimneys, and turning the angle, walked up the left bank of the river, whose current was strong enough to bring down a quantity of dead wood. The return tide, which had already begun, would certainly carry it in the ebb to a great distance. “Why not utilize this flux and reflux,” thought the sailor, “in the carriage of heavy timber?”
Herbert and Pencroff left the Chimneys and turned the corner to walk up the left bank of the river, where the current was strong enough to carry away a lot of dead wood. The returning tide, which had already started, would definitely take it far away on the outgoing flow. “Why not make use of this incoming and outgoing tide,” the sailor thought, “to transport heavy timber?”
After a quarter of an hour’s walk, the two reached the elbow which the river made in turning to the left. From this point onward it flowed through a forest of magnificent trees, which had preserved their verdure in spite of the season; for they belonged to that great cone-bearing family indigenous everywhere, from the poles to the tropics. Especially conspicuous were the “deodara,” so numerous in the Himalayas, with their pungent perfume. Among them were clusters of pines, with tall trunks and spreading parasols of green. The ground was strewn with fallen branches, so dry as to crackle under their feet.
After a fifteen-minute walk, the two arrived at the bend where the river turned to the left. From this point on, it flowed through a forest of stunning trees that had kept their greenery despite the season; they were part of the great family of conifers found everywhere from the poles to the tropics. Most noticeable were the “deodara,” which are common in the Himalayas, with their strong fragrance. Among them were groups of pines with tall trunks and wide canopies of green. The ground was covered with fallen branches that were so dry they crackled under their feet.
“Good,” said the sailor, “I may not know the name of these trees, but I know they belong to the genus firewood, and that’s the main thing for us.”
“Good,” said the sailor, “I might not know what these trees are called, but I know they’re in the firewood category, and that’s what really matters for us.”
It was an easy matter to gather the firewood. They did not need even to strip the trees; plenty of dead branches lay at their feet. This dry wood would burn rapidly, and they would need a large supply. How could two men carry such a load to the Chimneys? Herbert asked the question.
It was simple to collect the firewood. They didn't even have to cut the trees; plenty of dead branches were right at their feet. This dry wood would catch fire quickly, and they would need a lot of it. How could two men carry such a load to the Chimneys? Herbert asked.
“My boy,” said the sailor, “there’s a way to do everything. If we had a car or a boat it would be too easy.”
“My boy,” said the sailor, “there’s a way to do everything. If we had a car or a boat, it would be too simple.”
“We have the river,” suggested Herbert.
“We have the river,” suggested Herbert.
“Exactly,” said Pencroff. “The river shall be our road and our carrier, too. Timber-floats were not invented for nothing.”
“Exactly,” said Pencroff. “The river will be our road and our transport, too. Timber floats weren’t invented for no reason.”
“But our carrier is going in the wrong direction,” said Herbert, “since the tide is coming up from the sea.”
“But our carrier is going the wrong way,” said Herbert, “since the tide is coming in from the sea.”
“We have only to wait for the turn of tide,” answered the sailor. “Let us get our float ready.”
“We just need to wait for the tide to turn,” replied the sailor. “Let’s get our float ready.”
They walked towards the river, each carrying a heavy load of wood tied up in fagots. On the bank, too, lay quantities of dead boughs, among grass which the foot of man had probably never pressed before. Pencroff began to get ready his float.
They walked toward the river, each carrying a heavy load of firewood bundled up in faggots. On the bank, there were also piles of dead branches, surrounded by grass that had likely never been stepped on by a human before. Pencroff started preparing his float.
In an eddy caused by an angle of the shore, which broke the flow of the current, they set afloat the larger pieces of wood, bound together by liana stems so as to form a sort of raft. On this raft they piled the rest of the wood, which would have been a load for twenty men. In an hour their work was finished, and the float was moored to the bank to wait for the turn of the tide. Pencroff and Herbert resolved to spend the mean time in gaining a more extended view of the country from the higher plateau. Two hundred feet behind the angle of the river, the wall terminating in irregular masses of rocks, sloped away gently to the edge of the forest. The two easily climbed this natural staircase, soon attained the summit, and posted themselves at the angle overlooking the mouth of the river.
In a bend created by the shoreline that disrupted the flow of the current, they set afloat the larger pieces of wood, tied together with liana vines to create a makeshift raft. On this raft, they stacked the rest of the wood, which would’ve been a heavy load for twenty men. In an hour, their work was done, and the raft was secured to the bank to wait for the tide to turn. Pencroff and Herbert decided to use this time to get a better view of the surrounding area from the higher plateau. Two hundred feet behind the river bend, the wall, ending in uneven rock formations, sloped gently down to the edge of the forest. The two easily climbed this natural staircase, quickly reached the top, and positioned themselves at the angle overlooking the river's mouth.
Their first look was at that ocean over which they had been so frightfully swept. They beheld with emotion the northern part of the coast, the scene of the catastrophe, and of Smith’s disappearance. They hoped to see on the surface some wreck of the balloon to which a man might cling. But the sea was a watery desert. The coast, too, was desolate. Neither Neb nor the reporter could be seen.
Their first glance was at the ocean that had swept them away so terrifyingly. They looked on with emotion at the northern part of the coast, the site of the disaster and Smith’s disappearance. They hoped to spot some wreckage of the balloon that someone might cling to. But the sea was like a watery desert. The coast was just as deserted. Neither Neb nor the reporter was in sight.
“Something tells me,” said Herbert, “that a person so energetic as Mr. Smith would not let himself be drowned like an ordinary man. He must have got to shore; don’t you think so, Pencroff?”
“Something tells me,” said Herbert, “that someone as energetic as Mr. Smith wouldn’t just let himself drown like an ordinary person. He must have made it to shore; don’t you think so, Pencroff?”
The sailor shook his head sadly. He never thought to see Smith again; but he left Herbert a hope.
The sailor shook his head sadly. He never expected to see Smith again; but he gave Herbert a sense of hope.
“No doubt,” said he, “our engineer could save himself where any one else would perish.”
“No doubt,” he said, “our engineer could save himself when anyone else would die.”
Meanwhile he took a careful observation of the coast. Beneath his eyes stretched out the sandy beach, bounded, upon the right of the river-mouth, by lines of breakers. The rocks which still were visible above the water were like groups of amphibious monsters lying in the surf. Beyond them the sea sparkled in the rays of the sun. A narrow point terminated the southern horizon, and it was impossible to tell whether the land stretched further in that direction, or whether it trended southeast and southwest, so as to make an elongated peninsula. At the northern end of the bay, the outline of the coast was continued to a great distance. There the shore was low and flat, without rocks, but covered by great sandbanks, left by the receding tide.
Meanwhile, he carefully observed the coast. Below him, the sandy beach extended, on the right side of the river mouth, lined with breaking waves. The rocks still visible above the water looked like groups of amphibious monsters lying in the surf. Beyond them, the sea sparkled in the sunlight. A narrow point marked the southern horizon, and it was hard to tell if the land continued further in that direction or if it angled southeast and southwest to form a long peninsula. At the northern end of the bay, the coast stretched out for a great distance. There, the shore was low and flat, without any rocks, but covered with large sandbanks left by the receding tide.
When Pencroff and Herbert walked back towards the west, their looks fell on the snowcapped mountain, which rose six or seven miles away. Masses of tree-trunks, with patches of evergreens, extended from its first declivities to within two miles of the coast. Then from the edge of this forest to the coast stretched a plateau strewn at random with clumps of trees. On the left shore through the glades the waters of the little river, which seemed to have returned in its sinuous course to the mountains which gave it birth.
When Pencroff and Herbert walked back towards the west, they spotted the snowcapped mountain, which stood six or seven miles away. Large tree trunks, with patches of evergreens, stretched from its lower slopes to within two miles of the coast. Then, from the edge of this forest to the shore, there was a plateau scattered with clumps of trees. To the left, the waters of the little river could be seen through the openings in the trees, appearing to wind its way back to the mountains where it originated.
“Are we upon an island?” muttered the sailor.
“Are we on an island?” muttered the sailor.
“It is big enough, at all events,” said the boy.
“It’s big enough, anyway,” said the boy.
“An island’s an island, no matter how big,” said Pencroff.
“An island is an island, no matter how big,” said Pencroff.
But this important question could not yet be decided. The country itself, isle or continent, seemed fertile, picturesque, and diversified in its products. For that they must be grateful. They returned along the southern ridge of the granite plateau, outlined by a fringe of fantastic rocks, in whose cavities lived hundreds of birds. A whole flock of them soared aloft as Herbert jumped over the rocks.
But this important question couldn't be decided yet. The country itself, whether island or continent, looked rich, beautiful, and varied in its resources. They had to be thankful for that. They made their way back along the southern edge of the granite plateau, marked by a line of unusual rocks, where hundreds of birds lived in the crevices. A whole flock of them took to the sky as Herbert jumped over the rocks.
“Ah!” cried he, “these are neither gulls nor sea-mews.”
“Ah!” he exclaimed, “these are neither seagulls nor sea birds.”
“What are they?” said Pencroff. “They look for all the world like pigeons.”
“What are they?” Pencroff asked. “They look just like pigeons.”
“So they are,” said Herbert, “but they are wild pigeons, or rock pigeons.” I know them by the two black bands on the wing, the white rump, and the ash-blue feathers. The rock pigeon is good to eat, and its eggs ought to be delicious; and if they have left a few in their nests—”
“So they are,” said Herbert, “but they’re wild pigeons or rock pigeons.” I recognize them by the two black bands on the wing, the white tail, and the ash-blue feathers. Rock pigeons are good to eat, and their eggs should be tasty; and if they’ve left a few in their nests—”
“We will let them hatch in an omelet,” said Pencroff, gaily.
“We'll let them hatch in an omelet,” said Pencroff cheerfully.
“But what will you make your omelet in?” asked Herbert; “in your hat?”
“But what are you going to cook your omelet in?” Herbert asked. “In your hat?”
“I am not quite conjurer enough for that,” said the sailor. “We must fall back on eggs in the shell, and I will undertake to despatch the hardest.”
"I’m not quite skilled enough for that," said the sailor. "We'll have to stick with eggs in the shell, and I’ll take care of breaking the toughest ones."
Pencroff and the boy examined carefully the cavities of the granite, and succeeded in discovering eggs in some of them. Some dozens were collected in the sailor’s handkerchief, and, high tide approaching, the two went down again to the water-course.
Pencroff and the boy carefully checked the crevices in the granite and managed to find some eggs in a few of them. They gathered several dozen in the sailor’s handkerchief, and with high tide approaching, the two headed back down to the watercourse.
It was 1 o’clock when they arrived at the elbow of the river, and the tide was already on the turn. Pencroff had no intention of letting his timber float at random, nor did he wish to get on and steer it. But a sailor is never troubled in a matter of ropes or cordage, and Pencroff quickly twisted from the dry lianas a rope several fathoms long. This was fastened behind the raft, and the sailor held it in his hand, while Herbert kept the float in the current by pushing it off from the shore with a long pole.
It was 1 o'clock when they reached the bend of the river, and the tide was already changing. Pencroff didn't plan to let his logs drift aimlessly, nor did he want to get on board and steer it. But a sailor never worries about ropes or cords, and Pencroff quickly made a rope several lengths long from the dry vines. He secured it behind the raft while holding it in his hand, while Herbert kept the raft steady in the current by pushing it away from the shore with a long pole.
This expedient proved an entire success. The enormous load of wood kept well in the current. The banks were sheer, and there was no fear lest the float should ground; before 2 o’clock they reached the mouth of the stream, a few feet from the Chimneys.
This solution turned out to be a complete success. The huge load of wood stayed afloat in the current. The banks were steep, and there was no worry that the float would get stuck; by 2 o’clock, they arrived at the mouth of the stream, just a few feet away from the Chimneys.
CHAPTER V.
ARRANGING THE CHIMNEYS—THE IMPORTANT QUESTION OF FIRE—THE MATCH BOX—SEARCH OVER THE SHORE—RETURN OF THE REPORTER AND NEB—ONE MATCH—THE CRACKLING FIRE—THE FISH SUPPER—THE FIRST NIGHT ON LAND.
ARRANGING THE CHIMNEYS—THE IMPORTANT QUESTION OF FIRE—THE MATCH BOX—SEARCH ALONG THE SHORE—RETURN OF THE REPORTER AND NEB—ONE MATCH—THE CRACKLING FIRE—THE FISH SUPPER—THE FIRST NIGHT ON LAND.
The first care of Pencroff, after the raft had been unloaded, was to make the Chimneys habitable, by stopping up those passages traversed by the draughts of air. Sand, stones, twisted branches, and mud, hermetically sealed the galleries of the & open to the southerly winds, and shut out its upper curve. One narrow, winding passage, opening on the side; was arranged to carry out the smoke and to quicken the draught of the fire. The Chimneys were thus divided into three or four chambers, if these dark dens, which would hardly have contained a beast, might be so called. But they were dry, and one could stand up in them, or at least in the principal one, which was in the centre. The floor was covered with sand, and, everything considered, they could establish themselves in this place while waiting for one better.
The first thing Pencroff did after unloading the raft was to make the Chimneys livable by sealing up the areas that let in drafts. He used sand, stones, twisted branches, and mud to completely close off the tunnels that were exposed to the southern winds and blocked its upper opening. A narrow, winding passage was created on the side to vent out the smoke and improve the airflow for the fire. This setup divided the Chimneys into three or four chambers, if those dark spaces, which could barely fit an animal, could be called that. But they were dry, and you could stand up in them, at least in the main one located in the center. The floor was covered with sand, and all things considered, they could settle in this place while waiting for a better one.
While working, Herbert and Pencroff chatted together.
While they worked, Herbert and Pencroff talked to each other.
“Perhaps,” said the boy, “our companions will have found a better place than ours.”
"Maybe," said the boy, "our friends have found a better spot than we have."
“It is possible.” answered the sailor, “but, until we know, don’t let us stop. Better have two strings to one’s bow than none at all!”
“It is possible,” answered the sailor, “but until we know, let’s not stop. It's better to have two options than none at all!”
“Oh,” repeated Herbert, “if they can only find Mr. Smith, and bring him back with them, how thankful we will be!”
“Oh,” said Herbert again, “if they can just find Mr. Smith and bring him back with them, we’ll be so grateful!”
“Yes,” murmured Pencroff. “He was a good man.”
"Yeah," Pencroff muttered. "He was a good guy."
“Was!” said Herbert. “Do you think we shall not see him again?”
“Was!” said Herbert. “Do you think we won’t see him again?”
“Heaven forbid!” replied the sailor.
"God forbid!" replied the sailor.
The work of division was rapidly accomplished, and Pencroff declared himself satisfied. “Now,” said he, “our friends may return, and they will find a good enough shelter.”
The dividing of the work was done quickly, and Pencroff said he was happy with the results. “Now,” he said, “our friends can come back, and they’ll find a decent shelter.”
Nothing remained but to fix the fireplace and to prepare the meal, which, in truth, was a task easy and simple enough. Large flat stones were placed at the mouth of the first gallery to the left, where the smoke passage had been made; and this chimney was made so narrow that but little heat would escape up the flue, and the cavern would be comfortably warmed. The stock of wood was piled up in one of the chambers, and the sailor placed some logs and broken branches upon the stones. He was occupied in arranging them when Herbert asked him if he had some matches.
Nothing was left to do but fix the fireplace and prepare the meal, which, honestly, was a pretty easy task. Large flat stones were set at the entrance of the first gallery to the left, where the smoke passage had been created; this chimney was designed so narrow that very little heat would escape up the flue, keeping the cavern comfortably warm. The wood supply was stacked in one of the rooms, and the sailor put some logs and broken branches on the stones. He was busy arranging them when Herbert asked him if he had any matches.
“Certainly,” replied Pencroff, “and moreover, fortunately; for without matches or tinder we would indeed be in trouble.”
“Sure,” Pencroff replied, “and luckily; because without matches or tinder we’d really be in a bind.”
“Could not we always make fire as the savages do,” replied Herbert, “by rubbing two bits of dry wood together?”
“Can’t we always start a fire like the savages do,” replied Herbert, “by rubbing two pieces of dry wood together?”
“Just try it, my boy, some time, and see if you do anything more than put your arms out of joint.”
“Just give it a shot, my boy, sometime, and see if you do anything more than dislocate your arms.”
“Nevertheless, it is often done in the islands of the Pacific.”
“Still, it's often done in the islands of the Pacific.”
“I don’t say that it is not,” replied Pencroff, “but the savages must have a way of their own, or use a certain kind of wood, as more than once I have wanted to get fire in that way and have never yet been able to. For my part, I prefer matches; and, by the way, where are mine?”
“I’m not saying it isn’t,” replied Pencroff, “but the savages must have their own method or use a specific type of wood because I’ve tried to start a fire that way multiple times and have never succeeded. Personally, I prefer matches; by the way, where are mine?”
Pencroff, who was an habitual smoker, felt in his vest for the box, which he was never without, but, not finding it, he searched the pockets of his trowsers, and to his profound amazement, it was not there.
Pencroff, a regular smoker, reached into his vest for the box he always carried, but when he couldn’t find it, he checked his pants pockets, and to his great surprise, it wasn’t there either.
“This is an awkward business,” said he, looking at Herbert. “My box must have fallen from my pocket, and I can’t find it. But you, Herbert, have you nothing: no steel, not anything, with which we can make fire?”
“This is a tricky situation,” he said, glancing at Herbert. “My box must have fallen out of my pocket, and I can't find it. But you, Herbert, don’t you have anything: no steel or anything we can use to make a fire?”
“Not a thing, Pencroff.”
“Nothing, Pencroff.”
The sailor, followed by the boy, walked out, rubbing his forehead.
The sailor, followed by the boy, walked out, rubbing his forehead.
On the sand, among the rocks, by the bank of the river, both of them searched with the utmost care, but without result. The box was of copper, and had it been there, they must have seen it.
On the sand, among the rocks, by the riverbank, they both searched carefully, but found nothing. The box was made of copper, and if it had been there, they would have seen it.
“Pencroff,” asked Herbert, “did not you throw it out of the basket?”
“Pencroff,” Herbert asked, “didn’t you toss it out of the basket?”
“I took good care not to,” said the sailor. “But when one has been knocked around as we have been, so small a thing could easily have been lost; even my pipe is gone. The confounded box; where can it be?”
“I made sure not to,” said the sailor. “But when you've been through what we have, something so small could easily get lost; even my pipe is missing. That annoying box; where could it be?”
“Well, the tide is out; let us run to the place where we landed,” said Herbert.
“Well, the tide is out; let’s run to the spot where we landed,” said Herbert.
It was little likely that they would find this box, which the sea would have rolled among the pebbles at high water; nevertheless, it would do no harm to search. They, therefore, went quickly to the place where they had first landed, some 200 paces from the Chimneys. There, among the pebbles, in the hollows of the rocks, they made minute search, but in vain. If the box had fallen here it must have been carried out by the waves. As the tide went down, the sailor peered into every crevice, but without Success. It was a serious loss, and, for the time, irreparable. Pencroff did not conceal his chagrin. He frowned, but did not speak, and Herbert tried to console him by saying, that, most probably, the matches would have been so wetted as to be useless.
It was unlikely that they would find this box, which the sea would have rolled among the pebbles at high tide; still, it wouldn’t hurt to look. So, they quickly went back to the spot where they had first landed, about 200 paces from the Chimneys. There, among the pebbles and in the nooks of the rocks, they searched carefully, but found nothing. If the box had fallen here, it must have been taken away by the waves. As the tide receded, the sailor checked every crevice but had no luck. It was a significant loss and, for now, irreparable. Pencroff didn’t hide his disappointment. He frowned but stayed silent, while Herbert tried to cheer him up by saying that, most likely, the matches would have been too wet to use.
“No, my boy,” answered the sailor. “They were in a tightly closing metal box. But now, what are we to do?”
“No, my boy,” replied the sailor. “They were in a tightly sealed metal box. But now, what should we do?”
“We will certainly find means of procuring fire,” said Herbert. “Mr. Smith or Mr. Spilett will not be as helpless as we are.”
“We’ll definitely figure out how to get fire,” said Herbert. “Mr. Smith or Mr. Spilett won’t be as powerless as we are.”
“Yes, but in the meantime we are without it,” said Pencroff, “and our companions will find but a very sorry meal on their return.”
“Yes, but in the meantime we don’t have it,” said Pencroff, “and our friends will have a pretty disappointing meal when they get back.”
“But,” said Herbert, hopefully, “it is not possible that they will have neither tinder nor matches.”
“But,” said Herbert, hopefully, “there’s no way they don’t have either tinder or matches.”
“I doubt it,” answered the sailor, shaking his head. “In the first place, neither Neb nor Mr. Smith smoke, and then I’m afraid Mr. Spilett has more likely kept his notebook than his match-box.”
“I doubt it,” replied the sailor, shaking his head. “First of all, neither Neb nor Mr. Smith smokes, and I’m afraid Mr. Spilett is more likely to have kept his notebook than his matchbox.”
Herbert did not answer. This loss was evidently serious. Nevertheless, the lad thought surely they could make a fire in some way or other, but Pencroff, more experienced, although a man not easily discouraged, knew differently. At any rate there was but one thing to do:—to wait until the return of Neb and the reporter. It was necessary to give up the repast of cooked eggs which they had wished to prepare, and a diet of raw flesh did not seem to be, either for themselves or for the others, an agreeable prospect.
Herbert didn’t answer. This loss was clearly serious. Still, the kid thought they could figure out how to make a fire somehow, but Pencroff, more experienced and not easily discouraged, knew better. Anyway, there was only one thing to do: wait for Neb and the reporter to come back. They had to give up the plan to cook eggs, and eating raw meat didn't seem appealing for either themselves or the others.
Before returning to the Chimneys, the companions, in case they failed of a fire, gathered a fresh lot of lithodomes, and then silently took the road to their dwelling. Pencroff, his eyes fixed upon the ground, still searched in every direction for the lost box. They followed again up the left bank of the river, from its mouth to the angle where the raft had been built. They returned to the upper plateau, and went in every direction, searching in the tall grass on the edge of the forest, but in vain. It was 5 o’clock when they returned again to the Chimneys, and it is needless to say that the passages were searched in their darkest recesses before all hope was given up.
Before heading back to the Chimneys, the group gathered a new batch of lithodomes, just in case they couldn't make a fire. Then, they quietly walked back to their home. Pencroff, staring at the ground, continued to look for the lost box in every direction. They retraced their steps along the left bank of the river, from the mouth to the spot where the raft had been constructed. They made their way back to the upper plateau and searched all around, combing through the tall grass at the edge of the forest, but it was all for nothing. It was 5 o’clock when they returned to the Chimneys again, and it goes without saying that they searched the passages, even in the darkest corners, before finally giving up hope.
Towards 6 o’clock, just as the sun was disappearing behind the high land in the west, Herbert, who was walking back and forth upon the shore, announced the return of Neb and of Gideon Spilett. They came back alone, and the lad felt his heart sink. The sailor had not, then, been wrong in his presentiments; they had been unable to find the engineer.
Towards 6 o’clock, just as the sun was setting behind the hills in the west, Herbert, who was pacing the shore, announced the return of Neb and Gideon Spilett. They returned alone, and the boy felt his heart drop. The sailor's instincts had been right; they had been unable to find the engineer.
The reporter, when he came up, seated himself upon a rock, without speaking. Fainting from fatigue, half dead with hunger, he was unable to utter a word. As to Neb, his reddened eyes showed how he had been weeping, and the fresh tears which he was unable to restrain, indicated, but too clearly, that he had lost all hope.
The reporter, when he arrived, sat down on a rock without saying anything. Weak from exhaustion and nearly starving, he couldn’t say a thing. As for Neb, his puffy eyes revealed that he had been crying, and the fresh tears he couldn’t hold back clearly showed that he had lost all hope.
The reporter at length gave the history of their search. Neb and he had followed the coast for more than eight miles, and, consequently, far beyond the point where the balloon had made the plunge which was followed by the disappearance of the engineer and Top. The shore was deserted. Not a recently turned stone, not a trace upon the sand, not a footprint, was upon all that part of the shore. It was evident that nobody inhabited that portion of the island. The sea was as deserted as the land; and it was there, at some hundreds of feet from shore, that the engineer had found his grave.
The reporter finally shared the story of their search. Neb and he had tracked the coast for over eight miles, far past the spot where the balloon had fallen, which led to the disappearance of the engineer and Top. The shore was empty. There wasn't a recently disturbed stone, a single trace on the sand, or even a footprint anywhere on that section of the shore. It was clear that no one lived in that part of the island. The sea was just as deserted as the land; and it was there, several hundred feet from shore, that the engineer had found his final resting place.
At that moment Neb raised his head, and in a voice which showed how he still struggled against despair, exclaimed:—
At that moment, Neb lifted his head and, in a voice that revealed his ongoing battle with despair, exclaimed:—
“No, he is not dead. It is impossible. It might happen to you or me, but never to him. He is a man who can get out of anything!”
“No, he’s not dead. That’s impossible. It could happen to you or me, but never to him. He’s the kind of guy who can get out of any situation!”
Then his strength failing him, he murmured, “But I am used up.”
Then, feeling his strength drain away, he whispered, “But I’m all out.”
Herbert ran to him and cried:—
Herbert ran over to him and shouted:—
“Neb, we will find him; God will give him back to us; but you, you must be famishing; do eat something.”
“Neb, we’ll find him; God will bring him back to us; but you must be starving; eat something.”
And while speaking the lad offered the poor negro a handful of shell-fish—a meagre and insufficient nourishment enough.
And while talking, the guy offered the poor black man a handful of shellfish—barely enough food to get by.
But Neb, though he had eaten nothing for hours, refused them. Poor fellow! deprived of his master, he wished no longer to live.
But Neb, even though he hadn't eaten anything for hours, turned them down. Poor guy! Without his master, he no longer wanted to live.
As to Gideon Spilett, he devoured the mollusks, and then laid down upon the sand at the foot of a rock. He was exhausted, but calm. Herbert, approaching him, took his hand.
As for Gideon Spilett, he gobbled up the mollusks and then lay down on the sand at the base of a rock. He was worn out but relaxed. Herbert came over to him and took his hand.
“Mr. Spilett,” said he, “we have discovered a shelter where you will be more comfortable. The night is coming on; so come and rest there. To-morrow we will see—”
“Mr. Spilett,” he said, “we’ve found a shelter where you’ll be more comfortable. Night is approaching, so come and rest there. Tomorrow we’ll see—”
The reporter rose, and, guided by the lad, proceeded towards the Chimneys. As he did so, Pencroff came up to him, and in an off-hand way asked him if, by chance, he had a match with him. The reporter stopped, felt in his pockets, and finding none, said:—
The reporter stood up and, led by the boy, headed toward the Chimneys. As he walked, Pencroff approached him and casually asked if he happened to have a match on him. The reporter paused, checked his pockets, and when he found none, said:—
“I had some, but I must have thrown them all away.”
“I had some, but I must have tossed them all out.”
Then the sailor called Neb and asked him the same question, receiving a like answer.
Then the sailor called Neb and asked him the same question, getting a similar answer.
“Curse it!” cried the sailor, unable to restrain the word.
“Damn it!” shouted the sailor, unable to hold back the exclamation.
The reporter heard it, and going to him said:—“Have you no matches?”
The reporter heard it and approached him, saying, “Do you have any matches?”
“Not one; and, of course, no fire.”
“Not a single one; and, of course, no fire.”
“Ah,” cried Neb, “if he was here, my master, he could soon make one.”
“Ah,” exclaimed Neb, “if my master were here, he could easily make one.”
The four castaways stood still and looked anxiously at each other. Herbert was the first to break the silence, by saying:—
The four castaways stood still and looked nervously at each other. Herbert was the first to speak, saying:—
“Mr. Spilett, you are a smoker, you always have matches about you; perhaps you have not searched thoroughly. Look again; a single match will be enough.”
“Mr. Spilett, you smoke, so you always carry matches; maybe you haven’t looked closely enough. Check again; one match will do.”
The reporter rummaged the pockets of his trowsers, his vest, and coat, and to the great joy of Pencroff, as well as to his own surprise, felt a little sliver of wood caught in the lining of his vest. He could feel it from the outside, but his fingers were unable to disengage it. If this should prove a match, and only one, it was extremely necessary not to rub off the phosphorus.
The reporter searched the pockets of his pants, his vest, and coat, and to the great delight of Pencroff, as well as his own surprise, found a small piece of wood stuck in the lining of his vest. He could feel it from the outside, but his fingers couldn't get it out. If this turned out to be a match, and just one at that, it was really important not to rub off the phosphorus.
“Let me try,” said the lad. And very adroitly, without breaking it, he drew out this little bit of wood, this precious trifle, which to these poor men was of such great importance. It was uninjured.
“Let me give it a shot,” said the boy. And very skillfully, without breaking it, he pulled out this small piece of wood, this valuable little item, which was of such huge significance to these poor men. It was unharmed.
“One match!” cried Pencroff.” “Why, it is as good as if we had a whole ship-load!”
“One match!” exclaimed Pencroff. “Wow, it’s like we have an entire shipload!”
He took it, and, followed by his companions, regained the Chimneys. This tiny bit of wood, which in civilised lands is wasted with indifference, as valueless, it was necessary here to use with the utmost care. The sailor, having assured himself that it was dry, said:—
He took it, and, followed by his companions, went back to the Chimneys. This little piece of wood, which is wasted without a second thought in civilized places, had to be handled with the greatest care here. The sailor, after making sure it was dry, said:—
“We must have some paper.”
"We need some paper."
“Here is some,” answered Spilett, who, after a little hesitation, had torn a leaf from his note-book.
“Here’s some,” replied Spilett, who, after a brief pause, had ripped a page from his notebook.
Pencroff took the bit of paper and knelt down before the fire-place, where some handfuls of grass, leaves, and dry moss had been placed under the faggots in such a way that the air could freely circulate and make the dry wood readily ignite. Then Pencroff shaping the paper into a cone, as pipe-smokers do in the wind, placed it among the moss. Taking, then, a slightly rough stone and wiping it carefully, with beating heart and suspended breath, he gave the match a little rub. The first stroke produced no effect, as Pencroff fearing to break off the phosphorus had not rubbed hard enough.
Pencroff grabbed the piece of paper and knelt down in front of the fireplace, where he had arranged some handfuls of grass, leaves, and dry moss under the sticks so that air could flow freely and help the dry wood catch fire easily. Then, shaping the paper into a cone like pipe-smokers do when it’s windy, he placed it among the moss. Taking a slightly rough stone and wiping it clean, he felt his heart racing and held his breath as he rubbed the match. The first strike didn’t work because Pencroff, worried about breaking off the phosphorus, hadn’t rubbed hard enough.
“Ho, I won’t be able to do it,” said he; “my hand shakes—the match will miss—I can’t do it—I don’t want to try!” And, rising, he besought Herbert to undertake it.
“Hey, I can’t do it,” he said; “my hand is shaking—the match will miss—I can’t do it—I don’t want to try!” And, standing up, he urged Herbert to take it on instead.
Certainly, the boy had never in his life been so affected. His heart beat furiously. Prometheus, about to steal the fire from heaven, could not have been more excited.
Certainly, the boy had never in his life been so impacted. His heart raced wildly. Prometheus, ready to steal fire from heaven, couldn't have been more thrilled.
Nevertheless he did not hesitate, but rubbed the stone with a quick stroke. A little sputtering was heard, and a light blue flame sprung out and produced a pungent smoke. Herbert gently turned the match, so as to feed the flame, and then slid it under the paper cone. In a few seconds the paper took fire, and then the moss kindled. An instant later, the dry wood crackled, and a joyous blaze, fanned by the breath of the sailor, shone out from the darkness.
Nevertheless, he didn't hesitate and quickly rubbed the stone. A little sputtering was heard, and a light blue flame burst out, producing a strong-smelling smoke. Herbert carefully adjusted the match to keep the flame going and then slid it under the paper cone. In a few seconds, the paper caught fire, and then the moss ignited. Moments later, the dry wood crackled, and a bright blaze, fueled by the sailor's breath, suddenly lit up the darkness.
“At length,” cried Pencroff, rising, “I never was so excited in my life!”
“At last,” shouted Pencroff, getting up, “I’ve never been this excited in my life!”
It was evident that the fire did well in the fireplace of flat stones. The smoke readily ascended through its passage; the chimney drew, and an agreeable warmth quickly made itself felt. As to the fire, it would be necessary to take care that it should not go out, and always to keep some embers among the cinders. But it was only a matter of care and attention as the wood was plenty, and the supply could always be renewed in good time.
It was clear that the fire was doing well in the stone fireplace. The smoke easily rose through the flue; the chimney worked perfectly, and a pleasant warmth quickly spread throughout the room. As for the fire, it was important to make sure it didn’t go out and to always keep some coals among the ashes. But it was just a matter of being careful and attentive since there was plenty of wood, and it could always be restocked in time.
Pencroff began at once to utilize the fire by preparing something more nourishing than a dish of lithodomes. Two dozen eggs were brought by Herbert, and the reporter, seated in a corner, watched these proceedings without speaking. A triple thought held possession of his mind. Did Cyrus still live? If alive, where was he? If he had survived his plunge, why was it he had found no means of making his existence known? As to Neb, he roamed the sand like one distracted.
Pencroff immediately started using the fire to cook something more filling than a dish of lithodomes. Herbert brought two dozen eggs, and the reporter, sitting in a corner, observed everything without saying a word. Three thoughts occupied his mind. Did Cyrus still live? If he was alive, where was he? If he had survived his fall, why hadn't he found a way to let them know he was alive? As for Neb, he wandered the sand like someone who had lost his mind.
Pencroff, who knew fifty-two ways of cooking eggs, had no choice at this time. He contented himself with placing them in the hot cinders and letting them cook slowly. In a few minutes the operation was finished, and the sailor invited the reporter to take part in the supper. This was the first meal of the castaways upon this unknown coast. The hard eggs were excellent, and as the egg contains all the elements necessary for man’s nourishment, these poor men found them sufficient, and felt their strength reviving.
Pencroff, who knew fifty-two ways to cook eggs, had no choice at that moment. He settled for placing them in the hot ashes and letting them cook slowly. In a few minutes, the meal was ready, and the sailor invited the reporter to join him for supper. This was the first meal of the castaways on this unknown shore. The hard eggs were delicious, and since eggs contain all the nutrients necessary for human nourishment, these poor men found them adequate and felt their strength returning.
Unfortunately, one was absent from this repast. If the five prisoners who had escaped from Richmond had all been there, under those piled-up rocks, before that bright and crackling fire upon that dry sand, their happiness would have been complete. But the most ingenious, as well as the most learned—he who was undoubtedly their chief, Cyrus Smith—alas! was missing, and his body had not even obtained burial.
Unfortunately, one person was missing from this meal. If the five prisoners who had escaped from Richmond had all been there, sitting under those piled-up rocks, by that bright and crackling fire on the dry sand, their happiness would have been complete. But the most clever and knowledgeable among them—who was undeniably their leader, Cyrus Smith—was absent, and his body hadn't even been given a proper burial.
Thus passed the 25th of March. The night was come. Outside they heard the whistling of the wind, the monotonous thud of the surf, and the grinding of the pebbles on the beach.
Thus passed the 25th of March. Night fell. Outside, they heard the wind whistling, the steady thud of the waves, and the grinding of the pebbles on the beach.
The reporter had retired to a dark corner, after having briefly noted the events of the day—the first sight of this new land, the loss of the engineer, the exploration of the shore, the incidents of the matches, etc.; and, overcome by fatigue, he was enabled to find some rest in sleep.
The reporter had moved to a quiet corner after briefly recording the day's events—the first glimpse of this new land, the loss of the engineer, the exploration of the shoreline, the match incidents, and so on; and, feeling exhausted, he managed to get some rest in sleep.
Herbert fell asleep at once. The sailor, dozing, with one eye open, passed the night by the fire, on which he kept heaping fuel.
Herbert fell asleep immediately. The sailor, napping with one eye open, spent the night by the fire, continuously adding wood to it.
One only of the castaways did not rest in the Chimneys. It was the inconsolable, the despairing Neb, who, during the whole night, and in spite of his companions’ efforts to make him take some rest, wandered upon the sands calling his master.
One of the castaways didn’t rest at the Chimneys. It was the inconsolable, despairing Neb, who, throughout the night, and despite his companions’ attempts to get him to rest, wandered on the sands calling for his master.
CHAPTER VI.
THE CASTAWAYS’ INVENTORY—NO EFFECTS —THE CHARRED LINEN—AN EXPEDITION INTO THE FOREST—THE FLORA OF THE WOODS—THE FLIGHT OF THE JACAMAR—TRACKS OF WILD BEASTS—THE COUROUCOUS—THE HEATH-COCK—LINE-FISHING EXTRAORDINARY.
THE CASTAWAYS’ INVENTORY—NO BELONGINGS —THE CHARRED LINEN—AN EXPEDITION INTO THE FOREST—THE FLORA OF THE WOODS—THE FLIGHT OF THE JACAMAR—TRACKS OF WILD ANIMALS—THE COUROUCOUS—THE HEATH-COCK—EXTRAORDINARY LINE-FISHING.
The inventory of the castaways can be promptly taken. Thrown upon a desert coast, they had nothing but the clothes they wore in the balloon. We must add Spilett’s watch and note-book, which he had kept by some inadvertence; but there were no firearms and no tools, not even a pocket knife. Every thing had been thrown overboard to lighten the balloon. Every necessary of life was wanting!
The inventory of the castaways can be quickly taken. Stranded on a deserted coast, they had nothing but the clothes they were wearing in the balloon. We should include Spilett’s watch and notebook, which he had unintentionally kept; however, there were no firearms or tools, not even a pocket knife. Everything had been tossed overboard to lighten the balloon. Every essential for survival was missing!
Yet if Cyrus Smith had been with them, his practical science and inventive genius would have saved them from despair. But, alas! they could hope to see him no more. The castaways could rely on Providence only, and on their own right hands.
Yet if Cyrus Smith had been with them, his practical knowledge and creativity would have kept them from losing hope. But, unfortunately, they could no longer expect to see him. The castaways could only rely on fate and their own skills.
And, first, should they settle down on this strip of coast without an effort to discover whether it was island or continent, inhabited or desert? It was an urgent question, for all their measures would depend upon its solution. However, it seemed to Pencroff better to wait a few days before undertaking an exploration. They must try to procure more satisfying food than eggs and shellfish, and repair their strength, exhausted by fatigue and by the inclemency of the weather. The Chimneys would serve as a house for a while. Their fire was lit, and it would be easy to keep alive some embers. For the time being there were plenty of eggs and shell-fish. They might even be able to kill, with a stick or a stone, some of the numerous pigeons which fluttered among the rocks. They might find fruit-trees in the neighboring forest, and they had plenty of fresh water. It was decided then to wait a few days at the Chimneys, and to prepare for an expedition either along the coast or into the interior of the country.
And first, should they settle down on this stretch of coast without trying to find out whether it was an island or a continent, inhabited or deserted? It was an urgent question, as all their plans would depend on the answer. However, Pencroff thought it would be better to wait a few days before starting an exploration. They needed to find more satisfying food than eggs and shellfish and regain their strength, which was drained by fatigue and the bad weather. The Chimneys would serve as their temporary home. Their fire was lit, and it would be easy to keep some embers alive. For now, there were plenty of eggs and shellfish. They might even be able to catch some of the many pigeons that flitted among the rocks using a stick or a stone. They could discover fruit trees in the nearby forest, and they had an abundance of fresh water. It was decided to wait a few days at the Chimneys and prepare for an expedition either along the coast or into the interior of the country.
This plan was especially agreeable to Neb, who was in no hurry to abandon that part of the coast which had been the scene of the catastrophe. He could not and would not believe that Smith was dead. Until the waves should have thrown up the engineer’s body—until Neb should have seen with his eyes and handled with his hands his master’s corpse, he believed him alive. It was an illusion which the sailor had not the heart to destroy; and there was no use in talking to Neb. He was like the dog who would not leave his master’s tomb, and his grief was such that he would probably soon follow him.
This plan was especially pleasing to Neb, who had no desire to leave the part of the coast where the disaster had occurred. He just couldn’t and wouldn’t accept that Smith was dead. Until the waves washed up the engineer’s body—until Neb saw with his own eyes and touched with his own hands his master's corpse—he believed he was alive. It was a delusion the sailor couldn’t bring himself to shatter, and there was no point in trying to talk to Neb. He was like a dog that wouldn’t leave its master’s grave, and his sorrow was so deep that he would probably follow him soon.
Upon the morning of the 26th of March, at daybreak, Neb started along the coast northward to the spot where the sea had doubtless closed over the unfortunate engineer.
Upon the morning of March 26th, at daybreak, Neb set off along the coast heading north to the place where the sea had surely swallowed up the unfortunate engineer.
For breakfast that morning they had only eggs and lithodomes, seasoned with salt which Herbert had found in the cavities of the rocks. When the meal was over they divided forces. The reporter stayed behind to keep up the fire, and in the very improbable case of Neb’s needing him to go to his assistance. Herbert and Pencroff went into the forest.
For breakfast that morning, they had just eggs and lithodomes, seasoned with salt that Herbert had discovered in the rock crevices. Once the meal was finished, they split up. The reporter stayed back to maintain the fire and in case Neb needed his help. Herbert and Pencroff headed into the forest.
“We will go hunting, Herbert, “said the sailor. “We shall find ammunition on our way, and we will cut our guns in the forest.”
“We're going hunting, Herbert,” said the sailor. “We'll find ammo on the way, and we can make our guns in the forest.”
But, before starting, Herbert suggested that as they had no tinder they must replace it by burnt linen. They were sorry to sacrifice a piece of handkerchief, but the need was urgent, and a piece of Pencroff’s large check handkerchief was soon converted into a charred rag, and put away in the central chamber in a little cavity of the rock, sheltered from wind and dampness.
But before they started, Herbert suggested that since they had no tinder, they should use burnt linen instead. They felt bad about sacrificing a piece of a handkerchief, but the need was urgent, so a part of Pencroff’s large checkered handkerchief was quickly turned into a charred rag and stored away in the central chamber in a small nook in the rock, protected from the wind and moisture.
By this time it was 9 o’clock. The weather was threatening and the breeze blew from the southeast. Herbert and Pencroff, as they left the Chimneys, cast a glance at the smoke which curled upwards from amid the rocks; then they walked up the left bank of the river.
By this time it was 9 o’clock. The weather looked stormy and the breeze was coming from the southeast. Herbert and Pencroff, as they left the Chimneys, took a look at the smoke that was curling up from the rocks; then they walked up the left bank of the river.
When they reached the forest, Pencroff broke from the first tree two thick branches which he made into cudgels, and whose points Herbert blunted against a rock. What would he not have given for a knife? Then the hunters walked on in the high grass along the bank of the river, which, after its turn to the southwest, gradually narrowed, running between high banks and over-arched by interlacing trees. Pencroff, not to lose his way, determined to follow the course of the stream, which would bring him back to his point of departure. But the bank offered many obstacles. Here, trees whose flexible branches bent over to the brink of the current; there, thorns and lianas which they had to break with their sticks. Herbert often glided between the broken stumps with the agility of a young cat and disappeared in the copse, but Pencroff called him back at once, begging him not to wander away.
When they got to the forest, Pencroff broke off two thick branches from the nearest tree and made them into clubs, while Herbert sharpened the ends against a rock. He would have given anything for a knife. The hunters continued walking through the tall grass along the riverbank, which, after turning southwest, gradually became narrower, flowing between steep banks and covered by intertwining trees. To avoid getting lost, Pencroff decided to follow the stream, which would lead him back to where they started. However, the bank was full of obstacles. There were trees with flexible branches leaning over the water, and in some places, thorns and vines that they had to clear away with their sticks. Herbert often nimbly slipped through the broken stumps like a young cat and vanished into the underbrush, but Pencroff immediately called him back, asking him not to stray too far.
Meanwhile, the sailor carefully observed the character and peculiarities of the region. On this left bank the surface was flat, rising insensibly towards the interior. Sometimes it was moist and swampy, indicating the existence of a subterranean network of little streams emptying themselves into the river. Sometimes, too, a brook ran across the copse, which they crossed without trouble. The opposite bank was more undulating, and the valley, through whose bottom flowed the river, was more clearly defined. The hill, covered with trees rising in terraces, intercepted the vision. Along this right bank they could hardly have walked, for the descent was steep, and the trees which bent over the water were only sustained by their roots. It is needless to say that both forest and shore seemed a virgin wilderness. They saw fresh traces of animals whose species was unknown to them. Some seemed to them the tracks of dangerous wild beasts, but nowhere was there the mark of an axe on a tree-trunk, or the ashes of a fire, or the imprint of a foot. They should no doubt have been glad that it was so, for on this land in the mid-Pacific, the presence of man was a thing more to be dreaded than desired.
Meanwhile, the sailor carefully observed the characteristics and unique features of the area. On this left bank, the land was flat, gradually rising toward the interior. Sometimes it was damp and swampy, suggesting a hidden network of small streams flowing into the river. Occasionally, a brook crossed the thicket, which they navigated easily. The opposite bank was more rolling, and the valley, where the river flowed at the bottom, was more distinctly outlined. The hill, dotted with trees that rose in tiers, obstructed the view. Along this right bank, they could hardly walk, as the slope was steep, and the trees leaning over the water were only supported by their roots. It's unnecessary to mention that both the forest and the shore appeared to be untouched wilderness. They spotted fresh tracks of animals whose species they didn't recognize. Some looked like the footprints of dangerous wild beasts, but there were no signs of axes on tree trunks, ashes from a fire, or footprints. They should have felt relieved about this, for in this mid-Pacific land, the presence of humans was something to fear rather than welcome.
They hardly spoke, so great were the difficulties of the route; after an hour’s walk they had but just compassed a mile. Hitherto their hunting had been fruitless. Birds were singing and flying to and fro under the trees; but they showed an instinctive fear of their enemy man. Herbert descried among them, in a swampy part of the forest, a bird with narrow and elongated beak, in shape something like a kingfisher, from which it was distinguished by its harsh and lustrous plumage.
They barely talked because the challenges of the trail were so tough; after walking for an hour, they had only covered a mile. Until now, their hunting had been unsuccessful. Birds were singing and flitting around in the trees, but they had an instinctive fear of humans. Herbert spotted among them, in a muddy area of the forest, a bird with a long, narrow beak that resembled a kingfisher, but it was different due to its harsh and shiny feathers.
“That must be a jacamar,” said Herbert, trying to get within range of the bird.
"That has to be a jacamar," said Herbert, trying to get closer to the bird.
“It would be a good chance to taste jacamar,” answered the sailor, “if that fellow would only let himself be roasted.”
“It would be a great opportunity to try jacamar,” the sailor replied, “if that guy would just let himself get roasted.”
In a moment a stone, adroitly aimed by the boy, struck the bird on the wing; but the jacamar took to his legs and disappeared in a minute.
In an instant, a stone, skillfully thrown by the boy, hit the bird in flight; but the jacamar took off quickly and vanished in no time.
“What a muff I am,” said Herbert. ‘Not at all,” said the sailor. “It was a good shot, a great many would have missed the bird. Don’t be discouraged, we’ll catch him again some day.”
“What a mess I am,” said Herbert. “Not at all,” said the sailor. “It was a good shot; many would have missed the bird. Don’t be discouraged, we’ll catch him again some day.”
The wood opened as the hunters went on, and the trees grew to a vast height, but none had edible fruits. Pencroff sought in vain for some of those precious palm trees, which lend themselves so wonderfully to the needs of mankind, and which grow from 40° north latitude to 35° south. But this forest was composed only of conifers, such as the deodars, already recognized by Herbert; the Douglas pines, which grow on the northeast coast of America; and magnificent fir trees, 150 feet high. Among their branches was fluttering a flock of birds, with small bodies and long, glittering tails. Herbert picked up some of the feathers, which lay scattered on the ground, and looked at them carefully.
The forest opened up as the hunters moved deeper in, and the trees towered to great heights, but none bore edible fruits. Pencroff searched in vain for those valuable palm trees, which are so useful to people and grow from 40° north latitude to 35° south. But this forest was made up only of conifers, like the deodars that Herbert had already identified; the Douglas firs, which grow along the northeast coast of America; and stunning fir trees that reached 150 feet tall. Among their branches, a flock of birds flitted about, with small bodies and long, shiny tails. Herbert picked up some of the feathers that were scattered on the ground and examined them closely.
“These are ‘couroucous,’“ said he.
“These are ‘couroucous,’” he said.
“I would rather have a guinea-hen, or a heath-cock,” said Pencroff, “but still, if they are good to eat”—
“I would prefer a guinea hen or a heath cock,” said Pencroff, “but still, if they’re good to eat—”
“They are good to eat,” said Herbert; “their meat is delicious. Besides, I think we can easily get at them with our sticks.”
“They're good to eat,” said Herbert; “their meat is tasty. Plus, I think we can easily reach them with our sticks.”
Slipping through the grass, they reached the foot of a tree whose lower branches were covered with the little birds, who were snapping at the flying insects. Their feathered claws clutched tight the twigs on which they were sitting. Then the hunters rose to their feet, and using their sticks like a scythe, they mowed down whole rows of the couroucous, of whom 105 were knocked over before the stupid birds thought of escape.
Slipping through the grass, they reached the bottom of a tree where the lower branches were filled with little birds that were snapping at the flying insects. Their little claws gripped the twigs tightly as they sat there. Then the hunters stood up, and using their sticks like scythes, they took down whole rows of the couroucous, with 105 birds getting knocked over before the clueless birds realized they needed to escape.
“Good,” said Pencroff, “this is just the sort of game for hunters like us. We could catch them in our hands.”
“Great,” said Pencroff, “this is exactly the kind of game for hunters like us. We could catch them with our bare hands.”
They skewered the couroucous on a switch like field-larks, and continued to explore. The object of the expedition was, of course, to bring back as much game as possible to the Chimneys. So far it had not been altogether attained. They looked about everywhere, and were enraged to see animals escaping through the high grass. If they had only had Top! But Top, most likely, had perished with his master.
They stuck the couroucous on a stick like field-larks and kept exploring. The goal of the expedition was, of course, to bring back as much game as possible to the Chimneys. So far, that hadn’t really happened. They searched everywhere and got frustrated seeing animals escape through the tall grass. If only they had Top! But Top had probably perished with his master.
About 3 o’clock they entered a wood full of juniper trees, at whose aromatic berries flocks of birds were pecking. Suddenly they heard a sound like the blast of a trumpet. It was the note of those gallinaceæ, called “tetras” in the United States. Soon they saw several pairs of them, with brownish-yellow plumage and brown tails. Pencroff determined to capture one of these birds, for they were as big as hens, and their meat as delicious as a pullet. But they would not let him come near them. At last, after several unsuccessful attempts, he said,
About 3 o’clock, they entered a forest filled with juniper trees, where flocks of birds were pecking at the aromatic berries. Suddenly, they heard a sound like a trumpet blast. It was the call of the birds known as “tetras” in the United States. Soon, they spotted several pairs of them, with brownish-yellow feathers and brown tails. Pencroff decided to catch one of these birds because they were as big as hens, and their meat was as tasty as a young chicken. However, the birds wouldn't let him get close. After several failed attempts, he said,
“Well, since we can’t kill them on the wing, we must take them with a line.”
“Well, since we can’t catch them in the air, we need to get them with a line.”
“Like a carp,” cried the wondering Herbert.
“Like a carp,” exclaimed the amazed Herbert.
“Like a carp,” answered the sailor, gravely.
“Like a carp,” the sailor replied seriously.
Pencroff had found in the grass half-a-dozen tetras nests, with two or three eggs in each.
Pencroff had discovered half a dozen tetras nests in the grass, each containing two or three eggs.
He was very careful not to touch these nests, whose owners would certainly return to them. Around these he purposed to draw his lines, not as a snare, but with hook and bait. He took Herbert to some distance from the nests, and there made ready his singular apparatus with the care of a true disciple of Isaac Walton. Herbert watched the work with a natural interest, but without much faith in its success. The lines were made of small lianas tied together, from fifteen to twenty feet long, and stout thorns with bent points, broken from a thicket of dwarf acacias, and fastened to the ends of the lianas, served as hooks, and the great red worms which crawled at their feet made excellent bait. This done, Pencroff, walking stealthily through the grass, placed one end of his hook-and-line close to the nests of the tetras. Then he stole back, took the other end in his hand, and hid himself with Herbert behind a large tree. Herbert, it must be said, was not sanguine of success.
He was very careful not to touch those nests, knowing their owners would definitely come back. Around them, he planned to set his lines, not as a trap, but with a hook and bait. He led Herbert some distance away from the nests and carefully prepared his unique setup like a true disciple of Isaac Walton. Herbert observed the process with genuine interest but didn’t have much faith in its success. The lines were made from small lianas tied together, each about fifteen to twenty feet long, with sturdy thorns that had bent tips, taken from a thicket of dwarf acacias, attached to the ends as hooks. The large red worms crawling at their feet made perfect bait. Once everything was ready, Pencroff quietly moved through the grass, placing one end of his hook-and-line near the tetras’ nests. Then he quietly backed away, took the other end in his hand, and hid with Herbert behind a large tree. It should be noted that Herbert wasn’t optimistic about their chances.
A good half hour passed, but as the sailor had foreseen, several pairs of tetras returned to their nests. They hopped about, pecking the ground, and little suspecting the presence of the hunters, who had taken care to station themselves to leeward of the gallinaceæ. Herbert held his breath with excitement, while Pencroff, with dilated eyes, open month, and lips parted as if to taste a morsel of tetras, scarcely breathed. Meanwhile the gallinaceæ walked heedlessly among the hooks. Pencroff then gave little jerks, which moved the bait up and down as if the worms were still alive. How much more intense was his excitement than the fisherman’s who cannot see the approach of his prey!
A good half hour went by, but as the sailor had predicted, several groups of tetras returned to their nests. They hopped around, pecking the ground, completely unaware of the hunters who had positioned themselves downwind from the gallinaceæ. Herbert held his breath in excitement, while Pencroff, eyes wide and mouth open as if ready to savor a piece of tetras, barely breathed. Meanwhile, the gallinaceæ wandered carelessly among the hooks. Pencroff then made small jerks, making the bait jiggle as if the worms were still alive. His excitement was so much more intense than that of the fisherman who can’t see his catch coming!
The jerks soon aroused the attention of the gallinaceæ, who began to peck at the bait. Three of the greediest swallowed hook and bait together. Suddenly, with a quick jerk, Pencroff pulled in his line, and the flapping of wings showed that the birds were taken.
The jabs quickly caught the attention of the birds, who started to peck at the bait. Three of the hungriest ones swallowed both the hook and the bait. Suddenly, with a swift tug, Pencroff reeled in his line, and the flapping of wings indicated that the birds were caught.
“Hurrah!” cried he, springing upon the game, of which he was master in a moment. Herbert clapped his hands. It was the first time he had seen birds taken with a line; but the modest sailor said it was not his first attempt, and, moreover, that the merit of the invention was not his.
“Yay!” he shouted, jumping onto the game, which he took control of in an instant. Herbert clapped his hands. It was the first time he had seen birds caught with a line; but the humble sailor said it wasn't his first try, and also that he wasn't the one who came up with the idea.
“And at any rate,” said he, “in our present situation we must hope for many such contrivances.”
“And anyway,” he said, “given our current situation, we need to hope for many more of these clever ideas.”
The tetras were tied together by the feet, and Pencroff, happy that they were not returning empty handed, and perceiving that the day was ending, thought it best to return home.
The tetras were tied together by their feet, and Pencroff, glad they weren't coming back empty-handed, noticed that the day was coming to an end, so he decided it was best to head home.
Their route was indicated by the river, and following it downward, by 6 o’clock, tired out by their excursion, Herbert and Pencroff re-entered the Chimneys.
Their path was marked by the river, and as they followed it downstream, by 6 o’clock, exhausted from their trip, Herbert and Pencroff returned to the Chimneys.
CHAPTER VII.
NEB HAS NOT YET RETURNED—THE REFLECTIONS OF THE REPORTER—THE SUPPER—PROSPECT OF A BAD NIGHT—THE STORM IS FRIGHTFUL—THEY GO OUT INTO THE NIGHT—STRUGGLE WITH THE RAIN AND WIND.
NEB STILL HASN'T RETURNED—THE REPORTER'S THOUGHTS—THE DINNER—THE CHANCE OF A ROUGH NIGHT—THE STORM IS TERRIFYING—THEY HEAD OUT INTO THE NIGHT—FIGHTING AGAINST THE RAIN AND WIND.
Gideon Spilett stood motionless upon the shore, his arms crossed, gazing on the sea, whose horizon was darkened towards the east by a huge black cloud mounting rapidly into the zenith. The wind, already strong, was freshening, the heavens had an angry look, and the first symptoms of a heavy blow were manifesting themselves.
Gideon Spilett stood still on the shore, arms crossed, staring at the sea, where a massive black cloud was quickly rising in the eastern sky. The wind was already strong and picking up, the sky looked threatening, and the initial signs of a serious storm were becoming apparent.
Herbert went into the Chimneys, and Pencroff walked towards the reporter, who was too absorbed to notice his approach.
Herbert entered the Chimneys, and Pencroff walked over to the reporter, who was too engrossed to notice him coming.
“We will have a bad night, Mr. Spilett,” said the sailor. “Wind and rain enough for Mother Cary’s chickens.”
“We're in for a rough night, Mr. Spilett,” said the sailor. “There's enough wind and rain for Mother Cary’s chickens.”
The reporter turning, and perceiving Pencroff, asked this question:—
The reporter turned and noticed Pencroff, then asked this question:—
“How far off from the shore do you think was the basket when it was struck by the sea that carried away our companion?”
“How far from the shore do you think the basket was when it got hit by the sea that took away our friend?”
The sailor had not expected this question. He reflected an instant before answering:—
The sailor hadn't anticipated this question. He paused for a moment before responding:—
“Two cables’ lengths or more.”
"Two or more cable lengths."
“How much is a cable’s length?” demanded Spilett.
“How long is the cable?” Spilett asked.
“About 120 fathoms, or 600 feet.”
“About 120 fathoms, or 600 feet.”
“Then,” said the reporter, “Cyrus Smith would have disappeared not more than 1,200 feet from the shore?”
“Then,” said the reporter, “Cyrus Smith would have vanished no more than 1,200 feet from the shore?”
“Not more than that.”
"Nothing more than that."
“And his dog, too?”
"And his dog, right?"
“Yes.”
"Yep."
“What astonishes me,” said the reporter, “admitting that our companion and Top have perished, is the fact that neither the body of the dog nor of his master has been cast upon the shore.”
“What surprises me,” said the reporter, “accepting that our friend and Top have died, is the fact that neither the body of the dog nor his master has washed up on the shore.”
“That is not astonishing with so heavy a sea,” replied the sailor. “Moreover, it is quite possible that there are currents which have carried them farther up the coast.”
“That’s not surprising with such a rough sea,” replied the sailor. “Plus, it’s very possible that there are currents that have pushed them further up the coast.”
“Then it is really your opinion that our companion has been drowned?” asked, once more, the reporter.
“Then it's really your belief that our friend has drowned?” the reporter asked again.
“That is my opinion.”
“That’s just my opinion.”
“And my opinion, Pencroff,” said Spilett, “with all respect for your experience, is, that in this absolute disappearance of both Cyrus and Top, living or dead, there is something inexplicable and incredible.”
“And in my opinion, Pencroff,” said Spilett, “with all due respect for your experience, the complete disappearance of both Cyrus and Top, whether alive or dead, is something that’s beyond explanation and truly unbelievable.”
“I wish I could think as you do, sir,” responded Pencroff, “but, unhappily, I cannot.”
“I wish I could think like you do, sir,” Pencroff replied, “but unfortunately, I can't.”
After thus speaking the sailor returned to the Chimneys. A good fire was burning in the fireplace. Herbert had just thrown on a fresh armful of wood, and its flames lit up the dark recesses of the corridor.
After saying that, the sailor went back to the Chimneys. A nice fire was roaring in the fireplace. Herbert had just added a new load of wood, and its flames illuminated the dark corners of the corridor.
Pencroff began at once to busy himself about dinner. It seemed expedient to provide something substantial, as all stood in need of nourishment, so two tetras were quickly plucked, spitted upon a stick, and placed to roast before at blazing fire. The couroucous were reserved for the next day.
Pencroff immediately started getting dinner ready. It made sense to prepare something filling since everyone needed to eat, so he quickly plucked two tetras, skewered them on a stick, and set them to roast over a blazing fire. The couroucous were saved for the next day.
At 7 o’clock Neb was still absent, and Pencroff began to be alarmed about him. He feared that he might have met with some accident in this unknown land, or that the poor fellow had been drawn by despair to some rash act. Herbert, on the contrary, argued that Neb’s absence was owing to some fresh discovery which had induced him to prolong his researches. And anything new must be to Cyrus Smith’s advantage. Why had not Neb come back, if some hope was not detaining him? Perhaps he had found some sign or footprint which had put him upon the track. Perhaps, at this moment he was following the trail. Perhaps, already, he was beside his master.
At 7 o’clock, Neb was still missing, and Pencroff started to worry about him. He feared that he might have had some accident in this unfamiliar land, or that the poor guy had been driven by despair to do something reckless. Herbert, on the other hand, suggested that Neb’s absence was due to some new discovery that had led him to extend his search. And anything new must be beneficial to Cyrus Smith. Why hadn't Neb returned if he wasn’t held back by some hope? Maybe he had found some clues or footprints that led him on the right track. Maybe, at that moment, he was following the trail. Maybe he was already with his master.
Thus the lad spoke and reasoned, unchecked by his companions. The reporter nodded approval, but Pencroff thought it more probable that Neb, in his search, had pushed on so far that he had not been able to return.
Thus the guy spoke and reasoned, without anyone stopping him. The reporter nodded in approval, but Pencroff thought it was more likely that Neb, in his search, had gone so far that he couldn't make it back.
Meantime, Herbert, excited by vague presentiments, manifested a desire to go to meet Neb. But Pencroff showed him that it would be useless in the darkness and storm to attempt to find traces of the negro, and, that the better course was, to wait. If, by morning, Neb had not returned, Pencroff would not hesitate joining the lad in a search for him.
Meantime, Herbert, feeling a mix of vague premonitions, expressed a desire to go look for Neb. But Pencroff pointed out that trying to find the man in the dark and stormy weather would be pointless, and that it was wiser to wait. If Neb hadn't come back by morning, Pencroff would gladly join the boy in searching for him.
Gideon Spilett concurred with the sailor in his opinion that they had better remain together, and Herbert, though tearfully, gave up the project. The reporter could not help embracing the generous lad.
Gideon Spilett agreed with the sailor that it was better for them to stick together, and Herbert, despite being emotional, abandoned the plan. The reporter couldn't help but hug the kind young man.
The storm began. A furious gust of wind passed over the coast from the southeast. They heard the sea, which was out, roaring upon the reef. The whirlwind drove the rain in clouds along the shore. The sand, stirred up by the wind, mingled with the rain, and the air was filled with mineral as well as aqueous dust. Between the mouth of the river and the cliff’s face, the wind whirled about as in a maelstrom, and, finding no other outlet than the narrow valley through which ran the stream, it rushed through this with irresistible violence.
The storm hit. A fierce gust of wind came in from the southeast along the coast. They could hear the sea crashing on the reef as it receded. The whirlwind blew rain in heavy clouds down the shore. The wind kicked up sand, mixing it with the rain, filling the air with both mineral and water dust. Between the river mouth and the cliff's edge, the wind swirled like a whirlpool, and with no other way out but the narrow valley where the stream flowed, it thundered through with unstoppable force.
Often, too, the smoke from the chimney, driven back down its narrow vent, filled the corridors, and rendered them uninhabitable. Therefore, when the tetras were cooked Pencroff let the fire smoulder, only preserving some clear embers among the ashes.
Often, the smoke from the chimney, pushed back down its narrow vent, filled the hallways and made them unlivable. So, when the tetras were cooked, Pencroff let the fire smolder, only keeping some glowing embers among the ashes.
At 8 o’clock Neb had not returned; but they could not help admitting that now the tempest alone was sufficient to account for his non-appearance, and that, probably, he had sought refuge in some cavern, waiting the end of the storm, or, at least, daybreak. As to going to meet him under present circumstances, that was simply impossible.
At 8 o'clock, Neb still hadn't come back; but they couldn't deny that the storm alone could explain why he was missing, and that he had likely found shelter in some cave, waiting for the storm to pass or, at least, for dawn. As for going out to find him in the current conditions, that was just not an option.
The birds were all they had for supper, but the party found them excellent eating. Pencroff and Herbert, their appetite sharpened by their long walk, devoured them. Then each one retired to his corner, and Herbert, lying beside the sailor, extended before the fireplace, was soon asleep.
The birds were all they had for dinner, but the group found them delicious. Pencroff and Herbert, their appetite whetted by their long walk, gobbled them up. Then everyone headed to their own spot, and Herbert, lying next to the sailor, stretched out by the fireplace and quickly fell asleep.
Outside, as the night advanced, the storm developed formidable proportions. It was a hurricane equal to that which had carried the prisoners from Richmond. Such tempests, pregnant with catastrophes, spreading terror over a vast area, their fury withstood by no obstacle, are frequent during the equinox. We can understand how a coast facing the east, and exposed to the full fury of the storm, was attacked with a violence perfectly indescribable.
Outside, as the night went on, the storm grew intense. It was a hurricane just like the one that took the prisoners from Richmond. These storms, loaded with destruction and spreading fear over a large area, hit with such force that nothing could stand against them, especially during the equinox. It’s easy to see how a coastline facing east, directly in the path of the storm, was hit with a level of violence that’s hard to describe.
Happily the heap of rocks forming the Chimneys was composed of solid, enormous blocks of granite, though some of them, imperfectly balanced, seemed to tremble upon their foundations. Pencroff, placing his hand against the walls, could feel their rapid vibrations; but he said to himself, with reason, that there was no real danger, and that the improvised retreat would not tumble about their ears. Nevertheless, he heard the sound of rocks, torn from the top of the plateau by the gusts, crashing upon the shore. And some, falling perpendicularly, struck the Chimneys and flew off into fragments. Twice the sailor rose, and went to the opening of the corridor, to look abroad. But there was no danger from these inconsiderable showers of stones, and he returned to his place before the fire, where the embers glowed among the ashes.
Happily, the pile of rocks that made up the Chimneys was made of solid, massive blocks of granite, though some of them, not perfectly balanced, seemed to shake on their foundations. Pencroff, placing his hand against the walls, could feel their quick vibrations; but he reasonably reassured himself that there was no real danger and that their makeshift shelter wouldn't collapse on them. Still, he heard the sound of rocks being ripped from the top of the plateau by the gusts, crashing down onto the shore. Some fell straight down, hitting the Chimneys and shattering into pieces. Twice, the sailor got up and went to the opening of the corridor to look outside. But there was no danger from these minor showers of stones, so he returned to his spot by the fire, where the coals glowed among the ashes.
In spite of the fury and fracas of the tempest Herbert slept profoundly, and, at length, sleep took possession of Pencroff, whose sailor life had accustomed him to such demonstrations. Gideon Spilett, who was kept awake by anxiety, reproached himself for not having accompanied Neb. We have seen that he had not given up all hope, and the presentiments which had disturbed Herbert had affected him also. His thoughts were fixed upon Neb; why had not the negro returned? He tossed about on his sandy couch, unheeding the warfare of the elements. Then, overcome by fatigue, he would close his eyes for an instant, only to be awakened by some sudden thought.
In spite of the storm's intensity and chaos, Herbert slept deeply, and eventually, Pencroff also fell asleep, as his life as a sailor had made him accustomed to such conditions. Gideon Spilett, unable to sleep due to worry, felt guilty for not having gone with Neb. As we know, he hadn’t completely lost hope, and the premonitions that had troubled Herbert also weighed on him. His mind was focused on Neb; why hadn’t the man returned? He shifted on his sandy bed, ignoring the raging storm outside. Then, overwhelmed by exhaustion, he would briefly close his eyes, only to be jolted awake by some sudden thought.
Meantime the night advanced; and it was about 2 o’clock when Pencroff was suddenly aroused from a deep sleep by finding himself vigorously shaken.
Meantime, the night went on; and it was around 2 o'clock when Pencroff was suddenly jolted awake by someone shaking him intensely.
“What’s the matter?” he cried, rousing and collecting himself with the quickness peculiar to sailors.
“What’s wrong?” he shouted, waking up and getting himself together with the quickness unique to sailors.
The reporter was bending over him and saying:—
The reporter was leaning over him and saying:—
“Listen, Pencroff, listen!”
“Hey, Pencroff, listen!”
The sailor listened, but could hear no sounds other than those caused by the gusts.
The sailor listened, but could hear no sounds other than those made by the gusts.
“It is the wind,” he said.
“It’s the wind,” he said.
“No,” answered Spilett, listening again, “I think I heard—”
“No,” replied Spilett, listening once more, “I think I heard—”
“What?”
“Excuse me?”
“The barking of a dog!”
"Dog barking!"
“A dog!” cried Pencroff, springing to his feet.
“A dog!” shouted Pencroff, jumping to his feet.
“Yes—the barking—”
"Yeah—the barking—"
“Impossible!” answered the sailor. “How, in the roarings of the tempest—”
“Impossible!” replied the sailor. “How, in the roar of the storm—”
“Wait—listen,” said the reporter.
“Hold on—listen,” said the reporter.
Pencroff listened most attentively, and at length, during a lull, he thought he caught the sound of distant barking.
Pencroff listened carefully, and finally, during a pause, he thought he heard the sound of barking in the distance.
“Is it?” asked the reporter, squeezing the sailor’s hand.
“Is it?” asked the reporter, squeezing the sailor’s hand.
“Yes—yes!” said Pencroff.
“Yeah—yeah!” said Pencroff.
“It is Top! It is Top!” cried Herbert, who had just wakened, and the three rushed to the entrance of the Chimneys.
“It’s amazing! It’s amazing!” shouted Herbert, who had just woken up, and the three hurried to the entrance of the Chimneys.
They had great difficulty in getting out, as the wind drove against them with fury, but at last they succeeded, and then they were obliged to steady themselves against the rocks. They were unable to speak, but they looked about them. The darkness was absolute. Sea, sky, and earth, were one intense blackness. It seemed as if there was not one particle of light diffused in the atmosphere.
They struggled to get out, as the wind whipped against them fiercely, but eventually, they managed to succeed and had to lean against the rocks to steady themselves. They couldn't speak, but they scanned their surroundings. The darkness was complete. The sea, sky, and land merged into a deep black void. It felt like there wasn't a single ray of light in the air.
For some moments the reporter and his two companions stood in this place, beset by the gusts, drenched by the rain, blinded by the sand. Then again, in the hush of the storm, they heard, far away, the barking of a dog. This must be Top. But was he alone or accompanied? Probably alone, for if Neb had been with him, the negro would have hastened, at once, to the Chimneys.
For a little while, the reporter and his two companions stood in this spot, buffeted by the wind, soaked by the rain, and blinded by the sand. Then, in the quiet of the storm, they heard, in the distance, the barking of a dog. That should be Top. But was he by himself or with someone? Probably by himself, because if Neb had been with him, the guy would have rushed straight to the Chimneys.
The sailor pressed the reporter’s hand in a manner signifying that he was to remain without, and then returning to the corridor, emerged a moment later with a lighted fagot, which he threw into the darkness, at the same time whistling shrilly. At this signal, which seemed to have been looked for, the answering barks came nearer, and soon a dog bounded into the corridor, followed by the three companions. An armful of wood was thrown upon the coals, brightly lighting up the passage.
The sailor shook the reporter’s hand to indicate he should stay outside, then went back into the corridor and came out a moment later with a lit torch, which he tossed into the darkness while whistling loudly. At this signal, which seemed to have been anticipated, the barking of dogs grew closer, and soon a dog leaped into the corridor, followed by the three companions. A load of wood was tossed onto the coals, brightly illuminating the passage.
“It is Top!” cried Herbert.
“It’s awesome!” cried Herbert.
It was indeed Top, a magnificent Anglo-Norman, uniting in the cross of the two breeds those qualities—swiftness of foot and keenness of scent—indispensable in coursing dogs. But he was alone! Neither his master nor Neb accompanied him.
It was indeed Top, a magnificent Anglo-Norman, combining the best traits of both breeds—speed and a keen sense of smell—essential for coursing dogs. But he was alone! Neither his owner nor Neb was with him.
It seemed inexplicable how, through the darkness and storm, the dog’s instinct had directed him to the Chimneys, a place he was unacquainted with. But still more unaccountable was the fact that he was neither fatigued nor exhausted nor soiled with mud or sand. Herbert had drawn him towards him, patting his head; and the dog rubbed his neck against the lad’s hands.
It was hard to understand how, through the darkness and storm, the dog’s instincts had led him to the Chimneys, a place he didn’t know. But even more surprising was that he was neither tired nor dirty from mud or sand. Herbert had pulled him close, petting his head, and the dog nuzzled against the boy’s hands.
“If the dog is found, the master will be found also,” said the reporter.
“If the dog is found, the owner will be found too,” said the reporter.
“God grant it!” responded Herbert. “Come, let us set out. Top will guide us!”
“God grant it!” replied Herbert. “Come on, let’s leave. Top will lead the way!”
Pencroff made no objection. He saw that the dog’s cunning had disproved his conjectures.
Pencroff didn’t object. He realized that the dog’s cleverness had proven him wrong.
“Let us set out at once,” he said; and covering the fire so that it could be relighted on their return, and preceded by the dog, who seemed to invite their departure, the sailor, having gathered up the remnants of the supper, followed by the reporter and Herbert, rushed into the darkness.
“Let’s get going right away,” he said; and after covering the fire so it could be rekindled when they got back, and with the dog leading the way as if urging them to leave, the sailor, having packed up the leftover dinner, followed by the reporter and Herbert, dashed into the darkness.
The tempest, then in all its violence, was, perhaps, at its maximum intensity. The new moon had not sufficient light to pierce the clouds. It was difficult to follow a straight course. The better way, therefore, was to trust to the instinct of Top; which was done. The reporter and the lad walked behind the dog, and the sailor followed after. To speak was impossible. The rain, dispersed by the wind, was not heavy, but the strength of the storm was terrible.
The storm, at its worst, was probably at its peak intensity. The new moon didn’t shine enough to break through the clouds. It was hard to stay on a straight path. So, the best option was to rely on Top’s instincts, which they did. The reporter and the boy walked behind the dog while the sailor trailed behind. It was impossible to talk. The rain, scattered by the wind, wasn’t heavy, but the power of the storm was overwhelming.
Fortunately, as it came from the southeast, the wind was at the back of the party, and the sand, hurled from behind, did not prevent their march. Indeed, they were often blown along so rapidly as nearly to be overthrown. But they were sustained by a great hope. This time, at least, they were not wandering at random. They felt, no doubt, that Neb had found his master and had sent the faithful dog to them. But was the engineer living, or had Neb summoned his companions only to render the last services to the dead?
Fortunately, since the wind was coming from the southeast, it was at the back of the group, and the sand blown from behind didn’t stop their march. In fact, they were often pushed along so quickly that they almost fell over. But they were driven by a strong hope. This time, at least, they weren’t wandering aimlessly. They felt, without a doubt, that Neb had found his master and sent the loyal dog to them. But was the engineer alive, or had Neb brought his friends together just to pay final respects to the dead?
After having passed the smooth face of rock, which they carefully avoided, the party stopped to take breath. The angle of the cliff sheltered them from the wind, and they could breathe freely after this tramp, or rather race, of a quarter of an hour. They were now able to hear themselves speak, and the lad having pronounced the name of Smith, the dog seemed to say by his glad barking that his master was safe.
After they passed the smooth rock face, which they avoided carefully, the group stopped to catch their breath. The angle of the cliff protected them from the wind, and they could breathe easily after this trek, or more like a race, that lasted about fifteen minutes. They could now hear each other speak, and when the boy said the name Smith, the dog seemed to bark happily, indicating that his owner was safe.
“Saved! He is saved! Isn’t he, Top?” repeated the boy. And the dog barked his answer.
“Saved! He is saved! Isn’t he, Top?” the boy repeated. And the dog barked in reply.
It was half-past 2 when the march was resumed. The sea began to rise, and this, which was a spring tide backed up by the wind, threatened to be very high. The tremendous breakers thundered against the reef, assailing it so violently as probably to pass completely over the islet, which was invisible. The coast was no longer sheltered by this long breakwater, but was exposed to the full fury of the open sea.
It was 2:30 when the march started up again. The sea began to rise, and since this was a spring tide driven by the wind, it looked like it was going to be very high. The massive waves crashed against the reef, hitting it so hard that they could completely cover the islet, which was out of sight. The coast was no longer protected by this long breakwater and was now facing the full force of the open sea.
After the party were clear of the precipice the storm attacked them again with fury. Crouching, with backs still to the wind, they followed Top, who never hesitated in his course. Mounting towards the north, they had upon their right the endless line of breakers deafening them with its thunders, and upon their left a region buried in darkness. One thing was certain, that they were upon an open plain, as the wind rushed over them without rebounding as it had done from the granite cliffs.
After the group moved away from the edge, the storm hit them once more with full force. Crouching down with their backs to the wind, they followed Top, who never wavered in his direction. As they headed north, they had the endless line of crashing waves thundering on their right, while a dark area loomed on their left. One thing was clear: they were on an open plain, as the wind rushed past them without bouncing off the granite cliffs like before.
By 4 o’clock they estimated the distance travelled as eight miles. The clouds had risen a little, and the wind was drier and colder. Insufficiently clad, the three companions suffered cruelly, but no murmur passed their lips. They were determined to follow Top wherever he wished to lead them.
By 4 o’clock, they figured they had covered eight miles. The clouds had lifted a bit, and the wind felt drier and colder. Dressed too lightly, the three friends were really uncomfortable, but they didn’t complain. They were set on following Top wherever he wanted to take them.
Towards 5 o’clock the day began to break. At first, overhead, where some grey shadowings bordered the clouds, and presently, under a dark band a bright streak of light sharply defined the sea horizon. The crests of the billows shone with a yellow light and the foam revealed its whiteness. At the same time, on the left, the hilly parts of the shore were confusedly defined in grey outlines upon the blackness of the night. At 6 o’clock it was daylight. The clouds sped rapidly overhead. The sailor and his companions were some six miles from the Chimneys, following a very flat shore, bordered in the offing by a reef of rocks whose surface only was visible above the high tide. On the left the country sloped up into downs bristling with thistles, giving a forbidding aspect to the vast sandy region. The shore was low, and offered no other resistance to the ocean than an irregular chain of hillocks. Here and there was a tree, leaning its trunks and branches towards the west. Far behind, to the southwest, extended the borders of the forest.
Towards 5 o’clock, dawn began to break. At first, above, where some grey shadows lined the clouds, and soon after, below a dark band, a bright streak of light sharply outlined the sea’s horizon. The wave crests glimmered with a yellow light, and the foam showed its whiteness. At the same time, on the left, the hilly areas of the shore were vaguely outlined in grey against the darkness of the night. By 6 o’clock, it was daylight. The clouds raced quickly overhead. The sailor and his companions were about six miles from the Chimneys, following a very flat shore, bordered offshore by a reef of rocks whose surface was only visible above the high tide. On the left, the land rose into hills covered with thistles, giving a grim appearance to the vast sandy area. The shore was low and provided no other barrier to the ocean than an irregular line of small hills. Here and there was a tree, leaning its trunk and branches toward the west. Far behind, to the southwest, the forest extended.
At this moment Top gave unequivocal signs of excitement. He ran ahead, returned, and seemed to try to hurry them on. The dog had left the coast, and guided by his wonderful instinct, without any hesitation had gone among the downs. They followed him through a region absolutely devoid of life.
At that moment, Top showed clear signs of excitement. He ran ahead, came back, and appeared to urge them to move faster. The dog had left the coast and, guided by his remarkable instinct, without any doubt, had gone into the hills. They followed him through an area completely empty of life.
The border of the downs, itself large, was composed of hills and hillocks, unevenly scattered here and there. It was like a little Switzerland of sand, and nothing but a dog’s astonishing instinct could find the way.
The edge of the downs, which was quite large, was made up of hills and small mounds, unevenly spread out in various places. It resembled a mini Switzerland of sand, and only a dog’s remarkable instincts could navigate through it.
Five minutes after leaving the shore the reporter and his companions reached a sort of hollow, formed in the back of a high down, before which Top stopped with a loud bark. The three entered the cave.
Five minutes after leaving the shore, the reporter and his companions arrived at a hollow formed in the back of a high hill, where Top stopped with a loud bark. The three of them entered the cave.
Neb was there, kneeling beside a body extended upon a bed of grass—
Neb was there, kneeling next to a body laid out on a bed of grass—
It was the body of Cyrus Smith.
It was the body of Cyrus Smith.
CHAPTER VIII.
IS CYPRUS SMITH ALIVE?—NEB’S STORY—FOOTPRINTS —AN INSOLUBLE QUESTION—THE FIRST WORDS OF SMITH—COMPARING THE FOOTPRINTS—RETURN TO THE CHIMNEYS—PENCROFF DEJECTED.
IS CYPRUS SMITH ALIVE?—NEB’S STORY—FOOTPRINTS—AN UNRESOLVED QUESTION—THE FIRST WORDS OF SMITH—COMPARING THE FOOTPRINTS—RETURN TO THE CHIMNEYS—PENCROFF DISAPPOINTED.
Neb did not move. The sailor uttered one word.
Neb didn't move. The sailor said one word.
“Living!” he cried.
"Living!" he exclaimed.
The negro did not answer. Spilett and Pencroff turned pale. Herbert, clasping his hands, stood motionless. But it was evident that the poor negro, overcome by grief, had neither seen his companions nor heard the voice of the sailor.
The Black man didn’t respond. Spilett and Pencroff turned white. Herbert, with his hands clasped, stood still. But it was clear that the poor man, overwhelmed by sorrow, had neither noticed his friends nor heard the sailor’s voice.
The reporter knelt down beside the motionless body, and, having opened the clothing, pressed his ear to the chest of the engineer. A minute, which seemed an age, passed, daring which he tried to detect some movement of the heart.
The reporter knelt next to the still body and, after opening the clothing, pressed his ear to the engineer's chest. A minute passed, feeling like an eternity, as he tried to sense any heartbeat.
Neb raised up a little, and looked on as if in a trance. Overcome by exhaustion, prostrated by grief, the poor fellow was hardly recognizable. He believed his master dead.
Neb lifted his head a bit and stared blankly, as if he were in a daze. Completely worn out and overwhelmed by sorrow, the poor guy was barely recognizable. He thought his master was dead.
Gideon Spilett, after a long and attentive examination, rose up.
Gideon Spilett, after a thorough and careful look, stood up.
“He lives!” he said.
"He's alive!" he said.
Pencroff, in his turn, knelt down beside Cyrus Smith; he also detected some heartbeats, and a slight breath issuing from the lips of the engineer. Herbert, at a word from the reporter, hurried in search of water. A hundred paces off he found a clear brook swollen by the late rains and filtered by the sand. But there was nothing, not even a shell, in which to carry the water; so the lad had to content himself with soaking his handkerchief in the stream, and hastened back with it to the cave.
Pencroff, in turn, knelt beside Cyrus Smith; he also noticed some heartbeats and a faint breath coming from the engineer's lips. At the reporter's prompt, Herbert quickly went to look for water. A hundred paces away, he found a clear stream swollen from the recent rain and filtered by the sand. But there was nothing, not even a shell, to carry the water; so the boy had to settle for soaking his handkerchief in the stream and hurried back to the cave with it.
Happily the handkerchief held sufficient for Spilett’s purpose, which was simply to moisten the lips of the engineer. The drops of fresh water produced an instantaneous effect. A sigh escaped from the breast of Smith, and it seemed as if he attempted to speak.
Happily, the handkerchief had enough for Spilett's purpose, which was just to moisten the engineer's lips. The drops of fresh water had an immediate effect. A sigh came from Smith's chest, and it looked like he tried to say something.
“We shall save him,” said the reporter. Neb took heart at these words. He removed the clothing from his master to see if his body was anywhere wounded. But neither on his head nor body nor limbs was there a bruise or even a scratch, an astonishing circumstance, since he must have been tossed about among the rocks; even his hands were uninjured, and it was difficult to explain how the engineer should exhibit no mark of the efforts which he must have made in getting over the reef.
“We're going to save him,” said the reporter. Neb felt encouraged by these words. He took off his master's clothes to check if his body had any injuries. But there were no bruises or scratches on his head, body, or limbs, which was surprising, considering he must have been thrown around among the rocks; even his hands were unharmed, and it was hard to understand how the engineer had no signs of the struggles he must have faced while getting over the reef.
But the explanation of this circumstance would come later, when Cyrus Smith could speak. At present, it was necessary to restore his consciousness, and it was probable that this result could be accomplished by friction. For this purpose they mode use of the sailor’s pea-jacket. The engineer, warmed by this rude rubbing, moved his arms slightly, and his breathing began to be more regular. He was dying from exhaustion, and, doubtless, had not the reporter and his companions arrived, it would have been all over with Cyrus Smith.
But the explanation for this situation would come later when Cyrus Smith could talk. For now, it was important to bring him back to consciousness, and it seemed likely that this could be done through friction. To achieve this, they used the sailor’s pea-jacket. The engineer, warmed by this rough rubbing, slightly moved his arms, and his breathing started to become more regular. He was near death from exhaustion, and without the reporter and his companions showing up, Cyrus Smith would have been done for.
“You thought he was dead?” asked the sailor.
“You thought he was dead?” the sailor asked.
“Yes, I thought so,” answered Neb. “And if Top had not found you and brought you back, I would have buried my master and died beside him.”
“Yes, I figured that,” Neb replied. “And if Top hadn’t found you and brought you back, I would have buried my master and died next to him.”
The engineer had had a narrow escape!
The engineer had a close call!
Then Neb told them what had happened. The day before, after having left the Chimneys at day-break, he had followed along the coast in a direction due north, until he reached that part of the beach which he had already visited. There, though, as he said, without hope of success, he searched the shore, the rocks, the sand for any marks that could guide him, examining most carefully that part which was above high-water mark, as below that point the ebb and flow of the tide would have effaced all traces. He did not hope to find his master living. It was the discovery of the body which he sought, that he might bury it with his own hands. He searched a long time, without success. It seemed as if nothing human had ever been upon that desolate shore. Of the millions of shell-fish lying out of reach of the tide, not a shell was broken. There was no sign of a landing having ever been made there. The negro then decided to continue some miles further up the coast. It was possible that the currents had carried the body to some distant point. For Neb knew that a corpse, floating a little distance from a low shore, was almost certain, sooner or later, to be thrown upon the strand, and he was desirous to look upon his master one last time.
Then Neb told them what had happened. The day before, after leaving the Chimneys at dawn, he had followed the coast heading due north until he reached the part of the beach he had already visited. There, though he said he had no hope of success, he searched the shore, the rocks, and the sand for any signs that could guide him, carefully examining the area above the high-water mark, since below that point the tide would have washed away any traces. He didn’t expect to find his master alive. He was looking for the body so he could bury it himself. He searched for a long time without any luck. It seemed like no one had ever set foot on that desolate shore. Of the millions of shellfish lying out of reach of the tide, not a single shell was broken. There was no sign that anyone had ever landed there. So Neb decided to go a few more miles further up the coast. It was possible that the currents had carried the body to a distant point. Neb knew that a corpse floating a little way off a low shore was almost certain to wash up eventually, and he wanted to see his master one last time.
“I followed the shore two miles further, looking at it at low and high water, hardly hoping to find anything, when yesterday evening, about 5 o’clock, I discovered footprints upon the sand.”
“I walked along the shore for another two miles, observing it at low and high tide, barely expecting to find anything, when yesterday evening, around 5 o’clock, I noticed footprints in the sand.”
“Footprints,” cried Pencroff.
"Footprints," shouted Pencroff.
“Yes, sir,” replied Neb.
"Yes, sir," Neb replied.
“And did they begin at the water?” demanded the reporter.
“And did they start at the water?” asked the reporter.
“No,” answered the negro, “above high-water mark; below that the tide had washed out the others.”
“No,” the Black man replied, “above high-water mark; below that the tide had washed out the others.”
“Go on, Neb,” said Spilett.
“Go ahead, Neb,” said Spilett.
“The sight of these footprints made me wild with joy. They were very plain, and went towards the downs. I followed them for a quarter of an hour, running so as not to tread on them. Five minutes later, as it was growing dark, I heard a dog bark. It was Top. And he brought me here, to my master.”
“The sight of these footprints filled me with joy. They were clear and headed toward the hills. I followed them for about fifteen minutes, running to avoid stepping on them. Five minutes later, as it was getting dark, I heard a dog bark. It was Top. And he led me here, to my master.”
Neb finished his recital by telling of his grief at the discovery of the inanimate body. He had tried to discover some signs of life still remaining in it. But all his efforts were in vain. There was nothing, therefore, to do but to perform the last offices to him whom he had loved so well. Then he thought of his companions. They, too, would wish to look once more upon their comrade. Top was there. Could he not rely upon the sagacity of that faithful animal? So having pronounced several times the name of the reporter, who, of all the engineer’s companions, was best known by Top, and having at the same time motioned towards the south, the dog bounded off in the direction indicated.
Neb finished his recital by sharing his sorrow over finding the lifeless body. He had tried to find any signs of life still in it. But all his efforts were futile. There was nothing left to do but perform the final rites for the one he had loved so dearly. Then he thought about his companions. They, too, would want to see their friend one last time. Top was there. Could he not trust the instincts of that loyal animal? So, having called out the name of the reporter, who was the most familiar to Top among the engineer’s friends, and at the same time gestured toward the south, the dog took off in the direction he pointed.
We have seen how, guided by an almost supernatural instinct, the dog had arrived at the Chimneys.
We have seen how, guided by almost supernatural instincts, the dog had arrived at the Chimneys.
Neb’s companions listened to his story with the greatest attention. How the engineer had been able to reach this cave in the midst of the downs, more than a mile from the beach, was as inexplicable as was his escape from the waves and rocks without a scratch.
Neb’s friends listened to his story with rapt attention. How the engineer managed to find this cave in the hills, over a mile away from the beach, was just as baffling as his escape from the waves and rocks without a scratch.
“So you, Neb,” said the reporter, “did not bring your master to this place?”
“So you, Neb,” said the reporter, “didn’t bring your boss to this place?”
“No, it was not I,” answered Neb.
“No, it wasn’t me,” replied Neb.
“He certainly could not have come alone,” said Pencroff.
“He definitely couldn’t have come alone,” said Pencroff.
“But he must have done it, though it does not seem credible,” said the reporter.
“But he must have done it, even if it doesn’t seem believable,” said the reporter.
They must wait for the solution of the mystery until the engineer could speak. Fortunately the rubbing had re-established the circulation of the blood, and life was returning. Smith moved his arm again, then his head, and a second time some incoherent words escaped his lips.
They had to wait for the mystery to be solved until the engineer could talk. Luckily, the rubbing had gotten the blood flowing again, and life was coming back. Smith moved his arm again, then his head, and once more some jumbled words slipped from his lips.
Neb, leaning over him, spoke, but the engineer seemed not to hear, and his eyes remained closed. Life was revealing itself by movement, but consciousness had not yet returned. Pencroff had, unfortunately, forgotten to bring the burnt linen, which could have been ignited with a couple of flints, and without it they had no means of making a fire. The pockets of the engineer were empty of everything but his watch. It was therefore the unanimous opinion that Cyrus Smith must be carried to the Chimneys as soon as possible.
Neb leaned over him and spoke, but the engineer didn’t seem to hear, and his eyes stayed closed. Life was showing itself through movement, but he hadn’t regained consciousness yet. Unfortunately, Pencroff had forgotten to bring the burnt linen, which could've been lit with a couple of flints, and without it, they had no way to start a fire. The engineer’s pockets were empty except for his watch. So it was agreed that Cyrus Smith needed to be taken to the Chimneys as soon as possible.
Meantime the attention lavished on the engineer restored him to consciousness sooner than could have been hoped. The moistening of his lips had revived him, and Pencroff conceived the idea of mixing some of the juice of the tetras with water. Herbert ran to the shore and brought back two large shells; and the sailor made a mixture which they introduced between the lips of the engineer, who swallowed it with avidity. His eyes opened. Neb and the reporter were leaning over him.
Meantime, the attention given to the engineer brought him back to consciousness quicker than anyone expected. The moisture on his lips revived him, and Pencroff had the idea of mixing some of the juice from the tetras with water. Herbert ran to the shore and returned with two large shells; the sailor made a mixture which they fed to the engineer, who drank it eagerly. His eyes opened. Neb and the reporter were leaning over him.
“My master! my master!” cried Neb.
“My master! My master!” shouted Neb.
The engineer heard him. He recognized Neb and his companions, and his hand gently pressed theirs.
The engineer heard him. He recognized Neb and his friends, and he lightly shook their hands.
Again he spoke some words—doubtless the same which he had before uttered, and which indicated that some thoughts were troubling him. This time the words were understood.
Again he spoke a few words—probably the same ones he had said before, which showed that something was bothering him. This time, the words were understood.
“Island or continent?” he murmured.
“Island or continent?” he whispered.
“What the devil do we care,” cried Pencroff, unable to restrain the exclamation, “now that you are alive, sir. Island or continent? “We will find that out later.”
“What do we care,” shouted Pencroff, unable to hold back his exclamation, “now that you’re alive, sir. Island or continent? We’ll figure that out later.”
The engineer made a motion in the affirmative, and then seemed to sleep.
The engineer nodded in agreement and then appeared to doze off.
Taking care not to disturb him, the reporter set to work to provide the most comfortable means of moving him.
Taking care not to disturb him, the reporter got to work to find the most comfortable way to move him.
Neb, Herbert, and Pencroff left the cave and went towards a high down on which were some gnarled trees. On the way the sailor kept repeating:—
Neb, Herbert, and Pencroff left the cave and headed for a high hill dotted with twisted trees. Along the way, the sailor kept repeating:—
“Island or continent! To think of that, at his last gasp! What a man!”
“Island or continent! To think about that, at his last breath! What a guy!”
Having reached the top of the down, Pencroff and his companions tore off the main branches from a tree, a sort of sea pine, sickly and stunted. And with these branches they constructed a litter, which they covered with leaves and grass.
Having reached the top of the slope, Pencroff and his friends tore off the main branches from a tree, a type of sea pine, that was sickly and stunted. They used these branches to build a litter, which they covered with leaves and grass.
This work occupied some little time, and it was 10 o’clock when the three returned to Smith and Spilett.
This work took a little while, and it was 10 o'clock when the three got back to Smith and Spilett.
The engineer had just wakened from the sleep, or rather stupor, in which they had found him. The color had come back to his lips, which had been as pale as death. He raised himself slightly, and looked about, as if questioning where he was.
The engineer had just woken up from the sleep, or rather daze, he had been in. The color had returned to his lips, which had been as pale as death. He propped himself up slightly and looked around, as if trying to figure out where he was.
“Can you listen to me without being tired, Cyrus?” asked the reporter.
“Can you listen to me without getting bored, Cyrus?” asked the reporter.
“Yes,” responded the engineer.
"Yeah," replied the engineer.
“I think,” said the sailor, “that Mr. Smith can listen better after having taken some more of this tetra jelly,—it is really tetra, sir,” he continued, as he gave him some of the mixture, to which he had this time added some of the meat of the bird.
“I think,” said the sailor, “that Mr. Smith can listen better after having some more of this tetra jelly—it's really tetra, sir,” he continued, as he handed him some of the mixture, to which he had now added some of the bird's meat.
Cyrus Smith swallowed these bits of tetra, and the remainder was eaten by his companions, who were suffering from hunger, and who found the repast light enough.
Cyrus Smith swallowed these bits of tetra, and the rest was eaten by his companions, who were starving and found the meal light enough.
“Well,” said the sailor, “there are victuals waiting for us at the Chimneys, for you must know, Mr. Smith, that to the south of here we have a house with rooms and beds and fire-place, and in the pantry dozens of birds which our Herbert calls couroucous. Your litter is ready, and whenever you feel strong enough we will carry you to our house.”
“Well,” said the sailor, “there’s food waiting for us at the Chimneys. You should know, Mr. Smith, that to the south of here we have a house with rooms, beds, and a fireplace, and in the pantry, there are dozens of birds that our Herbert calls couroucous. Your stuff is ready, and whenever you feel strong enough, we’ll carry you to our house.”
“Thanks, my friend,” replied the engineer, “in an hour or two we will go. And now, Spilett, continue.”
“Thanks, my friend,” said the engineer, “we’ll leave in an hour or two. Now, Spilett, go ahead.”
The reporter related everything that had happened. Recounting the events unknown to Smith; the last plunge of the balloon, the landing upon this unknown shore, its deserted appearance, the discovery of the Chimneys, the search for the engineer, the devotion of Neb, and what they owed to Top’s intelligence, etc.
The reporter shared everything that had happened. He recounted the events that Smith was unaware of: the balloon's final descent, landing on this unfamiliar shore, its deserted look, the discovery of the Chimneys, the search for the engineer, Neb's loyalty, and what they owed to Top's cleverness, etc.
“But,” asked Smith, in a feeble voice, “you did not pick me up on the beach?”
"But," asked Smith, in a weak voice, "you didn't find me on the beach?"
“No,” replied the reporter.
“No,” said the reporter.
“And it was not you who brought me to this hollow?”
“And you weren’t the one who brought me to this empty place?”
“No.”
“No.”
“How far is this place from the reef?”
“How far is this place from the reef?”
“At least half a mile,” replied Pencroff, “and if you are astonished, we are equally surprised to find you here.”
“At least half a mile,” Pencroff replied, “and if you’re surprised, we’re just as shocked to see you here.”
“It is indeed singular,” said the engineer, who was gradually reviving and taking interest in these details.
“It’s definitely unique,” said the engineer, who was slowly coming back to life and becoming interested in these details.
“But,” asked the sailor, “cannot you remember anything that happened after you were washed away by that heavy sea?”
“But,” asked the sailor, “can’t you remember anything that happened after you were swept away by that huge wave?”
Cyrus Smith tried to think, but he remembered little. The wave had swept him from the net of the balloon, and at first he had sunk several fathoms. Coming up to the surface, he was conscious, in the half-light, of something struggling beside him. It was Top, who had sprung to his rescue. Looking up, he could see nothing of the balloon, which, lightened by his and the dog’s weight, had sped away like an arrow. He found himself in the midst of the tumultuous sea, more than half a mile from shore. He swum vigorously against the waves, and Top sustained him by his garments; but a strong current seized him, carrying him to the north, and, after struggling for half an hour, he sank, dragging the dog with him into the abyss. From that moment to the instant of his finding himself in the arms of his friends, he remembered nothing.
Cyrus Smith tried to think, but he remembered very little. The wave had swept him away from the balloon's net, and at first, he sank several fathoms. When he came back up to the surface, he was aware, in the dim light, of something struggling next to him. It was Top, who had jumped in to save him. Looking up, he couldn't see anything of the balloon, which, now lighter without him and the dog, had shot away like an arrow. He found himself in the middle of the choppy sea, more than half a mile from shore. He swam hard against the waves, and Top helped him by pulling at his clothes; however, a strong current grabbed him, pulling him north, and after struggling for half an hour, he sank, dragging the dog down with him into the depths. From that moment until he found himself in the arms of his friends, he remembered nothing.
“Nevertheless,” said Pencroff, “you must have been cast upon the shore, and had strength enough to walk to this place, since Neb found your tracks.”
“Anyway,” said Pencroff, “you must have washed up on the shore and had enough strength to walk here, since Neb found your footprints.”
“Yes, that must be so,” answered the engineer, reflectively. “And you have not seen any traces of inhabitants upon the shore?”
“Yeah, that sounds right,” replied the engineer, thoughtfully. “And you haven't noticed any signs of people along the shore?”
“Not a sign,” answered the reporter. “Moreover, if by chance some one had rescued you from the waves, why should he then have abandoned you?”
“Not a sign,” replied the reporter. “Also, if someone had actually rescued you from the waves, why would they then have left you behind?”
“You are right, my dear Spilett. Tell me, Neb,” inquired the engineer, turning towards his servant, “it was not you—you could not have been in a trance—during which—. No, that’s absurd. Do any of the footprints still remain?”
“You're right, my dear Spilett. Tell me, Neb,” the engineer asked, turning to his servant, “it wasn't you—you couldn't have been in a trance—during which—. No, that's ridiculous. Are there any of the footprints still here?”
“Yes, master,” replied Neb; “there are some at the entrance, back of this mound, in a place sheltered from the wind and rain, but the others have been obliterated by the storm.”
“Yes, master,” replied Neb; “there are some at the entrance, behind this mound, in a spot protected from the wind and rain, but the others have been washed away by the storm.”
“Pencroff,” said Cyrus, “will you take my shoes and see if they fit those footprints exactly?”
“Pencroff,” said Cyrus, “can you take my shoes and check if they match those footprints perfectly?”
The sailor did as he had been asked. He and Herbert, guided by Neb, went to where the marks were, and in their absence Smith said to the reporter:—
The sailor did what he was asked. He and Herbert, led by Neb, went to where the marks were, and in their absence, Smith said to the reporter:—
“That is a thing passing belief.”
"That's hard to believe."
“Inexplicable, indeed,” answered the other.
"Unexplainable, for sure," replied the other.
“But do not dwell upon it at present, my dear Spilett, we will talk of it hereafter.”
“But let’s not focus on that right now, my dear Spilett; we’ll discuss it later.”
At this moment the others returned. All doubt was set at rest. The shoes of the engineer fitted the tracks exactly. Therefore it must have been Smith himself who had walked over the sand.
At that moment, the others came back. All doubt was cleared up. The engineer's shoes matched the tracks perfectly. So, it must have been Smith himself who walked over the sand.
“So,” he said, “I was the one in a trance, and not Neb! I must have walked like a somnambulist, without consciousness, and Top’s instinct brought me here after he rescued me from the waves. Here, Top. Come here, dog.”
“So,” he said, “I was the one in a daze, not Neb! I must have walked like a sleepwalker, completely unaware, and Top’s instincts led me here after he saved me from the waves. Here, Top. Come here, pup.”
The splendid animal sprang, barking, to his master, and caresses were lavished upon him. It was agreed that there was no other way to account for the rescue than by giving Top the credit of it.
The magnificent dog jumped up, barking, to his owner, and received plenty of attention. It was decided that the only way to explain the rescue was to give Top the credit for it.
Towards noon, Pencroff having asked Smith if he felt strong enough to be carried, the latter, for answer, by an effort which showed his strength of will, rose to his feet. But if he had not leaned upon the sailor he would have fallen.
Towards noon, Pencroff asked Smith if he felt strong enough to be carried. In response, Smith made an effort that demonstrated his willpower and got to his feet. However, if he hadn't leaned on the sailor, he would have collapsed.
“Capital,” said Pencroff. “Summon the engineer’s carriage!”
“Capital,” said Pencroff. “Call the engineer’s carriage!”
The litter was brought. The cross-branches had been covered with moss and grass; and when Smith was laid upon it they walked towards the coast, Neb and the sailor carrying him.
The litter was brought. The cross branches had been covered with moss and grass, and when Smith was placed on it, they walked towards the coast, Neb and the sailor carrying him.
Eight miles had to be travelled, and as they could move but slowly, and would probably have to make frequent rests, it would take six hours or more to reach the Chimneys. The wind was still strong, but, fortunately, it had ceased raining. From his couch, the engineer, leaning upon his arm, observed the coast, especially the part opposite the sea. He examined it without comment, but undoubtedly the aspect of the country, its contour, its forests and diverse products were noted in his mind. But after two hours, fatigue overcame him, and he slept upon the litter.
Eight miles needed to be covered, and since they could only move slowly and would likely need to rest often, it would take six hours or more to get to the Chimneys. The wind was still strong, but luckily, it had stopped raining. From his couch, the engineer leaned on his arm and looked at the coast, especially the part facing the sea. He studied it without saying anything, but it was clear that he took note of the landscape, its shape, its forests, and various products. However, after two hours, he grew tired and fell asleep on the litter.
At half-past 5 the little party reached the precipice, and soon after, were before the Chimneys. Stopping here, the litter was placed upon the sand without disturbing the slumber of the engineer.
At 5:30, the small group arrived at the cliff, and shortly after, they stood before the Chimneys. They paused here, setting the litter down on the sand without waking the engineer.
Pencroff saw, to his surprise, that the terrible storm of the day before had altered the aspect of the place. Rocks had been displaced. Great fragments were strewn over the sand, and a thick carpet of several kinds of seaweed covered all the shore. It was plain that the sea sweeping over the isle had reached to the base of the enormous granite curtain.
Pencroff was surprised to see that the awful storm from the day before had changed the look of the place. Rocks had been moved around. Large pieces were scattered across the sand, and a thick layer of different types of seaweed covered the entire shore. It was clear that the sea had washed over the island and reached the bottom of the huge granite wall.
Before the entrance to the Chimneys the ground had been violently torn up by the action of the waves. Pencroff, seized with a sudden fear, rushed into the corridor. Returning, a moment after, he stood motionless looking at his comrades.
Before the entrance to the Chimneys, the ground had been violently torn up by the waves. Pencroff, suddenly filled with fear, rushed into the corridor. A moment later, he returned, standing still and looking at his friends.
The fire had been extinguished; the drowned cinders were nothing but mud. The charred linen, which was to serve them for tinder, had gone. The sea had penetrated every recess of the corridor, and everything was overthrown, everything was destroyed within the Chimneys.
The fire was out; the soaked ashes were just mud. The burned cloth, intended for tinder, was gone. The sea had flooded every corner of the corridor, and everything was upturned, everything was ruined inside the Chimneys.
CHAPTER IX.
CYRUS IS HERE-PENCROFF’S ATTEMPTS—RUBBING WOOD—ISLAND OR CONTINENT —THE PLANS OF THE ENGINEER—WHEREABOUTS IN THE PACIFIC—IN THE DEPTHS OF THE FOREST—THE PISTACHIO PINE—A PIG CHASE—A SMOKE OF GOOD OMEN.
CYRUS IS HERE - PENCROFF’S ATTEMPTS - RUBBING WOOD - ISLAND OR CONTINENT - THE PLANS OF THE ENGINEER - WHEREABOUTS IN THE PACIFIC - IN THE DEPTHS OF THE FOREST - THE PISTACHIO PINE - A PIG CHASE - A SMOKE OF GOOD OMENS.
In a few words the others were informed of what had happened. This accident, which portended serious results—at least Pencroff foresaw such—affected each one differently. Neb, overjoyed in having recovered his master, did not listen or did not wish to think of what Pencroff said. Herbert shared in a measure the apprehensions of the sailor. As to the reporter, he simply answered:—
In a few words, the others were told what had happened. This accident, which hinted at serious consequences—at least Pencroff thought so—affected each person differently. Neb, thrilled to have his master back, either didn't listen or didn't want to think about what Pencroff said. Herbert somewhat shared the sailor's concerns. As for the reporter, he simply replied:—
“Upon my word, Pencroff, I don’t think it matters much!”
“Honestly, Pencroff, I don’t think it makes much difference!”
“But I tell you again; we have no fire!”
“But I’m telling you again; we don’t have any fire!”
“Pshaw!”
"Please!"
“Nor any means of lighting one!”
“Or any way to light one!”
“Absurd!”
“Ridiculous!”
“But, Mr. Spilett—”
"But, Mr. Spilett—"
“Is not Cyrus here?” asked the reporter; “Isn’t he alive? He will know well enough how to make fire!”
“Is Cyrus not here?” asked the reporter. “Isn’t he alive? He definitely knows how to start a fire!”
“And with what?”
"And with what else?"
“With nothing!”
“With nada!”
What could Pencroff answer? He had nothing to say, as, in his heart, he shared his companion’s confidence in Cyrus Smith’s ability. To them the engineer was a microcosm, a compound of all science and all knowledge. They were better off on a desert island with Cyrus than without him in the busiest city of the Union. With him they could want for nothing; with him they would have no fear. If they had been told that a volcanic eruption would overwhelm the land, sinking it into the depths of the Pacific, the imperturbable answer of these brave men would have been, “Have we not Cyrus!”
What could Pencroff say? He had no response because, deep down, he shared his friend's faith in Cyrus Smith’s abilities. To them, the engineer was everything—an embodiment of all knowledge and skills. They felt more secure on a deserted island with Cyrus than in the busiest city in the Union without him. With him, they wouldn't lack anything; with him, they had no reason to fear. If someone had told them that a volcanic eruption would engulf the land, plunging it into the depths of the Pacific, these fearless men would have calmly replied, “But we have Cyrus!”
Meantime, the engineer had sunk into a lethargy, the result of the journey, and his help could not be asked for just then. The supper, therefore, would be very meagre. All the tetras had been eaten, there was no way to cook other birds, and, finally, the couroucous which had been reserved had disappeared. Something, therefore, must be done.
Meantime, the engineer had fallen into a deep fatigue from the journey, and his assistance couldn't be requested at that moment. So, dinner would be pretty sparse. All the tetras had been consumed, there was no way to prepare other birds, and, finally, the couroucous that had been saved was gone. Something, then, had to be done.
First of all, Cyrus Smith was carried into the main corridor. There they were able to make for him a couch of seaweeds, and, doubtless, the deep sleep in which he was plunged, would strengthen him more than an abundant nourishment.
First of all, Cyrus Smith was taken into the main corridor. There, they were able to make him a couch of seaweed, and, without a doubt, the deep sleep he was in would strengthen him more than plenty of food.
With night the temperature, which the northwest wind had raised, again became very cold, and, as the sea had washed away the partitions which Pencroff had constructed, draughts of air made the place scarcely habitable. The engineer would therefore have been in a bad plight if his companions had not covered him with clothing which they took from themselves.
With nightfall, the temperature, which the northwest wind had raised, dropped again to a very cold level, and since the sea had washed away the partitions Pencroff had built, drafts of air made the area barely livable. The engineer would have been in a tough situation if his companions hadn't covered him with their own clothing.
The supper this evening consisted of the inevitable lithodomes, an ample supply of which Herbert and Neb had gathered from the beach. To these the lad had added a quantity of edible seaweed which clung to the high rocks and were only washed by the highest tides. These seaweeds, belonging to the family of Fucaceæ, were a species of Sargassum, which, when dry, furnish a gelatinous substance full of nutritive matter, much used by the natives of the Asiatic coast. After having eaten a quantity of lithodomes the reporter and his companions sucked some of the seaweed, which they agreed was excellent.
The dinner tonight included the usual lithodomes, which Herbert and Neb had gathered in plenty from the beach. The young man had also added some edible seaweed that clung to the high rocks and was only washed by the highest tides. This seaweed, part of the Fucaceæ family, was a type of Sargassum, which, when dried, provides a gelatinous substance packed with nutrients, commonly used by the locals along the Asian coast. After eating a good amount of lithodomes, the reporter and his companions enjoyed some of the seaweed, which they all agreed was really good.
“Nevertheless,” said the sailor, “it is time for Mr. Smith to help us.”
“Nevertheless,” said the sailor, “it’s time for Mr. Smith to help us.”
Meantime the cold became intense, and, unfortunately, they had no means of protecting themselves. The sailor, much worried, tried every possible means of procuring a fire. He had found some dry moss, and by striking two stones together he obtained sparks; but the moss was not sufficiently inflammable to catch fire, nor had the sparks the strength of those struck by a steel. The operation amounted to nothing. Then Pencroff, although he had no confidence in the result, tried rubbing two pieces of dry wood together, after the manner of the savages. It is true that the motion of the man, if it could have been turned into heat, according to the new theory, would have heated the boiler of a steamer. But it resulted in nothing except putting him in a glow, and making the wood hot. After half an hour’s work Pencroff was in a perspiration, and he threw away the wood in disgust.
Meanwhile, the cold became unbearable, and sadly, they had no way to protect themselves. The sailor, feeling anxious, tried every possible method to create a fire. He found some dry moss and struck two stones together to produce sparks; however, the moss wasn't flammable enough to ignite, and the sparks were too weak compared to those produced by steel. The effort was unsuccessful. Then Pencroff, lacking confidence in the outcome, attempted to rub two pieces of dry wood together like the natives do. It's true that if his movement could be converted into heat, according to the new theory, it would have heated a steamer's boiler. But in the end, it resulted in nothing except him getting sweaty and the wood becoming hot. After half an hour of effort, Pencroff was drenched in sweat and tossed the wood away in frustration.
“When you can make me believe that savages make fire after that fashion,” said he, “it will he hot in winter! I might as well try to light my arms by rubbing them together.”
“When you can make me believe that savages make fire that way,” he said, “it will be hot in winter! I might as well try to start a fire by rubbing my arms together.”
But the sailor was wrong to deny the feasibility of this method. The savages frequently do light wood in this way. But it requires particular kinds of wood, and, moreover, the “knack,” and Pencroff had not this “knack.”
But the sailor was mistaken to dismiss the practicality of this method. The indigenous people often use this technique with lighter wood. However, it requires specific types of wood and, in addition, a certain "skill," and Pencroff didn’t have that "skill."
Pencroff’s ill humor did not last long. The bits of wood which he had thrown away had been picked up by Herbert, who exerted himself to rub them well. The strong sailor could not help laughing at the boy’s weak efforts to accomplish what he had failed in.
Pencroff's bad mood didn't stick around for long. The pieces of wood he had tossed aside were picked up by Herbert, who worked hard to clean them up. The strong sailor couldn't help but laugh at the boy's feeble attempts to do what he had failed to achieve.
“Rub away, my boy; rub hard!” he cried.
“Rub harder, my boy!” he shouted.
“I am rubbing them,” answered Herbert, laughing, “but only to take my turn at getting warm, instead of sitting here shivering; and pretty soon I will be as hot as you are, Pencroff!”
“I’m rubbing them,” Herbert replied, laughing, “but only to get my turn to warm up, instead of just sitting here shivering; and pretty soon I’ll be as warm as you are, Pencroff!”
This was the case, and though it was necessary for this night to give up trying to make a fire, Spilett, stretching himself upon the sand in one of the passages, repeated for the twentieth time that Smith could not be baffled by such a trifle. The others followed his example, and Top slept at the feet of his master.
This was the situation, and even though it was important to stop trying to make a fire that night, Spilett, lying on the sand in one of the pathways, said for the twentieth time that Smith wouldn’t be defeated by such a minor issue. The others did the same, and Top slept at his master's feet.
The next day, the 28th of March, when the engineer awoke, about 8 o’clock, he saw his companions beside him watching, and, as on the day before, his first words were,
The next day, March 28th, when the engineer woke up around 8 o’clock, he noticed his companions next to him watching, and, just like the day before, his first words were,
“Island or continent?”
“Island or landmass?”
It was his one thought.
It was his only thought.
“Well, Mr. Smith,” answered Pencroff, “we don’t know.”
“Well, Mr. Smith,” Pencroff replied, “we don’t know.”
“You haven’t found out yet?”
"Don't you know yet?"
“But we will,” affirmed Pencroff, “when you are able to guide us in this country.”
“But we will,” Pencroff said confidently, “once you can lead us in this area.”
“I believe that I am able to do that now,” answered the engineer, who, without much effort, rose up and stood erect.
“I think I can do that now,” replied the engineer, who easily got up and stood straight.
“That is good,” exclaimed the sailor.
"That's awesome," the sailor shouted.
“I am dying of hunger,” responded Smith. “Give me some food, my friend, and I will feel better. You’ve fire, haven’t you?”
“I’m starving,” Smith replied. “Give me some food, my friend, and I’ll feel better. You have fire, right?”
This question met with no immediate answer. But after some moments the sailor said:—
This question didn't get an immediate response. But after a few moments, the sailor said:—
“No, sir, we have no fire; at least, not now.”
“No, sir, we don’t have a fire; at least, not right now.”
And be related what had happened the day before. He amused the engineer by recounting the history of their solitary match, and their fruitless efforts to procure fire like the savages.
And to relate what had happened the day before. He entertained the engineer by sharing the story of their lonely match and their useless attempts to make fire like the savages.
“We will think about it,” answered the engineer, “and if we cannot find something like tinder—”
“We’ll think about it,” replied the engineer, “and if we can’t find something like tinder—”
“Well,” asked the sailor.
“Hey,” asked the sailor.
“Well, we will make matches!”
"Well, we'll make matches!"
“Friction matches?”
"Strike-anywhere matches?"
“Friction matches!”
“Safety matches!”
“It’s no more difficult than that,” cried the reporter, slapping the sailor on the shoulder.
“It’s not any harder than that,” the reporter exclaimed, giving the sailor a friendly slap on the shoulder.
The latter did not see that it would be easy, but he said nothing, and all went out of doors. The day was beautiful. A bright sun was rising above the sea horizon, its rays sparkling and glistening on the granite wall. After having cast a quick look about him, the engineer seated himself upon a rock. Herbert offered him some handfuls of mussels and seaweed, saying:—
The latter didn’t realize it would be easy, but he kept quiet, and everyone went outside. The day was gorgeous. A bright sun was rising above the ocean horizon, its rays sparkling and glistening on the granite wall. After quickly scanning the area, the engineer sat down on a rock. Herbert handed him some handfuls of mussels and seaweed, saying:—
“It is all that we have, Mr. Smith.”
“It’s all we have, Mr. Smith.”
“Thank you, my boy,” answered he, “it is enough—for this morning, at least.”
“Thanks, my boy,” he replied, “that’s enough—for this morning, at least.”
And he ate with appetite this scanty meal, washing it down with water brought from the river in a large shell.
And he ate this meager meal with enthusiasm, washing it down with water brought from the river in a large shell.
His companions looked on without speaking. Then, after having satisfied himself, he crossed his arms and said:—
His friends watched silently. Then, after feeling content, he crossed his arms and said:—
“Then, my friends, you do not yet know whether we have been thrown upon an island or a continent?”
“Then, my friends, don’t you yet know if we’ve landed on an island or a continent?”
“No sir,” answered Herbert.
“Nope,” replied Herbert.
“We will find out to-morrow,” said the engineer. “Until then there is nothing to do.”
“We'll find out tomorrow,” said the engineer. “Until then, there's nothing we can do.”
“There is one thing,” suggested Pencroff.
"There's one thing," said Pencroff.
“What is that?”
"What's that?"
“Some fire,” replied the sailor, who thought of nothing else.
“Some fire,” replied the sailor, who was focused on nothing else.
“We will have it, Pencroff,” said Smith. “But when you were carrying me here yesterday, did not I see a mountain rising in the west?”
“We will get it, Pencroff,” said Smith. “But when you were bringing me here yesterday, didn’t I see a mountain rising in the west?”
“Yes,” saidSpilett, “quite a high one.”
“Yes,” said Spilett, “definitely a high one.”
“All right,” exclaimed the engineer. “Tomorrow we will climb to its summit and determine whether this is an island or a continent; until then I repeat there is nothing to do.”
“All right,” said the engineer. “Tomorrow we’ll climb to the top and find out whether this is an island or a continent; until then, I’ll say again there’s nothing we can do.”
“But there is; we want fire!” cried the obstinate sailor again.
“But there is; we want fire!” yelled the stubborn sailor again.
“Have a little patience, Pencroff, and we will have the fire,” said Spilett.
“Just be a bit patient, Pencroff, and we’ll have the fire,” said Spilett.
The other looked at the reporter as much as to say, “If there was only you to make it we would never taste roast meat.” But he kept silent.
The other glanced at the reporter, almost as if to say, “If it depended only on you, we’d never get to enjoy roast meat.” But he stayed quiet.
Smith had not spoken. He seemed little concerned about this question of fire. For some moments he remained absorbed in his own thoughts. Then he spoke as follows:—
Smith hadn't said anything. He didn't seem too worried about this fire issue. For a while, he was lost in his own thoughts. Then he said the following:—
“My friends, our situation is, doubtless, deplorable, nevertheless it is very simple. Either we are upon a continent, and, in that case, at the expense of greater or less fatigue, we will reach some inhabited place, or else we are on an island. In the latter case, it is one of two things; if the island is inhabited, we will get out of our difficulty by the help of the inhabitants; if it is deserted, we will get out of it by ourselves.”
"My friends, our situation is undoubtedly terrible, but it’s quite straightforward. Either we are on a continent, and in that case, with a bit of effort, we can reach a populated area, or we are on an island. If it’s an island, there are two possibilities; if it's inhabited, we can rely on the locals to help us, and if it’s deserted, we’ll have to find a way out on our own."
“Nothing could be plainer than that,” said Pencroff.
“Nothing could be clearer than that,” said Pencroff.
“But,” asked Spilett, “whether it is a continent or an island, whereabouts do you think this storm has thrown us, Cyrus?”
“But,” asked Spilett, “whether it's a continent or an island, where do you think this storm has thrown us, Cyrus?”
“In truth, I cannot say,” replied the engineer, “but the probability is that we are somewhere in the Pacific. When we left Richmond the wind was northeast, and its very violence proves that its direction did not vary much. Supposing it unchanged, we crossed North and South Carolina, Georgia, the Gulf of Mexico, and the narrow part of Mexico, and a portion of the Pacific Ocean. I do not estimate the distance traversed by the balloon at less than 6,000 or 7,000 miles, and even if the wind had varied a half a quarter it would have carried us either to the Marquesas Islands or to the Low Archipelago; or, if it was stronger than I suppose, as far as New Zealand. If this last hypothesis is correct, our return home will be easy. English or Maoris, we shall always find somebody with whom to speak. If, on the other hand, this coast belongs to some barren island in the Micronesian Archipelago, perhaps we can reconnoitre it from the summit of this mountain, and then we will consider how to establish ourselves here as if we were never going to leave it.”
“In truth, I can’t say,” replied the engineer, “but it’s likely that we are somewhere in the Pacific. When we left Richmond, the wind was coming from the northeast, and its strength suggests that it didn’t change much. Assuming it stayed the same, we crossed North and South Carolina, Georgia, the Gulf of Mexico, the narrow part of Mexico, and a section of the Pacific Ocean. I estimate that the distance we traveled in the balloon is at least 6,000 or 7,000 miles, and even if the wind had shifted a bit, it would have taken us either to the Marquesas Islands or the Low Archipelago; or, if the wind was stronger than I think, as far as New Zealand. If this last assumption is correct, getting home will be easy. Whether it’s English speakers or Maoris, we should always find someone to talk to. On the other hand, if this coast belongs to some deserted island in the Micronesian Archipelago, we might be able to scout it from the top of this mountain, and then we’ll figure out how to settle here as if we were never going to leave.”
“Never?” cried the reporter. “Do you say never, my dear Cyrus?”
“Never?” exclaimed the reporter. “Are you really saying never, my dear Cyrus?”
“It is better to put things in their worst light at first,” answered the engineer; “and to reserve those which are better, as a surprise.”
“It’s better to show things in their worst light at first,” replied the engineer, “and to save the better aspects for a surprise.”
“Well said,” replied Pencroff. “And we hope that this island, if it is an island, will not be situated just outside of the route of ships; for that would, indeed, be unlucky.”
“Well said,” replied Pencroff. “And we hope that this island, if it is an island, will not be located just off the shipping route; because that would really be unfortunate.”
“We will know how to act after having first ascended the mountain,” answered Smith.
“We'll know what to do after we've climbed the mountain,” replied Smith.
“But will you be able, Mr. Smith, to make the climb tomorrow?” asked Herbert.
“But will you be able to make the climb tomorrow, Mr. Smith?” asked Herbert.
“I hope so,” answered the engineer, “if Pencroff and you, my boy, show yourselves to be good and ready hunters.”
“I hope so,” replied the engineer, “if Pencroff and you, my boy, prove to be skilled and prepared hunters.”
“Mr. Smith,” said the sailor, “since you are speaking of game, if when I come back I am as sure of getting it roasted as I am of bringing it—”
“Mr. Smith,” said the sailor, “since you’re talking about game, if when I return I’m as sure of getting it cooked as I am of bringing it—”
“Bring it, nevertheless,” interrupted Smith.
“Bring it on, though,” interrupted Smith.
It was now agreed that the engineer and the reporter should spend the day at the Chimneys, in order to examine the shore and the plateau, while Neb, Herbert, and the sailor were to return to the forest, renew the supply of wood, and lay hands on every bird and beast that should cross their path. So, at 6 o’clock, the party left, Herbert confident. Neb happy, and Pencroff muttering to himself:—
It was now decided that the engineer and the reporter would spend the day at the Chimneys to explore the shore and the plateau, while Neb, Herbert, and the sailor would head back to the forest to gather more wood and catch any birds or animals they came across. So, at 6 o’clock, the group set out, with Herbert feeling confident, Neb feeling happy, and Pencroff mumbling to himself:—
“If, when I get back I find a fire in the house, it will have been the lightning that lit it!”
“If, when I get back, I find a fire in the house, it must have been the lightning that started it!”
The three climbed the bank, and having reached the turn in the river, the sailor stopped and said to his companions:—
The three climbed up the bank, and when they reached the bend in the river, the sailor stopped and said to his friends:—
“Shall we begin as hunters or wood-choppers?”
“Should we start as hunters or woodchoppers?”
“Hunters,” answered Herbert. “See Top, who is already at it.”
“Hunters,” replied Herbert. “Look at Top, who is already at it.”
“Let us hunt, then,” replied the sailor, “and on our return here we will lay in our stock of wood.”
“Let’s go hunt, then,” replied the sailor, “and when we get back, we’ll stock up on firewood.”
This said, the party made three clubs for themselves, and followed Top, who was jumping about in the high grass.
This said, the group formed three clubs for themselves and followed Top, who was hopping around in the tall grass.
This time, the hunters, instead of following the course of the stream, struck at once into the depths of the forests. The trees were for the most part of the pine family. And in certain places, where they stood in small groups, they were of such a size as to indicate that this country was in a higher latitude than the engineer supposed. Some openings, bristling with stumps decayed by the weather, were covered with dead timber which formed an inexhaustible reserve of firewood. Then, the opening passed, the underwood became so thick as to be nearly impenetrable.
This time, the hunters, instead of following the stream, headed straight into the depths of the forest. Most of the trees were pines. In certain areas, where they grew in small clusters, they were big enough to suggest that this region was located further north than the engineer had thought. Some clearings, filled with weather-beaten stumps, were covered in dead wood that provided an endless supply of firewood. After passing through the clearing, the underbrush grew so dense that it was almost impossible to get through.
To guide oneself among these great trees without any beaten path was very difficult. So the sailer from time to time blazed the route by breaking branches in a manner easily recognizable. But perhaps they would have done better to have followed the water course, as in the first instance, as, after an hour’s march, no game had been taken. Top, running under the low boughs, only flushed birds that were unapproachable. Even the couroucous were invisible, and it seemed likely that the sailor would be obliged to return to that swampy place where he had fished for tetras with such good luck.
To navigate through these large trees without a clear path was quite challenging. So the sailor occasionally marked the trail by breaking branches in a way that was easy to spot. But maybe it would have made more sense to follow the water route like before, since, after an hour of walking, they hadn’t caught any game. Top, running under the low branches, only scared away birds that were out of reach. Even the couroucous were nowhere to be seen, and it seemed likely that the sailor would have to go back to that marshy area where he had fished for tetras so successfully.
“Well, Pencroff,” said Neb sarcastically, “if this is all the game you promised to carry back to my master it won’t take much fire to roast it!”
“Well, Pencroff,” Neb said sarcastically, “if this is all the game you promised to bring back to my master, it won’t take much fire to cook it!”
“Wait a bit, Neb,” answered the sailor; “it won’t be game that will be wanting on our return.”
“Hold on a sec, Neb,” replied the sailor; “there won’t be any shortage of game when we get back.”
“Don’t you believe in Mr. Smith?”
“Don’t you believe in Mr. Smith?”
“Yes.”
“Yep.”
“But you don’t believe be will make a fire?”
"But you don't think I'll make a fire?"
“I will believe that when the wood is blazing in the fire-place.”
“I'll believe that when the wood is burning in the fireplace.”
“It will blaze, then, for my master has said so!”
“It will burn, then, because my master has said so!”
“Well, we’ll see!”
"Well, we'll see!"
Meanwhile the sun had not yet risen to its highest point above the horizon. The exploration went on and was signalized by Herbert’s discovery of a tree bearing edible fruit. It was the pistachio pine, which bears an excellent nut, much liked in the temperate regions of America and Europe. These nuts were perfectly ripe, and Herbert showed them to his companions, who feasted on them.
Meanwhile, the sun had not yet reached its highest point in the sky. The exploration continued, highlighted by Herbert's discovery of a tree with edible fruit. It was the pistachio pine, known for its delicious nuts that are popular in the temperate areas of America and Europe. These nuts were perfectly ripe, and Herbert shared them with his companions, who enjoyed a feast.
“Well,” said Pencroff, “seaweed for bread, raw mussels for meat, and nuts for dessert, that’s the sort of dinner for men who haven’t a match in their pocket!”
“Well,” said Pencroff, “seaweed for bread, raw mussels for meat, and nuts for dessert—that’s quite the dinner for guys who don’t have a match in their pocket!”
“It’s not worth while complaining,” replied Herbert.
“It’s not worth it to complain,” replied Herbert.
“I don’t complain, my boy. I simply repeat that the meat is a little too scant in this sort of meal.”
“I don’t complain, my boy. I just say that the meat is a bit too scarce in this kind of meal.”
“Top has seen something!” cried Neb, running toward a thicket into which the dog had disappeared barking. With the dog’s barks were mingled singular gruntings. The sailor and Herbert had followed the negro. If it was game, this was not the time to discuss how to cook it, but rather how to secure it.
“Top has seen something!” shouted Neb, rushing toward a thicket where the dog had vanished while barking. Along with the dog’s barks, there were strange grunt sounds. The sailor and Herbert had followed Neb. If it was game, this wasn’t the time to talk about how to cook it, but rather how to catch it.
The hunters, on entering the brush, saw Top struggling with an animal which he held by the ear. This quadruped was a species of pig, about two feet and a half long, of a brownish black color, somewhat lighter under the belly, having harsh and somewhat scanty hair, and its toes at this time strongly grasping the soil seemed joined together by membranes.
The hunters, upon stepping into the underbrush, saw Top grappling with an animal that he held by the ear. This creature was a kind of pig, around two and a half feet long, with a brownish-black color that was lighter underneath its belly. It had coarse and fairly sparse hair, and its toes, which were firmly gripping the ground, appeared to be connected by webbing.
Herbert thought that he recognized in this animal a cabiai, or water-hog, one of the largest specimens of the order of rodents. The water-hog did not fight the dog. Its great eyes, deep sank in thick layers of fat, rolled stupidly from side to side. And Neb, grasping his club firmly, was about to knock the beast down, when the latter tore loose from Top, leaving a piece of his ear in the dog’s mouth, and uttering a vigorous grunt, rushed against and overset Herbert and disappeared in the wood.
Herbert thought he recognized this animal as a capybara, or water-hog, one of the largest types of rodents. The water-hog didn’t fight the dog. Its big eyes, sunk deep in thick layers of fat, rolled lazily from side to side. Just as Neb, gripping his club tightly, was about to bring it down on the beast, the animal broke free from Top, leaving a chunk of its ear in the dog’s mouth. With a loud grunt, it charged at Herbert, knocked him over, and vanished into the woods.
“The beggar!” cried Pencroff, as they all three darted after the hog. But just as they had come up to it again, the water-hog disappeared under the surface of a large pond, overshadowed by tall, ancient pines.
“The beggar!” shouted Pencroff, as the three of them rushed after the hog. But just as they caught up to it again, the water-hog vanished beneath the surface of a large pond, which was shaded by tall, ancient pines.
The three companions stopped, motionless. Top had plunged into the water, but the cabiai, hidden at the bottom of the pond, did not appear.
The three friends stopped, frozen. Top had jumped into the water, but the cabiai, concealed at the bottom of the pond, didn’t show up.
“Wait,”, said the boy, “he will have to come to the surface to breathe.”
“Wait,” said the boy, “he will need to come to the surface to breathe.”
“Won’t he drown?” asked Neb.
“Isn’t he going to drown?” asked Neb.
“No,” answered Herbert, “since he is fin-toed and almost amphibious. But watch for him.”
“No,” replied Herbert, “since he has fin-like toes and is almost amphibious. But keep an eye out for him.”
Top remained in the water, and Pencroff and his companions took stations upon the bank, to cut off the animal’s retreat, while the dog swam to and fro looking for him.
Top stayed in the water, and Pencroff and his friends positioned themselves on the shore to block the animal's escape, while the dog swam back and forth searching for him.
Herbert was not mistaken. In a few minutes the animal came again to the surface. Top was upon him at once, keeping him from diving again, and a moment later, the cabiai, dragged to the shore, was struck down by a blow from Neb’s club.
Herbert was right. In just a few minutes, the animal resurfaced. Top was on it immediately, preventing it from diving again, and a moment later, the cabiai, pulled to the shore, was knocked down by a swing of Neb’s club.
“Hurrah!” cried Pencroff with all his heart. “Nothing but a clear fire, and this gnawer shall be gnawed to the bone.”
“Yay!” shouted Pencroff with all his energy. “Just a clear fire, and this little muncher will be chewed to the bone.”
Pencroff lifted the carcase to his shoulder, and judging by the sun that it must be near 2 o’clock, he gave the signal to return.
Pencroff lifted the carcass onto his shoulder, and judging by the sun that it must be around 2 o’clock, he signaled to head back.
Top’s instinct was useful to the hunters, as, thanks to that intelligent animal, they were enabled to return upon their steps. In half an hour they had reached the bend of the river. There, as before, Pencroff quickly constructed a raft, although, lacking fire, this seemed to him a useless job, and, with the raft keeping the current, they returned towards the Chimneys. But the sailor had not gone fifty paces when he stopped and gave utterance anew to a tremendous hurrah, and extending his hand towards the angle of the cliff—
Top’s instinct was helpful to the hunters, as, thanks to that smart animal, they were able to retrace their steps. In half an hour, they reached the bend of the river. There, just like before, Pencroff quickly built a raft, although, without fire, he thought it was a pointless task. With the raft riding the current, they headed back toward the Chimneys. But the sailor hadn’t gone fifty paces when he stopped and shouted a loud hurrah, pointing his hand toward the corner of the cliff—
“Herbert! Neb! See!” he cried.
"Herbert! Neb! Look!" he cried.
Smoke was escaping and curling above the rocks!
Smoke was rising and swirling above the rocks!
CHAPTER X.
THE ENGINEER’S INVENTION—ISLAND OR CONTINENT?—DEPARTURE FOR THE MOUNTAIN—THE FOREST—VOLCANIC SOIL—THE TRAGOPANS—THE MOUFFLONS —THE FIRST PLATEAU—ENCAMPING FOR THE NIGHT—THE SUMMIT OF THE CONE
THE ENGINEER’S INVENTION—ISLAND OR CONTINENT?—DEPARTURE FOR THE MOUNTAIN—THE FOREST—VOLCANIC SOIL—THE TRAGOPANS—THE MOUFFLONS —THE FIRST PLATEAU—SETTING UP CAMP FOR THE NIGHT—THE SUMMIT OF THE CONE
A few minutes afterwards, the three hunters were seated before a sparkling fire. Beside them sat Cyrus Smith and the reporter. Pencroff looked from one to the other without saying a word, his cabiai in his hand.
A few minutes later, the three hunters were sitting in front of a crackling fire. Next to them sat Cyrus Smith and the reporter. Pencroff looked from one to the other without saying anything, holding his cabiai in his hand.
“Yes, my good fellow,” said the reporter, “a fire, a real fire, that will roast your game to a turn.”
“Yes, my friend,” said the reporter, “a fire, a real fire, that will cook your game perfectly.”
“But who lighted it?” said the sailor.
“But who lit it?” said the sailor.
“The sun.”
“The sun.”
The sailor could not believe his eyes, and was too stupefied to question the engineer.
The sailor couldn't believe his eyes and was too stunned to question the engineer.
“Had you a burning-glass, sir?” asked Herbert of Cyrus Smith.
“Do you have a magnifying glass, sir?” Herbert asked Cyrus Smith.
“No, my boy,” said he, “but I made one.”
“No, my boy,” he said, “but I created one.”
And he showed his extemporized lens. It was simply the two glasses, from his own watch and the reporter’s, which he had taken out, filled with water, and stuck together at the edges with a little clay. Thus he had made a veritable burning-glass, and by concentrating the solar rays on some dry moss had set it on fire.
And he showed off his makeshift lens. It was just two glasses, one from his own watch and one from the reporter’s, that he had removed, filled with water, and glued together at the edges with a bit of clay. This way, he had created a real magnifying glass, and by focusing the sunlight on some dry moss, he had ignited it.
The sailor examined the lens; then he looked at the engineer without saying a word, but his face spoke for him. If Smith was not a magician to him, he was certainly more than a man. At last his speech returned, and he said:—
The sailor studied the lens; then he glanced at the engineer without saying anything, but his expression said it all. If Smith wasn’t a magician to him, he was definitely more than just a man. Finally, he found his voice and said:—
“Put that down, Mr. Spilett, put that down in your book!”
“Put that down, Mr. Spilett, write that down in your notebook!”
“I have it down,” said the reporter.
“I've got it,” said the reporter.
Then, with the help of Neb, the sailor arranged the spit, and dressed the cabiai for roasting, like a suckling pig, before the sparkling fire, by whose warmth, and by the restoration of the partitions, the Chimneys had been rendered habitable.
Then, with Neb's help, the sailor set up the spit and prepared the cabiai for roasting, like a suckling pig, before the shining fire, which, along with the restored partitions, made the chimneys livable.
The engineer and his companion had made good use of their day. Smith had almost entirely recovered his strength, which he had tested by climbing the plateau above. From thence his eye, accustomed to measure heights and distances, had attentively examined the cone whose summit he proposed to reach on the morrow. The mountain, situated about six miles to the northwest, seemed to him to reach about 3,500 feet above the level of the sea, so that an observer posted at its summit, could command a horizon of fifty miles at least. He hoped, therefore, for an easy solution of the urgent question, “Island or continent?”
The engineer and his friend had made the most of their day. Smith had almost fully regained his strength, which he tested by climbing the plateau above. From there, his eye, trained to gauge heights and distances, carefully examined the cone he planned to reach the next day. The mountain, located about six miles northwest, appeared to rise about 3,500 feet above sea level, so someone at its peak would be able to see at least a fifty-mile horizon. He hoped for a straightforward answer to the pressing question: “Island or continent?”
They had a pleasant supper, and the meat of the cabiai was proclaimed excellent; the sargassum and pistachio-nuts completed the repast. But the engineer said little; he was planning for the next day. Once or twice Pencroff talked of some project for the future, but Smith shook his head.
They enjoyed a nice dinner, and everyone agreed that the cabiai meat was excellent; the sargassum and pistachio nuts rounded out the meal. However, the engineer didn’t say much; he was focused on planning for the next day. Pencroff mentioned a few ideas for the future now and then, but Smith just shook his head.
“To-morrow,” he said, “we will know how we are situated, and we can act accordingly.”
“Tomorrow,” he said, “we’ll know where we stand, and we can proceed from there.”
After supper, more armfuls of wood were thrown on the fire, and the party lay down to sleep. The morning found them fresh and eager for the expedition which was to settle their fate.
After dinner, more loads of wood were tossed onto the fire, and the group settled down to sleep. The morning found them refreshed and ready for the adventure that would determine their fate.
Everything was ready. Enough was left of the cabiai for twenty-four hours’ provisions, and they hoped to replenish their stock on the way. They charred a little linen for tinder, as the watch glasses had been replaced, and flint abounded in this volcanic region.
Everything was ready. There was enough cabiai left for twenty-four hours' worth of supplies, and they hoped to restock along the way. They burned a bit of linen for tinder since the watch glasses had been replaced, and flint was plentiful in this volcanic area.
At half-past 7 they left the Chimneys, each with a stout cudgel. By Pencroff’s advice, they took the route of the previous day, which was the shortest way to the mountain. They turned the southern angle, and followed the left bank of the river, leaving it where it bent to the southwest. They took the beaten path under the evergreens, and soon reached the northern border of the forest. The soil, flat and swampy, then dry and sandy, rose by a gradual slope towards the interior. Among the trees appeared a few shy animals, which rapidly took flight before Top. The engineer called his dog back; later, perhaps, they might hunt, but now nothing could distract him from his great object. He observed neither the character of the ground nor its products; he was going straight for the top of the mountain.
At 7:30, they left the Chimneys, each holding a sturdy stick. Following Pencroff’s suggestion, they took the same route as the day before, which was the shortest way to the mountain. They turned south and followed the left side of the river, leaving it where it curved southwest. They walked along the familiar path under the evergreen trees and soon reached the northern edge of the forest. The ground changed from flat and marshy to dry and sandy, gradually rising towards the interior. A few timid animals appeared among the trees, quickly fleeing from Top. The engineer called his dog back; they could hunt later, but right now, nothing could distract him from his main goal. He didn’t pay attention to the terrain or what it produced; he was heading straight for the top of the mountain.
At 10 o’clock they were clear of the forest, and they halted for a while to observe the country. The mountain was composed of two cones. The first was truncated about 2,500 feet up, and supported by fantastic spurs, branching out like the talons of an immense claw, laid upon the ground. Between these spurs were narrow valleys, thick set with trees, whose topmost foliage was level with the flat summit of the first cone. On the northeast side of the mountain, vegetation was more scanty, and the ground was seamed here and there, apparently with currents of lava.
At 10 o'clock, they emerged from the forest and paused for a moment to take in the landscape. The mountain had two peaks. The first one was flattened about 2,500 feet up, supported by strange spurs that branched out like the claws of a giant hand resting on the ground. Between these spurs were narrow valleys filled with trees, whose highest leaves were level with the flat top of the first peak. On the northeast side of the mountain, the vegetation was sparser, and the ground showed signs of being cut by what seemed to be lava flows.
On the first cone lay a second, slightly rounded towards the summit. It lay somewhat across the other, like a huge hat cocked over the ear. The surface seemed utterly bare, with reddish rocks often protruding. The object of the expedition was to reach the top of this cone, and their best way was along the edge of the spurs.
On the first cone, there was a second one, slightly rounded at the top. It was positioned somewhat across the other, like a giant hat tilted to one side. The surface appeared completely bare, with reddish rocks often sticking out. The goal of the expedition was to reach the summit of this cone, and the best route was along the edges of the spurs.
“We are in a volcanic country,” said Cyrus Smith, as they began to climb, little by little, up the side of the spurs, whose winding summit would most readily bring them out upon the lower plateau. The ground was strewn with traces of igneous convulsion. Here and there lay blocks, debris of basalt, pumice-stone, and obsidian. In isolated clumps rose some few of those conifers, which, some hundreds of feet lower, in the narrow gorges, formed a gigantic thicket, impenetrable to the sun. As they climbed these lower slopes, Herbert called attention to the recent marks of huge paws and hoofs on the ground.
“We're in a volcanic area,” said Cyrus Smith as they started to climb, slowly making their way up the winding slopes that would lead them to the lower plateau. The ground was scattered with signs of volcanic activity. Here and there were chunks of basalt, pumice stone, and obsidian. A few conifer trees stood in isolated groups, which, hundreds of feet below in the narrow gorges, created a dense thicket that blocked out the sun. As they ascended these lower slopes, Herbert pointed out the fresh tracks of large paws and hooves on the ground.
“These brutes will make a fight for their territory,” said Pencroff.
“These brutes are going to fight for their territory,” said Pencroff.
“Oh well,” said the reporter, who had hunted tigers in India and lions in Africa, “we shall contrive to get rid of them. In the meanwhile, we must be on our guard.”
“Oh well,” said the reporter, who had tracked tigers in India and lions in Africa, “we’ll figure out how to get rid of them. In the meantime, we need to stay alert.”
While talking they were gradually ascending. The way was lengthened by detours around the obstacles which could not be directly surmounted. Sometimes, too, deep crevasses yawned across the ascent, and compelled them to return upon their track for a long distance, before they could find an available pathway. At noon, when the little company halted to dine at the foot of a great clump of firs, at whose foot babbled a tiny brook, they were still half way from the first plateau, and could hardly reach it before nightfall. From this point the sea stretched broad beneath their feet; but on the right their vision was arrested by the sharp promontory of the southeast, which left them in doubt whether there was land beyond. On the left they could see directly north for several miles; but the northwest was concealed from them by the crest of a fantastic spur, which formed a massive abutment to the central cone. They could, therefore, make no approach as yet to the solving of the great question.
While they talked, they were slowly climbing. The path was extended by detours around obstacles they couldn't get over directly. Sometimes, deep crevasses opened up across their path, forcing them to backtrack for a long distance before they could find a way forward. At noon, when the small group stopped to eat at the base of a large cluster of firs, beside a babbling brook, they were still halfway to the first plateau and could barely reach it before nightfall. From this spot, the sea spread wide beneath them; however, to the right, they were stopped by the sharp promontory to the southeast, leaving them uncertain if there was land beyond. To the left, they could see directly north for several miles, but the northwest was hidden from view by the crest of a strange spur that formed a solid support to the central cone. Therefore, they couldn't get any closer to answering the big question yet.
At 1 o’clock, the ascent was again begun. The easiest route slanted upwards towards the southwest, through the thick copse. There, under the trees, were flying about a number of gallinaceæ of the pheasant family. These were “tragopans,” adorned with a sort of fleshy wattles hanging over their necks and with two little cylindrical horns behind their eyes. Of these birds, which were about the size of a hen, the female was invariably brown, while the male was resplendent in a coat of red, with little spots of white. With a well-aimed stone Spilett killed one of the tragopans, which the hungry Pencroff looked at with longing eyes.
At 1 o’clock, they started the climb again. The easiest path slanted up towards the southwest, cutting through the thick brush. There, under the trees, a number of pheasants were flying around. These were “tragopans,” decorated with fleshy wattles hanging over their necks and two small cylindrical horns behind their eyes. These birds, about the size of a hen, had females that were always brown, while the males were stunning in bright red with small white spots. Spilett hit one of the tragopans with a well-aimed stone, catching the hungry Pencroff’s envious gaze.
Leaving the copse, the climbers, by mounting on each other’s shoulders, ascended for a hundred feet up a very steep hill, and reached a terrace, almost bare of trees, whose soil was evidently volcanic. From hence, their course was a zigzag towards the east, for the declivity was so steep that they had to take every point of vantage. Neb and Herbert led the way, then came Smith and the reporter; Pencroff was last. The animals who lived among these heights, and whose traces were not wanting, must have the sure foot and the supple spine of a chamois or an izard. They saw some to whom Pencroff gave a name of his own—“Sheep,” he cried.
Leaving the grove, the climbers, by climbing on each other’s shoulders, went up a steep hill for about a hundred feet and reached a nearly tree-free terrace with volcanic soil. From there, they zigzagged towards the east because the slope was so steep that they had to take advantage of every possible point. Neb and Herbert led the way, followed by Smith and the reporter; Pencroff brought up the rear. The animals living in these heights, whose traces they could see, must have the sure-footedness and flexible bodies of a chamois or an izard. They spotted some animals that Pencroff decided to call “Sheep,” he shouted.
They all had stopped fifty feet from half-a-dozen large animals, with thick horns curved backwards and flattened at the end, and with woolly fleece, hidden under long silky fawn-colored hair. They were not the common sheep, but a species widely distributed through the mountainous regions of the temperate zone. Their name, according to Herbert, was Moufflon.
They all stopped fifty feet away from half a dozen large animals with thick horns that curved backward and flattened at the ends, covered in woolly fleece hidden beneath long, silky, fawn-colored hair. They weren't ordinary sheep but a species found widely in the mountainous areas of the temperate zone. According to Herbert, their name was Moufflon.
“Have they legs and chops?” asked the sailor.
“Do they have legs and chops?” asked the sailor.
“Yes,” replied Herbert.
“Yes,” replied Herbert.
“Then they’re sheep,” said Pencroff. The animals stood motionless and astonished at their first sight of man. Then, seized with sudden fear, they fled, leaping away among the rocks.
“Then they’re sheep,” said Pencroff. The animals stood still, stunned by their first encounter with a human. Then, suddenly frightened, they bolted, hopping away among the rocks.
“Good-bye till next time,” cried Pencroff to them, in a tone so comical that the others could not forbear laughing.
“See you next time,” shouted Pencroff to them, in such a funny way that the others couldn’t help but laugh.
As the ascension continued, the traces of lava were more frequent, and little sulphur springs intercepted their route. At some points sulphur had been deposited in crystals, in the midst of the sand and whitish cinders of feldspar which generally precede the eruption of lava. As they neared the first plateau, formed by the truncation of the lower cone, the ascent became very difficult. By 4 o’clock the last belt of trees had been passed. Here and there stood a few dwarfed and distorted pines, which had survived the attacks of the furious winds. Fortunately for the engineer and his party, it was a pleasant, mild day; for a high wind, at that altitude of 3,000 feet, would have interfered with them sadly. The sky overhead was extremely bright and clear. A perfect calm reigned around them. The sun was hidden by the upper mountain, which cast its shadow, like a vast screen, westward to the edge of the sea. A thin haze began to appear in the east, colored with all the rays of the solar spectrum.
As they continued to climb, they saw more signs of lava and a few sulfur springs along their path. In some areas, sulfur had crystallized amidst the sand and pale feldspar ashes that usually come before a lava eruption. As they got closer to the first plateau, which was formed by the top of the lower cone being cut off, the climb became really challenging. By 4 o’clock, they had passed the last group of trees. Occasionally, they spotted a few stunted and twisted pines that had managed to survive the fierce winds. Luckily for the engineer and his team, it was a nice, mild day; a strong wind at that height of 3,000 feet would have been a big problem for them. The sky above was exceptionally bright and clear. There was a perfect stillness around them. The sun was blocked by the upper mountain, casting its shadow like a huge screen westward toward the sea. A light haze started to appear in the east, shimmering with all the colors of the sunlight spectrum.
There were only 500 feet between the explorers and the plateau where they meant to encamp for the night, but these 500 were increased to 2,000 and more by the tortuous route. The ground, so to speak, gave way under their feet. The angle of ascent was often so obtuse that they slipped upon the smooth-worn lava. Little by little the evening set in, and it was almost night when the party, tired out by a seven hours’ climb, arrived at the top of the first cone.
There were only 500 feet between the explorers and the plateau where they planned to camp for the night, but those 500 turned into over 2,000 because of the winding path. The ground seemed to give way under them. The slope was often so steep that they slipped on the smooth-worn lava. Gradually, evening approached, and it was nearly night when the group, exhausted from a seven-hour climb, reached the top of the first cone.
Now they must pitch their camp, and think of supper and sleep. The upper terrace of the mountain rose upon a base of rocks, amid which they could soon find a shelter. Firewood was not plenty, yet the moss and dry thistles, so abundant on the plateau, would serve their turn. The sailor built up a fireplace with huge stones, while Neb and Herbert went after the combustibles. They soon came back with a load of thistles; and with flint and steel, the charred linen for tinder, and Neb to blow the fire, a bright blaze was soon sparkling behind the rocks. It was for warmth only, for they kept the pheasant for the next day, and supped off the rest of the cabiai and a few dozen pistachio-nuts.
Now they had to set up their camp and think about dinner and sleep. The upper part of the mountain had a rocky base where they could quickly find shelter. Firewood wasn’t abundant, but the moss and dry thistles were plentiful on the plateau and would do the job. The sailor built a fireplace with large stones while Neb and Herbert went to gather firewood. They soon returned with a load of thistles, and with flint and steel, the charred linen for tinder, and Neb to blow on the fire, a bright blaze quickly sparked to life behind the rocks. It was just for warmth, since they saved the pheasant for the next day, and they ate the rest of the cabiai and a few dozen pistachio nuts for dinner.
It was only half-past 6 when the meal was ended. Cyrus Smith resolved to explore, in, the semi-obscurity, the great circular pediment which upheld the topmost cone of the mountain. Before taking rest, he was anxious to know whether the base of the cone could be passed, in case its flanks should prove too steep for ascent. So, regardless of fatigue, he left Pencroff and Neb to make the sleeping arrangements, and Spilett to note down the incidents of the day, and taking Herbert with him, began to walk around the base of the plateau towards the north.
It was only 6:30 when the meal ended. Cyrus Smith decided to explore, in the dim light, the large circular platform that supported the peak of the mountain. Before resting, he wanted to see if the base of the cone could be traversed, in case its sides turned out to be too steep to climb. So, ignoring his fatigue, he left Pencroff and Neb to set up for the night, and Spilett to jot down the day's events, and, taking Herbert with him, started walking around the base of the plateau toward the north.
The night was beautiful and still; and not yet very dark. They walked together in silence. Sometimes the plateau was wide and easy, sometimes so encumbered with rubbish that the two could not walk abreast. Finally, after twenty minutes tramp, they were brought to a halt. From this point the slant of the two cones was equal. To walk around the mountain upon an acclivity whose angle was nearly seventy-five degrees was impossible.
The night was beautiful and calm; it wasn’t completely dark yet. They walked together in silence. Sometimes the plateau was wide and easy to navigate, but other times it was so cluttered with debris that they couldn’t walk side by side. After about twenty minutes of walking, they came to a stop. From this point, the incline of the two cones was the same. Walking around the mountain on a slope that was nearly seventy-five degrees was impossible.
But though they had to give up their flank movement, the chance of a direct ascent was suddenly offered to them. Before them opened an immense chasm in the solid rock. It was the mouth of the upper crater, the gullet, so to speak, through which, when the volcano was active, the eruption took place. Inside, hardened lava and scoriæ formed a sort of natural staircase with enormous steps, by which they might possibly reach the summit. Smith saw the opportunity at a glance, and followed by the boy, he walked unhesitatingly into the huge crevasse, in the midst of the gathering darkness.
But even though they had to abandon their side movement, a chance for a direct climb suddenly opened up for them. In front of them was a massive chasm in the solid rock. It was the entrance to the upper crater, the throat, so to speak, through which the eruption occurred when the volcano was active. Inside, hardened lava and cinders formed a kind of natural staircase with huge steps that might allow them to reach the summit. Smith recognized the opportunity immediately, and followed by the boy, he walked confidently into the vast crevice as darkness gathered around them.
There were yet 1,000 feet to climb. Could they scale the interior wall of the crater? They would try, at all events. Fortunately, the long and sinuous declivities described a winding staircase, and greatly helped their ascent. The crater was evidently exhausted. Not a puff of smoke, not a glimmer of fire, escaped; not a sound or motion in the dark abyss, reaching down, perhaps, to the centre of the globe. The air within retained no taint of sulphur. The volcano was not only quiet, but extinct.
There were still 1,000 feet to climb. Could they navigate the inside wall of the crater? They would give it a shot, anyway. Fortunately, the long and winding slopes formed a sort of spiral staircase, making their ascent much easier. The crater was clearly inactive. Not a wisp of smoke, not a flicker of fire, escaped; there was no sound or movement in the dark void, possibly reaching all the way to the center of the Earth. The air inside had no hint of sulfur. The volcano was not just quiet, but dead.
Evidently the attempt was to succeed. Gradually, as the two mounted the inner walls, they saw the crater grow larger over their heads. The light from the outer sky visibly increased. At each step, so to speak, which they made, new stars entered the field of their vision: The magnificent constellations of the southern sky shone resplendent. In the zenith glittered the splendid Antares of the Scorpion, and not far off that Beta of the Centaur, which is believed to be the nearest star to our terrestrial globe. Then, as the crater opened, appeared Fomalhaut of the Fish, the Triangle, and at last, almost at the Antarctic pole, the glowing Southern Cross.
Clearly, the effort was working. Slowly, as the two climbed the inner walls, they noticed the crater getting larger above them. The light from the outer sky noticeably increased. With each step they took, new stars came into view: the stunning constellations of the southern sky shone brightly. At the top, the brilliant Antares of the Scorpion sparkled, and not far away was Beta of the Centaur, thought to be the closest star to our planet. Then, as the crater widened, they saw Fomalhaut of the Fish, the Triangle, and finally, nearly at the Antarctic pole, the shining Southern Cross.
It was nearly 8 o’clock when they set foot on the summit of the cone. The darkness was by this time complete, and they could hardly see a couple of miles around them. Was the land an island, or the eastern extremity of a continent? They could not yet discover. Towards the west a band of cloud, clearly defined against the horizon, deepened the obscurity, and confounded sea with sky.
It was almost 8 o’clock when they reached the top of the cone. The darkness was total by then, and they could barely see a couple of miles around them. Was the land an island, or the eastern edge of a continent? They couldn’t tell yet. To the west, a band of clouds, sharply outlined against the horizon, made the darkness even deeper, blending the sea with the sky.
But at one point of the horizon suddenly appeared a vague light, which slowly sank as the clouds mounted to the zenith. It was the slender crescent of the moon, just about to disappear. But the line of the horizon was now cloudless, and as the moon touched it, the engineer could see her face mirrored for an instant on a liquid surface. He seized the boy’s hand—
But at one point on the horizon, a faint light suddenly appeared, slowly sinking as the clouds rose to the top. It was the thin crescent of the moon, just about to vanish. The line of the horizon was now clear, and as the moon reached it, the engineer could see its reflection for a moment on the water's surface. He grabbed the boy’s hand—
“An island!” said he, as the lunar crescent disappeared behind the waves.
“An island!” he exclaimed, as the crescent moon vanished behind the waves.
CHAPTER XI.
AT THE SUMMIT OF THE CONE—THE INTERIOR OF THE CRATER—SEA EVERYWHERE —NO LAND IN SIGHT—A BIRD’S EVE VIEW OF THE COAST—HYDROGRAPHY AND OROGRAPHY —IS THE ISLAND INHABITED?—A GEOGRAPHICAL BAPTISM—LINCOLN ISLAND.
AT THE TOP OF THE CONE—THE INSIDE OF THE CRATER—SEA ALL AROUND —NO LAND IN SIGHT—A BIRD’S EYE VIEW OF THE COAST—HYDROGRAPHY AND OROGRAPHY —IS THE ISLAND INHABITED?—A GEOGRAPHICAL BAPTISM—LINCOLN ISLAND.
A half hour later they walked back to the camp. The engineer contented himself with saying to his comrades that the country was an island, and that to-morrow they would consider what to do. Then each disposed himself to sleep, and in this basalt cave, 2,500 feet above sea-level, they passed a quiet night in profound repose. The next day, March 30, after a hurried breakfast on roast trajopan, they started out for the summit of the volcano. All desired to see the isle on which perhaps they were to spend their lives, and to ascertain how far it lay from other land, and how near the course of vessels bound for the archipelagoes of the Pacific.
A half-hour later, they walked back to the camp. The engineer simply told his teammates that the area was an island and that tomorrow they would decide what to do. Then everyone settled in for the night, and in this basalt cave, 2,500 feet above sea level, they had a peaceful night of deep sleep. The next day, March 30, after a quick breakfast of roasted trajopan, they set out for the top of the volcano. Everyone wanted to see the island where they might be living for the rest of their lives and to check how far it was from other land, as well as how close the route was for ships headed to the Pacific archipelagos.
It was about 7 o’clock in the morning when they left the camp. No one seemed dismayed by the situation. They had faith in themselves, no doubt; but the source of that faith was not the same with Smith as with his companions. They trusted in him, he in his ability to extort from the wilderness around them all the necessaries of life. As for Pencroff, he would not have despaired, since the rekindling of the fire by the engineer’s lens, if he had found himself upon a barren rock, if only Smith was with him.
It was around 7 a.m. when they left the camp. No one seemed upset by the situation. They definitely had confidence in themselves; however, the source of that confidence was different for Smith compared to his friends. They relied on him, while he depended on his ability to squeeze everything he needed from the wilderness around them. As for Pencroff, he wouldn’t have lost hope, even after the engineer reignited the fire with his lens, if he had found himself on a barren rock, as long as Smith was by his side.
“Bah!” said he, “we got out of Richmond without the permission of the authorities, and it will be strange if we can’t get away some time from a place where no one wants to keep us!”
“Bah!” he said, “we left Richmond without the authorities’ approval, and it would be surprising if we can’t escape from a place where no one wants to hold us!”
They followed the route of the day before, flanking the cone till they reached the enormous crevasse. It was a superb day, and the southern side of the mountain was bathed in sunlight. The crater, as the engineer had supposed, was a huge shaft gradually opening to a height of 1,000 feet above the plateau. From the bottom of the crevasse large currents of lava meandered down the flanks of the mountain, indicating the path of the eruptive matter down to the lower valleys which furrowed the north of the island.
They took the same path as the day before, walking around the cone until they arrived at the massive crevasse. It was a gorgeous day, and the southern side of the mountain was soaking up the sun. The crater, just as the engineer had guessed, was a vast shaft that gradually opened up to a height of 1,000 feet above the plateau. From the bottom of the crevasse, large streams of lava flowed down the sides of the mountain, showing the route of the eruptive material down to the lower valleys that carved through the northern part of the island.
The interior of the crater, which had an inclination of thirty-five or forty degrees, was easily scaled. They saw on the way traces of ancient lava, which had probably gushed from the summit of the cone before the lateral opening had given it a new way of escape. As to the volcano chimney which communicated with the subterranean abyss, its depth could not be estimated by the eye, for it was lost in obscurity; but there seemed no doubt that the volcano was completely extinct. Before 8 o’clock, the party were standing at the summit of the crater, on a conical elevation of the northern side.
The inside of the crater, which had a slope of about thirty-five or forty degrees, was easy to climb. They noticed remnants of ancient lava along the way, likely released from the top of the cone before the side opening provided a new escape route. Regarding the volcanic chimney that connected to the underground abyss, its depth couldn't be seen because it disappeared into darkness; however, it seemed clear that the volcano was totally inactive. Before 8 o’clock, the group was standing at the top of the crater, on a conical rise on the northern side.
“The sea! the sea everywhere!” was the universal exclamation. There it lay, an immense sheet of water around them on every side. Perhaps Smith had hoped that daylight would reveal some neighboring coast or island. But nothing appeared to the horizon-line, a radius of more than fifty miles. Not a sail was in sight. Around the island stretched a desert infinity of ocean.
“The sea! The sea everywhere!” was the common shout. There it was, a vast expanse of water all around them. Maybe Smith had hoped that daylight would show some nearby shore or island. But nothing appeared on the horizon, which extended for more than fifty miles. Not a sail was in sight. Around the island lay a limitless desert of ocean.
Silent and motionless, they surveyed every point of the horizon. They strained their eyes to the uttermost limit of the ocean. But even Pencroff, to whom Nature had given a pair of telescopes instead of eyes, and who could have detected land even in the faintest haze upon the sea-line, could see nothing. Then they looked down upon their island, and the silence was broken by Spilett:—
Silent and still, they looked at every part of the horizon. They pushed their eyes to the farthest edge of the ocean. But even Pencroff, who had been given a pair of telescopes instead of eyes by Nature, and who could spot land even in the slightest haze on the sea line, saw nothing. Then they glanced down at their island, and Spilett broke the silence:—
“How large do you think this island is?”
“How big do you think this island is?”
It seemed small enough in the midst of the infinite ocean.
It felt tiny in the vast ocean.
Smith thought awhile, noticed the circumference of the island, and allowed for the elevation.
Smith thought for a moment, observed the island's outline, and took the height into account.
“My friends,” he said, “if I am not mistaken, the coast of the island is more than 100 miles around.”
“My friends,” he said, “if I’m not wrong, the coast of the island is over 100 miles long.”
“Then its surface will be—”
"Then its surface will be—"
“That is hard to estimate; the outline is so irregular.”
"That's tough to figure out; the shape is so uneven."
If Smith was right, the island would be about the size of Malta or Zante in the Mediterranean; but it was more irregular than they, and at the same time had fewer capes, promontories, points, bays, and creeks. Its form was very striking. When Spilett drew it they declared it was like some fantastic sea beast, some monstrous pteropode, asleep on the surface of the Pacific.
If Smith was correct, the island would be about the size of Malta or Zakynthos in the Mediterranean; however, it was more irregular than those, and at the same time had fewer capes, promontories, points, bays, and creeks. Its shape was very striking. When Spilett sketched it, they said it looked like some fantastical sea creature, a monstrous pteropod, sleeping on the surface of the Pacific.
The exact configuration of the island may thus be described:—The eastern coast, upon which the castaways had landed, was a decided curve, embracing a large bay, terminating at the southeast in a sharp promontory, which the shape of the land had hidden from Pencroff on his first exploration. On the northeast, two other capes shut in the bay, and between them lay a narrow gulf like the half-open jaws of some formidable dog-fish. From northeast to northwest the coast was round and flat, like the skull of a wild beast; then came a sort of indeterminate hump, whose centre was occupied by the volcanic mountain. From this point the coast ran directly north and south. For two-thirds of its length it was bordered by a narrow creek; then it finished in along cue, like the tail of a gigantic alligator. This cue formed a veritable peninsula, which extended more than thirty miles into the sea, reckoning from the southeastern cape before mentioned. These thirty miles, the southern coast of the island, described an open bay. The narrowest part of the island, between the Chimneys and the creek, on the west, was ten miles wide, but its greatest length, from the jaw in the northeast to the extremity of the southwestern peninsula, was not less than thirty miles.
The precise layout of the island can be described as follows: The eastern coast, where the castaways landed, was a clear curve, forming a large bay that ended at the southeast with a sharp point, which the shape of the land had hidden from Pencroff during his initial exploration. To the northeast, two other capes enclosed the bay, and between them was a narrow opening resembling the half-open jaws of a fierce dogfish. From northeast to northwest, the coast was round and flat, similar to the skull of a wild animal; then there was a sort of unclear bump in the middle, which housed the volcanic mountain. From this point, the coast ran directly north and south. For two-thirds of its length, it was bordered by a narrow creek; then it tapered into a long tail, like that of a gigantic alligator. This tail formed a true peninsula, extending more than thirty miles into the sea from the previously mentioned southeastern cape. This thirty-mile stretch, the southern coast of the island, created an open bay. The narrowest section of the island, between the Chimneys and the creek on the west, was ten miles wide, but its longest length, from the northeastern jaw to the tip of the southwestern peninsula, measured at least thirty miles.
The general aspect of the interior was as follows:—The southern part, from the shore to the mountain, was covered with woods; the northern part was arid and sandy. Between the volcano and the eastern coast the party were surprised to see a lake, surrounded by evergreens, whose existence they had not suspected. Viewed from such a height it seemed to be on the same level with the sea, but, on reflection, the engineer explained to his companions that it must be at least 300 feet higher, for the plateau on which it lay was as high as that of the coast.
The overall look of the interior was as follows:—The southern part, stretching from the shore to the mountain, was covered in woods; the northern part was dry and sandy. Between the volcano and the eastern coast, the group was surprised to find a lake, surrounded by evergreen trees, which they hadn't expected. From their high vantage point, it appeared to be at sea level, but after thinking about it, the engineer explained to his companions that it had to be at least 300 feet higher, because the plateau it sat on was as high as the coastline.
“So, then, it is a fresh water lake?” asked Pencroff.
“So, is it a freshwater lake?” asked Pencroff.
“Yes,” said the engineer, “for it must be fed by the mountain streams.”
“Yes,” said the engineer, “because it has to be supplied by the mountain streams.”
“I can see a little river flowing into it,” said Herbert, pointing to a narrow brook whose source was evidently in the spurs of the western cliff.
“I can see a small river flowing into it,” said Herbert, pointing to a narrow stream whose source clearly came from the foothills of the western cliff.
“True,” said Smith, “and since this brook flows into the lake, there is probably some outlet towards the sea for the overflow. We will see about that when we go back.”
“True,” said Smith, “and since this brook flows into the lake, there's likely some way for the overflow to reach the sea. We'll check on that when we head back.”
This little winding stream and the river so familiar to them were all the watercourses they could see. Nevertheless, it was possible that under those-masses of trees which covered two-thirds of the island, other streams flowed towards the sea. This seemed the more probable from the fertility of the country and its magnificent display of the flora of the temperate zone. In the northern section there was no indication of running water; perhaps there might be stagnant pools in the swampy part of the northeast, but that was all; in the main this region was composed of arid sand-hills and downs, contrasting strongly with the fertility of the larger portion.
This small winding stream and the river they knew so well were all the water sources they could see. Still, it was possible that beneath the masses of trees covering two-thirds of the island, other streams flowed toward the sea. This seemed more likely given the land's fertility and its stunning display of temperate zone plants. In the northern section, there were no signs of running water; there might be stagnant pools in the swampy northeast, but that was about it. For the most part, this area was made up of dry sand dunes and hills, which stood in stark contrast to the lushness of the larger section.
The volcano did not occupy the centre of the island. It rose in the northwest, and seemed to indicate the dividing line of the two zones. On the southwest, south, and southeast, the beginnings of the spurs were lost in masses of verdure. To the north, on the contrary, these ramifications were plainly visible, subsiding gradually to the level of the sandy plain. On this side, too, when the volcano was active, the eruptions had taken place, and a great bed of lava extended as far as the narrow jaw which formed the northeastern gulf.
The volcano wasn’t in the center of the island. It was situated in the northwest and seemed to mark the boundary between the two areas. To the southwest, south, and southeast, the foothills faded into thick greenery. In contrast, to the north, these branches were clearly visible, gradually lowering to the sandy plain. On this side, when the volcano was active, eruptions had occurred, and a massive lava flow stretched all the way to the narrow opening that formed the northeastern gulf.
They remained for an hour at the summit of the mountain. The island lay stretched before them like a plan in relief, with its different tints, green for the forests, yellow for the sands, blue for the water. They understood the configuration of the entire island; only the bottoms of the shady valleys and the depths of the narrow gorges between the spurs of the volcano, concealed by the spreading foliage, escaped their searching eye.
They stayed for an hour at the top of the mountain. The island spread out before them like a detailed map, with its various shades: green for the forests, yellow for the sands, blue for the water. They grasped the layout of the entire island; only the bottoms of the shaded valleys and the depths of the narrow gorges between the slopes of the volcano, hidden by the wide branches, eluded their careful gaze.
There remained a question of great moment, whose answer would have a controlling influence upon the fortunes of the castaways. Was the island inhabited? It was the reporter who put this question, which seemed already to have been answered in the negative by the minute examination which they had just made of the different portions of the island. Nowhere could they perceive the handiwork of man; no late settlement on the beach, not even a lonely cabin or a fisherman’s hut. No smoke, rising on the air, betrayed a human presence. It is true, the observers were thirty miles from the long peninsula which extended to the southwest, and upon which even Pencroff’s eye could hardly have discovered a dwelling. Nor could they raise the curtain of foliage which covered three-fourths of the island to see whether some village lay sheltered there. But the natives of these little islands in the Pacific usually live on the coast, and the coast seemed absolutely desert. Until they should make a more complete exploration, they might assume that the island was uninhabited. But was it ever frequented by the inhabitants of neighboring islands? This question was difficult to answer. No land appeared within a radius of fifty miles. But fifty miles could easily be traversed by Malay canoes or by the larger pirogues of the Polynesians. Everything depended upon the situation of the island—on its isolation in the Pacific, or its proximity to the archipelagoes. Could Smith succeed, without his instruments, in determining its latitude and longitude? It would be difficult, and in the uncertainty, they must take precautions against an attack from savage neighbors.
A big question remained that would significantly impact the fate of the castaways: Was the island inhabited? It was the reporter who raised this question, which had seemingly been answered with a no after their thorough examination of different parts of the island. They couldn't find any signs of human activity; there were no recent settlements on the beach, not even a solitary cabin or a fisherman's hut. No smoke rising in the air indicated any human presence. Admittedly, the observers were thirty miles away from the long peninsula stretching to the southwest, where even Pencroff could hardly spot a home. They also couldn't lift the thick foliage covering three-quarters of the island to check for a hidden village. However, the natives of these small islands in the Pacific typically lived along the coast, which appeared completely deserted. Until they conducted a more thorough exploration, they could assume the island was uninhabited. But had it ever been visited by the inhabitants of nearby islands? That question was tough to answer. No land could be seen within a fifty-mile radius. Yet, fifty miles could easily be covered by Malay canoes or the larger pirogues of the Polynesians. Everything hinged on the island's location—whether it was isolated in the Pacific or close to the archipelagos. Could Smith manage to determine its latitude and longitude without his tools? It would be challenging, and given the uncertainty, they needed to take precautions against potential attacks from hostile neighbors.
The exploration of the island was finished, its configuration determined, a map of it drawn, its size calculated, and the distribution of its land and water ascertained. The forests and the plains had been roughly sketched upon the reporter’s map. They had only now to descend the declivities of the mountain, and to examine into the animal, vegetable, and mineral resources of the country. But before giving the signal of departure, Cyrus Smith, in a calm, grave voice, addressed his companions.
The exploration of the island was complete, its shape established, a map created, its size measured, and the layout of its land and water identified. The forests and plains had been roughly drawn on the reporter’s map. They only needed to come down the slopes of the mountain and look into the animal, plant, and mineral resources of the area. But before signaling their departure, Cyrus Smith, in a calm, serious tone, spoke to his companions.
“Look, my friends, upon this little corner of the earth, on which the hand of the Almighty has cast us. Here, perhaps, we may long dwell. Perhaps, too, unexpected help will arrive, should some ship chance to pass. I say chance, because this island is of slight importance, without even a harbor for ships. I fear it is situated out of the usual course of vessels, too far south for those which frequent the archipelagoes of the Pacific, too far north for those bound to Australia round Cape Horn. I will not disguise from you our situation.”
“Look, my friends, at this little corner of the earth where the hand of the Almighty has placed us. Here, perhaps, we can stay for a long time. Maybe unexpected help will come if a ship happens to pass by. I say happens because this island isn't very important and doesn’t even have a harbor for ships. I’m afraid it’s out of the usual route for vessels, too far south for those that travel the Pacific archipelagos, and too far north for those heading to Australia around Cape Horn. I won’t hide our situation from you.”
“And you are right, my dear Cyrus,” said the reporter, eagerly. “You are dealing with men. They trust you, and you can count on them. Can he not, my friends?”
“And you’re right, my dear Cyrus,” said the reporter, excitedly. “You’re working with people. They trust you, and you can rely on them. Can he not, my friends?”
“I will obey you in everyting [sic], Mr. Smith,” said Herbert, taking the engineer’s hand.
“I will obey you in everything, Mr. Smith,” said Herbert, shaking the engineer’s hand.
“May I lose my name,” said the sailor, “if I shirk my part! If you choose, Mr. Smith, we will make a little America here. We will build cities, lay railroads, establish telegraphs, and some day, when the island is transformed and civilized, offer her to the United States. But one thing I should like to ask.”
“May I lose my name,” said the sailor, “if I avoid my duty! If you want, Mr. Smith, we can create a little America here. We will build cities, lay down railroads, set up telegraphs, and someday, when the island is transformed and civilized, offer it to the United States. But there’s one thing I would like to ask.”
“What Is that?” said the reporter.
“What is that?” said the reporter.
“That we should not consider ourselves any longer as castaways, but as colonists.”
“That we should no longer think of ourselves as outcasts, but as settlers.”
Cyrus Smith could not help smiling, and the motion was adopted. Then Smith thanked his companions, and added that he counted upon their energy and upon the help of Heaven.
Cyrus Smith couldn’t help but smile, and the motion was approved. Then Smith thanked his friends and added that he was counting on their enthusiasm and the support of Heaven.
“Well, let’s start for the Chimneys,” said Pencroff.
“Well, let’s head to the Chimneys,” Pencroff said.
“One minute, my friends,” answered the engineer; “would it not be well to name the island, as well as the capes, promontories, and water-courses, which we see before us?”
“One minute, my friends,” replied the engineer; “wouldn't it be a good idea to name the island, along with the capes, promontories, and rivers that we see ahead of us?”
“Good,” said the reporter. “That will simplify for the future the instructions which we may have to give or to take.”
“Great,” said the reporter. “That will make the instructions we might need to give or receive easier in the future.”
“Yes,” added the sailor, “it will be something gained to be able to say whence we are coming and where we are going. We shall seem to be somewhere.”
“Yes,” added the sailor, “it’ll be a win to be able to say where we’re coming from and where we’re headed. We’ll feel like we actually belong somewhere.”
“At the Chimneys, for instance,” said Herbert.
“At the Chimneys, for example,” said Herbert.
“Exactly,” said the sailor. “That name has been quite convenient already, and I was the author of it. Shall we keep that name for our first encampment, Mr. Smith?”
“Exactly,” said the sailor. “That name has been really useful already, and I came up with it. Should we stick with that name for our first campsite, Mr. Smith?”
“Yes, Pencroff, since you baptized it so.”
“Yes, Pencroff, since you named it that.”
“Good! the others will be easy enough,” resumed the sailor, who was now in the vein. “Let us give them names like those of the Swiss family Robinson, whose story Herbert has read me more than once:—’Providence Bay,’ ‘Cochalot Point,’ ‘Cape Disappointment.’“
“Great! The others will be simple,” the sailor continued, now on a roll. “Let’s name them like the Swiss family Robinson, whose story Herbert has shared with me more than once:—‘Providence Bay,’ ‘Cochalot Point,’ ‘Cape Disappointment.’“
“Or rather Mr. Smith’s name, Mr. Spilett’s, or Neb’s,” said Herbert.
“Or rather Mr. Smith’s name, Mr. Spilett’s, or Neb’s,” Herbert said.
“My name!” cried Neb, showing his white teeth.
“My name!” shouted Neb, flashing his white teeth.
“Why not?” replied Pencroff, “‘Port Neb’ would sound first-rate! And ‘Cape Gideon’—”
“Why not?” replied Pencroff, “‘Port Neb’ would sound great! And ‘Cape Gideon’—”
“I would rather have names, taken from our country,” said the reporter, “which will recall America to us.”
“I would prefer names that come from our country,” said the reporter, “which will remind us of America.”
“Yes,” said Smith, “the principal features, the bays and seas should be so named. For instance, let us call the great bay to the east Union Bay, the southern indentation Washington Bay, the mountain on which we are standing Mount Franklin, the lake beneath our feet Lake Grant. These names will recall our country and the great citizens who have honored it; but for the smaller features, let us choose names which will suggest their especial configuration. These will remain in our memory and be more convenient at the same time. The shape of the island is so peculiar that we shall have no trouble in finding appropriate names. The streams, the creeks, and the forest regions yet to be discovered we will baptize as they come. What say you, my friends?”
“Yes,” said Smith, “the main features, like the bays and seas, should be named. For example, let's call the big bay to the east Union Bay, the southern inlet Washington Bay, the mountain we’re on Mount Franklin, and the lake below us Lake Grant. These names will remind us of our country and the great citizens who have honored it; but for the smaller features, let’s pick names that suggest their unique shapes. These will be easier to remember and more practical too. The shape of the island is so unusual that we shouldn't have any trouble finding fitting names. We’ll name the streams, creeks, and forests as we discover them. What do you think, my friends?”
The engineer’s proposal was unanimously applauded. The inland bay unrolled like a map before their eyes, and they had only to name the features of its contour and relief. Spilett would put down the names over the proper places, and the geographical nomenclature of the island would be complete. First, they named the two bays and the mountain as the engineer had suggested.
The engineer’s proposal received unanimous praise. The inland bay spread out like a map before them, and they just had to identify the features of its shape and landscape. Spilett would write down the names in the right spots, and the island’s geographical naming would be finished. First, they named the two bays and the mountain as the engineer had proposed.
“Now,” said the reporter, “to that peninsula projecting from the southwest I propose to give the name of Serpentine Peninsula, and to call the twisted curve at the termination of it Reptile End, for it is just like a snake’s tail.”
“Now,” said the reporter, “I want to name that peninsula sticking out from the southwest the Serpentine Peninsula, and I’ll call the twisted curve at the end Reptile End, because it looks just like a snake’s tail.”
“Motion carried,” said the engineer.
"Motion approved," said the engineer.
“And the other extremity of the island,” said Herbert, “the gulf so like an open pair of jaws, let us call it Shark Gulf.”
“And the other end of the island,” said Herbert, “the bay that looks so much like an open pair of jaws, let’s call it Shark Gulf.”
“Good enough,” said Pencroff, “and we may complete the figure by calling the two sides of the gulf Mandible Cape.”
“Good enough,” said Pencroff, “and we can finish the shape by naming the two sides of the gulf Mandible Cape.”
“But there are two capes,” observed the reporter.
“But there are two capes,” the reporter noted.
“Well, we will have them North Mandible and South Mandible.”
“Well, we’ll have them North Mandible and South Mandible.”
“I’ve put them down,” said Spilett.
“I’ve written them down,” said Spilett.
“Now we must name the southwestern extremity of the island,” said Pencroff.
“Now we need to name the southwestern tip of the island,” said Pencroff.
“You mean the end of Union Bay?” asked. Herbert.
“You mean the end of Union Bay?” Herbert asked.
“Claw Cape,” suggested Neb, who wished to have his turn as godfather. And he had chosen an excellent name; for this Cape was very like the powerful claw of the fantastic animal to which they had compared the island. Pencroff was enchanted with the turn things were taking, and their active imaginations soon supplied other names. The river which furnished them with fresh water, and near which the balloon had cast them on shore, they called the Mercy, in gratitude to Providence. The islet on which they first set foot, was Safety Island; the plateau at the top of the high granite wall above the Chimneys, from which the whole sweep of the bay was visible, Prospect Plateau; and, finally, that mass of impenetrable woods which covered Serpentine Peninsula, the Forests of the Far West.
“Claw Cape,” suggested Neb, who wanted to be the godfather this time. He picked an excellent name because this cape really did resemble the powerful claw of the fantastic animal they compared the island to. Pencroff was thrilled with how things were unfolding, and their lively imaginations quickly came up with other names. The river that provided them with fresh water and where the balloon had landed was called the Mercy, as a thank you to Providence. The islet they first landed on was named Safety Island; the plateau at the top of the high granite wall above the Chimneys, from where they could see the entire bay, was called Prospect Plateau; and finally, the dense woods covering Serpentine Peninsula were named the Forests of the Far West.
The engineer had approximately determined, by the height and position of the sun, the situation of the island with reference to the cardinal points, and had put Union Bay and Prospect Plateau to the east; but on the morrow, by taking the exact time of the sun’s rising and setting, and noting its situation at the time exactly intermediate, he expected to ascertain precisely the northern point of the island; for, on account of its situation on the Southern Hemisphere, the sun at the moment of its culmination would pass to the north, and not to the south, as it does in the Northern Hemisphere.
The engineer had roughly figured out the location of the island in relation to the cardinal directions by observing the height and position of the sun, placing Union Bay and Prospect Plateau to the east. However, the next day, by recording the exact time of the sun’s rise and set, and noting its position at the midpoint, he expected to determine the precise northern point of the island. Since it was in the Southern Hemisphere, the sun would peak to the north, unlike in the Northern Hemisphere where it passes to the south.
All was settled, and the colonists were about to descend the mountain, when Pencroff cried:—
All was settled, and the colonists were about to head down the mountain when Pencroff shouted:—
“Why, what idiots we are!”
"Why, what fools we are!"
“Why so?” said Spilett, who had gotten up and closed his note-book.
“Why’s that?” said Spilett, who had stood up and closed his notebook.
“We have forgotten to baptize our island!”
“We’ve forgotten to baptize our island!”
Herbert was about to propose to give it the name of the engineer, and his companions would have applauded the choice, when Cyrus Smith said quietly:—
Herbert was about to suggest naming it after the engineer, and his friends would have cheered for the decision, when Cyrus Smith said quietly:—
“Let us give it the name of a great citizen, my friends, of the defender of American unity! Let us call it Lincoln Island!”
“Let’s name it after a great citizen, my friends, the defender of American unity! Let’s call it Lincoln Island!”
They greeted the proposal with three hurrahs.
They welcomed the proposal with three cheers.
CHAPTER XII.
REGULATION OF WATCHES—PENCROFF IS SATISFIED—A SUSPICIOUS SMOKE—THE COURSE OF RED CREEK—THE FLORA OF THE ISLAND—ITS FAUNA—MOUNTAIN PHEASANTS—A KANGAROO CHASE—THE AGOUTI—LAKE GRANT—RETURN TO THE CHIMNEYS.
REGULATION OF WATCHES—PENCROFF IS HAPPY—A SUSPICIOUS SMOKE—THE PATH OF RED CREEK—THE ISLAND'S PLANTS—ITS ANIMALS—MOUNTAIN PHEASANTS—A KANGAROO CHASE—THE AGOUTI—LAKE GRANT—BACK TO THE CHIMNEYS.
The colonists of Lincoln Island cast a last look about them and walked once around the verge of the crater. Half an hour afterwards they were again upon the lower plateau, at their encampment of the previous night. Pencroff thought it was breakfast time, and so came up the question of regulating the watches of Smith and Spilett. The reporter’s chronometer was uninjured by the sea water, as he had been cast high up on the sand beyond the reach of the waves. It was an admirable time-piece, a veritable pocket chronometer, and Spilett had wound it up regularly every day. The engineer’s watch, of course, had stopped while he lay upon the downs. He now wound it up, and set it at 9 o’clock, estimating the time approximately by the height of the sun. Spilett was about to do the same, when the engineer stopped him.
The colonists of Lincoln Island took one last look around and walked once around the edge of the crater. Half an hour later, they were back on the lower plateau, at their campsite from the previous night. Pencroff figured it was breakfast time, which brought up the issue of syncing the watches of Smith and Spilett. The reporter’s chronometer was undamaged by the seawater since it had been left high up on the sand, out of reach of the waves. It was an excellent timepiece, a true pocket chronometer, and Spilett had wound it up every day without fail. The engineer’s watch, of course, had stopped while he was lying on the downs. He now wound it up and set it to 9 o’clock, roughly estimating the time by the sun's position. Spilett was about to do the same when the engineer stopped him.
“Wait, my dear Spilett,” said he. “You have the Richmond time, have you not?”
“Wait, my dear Spilett,” he said. “You have the Richmond time, right?”
“Yes.”
"Yep."
“Your watch, then, is regulated by the meridian of that city, which is very nearly that of Washington?”
“Your watch is set to the time of that city, which is almost the same as Washington’s, right?”
“Certainly.”
"Of course."
“Well, keep it so. Wind it up carefully, but do not touch the hands. This may be of use to us.”
“Well, keep it that way. Wind it up carefully, but don’t touch the hands. This might be useful to us.”
“What’s the use of that?” thought the sailor.
“What’s the point of that?” thought the sailor.
They made such a hearty meal, that little was left of the meat and pistachio-nuts; but Pencroff did not trouble himself about that. Top, who had not been forgotten in the feast, would certainly find some new game in the thicket. Besides, the sailor had made up his mind to ask Smith to make some powder and one or two shot-guns, which, he thought, would be an easy matter.
They prepared such a big meal that hardly any meat and pistachios were left; however, Pencroff didn’t worry about it. Top, who was also included in the feast, would surely discover some new game in the bushes. Plus, the sailor had decided to ask Smith to create some gunpowder and a couple of shotguns, which he believed wouldn’t be too difficult.
As they were leaving the plateau, Smith proposed to his companions to take a new road back to the Chimneys. He wished to explore Lake Grant, which lay surrounded so beautifully with trees. They followed the crest of one of the spurs in which the creek which fed the lake probably had its source. The colonists employed in conversation only the proper names which they had just devised, and found that they could express themselves much more easily. Herbert and Pencroff, one of whom was young and the other something of a child, were delighted, and the sailor said as they walked along:—
As they were leaving the plateau, Smith suggested to his friends that they take a new route back to the Chimneys. He wanted to check out Lake Grant, which was beautifully surrounded by trees. They followed the ridge of one of the spurs where the creek that fed the lake likely originated. The colonists used only the names they had just come up with in their conversation and found it much easier to express themselves. Herbert and Pencroff, one of whom was young and the other a bit like a child, were thrilled, and the sailor said as they walked along:—
“Well, Herbert, this is jolly! We can’t lose ourselves now, my boy, since, whether we follow Lake Grant or get to the Mercy through the woods of the Far West, we must come to Prospect Plateau, and so to Union Bay.”
“Well, Herbert, this is great! We can’t get lost now, my boy, since, whether we follow Lake Grant or take the route to Mercy through the woods of the Far West, we’ll end up at Prospect Plateau, and then to Union Bay.”
It had been agreed that, without marching in a squad, the colonists should not keep too far apart. Dangerous wild beasts surely inhabited the forest recesses, and they must be on their guard. Usually Pencroff, Herbert, and Neb walked in front, preceded by Top, who poked his nose into every corner. The reporter and engineer walked together, the former ready to note down every incident, the latter seldom speaking, and turning aside only to pick up sometimes one thing, sometimes another, vegetable or mineral, which he put in his pocket without saying a word.
It was agreed that, without marching in formation, the colonists shouldn’t stray too far from each other. Dangerous wild animals definitely lived in the forest, and they had to stay alert. Typically, Pencroff, Herbert, and Neb walked ahead, followed by Top, who sniffed around in every nook. The reporter and engineer walked side by side, the former eager to jot down every event, while the latter rarely spoke, only diverting his attention to pick up various things, whether vegetable or mineral, which he slipped into his pocket without saying a word.
“What, the mischief, is he picking up?” muttered Pencroff. “There’s no use in looking; I see nothing worth the trouble of stooping for.”
“What the heck is he picking up?” muttered Pencroff. “There’s no point in looking; I don’t see anything worth the effort of bending down for.”
About 10 o’clock the little company descended the last declivities of Mount Franklin. A few bushes and trees were scattered over the ground. They were walking on a yellowish, calcined soil, forming a plain about a mile long, which extended to the border of the wood. Large fragments of that basalt which, according to Bischof’s theory, has taken 350,000,000 years to cool, strewed the uneven surface of the plain. Yet there was no trace of lava, which had especially found an exit down the northern declivities. Smith thought they should soon reach the creek, which he expected to find flowing under the trees by the plain, when he saw Herbert running back, and Neb and the sailor hiding themselves behind the rocks.
Around 10 o’clock, the small group made their way down the last slopes of Mount Franklin. A few bushes and trees dotted the landscape. They were walking on a yellowish, dried-out soil, forming a flat area about a mile long that stretched to the edge of the woods. Large pieces of basalt, which according to Bischof's theory took 350,000,000 years to cool, were scattered across the uneven ground of the plain. However, there was no sign of lava, which had mainly flowed down the northern slopes. Smith thought they should reach the creek soon, expecting to find it running beneath the trees by the plain, when he saw Herbert running back, with Neb and the sailor hiding behind the rocks.
“What’s the matter, my boy?” said Spilett.
“What's wrong, my boy?” Spilett asked.
“Smoke,” answered Herbert. “We saw smoke ascending from among the rocks, a hundred steps in front.”
“Smoke,” Herbert replied. “We saw smoke rising from the rocks, a hundred feet ahead.”
“Men in this region!” cried the reporter.
“Men in this area!” exclaimed the reporter.
“We must not show ourselves till we know with whom we have to deal,” answered Smith. “I have more fear than hope of the natives, if there are any such on the island. Where is Top?”
“We can't reveal ourselves until we know who we're dealing with,” replied Smith. “I have more fear than hope about the natives, if there are any on the island. Where's Top?”
“Top is on ahead.”
“Top is coming up.”
“And has not barked?”
"And hasn't barked?"
“No.”
“No.”
“That is strange. Still, let us try to call him back.”
“That's odd. Still, let's try to call him back.”
In a few moments the three had rejoined their companions, and had hidden themselves, like Neb and Pencroff, behind the basalt rubbish. Thence they saw, very evidently, a yellowish smoke curling into the air. Top was recalled by a low whistle from his master, who motioned to his comrades to wait, and stole forward under cover of the rocks. In perfect stillness the party awaited the result, when a call from Smith summoned them forward. In a moment they were by his side, and were struck at once by the disagreeable smell which pervaded the atmosphere. This odor, unmistakable as it was, had been sufficient to reassure the engineer.
In a few moments, the three had rejoined their friends and hidden themselves, like Neb and Pencroff, behind the piles of basalt debris. From there, they could clearly see yellowish smoke curling into the air. Top was called back by a low whistle from his owner, who signaled for his companions to wait and crept forward under the cover of the rocks. The group waited in perfect silence for what would happen next when a call from Smith urged them to come forward. In an instant, they were by his side and immediately noticed the unpleasant smell that filled the air. This odor, unmistakable as it was, had been enough to reassure the engineer.
“Nature is responsible for that fire,” he said, “or rather for that smoke. It is nothing but a sulphur spring, which will be good for our sore throats.”
“Nature is behind that fire,” he said, “or more accurately, that smoke. It’s just a sulfur spring, which will help with our sore throats.”
“Good!” said Pencroff; “what a pity I have not a cold!”
“Awesome!” said Pencroff; “what a shame I don’t have a cold!”
The colonists walked towards the smoke. There they beheld a spring of sulphate of soda, which flowed in currents among the rocks, and whose waters, absorbing the oxygen of the air, gave off a lively odor of sulpho-hydric acid. Smith dipped his hand into the spring and found it oily. He tasted it, and perceived a sweetish savor. Its temperature he estimated at 95° Fahrenheit; and when Herbert asked him on what he based his estimate:—
The colonists walked toward the smoke. There, they saw a spring of soda sulfate flowing between the rocks, and its water, absorbing oxygen from the air, released a strong smell of hydrogen sulfide. Smith dipped his hand into the spring and found it oily. He tasted it and noticed a sweetish flavor. He guessed its temperature to be around 95°F; and when Herbert asked him how he came to that estimate:
“Simply, my boy,” said he, “because when I put my hand into this water, I have no sensation either of heat or of cold. Therefore, it is at the same temperature as the human body, that is, about 95°.”
“Simply put, my boy,” he said, “when I put my hand into this water, I don’t feel any heat or cold. So, it’s at the same temperature as the human body, which is about 95°.”
Then as the spring of sulphur could be put to no present use, the colonists walked towards the thick border of the forest, a few hundred paces distant. There, as they had thought, the brook rolled its bright limpid waters between high, reddish banks, whose color betrayed the presence of oxide of iron. On account of this color, they instantly named the water course Red Creek. It was nothing but a large mountain brook, deep and clear, here, flowing quietly over the lands, there, gurgling amid rocks, or falling in a cascade, but always flowing towards the lake. It was a mile and a half long; its breadth varied from thirty to forty feet. Its water was fresh, which argued that those of the lake would be found the same—a fortunate occurrence, in case they should find upon its banks a more comfortable dwelling than the Chimneys.
Then, since the sulfur spring was of no immediate use, the colonists walked toward the dense edge of the forest, a few hundred paces away. There, as they expected, the brook flowed with bright, clear waters between high, reddish banks, which indicated the presence of iron oxide. Because of this color, they quickly named the waterway Red Creek. It was simply a large mountain brook, deep and clear, at times flowing calmly over the land, at other times gurgling over rocks, or cascading down, but always moving toward the lake. It was a mile and a half long, with a width that varied from thirty to forty feet. Its water was fresh, suggesting that the lake's water would be the same—a fortunate situation if they found a more comfortable dwelling along its banks than the Chimneys.
The trees which, a few hundred paces down stream overshadowed the banks of the creek, belonged principally to the species which abound in the temperate zone of Australia or of Tasmania, and belong to those conifers which clothed the portion of the island already explored, some miles around Prospect Plateau. It was now the beginning of April, a month which corresponds in that hemisphere to our October, yet their leaves had not begun to fall. They were, especially, casuarinæ and eucalypti, some of which, in the ensuing spring, would furnish a sweetish manna like that of the East. Clumps of Australian cedars rose in the glades, covered high with that sort of moss which the New-Hollanders call tussocks; but the cocoa-palm, so abundant in the archipelagoes of the Pacific, was conspicuous by its absence. Probably the latitude of the island was too low.
The trees a few hundred steps downstream that shaded the creek banks were mainly species common in the temperate zones of Australia and Tasmania. They were a type of conifer that covered the area around Prospect Plateau that had been explored some miles away. It was early April, a month that corresponds to October in the northern hemisphere, yet their leaves hadn’t started to fall. The trees were mostly casuarinas and eucalypts, some of which would produce a sweetish manna like that found in the East during the coming spring. Clumps of Australian cedars stood in the clearings, thickly covered with the kind of moss that people from New Holland refer to as tussocks; however, the cocoa palm, which is plentiful in the Pacific archipelagos, was noticeably missing. This was likely because the island’s latitude was too low.
“What a pity!” said Herbert, “such a useful tree and such splendid nuts!”
“What a shame!” said Herbert, “such a useful tree and such amazing nuts!”
There were flocks of birds on the thin boughs of the eucalypti and the casuarinæ, which gave fine play to their wings. Black, white, and grey cockatoos, parrots and parroquets of all colors, king-birds, birds of paradise, of brilliant green, with a crowd of red, and blue lories, glowing with every prismatic color, flew about with deafening clamors. All at once, a strange volley of discordant sounds seemed to come from the thicket. The colonists heard, one after another, the song of birds, the cries of four-footed beasts, and a sort of clucking sound strangely human. Neb and Herbert rushed towards the thicket, forgetting the most elementary rules of prudence. Happily, there was neither formidable wild beast nor savage native, but merely half-a-dozen of those mocking birds which they recognized as “mountain pheasants.” A few skillfully aimed blows with a stick brought this parody to an end, and gave them excellent game for dinner that evening. Herbert also pointed out superb pigeons with bronze-colored wings, some with a magnificent crest, others clad in green, like their congeners at Port-Macquarie; but like the troops of crows and magpies which flew about, they were beyond reach. A load of small-shot would have killed hosts of them; but the colonists had nothing but stones and sticks, very insufficient weapons. They proved even more inadequate when a troop of quadrupeds leaped away through the underbrush with tremendous bounds thirty feet long, so that they almost seemed to spring from tree to tree, like squirrels.
There were flocks of birds on the thin branches of the eucalyptus and casuarinas, showing off their wings. Black, white, and gray cockatoos, parrots and parakeets in every color, king-birds, and brilliantly green birds of paradise, along with a crowd of red and blue lorikeets, all flew around making a deafening racket. Suddenly, a strange mix of discordant sounds erupted from the thicket. The colonists heard, one after another, the songs of birds, the cries of four-legged animals, and a strange clucking noise that almost sounded human. Neb and Herbert rushed toward the thicket, completely forgetting the most basic safety rules. Thankfully, there was no fierce wild animal or dangerous native, just a handful of those mockingbirds they recognized as “mountain pheasants.” A few well-aimed hits with a stick ended this farce and provided them with great game for dinner that evening. Herbert also pointed out stunning pigeons with bronze wings, some with magnificent crests, others dressed in green like their relatives from Port Macquarie; but just like the flocks of crows and magpies flying around, they were out of reach. A load of small shot would have taken down a bunch of them; but the colonists had only stones and sticks, which were very inadequate weapons. They proved even more insufficient when a group of animals leaped away through the underbrush with incredible thirty-foot bounds, almost seeming to jump from tree to tree like squirrels.
“Kangaroos!” cried Herbert.
"Kangaroos!" shouted Herbert.
“Can you eat them?” said Pencroff.
“Can you eat them?” Pencroff asked.
“They make a delicious stew,” said the reporter.
“They make a tasty stew,” said the reporter.
The words had hardly escaped his lips, when the sailor, with Neb and Herbert at his heels, rushed after the kangaroos. Smith tried in vain to recall them, but equally in vain did they pursue the game, whose elastic leaps left them far behind. After five minutes’ chase, they gave it up, out of breath.
The words had barely left his mouth when the sailor, with Neb and Herbert right behind him, ran after the kangaroos. Smith tried unsuccessfully to call them back, but they equally failed to catch the game, whose bouncy leaps quickly put them far behind. After five minutes of chasing, they gave up, out of breath.
“You see, Mr. Smith,” said Pencroff, “that guns are a necessity. Will it be possible to make them?”
“You see, Mr. Smith,” said Pencroff, “guns are essential. Can we make them?”
“Perhaps,” replied the engineer; “but we will begin by making bows and arrows, and you will soon use them as skilfully as the Australian hunters.”
“Maybe,” replied the engineer; “but we’ll start by making bows and arrows, and you’ll quickly use them as skillfully as the Australian hunters.”
“Bows and arrows!” said Pencroff, with a contemptuous look. “They are for children!”
“Bows and arrows!” Pencroff said, looking scornful. “They’re for kids!”
“Don’t be so proud, my friend,” said the reporter. “Bows and arrows were sufficient for many centuries for the warfare of mankind. Powder is an invention of yesterday, while war, unhappily, is as old as the race.”
“Don’t be so proud, my friend,” said the reporter. “Bows and arrows were enough for many centuries in human warfare. Gunpowder is a recent invention, while war, unfortunately, is as old as humanity.”
“That’s true, Mr. Spilett,” said the sailor. “I always speak before I think. Forgive me.”
"That's true, Mr. Spilett," said the sailor. "I always speak before I think. Please forgive me."
Meanwhile Herbert, with his Natural History always uppermost in his thoughts, returned to the subject of kangaroos.
Meanwhile, Herbert, always thinking about his Natural History, returned to the topic of kangaroos.
“Those which escaped us,” he said, “belong to the species most difficult to capture—very large, with long grey hair, but I am sure there are black and red kangaroos, rock-kangaroos, kangaroo-rats—”
“Those that got away,” he said, “are from the species that are the hardest to catch—very large, with long grey fur, but I’m sure there are black and red kangaroos, rock kangaroos, kangaroo rats—”
“Herbert,” said the sailor, “for me there is only one kind—the ‘kangaroo-on-the-spit’—and that is just what we haven’t got.”
“Herbert,” said the sailor, “for me there’s only one kind—the ‘kangaroo-on-the-spit’—and that’s exactly what we don’t have.”
They could not help laughing at Professor Pencroff’s new classification. He was much cast down at the prospect of dining on mountain-phesants; but chance was once more kind to him. Top, who felt his dinner at stake, rushed hither and thither, his instinct quickened by sharp appetite. In fact, he would have left very little of what he might catch or any one else, had not Neb watched him shrewdly. About 3 o’clock he disappeared into the rushes, from which came grunts and growls which indicated a deadly tustle. Neb rushed in, and found Top greedily devouring an animal, which in ten seconds more would have totally disappeared. But the dog had luckily fallen on a litter, and two more rodents—for to this species did the beasts belong—lay strangled on the ground. Neb reappeared in triumph with a rodent in each hand. They had yellow hair, with patches of green, and the rudiments of a tail. They were a sort of agouti, a little larger than their tropical congeners, true American hares, with long ears and five molar teeth on either side.
They couldn’t help laughing at Professor Pencroff’s new classification. He was pretty down about the idea of dining on mountain pheasants, but luck was on his side again. Top, sensing that dinner was on the line, dashed around excitedly, driven by his sharp hunger. In fact, he would have eaten nearly everything he could catch or anyone else’s share too, if it hadn’t been for Neb keeping a close eye on him. Around 3 o’clock, Top disappeared into the reeds, and soon there were grunts and growls coming from there, indicating a serious struggle. Neb rushed in and found Top eagerly devouring an animal that would have completely vanished in ten seconds. Luckily, the dog had come across a nest, and two more rodents—since that’s what these animals were—lay dead on the ground. Neb came back triumphantly, holding a rodent in each hand. They had yellow fur with patches of green and the beginnings of a tail. They were a kind of agouti, slightly larger than their tropical relatives, true American hares, with long ears and five molar teeth on each side.
“Hurrah!” cried Pencroff, “the roast is here; now we can go back to the house.”
“Yay!” shouted Pencroff, “the roast is ready; now we can head back to the house.”
The journey was resumed. Red Creek still rolled its limped waters under the arching boughs of casuarence, bankseas and gigantic gum trees. Superb liliaceæ rose, to a height of twenty feet, and other arborescent trees of species unknown to the young naturalist, bent over the brook, which murmered gently beneath its leafy cradle. It widened sensibly, nevertheless, and the mouth was evidently near. As the party emerged from a massive thicket of fine trees, the lake suddenly appeared before them.
The journey continued. Red Creek still flowed its sluggish waters beneath the arching branches of casuarinas, riverbanks, and massive eucalyptus trees. Stunning lilies reached up to twenty feet tall, and other tree species unfamiliar to the young naturalist leaned over the brook, which murmured softly under its leafy shelter. It noticeably widened, and the mouth was clearly close. As the group came out of a dense thicket of beautiful trees, the lake suddenly came into view.
They were now on its left bank, and a picturesque region opened to their view. The smooth sheet of water, about seven miles in circumference and 250 acres in extent, lay sleeping among the trees. Towards the east, across the intermittent screen of verdure, appeared a shining horizon of sea. To the north the curve of the lake was concave, contrasting with the sharp outline of its lower extremity. Numerous aquatic birds frequented the banks of this little Ontario, in which the “Thousand Isles” of its American original were represented by a rock emerging from its surface some hundreds of feet from the southern bank. There lived in harmony several couples of kingfishers, perched upon rocks, grave and motionless, watching for fish; then they would plunge into the water and dive with a shrill cry, reappearing with the prey in their beaks. Upon the banks of the lake and the island were constantly strutting wild ducks, pelicans, water-hens and red-beaks. The waters of the lake were fresh and limpid, somewhat dark, and from the concentric circles on its surface, were evidently full of fish.
They were now on its left bank, and a beautiful area opened up before them. The calm lake, about seven miles around and covering 250 acres, lay peacefully among the trees. To the east, beyond the scattered greenery, a bright horizon of ocean appeared. To the north, the curve of the lake was curved inward, contrasting with the sharp edge at its southern end. Many water birds flocked to the shores of this small Ontario, where the “Thousand Islands” of its American counterpart were represented by a rock sticking up from the water a few hundred feet from the southern shore. Several pairs of kingfishers lived in harmony here, sitting on rocks, serious and still, waiting for fish; then they would dive into the water with a loud cry, resurfacing with their catch in their beaks. Wild ducks, pelicans, water-hens, and red-beaks could always be seen strutting along the lake's banks and on the island. The lake's waters were fresh and clear, somewhat dark, and the concentric circles on its surface clearly showed it was full of fish.
“How beautiful this lake is!” said Spilett. “We could live on its banks.”
“How beautiful this lake is!” Spilett exclaimed. “We could live along its shores.”
“We will live there!” answered Smith.
“We’ll live there!” Smith responded.
The colonists, desiring to get back to the Chimneys by the shortest route, went down towards the angle formed at the south by the junction of the banks. They broke a path with much labor through the thickets and brush wood, hitherto untouched by the hand of man, and walked towards the seashore, so as to strike it to the north of Prospect Plateau. After a two miles’ walk they came upon the thick turf of the plateau, and saw before them the infinite ocean.
The colonists, wanting to get back to the Chimneys as quickly as possible, headed towards the angle created at the south by the meeting of the banks. They worked hard to clear a path through the thickets and brush that had never been disturbed by humans and walked toward the seashore to reach it just north of Prospect Plateau. After walking two miles, they arrived at the thick grass of the plateau and saw the endless ocean before them.
To get back to the Chimneys they had to walk across the plateau for a mile to the elbow formed by the first bend of the Mercy. But the engineer was anxious to know how and where the overflow of the lake escaped. It was probable that a river existed somewhere pouring through a gorge in the granite. In fine, the lake was an immense receptacle gradually filled at the expense of the creek, and its overflow must somehow find a way down to the sea. Why should they not utilize this wasted store of water-power? So they walked up the plateau, following the banks of Lake Grant, but after a tramp of a mile, they could find no outlet.
To get back to the Chimneys, they had to walk across the plateau for a mile to the bend formed by the first curve of the Mercy. But the engineer was eager to find out how and where the lake's overflow escaped. It was likely that a river existed somewhere, flowing through a gorge in the granite. In short, the lake was a massive reservoir slowly filling up from the creek, and its overflow had to find a way to the sea. Why shouldn't they make use of this wasted water power? So, they walked up the plateau, following the shores of Lake Grant, but after a mile of walking, they could find no outlet.
It was now half-past 4, and dinner had yet to be prepared. The party returned upon its track, and reached the Chimneys by the left bank of the Mercy. Then the fire was lighted, and Neb and Pencroff, on whom devolved the cooking, in their respective characters of negro and sailor, skilfully broiled the agouti, to which the hungry explorers did great honor. When the meal was over, and just as they were settling themselves to sleep, Smith drew from his pocket little specimens of various kinds of minerals, and said quietly,
It was now 4:30, and dinner still wasn’t ready. The group turned back and reached the Chimneys along the left bank of the Mercy. Then they started a fire, and Neb and Pencroff, who handled the cooking as the designated chef and sailor, expertly grilled the agouti, which the hungry explorers enjoyed greatly. After the meal was finished and just as they were getting comfortable to sleep, Smith took out some small samples of different minerals from his pocket and said quietly,
“My friends, this is iron ore, this pyrites, this clay, this limestone, this charcoal. Nature gives us these as her part in the common task. To-morrow we must do our share!”
“My friends, this is iron ore, this pyrites, this clay, this limestone, this charcoal. Nature provides us with these as her contribution to the collective effort. Tomorrow we must do our part!”
CHAPTER XIII.
TOP’S CONTRIBUTION—MAKING BOWS AND ARROWS—A BRICK-KILN—A POTTERY—DIFFERENT COOKING UTENSILS—THE FIRST BOILED MEAT—MUGWORT—THE SOUTHERN CROSS—AN IMPORTANT ASTRONOMICAL OBSERVATION.
TOP’S CONTRIBUTION—MAKING BOWS AND ARROWS—A BRICK KILN—A POTTERY—DIFFERENT COOKING UTENSILS—THE FIRST BOILED MEAT—MUGWORT—THE SOUTHERN CROSS—AN IMPORTANT ASTRONOMICAL OBSERVATION.
“Now then, Mr. Smith, where shall we begin?” asked Pencroff the next morning.
“Alright, Mr. Smith, where should we start?” asked Pencroff the next morning.
“At the beginning,” answered the engineer.
“At the beginning,” replied the engineer.
And this, indeed, was necessary, as the colonists did not even possess implements with which to make implements. Neither were they in that condition of nature which “having time,” economizes effort; the necessities of life must be provided for at once, and, if profiting by experience they had nothing to invent, at least they had everything to make. Their iron and steel was in the ore, their pottery was in the clay, their linen and clothes were still to be provided.
And this was really needed because the colonists didn’t even have tools to create tools. They weren’t in a situation where they could take their time and save energy; they had to meet their basic needs immediately. While they didn’t have anything new to invent based on experience, they still had everything to make. Their iron and steel were in the ore, their pottery was in the clay, and they still needed to produce linen and clothing.
It must be remembered, however, that these colonists were men, in the best sense of the word. The engineer Smith could not have been aided by comrades more intelligent, or more devoted and zealous. He had questioned them, and knew their ability.
It’s important to remember that these colonists were men, in the best sense of the word. The engineer Smith couldn’t have been supported by comrades who were more intelligent, dedicated, or passionate. He had questioned them and understood their abilities.
The reporter, having learned everything so as to be able to speak of everything, would contribute largely from his knowledge and skill towards the settlement of the island. He would not shirk work; and, a thorough sportsman, he would follow as a business what he had formerly indulged in as a pastime. Herbert, a manly lad, already well versed in natural science, would contribute his share to the common cause. Neb was devotion personified. Adroit, intelligent, indefatigable, robust, of iron constitution, knowing something of the work in a smithy, his assistance would be considerable. As to Pencroff, he had sailed every sea, had been a carpenter in the Brooklyn yards, an assistant tailor on board ship, and, during hie leaves of absence, a gardener, farmer, etc.; in short, like every sailor, he was a Jack-of-all-trades.
The reporter, having learned everything to be able to talk about anything, would greatly contribute his knowledge and skills to the settlement of the island. He wouldn't shy away from hard work; and, being a dedicated sportsman, he would pursue as a career what he once enjoyed as a hobby. Herbert, a strong young man already knowledgeable in natural science, would play his part in the common effort. Neb was the epitome of devotion. Skilled, smart, tireless, strong, with a robust constitution and some experience working in a forge, his help would be invaluable. As for Pencroff, he had sailed every ocean, worked as a carpenter in the Brooklyn shipyards, served as an assistant tailor on ships, and during his time off, had been a gardener, farmer, and more; in short, like every sailor, he was a jack-of-all-trades.
Indeed, it would have been hard to bring together five men, more able to struggle against fate, and more certain to triumph in the end.
Indeed, it would have been difficult to find five men more capable of battling against fate and more likely to succeed in the end.
“At the beginning,” Smith had said. And this beginning was the construction of an apparatus which would serve to transform the natural substances. Every one knows what an important part heat plays in these transformations. Therefore, as wood and coal were already provided it was only necessary to make an oven to utilize them.
“At the beginning,” Smith had said. And this beginning was the construction of a device that would transform natural substances. Everyone knows how crucial heat is in these transformations. So, since wood and coal were already available, it was only necessary to build an oven to use them.
“What good is an oven,” asked Pencroff.
“What’s the point of an oven?” asked Pencroff.
“To make the pottery that we want,” replied Smith.
“To make the pottery we want,” replied Smith.
“And how will we make an oven?”
“And how are we going to make an oven?”
“With bricks.”
“With bricks.”
“And how will we make the bricks?”
“And how are we going to make the bricks?”
“With the clay. Come, friends. We will set up our factory at the place of production, so as to avoid carriage. Neb will bring the provisions, and we shall not lack fire to cook food.”
“Let’s get the clay. Come on, friends. We’ll set up our factory right where we’re producing, so we don’t have to carry things around. Neb will bring the supplies, and we won’t be short on fire to cook our food.”
“No,” replied the reporter, “but suppose we lack food, since we have no hunting implements?”
“No,” said the reporter, “but what if we run out of food, since we don’t have any hunting tools?”
“If we only had a knife!” cried the sailor,
“If we only had a knife!” shouted the sailor,
“What, then?” asked Smith.
“What now?” asked Smith.
“Why, I would make a bow and arrows. And game would be plenty in the larder.”
“Sure, I would make a bow and arrows. And there would be plenty of game in the pantry.”
“A knife. Something that will cut,” said the engineer, as if talking to himself.
“A knife. Something that will cut,” the engineer said, almost to himself.
Suddenly his face brightened:
Suddenly his face lit up:
“Come here, Top,” he called.
“Come here, Top,” he said.
The dog bounded to his master, and Smith having taken off the collar which the animal had around his neck, broke it into halves, saying:—
The dog ran over to his owner, and Smith, after removing the collar from the dog's neck, snapped it in two, saying:—
“Here are two knives, Pencroff.”
“Here are two knives, Pencroff.”
For all response, the sailor gave a couple of cheers. Top’s collar was made from a thin piece of tempered steel. All that was therefore necessary was to rub it to an edge upon a sand-stone, and then to sharpen it upon one of finer grain. These kind of stones were readily procurable upon the beach, and in a couple of hours the implements of the colony consisted of two strong blades, which it was easy to fasten into solid handles. The overcoming of this first difficulty was greeted as a triumph and it was indeed a fortunate event.
For every response, the sailor gave a few cheers. Top's collar was made from a thin piece of tempered steel. All that was needed was to rub it to an edge on a sandstone and then sharpen it on a finer grain stone. These types of stones were easy to find on the beach, and within a couple of hours, the colony had two strong blades that could be easily attached to sturdy handles. Overcoming this initial challenge was celebrated as a victory, and it truly was a fortunate event.
On setting out, it was the intention of the engineer to return to the western bank of the lake, where he had noticed the clay, of which he had secured a specimen. Following the bank of the Mercy they crossed Prospect Plateau, and after a walk of about five miles, they arrived at a glade some 200 paces distant from Lake Grant.
On setting out, the engineer intended to head back to the western shore of the lake, where he had seen the clay and collected a sample. Following the bank of the Mercy, they crossed Prospect Plateau, and after walking about five miles, they reached a clearing about 200 paces from Lake Grant.
On the way, Herbert had discovered a tree from which the South American Indians make bows. It was the “crejimba,” of the palm family. From it they cut long straight branches, which they peeled and shaped into bows. For cords they took the fibres of the “hibiscus heterophyltus” (Indian hemp), a malvaceous plant, the fibres of which are as strong as the tendons of an animal. Pencroff, having thus provided bows, only needed arrows. Those were easily made from straight, stiff branches, free from knots, but it was not so easy to arm them with a substitute for iron. But Pencroff said that he had accomplished this much, and that chance would do the rest.
On the way, Herbert discovered a tree that South American Indians use to make bows. It was the “crejimba,” which belongs to the palm family. They cut long, straight branches from it, peeled them, and shaped them into bows. For the strings, they used the fibers of the “hibiscus heterophyltus” (Indian hemp), a type of mallow plant, whose fibers are as strong as animal tendons. Pencroff had successfully gathered materials for bows, but now he needed arrows. Those were easy to make from straight, stiff branches that were free of knots, but finding a substitute for iron to tip them was more challenging. However, Pencroff said that he had managed to get this far, and that luck would take care of the rest.
The party had reached the place discovered the day before. The ground was composed of that clay which is used in making bricks and tiles, and was therefore just the thing for their purpose. The labor was not difficult. It was only necessary to scour the clay with sand, mould the bricks, and then bake them before a wood fire.
The party arrived at the spot they found the day before. The ground was made of the clay used for making bricks and tiles, which was perfect for their needs. The work wasn't hard. They just needed to mix the clay with sand, shape the bricks, and then bake them in a wood fire.
Usually, bricks are pressed in moulds, but the engineer contented himself with making these by hand. All this day and the next was employed in this work. The clay, soaked in water, was kneaded by the hands and feet of the manipulators, and then divided into blocks of equal size. A skilled workman can make, without machinery, as many as 10,000 bricks in twelve hours; but in the two days the brickmakers of Lincoln Island had made but 3,000, which were piled one upon the other to await the time when they would be dry enough to bake, which would be in three or four days.
Usually, bricks are made in molds, but the engineer was okay with making them by hand. They spent all day today and tomorrow doing this work. The clay, soaked in water, was mixed with the hands and feet of the workers, then shaped into blocks of equal size. A skilled worker can produce up to 10,000 bricks in twelve hours without machines, but in two days, the brickmakers of Lincoln Island only managed to make 3,000. These were stacked on top of each other to dry for three or four days before baking.
On the 2d of April, Smith occupied himself in determining the position of the island.
On April 2nd, Smith focused on figuring out the location of the island.
The day before he had noted the precise minute at which the sun had set, allowing for the refraction. On this morning, he ascertained with equal precision the time of its rising. The intervening time was twelve hours and twenty-four minutes. Therefore six hours and twelve minutes after rising the sun would pass the meridian, and the point in the sky which it would occupy at that instant would be north.
The day before, he had recorded the exact minute the sun set, taking refraction into account. This morning, he determined with equal accuracy the time of its rise. The time in between was twelve hours and twenty-four minutes. Therefore, six hours and twelve minutes after rising, the sun would reach its highest point, and it would be located directly north in the sky at that moment.
At the proper hour Smith marked this point, and by getting two trees in line obtained a meridian for his future operations.
At the right time, Smith noted this point, and by aligning two trees, he established a baseline for his future activities.
During the two days preceding the baking they occupied themselves by laying in a supply of firewood. Branches were cut from the edge of the clearing, and all the dead wood under the trees was picked up. And now and then they hunted in the neighborhood, the more successfully, as Pencroff had some dozens of arrows with very sharp points. It was Top who had provided these points by bringing in a porcupine, poor game enough, but of an undeniable value, thanks to the quills with which it bristled. These quills were firmly fastened to the ends of the arrows, and their flight was guided by feathering them with the cockatoo’s feathers. The reporter and Herbert soon became expert marksmen, and all kinds of game, such as cabiais, pigeons, agoutis, heath-cock, etc., abounded at the Chimneys. Most of these were killed in that part of the forest upon the left bank of the Mercy, which they had called Jacamar Wood, after the kingfisher which Pencroff and Herbert had pursued there during their first exploration.
During the two days before the baking, they kept busy gathering firewood. They cut branches from the edge of the clearing and picked up all the dead wood under the trees. Occasionally, they hunted nearby, with Pencroff having several sharp-pointed arrows that made their efforts more successful. It was Top who contributed these points by catching a porcupine, not the best game, but valuable because of its quills. These quills were securely attached to the ends of the arrows, and they crafted fletchings from cockatoo feathers to help guide their shots. The reporter and Herbert quickly became skilled marksmen, and all kinds of game, like cabiais, pigeons, agoutis, and heath-cock, were plentiful around the Chimneys. Most of these were hunted in a section of the forest on the left bank of the Mercy, which they named Jacamar Wood, after the kingfisher that Pencroff and Herbert had chased during their first exploration.
The meat was eaten fresh, but they preserved the hams of the cabiai by smoking them before a fire of green wood, having made them aromatic with odorous leaves. Thus, they had nothing but roast after roast, and they would have been glad to have heard a pot singing upon the hearth; but first they must have the pot, and for this they must have the oven.
The meat was eaten fresh, but they preserved the cabiai hams by smoking them over a fire of green wood, making them aromatic with fragrant leaves. So, they only had roast after roast, and they would have been happy to hear a pot bubbling on the hearth; but first, they needed the pot, and for that, they had to have the oven.
During these excursions, the hunters noticed the recent tracks of large animals, armed with strong claws, but they could not tell their species; and Smith cautioned them to be prudent, as, doubtless, there were dangerous beasts in the forest.
During these trips, the hunters noticed fresh tracks of large animals with strong claws, but they couldn’t identify the species; and Smith advised them to be careful since there were likely dangerous beasts in the forest.
He was right. For one day Spilett and Herbert saw an animal resembling a jaguar. But, fortunately, the beast did not attack them, as they could hardly have killed it without being themselves wounded. But, Spilett promised, if he should ever obtain a proper weapon, such as one of the guns Pencroff begged for, that he would wage relentless war on all ferocious beasts and rid the island of their presence.
He was right. One day, Spilett and Herbert saw an animal that looked like a jaguar. Luckily, the creature didn’t attack them, since they probably wouldn’t have been able to kill it without getting hurt themselves. However, Spilett promised that if he ever got a proper weapon, like one of the guns that Pencroff asked for, he would wage an all-out war on all wild animals and drive them off the island.
They did not do anything to the Chimneys, as the engineer hoped to discover, or to build, if need be, a more convenient habitation, but contented themselves by spreading fresh quantities of moss and dry leaves upon the sand in the corridors, and upon these primitive beds the tired workmen slept soundly. They also reckoned the days already passed on Lincoln Island, and began keeping a calendar. On the 5th of April, which was a Wednesday, they had been twelve days upon the island.
They didn't do anything to the Chimneys, as the engineer had hoped to figure out or, if necessary, build a more comfortable place to live. Instead, they simply spread fresh moss and dry leaves over the sand in the corridors, and on these basic beds, the exhausted workers slept peacefully. They also counted the days they had spent on Lincoln Island and started keeping a calendar. On April 5th, which was a Wednesday, they had been on the island for twelve days.
On the morning of the 6th, the engineer with his companions met at the place where the bricks were to be baked. Of course the operation was to be conducted in the open air, and not in an oven, or, rather, the pile of bricks would in itself form a bake-oven. Carefully-prepared faggots were laid upon the ground, surrounding the tiers of dry bricks, which formed a great cube, in which air-holes had been left. The work occupied the whole day, and it was not until evening that they lit the fire, which all night long they kept supplied with fuel.
On the morning of the 6th, the engineer and his team gathered at the site where the bricks were going to be baked. Naturally, the process was to take place outdoors, not in an oven; instead, the stack of bricks would act as its own bake-oven. Carefully arranged bundles of wood were laid on the ground around the stacks of dry bricks, creating a large cube with air holes left in it. The work took all day, and it wasn't until evening that they started the fire, which they stoked with fuel throughout the night.
The work lasted forty-eight hours, and succeeded perfectly. Then, as it was necessary to let the smoking mass cool, Neb and Pencroff, directed by Mr. Smith, brought, on a hurdle made of branches, numerous loads of limestone which they found scattered in abundance to the north of the lake. These stones, decomposed by heat, furnished a thick quick-lime, which increased in bulk by slacking, and was fully as pure as if it had been produced by the calcimation of chalk or marble. Mixed with sand in order to diminish its shrinkage while drying, this lime made an excellent mortar.
The work took forty-eight hours and was a complete success. Afterward, since it was necessary to let the hot mass cool down, Neb and Pencroff, under Mr. Smith's guidance, transported many loads of limestone they found in plenty to the north of the lake on a makeshift sled made of branches. These stones, broken down by heat, produced thick quicklime that expanded when mixed with water and was just as pure as if it had been created by heating chalk or marble. When mixed with sand to reduce its shrinkage as it dried, this lime created excellent mortar.
By the 9th of April the engineer had at his disposal a quantity of lime, all prepared, and some thousands of bricks. They, therefore, began at once the construction of an oven, in which to bake their pottery. This was accomplished without much difficulty; and, five days later, the oven was supplied with coal from the open vein, which the engineer had discovered near the mouth of Red Creek, and the first smoke escaped from a chimney twenty feet high. The glade was transformed into a manufactory, and Pencroff was ready to believe that all the products of modern industry would be produced from this oven.
By April 9th, the engineer had a good amount of lime ready and several thousand bricks. They immediately started building an oven to bake their pottery. This was done pretty easily, and five days later, they filled the oven with coal from the open vein the engineer had found near Red Creek's entrance. The first smoke rose from a twenty-foot-high chimney. The glade turned into a factory, and Pencroff was convinced that all the modern industrial products would come from this oven.
Meantime the colonists made a mixture of the clay with lime and quartz, forming pipe-clay, from which they moulded pots and mugs, plates and jars, tubs to hold water, and cooking vessels. Their form was rude and defective, but after they had been baked at a high temperature, the kitchen of the Chimneys found itself provided with utensils as precious as if they were composed of the finest kaolin.
Meanwhile, the colonists combined clay with lime and quartz to create pipe clay, from which they shaped pots, mugs, plates, jars, tubs for holding water, and cooking vessels. Their shapes were rough and imperfect, but once baked at a high temperature, the kitchen of the Chimneys was equipped with utensils as valuable as if they were made of the finest kaolin.
We must add that Pencroff, desirous of knowing whether this material deserved its name of pipe-clay, made some large pipes, which he would have found perfect, but for the want of tobacco. And, indeed, this was a great privation to the sailor.
We should note that Pencroff, eager to find out if this material was really pipe-clay, made some large pipes that he would have thought were perfect, except for the lack of tobacco. And, in fact, this was a significant loss for the sailor.
“But the tobacco will come like everything else,” he would say in his hopeful moments.
“But the tobacco will come like everything else,” he would say in his optimistic moments.
The work lasted until the 15th of April, and the time was well spent. The colonists having become potters, made nothing but pottery. When it would suit the engineer to make them smiths they would be smiths. But as the morrow would be Sunday, and moreover Easter Sunday, all agreed to observe the day by rest. These Americans were religious men, scrupulous observers of the precepts of the Bible, and their situation could only develop their trust in the Author of all things.
The work continued until April 15th, and the time was well spent. The colonists became potters, making only pottery. If the engineer wanted them to become blacksmiths, they would switch to that. But since tomorrow was Sunday, and also Easter Sunday, everyone decided to take the day off. These Americans were religious men, careful to follow the teachings of the Bible, and their situation only strengthened their faith in the Creator of everything.
On the evening of the 15th they returned permanently to the Chimneys, bringing the rest of the pottery back with them, and putting out the oven fire until there should be use for it again. This return was marked by the fortunate discovery by the engineer of a substance that would answer for tinder, which, we know, is the spongy, velvety pulp of a mushroom of the polypore family. Properly prepared it is extremely inflammable, especially when previously saturated with gunpowder, or nitrate or chlorate of potash. But until then they had found no polypores, nor any fungi that would answer instead. Now, the engineer, having found a certain plant belonging to the mugwort family, to which belong wormwood, mint, etc., broke off some tufts, and, handing them to the sailor, said:—
On the evening of the 15th, they moved back to the Chimneys for good, bringing along the rest of the pottery and putting out the oven fire until it was needed again. This return was highlighted by the engineer's lucky discovery of a substance that would work as tinder, which is the spongy, velvety pulp of a mushroom in the polypore family. When prepared correctly, it is incredibly flammable, especially when soaked in gunpowder or nitrate or chlorate of potash. But until that point, they hadn't come across any polypores or other fungi that would work in their place. Now, the engineer, having found a particular plant from the mugwort family—which includes wormwood, mint, and others—broke off some clumps and handed them to the sailor, saying:—
“Here, Pencroff, is something for you.”
“Here, Pencroff, this is for you.”
Pencroff examined the plant, with its long silky threads and leaves covered with a cotton-like down.
Pencroff looked closely at the plant, with its long, smooth threads and leaves covered in a cottony fuzz.
“What is it, Mr. Smith?” he asked. “Ah, I know! It’s tobacco!”
“What’s going on, Mr. Smith?” he asked. “Oh, I know! It’s tobacco!”
“No,” answered Smith; “it is Artemesia wormwood, known to science as Chinese mugwort, but to us it will be tinder.”
“No,” replied Smith; “it's Artemesia wormwood, scientifically called Chinese mugwort, but for us, it will be tinder.”
This mugwort, properly dried, furnished a very inflammable substance, especially after the engineer had impregnated it with nitrate of potash, which is the same as saltpetre, a mineral very plenty on the island.
This dried mugwort provided a highly flammable material, especially after the engineer treated it with potassium nitrate, which is the same as saltpeter, a mineral that is abundant on the island.
This evening the colonists, seated in the central chamber, supped with comfort. Neb had prepared some agouti soup, a spiced ham, and the boiled corms of the “caladium macrorhizum,” an herbaceous plant of the arad family, which under the tropics takes a tree form. These corms, which are very nutritious, had an excellent flavor, something like that of Portland sago, and measurably supplied the place of bread, which the colonists were still without.
This evening, the colonists gathered in the main room and enjoyed their meal in comfort. Neb had made some agouti soup, spiced ham, and boiled corms from the “caladium macrorhizum,” a herbaceous plant from the arad family that takes on a tree-like shape in the tropics. These corms were very nutritious and had a great taste, somewhat similar to Portland sago, and they effectively filled the gap for bread, which the colonists still didn't have.
Supper finished, before going to sleep the party took a stroll upon the beach. It was 8 o’clock, and the night was magnificent. The moon, which had been full five days before, was about rising, and in the zenith, shining resplendent above the circumpolar constellations, rode the Southern Cross. For some moments the engineer gazed at it attentively. At its summit and base were two stars of the first magnitude, and on the left arm and the right, stars, respectively, of the second magnitude and the third. Then, after some reflection, he said:—
Supper finished, before going to sleep the group took a walk on the beach. It was 8 o’clock, and the night was amazing. The moon, which had been full five days earlier, was rising, and at the top of the sky, shining brightly above the circumpolar constellations, was the Southern Cross. For a few moments, the engineer looked at it intently. At its top and bottom were two first-magnitude stars, and on the left and right arms, stars of second and third magnitude, respectively. Then, after thinking for a bit, he said:—
“Herbert, is not to-day the 15th of April?”
“Herbert, isn't today the 15th of April?”
“Yes, sir,” answered the lad.
“Yes, sir,” replied the kid.
“Then, if I am not mistaken, to-morrow will be one of the four days in the year when the mean and real time are the same; that is to say, my boy, that to-morrow, within some seconds of noon by the clocks, the sun will pass the meridian. If, therefore, the weather is clear, I think I will be able to obtain the longitude of the island within a few degrees.”
“Then, if I’m not wrong, tomorrow will be one of the four days in the year when the average time and the actual time match up; in other words, my boy, tomorrow, just a few seconds around noon by the clocks, the sun will be at its highest point. So, if the weather is clear, I believe I’ll be able to figure out the island's longitude within a few degrees.”
“Without a sextant or instruments?” asked Spilett.
“Without a sextant or any instruments?” Spilett asked.
“Yes,” replied the engineer. And since it is so clear, I will try to-night to find our latitude by calculating the height of the Cross, that is, of the Southern Pole, above the horizon. You see, my friends, before settling down, it will not do to be content with determining this land to be an island; we must find out its locality.”
“Yes,” replied the engineer. “And since it's so clear, I’ll try tonight to find our latitude by calculating how high the Cross, which is the Southern Pole, is above the horizon. You see, my friends, before we settle down, we can’t just be satisfied with identifying this land as an island; we need to determine its exact location.”
“Indeed, instead of building a house, it will be better to build a ship, if we are within a hundred miles of an inhabited land.”
“Actually, instead of building a house, it's better to build a ship, if we're within a hundred miles of populated land.”
“That is why I am now going to try to get the latitude of the place, and to-morrow noon to calculate the longitude.”
"That's why I'm going to try to find the latitude of the location, and tomorrow at noon I'll calculate the longitude."
If the engineer had possessed a sextant, the work would have been easy, as this evening, by taking the height of the pole, and to-morrow by the sun’s passage of the meridian, he would have the co-ordinates of the island. But, having no instruments he must devise something. So returning to the Chimneys, he made, by the light of the fire, two little flat sticks which he fastened together with a thorn, in a way that they could be opened and shut like compasses, and returned with them to the beach. But as the sea horizon was hidden from this point by Claw Cape, the engineer determined to make his observation from Prospect Plateau, leaving, until the next day, the computation of the height of the latter, which could easily be done by elementary geometry.
If the engineer had a sextant, the task would have been straightforward. This evening, by measuring the height of the pole, and tomorrow by observing the sun's position at noon, he would have the island's coordinates. However, without any instruments, he needed to come up with something. So, returning to the Chimneys, he crafted two flat sticks by the firelight, securing them together with a thorn so they could open and close like a compass, and then headed back to the beach. Since the sea horizon was blocked from this spot by Claw Cape, the engineer decided to take his measurements from Prospect Plateau, postponing the calculation of its height until the next day, which could be easily figured out using basic geometry.
The colonists, therefore, went to the edge of the plateau which faced the southeast, overlooking the fantastic rocks bordering the shore. The place rose some fifty feet above the right bank of the Mercy, which descended, by a double slope, to the end of Claw Cape and to the southern boundary of the island. Nothing obstructed the vision, which extended over half the horizon from the Cape to Reptile Promontory. To the south, this horizon, lit by the first rays of the moon, was sharply defined against the sky. The Cross was at this time reversed, the star Alpha being nearest the pole. This constellation is not situated as near to the southern as the polar star is to the northern pole; Alpha is about 27° from it, but Smith knew this and could calculate accordingly. He took care also to observe it at the instant when it passed the meridian under the pole, thus simplifying the operation.
The colonists went to the edge of the plateau that faced southeast, looking over the amazing rocks along the shore. The spot rose about fifty feet above the right bank of the Mercy, which sloped down in two stages to the end of Claw Cape and the southern edge of the island. Nothing blocked the view, which stretched over half the horizon from the Cape to Reptile Promontory. To the south, this horizon, lit by the first light of the moon, stood out clearly against the sky. The Cross was flipped at this time, with the star Alpha closest to the pole. This constellation isn’t as close to the southern pole as the polar star is to the northern one; Alpha is about 27° away, but Smith was aware of this and could calculate accordingly. He also made sure to observe it right when it crossed the meridian under the pole, making the calculation easier.
The engineer opened the arms of his compass so that one pointed to the horizon and the other to the star, and thus obtained the angle of distance which separated them. And in order to fix this distance immovably, he fastened these arms, respectively, by means of thorns, to a cross piece of wood. This done, it was only necessary to calculate the angle obtained, bringing the observation to the level of the sea so as to allow for the depression of the horizon caused by the height of the plateau. The measurement of this angle would thus give the height of Alpha, or the pole, above the horizon; or, since the latitude of a point on the globe is always equal to the height of the pole above the horizon at that point, the latitude of the island.
The engineer spread the arms of his compass so that one pointed toward the horizon and the other to the star, allowing him to determine the angle of distance between them. To keep this distance fixed, he secured the arms with thorns to a cross piece of wood. Once that was done, he just needed to calculate the obtained angle, adjusting the observation to sea level to account for the horizon's dip caused by the height of the plateau. This angle measurement would provide the height of Alpha, or the pole, above the horizon; or, since the latitude of a point on the globe is always equal to the height of the pole above the horizon at that point, the latitude of the island.
This calculation was postponed until the next day, and by 10 o’clock everybody slept profoundly.
This calculation was put off until the next day, and by 10 o’clock everyone was sound asleep.
CHAPTER XIV.
THE MEASURE OF THE GRANITE WALL—AN APPLICATION OF THE THEOREM OF SIMILAR TRIANGLES—THE LATITUDE OF THE ISLAND—AN EXCURSION TO THE NORTH—AN OYSTER-BED—PLANS FOR THE FUTURE—THE SUN’S PASSAGE OF THE MERIDIAN—THE CO-ORDINATES OF LINCOLN ISLAND.
THE MEASURE OF THE GRANITE WALL—AN APPLICATION OF THE THEOREM OF SIMILAR TRIANGLES—THE LATITUDE OF THE ISLAND—AN EXCURSION TO THE NORTH—AN OYSTER-BED—PLANS FOR THE FUTURE—THE SUN’S PASSAGE OF THE MERIDIAN—THE CO-ORDINATES OF LINCOLN ISLAND.
At daybreak the next day, Easter Sunday, the colonists left the Chimneys and went to wash their linen and clean their clothing. The engineer intended to make some soap as soon as he could obtain some soda or potash and grease or oil. The important question of renewing their wardrobes would be considered in due time. At present they were strong, and able to stand hard wear for at least six months longer. But everything depended on the situation of the island as regarded inhabited countries, and that would be determined this day, providing the weather permitted.
At dawn the next day, Easter Sunday, the colonists left the Chimneys to wash their linens and clean their clothes. The engineer planned to make some soap as soon as he could get some soda or potash and grease or oil. They would think about updating their wardrobes later. Right now, they were in good shape and could manage rough conditions for at least another six months. But everything hinged on the island's relation to nearby countries, and that would be figured out today, as long as the weather cooperated.
The sun rising above the horizon, ushered in one of those glorious days which seem like the farewell of summer. The first thing to be done was to measure the height of Prospect Plateau above the sea.
The sun rose above the horizon, bringing in one of those beautiful days that feel like the end of summer. The first thing to do was to measure the height of Prospect Plateau above the sea.
“Do you not need another pair of compasses?” asked Herbert, of the engineer.
“Don’t you need another pair of compasses?” Herbert asked the engineer.
“No, my boy,” responded the latter, “this time we will try another and nearly as precise a method.”
“No, my boy,” the latter replied, “this time we’ll try a different method that’s almost just as precise.”
Pencroff, Neb, and the reporter were busy at other things; but Herbert, who desired to learn, followed the engineer, who proceeded along the beach to the base of the granite wall.
Pencroff, Neb, and the reporter were occupied with other tasks; however, Herbert, eager to learn, followed the engineer, who walked along the beach to the foot of the granite wall.
Smith was provided with a pole twelve feet long, carefully measured off from his own height, which he knew to a hair. Herbert carried a plumb-line made from a flexible fibre tied to a stone. Having reached a point 20 feet from the shore and 500 feet from the perpendicular granite wall, Smith sunk the pole two feet in the sand, and, steadying it carefully, proceeded to make it plumb with the horizon. Then, moving back to a spot where, stretched upon the sand, he could sight over the top of the pole to the edge of the cliff, bringing the two points in line, he carefully marked this place with a stone. Then addressing Herbert,
Smith was given a twelve-foot pole, precisely measured to match his own height, which he knew exactly. Herbert carried a plumb line made from a flexible fiber attached to a stone. Once they reached a point 20 feet from the shore and 500 feet from the vertical granite wall, Smith pushed the pole two feet into the sand, and after steadying it carefully, he aligned it vertically with the horizon. Then, moving back to a position where he could lie on the sand and line up the top of the pole with the edge of the cliff, he marked this spot with a stone. Then he addressed Herbert,
“Do you know the first principles of geometry?” said he.
“Do you know the basic principles of geometry?” he asked.
“Slightly, sir,” answered Herbert, not wishing to seem forward.
“Slightly, sir,” replied Herbert, not wanting to come across as too bold.
“Then you remember the relation of similar triangles?”
“Do you remember how similar triangles are related?”
“Yes, sir,” answered Herbert. “Their like sides are proportional.”
“Yes, sir,” answered Herbert. “Their corresponding sides are proportional.”
“Right, my boy. And I have just constructed two similar right angled triangles:—the smaller has for its sides the perpendicular pole and the distances from its base and top to the stake; the second has the wall which we are about to measure, and the distances from its base and summit to the stake, which are only the prolongation of the base and hypothenuse of the first triangle.
“Okay, my boy. I’ve just created two similar right-angled triangles: the smaller one has the vertical pole as its sides along with the distances from its base and top to the stake; the second one has the wall we’re about to measure, along with the distances from its base and top to the stake, which are just the extension of the base and hypotenuse of the first triangle.”
“I understand,” cried Herbert. “As the distance from the stake to the pole is proportional to the distance from the stake to the base of the wall, so the height of the wall is proportional to the height of the rod.”
“I get it,” shouted Herbert. “Just like the distance from the stake to the pole is related to the distance from the stake to the base of the wall, the height of the wall is related to the height of the rod.”
“Exactly,” replied the engineer, “and after measuring the first two distances, as we know the height of the pole, we have only to calculate the proportion in order to find the height of the wall.”
“Exactly,” replied the engineer, “and after measuring the first two distances, since we know the height of the pole, we just need to calculate the ratio to find the height of the wall.”
The measurements were made with the pole and resulted in determining the distances from the stake to the foot of the pole and the base of the wall to be 15 and 500 feet respectively. The engineer and Herbert then returned to the Chimneys, where the former, using a flat stone and a bit of shell to figure with, determined the height of the wall to be 333.33 feet.
The measurements were taken using the pole, which helped determine the distances from the stake to the base of the pole and from the base of the wall, which were 15 and 500 feet, respectively. The engineer and Herbert then went back to the Chimneys, where the engineer, using a flat stone and a piece of shell to calculate with, found the height of the wall to be 333.33 feet.
Then taking the compasses, and carefully measuring the angle which he had obtained the night before, upon a circle which he had divided into 360 parts, the engineer found that this angle, allowing for the differences already explained, was 53°. Which, subtracted from 90°—the distance of the pole from the equator—gave 37° as the latitude of Lincoln Island. And making an allowance of 5° for the imperfections of the observations, Smith, concluded it to be situated between the 35th and the 40th parallel of south latitude.
Then, taking the compass and carefully measuring the angle he had calculated the night before on a circle divided into 360 parts, the engineer found that this angle, accounting for the previously explained differences, was 53°. Subtracting this from 90°—the distance from the pole to the equator—gave 37° as the latitude of Lincoln Island. After allowing for a 5° margin due to the imperfections in the observations, Smith concluded that it was located between the 35th and 40th parallels of south latitude.
But, in order to establish the co-ordinates of the island, the longitude also must be taken. And this the engineer determined to do when the sun passed the meridian at noon.
But to determine the island's coordinates, the longitude also needs to be taken. The engineer decided to do this when the sun crossed the meridian at noon.
They therefore resolved to spend the morning in a walk, or rather an exploration of that part of the island situated to the north of Shark Gulf and the lake; and, if they should have time, to push on as far as the western side of South Mandible Cape. They would dine on the downs and not return until evening.
They decided to spend the morning walking, or more like exploring, the area of the island north of Shark Gulf and the lake. If they had enough time, they would continue all the way to the western side of South Mandible Cape. They planned to have lunch on the hills and wouldn't come back until the evening.
At half-past 8 the little party set out, following the edge of the channel. Opposite, upon Safety Islet, a number of birds of the sphemiscus family strutted gravely about. There were divers, easily recognizable, by their disagreeable cry, which resembled the braying of an ass. Pencroff, regarding them with gastronomic intent, was pleased to learn that their flesh, though dark colored, was good to eat. They could also see amphibious animals, which probably were seals, crawling over the sand. It was not possible to think of these as food, as their oily flesh is detestable; nevertheless Smith observed them carefully, and without disclosing his plans to the others, he announced that they would very soon, make a visit to the island. The shore followed by the colonists was strewn with mollusks, which would have delighted a malacologist. But, what was more important, Neb discovered, about four miles from the Chimneys, among the rocks, a bed of oysters, left bare by the tide.
At 8:30, the small group set off, following the edge of the channel. Opposite them, on Safety Islet, several birds from the spheniscidae family waddled around. There were divers, easily identifiable by their unpleasant cry, which sounded like a donkey. Pencroff, eyeing them with culinary interest, was happy to discover that their dark meat was actually tasty. They could also see some seals crawling over the sand. These weren’t considered a food option because their oily meat is disgusting; however, Smith observed them closely and, without revealing his plans to the others, announced that they would soon visit the island. The shore that the colonists followed was covered in mollusks, which would have thrilled a malacologist. But more importantly, Neb found a bed of oysters, exposed by the tide, about four miles from the Chimneys, among the rocks.
“Neb hasn’t lost his day,” said Pencroff, who saw that the bed extended some distance.
“Neb hasn’t lost his day,” said Pencroff, noticing that the bed was quite large.
“It is, indeed, a happy discovery,” remarked the reporter. “And when we remember that each oyster produces fifty or sixty thousand eggs a year, the supply is evidently inexhaustable.”
“It is, indeed, a great discovery,” said the reporter. “And when we consider that each oyster produces fifty or sixty thousand eggs a year, the supply is clearly endless.”
“But I don’t think the oyster is very nourishing,” said Herbert.
"But I don’t think the oyster is very nutritious," said Herbert.
“No,” answered Smith. “Oysters contain very little azote, and it would be necessary for a man living on them alone to eat at least fifteen or sixteen dozen every day.”
“No,” replied Smith. “Oysters have very little nitrogen, and a person subsisting solely on them would need to eat at least fifteen or sixteen dozen every day.”
“Well,” said Pencroff, “we could swallow dozens and dozens of these and not exhaust the bed. Shall we have some for breakfast?”
“Well,” said Pencroff, “we could eat dozens of these and still not run out. Should we have some for breakfast?”
And, without waiting for an answer, which he well knew would be affirmative, the sailor and Neb detached a quantity of these mollusks from the rocks, and placed them with the other provisions for breakfast, in a basket which Neb had made from the hibiscus fibres. Then they continued along the shore between the downs and the sea.
And, without waiting for a response, which he knew would be yes, the sailor and Neb pulled a bunch of these mollusks off the rocks and added them to the other breakfast supplies in a basket that Neb had made from hibiscus fibers. Then they continued along the shore between the hills and the sea.
From time to time Smith looked at his watch, so as to be ready for the noon observation.
From time to time, Smith checked his watch to be prepared for the noon observation.
All this portion of the island, as far as South Mandible Cape, was desert, composed of nothing but sand and shells, mixed with the debris of lava. A few sea birds, such as the sea-gulls and albatross, frequented the shore, and some wild ducks excited the covetousness of Pencroff. He tried to shoot some, but unsuccessfully, as they seldom lit, and he could not hit them flying.
All this part of the island, up to South Mandible Cape, was a wasteland, made up of nothing but sand and shells, mixed with bits of lava. A few seabirds, like seagulls and albatrosses, hung out on the shore, and some wild ducks caught Pencroff's eye. He tried to shoot some, but wasn't successful, since they rarely landed, and he couldn't hit them while they were flying.
This made the sailor say to the engineer:—
This made the sailor say to the engineer:—
“You see, Mr. Smith, how much we need guns!”
“You see, Mr. Smith, how much we need guns!”
“Doubtless, Pencroff,” answered the reporter, “but it rests with you. You find iron for the barrels, steel for the locks, saltpetre, charcoal and sulphur for the powder, mercury and nitric acid for the fulminate, and last of all, lead for the balls, and Mr. Smith will make us guns of the best quality.
“Definitely, Pencroff,” replied the reporter, “but it's up to you. You need to find iron for the barrels, steel for the locks, saltpeter, charcoal and sulfur for the gunpowder, mercury and nitric acid for the fulminate, and finally, lead for the bullets, and Mr. Smith will make us top-quality guns.”
“Oh, we could probably find all these substances on the island,” said the engineer. “But it requires fine tools to make such a delicate instrument as a firearm. However, we will see after awhile.”
“Oh, we could probably find all these materials on the island,” said the engineer. “But it takes precise tools to create something as delicate as a firearm. However, we will see after a while.”
“Why, why did we throw the arms and everything else, even our penknives, out of the balloon?” cried Pencroff.
“Why did we throw away the weapons and everything else, even our penknives, from the balloon?” shouted Pencroff.
“If we hadn’t, the balloon would have thrown us into the sea,” answered Herbert.
“If we hadn’t, the balloon would have sent us into the sea,” answered Herbert.
“So it would, my boy,” answered the sailor; and then another idea occurring to him:—
“So it would, my boy,” the sailor replied; and then another thought crossed his mind:—
“I wonder what Mr. Forster and his friend thought,” he said, “the next day, when they found they balloon had escaped?”
“I wonder what Mr. Forster and his friend thought,” he said, “the next day when they found out their balloon had escaped?”
“I don’t care what they thought,” said the reporter.
“I don’t care what they think,” said the reporter.
“It was my plan,” cried Pencroff, with a satisfied air.
“It was my plan,” exclaimed Pencroff, looking pleased.
“And a good plan it was, Pencroff,” interrupted the reporter, laughing, “to drop us here!”
“And it was a great plan, Pencroff,” interrupted the reporter, laughing, “to leave us here!”
“I had rather be here than in the hands of the Southerners!” exclaimed the sailor, “especially since Mr. Smith has been kind enough to rejoin us!”
“I’d rather be here than in the hands of the Southerners!” exclaimed the sailor, “especially since Mr. Smith has been kind enough to rejoin us!”
“And I, too,” cried the reporter. “After all, what do we lack here? Nothing.”
“And I, too,” shouted the reporter. “After all, what do we lack here? Nothing.”
“That means—everything,” answered the sailor, laughing and shrugging his shoulders. “But some day we will get away from this place.”
“That means—everything,” said the sailor, laughing and shrugging his shoulders. “But someday we’ll escape from this place.”
“Sooner, perhaps, than you think, my friends,” said the engineer, “if Lincoln Island is not very far from an inhabited archipelego or a continent. And we will find that out within an hour. I have no map of the Pacific, but I have a distinct recollection of its southern portion. Yesterday’s observation places the island in the latitude of New Zealand and Chili. But the distance between these two countries is at least 6,000 miles. We must therefore determine what point in this space the island occupies, and that I hope to get pretty soon from the longitude.
“Sooner than you might think, my friends,” said the engineer, “if Lincoln Island isn't too far from a populated archipelago or a continent. We’ll find that out in about an hour. I don’t have a map of the Pacific, but I clearly remember its southern part. Yesterday’s observation puts the island at the latitude of New Zealand and Chile. However, the distance between these two countries is at least 6,000 miles. So we need to figure out what point in this area the island occupies, and I hope to determine that soon from the longitude.”
“Is not the Low Archipelago nearest us in latitude,” asked Herbert.
“Isn't the Low Archipelago closest to us in latitude?” asked Herbert.
“Yes,” replied the engineer, “but it is more than 1,200 miles distant.”
“Yes,” the engineer replied, “but it's over 1,200 miles away.”
“And that way?” inquired Neb, who followed the conversation with great interest, pointing towards the south.
“And that way?” asked Neb, who was following the conversation with great interest, pointing south.
“Nothing!” answered Pencroff.
"Nothing!" replied Pencroff.
“Nothing, indeed,” added the engineer.
"Nothing, really," added the engineer.
“Well, Cyrus,” demanded the reporter, “if we find Lincoln Island to be only 200 or 300 miles from New Zealand or Chili?”
“Well, Cyrus,” asked the reporter, “what if we discover Lincoln Island is only 200 or 300 miles from New Zealand or Chile?”
“We will build a ship instead of a house, and Pencroff shall command it.”
“We're going to build a ship instead of a house, and Pencroff will be in charge of it.”
“All right, Mr. Smith,” cried the sailor; “I am all ready to be captain, provided you build something seaworthy.”
“All right, Mr. Smith,” shouted the sailor; “I’m all set to be captain, as long as you make something that can actually sail.”
“We will, if it is necessary,” answered Smith.
“We will, if we need to,” answered Smith.
While these men, whom nothing could discourage, were talking, the hour for taking the observation approached. Herbert could not imagine how Mr. Smith would be able to ascertain the time of the sun’s passage of the meridian of the island without a single instrument. It was 11 o’clock, and the party, halting about six miles from the Chimneys, not far from the place where they had found the engineer after his inexplicable escape, set about preparing breakfast. Herbert found fresh water in a neighboring brook, and brought some back in a vessel which Neb had with him.
While these men, who were completely unshakeable, were chatting, the time for taking the observation was drawing near. Herbert couldn’t figure out how Mr. Smith would be able to determine the time of the sun passing over the island’s meridian without any tools. It was 11 o’clock, and the group, stopping about six miles from the Chimneys, not far from where they had found the engineer after his mysterious escape, started getting breakfast ready. Herbert found fresh water in a nearby stream and brought some back in a container that Neb had with him.
Meantime, the engineer made ready for his astronomical observation. He chose a smooth dry place upon the sand, which the sea had left perfectly level. It was no more necessary, however, for it to be horizontal, than for the rod which he stuck in the sand to be perpendicular. Indeed, the engineer inclined the rod towards the south or away from the sun, as it must not be forgotten that the colonists of Lincoln Island, being in the Southern Hemisphere, saw the orb of day describe his diurnal arc above the northern horizon.
Meanwhile, the engineer prepared for his astronomical observation. He picked a smooth, dry spot on the sand, which the sea had left perfectly flat. It wasn't important for it to be level, just like it wasn't crucial for the rod he stuck in the sand to be straight up. In fact, the engineer tilted the rod towards the south, away from the sun, since it’s important to remember that the colonists of Lincoln Island, being in the Southern Hemisphere, saw the sun move across the northern horizon during the day.
Then Herbert understood how by means of the shadow of the rod on the sand, the engineer would be able to ascertain the culmination of the sun, that is to say, its passage of the meridian of the island, or, in other words, the time of the place. For the moment that the shadow obtained its minimum length it would be noon, and all they had to do was to watch carefully the end of the shadow. By inclining the rod from the sun Smith had made the shadow longer, and therefore its changes could be the more readily noted.
Then Herbert understood how the engineer could figure out when the sun was at its highest point by using the shadow of the rod on the sand, which also meant determining the local time on the island. The moment the shadow was the shortest would signal noon, and all they needed to do was carefully watch the end of the shadow. By tilting the rod away from the sun, Smith had made the shadow longer, making it easier to notice its changes.
When he thought it was time, the engineer knelt down upon the sand and began marking the decrease in the length of the shadow by means of little wooden pegs. His companions, bending over him, watched the operation with the utmost interest.
When he felt it was the right moment, the engineer knelt down on the sand and started marking the shortening of the shadow with small wooden pegs. His companions leaned over him, watching intently.
The reporter, chronometer in hand, stood ready to mark the minute when the shadow would be shortest. Now, as this 16th of April was a day when the true and mean time are the same, Spilett’s watch would give the true time of Washington, and greatly simplify the calculation.
The reporter, stopwatch in hand, stood ready to note the moment when the shadow would be shortest. Since this 16th of April was a day when true and mean time are the same, Spilett’s watch would show the accurate time of Washington, making the calculation much easier.
Meantime the shadow diminished little by little, and as soon as Smith perceived it begin to lengthen he exclaimed:—
Meantime, the shadow slowly faded, and as soon as Smith noticed it starting to stretch, he exclaimed:—
“Now!”
"Now!"
“One minute past 5,” answered the reporter.
“One minute after 5,” the reporter replied.
Nothing then remained but the easy work of summing up the result. There was, as we have seen, five hours difference between the meridian of Washington and that of the island. Now, the sun passes around the earth at the rate of 15° an hour. Fifteen multiplied by five gives seventy-five. And as Washington is in 77° 3’ 11” from the meridian of Greenwich, it follows that the island was in the neighborhood of longitude 152° west.
Nothing was left but the straightforward task of summarizing the outcome. As we've seen, there was a five-hour difference between the meridian of Washington and that of the island. The sun moves around the earth at a rate of 15° per hour. Multiplying fifteen by five gives seventy-five. Since Washington is at 77° 3’ 11” west of the Greenwich meridian, it means that the island was around 152° west in terms of longitude.
Smith announced this result to his companions, and, making the same allowance as before, he was able to affirm that the bearing of the island was between the 35° and 37° of south latitude, and between the 150° and 155° of west longitude.
Smith shared this result with his companions, and, making the same allowance as before, he was able to state that the location of the island was between 35° and 37° south latitude, and between 150° and 155° west longitude.
The difference in this calculation, attributable to errors in observation, was placed, as we have seen, at 5° or 300 miles in each direction. But this error did not influence the conclusion that Lincoln Island was so far from any continent or archipelago that they could not attempt to accomplish the distance in a small boat.
The difference in this calculation, caused by observation errors, was estimated to be 5° or 300 miles in each direction. However, this error did not affect the conclusion that Lincoln Island was so far from any continent or group of islands that they couldn't hope to cover that distance in a small boat.
In fact, according to the engineer, they were at least 1,200 miles from Tahiti and from the Low Archipelago, fully 1,800 miles from New Zealand, and more than 4,500 miles from the coast of America.
In fact, the engineer stated that they were at least 1,200 miles from Tahiti and the Low Archipelago, a full 1,800 miles from New Zealand, and over 4,500 miles from the coast of America.
And when Cyrus Smith searched his memory, he could not remember any island in the Pacific occupying the position of Lincoln Island.
And when Cyrus Smith tried to recall, he couldn’t remember any island in the Pacific that matched the location of Lincoln Island.
CHAPTER XV.
WINTER SETS IN—THE METALLUGRIC QUESTION—THE EXPLORATION OF SAFETY ISLAND—A SEAL HUNT—CAPTURE OF AN ECHIDNA—THE AI—THE CATALONIAN METHOD—MAKING IRON AND STEEL.
WINTER ARRIVES—THE METALLURGICAL ISSUE—THE EXPLORATION OF SAFETY ISLAND—A SEAL HUNT—CAPTURE OF AN ECHIDNA—THE AI—THE CATALONIAN METHOD—PRODUCING IRON AND STEEL.
The first words of the sailor, on the morning of the 17th of April, were:—
The sailor's first words on the morning of April 17th were:—
“Well, what are we going to do to-day?”
“Well, what are we going to do today?”
“Whatever Mr. Smith chooses,” answered the reporter.
“Whatever Mr. Smith decides,” replied the reporter.
The companions of the engineer, having been brickmakers and potters, were about to become metal-workers.
The engineer's companions, who had been brickmakers and potters, were about to become metalworkers.
The previous day, after lunch, the party had explored as far as the extremity of Mandible Cape, some seven miles from the Chimneys. The extensive downs here came to an end and the soil appeared volcanic. There were no longer high walls, as at Prospect Plateau, but the narrow gulf between the two capes was enframed by a fantastic border of the mineral matter discharged from the volcano. Having reached this point, the colonists retraced their steps to the Chimneys, but they could not sleep until the question whether they should look forwards to leaving Lincoln Island had been definitely settled.
The day before, after lunch, the group had explored all the way to the tip of Mandible Cape, about seven miles from the Chimneys. The vast open land ended here, and the soil looked volcanic. There weren’t any tall cliffs like at Prospect Plateau, but the narrow channel between the two capes was surrounded by an unusual edge of mineral deposits from the volcano. After reaching this point, the settlers made their way back to the Chimneys, but they couldn’t sleep until they had a clear answer on whether they should expect to leave Lincoln Island.
The 1,200 miles to the Low Archipelago was a long distance. And now, at the beginning of the stormy season, a small boat would certainly not be able to accomplish it. The building of a boat, even when the proper tools are provided, is a difficult task, and as the colonists had none of these, the first thing to do was to make hammers, hatchets, adzes, saws, augers, planes, etc., which would take some time. It was therefore decided to winter on Lincoln Island, and to search for a more comfortable dwelling than the Chimneys in which to live during the inclement weather.
The 1,200 miles to the Low Archipelago was a long journey. And now, with the stormy season beginning, a small boat definitely wouldn't make it. Building a boat, even with the right tools, is a tough job, and since the colonists had none of these tools, the first step was to create hammers, hatchets, adzes, saws, augers, planes, and so on, which would take a while. So, it was decided to spend the winter on Lincoln Island and look for a more comfortable place to live than the Chimneys during the bad weather.
The first thing was to utilize the iron ore which the engineer had discovered, by transforming it into iron and steel.
The first thing was to use the iron ore that the engineer had found by turning it into iron and steel.
Iron ore is usually found in combination with oxygen or sulphur. And it was so in this instance, as of the two specimens brought back by Cyrus Smith one was magnetic iron, and the other pyrites or sulphuret of iron. Of these, it was the first kind, the magnetic ore, or oxide of iron, which must be reduced by coal, that is to say, freed from the oxygen, in order to obtain the pure metal. This reduction is performed by submitting the ore to a great heat, either by the Catalonian method, which has the advantage of producing the metal at one operation, or by means of blast furnaces which first smelt the ore, and then the iron, carrying off the 3 or 4 per cent of coal combined with it.
Iron ore is typically found mixed with oxygen or sulfur. In this case, of the two specimens brought back by Cyrus Smith, one was magnetic iron and the other was pyrite or iron sulfide. Of these, it was the magnetic ore, or iron oxide, that needed to be reduced with coal, meaning it had to be stripped of oxygen to get the pure metal. This reduction is done by exposing the ore to high heat, either using the Catalonian method, which has the benefit of producing the metal in one step, or by using blast furnaces that first melt the ore and then extract the iron, removing the 3 to 4 percent of coal mixed with it.
The engineer wanted to obtain iron in the shortest way possible. The ore he had found was in itself very pure and rich. Such ore is found in rich grey masses, yielding a black dust crystallized in regular octahedrons, highly magnetic, and in Europe the best quality of iron is made from it. Not far from this vein was the coal field previously explored by the colonists, so that every facility existed for the treatment of the ore.
The engineer wanted to get iron as quickly as possible. The ore he found was very pure and rich. This kind of ore appears in dense grey masses, producing a black dust that crystallizes into regular octahedrons, which are highly magnetic. In Europe, the best quality of iron is made from this type of ore. Close to this vein was the coal field that had been explored by the colonists, providing all the necessary resources for processing the ore.
“Then, sir, are we going to work the iron?” questioned Pencroff. “Yes, my friend,” answered the engineer.
“Then, are we going to work with the iron?” asked Pencroff. “Yes, my friend,” replied the engineer.
“But first we will do something I think you will enjoy—have a seal hunt on the island.”
“But first, let’s do something I think you’ll enjoy—go on a seal hunt on the island.”
“A seal hunt!” cried the sailor, addressing Spilett “Do we need seals to make iron?”
“A seal hunt!” shouted the sailor, speaking to Spilett. “Do we need seals to make iron?”
“It seems so, since Cyrus has said it,” replied the reporter.
“It seems that way, since Cyrus said so,” replied the reporter.
But as the engineer had already left the Chimneys, Pencroff prepared for the chase without gaining an explanation.
But since the engineer had already left the Chimneys, Pencroff got ready for the chase without getting an explanation.
Soon the whole party were gathered upon the beach at a point where the channel could be forded at low water without wading deeper than the knees. This was Smith’s first visit to the islet upon which his companions had been thrown by the balloon. On their landing, hundreds of penguins looked fearlessly at them, and the colonists armed with clubs could have killed numbers of these birds, but it would have been useless slaughter, and it would not do to frighten the seals which were lying on the sand some cable lengths away. They respected also certain innocent-looking sphemiscus, with flattened side appendages, mere apologies for wings, and covered with scale-like vestiges of feathers.
Soon the whole group gathered on the beach at a spot where the channel could be crossed at low tide without wading deeper than knee-deep. This was Smith’s first visit to the island where his companions had ended up after the balloon incident. As they landed, hundreds of penguins looked confidently at them. The colonists, armed with clubs, could have easily killed many of these birds, but it would have been pointless slaughter, and they didn't want to scare the seals that were lying on the sand a short distance away. They also respected certain innocent-looking sphemiscus, with flattened side appendages, which were barely functional wings and covered with scale-like remnants of feathers.
The colonists marched stealthily forward over ground riddled with holes which formed the nests of aquatic birds. Towards the end of the island, black objects, like moving rocks, appeared above the surface of the water, they were the seals the hunters wished to capture.
The colonists moved quietly over the ground full of holes that were the nests of water birds. Near the end of the island, dark shapes that looked like moving rocks surfaced; they were the seals that the hunters wanted to catch.
It was necessary to allow them to land, as, owing to their shape, these animals, although capital swimmers and difficult to seize in the sea, can move but slowly on the shore. Pencroff, who knew their habits, counselled waiting until the seals were sunning themselves asleep on the sand. Then the party could manage so as to cut off their retreat and despatch them with a blow on the muzzle. The hunters therefore hid themselves behind the rocks and waited quietly.
It was essential to let them land because, due to their shape, these animals, even though they are excellent swimmers and hard to catch in the water, move quite slowly on land. Pencroff, who understood their behavior, suggested waiting until the seals were basking and asleep on the sand. Then the group could position themselves to block their escape and take them out with a hit on the nose. So, the hunters concealed themselves behind the rocks and waited quietly.
In about an hour half a dozen seals crawled on to the sand, and Pencroff and Herbert went off round the point of the island so as to cut off their retreat, while the three others, hidden by the rocks, crept forward to the place of encounter.
In about an hour, half a dozen seals crawled onto the sand, and Pencroff and Herbert went around the point of the island to block their escape, while the three others, hidden by the rocks, moved forward to the meeting point.
Suddenly the tall form of the sailor was seen. He gave a shout, and the engineer and his companions hurriedly threw themselves between the seals and the sea. They succeeded in beating two of the animals to death, but the others escaped.
Suddenly, the tall figure of the sailor appeared. He shouted, and the engineer and his friends quickly positioned themselves between the seals and the ocean. They managed to kill two of the animals, but the others got away.
“Here are your seals, Mr. Smith,” cried the sailor, coming forward.
“Here are your seals, Mr. Smith,” shouted the sailor, stepping forward.
“And now we will make bellows,” replied the engineer.
“And now we will make bellows,” replied the engineer.
“Bellows!” exclaimed the sailor. “These seals are in luck.”
“Bellows!” shouted the sailor. “These seals are lucky.”
It was, in effect, a huge pair of bellows, necessary in the reduction of the ore, which the engineer expected to make from the skins of the seals. They were medium-sized, about six feet long, and had heads resembling those of dogs. As it was useless to burden themselves with the whole carcass, Neb and Pencroff resolved to skin them on the spot, while Smith and the reporter made the exploration of the island.
It was essentially a large pair of bellows, needed for processing the ore, which the engineer planned to create from the seal skins. They were medium-sized, about six feet long, and had heads that looked like dogs'. Since it was pointless to carry the entire carcass, Neb and Pencroff decided to skin them right there, while Smith and the reporter explored the island.
The sailor and the negro acquitted themselves well, and three hours later Smith had at his disposal two seal skins, which he intended to use just as they were, without tanning.
The sailor and the Black man did a good job, and three hours later, Smith had two seal skins available that he planned to use as they were, without tanning.
The colonists, waiting until low water, re-crossed the channel and returned to the Chimneys.
The colonists waited for low tide, crossed the channel again, and went back to the Chimneys.
It was no easy matter to stretch the skins upon the wooden frames and to sew them so as to make them sufficiently air-tight. Smith had nothing but the two knives to work with, yet he was so ingenious and his companions aided him so intelligently, that, three days later, the number of implements of the little colony was increased by a bellows intended to inject air into the midst of the ore during its treatment by heat—a requisite to the success of the operation.
It wasn't easy to stretch the skins over the wooden frames and sew them up tightly enough to keep the air in. Smith had just two knives to work with, but he was so resourceful and his friends helped him so well that, three days later, the small colony had a new bellows designed to pump air into the ore while it was heated—essential for the operation to succeed.
It was on the morning of the 20th of April that what the reporter called in his notes the “iron age” began. The engineer had decided to work near the deposits of coal and iron, which were situated at the base of the northeasterly spurs of Mount Franklin, six miles from the Chimneys. And as it would not be possible to go back and forth each day, it was decided to camp upon the ground in a temporary hut, so that they could attend to the important work night and day.
It was on the morning of April 20th that the reporter noted the start of the “iron age.” The engineer had chosen to work near the coal and iron deposits located at the base of the northeastern slopes of Mount Franklin, six miles from the Chimneys. Since traveling back and forth each day wasn’t feasible, they decided to set up a temporary hut on-site to work on the important tasks around the clock.
This settled, they left in the morning, Neb and Pencroff carrying the bellows and a stock of provisions, which latter they would add to on the way.
This sorted out, they left in the morning, Neb and Pencroff carrying the bellows and a supply of provisions, which they would restock along the way.
The road led through the thickest part of Jacamar Wood, in a northwesterly direction. It was as well to break a path which would henceforth be the most direct route between Prospect Plateau and Mount Franklin. The trees belonging to the species already recognized were magnificent, and Herbert discovered another, the dragon tree, which Pencroff designated as an “overgrown onion,” which, notwithstanding its height, belongs to the same family of liliaceous plants as the onion, the civet, the shallot, or the asparagus. These dragon trees have ligneous roots which, cooked, are excellent, and which, fermented, yield a very agreeable liquor. They therefore gathered some.
The road went through the densest part of Jacamar Wood, heading northwest. It was a good idea to clear a path that would be the most direct route between Prospect Plateau and Mount Franklin from now on. The trees that had already been identified were impressive, and Herbert spotted another type, the dragon tree, which Pencroff jokingly called an “overgrown onion.” Even though it was tall, it was part of the same family of liliaceous plants as the onion, the civet, the shallot, and asparagus. These dragon trees have woody roots that are delicious when cooked, and when fermented, they create a very pleasant drink. So, they collected some.
It took the entire day to traverse the wood, but the party were thus able to observe its fauna and flora. Top, specially charged to look after the fauna, ran about in the grass and bushes, flushing all kinds of game. Herbert and Spilett shot two kangaroos and an animal which was like a hedge-hog, in that it rolled itself into a ball and erected its quills, and like an ant-eater, in that it was provided with claws for digging, a long and thin snout terminating in a beak, and an extensile tongue furnished with little points, which enabled it to hold insects.
It took the whole day to get through the woods, but the group was able to check out the plants and animals. Top, specifically assigned to watch over the animals, ran around in the grass and bushes, scaring up all sorts of game. Herbert and Spilett shot two kangaroos and an animal that was similar to a hedgehog; it could roll into a ball and raise its spikes. It was also like an anteater, having claws for digging, a long thin snout that ended in a beak, and a stretchy tongue covered in tiny points that helped it catch insects.
“And what does it look like boiling in the pot?” asked Pencroff, naturally.
“And what does it look like boiling in the pot?” Pencroff asked, naturally.
“Like an excellent piece of beef,” answered Herbert.
“Like a great piece of steak,” answered Herbert.
“We don’t want to know any more than that,” said the sailor.
“We don’t want to know anything more than that,” said the sailor.
During the march they saw some wild boars, but they did not attempt to attack the little troupe, and it seemed that they were not going to have any encounter with savage beasts, when the reporter saw in a dense thicket, among the lower branches of a tree, an animal which he took to be a bear, and which he began tranquilly to sketch. Fortunately for Spilett, the animal in question did not belong to that redoubtable family of plantigrades. It was an ai, better known as a sloth, which has a body like that of a large dog, a rough and dirty-colored skin, the feet armed with strong claws which enable it to grasp the branches of trees and feed upon the leaves. Having identified the animal without disturbing it, Spilett struck out “bear” and wrote “ai” under his drawing and the route was resumed.
During the march, they spotted some wild boars, but they didn’t try to attack the small group, and it looked like they were going to avoid any encounters with dangerous animals. Then the reporter noticed in a thick patch of bushes, among the lower branches of a tree, what he thought was a bear, and he started to sketch it calmly. Luckily for Spilett, the animal he saw didn’t belong to that formidable group of bears. It was an ai, more commonly known as a sloth, which has a body like a large dog, rough and dirty-colored skin, and feet with strong claws that help it cling to tree branches and feed on leaves. After identifying the creature without startling it, Spilett crossed out “bear” and wrote “ai” under his drawing, and they continued on their route.
At 5 o’clock Smith called a halt. They were past the forest and at the beginning of the massive spurs which buttressed Mount Franklin towards the east. A few hundred paces distant was Red Creek; so drinking water was not wanting.
At 5 o'clock, Smith called for a break. They had passed the forest and were at the start of the huge spurs that supported Mount Franklin to the east. A few hundred steps away was Red Creek, so they had plenty of drinking water.
The camp was made. In less than an hour a hut, constructed from the branches of the tropical bindweed, and stopped with loam, was erected under the trees on the edge of the forest. They deferred the geological work until the next day. Supper was prepared, a good fire blazed before the hut, the spit turned, and at 8 o’clock, while one of the party kept the fire going, in case some dangerous beast should prowl around, the others slept soundly.
The camp was set up. In less than an hour, a hut made from the branches of tropical bindweed, packed with dirt, was built under the trees at the forest's edge. They postponed the geological work until the next day. Dinner was cooked, a nice fire crackled in front of the hut, the spit turned, and at 8 o’clock, while one of the group tended the fire to keep any dangerous animals away, the others slept peacefully.
The next morning, Smith, accompanied by Herbert, went to look for the place where they had found the specimen of ore. They found the deposit on the surface, near the sources of the creek, close to the base of one of the northeast buttresses. This mineral, very rich in iron, enclosed in its fusible vein-stone, was perfectly suited to the method of reduction which the engineer intended to employ, which was the simplified Catalonian process practised in Corsica.
The next morning, Smith, along with Herbert, went to search for the spot where they had discovered the ore sample. They located the deposit on the surface, near the creek’s source, close to the base of one of the northeast supports. This mineral, which was very rich in iron, contained in its easily meltable vein-stone, was ideally suited for the reduction method the engineer planned to use, which was the simplified Catalonian process practiced in Corsica.
This method properly required the construction of ovens and crucibles in which the ore and the coal, placed in alternate layers, were transformed and reduced. But Smith proposed to simplify matters by simply making a huge cube of coal and ore, into the centre of which the air from the bellows would be introduced. This was, probably, what Tubal Cain did. And a process which gave such good results to Adam’s grandson would doubtless succeed with the colonists of Lincoln Island.
This method required building ovens and crucibles where the ore and coal were layered to be transformed and reduced. But Smith suggested simplifying things by creating a large cube of coal and ore, into which air from the bellows would be funneled. This was likely what Tubal Cain did. A process that worked so well for Adam’s grandson would surely be effective for the settlers of Lincoln Island.
The coal was collected with the same facility as the ore, and the latter was broken into little pieces and the impurities picked from it. Then the coal and ore were heaped together in successive layers—just as a charcoal-burner arranges his wood. Thus arranged, under the influence of the air from the bellows, the coal would change into carbonic acid, then into oxide of carbon, which would release the oxygen from the oxide of iron.
The coal was gathered just as easily as the ore, which was crushed into small pieces and had its impurities removed. Then, the coal and ore were piled together in layers—similar to how a charcoal burner stacks his wood. With this arrangement, the air from the bellows would cause the coal to turn into carbon dioxide and then into carbon monoxide, releasing oxygen from the iron oxide.
The engineer proceeded in this manner. The sealskin bellows, furnished with a pipe of refractory earth (an earth difficult of fusion), which had previously been prepared at the pottery, was set up close to the heap of ore. And, moved by a mechanism consisting of a frame, fibre-cords, and balance-weight, it injected into the mass a supply of air, which, by raising the temperature, assisted the chemical transformation which would give the pure metal.
The engineer went about this in a straightforward way. The sealskin bellows, equipped with a pipe made of heat-resistant material (a material that’s hard to melt), which had been prepared earlier at the pottery, was positioned near the ore pile. And, powered by a system that included a frame, fiber cords, and a counterweight, it pumped air into the mixture, which, by increasing the temperature, helped with the chemical change necessary to produce the pure metal.
The operation was difficult. It took all the patience and ingenuity of the colonists to conduct it properly; but finally it succeeded, and the result was a pig of iron in a spongy state, which must be cut and forged in order to expel the liquified gangue. It was evident that these self-constituted smiths wanted a hammer, but they were no worse off than the first metallurgist, and they did as he must have done.
The operation was tough. It required all the patience and cleverness of the colonists to pull it off correctly; but in the end, it worked, resulting in a pig of iron in a spongy state, which needed to be cut and forged to remove the liquefied waste. It was clear that these self-made blacksmiths were in need of a hammer, but they were no worse off than the first metallurgist, and they handled it just like he must have.
The first pig, fastened to a wooden handle, served as a hammer with which to forge the second upon an anvil of granite, and they thus obtained a coarse metal, but one which could be utilized.
The first pig, attached to a wooden handle, acted as a hammer to shape the second one on a granite anvil, and they ended up with a rough metal that could still be used.
At length, after much trouble and labor, on the 25th of April, many bars of iron had been forged and turned into crowbars, pincers, pickaxes, mattocks, etc., which Pencroff and Neb declared to be real jewels.
At last, after a lot of hard work, on April 25th, several iron bars had been forged and transformed into crowbars, pincers, pickaxes, mattocks, and more, which Pencroff and Neb said were true treasures.
But in order to be in its most serviceable state, iron must be turned into steel. Now steel, which is a combination of iron and carbon, is made in two ways: first from cast iron, by decarburetting the molten metal, which gives natural or puddled steel; and, second, by the method of cementation, which consists in carburetting malleable iron. As the engineer had iron in a pure state, he chose the latter method, and heated the metal with powdered charcoal in a crucible made from refractory earth.
But to be most useful, iron needs to be transformed into steel. Steel, which is a mix of iron and carbon, can be made in two ways: first, from cast iron, by removing the carbon from the molten metal to produce natural or puddled steel; and second, through a process called cementation, where malleable iron is infused with carbon. Since the engineer had pure iron, he opted for the second method and heated the metal with powdered charcoal in a crucible made from heat-resistant material.
This steel, which was malleable hot and cold, he worked with the hammer. And Neb and Pencroff, skillfully directed, made axe-heads, which, heated red-hot and quickly plunged in cold water, took an excellent temper.
This steel, which could be shaped easily both hot and cold, he worked with the hammer. And Neb and Pencroff, skillfully guided, made axe heads that, when heated to red-hot and quickly submerged in cold water, achieved an excellent temper.
Other instruments, such as planes and hatchets, were rudely fashioned, and bands of steel were made into saws and chisels; and from the iron, mattocks, shovels, pickaxes, hammers, nails, etc., were manufactured.
Other tools, like planes and hatchets, were roughly made, and steel strips were turned into saws and chisels; and from the iron, they produced mattocks, shovels, pickaxes, hammers, nails, and so on.
By the 5th of May the first metallurgic period was ended, the smiths returned to the Chimneys, and new work would soon authorize their assumption of a new title.
By May 5th, the first metallurgical period had ended, the blacksmiths went back to the chimneys, and new work would soon let them take on a new title.
CHAPTER XVI.
THE QUESTION OF A DWELLING DISCUSSED AGAIN—PENCROFF’S IDEAS—AN EXPLORATION TO THE NORTH OF THE LAKE—THE WESTERN BOUNDARY OF THE PLATEAU—THE SERPENTS—THE OUTLET OF THE LAKE—TOP’S ALARM—TOP SWIMMING—A FIGHT UNDER WATER—THE DUGONG.
THE QUESTION OF A DWELLING DISCUSSED AGAIN—PENCROFF’S IDEAS—AN EXPLORATION TO THE NORTH OF THE LAKE—THE WESTERN BOUNDARY OF THE PLATEAU—THE SERPENTS—THE OUTLET OF THE LAKE—TOP’S ALARM—TOP SWIMMING—A FIGHT UNDER WATER—THE DUGONG.
It was the 6th of May, corresponding to the 6th of November in the Northern Hemisphere. For some days the sky had been cloudy, and it was important to make provision against winter. However, the temperature had not lessened much, and a centigrade thermometer transported to Lincoln Island would have averaged 10° or 12° above zero. This would not be surprising, since Lincoln Island, from its probable situation in the Southern Hemisphere, was subject to the same climatic influences as Greece or Sicily in the Northern. But just as the intense cold in Greece and Sicily sometimes produces snow and ice, so, in the height of winter, this island would probably experience sudden changes in the temperature against which it would be well to provide.
It was May 6th, equivalent to November 6th in the Northern Hemisphere. For a few days, the sky had been overcast, and it was crucial to prepare for winter. However, the temperature hadn't dropped significantly, and a centigrade thermometer brought to Lincoln Island would have shown an average of 10° or 12° above zero. This wasn't surprising, since Lincoln Island, likely located in the Southern Hemisphere, experienced the same climate influences as Greece or Sicily in the Northern Hemisphere. But just as the intense cold in Greece and Sicily can sometimes lead to snow and ice, this island would likely face sudden temperature changes in the middle of winter, making it wise to take precautions.
At any rate, if the cold was not threatening, the rainy season was at hand, and upon this desolate island, in the wide Pacific, exposed to all the inclemency of the elements, the storms would be frequent, and, probably, terrible.
At any rate, even if the cold wasn't a real threat, the rainy season was approaching, and on this deserted island in the vast Pacific, subject to all the harshness of the weather, the storms would be common and likely severe.
The question of a more comfortable habitation than the Chimneys ought, therefore, to be seriously considered, and promptly acted upon.
The issue of finding a more comfortable place to live than the Chimneys should be taken seriously and acted on quickly.
Pencroff having discovered the Chimneys, naturally had a predilection for them; but he understood very well that another place must be found. This refuge had already been visited by the sea, and it would not do to expose themselves to a like accident.
Pencroff, having found the Chimneys, naturally preferred them; however, he understood that they needed to find another spot. This shelter had already been reached by the sea, and it wouldn't be wise to risk a similar incident.
“Moreover,” added Smith, who was discussing these things with his companions, “there are some precautions to take.”
“Also,” added Smith, who was chatting about this with his friends, “there are some precautions we need to take.”
“Why? The island is not inhabited,” said the reporter.
“Why? The island isn’t lived on,” said the reporter.
“Probably not,” answered the engineer, “although we have not yet explored the whole of it; but if there are no human beings, I believe dangerous beasts are numerous. So it will be better to provide a shelter against a possible attack, than for one of us to be tending the fire every night. And then, my friends, we must foresee everything. We are here in a part of the Pacific often frequented by Malay pirates—”
“Probably not,” replied the engineer, “although we haven’t explored all of it yet; but if there aren’t any humans, I believe there are plenty of dangerous animals. So it would be better to create some shelter to protect ourselves from a potential attack, rather than having one of us guard the fire every night. And then, my friends, we need to think ahead about everything. We’re in a part of the Pacific that’s often visited by Malay pirates—”
“What, at this distance from land?” exclaimed Herbert.
“What, this far from land?” exclaimed Herbert.
“Yes, my boy, these pirates are hardy sailors as well as formidable villains, and we must provide for them accordingly.”
“Yes, my boy, these pirates are tough sailors as well as dangerous villains, and we need to prepare for them properly.”
“Well,” said Pencroff, “we will fortify ourselves against two and four-footed savages. But, sir, wouldn’t it be as well to explore the island thoroughly before doing anything else?”
“Well,” said Pencroff, “we should prepare ourselves against both two-legged and four-legged predators. But, sir, wouldn’t it make sense to thoroughly explore the island before taking any other actions?”
“It would be better,” added Spilett; “who knows but we may find on the opposite coast one or more of those caves which we have looked for here in vain.”
“It would be better,” Spilett added; “who knows, we might find on the opposite coast one or more of those caves we've been searching for here without success.”
“Very true,” answered the engineer, “but you forget, my friends, that we must be somewhere near running water, and that from Mount Franklin we were unable to see either brook or river in that direction. Here, on the contrary, we are between the Mercy and Lake Grant, which is an advantage not to be neglected. And, moreover, as this coast faces the east, it is not as exposed to the trade winds, which blow from the northwest in this hemisphere.”
“That's very true,” replied the engineer, “but you all forget that we need to be close to running water, and from Mount Franklin, we couldn’t see any streams or rivers in that direction. Here, on the other hand, we are situated between the Mercy and Lake Grant, which is an advantage we shouldn't overlook. Plus, since this coast faces east, it isn't as exposed to the trade winds that blow from the northwest in this part of the world.”
“Well, then, Mr. Smith,” replied the sailor, “let us build a house on the edge of the lake. We are no longer without bricks and tools. After having been brickmakers, potters, founders, and smiths, we ought to be masons easily enough.”
“Well, then, Mr. Smith,” replied the sailor, “let's build a house by the lake. We’ve got bricks and tools now. After being brickmakers, potters, founders, and blacksmiths, we should be able to work as masons without much trouble.”
“Yes, my friend; but before deciding it will be well to look about. A habitation all ready made would save us a great deal of work, and would, doubtless, offer a surer retreat, in which we would be safe from enemies, native as well as foreign?”
“Yes, my friend; but before we decide, it’s a good idea to explore our options. A pre-built home would save us a lot of effort and would definitely provide a safer place to be, protecting us from both local and foreign enemies.”
“But, Cyrus,” answered the reporter, “have we not already examined the whole of this great granite wall without finding even a hole?”
“But, Cyrus,” replied the reporter, “haven’t we already looked over this entire huge granite wall without finding a single hole?”
“No, not one!” added Pencroff. “If we could only dig a place in it high out of reach, that would be the thing! I can see it now, on the part overlooking the sea, five or six chambers—”
“No, not one!” added Pencroff. “If we could just dig a spot high up and out of reach, that would be perfect! I can picture it now, on the side overlooking the sea, five or six rooms—”
“With windows!” said Herbert, laughing.
“With windows!” Herbert laughed.
“And a staircase!” added Neb.
“And a staircase!” added Neb.
“Why do you laugh?” cried the sailor. “Haven’t we picks and mattocks? Cannot Mr. Smith make powder to blow up the mine. You will be able, won’t you, sir, to make powder when we want it?”
“Why are you laughing?” shouted the sailor. “Don’t we have picks and shovels? Can’t Mr. Smith make gunpowder to blow up the mine? You can make it when we need it, right, sir?”
The engineer had listened to the enthusiastic sailor developing these imaginative projects. To attack this mass of granite, even by mining, was an Herculean task, and it was truly vexing that nature had not helped them in their necessity. But he answered Pencroff, by simply proposing to examine the wall more attentively, from the mouth of the river to the angle which ended it to the north. They therefore went out and examined it most carefully for about two miles. But everywhere it rose, uniform and upright, without any visible cavity. The rock-pigeons flying about its summit had their nests in holes drilled in the very crest, or upon the irregularly cut edge of the granite.
The engineer had listened to the excited sailor talk about these creative projects. Tackling this huge mass of granite, even through mining, was a massive challenge, and it was really frustrating that nature hadn't made it easier for them. But he told Pencroff that they should take a closer look at the wall, from the river's mouth to the angle that ended it to the north. So, they went out and examined it thoroughly for about two miles. But everywhere it stood, tall and straight, without any visible openings. The rock pigeons flying around the top had their nests in holes drilled in the very peak, or along the uneven edge of the granite.
To attempt to make a sufficient excavation in such a massive wall even with pickaxe and powder was not to be thought of. It was vexatious enough. By chance, Pencroff had discovered in the Chimneys, which must now be abandoned, the only temporary, habitable shelter on this part of the coast.
Attempting to create a decent opening in such a huge wall, even with a pickaxe and explosives, was out of the question. It was already frustrating enough. By chance, Pencroff had found the only temporary, livable shelter on this part of the coast in the Chimneys, which now had to be left behind.
When the survey was ended the colonists found themselves at the northern angle of the wall, where it sunk by long declivities to the shore. From this point to its western extremity it was nothing more than a sort of talus composed of stones, earth, and sand bound together by plants, shrubs, and grass, in a slope of about 45°. Here and there the granite thrust its sharp points out from the cliff. Groups of trees grew over these slopes and there was a thin carpet of grass. But the vegetation extended but a short distance, and then the long stretch of sand, beginning at the foot of the talus, merged into the beach.
When the survey was finished, the colonists found themselves at the northern corner of the wall, where it sloped down gradually to the shore. From this point to its western end, it was just a kind of embankment made of stones, dirt, and sand held together by plants, shrubs, and grass, with a slope of about 45°. Here and there, granite jutted out from the cliff. Groups of trees grew on these slopes, and there was a thin layer of grass. However, the vegetation only stretched a short distance before the long expanse of sand, starting at the base of the embankment, merged into the beach.
Smith naturally thought that the over flow of the lake fell in this direction, as the excess of water from Red Creek must be discharged somewhere, and this point had not been found less on the side already explored, that is to say from the mouth of the creek westward as far as Prospect Plateau.
Smith naturally thought that the overflow of the lake flowed in this direction, as the extra water from Red Creek had to go somewhere, and this point hadn’t been found less on the side that had already been explored, meaning from the mouth of the creek westward as far as Prospect Plateau.
The engineer proposed to his companions that they clamber up the talus and return to the Chimneys by the heights, exploring the eastern and western shores of the lake. The proposition was accepted, and, in a few minutes, Herbert and Neb had climbed to the plateau, the others following more leisurely.
The engineer suggested to his friends that they climb up the slope and head back to the Chimneys from above, checking out the eastern and western sides of the lake. They agreed to the idea, and in a few minutes, Herbert and Neb had made it to the plateau, with the others trailing behind at a slower pace.
Two hundred feet distant the beautiful sheet of water shone through the leaves in the sunlight. The landscape was charming. The trees in autumn tints, were harmoniously grouped. Some huge old weatherbeaten trunks stood out in sharp relief against the green turf which covered the ground, and brilliant cockatoos, like moving, prisms, glanced among the branches, uttering their shrill screams.
Two hundred feet away, the beautiful lake glimmered through the leaves in the sunlight. The scenery was lovely. The trees in autumn colors were nicely arranged. Some massive, old, weathered trunks stood out sharply against the green grass that covered the ground, and vibrant cockatoos, like moving prisms, flitted among the branches, letting out their loud calls.
The colonists, instead of proceeding directly to the north bank of the lake, bore along the edge of the plateau, so as to come back to the mouth of the creek, on its left bank. It was a circuit of about a mile and a half. The walk was easy, as the trees, set wide apart, left free passage between them. They could see that the fertile zone stopped at this point, and that the vegetation here, was less vigorous than anywhere between the creek and the Mercy.
The colonists didn’t head straight to the north bank of the lake; instead, they followed the edge of the plateau to return to the mouth of the creek on its left bank. This route added about a mile and a half to their walk. The path was easy since the trees were spaced far apart, allowing for smooth passage between them. They noticed that the fertile area ended here, and the vegetation was less lush than anywhere between the creek and the Mercy.
Smith and his companions moved cautiously over this unexplored neighborhood. Bows and arrows and iron-pointed sticks were their sole weapons. But no beast showed itself, and it was probable that the animals kept to the thicker forests in the south. The colonists, however, experienced a disagreeable sensation in seeing Top stop before a huge serpent 14 or 15 feet long. Neb killed it at a blow. Smith examined the reptile, and pronounced it to belong to the species of diamond-serpents eaten by the natives of New South Wales and not venomous, but it was possible others existed whose bite was mortal, such as the forked-tail deaf viper, which rise up under the foot, or the winged serpents, furnished with two ear-like appendages, which enable them to shoot forward with extreme rapidity. Top having gotten over his surprise, pursued these reptiles with reckless fierceness, and his master was constantly obliged to call him in.
Smith and his friends moved carefully through this uncharted area. Their only weapons were bows, arrows, and iron-tipped sticks. However, no animals appeared, and it seemed the creatures were hiding out in the denser forests to the south. The colonists felt a sense of unease when Top stopped in front of a giant snake that was 14 or 15 feet long. Neb took it down with one blow. Smith examined the snake and identified it as a type of diamond snake that the natives of New South Wales eat and noted it was non-venomous, but he mentioned that other snakes could be deadly, like the forked-tail deaf viper that can rise up at your feet, or the winged snakes, which have ear-like appendages that let them move extremely fast. Once Top got over his initial shock, he chased after these snakes with wild enthusiasm, and his master constantly had to call him back.
The mouth of Red Creek, where it emptied into the lake, was soon reached. The party recognized on the opposite bank the point visited on their descent from Mount Franklin. Smith ascertained that the supply of water from the creek was considerable; there therefore must be an outlet for the overflow somewhere. It was this place which must be found, as, doubtless, it made a fall which could be utilized as a motive power.
The mouth of Red Creek, where it flowed into the lake, was soon reached. The group recognized the point across the bank that they had seen on their way down from Mount Franklin. Smith found out that the water supply from the creek was significant; there had to be an outlet for the overflow somewhere. It was important to locate this spot, as it likely created a waterfall that could be harnessed for power.
The colonists, strolling along, without, however, straying too far from each other, began to follow round the bank of the lake, which was very abrupt. The water was full of fishes, and Pencroff promised himself soon to manufacture some apparatus with which to capture them.
The colonists walked together, making sure not to wander too far apart, and started to follow the steep bank of the lake. The water was teeming with fish, and Pencroff looked forward to creating some gear to catch them.
It was necessary first to double the point at the northeast. They had thought that the discharge would be here, as the water flowed close to the edge of the plateau. But as it was not here, the colonists continued along the bank, which, after a slight curve, followed parallel with the sea-shore.
It was necessary first to double the point at the northeast. They had thought that the discharge would be here, as the water flowed close to the edge of the plateau. But since it wasn’t here, the colonists continued along the bank, which, after a slight curve, ran parallel to the seashore.
On this side the bank was less wooded, but clumps of trees, here and there, made a picturesque landscape. The whole extent of the lake, unmoved by a single ripple, was visible before, them. Top, beating the bush, flushed many coveys of birds, which Spilett and Herbert saluted with their arrows. One of these birds, cleverly hit by the lad, dropped in the rushes. Top rushing after it, brought back a beautiful slate-colored water fowl. It was a coot, as large as a big partridge, belonging to the group of machio-dactyls, which form the division between the waders and the palmipedes. Poor game and bad tasting, but as Top was not as difficult to please as his masters, it was agreed that the bird would answer for his supper.
On this side, the bank had fewer trees, but clusters of them dotted the landscape, creating a scenic view. The entire lake laid out before them, completely calm without a single ripple. Top, chasing after birds, flushed many flocks that Spilett and Herbert greeted with their arrows. One of the birds was expertly struck by the boy and fell into the reeds. Top darted after it and brought back a beautiful slate-colored waterfowl. It was a coot, about the size of a large partridge, belonging to the group of machio-dactyls, which stands between waders and swimming birds. Not great for eating and not very tasty, but since Top wasn’t as picky as his masters, they decided that the bird would be just fine for his dinner.
Then the colonists, following the southern bank of the lake, soon came to the place they had previously visited. The engineer was very much surprised, as he had seen no indication of an outlet to the surplus water. In talking with the reporter and the sailor, he did not conceal his astonishment.
Then the colonists, following the southern bank of the lake, soon arrived at the place they had visited before. The engineer was quite surprised, as he had seen no signs of an outlet for the excess water. In his conversation with the reporter and the sailor, he didn’t hide his astonishment.
At this moment, Top, who had been behaving himself quietly, showed signs of alarm. The intelligent animal, running along the bank, suddenly stopped, with one foot raised, and looked into the water as if pointing some invisible game. Then he barked furiously, questioning it, as it were, and again was suddenly silent.
At that moment, Top, who had been calm and quiet, showed signs of worry. The smart dog, running along the riverbank, suddenly stopped, lifting one paw, and gazed into the water as if indicating some unseen prey. Then he barked wildly, as if questioning it, and just as suddenly went silent again.
At first neither Smith nor his companions paid any attention to the dog’s actions, but his barking became so incessant, that the engineer noticed it.
At first, neither Smith nor his friends paid any attention to the dog's behavior, but his barking became so non-stop that the engineer finally noticed it.
“What is it, Top?” he called.
"What's up, Top?" he叫.
The dog bounded towards his master, and, showing a real anxiety, rushed back to the bank. Then, suddenly, he threw himself into the lake.
The dog ran towards his owner and, clearly anxious, dashed back to the shore. Then, all of a sudden, he jumped into the lake.
“Come back here, Top,” cried the engineer, not wishing his dog to venture in those supicious waters.
“Come back here, Top,” shouted the engineer, not wanting his dog to wander into those dangerous waters.
“What’s going on under there?” asked the sailor examining the surface of the lake.
“What’s happening down there?” asked the sailor looking at the surface of the lake.
“Top has smelt something amphibious,” answered Herbert.
“Top has smelled something amphibious,” answered Herbert.
“It must be an alligator,” said the reporter.
“It has to be an alligator,” the reporter said.
“I don’t think so,” answered Smith. “Alligators are not met with in this latitude.”
“I don’t think so,” replied Smith. “You don’t find alligators in this area.”
Meantime, Top came ashore at the call of his master, but he could not be quiet; he rushed along the bank, through the tall grass, and, guided by instinct, seemed to be following some object, invisible under the water, which was hugging the shore. Nevertheless the surface was calm and undisturbed by a ripple. Often the colonists stood still on the bank and watched the water, but they could discover nothing. There certainly was some mystery here, and the engineer was much perplexed.
Meantime, Top came ashore at his master's call, but he couldn't sit still; he dashed along the bank, through the tall grass, and, guided by instinct, seemed to be following something invisible under the water that was close to the shore. Still, the surface was calm and didn't have a ripple. Often, the colonists stood still on the bank and watched the water, but they couldn't find anything. There was definitely some mystery here, and the engineer was quite puzzled.
“We will follow out this exploration,” he said.
“We will continue this exploration,” he said.
In half an hour all had arrived at the southeast angle of the lake, and were again upon Prospect Plateau. They had made the circle of the bank without the engineer having discovered either where or how the surplus water was discharged.
In thirty minutes, everyone arrived at the southeast corner of the lake and was back on Prospect Plateau. They had circled the shore without the engineer figuring out where or how the extra water was being released.
“Nevertheless, this outlet exists,” he repeated, “and, since it is not outside, it must penetrate the massive granite of the coast!”
“Still, this outlet exists,” he repeated, “and since it’s not on the outside, it has to go through the huge granite of the coast!”
“And why do you want to find that out?” asked Spilett.
“And why do you want to find that out?” Spilett asked.
“Because,” answered the engineer, “if the outlet is through the solid rock it is possible that there is some cavity, which could be easily rendered habitable, after having turned the water in another direction.”
“Because,” replied the engineer, “if the outlet is through solid rock, it’s possible there’s a cavity that could be easily made livable after redirecting the water.”
“But may not the water flow into the sea, through a subterranean outlet at the bottom of the lake?” asked Herbert.
"But can’t the water flow into the sea through an underground outlet at the bottom of the lake?" asked Herbert.
“Perhaps so,” answered Smith, “and in that case, since Nature has not aided us, we must build our house ourselves.”
“Maybe so,” Smith replied, “and if that's the case, since Nature hasn’t helped us, we’ll have to build our house ourselves.”
As it was 5 o’clock, the colonists were thinking of returning to the Chimneys across the plateau, when Top again became excited, and, barking with rage, before his master could hold him, he sprang a second time into the lake. Every one ran to the bank. The dog was already twenty feet off, and Smith called to him to come back, when suddenly an enormous head emerged from the water.
As it was 5 o'clock, the colonists were considering heading back to the Chimneys across the plateau when Top became agitated again and, barking furiously, leaped into the lake for the second time before his owner could stop him. Everyone rushed to the riverbank. The dog was already twenty feet out, and Smith shouted for him to come back when suddenly a massive head broke the surface of the water.
Herbert instantly recognized it, the comical face, with huge eyes and long silky moustaches.
Herbert instantly recognized it, the funny face, with big eyes and long silky mustaches.
“A manatee,” he cried.
“A manatee!” he exclaimed.
Although not a manatee, it was a dugong, which belongs to the same species.
Although it wasn't a manatee, it was a dugong, which is part of the same species.
The huge monster threw himself upon the dog. His master could do nothing to save him, and, before Spilett or Herbert could draw their bows, Top, seized by the dugong, had disappeared under the water.
The huge monster lunged at the dog. His owner could do nothing to save him, and before Spilett or Herbert could draw their bows, Top, grabbed by the dugong, had vanished beneath the water.
Neb, spear in hand, would have sprung to the rescue of the dog, and attacked the formidable monster in its own element, had he not been held back by his master.
Neb, spear in hand, would have jumped in to save the dog and fought the powerful monster in its own territory, if his master hadn't stopped him.
Meanwhile a struggle was going on under the water—a struggle which, owing to the powerlessness of the dog, was inexplicable; a struggle which, they could see by the agitation of the surface, was becoming more terrible each moment; in short, a struggle which could only be terminated by the death of the dog. But suddenly, through the midst of a circle of foam, Top appeared, shot upward by some unknown force, rising ten feet in the air, and falling again into the tumultuous waters, from which he escaped to shore without any serious wounds, miraculously saved.
Meanwhile, a struggle was happening underwater—one that, due to the dog’s inability to act, was hard to understand; a struggle that they could tell by the churning surface was getting worse by the moment; in short, a struggle that could only end with the dog’s death. But suddenly, from the middle of a swirl of foam, Top emerged, propelled upward by some unseen force, soaring ten feet into the air before plunging back into the turbulent waters. He miraculously managed to escape to shore without any serious injuries, saved against all odds.
Cyrus Smith and his companions looked on amazed. Still more inexplicable, it seemed as if the struggle under water continued. Doubtless the dugong, after having seized the dog, had been attacked by some more formidable animal, and had been obliged to defend itself.
Cyrus Smith and his companions watched in amazement. Even more puzzling, it looked like the fight underwater was still going on. Clearly, the dugong, after grabbing the dog, must have been attacked by a stronger animal and had to fight back.
But this did not last much longer. The water grew red with blood, and the body of the dugong, emerging from the waves, floated on to a little shoal at the southern angle of the lake.
But this didn't last much longer. The water turned red with blood, and the dugong's body, rising from the waves, floated onto a small shoal at the southern edge of the lake.
The colonists ran to where the animal lay, and found it dead. Its body was enormous, measuring between 15 and 16 feet long and weighing between 3,000 and 4,000 pounds. On its neck, yawned a wound, which seemed to have been made by some sharp instrument.
The colonists rushed to where the animal was lying and found it dead. Its body was huge, measuring between 15 and 16 feet long and weighing between 3,000 and 4,000 pounds. On its neck was a gaping wound that looked like it had been made by some sharp instrument.
What was it that had been able, by this terrible cut, to kill the formidable dugong? None of them could imagine, and, preoccupied with these incidents, they returned to the Chimneys.
What could have possibly caused such a terrible wound that it killed the fierce dugong? None of them could figure it out, and lost in these thoughts, they headed back to the Chimneys.
CHAPTER XVII
A VISIT TO THE LAKE—THE DIRECTION OF THE CURRENT—THE PROSPECTS OF CYRUS SMITH—THE DUGONG FAT—THE USE OF THE SCHISTOUS LIMESTONE—THE SULPHATE OF IRON—HOW GLYCERINE IS MADE—SOAP—SALTPETRE—SULPHURIC ACID—NITRIC ACID—THE NEW OUTLET.
A VISIT TO THE LAKE—THE DIRECTION OF THE CURRENT—THE PROSPECTS OF CYRUS SMITH—THE DUGONG FAT—THE USE OF THE SCHISTOUS LIMESTONE—THE SULPHATE OF IRON—HOW GLYCERINE IS MADE—SOAP—SALTPETRE—SULPHURIC ACID—NITRIC ACID—THE NEW OUTLET.
The next day, the 7th of May, Smith and Spilett, leaving Neb to prepare the breakfast, climbed the plateau, while Herbert and Pencroff went after a fresh supply of wood.
The next day, May 7th, Smith and Spilett left Neb to make breakfast and climbed the plateau, while Herbert and Pencroff went to gather more firewood.
The engineer and the reporter soon arrived, at the little beach where the dugong lay stranded. Already flocks of birds had gathered about the carcass, and it was necessary to drive them off with stones, as the engineer wished to preserve the fat for the use of the colony. As to the flesh of the dugong, it would undoubtedly furnish excellent food, as in certain portions of the Malay archipelago it is reserved for the table of the native princes. But it was Neb’s affair to look after that.
The engineer and the reporter soon reached the small beach where the dugong was stranded. Flocks of birds had already gathered around the carcass, and they needed to be shooed away with stones since the engineer wanted to save the fat for the colony's use. The flesh of the dugong would definitely provide great food, as in some parts of the Malay archipelago, it is reserved for the tables of the local princes. But that was Neb's responsibility to take care of.
Just now, Cyrus Smith was thinking of other things. The incident of the day before was constantly presenting itself. He wanted to solve the mystery of that unseen combat, and to know what congener of the mastodons or other marine monster had given the dugong this strange wound.
Just now, Cyrus Smith was preoccupied with other thoughts. The events of the previous day kept replaying in his mind. He wanted to figure out the mystery of that unseen battle and understand which relative of the mastodons or another sea creature had caused the dugong's unusual injury.
He stood upon the border of the lake, looking upon its tranquil surface sparkling under the rays of the rising sun. From the little beach where the dugong lay, the waters deepened slowly towards the centre, and the lake might be likened to a large basin, filled by the supply from Red Creek.
He stood on the edge of the lake, gazing at its calm surface sparkling in the light of the rising sun. From the small beach where the dugong rested, the water gradually deepened towards the center, and the lake resembled a large basin, filled by the flow from Red Creek.
“Well, Cyrus,” questioned the reporter, “I don’t see anything suspicious in this?”
“Well, Cyrus,” asked the reporter, “I don’t see anything suspicious here?”
“No, my dear fellow, and I am at a loss how to explain yesterday’s affair.”
“No, my friend, and I’m not sure how to explain what happened yesterday.”
“The wound on this beast is strange enough, and I can’t understand how Top could have been thrown out of the water in that way. One would suppose that it had been done by a strong arm, and that that same arm, wielding a poignard, had given the dugong his death-wound.”
“The wound on this creature is odd, and I can’t figure out how Top could have been thrown out of the water like that. You'd think it was caused by a strong arm, and that same arm, holding a dagger, delivered the fatal blow to the dugong.”
“It would seem so,” answered the engineer, who had become thoughtful. “There is something here which I cannot understand. But neither can we explain how I myself was saved; how I was snatched from the waves and borne to the downs. Therefore, I am sure there is some mystery which we will some day discover. In the mean time, let us take care not to discuss these singular incidents before our companions, but keep our thoughts for each other, and continue our work.”
“It seems that way,” replied the engineer, looking thoughtful. “There’s something here that I can’t figure out. But we also can’t explain how I was saved; how I was pulled from the waves and brought to the cliffs. So, I’m sure there’s some mystery we’ll uncover one day. In the meantime, let’s avoid discussing these strange events in front of our friends, keep our thoughts to ourselves, and focus on our work.”
It will be remembered that Smith had not yet discovered what became of the surplus water of the lake, and as there was no indication of its ever overflowing, an outlet must exist somewhere. He was surprised, therefore, on noticing a slight current just at this place. Throwing in some leaves and bits of wood, and observing their drift, he followed this current, which brought him to the southern end of the lake. Here he detected a slight depression in the waters, as if they were suddenly lost in some opening below.
It will be remembered that Smith had not figured out what happened to the extra water from the lake, and since there was no sign of it ever overflowing, there must be an outlet somewhere. He was surprised, therefore, when he noticed a slight current right at that spot. Throwing in some leaves and pieces of wood, and watching how they floated, he followed this current, which led him to the southern end of the lake. There, he noticed a slight dip in the water, as if it was suddenly disappearing into an opening below.
Smith listened, placing his ear to the surface of the lake, and distinctly heard the sound of a subterranean fall.
Smith listened, pressing his ear to the surface of the lake, and clearly heard the sound of an underground waterfall.
“It is there,” said he, rising, “there that the water is discharged, there, doubtless, through a passage in the massive granite that it goes to join the sea, through cavities which we will be able to utilize to our profit! Well! I will find out!”
“It’s over there,” he said, standing up, “that’s where the water flows out, that’s where, no doubt, it makes its way through a gap in the solid granite to meet the sea, through openings that we can use to our advantage! Alright! I’ll figure it out!”
The engineer cut a long branch, stripped off its leaves, and, plunging it down at the angle of the two banks, he found that there was a large open hole a foot below the surface. This was the long-sought-for outlet, and such was the force of the current that the branch was snatched from his hands and disappeared.
The engineer chopped a long branch, removed its leaves, and, sticking it down at the angle of the two banks, he discovered a large open hole about a foot below the surface. This was the long-awaited outlet, and the current was so strong that the branch was pulled from his hands and vanished.
“There can be no doubt of it now,” repeated the engineer. “It is the mouth of the outlet, and I am going to work to uncover it.
“There’s no doubt about it now,” the engineer repeated. “This is the mouth of the outlet, and I’m going to work to uncover it."
“How?” inquired Spilett.
“How?” asked Spilett.
“By lowering the lake three feet.”
“By lowering the lake three feet.”
“And how will you do that?”
“And how are you going to do that?”
“By opening another vent larger than this.”
“By opening another vent that's larger than this.”
“Whereabouts, Cyrus?”
"Where are you, Cyrus?"
“Where the bank is nearest the coast.”
“Where the bank is closest to the coast.”
“But it is a granite wall,” exclaimed Spilett,
“But it’s a granite wall,” exclaimed Spilett,
“Very well,” replied Smith. “I will blow up the wall, and the waters, escaping, will subside so as to discover the orifice—”
“Sure,” replied Smith. “I’ll blow up the wall, and the water will drain away enough to reveal the opening—”
“And will make a waterfall at the cliff,” added the reporter.
“And will create a waterfall at the cliff,” added the reporter.
“A fall that we will make use of!” answered Cyrus. “Come, come!”
“A fall that we can take advantage of!” replied Cyrus. “Come on!”
The engineer hurried off his companion, whose confidence in Smith was such that he doubted not the success of the undertaking. And yet, this wall of granite, how would they begin: how, without powder, with but imperfect tools, could they blast the rock? Had not the engineer undertaken a work beyond his skill to accomplish?
The engineer quickly sent off his companion, who had so much faith in Smith that he was sure the project would succeed. And yet, this wall of granite—how would they even start? How could they blast the rock without explosives and with only basic tools? Had the engineer taken on a task that was beyond his abilities?
When Smith and the reporter re-entered the Chimneys, they found Herbert and Pencroff occupied in unloading their raft.
When Smith and the reporter went back into the Chimneys, they saw Herbert and Pencroff busy unloading their raft.
“The wood-choppers have finished, sir,” said the sailor, laughing, “and when you want masons—”
“The woodchoppers are done, sir,” the sailor said with a laugh, “and when you need masons—”
“Not masons, but chemists,” interrupted the engineer.
“Not masons, but chemists,” the engineer interjected.
“Yes,” added Spilett, “we are going to blow up the island.”
“Yes,” Spilett added, “we're going to blow up the island.”
“Blow up the island?” cried the sailor.
“Blow up the island?” shouted the sailor.
“A part of it, at least,” answered the reporter.
“A part of it, at least,” replied the reporter.
“Listen to me, my friends,” said the engineer, who thereupon made known the result of his observations. His theory was, that a cavity, more or less considerable, existed in the mass of granite which upheld Prospect Plateau, and he undertook to penetrate to it. To do this, it was first necessary to free the present opening, in other words to lower the level of the lake by giving the water a larger issue. To do this they must manufacture an explosive with which to make a drain in another part of the bank. It was this Smith was going to attempt to do, with the minerals Nature had placed at his disposal.
“Listen up, everyone,” said the engineer, who then shared the results of his observations. He theorized that there was a cavity, varying in size, within the granite that supported Prospect Plateau, and he planned to reach it. To do this, they first needed to clear the existing opening, which meant lowering the lake's level by creating a larger outlet for the water. They would need to create an explosive to make a drain in another area of the bank. That was what Smith intended to do, using the minerals that nature had provided.
All entered into the proposal with enthusiasm. Neb and Pencroff were at once detailed to extract the fat from the dugong and to preserve the flesh for food; and soon after their departure the others, carrying the hurdle, went up the shore to the vein of coal, where were to be found the schistous pyrites of which Smith had procured a specimen.
All jumped into the proposal with excitement. Neb and Pencroff were immediately assigned to extract the fat from the dugong and preserve the meat for food; shortly after they left, the others, carrying the hurdle, headed up the shore to the coal vein, where they could find the schistous pyrites that Smith had collected a sample of.
The whole day was employed in bringing a quantity of these pyrites to the Chimneys, and by evening they had several tons.
The whole day was spent bringing a bunch of these pyrites to the Chimneys, and by evening, they had several tons.
On the next day, the 8th of May, the engineer began his manipulations. The schistous pyrites were principally composed of carbon, of silica, of alumina, and sulphuret of iron,—these were in excess,—it was necessary to separate the sulphuret and change it into sulphate by the quickest means. The sulphate obtained, they would extract the Sulphuric acid, which was what they wanted.
On the next day, May 8th, the engineer started his work. The schistous pyrites were mainly made up of carbon, silica, alumina, and iron sulfide—these were in excess—and it was important to separate the sulfide and convert it into sulfate as quickly as possible. Once the sulfate was obtained, they would extract the sulfuric acid, which was their goal.
Sulphuric acid is one of the agents in most general use, and the industrial importance of a nation can be measured by its consumption. In the future this acid would be of use to the colonists in making candles, tanning skins, etc., but at present the engineer reserved it for another purpose.
Sulfuric acid is one of the most commonly used chemicals, and you can gauge a country's industrial significance by how much of it they use. In the future, this acid would help the colonists in making candles, tanning hides, and other tasks, but right now, the engineer kept it for a different use.
Smith chose, behind the Chimneys, a place upon which the earth was carefully levelled. On this he made a pile of branches and cut wood, on which were placed pieces of schistous pyrites leaning against each other, and then all was covered over with a thin layer of pyrites previously reduced to the size of nuts.
Smith selected a spot behind the Chimneys where the ground had been carefully leveled. He built a pile of branches and cut wood, then placed pieces of schistous pyrites leaning against each other on top. Finally, he covered it all with a thin layer of pyrites that had been crushed to the size of nuts.
This done, they set the wood on, fire, which in turn inflamed the schist, as it contained carbon and sulphur. Then new layers of pyrites were arranged so as to form an immense heap, surrounded with earth, and grass, with air-holes left here and there, just as is done in reducing a pile of wood to charcoal.
This done, they set the wood on fire, which in turn ignited the schist, since it had carbon and sulfur. Then new layers of pyrites were stacked to create a massive heap, surrounded by soil and grass, with air holes left here and there, just like when reducing a pile of wood to charcoal.
Then they left the transformation to complete itself. It would take ten or twelve days for the sulphuret of iron and the alumina to change into sulphates, which substances were equally soluble; the others—silica, burnt carbon, and cinders—were not so.
Then they let the transformation happen on its own. It would take about ten or twelve days for the iron sulfide and the alumina to turn into sulfates, which were equally soluble; the others—silica, burnt carbon, and cinders—were not.
While this chemical process was accomplishing itself, Smith employed his companions upon other branches of the work, which they undertook with the utmost zeal.
While this chemical process was happening, Smith had his companions work on other parts of the project, which they tackled with great enthusiasm.
Neb and Pencroff had taken the fat from the dugong, which had been placed in large earthen jars. It was necessary to separate the glycerine from this fat by saponifying it. It was sufficient, in order to do this, to treat it with chalk or soda. Chalk was not wanting, but by this treatment the soap would be calcareous and useless, while by using soda, a soluble soap, which could be employed for domestic purposes, would be the result. Cyrus Smith, being a practical man, preferred to try to get the soda. Was this difficult? No, since many kinds of marine plants abounded on the shore, and all those fucaceæ which form wrack. They therefore gathered a great quantity of these seaweed, which were first dried, and, afterwards, burnt in trenches in the open air. The combustion of these plants was continued for many days, so that the heat penetrated throughout, and the result was the greyish compact mass, long known as “natural soda.”
Neb and Pencroff had taken the fat from the dugong, which was stored in large earthen jars. They needed to separate the glycerine from this fat by turning it into soap. To do this, they could use chalk or soda. While they had plenty of chalk, using it would yield a calcium soap that was useless. On the other hand, using soda would create a soluble soap that could be used for household purposes. Cyrus Smith, being a practical guy, decided to go for the soda. Was it hard to find? No, since there were many types of marine plants along the shore, including all the wrack-forming fucaceae. They collected a large amount of this seaweed, dried it out, and then burned it in trenches outdoors. They kept the burning going for several days to ensure the heat penetrated thoroughly, resulting in a greyish, compact mass known as “natural soda.”
This accomplished, the engineer treated the fat with the soda, which gave both a soluble soap and the neutral substance, glycerine.
This done, the engineer treated the fat with soda, which produced both a soluble soap and the neutral substance, glycerin.
But this was not all. Smith wanted, in view of his future operations, another substance, nitrate of potash, better known as saltpetre.
But that wasn't everything. Smith needed, for his upcoming operations, another substance: nitrate of potash, commonly known as saltpetre.
He could make this by treating carbonate of potash, which is easily extracted from vegetable ashes, with nitric acid. But this acid, which was precisely what he wanted in order to complete his undertaking successfully, he did not have. Fortunately, in this emergency, Nature furnished him with saltpetre, without any labor other than picking it up. Herbert had found a vein of this mineral at the foot of Mount Franklin, and all they had to do was to purify the salt.
He could achieve this by treating potassium carbonate, which can be easily obtained from plant ashes, with nitric acid. But he didn’t have the acid, which was exactly what he needed to successfully complete his project. Luckily, in this situation, Nature provided him with saltpeter, requiring no effort other than collecting it. Herbert had discovered a vein of this mineral at the base of Mount Franklin, and all they had to do was purify the salt.
These different undertakings, which occupied eight days, were finished before the sulphate of iron was ready. During the interval the colonists made some refractory pottery in plastic clay, and constructed a brick furnace of a peculiar shape, in which to distil the sulphate of iron. All was finished on the 18th of May, the very day the chemical work was completed.
These different tasks, which took eight days, were completed before the iron sulfate was ready. In the meantime, the settlers made some tough pottery from plastic clay and built an oddly shaped brick furnace to distill the iron sulfate. Everything was done by May 18th, the same day the chemical work was finished.
The result of this latter operation, consisting of sulphate of iron, sulphate of alumina, silica, and a residue of charcoal and cinders, was placed, in a basin full of water. Having stirred up the mixture, they let it settle, and at length poured off a clear liquid holding the sulphates of iron and alumina in solution. Finally, this liquid was partly evaporated, the sulphate of iron crystalized, and the mother-water was thrown away.
The result of this latter operation, made up of iron sulfate, aluminum sulfate, silica, and leftover charcoal and ash, was put into a basin full of water. After stirring the mixture, they let it sit, and eventually poured off a clear liquid containing dissolved iron and aluminum sulfates. Finally, this liquid was partially evaporated, causing the iron sulfate to crystallize, and the remaining water was discarded.
Smith had now a quantity of crystals, from which the sulphuric acid was to be extracted.
Smith now had a bunch of crystals, from which the sulphuric acid was to be extracted.
In commerce this acid is manufactured in large quantities and by elaborate processes. The engineer had no such means at his command, but he knew that in Bohemia an acid known as Nordhausen is made by simpler means, which has, moreover, the advantage of being non-concentrated. For obtaining the acid in this way, all the engineer had to do was to calcinize the crystals in a closed jar in such a manner that the sulphuric acid distilled in vapor, which would in turn produce the acid by condensation.
In commerce, this acid is produced in large amounts through complex processes. The engineer didn't have those resources available, but he knew that in Bohemia, an acid called Nordhausen is made using simpler methods, which also has the benefit of being non-concentrated. To obtain the acid this way, all the engineer needed to do was to heat the crystals in a sealed jar so that the sulfuric acid would evaporate, which would then create the acid through condensation.
It was for this that the refractory jars and the furnace had been made. The operation was a success; and on the 20th of May, twelve days after having begun, Smith was the possessor of the agent which he expected to use later in different ways.
It was for this that the stubborn jars and the furnace had been created. The operation was a success; and on May 20th, twelve days after starting, Smith had the agent he planned to use in various ways later.
What did he want with it now? Simply to produce nitric acid, which was perfectly easy, since the saltpetre, attacked by the sulphuric acid, would give it by distillation.
What did he want with it now? He just wanted to make nitric acid, which was really easy because the saltpeter, when combined with the sulfuric acid, would produce it through distillation.
But how would he use this acid? None of the others knew, as he had spoken no word on the subject.
But how would he use this acid? None of the others knew, since he hadn’t said anything about it.
The work approached completion, and one more operation would procure the substance which had required all this labor. The engineer mixed the nitric acid with the glycerine, which latter had been previously concentrated by evaporation in a water-bath, and without employing any freezing mixture, obtained many pints of an oily yellow liquid.
The work was nearly finished, and one more step would provide the substance that all this effort had been aimed at. The engineer combined the nitric acid with the glycerine, which had been concentrated by evaporation in a water bath beforehand, and without using any freezing mixture, produced several pints of a yellow oily liquid.
This last operation Smith had conducted alone, at some distance from the Chimneys, as he feared an explosion, and when he returned, with a flagon of this liquid, to his friends, he simply said:—“Here is some nitro-glycerine!”
This last operation Smith had done alone, far from the Chimneys, because he was worried about an explosion. When he came back to his friends with a bottle of this liquid, he just said:—“Here’s some nitro-glycerine!”
It was, in truth, that terrible product, whose explosive power is, perhaps, ten times as great as that of gunpowder, and which has caused so many accidents! Although, since means have been found of transforming it into dynamite, that is, of mixing it with clay or sugar or some solid substance sufficiently porous to hold it, the dangerous liquid can be used with more safety. But dynamite was not known when the colonists were at work on Lincoln Island.
It was, in fact, that awful substance, whose explosive power is probably ten times stronger than gunpowder, and which has led to so many accidents! However, since ways have been discovered to turn it into dynamite—meaning mixing it with clay, sugar, or some other solid material that’s porous enough to hold it—the hazardous liquid can now be used more safely. But dynamite wasn’t known when the settlers were working on Lincoln Island.
“And is that stuff going to blow up the rocks?” asked Pencroff, incredulously.
“And is that stuff going to blow up the rocks?” asked Pencroff, incredulously.
“Yes, my friend,” answered the engineer, “and it will do all the better since the granite is very hard and will oppose more resistance to the explosion.”
“Yes, my friend,” replied the engineer, “and it will work even better because the granite is very hard and will offer more resistance to the explosion.”
“And when will we see all this, sir?”
“And when will we see all this, sir?”
“To-morrow,” when we have drilled a hole,” answered the engineer.
“Tomorrow,” when we’ve drilled a hole,” answered the engineer.
Early the next morning, the 21st of May, the miners betook themselves to a point which formed the east bank of Lake Grant, not more than 500 feet from the coast. At this place the plateau was lower than the lake, which was upheld by the coping of granite. It was plain that could they break this the waters would escape by this vent, and, forming a stream, flow over the inclined surface of the plateau, and be precipitated in a waterfall over the cliff on to the shore. Consequently, there would be a general lowering of the lake, and the orifice of the water would be uncovered—this was to be the result.
Early the next morning, May 21st, the miners made their way to a spot that formed the east bank of Lake Grant, just 500 feet from the coast. Here, the plateau was lower than the lake, which was held up by the granite edge. It was clear that if they could break through this, the waters would escape through the opening, forming a stream that would flow down the slope of the plateau and tumble down as a waterfall over the cliff to the shore. As a result, the lake would lower overall, and the water outlet would be exposed—this was the intended outcome.
The coping must be broken. Pencroff, directed by the engineer, attacked its outer facing vigorously. The hole which he made with his pick began under a horizontal edge of the bank, and penetrated obliquely so as to reach a level lower than the lake’s surface. Thus the blowing up of the rocks would permit the water to escape freely and consequently lower the lake sufficiently.
The coping needs to be broken. Pencroff, following the engineer’s instructions, attacked its outer face with enthusiasm. The hole he made with his pick started beneath a horizontal edge of the bank and angled downward to reach a level lower than the lake’s surface. This way, blasting the rocks would allow the water to flow out freely, effectively lowering the lake enough.
The work was tedious, as the engineer, wishing to produce a violent shock, had determined to use not less than two gallons of nitro-glycerine in the operation. But Pencroff and Neb, taking turns at the work, did so well, that by 4 o’clock in the afternoon it was achieved.
The job was exhausting, as the engineer, wanting to create a powerful explosion, decided to use at least two gallons of nitroglycerin for the task. However, Pencroff and Neb, alternating on the job, did so effectively that by 4 o'clock in the afternoon, they completed it.
Now came the question of igniting the explosive. Ordinarily, nitro-glycerine is ignited by the explosion of fulminated caps, as, if lighted without percussion, this substance burns and does not explode.
Now came the question of lighting the explosive. Normally, nitroglycerin is ignited by the explosion of detonator caps, because if it's lit without a strong shock, this substance burns and doesn’t explode.
Smith could doubtless make a cap. Lacking fulminate, he could easily obtain a substance analogous to gun-cotton, since he had nitric acid at hand. This substance pressed in a cartridge, and introduced into the nitro-glycerine, could be lighted with a slow match, and produce the explosion.
Smith could definitely make a cap. Without fulminate, he could easily get a substance similar to gun-cotton, since he had nitric acid on hand. This substance, packed in a cartridge and added to the nitro-glycerin, could be ignited with a slow match, causing the explosion.
But Smith knew that their liquid had the property of exploding under a blow. He determined, therefore, to make use of this property, reserving the other means in case this experiment failed.
But Smith knew that their liquid could explode if struck. He decided to use this property, saving the other methods for if this experiment didn’t work.
The blow of a hammer upon some drops of the substance spread on a hard stone, suffices to provoke an explosion. But no one could give those blows without being a victim to the operation. Smith’s idea was to suspend a heavy mass of iron by means of a vegetable fibre to an upright post, so as to have the iron hang directly over the hole. Another long fibre, previously soaked in sulphur, was to be fastened to the middle of the first and laid along the ground many feet from this excavation. The fire was to be applied to this second fibre, it would burn till it reached the first and set it on fire, then the latter would break and the iron be precipitated upon the nitro-glycerine.
The impact of a hammer on some drops of the substance spread on a hard stone is enough to cause an explosion. But nobody could deliver those blows without suffering from the process. Smith’s plan was to hang a heavy piece of iron using a plant fiber from an upright post, so the iron was positioned directly over the hole. Another long fiber, soaked in sulfur beforehand, would be attached to the middle of the first and stretched along the ground several feet from the excavation. The fire would be set to this second fiber; it would burn until it reached the first one and ignite it, causing it to break and drop the iron onto the nitroglycerin.
The apparatus was fixed in place; then the engineer, after having made his companions go away, filled the hole so that the fluid overflowed the opening, and spread some drops underneath the mass of suspended iron.
The equipment was secured in place; then the engineer, after sending his colleagues away, filled the hole so that the fluid overflowed the opening and dripped some drops underneath the mass of suspended iron.
This done, Smith lit the end of the sulfured fibre, and, leaving the place, returned with his companions to the Chimneys.
This done, Smith lit the end of the sulfured fiber and, leaving the place, returned with his friends to the Chimneys.
Twenty-five minutes after a tremendous explosion was heard. It seemed as if the whole island trembled to its base. A volley of stones rose into the air as if they had been vomited from a volcano. The concussion was such that it shook the Chimneys. The colonists, though two miles away, were thrown to the ground. Rising again, they clambered up to the plateau and hurried towards the place.
Twenty-five minutes after a massive explosion was heard, it felt like the entire island was shaking. A burst of stones shot into the air as if they had been spewed out by a volcano. The impact was so strong that it rattled the Chimneys. The colonists, even though they were two miles away, were knocked to the ground. After getting back up, they climbed to the plateau and rushed towards the site.
A large opening had been torn in the granite coping. A rapid stream of water escaped through it, leaping and foaming across the plateau, and, reaching the brink, fell a distance of 300 feet to the shore below.
A large hole had been carved in the granite edge. A fast stream of water flowed through it, rushing and bubbling across the plateau, and when it reached the edge, it dropped 300 feet down to the shore below.
CHAPTER XVIII.
PENCROFF DOUBTS NO MORE—THE OLD OUTLET OF THE LAKE—A SUBTERRANEAN DESCENT—THE WAY THROUGH THE GRANITE—TOP HAS DISAPPEARED—THE CENTRAL CAVERN—THE LOWER WELL—MYSTERY—THE BLOWS WITH THE PICK—THE RETURN.
PENCROFF NO LONGER DOUBTS—THE OLD OUTLET OF THE LAKE—A UNDERGROUND DESCENT—THE PATH THROUGH THE GRANITE—THE TOP HAS VANISHED—THE CENTRAL CAVERN—THE LOWER WELL—MYSTERY—THE STRIKES WITH THE PICK—THE RETURN.
Smith’s project had succeeded; but, as was his manner, he stood motionless, absorbed, his lips closed, giving no sign of satisfaction. Herbert was all enthusiasm; Neb jumped with joy; Pencroff, shaking his head, murmured:—
Smith’s project had succeeded, but, as was his way, he stood still, deep in thought, his lips sealed, showing no signs of happiness. Herbert was full of excitement; Neb was bouncing with joy; Pencroff, shaking his head, murmured:—
“Indeed, our engineer does wonders!”
“Definitely, our engineer is amazing!”
The nitro-glycerine had worked powerfully. The opening was so great that at least a three times greater volume of water escaped by it than by the former outlet. In a little while, therefore, the level of the lake would be lowered two feet or more.
The nitroglycerin had worked effectively. The opening was so large that at least three times more water flowed out of it than through the previous outlet. Soon, the lake's level would drop by two feet or more.
The colonists returned to the Chimneys, and collecting some picks, spears, ropes, a steel and tinder, returned to the plateau. Top went with them.
The colonists went back to the Chimneys, grabbed some picks, spears, ropes, a steel, and tinder, and headed back to the plateau. Top went with them.
On the way the sailor could not resist saying to the engineer:—
On the way, the sailor couldn't help but say to the engineer:—
“But do you really think, Mr. Smith, that one could blow up the whole island with this beautiful liquid of yours?”
“But do you really think, Mr. Smith, that someone could blow up the entire island with this amazing liquid of yours?”
“Doubtless,” replied the other, “island, continents, the world itself. It is only a question of quantity.”
“Definitely,” replied the other, “islands, continents, the world itself. It’s just a matter of scale.”
“Couldn’t you use this nitro-glycerine to load firearms.”
“Can’t you use this nitroglycerin to load guns?”
“No, Pencroff, because it is too shattering. But it would be easy to make gun-cotton, or even common powder, as we have the material. Unfortunately, the guns themselves are wanting.”
“No, Pencroff, because it’s too overwhelming. But it would be easy to make gun-cotton, or even regular gunpowder, since we have the materials. Unfortunately, we’re missing the guns themselves.”
“But with a little ingenuity!—”
“But with some creativity!”
Pencroff had erased “impossible” from his vocabulary.
Pencroff had removed "impossible" from his vocabulary.
The colonists having reached Prospect Plateau, hastened at once to the old outlet of the lake, which ought now to be uncovered. And when the water no longer poured through it, it would, doubtless, be easy to explore its interior arrangement.
The colonists, having arrived at Prospect Plateau, quickly made their way to the old outlet of the lake, which should now be visible. And when the water had stopped flowing through it, it would surely be easy to investigate its inner structure.
In a few moments they reached the lower angle of the lake, and saw at a glance what the result was.
In a few moments, they arrived at the lower edge of the lake and quickly saw what the outcome was.
There, in the granite wall of the lake, above the water-level, appeared the long-looked for opening. A narrow ledge, left bare, by the subsidence of the water, gave them access to it. The opening was twenty feet wide, though only two feet high. It was like the gutter-mouth in a pavement. It was not open enough for the party to get in, but Neb and Pencroff, with their picks, in less than an hour had given it a sufficient height.
There, in the granite wall of the lake, above the water level, appeared the long-awaited opening. A narrow ledge, revealed by the dropping water, allowed them access to it. The opening was twenty feet wide but only two feet high. It resembled a gutter in a sidewalk. It wasn't tall enough for the group to enter, but Neb and Pencroff, with their picks, managed to make it high enough in less than an hour.
The engineer looked in and saw that the walls of the opening in its upper part showed a slope of from 30° to 35°. And, therefore, unless they became much steeper it would be easy to descend, perhaps, to the level of the sea. And if, as was probable, some vast cavern existed in the interior of the massive granite, it was possible that they could make use of it.
The engineer looked in and saw that the walls at the top of the opening sloped at an angle of 30° to 35°. So, unless they got a lot steeper, it would be easy to descend, maybe all the way down to sea level. And if, as seemed likely, there was a huge cavern inside the solid granite, they could potentially use it.
“What are we waiting for, Mr. Smith,” cried the sailor, all impatience to begin the exploration, “Top, you see, has gone ahead!”
“What are we waiting for, Mr. Smith?” shouted the sailor, eager to start the exploration. “Top, you see, has already gone ahead!”
“We must have some light,” said the engineer. “Go, Neb, and cut some resinous branches.”
“We need some light,” said the engineer. “Go, Neb, and cut some resinous branches.”
The negro and Herbert ran to some pine and evergreens growing upon the bank, and soon returned with branches which were made into torches. Having lit them, the colonists, with Smith leading, entered the dark passage, but recently filled with water.
The Black man and Herbert ran to some pine and evergreens growing on the bank, and soon came back with branches that they made into torches. After lighting them, the colonists, with Smith in the lead, entered the dark passage that had recently filled with water.
Contrary to their expectation, the passage grew higher as they advanced, until soon they were able to walk upright. The granite walls, worn, by the water, were very slippery, and the party had to look out for falls. They, therefore, fastened themselves together with a cord, like mountain climbers. Fortunately, some granite steps made the descent less perilous. Drops of water, still clinging to the rocks, glistened like stalactites in the torchlight. The engineer looked carefully at this black granite. He could not see a stratum or a flaw. The mass was compact and of fine grain, and the passage must have been coeval with the island. It had not been worn little by little by the constant action of water. Pluto, and not Neptune, had shaped it; and the traces of igneous action were still visible upon its surface.
Contrary to their expectations, the passage rose higher as they moved forward, until soon they could walk upright. The granite walls, worn down by the water, were very slippery, and the group had to watch out for any falls. So, they tied themselves together with a rope, like mountain climbers. Fortunately, some granite steps made the descent less dangerous. Drops of water, still clinging to the rocks, sparkled like stalactites in the torchlight. The engineer examined the black granite closely. He couldn't see any layers or flaws. The rock was solid and had a fine grain, and the passage must have been formed at the same time as the island. It hadn't been eroded little by little by the continuous flow of water. Pluto, not Neptune, had shaped it; and signs of volcanic activity were still visible on its surface.
The colonists descended but slowly. They experienced some emotion in thus adventuring into the depths of the earth, in being its first human visitants. No one spoke, but each was busied with his own reflections and the thought occurred to more than one, that perhaps some pulp or other gigantic cephalopod might inhabit the interior cavities which communicated with the sea. It was, therefore, necessary to advance cautiously.
The colonists went down slowly. They felt a mix of emotions as they ventured into the depths of the earth, being the first humans to visit. No one said anything, but each was lost in their thoughts, and more than one person wondered if some giant squid or other massive cephalopod might live in the inner chambers that connected to the sea. So, it was essential to proceed carefully.
Top was ahead of the little troop and they could rely on the dog’s sagacity to give the alarm on occasion. After having descended 100 feet, Smith halted, and the others came up with him. They were standing in a cavern of moderate size. Drops of water fell from the roof, but they did not ooze through the rocks, they were simply the last traces of the torrent which had so long roared through this place, and the air, though humid, emitted no mephitic vapor.
Top was leading the small group, and they could count on the dog's keen instincts to alert them when necessary. After going down 100 feet, Smith stopped, and the others caught up with him. They stood in a medium-sized cave. Drops of water fell from the ceiling, but they didn't seep through the rocks; they were just the last remnants of the rushing water that had thundered through this area for a long time, and while the air was humid, it didn’t have any foul odor.
“Well, Cyrus,” said Spilett, “here is a retreat sufficiently unknown and hidden in the depths, but it is uninhabitable.”
“Well, Cyrus,” Spilett said, “here is a retreat that is pretty unknown and hidden deep down, but it’s unlivable.”
“How, uninhabitable?” asked the sailor.
“How is it uninhabitable?” asked the sailor.
“Why, it is too small and too dark.”
“Why, it's too small and too dark.”
“Cannot we make it bigger, blast it out, and make openings for the light and air?” answered Pencroff, who now thought nothing impracticable.
“Can’t we make it bigger, blow it out, and create openings for light and air?” replied Pencroff, who now believed nothing was impossible.
“Let us push on,” said Smith. “Perhaps lower down, nature will have spared us this work.”
“Let’s keep going,” said Smith. “Maybe further down, nature will make this easier for us.”
“We are only a third of the way down,” observed Herbert.
“We're only a third of the way down,” Herbert noted.
“But 100 feet,” responded Cyrus; “and it is possible that 100 feet lower—.”
“But 100 feet,” replied Cyrus, “and it could be 100 feet lower—.”
“Where is Top?” asked Neb, interrupting his master.
“Where's Top?” asked Neb, cutting off his master.
They looked about the cavern. The dog was not there.
They looked around the cave. The dog wasn’t there.
“Let us overtake him,” said Smith, resuming the march. The engineer noted carefully all the deviations of the route, and easily kept a general idea of their direction, which was towards the sea. The party had not descended more than fifty feet further, when their attention was arrested by distant sounds coming from the depths of the rock. They stopped and listened. These sounds, borne along the passage, as the voice through an acoustic tube, were distinctly heard.
“Let’s catch up to him,” said Smith, continuing the march. The engineer carefully took note of all the twists and turns of the route, and easily kept a general idea of their direction, which was towards the sea. The group hadn’t descended more than fifty feet further when they were distracted by distant sounds coming from deep within the rock. They paused and listened. These sounds, traveling through the passage like a voice through a speaker, were clearly audible.
“Its Top’s barking!” cried Herbert.
“Top is barking!” cried Herbert.
“Yes, and the brave dog is barking furiously,” added Pencroff.
“Yes, and the brave dog is barking like crazy,” added Pencroff.
“We have our spears,” said Smith. “Come on, and be ready.”
“We have our spears,” Smith said. “Let’s go, and be ready.”
“It is becoming more and more interesting,” whispered Spilett to the sailor, who nodded assent.
“It’s getting more and more interesting,” whispered Spilett to the sailor, who nodded in agreement.
They hurried to the rescue of the dog. His barks grew more distinct. They could hear that he was in a strange rage. Had he been captured by some animal whom he had disturbed? Without thinking of the danger, the colonists felt themselves drawn on by an irresistible curiosity, and slipped rather than ran down the passage. Sixteen feet lower they came up with the dog.
They rushed to save the dog. His barks became clearer. They could tell he was in a strange frenzy. Had some animal caught him because he had disturbed it? Without considering the danger, the colonists felt an overwhelming curiosity pulling them forward, and they moved quietly down the passage instead of running. Sixteen feet down, they found the dog.
There, the corridor opened out into a vast and magnificent cavern. Top, rushing about, was barking furiously. Pencroff and Neb, shaking their torches, lit up all the inequalities of the granite, and the others, with their spears ready, held themselves prepared for any emergency.
There, the corridor opened up into a huge and stunning cave. Top was running around, barking loudly. Pencroff and Neb shook their torches, illuminating all the rough spots of the granite, while the others, with their spears at the ready, stayed prepared for any situation.
But the enormous cavern was empty. The colonists searched everywhere; they could find no living thing. Nevertheless, Top continued barking, and neither threats nor caresses could stop him.
But the huge cavern was empty. The colonists searched everywhere; they couldn't find any living thing. Still, Top kept barking, and neither threats nor petting could calm him down.
“There must be some place where the water escaped to the sea,” said the engineer.
"There has to be a spot where the water flowed out to the sea," said the engineer.
“Yes, and look out for a hole,” answered Pencroff.
“Yes, and watch out for a hole,” replied Pencroff.
“On, Top, on,” cried Smith, and the dog, encouraged by his master, ran towards the end of the cavern, and redoubled his barking.
“On, Top, on,” shouted Smith, and the dog, excited by his owner, raced toward the end of the cave and barked even louder.
Following him, they saw by the light of the torches the opening of what looked like a well in the granite. Here, undoubtedly, was the place where the water had found its way out of the cavern, but this time, instead of being a corridor sloping and accessible, it was a perpendicular well, impossible to descend.
Following him, they saw by the torchlight the opening of what looked like a well in the granite. This was clearly where the water had escaped from the cavern, but instead of a sloping corridor that was easy to navigate, it was a vertical well, impossible to climb down.
The torches were waved above the opening. They saw nothing. Smith broke off a burning branch and dropped it into the abyss. The resin, fanned by the wind of its fall, burned brightly and illuminated the interior of the pit, but showed nothing else. Then the flame was extinguished with a slight hiss, which indicated that it had reached the water, which must be the sea level.
The torches were waved over the opening. They saw nothing. Smith broke off a burning branch and tossed it into the abyss. The resin, fanned by the wind as it fell, burned brightly and lit up the inside of the pit, but revealed nothing else. Then the flame went out with a soft hiss, indicating that it had hit the water, which must be at sea level.
The engineer calculated, from the time taken in the fall, that the depth was about ninety feet. The floor of the cavern was therefore that distance above the sea.
The engineer figured out, based on the time it took to fall, that the depth was about ninety feet. The floor of the cavern was therefore that high above the sea.
“Here is our house,” said Smith.
“Here is our house,” Smith said.
“But it was preoccupied,” said Spilett, whose curiosity was unsatisfied.
“But it was distracted,” said Spilett, whose curiosity was not satisfied.
“Well, the thing that had it, whether amphibious or not, has fled by this outlet and vacated in our favor,” replied the engineer.
“Well, whatever it was, amphibious or not, it has slipped past this exit and left the way clear for us,” replied the engineer.
“Any how, I should like to have been Top a quarter of an hour ago,” said the sailor, “for he does not bark at nothing.”
“Anyway, I wish I had been with Top a quarter of an hour ago,” said the sailor, “because he doesn’t bark for no reason.”
Smith looked at his dog, and those who were near him heard him murmur:—
Smith looked at his dog, and those around him heard him mumble:—
“Yes, I am convinced that Top knows more than we do about many things!”
“Yeah, I really believe that Top knows more than we do about a lot of things!”
However, the wishes of the colonists had been in a great measure realized. Chance, aided by the marvelous acuteness of their chief, had done them good service. Here they had at their disposal a vast cavern, whose extent could not be estimated In the insufficient light of the torches, but which could certainly be easily partitioned off with bricks into chambers, and arranged, if not as a house, at least as a spacious suite of rooms. The water having left it, could not return. The place was free.
However, the colonists' wishes had largely come true. Luck, along with the incredible insight of their leader, had worked in their favor. They had access to a huge cavern, the size of which was hard to determine in the dim light of the torches, but it could definitely be divided into rooms using bricks and set up, if not like a house, at least as a spacious suite of rooms. The water had receded and couldn't come back. The place was theirs.
But two difficulties remained, the possibility of lighting the cavern and the necessity of rendering it easier of access. The first could not be done from above as the enormous mass of granite was over them; but, perhaps, they would be able to pierce the outer wall which faced the sea. Smith, who during the descent had kept account of the slope, and therefore of the length of the passage, believed that this part of the wall could not be very thick. If light could be thus obtained, so could entrance, as it was as easy to pierce a door as windows, and to fix a ladder on the outside.
But two problems remained: the need to light up the cave and the need to make it easier to get into. They couldn't light it from above since there was a massive granite wall above them; however, they might be able to break through the outer wall that faced the sea. Smith, who had been keeping track of the slope during their descent and the length of the passage, thought this part of the wall might not be very thick. If they could get light this way, then they could also create an entrance, as it would be just as simple to break through a door as it would be windows and set up a ladder on the outside.
Smith communicated his ideas to his companions.
Smith shared his ideas with his friends.
“Then let us set to work!” answered Pencroff; “I have my pick and will I soon make daylight in the granite! Where shall I begin?”
“Then let's get to work!” replied Pencroff. “I have my pick, and I’ll quickly break through the granite! Where should I start?”
“Here,” answered the engineer, showing the strong sailor a considerable hollow in the wall, which greatly diminished its thickness.
“Here,” said the engineer, pointing out a significant hollow in the wall to the sturdy sailor, which greatly reduced its thickness.
Pencroff attacked the granite, and for half an hour, by the light of the torches, made the splinters fly about him. Then Neb took his place, and Spilett after Neb. The work continued, two hours longer, and, when it seemed as if the wall could not be thicker than the length of the pick, at the last stroke of Spilett the implement, passing through, fell on the outside.
Pencroff hit the granite, and for half an hour, with the light from the torches, sent shards flying around him. Then Neb took over, followed by Spilett after Neb. The work continued for another two hours, and when it seemed like the wall couldn’t be thicker than the length of the pick, on Spilett's final strike, the tool broke through and fell to the outside.
“Hurrah forever!” cried Pencroff.
"Yay forever!" cried Pencroff.
The wall was but three feet thick.
The wall was only three feet thick.
Smith looked through the opening, which was eighty feet above the ground. Before him extended the coast, the islet, and, beyond, the boundless sea.
Smith looked through the opening, which was eighty feet above the ground. Before him stretched the coast, the island, and, beyond that, the endless sea.
Through the hole the light entered in floods, inundating the splendid cavern and producing a magical effect. While on the left hand it measured only thirty feet in height and one hundred in length, to the right it was enormous, and its vault rose to a height of more than eighty feet. In some places, granite pillars, irregularly disposed, supported the arches as in the nave of a cathedral. Resting upon a sort of lateral piers, here, sinking into elliptic arches, there, rising in ogive mouldings, losing itself in the dark bays, half seen in the shadow through the fantastic arches, ornamented by a profusion of projections which seemed like pendants, this vaulted roof afforded a picturesque blending of all the architectures—Byzantine, Roman, Gothic—that the hand of man has produced. And this was the work of nature! She alone had constructed this magic Alhambra in a granite rock!
Through the hole, light flooded in, filling the magnificent cavern and creating a magical atmosphere. On the left side, it was only thirty feet high and a hundred feet long, but on the right, it was massive, soaring over eighty feet high. In some areas, granite pillars were placed irregularly, supporting arches like those in a cathedral's nave. Resting on lateral piers, some arches sank into elegant ellipses while others rose with pointed moldings, fading into dark recesses that were barely visible in the shadows formed by the whimsical arches, adorned with a multitude of projections that looked like pendants. This vaulted ceiling presented a stunning mix of all the architectural styles—Byzantine, Roman, Gothic—that humans have ever created. And this was nature's doing! She alone had crafted this magical Alhambra in solid granite!
The colonists were overcome with admiration. Expecting to find but a narrow cavern, they found themselves in a sort of marvellous palace, and Neb had taken off his hat as if he had been transported into a temple!
The colonists were filled with awe. Expecting to discover only a small cave, they instead found themselves in a fantastic palace, and Neb had removed his hat as if he had entered a temple!
Exclamations of pleasure escaped from their lips, and the hurrahs echoed and reechoed from the depths of the dark nave.
Exclamations of joy burst from their lips, and the cheers echoed and reechoed through the shadows of the dark nave.
“My friends,” cried Smith, “when we shall have lighted the interior of this place, when we shall have arranged our chambers, our store-rooms, our offices in the left-hand portion, we will still have this splendid cavern, which shall be our study and our museum!
“My friends,” shouted Smith, “once we’ve lit up this place, once we’ve set up our rooms, our storage, and our offices on the left side, we will still have this amazing cave, which will be our study and our museum!
“And we will call it—” asked Herbert.
“And we'll call it—” asked Herbert.
“Granite House,” answered Smith; and his companions saluted the name with their cheers.
“Granite House,” Smith replied; and his friends cheered at the name.
By this time the torches were nearly consumed, and as, in order to return, it was necessary to regain the summit of the plateau and to remount the corridor, it was decided to postpone until the morrow the work of arranging their new home.
By this time, the torches were almost burned out, and since it was necessary to go back to the top of the plateau and retrace their steps through the corridor, they decided to put off setting up their new home until tomorrow.
Before leaving, Smith leaned over the dark pit once more and listened attentively. But there was no sound from these depths save that of the water agitated by the undulations of the surge. A resinous torch was again thrown in, lighting up anew for an instant the walls of the well, but nothing suspicions was revealed. If any marine monster had been inopportunely surprised by the retreat of the waters, he had already regained the open sea by the subterranean passage which extended under the shore.
Before leaving, Smith leaned over the dark pit one last time and listened closely. But there was no sound from the depths except for the water disturbed by the waves. A resinous torch was thrown in again, briefly illuminating the walls of the well, but nothing suspicious was revealed. If any sea creature had been caught off guard by the retreating water, it had already escaped back to the open sea through the underground passage that ran beneath the shore.
Nevertheless the engineer stood motionless, listening attentively, his gaze plunged in the abyss, without speaking.
Nevertheless, the engineer stood still, listening closely, his gaze lost in thought, without saying a word.
Then the sailor approached him, and, touching his arm:—
Then the sailor walked up to him and, touching his arm:—
“Mr. Smith,” he said.
“Mr. Smith,” he said.
“What is it, my friend,” responded the engineer, like one returning from the land of dreams.
“What is it, my friend?” the engineer replied, as if he were coming back from a dream.
“The torches are nearly out.”
“The torches are almost out.”
“Forward!” said Smith; and the little troop left the cavern and began the ascent through the dark weir. Top walked behind, still growling in an odd way. The ascension was sufficiently laborious, and the colonists stopped for a few minutes at the upper grotto, which formed a sort of landing half way up the long granite stairway. Then they began again to mount, and pretty soon they felt the fresh air. The drops, already evaporated, no longer shone on the walls. The light of the torches diminished; Neb’s went out, and they had to hasten in order to avoid having to grope their way through, the profound darkness. A little before 4 o’clock, just as the torch of the sailor was burnt out, Smith and his companions emerged from the mouth of the passage.
“Forward!” Smith said, and the small group left the cave, starting their climb through the dark weir. Top followed behind, still growling in a strange way. The climb was pretty tough, and the colonists took a break for a few minutes at the upper grotto, which served as a kind of landing halfway up the long granite staircase. Then they started climbing again, and soon they felt the fresh air. The drops, which had already evaporated, no longer glimmered on the walls. The light from the torches faded; Neb’s went out, and they had to hurry to avoid feeling their way through the deep darkness. Just before 4 o’clock, right as the sailor's torch burned out, Smith and his companions came out of the passage.
CHAPTER XIX.
SMITH’S PLAN—THE FRONT OF GRANITE HOUSE—THE ROPE LADDER—PENCROFF’S IDEAS—THE AROMATIC HERBS—A NATURAL WARREN—GETTING WATER—THE VIEW FROM THE WINDOWS OF GRANITE HOUSE.
SMITH’S PLAN—THE FRONT OF GRANITE HOUSE—THE ROPE LADDER—PENCROFF’S IDEAS—THE AROMATIC HERBS—A NATURAL WARREN—GETTING WATER—THE VIEW FROM THE WINDOWS OF GRANITE HOUSE.
On the next day, May 22, the colonists proceeded to take possession of their new abode. They longed to exchange their insufficient shelter for the vast retreat in the rock, impenetrable to wind and wave. Still they did not intend altogether to abandon the Chimneys, but to make a workshop of it.
On the next day, May 22, the colonists moved into their new home. They were eager to trade their inadequate shelter for the spacious refuge in the rock, which was safe from wind and waves. However, they didn’t plan to completely leave the Chimneys behind; instead, they intended to turn it into a workshop.
Smith’s first care was to ascertain exactly over what point rose the face of Granite House. He went down on the shore to the foot of the immense wall, and, as the pickaxe, which slipped from the reporter’s hands, must have fallen perpendicularly, he could ascertain, by finding this pickaxe, the place where the granite had been pierced. And, in fact, when the implement was found, half buried in the sand, the hole in the rock could be seen eighty feet above it, in a straight line. Rock pigeons were already fluttering in and out by this narrow opening. They evidently thought Granite House had been discovered for their benefit.
Smith’s first priority was to figure out exactly where Granite House was located. He went down to the shore at the base of the massive wall. Since the pickaxe that slipped from the reporter’s hands must have fallen straight down, he could find out where the granite had been drilled by locating this pickaxe. And sure enough, when the tool was found, half-buried in the sand, the hole in the rock was visible eighty feet above it, in a straight line. Rock pigeons were already flying in and out of this narrow opening. They clearly thought Granite House had been found for their enjoyment.
The engineer intended to divide the right portion of the cavern into several chambers opening upon an entrance-corridor, and lighted by five windows and a door cut in the face of the rock. Pencroff agreed with him as to the window, but could not understand the use of the door, since the old weir furnished a natural staircase to Granite House.
The engineer planned to split the right side of the cave into several rooms leading to an entrance corridor, lit by five windows and a door carved into the rock. Pencroff agreed about the windows but couldn't see the point of the door, since the old weir provided a natural staircase to Granite House.
“My friend,” said Smith, “if we could get to our abode by the weir, so can others. I want to block up this passage at its month, to seal it hermetically, and even, if necessary, to conceal the entrance by damming up the lake.”
“My friend,” said Smith, “if we can get to our place by the weir, so can others. I want to block this entrance at its source, seal it completely, and if necessary, hide the entry by blocking up the lake.”
“And how shall we get in?” said the sailor.
“And how are we going to get in?” asked the sailor.
“By a rope ladder from the outside,” answered Smith, “which we can pull up after us.”
“By a rope ladder from the outside,” Smith replied, “which we can pull up after us.”
“But why take so many precautions?” said Pencroff. “So far, the animals we have found here have not been formidable; and there are certainly no natives.”
“But why take so many precautions?” Pencroff asked. “So far, the animals we’ve found here haven’t been dangerous, and there definitely aren’t any locals.”
“Are you so sure, Pencroff?” said the engineer, looking steadily at the sailor.
“Are you really that sure, Pencroff?” asked the engineer, looking intently at the sailor.
“Of course we shall not be perfectly sure till we have explored every part.”
“Of course, we won’t be completely sure until we’ve explored every part.”
“Yes,” said Smith, “for we know as yet only a small portion. But even if there are no enemies upon the island, they may come from the outside, for this part of the Pacific is a dangerous region. We must take every precaution.”
“Yes,” said Smith, “because we only know a small part so far. But even if there are no enemies on the island, they could come from outside, since this part of the Pacific is a risky area. We need to take every precaution.”
So the facade of Granite House was lighted with five windows, and with a door opening upon the “apartments,” and admitting plenty of light into that wonderful nave which was to serve as their principal hallroom. This facade, eighty feet above the ground, was turned to the east, and caught the first rays of the morning sun. It was protected by the slope of the rock from the piercing northeast wind. In the meantime, while the sashes of the windows were being made, the engineer meant to close the openings with thick shutters, which would keep out wind and rain, and which could be readily concealed. The first work was to hollow out these windows. But the pickaxe was at a disadvantage among these hard rocks, and Smith again had recourse to the nitro-glycerine, which, used in small quantities, had the desired effect. Then the work was finished by the pick and mattock—the five ogive windows, the bay, the bull’s-eyes, and the door—and, some days after the work was begun, the sun shone in upon the innermost recesses of Granite House.
So, the front of Granite House had five windows and a door leading to the “apartments,” letting in lots of light into that impressive main hall. This front, eighty feet above ground, faced east and caught the first rays of the morning sun. It was shielded from the biting northeast wind by the rock slope. Meanwhile, while they were making the window sashes, the engineer planned to cover the openings with thick shutters to block out the wind and rain, which could be easily hidden away. The first job was to create those windows. However, the pickaxe struggled against the hard rocks, so Smith turned to nitro-glycerine, using it in small amounts to get the job done. Then, the work was finished with a pick and mattock—the five pointed windows, the bay, the round windows, and the door—and a few days after they started, sunlight poured into the deepest corners of Granite House.
According to Smith’s plan, the space had been divided into five compartments looking out upon the sea; upon the right was the hall, opposite to the door from which the ladder was to hang, then a kitchen thirty feet long, a dining-room forty feet long, a sleeping-room of the same size, and last a “guest chamber,” claimed by Pencroff; and bordering on the great hall.
According to Smith’s plan, the area was split into five sections facing the sea. To the right was the hall, directly across from the door where the ladder would hang, followed by a kitchen that was thirty feet long, a dining room that was forty feet long, a sleeping room that was the same size, and finally a "guest room," which Pencroff laid claim to, adjacent to the large hall.
These rooms, or rather this suite of rooms, in which they were to live, did not occupy the full depth of the cave. They opened upon a corridor which ran between them and a long storehouse, where were kept their utensils and provisions. All the products of the island, animal and vegetable, could be kept there in good condition and free from damp. They had room enough, and there was a place for everything. Moreover, the colonists still had at their disposal the little grotto above the large cavern, which would serve them as a sort of attic. This plan agreed upon, they became brickmakers again, and brought their bricks to the foot of Granite House.
These rooms, or rather this suite of rooms, where they were going to live, didn’t take up the entire depth of the cave. They opened into a corridor that ran between them and a long storage area, where their utensils and food supplies were kept. All the products from the island, both animal and vegetable, could be stored there in good condition and kept dry. They had plenty of space, and everything had its place. In addition, the colonists still had access to the small grotto above the large cavern, which would serve as a kind of attic. With this plan agreed upon, they got back to making bricks and brought them to the base of Granite House.
Until that time the colonists had had access to the cavern only by the old weir. This mode of communication compelled them first to climb up Prospect Plateau, going round by the river, to descend 200 feet through the passage, and then to ascend the same distance when they wanted to regain the plateau. This involved fatigue and loss of time. Smith resolved to begin at once the construction of a strong rope ladder, which, once drawn up after them, would render the entrance to Granite House absolutely inaccessible. This ladder was made with the greatest care, and its sides were twisted of fibres by means of a shuttle. Thus constructed, it had the strength of a cable. The rungs were made of a kind of red cedar, with light and durable branches; and the whole was put together by the practised hand of Pencroff.
Until that time, the colonists could only access the cave through the old weir. This method required them to first climb up Prospect Plateau, go around by the river, then descend 200 feet through the passage, and finally climb back up the same distance to return to the plateau. This was exhausting and time-consuming. Smith decided to immediately start building a sturdy rope ladder that, once pulled up after them, would make the entrance to Granite House completely inaccessible. This ladder was constructed with great care, with its sides twisted from fibers using a shuttle. As a result, it had the strength of a cable. The rungs were made from a type of red cedar, using light and durable branches, and the whole thing was assembled by Pencroff's skilled hands.
Another kind of tackle was made of vegetable fibre, and a sort of derrick was setup at the door of Granite House. In this way the bricks could easily be carried to the level of Granite House; and when some thousands of them were on the spot, with abundance of lime, they began work on the interior. They easily set up the wood partitions, and in a short time the space was divided into chambers and a store-house, according to the plan agreed upon.
Another type of tackle was made from plant fibers, and a sort of crane was set up at the entrance of Granite House. This made it easy to lift the bricks to the level of Granite House; and when several thousand bricks were on site, along with an ample supply of lime, they started working on the interior. They quickly erected the wooden partitions, and soon the space was divided into rooms and a storage area, following the agreed-upon plan.
These labors went on quickly under the direction of the engineer, who himself wielded hammer and trowel. They worked confidently and gaily. Pencroff, whether carpenter, ropemaker, or mason, always had a joke ready, and all shared in his good humor. His confidence in the engineer was absolute. All their wants would be supplied in Smith’s own time. He dreamed of canals, of quarries, of mines, of machinery, even of railroads, one day, to cover the island. The engineer let Pencroff talk. He knew how contagious is confidence; he smiled to hear him, and said nothing of his own inquietude. But in his heart he feared that no help could come from the outside. In that part of the Pacific, out of the track of ships, and at such a distance from other land that no boat could dare put out to sea, they had only themselves to rely upon.
These tasks progressed quickly under the guidance of the engineer, who himself handled the hammer and trowel. They worked with confidence and cheerfulness. Pencroff, whether as a carpenter, ropemaker, or mason, always had a joke ready, and everyone enjoyed his good mood. His trust in the engineer was complete. He envisioned canals, quarries, mines, and even machinery, possibly railroads, one day covering the island. The engineer let Pencroff keep talking. He understood how infectious confidence can be; he smiled to hear him and didn’t reveal his own worries. But deep down, he was anxious that no help would come from the outside. In that part of the Pacific, far from shipping routes and so distant from other lands that no boat would dare to set sail, they had to rely on themselves.
But, as the sailor said, they were far ahead of the Swiss Family Robinson, for whom miracles were always being wrought. In truth they knew Nature; and he who knows Nature will succeed when others would lie down to die.
But, as the sailor said, they were way ahead of the Swiss Family Robinson, for whom miracles were always happening. In reality, they understood Nature; and anyone who understands Nature will thrive when others would just give up.
Herbert especially distinguished himself in the work. He understood at a word and was prompt in execution. Smith grew fonder of him every day and Herbert was devoted to the engineer. Pencroff saw the growing friendship, but the honest sailor was not jealous. Neb was courage, zeal, and self-denial in person. He relied on his master as absolutely as Pencroff, but his enthusiasm was not so noisy. The sailor and he were great friends. As to Spilett, his skill and efficiency were a daily wonder to Pencroff. He was the model of a newspaper man—quick alike to understand and to perform.
Herbert really stood out in the work. He could grasp things instantly and was quick to get things done. Smith liked him more and more each day, and Herbert was devoted to the engineer. Pencroff saw their growing friendship, but the honest sailor didn’t feel jealous. Neb was the embodiment of courage, enthusiasm, and selflessness. He depended on his master just as much as Pencroff did, but his excitement was quieter. The sailor and Neb were close friends. As for Spilett, his skill and effectiveness amazed Pencroff every day. He was the perfect model of a journalist—quick to understand and act.
The ladder was put in place May 28. It was eighty feet high, and consisted of 100 rungs; and, profiting by a projection in the face of the cliff, about forty feet up, Smith had divided it into two parts. This projection served as a sort of landing-place for the head of the lower ladder, shortening it, and thus lessening its swing. They fastened it with a cord so that it could easily be raised to the level of Granite House. The upper ladder they fastened at top and bottom. In this way the ascent was much more easy. Besides, Smith counted upon putting up at some future time a hydraulic elevator, which would save his companions much fatigue and loss of time.
The ladder was set up on May 28. It was eighty feet tall and had 100 rungs. Taking advantage of a ledge on the cliff face, about forty feet up, Smith split it into two sections. This ledge acted as a sort of landing spot for the top of the lower ladder, which shortened it and reduced its swing. They secured it with a cord so it could be easily raised to the level of Granite House. The upper ladder was secured both at the top and bottom. This made the climb much easier. Plus, Smith planned to install a hydraulic elevator in the future, which would save his friends a lot of effort and time.
The colonists rapidly accustomed themselves to the use of this ladder. The sailor, who was used to shrouds and ratlines, was their teacher. The great trouble was with Top, whose four feet were not intended for ladders. But Pencroff was persevering, and Top at last learned to run up and down as nimbly as his brothers of the circus. We cannot say whether the sailor was proud of this pupil, but he sometimes carried Top up on his back, and Top made no complaints.
The colonists quickly got used to using this ladder. The sailor, who was familiar with shrouds and ratlines, taught them. The biggest challenge was Top, whose four paws weren't made for ladders. But Pencroff was determined, and eventually Top learned to climb up and down as quickly as his circus brothers. We can't say for sure if the sailor felt proud of this student, but he sometimes carried Top on his back, and Top didn't complain.
All this time, the question of provisions was not neglected. Every day Herbert and the reporter spent some hours in the chase. They hunted only through Jacamar Woods, on the left of the river, for, in the absence of boat or bridge, they had not yet crossed the Mercy. The immense woody tracts which they had named the Forests of the Far West were entirely unexplored. This important excursion was set apart for the first five days of the coming spring. But Jacamar Woods were not wanting in game; kangaroos and boars were plenty there, and the iron-tipped spears, the bows and arrows of the hunters did wonders. More than this, Herbert discovered, at the southwest corner of, the lagoon, a natural warren, a sort of moist meadow covered with willows and aromatic herbs, which perfumed the air, such as thyme, basil, and all sorts of mint, of which rabbits are so fond. The reporter said that when the feast was spread for them it would be strange if the rabbits did not come; and the hunters explored the warren carefully. At all events, it produced an abundance of useful plants, and would give a naturalist plenty of work. Herbert gathered a quantity of plants possessing different medicinal properties, pectoral, astringent, febrifuge, anti-rheumatic. When Pencroff asked of what good were all this collection of herbs:—
All this time, they didn't neglect the issue of supplies. Every day, Herbert and the reporter spent a few hours hunting. They only explored Jacamar Woods, which was on the left side of the river, since they hadn’t managed to cross the Mercy due to a lack of a boat or bridge. The vast wooded areas they had named the Forests of the Far West remained completely uncharted. They planned to dedicate the first five days of the upcoming spring to this important expedition. However, Jacamar Woods had plenty of game; kangaroos and boars were abundant, and the hunters’ iron-tipped spears and bows and arrows worked wonders. Furthermore, Herbert discovered a natural rabbit warren in the southwest corner of the lagoon—a damp meadow filled with willows and fragrant herbs that filled the air with scents of thyme, basil, and various types of mint, all favorites of rabbits. The reporter said it would be surprising if the rabbits didn't show up when they set out a feast for them, so the hunters carefully checked the warren. In any case, it yielded a lot of useful plants and would keep a naturalist busy. Herbert collected several plants with various medicinal properties: expectorant, astringent, fever-reducing, and anti-rheumatic. When Pencroff asked what all these herbs were good for:—
“To cure us when we are sick,” answered the boy.
“To heal us when we're sick,” replied the boy.
“Why should we be sick, since there are no doctors on the island?” said Pencroff, quite seriously.
“Why should we be sick when there are no doctors on the island?” said Pencroff, sounding completely serious.
To this no reply could be made, but the lad went on gathering his bundle, which was warmly welcomed at Granite House; especially as he had found some Mountain Mint, known in North America as “Oswego Tea,” which produces a pleasant beverage.
To this, there was no response, but the young man continued to gather his things, which were happily received at Granite House; especially because he had found some Mountain Mint, called “Oswego Tea” in North America, which makes a nice drink.
That day the hunters, in their search, reached the site of the warren. The ground was perforated with little holes like a colander.
That day, the hunters, while searching, arrived at the location of the warren. The ground was filled with small holes, resembling a colander.
“Burrows!” cried Herbert.
“Burrows!” shouted Herbert.
“But are they inhabited?”
"But are they occupied?"
“That is the question.”
"That's the question."
A question which was quickly resolved. Almost immediately, hundreds of little animals, like rabbits, took to flight in every direction, with such rapidity that Top himself was distanced. But the reporter was determined not to quit the place till he had captured half a dozen of the little beasts. He wanted them now for the kitchen: domestication would come later. With a few snares laid at the mouth of the burrows, the affair would be easy; but there were no snares, nor materials for snares; so they patiently rummaged every form with their sticks, until four rodents were taken.
A question that was quickly settled. Almost instantly, hundreds of small animals, like rabbits, scattered in every direction so fast that Top himself couldn’t keep up. But the reporter was determined not to leave until he had caught half a dozen of the little creatures. He wanted them for the kitchen first; domestication could wait. With a few traps set at the entrance of the burrows, it would be easy, but there were no traps or materials to make them. So, they patiently searched every shape with their sticks until they caught four rodents.
They were rabbits, much like their European congeners, and commonly known as “American hares.” They were brought back to Granite Home, and figured in that evening’s meal. Delicious eating they were; and the warren bade fair to be a most valuable reserve for the colonists.
They were rabbits, similar to their European counterparts, and often referred to as “American hares.” They were brought back to Granite Home and became part of that evening’s meal. They were delicious, and the warren promised to be a very valuable resource for the colonists.
On May 31, the partitions were finished, and nothing remained but to furnish the rooms, which would occupy the long days of winter. A chimney was built in the room which served as a kitchen. The construction of the stove-pipe gave them a good deal of trouble. The simplest material was clay; and as they did not wish to have any outlet on the upper plateau, they pierced a hole above the kitchen window, and conducted the pipe obliquely to this hole. No doubt during an eastern gale the pipe would smoke, but the wind rarely blew from that quarter, and head-cook Neb was not particular
On May 31, the walls were done, and all that was left was to furnish the rooms, which would take up the long winter days. They built a chimney in the room that served as the kitchen. Installing the stove pipe gave them quite a bit of trouble. The easiest material to use was clay, and since they didn’t want any opening on the upper level, they made a hole above the kitchen window and ran the pipe at an angle to this hole. Sure, the pipe might smoke during an eastern wind, but those winds were rare, and the head cook Neb didn’t mind much.
When these domestic arrangements had been made, the engineer proceeded to block up the mouth of the old weir by the lake, so as to prevent any approach from that quarter. Great square blocks were rolled to the opening, and strongly cemented together. Smith did not yet attempt to put in execution his project of damming up the waters of the lake so as to conceal this weir; he was satisfied with concealing the obstruction he had placed there by means of grass, shrubs, and thistles, which were planted in the interstices of the rocks, and which by the next spring would sprout up luxuriantly. Meanwhile he utilized the weir in conducting to their new abode a little stream of fresh water from the lake. A little drain, constructed just below its level, had the effect of supplying them with twenty-five or thirty gallons a day; so there was likely to be no want of water at Granite House.
Once these domestic arrangements were in place, the engineer began sealing off the entrance to the old weir by the lake to block any access from that direction. He rolled large square blocks to the opening and cemented them securely together. Smith didn't yet try to carry out his plan of damming up the lake's waters to hide the weir; he was content with covering the obstruction he had created using grass, shrubs, and thistles, which he planted in the gaps between the rocks, and which would thrive by the next spring. In the meantime, he used the weir to direct a small stream of fresh water from the lake to their new home. A small drain, built just below the weir's level, provided them with twenty-five to thirty gallons of water a day, ensuring there would be no shortage at Granite House.
At last, all was finished, just in time for the tempestuous season. They closed the windows with thick shutters till Smith should have time to make glass from the sand. In the rocky projections around the windows Spilett had arranged, very artistically, plants of various kinds and long floating grasses, and thus the windows were framed picturesquely in green. The denizens of this safe and solid dwelling could but be delighted with their work. The windows opened upon a limitless horizon, shut in only by the two Mandible Capes on the north and by Claw Cape at the south. Union Bay spread magnificently before them. They had reason enough to be satisfied, and Pencroff did not spare his praises of what he called “his suite on the fifth floor.”
At last, everything was done, just in time for the stormy season. They closed the windows with thick shutters until Smith could make glass from the sand. Around the windows, Spilett had arranged various plants and long floating grasses in a very artistic way, framing the windows beautifully in green. The residents of this safe and sturdy home couldn't help but be thrilled with their work. The windows opened up to an endless horizon, bordered only by the two Mandible Capes to the north and Claw Cape to the south. Union Bay stretched out magnificently in front of them. They had every reason to be pleased, and Pencroff didn’t hold back his compliments about what he called “his suite on the fifth floor.”
CHAPTER XX.
THE RAINY SEASON—WHAT TO WEAR-A SEAL-HUNT—CANDLE-MAKING—-WORK IN THE GRANITE HOUSE—THE TWO CAUSEWAYS—RETURN FROM A VISIT TO THE OYSTER-BED—WHAT HERBERT FOUND IS HIS POCKET.
THE RAINY SEASON—WHAT TO WEAR—A SEAL HUNT—CANDLE MAKING—WORK IN THE GRANITE HOUSE—THE TWO CAUSEWAYS—RETURN FROM A VISIT TO THE OYSTER BED—WHAT HERBERT FOUND IN HIS POCKET.
The winter season began in earnest with the month of June, which corresponded with December in our northern hemisphere. Showers and storms succeeded each other without an intermission, and the inmates of the Granite House could appreciate the advantages of a dwelling impervious to the weather. The Chimneys would indeed have proved a miserable shelter against the inclemency of the winter; they feared even lest the high tides driven by the sea-wind should pour in and destroy their furnaces and their foundry. All this month of June was occupied with various labors, which left plenty of time for hunting and fishing, so that the reserve stock of food was constantly kept up. Pencroff intended, as soon as he had time, to set traps, from which he expected great results. He had made snares of ligneous fibre, and not a day passed but some rodent was captured from the warren. Neb spent all his time in smoking and salting meat.
The winter season really kicked in with June, which is December for us in the northern hemisphere. Rain and storms followed each other without a break, and the people in the Granite House could appreciate the benefits of a home that was protected from the elements. The Chimneys would have been a terrible shelter against the harshness of winter; they even worried that the high tides brought by the sea winds would flood in and ruin their furnaces and foundry. All through June, they kept busy with various tasks, which still left plenty of time for hunting and fishing, ensuring their food reserves stayed topped up. Pencroff planned to set traps as soon as he could, anticipating great results. He had made snares from plant fibers, and not a day went by without catching some rodent from the warren. Neb spent all his time smoking and salting meat.
The question of clothes now came up for serious discussion. The colonists had no other garments than those which they wore when the balloon cast them on shore. These, fortunately, were warm and substantial; and by dint of extreme care, even their linen had been kept clean and whole; but everything would soon wear out, and moreover, during a vigorous winter, they would suffer severely from cold. Here Smith was fairly baffled. He had been occupied in providing for their most urgent wants, food and shelter, and the winter was upon them before the clothes problem could be solved. They must resign themselves to bear the cold with fortitude, and when the dry season returned would undertake a great hunt of the moufflons, which they had seen on Mount Franklin, and whose wool the engineer could surely make into warm thick cloth. He would think over the method.
The issue of clothing was now getting serious attention. The colonists had no other clothes besides what they were wearing when the balloon dropped them off. Fortunately, those clothes were warm and durable; and with a lot of care, they had managed to keep their linens clean and intact. But everything would wear out soon, and during a harsh winter, they would really struggle with the cold. Smith was stumped. He had been focused on meeting their most urgent needs—food and shelter—and now winter was here before they could figure out the clothing situation. They would have to endure the cold as best they could, and when the dry season came around, they would plan a major hunt for the moufflons that they had spotted on Mount Franklin, whose wool the engineer could surely turn into warm, thick fabric. He would come up with a plan.
“Well, we must toast ourselves before the fire!” said Pencroff.” There’s plenty of fire wood, no reason for sparing it.”
“Well, we should toast ourselves by the fire!” said Pencroff. “There’s plenty of firewood, so we don’t need to hold back.”
“Besides,” added Spilett, “Lincoln Island is not in very high latitude, and the winters are probably mild. Did you not say, Cyrus that the thirty-fifth parallel corresponded with that of Spain in the other hemisphere?”
“Besides,” added Spilett, “Lincoln Island isn’t at a very high latitude, so the winters are probably mild. Didn’t you say, Cyrus, that the thirty-fifth parallel lines up with that of Spain in the other hemisphere?”
“Yes,” said the engineer, “but the winter in Spain is sometimes very cold, with snow and ice, and we may have a hard time of it. Still we are on an island, and have a good chance for more moderate weather.”
“Yes,” said the engineer, “but winters in Spain can sometimes be really cold, with snow and ice, and we might struggle. Still, we’re on an island, so we have a good chance for milder weather.”
“Why, Mr. Smith?” said Herbert.
“Why, Mr. Smith?” Herbert asked.
“Because the sea, my boy, may be considered as an immense reservoir, in which the summer heat lies stored. At the coming of winter this heat is again given out, so that the neighboring regions have always a medium temperature, cooler in summer and warmer in winter.”
“Because the sea, my boy, can be seen as a huge reservoir where the summer heat is stored. When winter comes, this heat is released, so that the nearby areas always have a moderate temperature, cooler in the summer and warmer in the winter.”
“We shall see,” said Pencroff. “I am not going to bother myself about the weather. One thing is certain, the days are getting short already and the evenings long. Suppose we talk a little about candles.”
“We’ll see,” said Pencroff. “I’m not going to stress about the weather. One thing is for sure, the days are getting shorter and the evenings longer. How about we chat a bit about candles?”
“Nothing is easier,” said Smith.
"Nothing's easier," said Smith.
“To talk about?” asked the sailor.
"To talk about?" the sailor asked.
“To make.”
"To create."
“And when shall we begin?”
"When do we start?"
“To-morrow, by a seal-hunt.”
"Tomorrow, by a seal hunt."
“What! to make dips?”
“What! To make dips?”
“No, indeed, Pencroff, candles.”
“No, really, Pencroff, candles.”
Such was the engineer’s project, which was feasible enough, as he had lime and sulphuric acid, and as the amphibia of the island would furnish the necessary fat. It was now June 4, and Pentecost Sunday, which they kept as a day of rest and thanksgiving. They were no longer miserable castaways, they were colonists. On the next day, June 5, they started for the islet. They had to choose the time of low tide to ford the channel; and all determined that, somehow or other, they must build a boat which would give them easy communication with all parts of the island, and would enable them to go up the Mercy, when they should undertake that grand exploration of the southwestern district which they had reserved for the first good weather.
Such was the engineer’s project, which was doable enough, as he had lime and sulfuric acid, and the island's amphibians would provide the necessary fat. It was now June 4, Pentecost Sunday, which they observed as a day of rest and gratitude. They were no longer miserable castaways; they were colonists. The next day, June 5, they set out for the islet. They had to choose low tide to cross the channel, and everyone agreed that they needed to build a boat to easily travel around the island and to navigate up the Mercy when they finally embarked on the major exploration of the southwestern area they had planned for the first good weather.
Seals were numerous, and the hunters, armed with their iron-spiked spears, easily killed half a dozen of them, which Neb and Pencroff skinned. Only the hides and fat were carried back to Granite House, the former to be made into shoes. The result of the hunt was about 300 pounds of fat, every pound of which could be used in making candles. The operation was simple enough, and the product, if not the best of its kind, was all they needed. Had Smith had at his disposition nothing but sulphuric acid, he could, by heating this acid with neutral fats, such as the fat of the seal, separate the glycerine, which again could be resolved, by means of boiling water, into oleine, margarine, and stearine. But, to simplify the operation, he preferred to saponify the fat by lime. He thus obtained a calcareous soap, easily decomposed by sulphuric acid, which precipitated the lime as a sulphate, and freed the fatty acids. The first of these three acids (oleine, margarine, and stearine) was a liquid which he expelled by pressure. The other two formed the raw material of the candles.
Seals were plentiful, and the hunters, equipped with their iron-tipped spears, easily killed six of them, which Neb and Pencroff skinned. Only the hides and fat were taken back to Granite House, the hides to be turned into shoes. The hunt resulted in about 300 pounds of fat, all of which could be used for making candles. The process was straightforward, and while the product wasn't the finest of its kind, it was all they needed. If Smith had only sulfuric acid on hand, he could heat this acid with neutral fats, like seal fat, to separate the glycerin, which could then be broken down with boiling water into olein, margarine, and stearin. However, to streamline the process, he preferred to saponify the fat using lime. This resulted in a calcium soap, which could be easily broken down by sulfuric acid, precipitating the lime as a sulfate and releasing the fatty acids. The first of these three acids (olein, margarine, and stearin) was a liquid that he expelled by pressure. The other two were used as raw materials for the candles.
In twenty-four hours the work was done. Wicks were made, after some unsuccessful attempts, from vegetable fibre, and were steeped in the liquified compound. They were real stearine candles, made by hand, white and smooth.
In twenty-four hours, the work was done. Wicks were created, after a few failed attempts, from plant fibers and soaked in the melted mixture. They were genuine stearine candles, made by hand, white and smooth.
During all this month work was going on inside their new abode. There was plenty of carpenter’s work to do. They improved and completed their tools, which were very rudimentary. Scissors were made, among other things, so that they were able to cut their hair, and, if not actually to shave their beards, at least to trim them to their liking. Herbert had no beard, and Neb none to speak of, but the others found ample employment for the scissors.
During this month, they were busy working on their new home. There was a lot of carpentry to be done. They fixed up and finished their tools, which were very basic. They even made scissors, among other things, so they could cut their hair, and while they couldn’t fully shave their beards, they could at least trim them how they wanted. Herbert didn’t have a beard, and Neb had very little, but the others kept the scissors busy.
They had infinite trouble in making a hand-saw; but at last succeeded in shaping an instrument which would cut wood by a rigorous application. Then they made tables, chairs and cupboards to furnish the principal rooms, and the frames of beds whose only bedding was mattrasses of wrack-grass. The kitchen, with its shelves, on which lay the terra-cotta utensils, its brick furnace, and its washing-stone, looked very comfortable, and Neb cooked with the gravity of a chemist in his laboratory.
They faced endless challenges in making a hand saw, but eventually managed to create a tool that could cut wood with a lot of effort. After that, they built tables, chairs, and cupboards to furnish the main rooms, along with bed frames that were only topped with mattresses made of wrack grass. The kitchen, with its shelves holding terracotta pots, its brick oven, and its wash stone, looked quite cozy, and Neb cooked with the seriousness of a chemist in his lab.
But joiners work had to give place to carpentry. The new weir created by the explosion rendered necessary the construction of two causeways, one upon Prospect Plateau, the other on the shore itself. Now the plateau and the coast were transversely cut by a water-course which the colonists had to cross when ever they wished to reach the northern part of the island. To avoid this they had to make a considerable detour, and to walk westward as far as the sources of Red creek. Their best plan therefore was to build two causeways, one on the plateau and one on the shore, twenty to twenty-five feet long, simply constructed of trees squared by the axe. This was the work of some days. When these bridges had been built, Neb and Pencroff profited by them to go to the oyster-bed which had been discovered off the down. They dragged after them a sort of rough cart which had taken the place of the inconvenient hurdle; and they brought back several thousand oysters, which, were readily acclimated among the rocks, and formed a natural preserve at the mouth of the Mercy. They were excellent of their kind, and formed an almost daily article of diet. In fact, Lincoln Island, though the colonists had explored but a small portion of it, already supplied nearly all their wants, while it seemed likely that a minute exploration of the western forests would reveal a world of new treasures.
But carpentry had to take over from joinery. The new dam created by the explosion made it necessary to build two walkways, one on Prospect Plateau and the other right on the shore. Now, the plateau and the coast were crossed by a waterway that the colonists had to navigate whenever they wanted to access the northern part of the island. To avoid this, they had to take a significant detour and walk westward all the way to the sources of Red Creek. Their best plan was to build two walkways, one on the plateau and one on the shore, each twenty to twenty-five feet long, simply made out of squared logs. This took several days to complete. Once these bridges were done, Neb and Pencroff used them to head to the oyster bed that had been found off the down. They pulled along a makeshift cart that had replaced the awkward hurdle and returned with several thousand oysters, which thrived among the rocks and formed a natural reserve at the mouth of the Mercy. They were top-quality oysters and became a staple in their diet. In fact, Lincoln Island, although the colonists had only explored a small area of it, already met most of their needs, and it seemed that a thorough exploration of the western forests would unveil a wealth of new resources.
Only one privation still distressed the colonists. Azotic food they had in plenty, and the vegetables which corrected it; from the ligneous roots of the dragon-trees, submitted to fermentation, they obtained a sort of acidulated beer. They had even made sugar, without sugar-cane or beet-root, by collecting the juice which distills from the “acer saccharinum,” a sort of maple which flourishes in all parts of the temperate zone, and which abounded on the island. They made a very pleasant tea from the plant brought from the warren; and, finally, they had plenty of salt, the only mineral component necessary to food—but bread was still to seek.
Only one shortage still troubled the colonists. They had plenty of nitrogen-rich food and the vegetables that balanced it out; from the woody roots of the dragon trees, fermented, they got a kind of tangy beer. They even produced sugar without sugarcane or beetroot by collecting the juice that drips from the “acer saccharinum,” a type of maple that grows in all temperate zones and was abundant on the island. They brewed a very nice tea from the plant brought from the warren; and, finally, they had plenty of salt, the only mineral needed in their diet—but they were still searching for bread.
Perhaps, at some future time, they would have been able to replace this aliment by some equivalent, sago flour, or the breadfruit tree, which they might possibly have discovered in the woods of the southwest; but so far they had not met with them. Just at this time a little incident occurred which brought about what Smith, with all his ingenuity, could not have achieved.
Perhaps, at some point in the future, they might have been able to substitute this food with something similar, like sago flour or the breadfruit tree, which they may have discovered in the woods of the southwest; but so far, they hadn't come across them. At that moment, a small incident happened that led to what Smith, despite all his cleverness, could not have accomplished.
One rainy day the colonists were together in the large hall of Granite House, when Herbert suddenly cried,
One rainy day, the colonists were all gathered in the big hall of Granite House when Herbert suddenly shouted,
“See, Mr. Smith, a grain of corn.”
“Look, Mr. Smith, a grain of corn.”
And he showed his companions a single gram which had got into the lining of his waistcoat through a hole in his pocket. Pencroff had given him some ring-doves in Richmond, and in feeding them one of the grains had remained in his pocket.
And he showed his friends a single grain that had gotten into the lining of his waistcoat through a hole in his pocket. Pencroff had given him some ring-doves in Richmond, and while he was feeding them, one of the grains had stayed in his pocket.
“A grain of corn?” said the engineer, quickly.
“A kernel of corn?” said the engineer, quickly.
“Yes, sir; but only one.”
"Yes, sir, but just one."
“That’s a wonderful help,” said Pencroff, laughing. “The bread that grain will make will never choke us.”
“That's a great help,” Pencroff said, laughing. “The bread made from that grain will never get stuck in our throats.”
Herbert was about to throw away the grain, when Cyrus Smith took it, examined it, found that it was in good condition, and said quietly to the sailor:—
Herbert was about to toss the grain out when Cyrus Smith grabbed it, looked it over, noticed it was in good shape, and said calmly to the sailor:—
“Pencroff, do you know how many ears of corn will spring from one grain?”
“Pencroff, do you know how many ears of corn will come from one kernel?”
“One, I suppose,” said the sailor, surprised at the question.
"One, I guess," said the sailor, taken aback by the question.
“Ten, Pencroff. And how many grains are there to an ear?”
“Ten, Pencroff. And how many grains are in an ear?”
“Faith, I don’t know.”
"Honestly, I don't know."
“Eighty on an average,” said Smith. “So then, if we plant this grain, we shall get from it a harvest of 800 grains; from them in the second year 640,000; in the third, 512,000,000; in the fourth, more than 400,000,000,000. That is the proportion.”
“Eighty on average,” said Smith. “So then, if we plant this grain, we’ll get a harvest of 800 grains; from them in the second year 640,000; in the third, 512,000,000; in the fourth, more than 400,000,000,000. That’s the proportion.”
His companions listened in silence. The figures stupefied them.
His friends listened quietly. The numbers overwhelmed them.
“Yes, my friend,” resumed the engineer. “Such is the increase of Nature. And what is even this multiplication of a grain of corn whose ears have only 800 grains, compared with the poppy plant, which has 32,000 seeds, or the tobacco plant, which has 360,000? In a few years, but for the numerous enemies which destroy them, these plants would cover the earth. And now, Pencroff,” he resumed, “do you know how many bushels there are in 400,000,000,000 grains?”
“Yeah, my friend,” the engineer continued. “That’s how Nature expands. And what’s the multiplication of a grain of corn that has only 800 grains compared to the poppy plant, which has 32,000 seeds, or the tobacco plant, which has 360,000? In just a few years, if it weren’t for the many enemies that destroy them, these plants would take over the planet. And now, Pencroff,” he continued, “do you know how many bushels are in 400,000,000,000 grains?”
“No,” answered the sailor, “I only know that I am an idiot!”
“No,” replied the sailor, “I just know that I’m an idiot!”
“Well, there will be more than 3,000,000, at 130,000 the bushel!”
“Well, there will be more than 3,000,000, at 130,000 per bushel!”
“Three millions!” cried Pencroff.
"Three million!" cried Pencroff.
“Three millions.”
"Three million."
“In four years?”
“In four years?”
“Yes,” said Smith, “and even in two, if, as I hope, we can get two harvests a year in this latitude.”
“Yes,” Smith said, “and even in two, if, as I hope, we can get two harvests a year in this region.”
Pencroff answered with a tremendous hurrah.
Pencroff replied with a huge cheer.
“So, Herbert,” added the engineer, “your discovery is of immense importance. Remember, my friends, that everything may be of use to us in our present situation.”
“So, Herbert,” the engineer added, “your discovery is incredibly important. Remember, everyone, that everything could be useful to us right now.”
“Indeed, Mr. Smith, I will remember it,” said Pencroff, “and if ever I find one of those grains of tobacco which increase 360,000 times, I’ll take care not to throw it away. And now what must we do?”
“Of course, Mr. Smith, I’ll remember that,” said Pencroff, “and if I ever come across one of those tobacco seeds that multiply 360,000 times, I’ll make sure not to toss it away. So, what should we do next?”
“We must plant this grain,” said Herbert.
“We need to plant this grain,” said Herbert.
“Yes,” added Spilett, “and with the greatest care, for upon it depend our future harvests!”
“Yes,” added Spilett, “and with the utmost care, because our future harvests depend on it!”
“Provided that it grows,” said the sailor.
“Provided that it grows,” said the sailor.
“It will grow,” answered Smith.
“It'll grow,” answered Smith.
It was now the 20th of June, a good time for planting the precious grain. They thought at first of planting it in a pot; but upon consideration, they determined to trust it frankly to the soil. The same day it was planted, with the greatest precaution. The weather clearing a little, they walked up to the plateau above Granite House, and chose there a spot well sheltered from the wind, and exposed to the midday fervor of the sun. This spot was cleared, weeded, and even dug, so as to destroy insects and worms; it was covered with a layer of fresh earth, enriched with a little lime; a palissade was built around it, and then the grain was covered up in its moist bed.
It was now June 20th, a great time for planting the valuable grain. They initially considered planting it in a pot, but after thinking it over, they decided to trust it completely to the soil. On the same day, with the utmost care, they planted it. As the weather cleared slightly, they went up to the plateau above Granite House and chose a spot that was well protected from the wind and sunlit during the hottest part of the day. This area was cleared, weeded, and even tilled to eliminate insects and worms; it was then covered with a layer of fresh soil enriched with a bit of lime. They built a fence around it, and finally, the grain was planted in its moist bed.
They seemed to be laying the corner-stone of an edifice. Pencroff was reminded of the extreme care with which they had lighted their only match; but this was a more serious matter. The castaways could always have succeeded in obtaining fire by some means or other; but no earthly power could restore that grain of corn, if, by ill fortune, it should perish!
They looked like they were laying the foundation for a building. Pencroff remembered how carefully they had lit their only match, but this was a much bigger deal. The castaways could always find a way to make fire, but nothing in the world could bring back that grain of corn if, by bad luck, it were to be lost!
CHAPTER XXI
SEVERAL DEGREES BELOW ZERO—EXPLORATION OF THE SWAMP REGION TO THE SOUTHEAST—THE VIEW OF THE SEA—A CONVERSATION CONCERNING THE FUTURE OF THE PACIFIC OCEAN—THE INCESSANT LABOR OF THE INFUSORIA—WHAT WILL BECOME OF THIS GLOBE—THE CHASE—THE SWAMP OF THE TADORNS.
SEVERAL DEGREES BELOW ZERO—EXPLORATION OF THE SWAMP REGION TO THE SOUTHEAST—THE VIEW OF THE SEA—A CONVERSATION ABOUT THE FUTURE OF THE PACIFIC OCEAN—THE CONSTANT WORK OF THE INFUSORIA—WHAT WILL HAPPEN TO THIS PLANET—THE HUNT—THE SWAMP OF THE TADORNS.
From this moment Pencroff did not let a day pass without visiting what he called with perfect gravity, his “corn field.” And alas, for any insects that ventured there, no mercy would be shown them. Near the end of the month of June, after the interminable rains, the weather became decidedly cold, and on the 29th, a Fahrenheit thermometer would certainly have stood at only 20° above zero.
From this moment on, Pencroff didn’t let a day go by without checking on what he gravely referred to as his “corn field.” And unfortunately for any insects that dared to enter, no mercy was given. Toward the end of June, after the endless rains, the weather turned quite cold, and on the 29th, a Fahrenheit thermometer would definitely have read only 20° above zero.
The next day, the 30th of June, the day which corresponds to the 3lst of December in the Northern Hemisphere, was a Friday. Neb said the year ended on an unlucky day, but Pencroff answered that consequently the new year began on a lucky one, which was more important. At all events, it began with a very cold snap. Ice accumulated at the mouth of the Mercy, and the whole surface of the lake was soon frozen over.
The next day, June 30th, which is equivalent to December 31st in the Northern Hemisphere, was a Friday. Neb complained that the year ended on an unlucky day, but Pencroff pointed out that this meant the new year started on a lucky day, which was more significant. In any case, it kicked off with a serious cold snap. Ice built up at the mouth of the Mercy, and soon the entire surface of the lake was frozen solid.
Fresh firewood had continually to be procured. Pencroff had not waited for the river to freeze to convey enormous loads of wood to their destination. The current was a tireless motor, and conveyed the floating wood until the ice froze around it. To the fuel, which the forest so plentifully furnished, were added several cartloads of coal, which they found at the foot of the spurs of Mount Franklin. The powerful heat from the coal was thoroughly appreciated in a temperature which on the 4th of July fell to eight degrees above zero. A second chimney had been set up in the dining-room, where they all worked together. During this cold spell Cyrus Smith could not be thankful enough that he had conducted to Granite House a small stream of water from Lake Grant. Taken below the frozen surface, then conducted through the old weir, it arrived unfrozen at the interior reservoir, which had been dug at the angle of the storehouse, and which, when too full, emptied itself into the sea. About this time the weather being very dry, the colonists, dressing as warmly as possible, determined to devote a day to the exploration of that part of the island situated to the southeast, between the Mercy and Claw Cape. It was a large swampy district and might offer good hunting, as aquatic birds must abound there. They would have eight or nine miles to go and as far to return, consequently the whole day must be given up. As it concerned the exploration of an unknown portion of the island, every one had to take part.
Fresh firewood had to be constantly gathered. Pencroff didn’t wait for the river to freeze before hauling huge loads of wood to their destination. The current acted like a reliable conveyor, moving the floating wood until the ice formed around it. In addition to the fuel that the forest provided in abundance, they also brought in several cartloads of coal they found at the foot of Mount Franklin. The intense heat from the coal was highly valued, especially when the temperature dropped to eight degrees above zero on July 4th. A second chimney had been installed in the dining area, where they all worked together. During this cold snap, Cyrus Smith was particularly grateful that he had directed a small stream of water from Lake Grant to Granite House. Taken from beneath the frozen surface and redirected through the old weir, it reached the interior reservoir—dug at the angle of the storehouse—without freezing, and when it was too full, it would drain into the sea. Around this time, with the weather being very dry, the colonists dressed as warmly as possible and decided to spend a day exploring the southeastern part of the island, between Mercy and Claw Cape. It was a large swampy area and likely good for hunting, as it should be full of waterfowl. They would have to travel eight or nine miles there and back, so the entire day was set aside for this. Since it involved exploring an unknown part of the island, everyone had to participate.
Therefore, on the 5th of July, at 6 o’clock in the morning, before the sun had fairly risen, the whole party, armed with spears, snares, bows and arrows, and furnished with enough provisions for the day, started from Granite House, preceded by Top, who gambolled before them. They took the shortest route, which was to cross the Mercy on the blocks of ice which then obstructed it.
Therefore, on July 5th, at 6 AM, before the sun had fully risen, the whole group, armed with spears, traps, bows and arrows, and stocked with enough supplies for the day, set out from Granite House, led by Top, who frolicked in front of them. They took the quickest path, which involved crossing the Mercy on the ice blocks that were blocking it at the time.
“But,” as the reporter very truly observed, “this cannot supply the place of a real bridge.”
“But,” as the reporter accurately noted, “this can’t replace a real bridge.”
So the construction of a “real” bridge was set down as work for the future. This was the first time that the colonists had set foot on the right bank of the Mercy and had plunged into the forest of large and magnificent firs, then covered with snow. But they had not gone half a mile when the barking of Top frightened from a dense thicket where they had taken up their abode, a whole family of quadrupeds.
So the building of a “real” bridge was put on hold for the future. This was the first time the colonists had walked onto the right bank of the Mercy and ventured into the forest of tall and beautiful firs, which were still covered in snow. But they hadn’t gone half a mile when Top's barking startled a whole family of animals from a dense thicket where they had made their home.
“Why they look like foxes,” said Herbert, when he saw them scampering quickly away.
“Why do they look like foxes?” said Herbert when he saw them running away quickly.
And they were foxes, but foxes of enormous size. They made a sort of bark which seemed to astonish Top, for he stopped in his chase and gave these swift animals time to escape. The dog had a right to be surprised, for he knew nothing of natural history; but by this barking, the greyish-red color of their hair, and their black tails, which ended in a white tuft, these foxes had betrayed their origin. So Herbert gave them without hesitation their true name of culpeux. These culpeux are often met with in Chili, in the Saint Malo group, and in all those parts of America lying between the 30th and 40th parallels.
And they were foxes, but foxes of huge size. They made a sort of bark that seemed to astonish Top, causing him to stop his chase and give these fast animals time to escape. The dog had a reason to be surprised, as he knew nothing about natural history; but from their barking, the grayish-red color of their fur, and their black tails with white tips, these foxes revealed their identity. So Herbert quickly referred to them by their real name, culpeux. These culpeux are often found in Chile, in the Saint Malo group, and in all those areas of America located between the 30th and 40th parallels.
Herbert was very sorry that Top had not caught one of these carnivora.
Herbert was really disappointed that Top hadn’t caught one of these carnivores.
“Can we eat them?” asked Pencroff, who always considered the fauna of the island from that special point of view.
“Can we eat them?” asked Pencroff, who always looked at the island's wildlife from that particular perspective.
“No,” said Herbert, “but zoologists have not yet ascertained whether the pupil of the eye of this fox is diurnal or nocturnal, or whether the animal would come under the genus “canine.”
“No,” said Herbert, “but zoologists haven’t figured out yet if this fox’s pupil is for daytime or nighttime, or if the animal falls into the ‘canine’ category.”
Smith could not help smiling at this remark of the boy, which showed thoughtfulness beyond his years. As for the sailor, from the moment these foxes ceased to belong to the edible species, they ceased to interest him. Ever since the kitchen had been established at Granite House he had been saying that precautions ought to be taken against these four-footed plunderers. A fact which no one denied.
Smith couldn't help but smile at the boy's comment, which showed wisdom beyond his years. As for the sailor, once these foxes stopped being considered food, they no longer interested him. Ever since the kitchen was set up at Granite House, he had been saying that precautions should be taken against these four-legged thieves. A fact that no one disagreed with.
Having turned Jetsam Point the party came upon a long reach washed by the sea. It was then 8 o’clock in the morning. The sky was very clear, as is usual in prolonged cold weather; but, warmed by their work, Smith and his companions did not suffer from the sharpness of the atmosphere. Besides, there was no wind, the absence of which always renders a low temperature more endurable. The sun, bright but cold, rose from the ocean, and his enormous disc was poised in the horizon. The sea was a calm, blue sheet of water, like a land-locked sea under a clear sky. Claw Cape, bent in the shape of an ataghan, was clearly defined about four miles to the southeast. To the left, the border of the swamp was abruptly intercepted by a little point which shone brightly against the sun. Certainly in that part of Union Bay, which was not protected from the open sea, even by a sand bank, ships beaten by an east wind could not have found shelter.
Having rounded Jetsam Point, the group came upon a long stretch of shoreline washed by the sea. It was then 8 o’clock in the morning. The sky was very clear, which is typical in extended cold weather; however, warmed by their efforts, Smith and his companions didn't feel the sharpness of the chill in the air. Plus, there was no wind, which always makes lower temperatures more bearable. The sun, bright but chilly, rose from the ocean, its massive disc resting on the horizon. The sea was a calm, blue expanse, resembling an inland sea beneath a clear sky. Claw Cape, shaped like a curved sword, was distinctly visible about four miles to the southeast. To the left, the edge of the swamp was suddenly interrupted by a small point that gleamed brightly in the sunlight. In that part of Union Bay, which wasn’t shielded from the open sea, even by a sandbank, ships caught by an east wind wouldn't have been able to find shelter.
By the perfect calm of the sea, with no shoals to disturb its waters, by its uniform color, with no tinge of yellow, and, finally, by the entire absence of reefs, they knew that this side was steep, and that here the ocean was fathoms deep. Behind them, in the west, at a distance of about four miles, they saw the beginning of the Forests of the Far West. They could almost have believed themselves upon some desolate island in the Antarctic regions surrounded by ice.
By the perfectly calm sea, with no shoals to disturb its waters, by its uniform color with no hint of yellow, and, ultimately, by the complete absence of reefs, they realized that this side was steep and that the ocean was extremely deep here. Behind them, to the west, about four miles away, they saw the start of the Forests of the Far West. They could almost imagine they were on a deserted island in the Antarctic, surrounded by ice.
The party halted here for breakfast; a fire of brushwood and seaweed was lighted, and Neb prepared the meal of cold meat, to which he added some cups of Oswego tea. While eating they looked around them. This side of Lincoln island was indeed barren, and presented a strong contrast to the western part.
The group stopped here for breakfast; they lit a fire made of brushwood and seaweed, and Neb prepared a meal of cold meat, adding some cups of Oswego tea. While they ate, they looked around. This side of Lincoln Island was really barren, creating a sharp contrast to the western part.
The reporter thought that if the castaways had been thrown upon this coast, they would have had a very melancholy impression of their future home.
The reporter believed that if the castaways had ended up on this coast, they would have had a very sad outlook on their new home.
“I do not believe we could even have reached it,” said the engineer, “for the sea is very deep here, and there is not even a rock which would have served as a refuge; before Granite House there were shoals, at least, and a little island which multiplied our chances of safety; here is only the bottomless sea.”
“I don’t think we could have even gotten there,” said the engineer, “because the sea is really deep here, and there isn’t even a rock that could have provided refuge; before Granite House, there were shallows, at least, and a small island that increased our chances of safety; here, there’s just the endless sea.”
“It is curious enough,” said Spilett, “that this island, relatively so small, presents so varied a soil. This diversity of appearance belongs, logically, only to continents of a considerable area. One would really think that the western side of Lincoln Island, so rich and fertile, was washed by the warm waters of the Gulf of Mexico, and that the northern and southern coasts extended into a sort of Arctic Sea.”
“It’s pretty interesting,” said Spilett, “that this island, which is relatively small, has such a diverse range of soil. This kind of variety usually only belongs to larger continents. You’d almost think that the western side of Lincoln Island, which is so rich and fertile, was touched by the warm waters of the Gulf of Mexico, and that the northern and southern coasts were leading into some kind of Arctic Sea.”
“You are right, my dear Spilett,” replied the engineer, “I have observed the same thing. I have found this island curious both in its shape and in its character. It has all the peculiarities of a continent, and I would not be surprised if it had been a continent formerly.”
“You're right, my dear Spilett,” replied the engineer, “I’ve noticed the same thing. I find this island fascinating in both its shape and its nature. It has all the characteristics of a continent, and I wouldn't be surprised if it used to be one.”
“What! a continent in the middle of the Pacific!” cried Pencroff.
“What! A continent in the middle of the Pacific?” exclaimed Pencroff.
“Why not?” answered Smith. “Why should not Australia, New Ireland, all that the English geographers call Australasia, joined to the Archipelagoes of the Pacific Ocean, have formed in times past a sixth part of the world as important as Europe or Asia, Africa or the two Americas. My mind does not refuse to admit that all the islands rising from this vast ocean are the mountains of a continent now engulphed, but which formerly rose majestically from these waters.”
“Why not?” Smith replied. “Why can’t Australia, New Ireland, and everything that English geographers refer to as Australasia, along with the Pacific Islands, have once formed a sixth part of the world as significant as Europe, Asia, Africa, or the two Americas? I can accept that all the islands emerging from this vast ocean are the remnants of a continent that is now submerged, but once stood proudly above these waters.”
“Like Atlantis?” asked Herbert. “Yes. my boy, if that ever existed.” “And Lincoln Island may have been a part of this continent?” asked Pencroff. “It is probable,” replied Smith. “And that would explain the diversity of products upon the surface, and the number of animals which still live here,” added Herbert.
“Like Atlantis?” asked Herbert. “Yes, my boy, if it ever existed.” “And Lincoln Island might have been part of this continent?” asked Pencroff. “That’s likely,” replied Smith. “And that would explain the variety of products on the surface and the number of animals that still live here,” added Herbert.
“Yes, my boy,” answered the engineer, “and that gives me a new argument in support of my theory. It is certain after what we have seen that the animals in the island are numerous, and what is more curious, is that the species are extremely varied. There must be a reason for this, and mine is, that Lincoln Island was formerly a part of some vast continent, which has, little by little, sunk beneath the surface of the Pacific.” “Then,” said Pencroff, who did not seem entirely convinced, “what remains of this old continent may disappear in its turn and leave nothing between America and Asia.” “Yes,” said Smith, “there will be new continents which millions upon millions of animalculæ are building at this moment.” “And who are these masons?” inquired Pencroff. “The coral insects,” answered Smith. “It is these who have built by their constant labor the Island of Clermont Tonnerre, the Atolls and many other coral islands which abound in the Pacific. It takes 47,000,000 of these insects to deposit one particle; and yet with the marine salt which they absorb, and the solid elements of the water which they assimilate, these animalculæ produce limestone, and limestone forms those enormous submarine structures whose hardness and solidity is equal to that of granite.
“Yes, my boy,” replied the engineer, “and that gives me a new argument for my theory. It’s clear from what we’ve seen that the animals on the island are plentiful, and even more interesting is the fact that the species are incredibly diverse. There must be a reason for this, and my hypothesis is that Lincoln Island was once part of a vast continent that has gradually sunk beneath the surface of the Pacific.” “Then,” said Pencroff, who didn’t seem entirely convinced, “what’s left of this old continent might sink too and leave nothing between America and Asia.” “Yes,” Smith said, “new continents are being created by millions upon millions of tiny organisms right now.” “And who are these builders?” asked Pencroff. “The coral insects,” Smith replied. “These are the ones who have constructed the Island of Clermont Tonnerre, the Atolls, and many other coral islands that are plentiful in the Pacific. It takes 47,000,000 of these insects to deposit just one particle; yet with the marine salt they absorb and the solid elements of the water they utilize, these tiny organisms produce limestone, and limestone creates those massive underwater structures with a hardness and solidity equal to granite.”
Formerly, during the first epochs of creation, Nature employed heat to produce land by upheaval, but now she lets these microscopic insects replace this agent, whose dynamic power at the interior of this globe has evidently diminished. This fact is sufficiently proved by the great number of volcanoes actually extinct on the surface of the earth. I verily believe that century after century, and infusoria after infusoria will change the Pacific some day into a vast continent, which new generations will, in their turn, inhabit and civilize.”
Previously, in the early stages of creation, Nature used heat to form land through upheaval, but now she allows these tiny insects to take over this role, as the dynamic power within the Earth has clearly decreased. This is clearly shown by the many volcanoes that are now extinct on the surface of the planet. I truly believe that over the centuries, and with each tiny organism, the Pacific Ocean will eventually become a huge continent that future generations will inhabit and develop.
“It will take a long time,” said Pencroff. “Nature has time on her side,” replied the engineer. “But what is the good of new continents?” asked Herbert. “It seems to me that the present extent of habitable countries is enough for mankind. Now Nature does nothing in vain.” “Nothing in vain, indeed,” replied the engineer; “but let us see how we can explain the necessity of new continents in the future, and precisely in these tropical regions occupied by these coral islands. Here is an explanation, which seems to me at least plausible.”
“It'll take a long time,” said Pencroff. “Nature has time on her side,” replied the engineer. “But what's the point of new continents?” asked Herbert. “It seems to me that the current amount of habitable land is enough for humanity. Nature doesn't do anything for no reason.” “Nothing for no reason, for sure,” replied the engineer; “but let's see how we can justify the need for new continents in the future, especially in these tropical areas taken up by these coral islands. Here’s an explanation that seems at least reasonable to me.”
“We are listening, Mr. Smith,” replied Herbert.
“We're listening, Mr. Smith,” replied Herbert.
“This is my idea: Scientists generally admit that some day the globe must come to an end, or rather the animal and vegetable life will be no longer possible, on account of the intense cold which will prevail. What they cannot agree upon is the cause of this cold. Some think that it will be produced by the cooling of the sun in the course of millions of years; others by the gradual extinction of the internal fires of our own globe, which have a more decided influence than is generally supposed. I hold to this last hypothesis, based upon the fact that the moon is without doubt a refrigerated planet, which is no longer habitable, although the sun continues to pour upon its surface the same amount of heat. If then, the moon is refrigerated, it is because these internal fires, to which like all the stellar world it owes its origin, are entirely extinct. In short, whatever be the cause, our world will certainly some day cool; but this cooling will take place gradually. What will happen then? Why, the temperate zones, at a time more or less distant, will be no more habitable than are the Polar regions now. Then human, as well as animal life, will be driven to latitudes more directly under the influence of the solar rays. An immense emigration will take place. Europe, Central Asia, and North America will little by little be abandoned, as well as Australasia and the lower parts of South America. Vegetation will follow the human emigration. The flora will move towards the equator at the same time with the fauna, the central parts of South America and Africa will become the inhabited continent. The Laplanders and the Samoyedes will find the climate of the Polar Sea on the banks of the Mediterranean. Who can tell but that at this epoch, the equatorial regions will not be too small to contain and nourish the population of the globe. Now, why should not a provident nature, in order from this time, to provide a refuge for this animal and vegetable emigration, lay the foundation, under the equator, of a new continent, and charge these infusoria with the building of it? I have often thought of this, my friends, and I seriously believe that, some day, the aspect of our globe will be completely transformed, that after the upheaval of new continents the seas will cover the old ones, and that in future ages some Columbus will discover in the islands of Chimborazo or the Himalaya, or Mount Blanc, all that remains of an America, an Asia, and a Europe. Then at last, these new continents, in their turn, will become uninhabitable. The heat will die out as does the heat from a body whose soul has departed, and life will disappear from the globe, if not forever, at least for a time. Perhaps then our sphere will rest from its changes, and will prepare in death to live again under nobler conditions.
“This is my idea: Scientists generally agree that one day the Earth will come to an end, or rather, animal and plant life will no longer be possible due to the extreme cold that will prevail. What they can't agree on is the cause of this cold. Some believe it will come from the sun cooling over millions of years; others think it’s due to the gradual dying out of the internal fires of our planet, which have a bigger influence than most people realize. I lean towards the second idea, based on the fact that the moon is definitely a cold planet that is no longer habitable, even though the sun still shines the same amount of heat on it. If the moon is cold, it’s because those internal fires, which gave rise to it like they did for all celestial bodies, are completely extinguished. In short, regardless of the cause, our world will eventually cool down; but this process will happen gradually. What will happen then? Well, the temperate zones, at some point in the future, will be just as uninhabitable as the Polar regions are now. Human and animal life will then be forced to move to areas more directly warmed by the sun. There will be a massive migration. Europe, Central Asia, and North America will slowly be abandoned, along with Australia and the lower parts of South America. Plants will follow this human migration. The flora will shift toward the equator along with the fauna, and the central parts of South America and Africa will become the inhabited continents. The Laplanders and the Samoyeds will face a Polar Sea climate on the shores of the Mediterranean. Who knows, perhaps by then, the equatorial regions will be too small to sustain the whole world’s population. Now, why shouldn’t a careful nature, starting now, set up a refuge for this movement of animal and plant life by establishing a new continent under the equator and assigning these microorganisms to create it? I have often thought about this, my friends, and I genuinely believe that one day, the appearance of our planet will be completely changed, that after the rise of new continents, the seas will cover the old ones, and in future ages, some Columbus will discover in the islands of Chimborazo or the Himalayas or Mont Blanc, all that remains of an America, an Asia, and a Europe. Eventually, these new continents will also become uninhabitable. The heat will fade away like the warmth from a body when its soul has departed, and life will vanish from the Earth, if not forever, at least for a time. Perhaps then our planet will rest from its changes and prepare, in death, to live again under better conditions.”
“But all this my friends, is with the Creator of all things. From the talking of the work of these infusoria I have been led into too deep a scrutiny of the secrets of the future.”
“But all this, my friends, is with the Creator of everything. From discussing the work of these tiny organisms, I have delved too deeply into the mysteries of the future.”
“My dear Cyrus,” said the reporter, “these theories are to me prophesies. Some day they will be accomplished.”
“My dear Cyrus,” said the reporter, “these theories feel like prophecies to me. One day, they will come true.”
“It is a secret with the Almighty,” replied Smith.
“It’s a secret with God,” replied Smith.
“All this is well and good,” said Pencroff, who had listened with all his ears, “but will you tell me, Mr. Smith, if Lincoln Island has been constructed by these infusoria.”
“All this is nice and all,” said Pencroff, who had listened intently, “but can you tell me, Mr. Smith, if these infusoria created Lincoln Island?”
“No,” replied Smith, “it is of purely volcanic origin.”
“No,” Smith replied, “it’s purely of volcanic origin.”
“Then it will probably disappear some day. I hope sincerely we won’t be here.”
“Then it will probably disappear someday. I sincerely hope we won’t be here.”
“No, be easy, Pencroff, we will get away.”
“No, calm down, Pencroff, we’ll get out of this.”
“In the meantime,” said Spilett, “let us settle ourselves as if forever. It is never worth while to do anything by halves.”
“In the meantime,” Spilett said, “let’s settle in as if it’s for good. It’s never worth doing anything halfway.”
This ended the conversation. Breakfast was over, the exploration continued, and the party soon arrived at the beginning of the swampy district.
This ended the conversation. Breakfast was over, the exploration continued, and the group soon arrived at the start of the swampy area.
It was, indeed, a marsh which extended as far as the rounded side forming the southeastern termination of the island, and measuring twenty square miles. The soil was formed of a silicious clay mixed with decayed vegetation. It was covered by confervæ, rushes, sedges, and here and there by beds of herbage, thick as a velvet carpet. In many places frozen pools glistened under the sun’s rays. Neither rains, nor any river swollen by a sudden increase could have produced this water. One would naturally conclude that this swamp was fed by the infiltration of water through the soil. And this was the fact. It was even to be feared that the air here during hot weather, was laden with that miasma which engenders the marsh fever. Above the aquatic herbs on the surface of the stagnant waters, a swarm of birds were flying. A hunter would not have lost a single shot. Wild ducks, teal, and snipe lived there in flocks, and it was easy to approach these fearless creatures. So thick were these birds that a charge of shot would certainly have brought down a dozen of them, but our friends had to content themselves with their bows and arrows. The slaughter was less, but the quiet arrow had the advantage of not frightening the birds, while the sound of fire-arms would have scattered them to every corner of the swamp. The hunters contented themselves this time with a dozen ducks, with white bodies, cinnamon-colored belts, green heads, wings black, white, and red, and feathered beaks. These Herbert recognized as the “Tadorns.” Top did his share well in the capture of these birds, whose name was given this swampy district.
It was, indeed, a marsh that stretched all the way to the rounded side marking the southeastern end of the island, covering twenty square miles. The soil consisted of silty clay mixed with decayed plants. It was blanketed with green algae, rushes, sedges, and here and there with patches of grass, thick like a velvet carpet. In many spots, frozen pools sparkled under the sunlight. Neither the rain nor any river swollen by sudden rainfall could have created this water. One would naturally assume that this swamp was sustained by water seeping through the soil. And that was true. It was even worrisome that the air here during hot weather was filled with the kind of miasma that causes swamp fever. Over the water plants on the still surface, a swarm of birds was flying. A hunter wouldn’t have missed a single shot. Wild ducks, teal, and snipe lived in flocks there, and it was easy to get close to these fearless creatures. There were so many of these birds that a shot would definitely have taken down a dozen of them, but our friends had to make do with their bows and arrows. The kill was fewer, but the silent arrow had the advantage of not scaring the birds away, while the sound of firearms would have sent them scattering in all directions across the swamp. This time, the hunters were satisfied with a dozen ducks, with white bodies, cinnamon-colored stripes, green heads, and wings that were black, white, and red, with feathered beaks. Herbert identified these as “Tadorns.” Top did his part well in capturing these birds, whose name inspired this swampy area.
The colonists now had an abundant reserve of aquatic game. When the time should come the only question would be how to make a proper use of them, and it was probable that several species of these birds would be, if not domesticated, at least acclimated, upon the borders of the lake, which would bring them nearer to the place of consumption.
The colonists now had plenty of freshwater game. When the time came, the only question would be how to make the best use of them, and it was likely that several species of these birds would be, if not domesticated, at least adapted to the area near the lake, bringing them closer to where they would be eaten.
About 5 o’clock in the afternoon Smith and his companions turned their faces homewards. They crossed Tadorn’s Fens, and re-crossed the Mercy upon the ice, arriving at Granite House at 8 o’clock in the evening.
About 5 o’clock in the afternoon, Smith and his friends headed back home. They crossed Tadorn’s Fens and went over the Mercy again on the ice, arriving at Granite House at 8 o’clock in the evening.
CHAPTER XXII.
THE TRAPS—THE FOXES—THE PECCARIES —THE WIND VEERS TO THE NORTHWEST —THE SNOW-STORM—THE BASKET-MAKERS —THE COLDEST SNAP OF WINTER —CRYSTALLIZATION OF THE SUGAR-MAPLE —THE MYSTERIOUS SHAFTS—THE PROJECTED EXPLORATION—THE PELLET OF LEAD.
THE TRAPS—THE FOXES—THE PECCARIES —THE WIND TURNS TO THE NORTHWEST —THE SNOWSTORM—THE BASKET-MAKERS —THE COLDEST PART OF WINTER —CRYSTALLIZATION OF THE SUGAR MAPLE —THE MYSTERIOUS SHAFTS—THE PLANNED EXPLORATION—THE LEAD PELLET.
The intense cold lasted until the 15th of August, the thermometer never rising above the point hitherto observed. When the atmosphere was calm this low temperature could be easily borne; but when the wind blew, the poor fellows suffered much for want of warmer clothing. Pencroff regretted that Lincoln Island, instead of harboring so many foxes and seals, with no fur to speak of, did not shelter some families of bears.
The extreme cold lasted until August 15th, with the thermometer never rising above previous levels. When the weather was calm, people could handle the low temperatures, but when the wind picked up, they really struggled due to a lack of warmer clothing. Pencroff wished that Lincoln Island, instead of being home to so many foxes and seals with hardly any fur, had some bear families instead.
“Bears,” said he, “are generally well dressed; and I would ask nothing better for the winter than the loan of their warm cloaks.”.
“Bears,” he said, “are usually well-dressed; and I couldn’t ask for anything better for the winter than to borrow their warm coats.”
“But perhaps,” said Neb, laughing “These bears would not consent to give you their cloak. Pencroff, these fellows are no Saint Martins.”
“But maybe,” said Neb, laughing, “these bears wouldn’t agree to give you their cloak. Pencroff, these guys are no Saint Martins.”
“We would make them, Neb, we would make them,” answered Pencroff in a tone of authority.
“We would make them, Neb, we would make them,” replied Pencroff confidently.
But these formidable carnivora did not dwell on the island, or if they did, had not yet shown themselves. Herbert, Pencroff, and the reporter were constantly at work getting traps on Prospect Plateau and on the borders of the forest. In the sailor’s opinion any animal whatever would be a prize, and rodents or carnivora, whichever these new traps should entice, would be well received at Granite House. These traps were very simple. They were pits dug in the ground and covered with branches and grass, which hid the openings. At the bottom they placed some bait, whose odor would attract the animals. They used their discretion about the position of their traps, choosing places where numerous footprints indicated the frequent passage of quadrupeds. Every day they went to look at them, and at three different times during the first few days they found in them specimens of those foxes which had been already seen on the right bank of the Mercy.
But these fearsome carnivores didn't live on the island, or if they did, they hadn't revealed themselves yet. Herbert, Pencroff, and the reporter worked tirelessly setting traps on Prospect Plateau and at the edges of the forest. In the sailor’s view, any animal would be a catch, and whether they caught rodents or carnivores with their new traps, they would be welcomed at Granite House. The traps were quite simple. They were pits dug into the ground and covered with branches and grass to conceal the openings. At the bottom, they placed some bait that would attract the animals with its smell. They carefully selected where to place their traps, picking spots where numerous footprints indicated the frequent movement of animals. Every day, they checked the traps, and during the first few days, they found specimens of those foxes they had previously seen on the right bank of the Mercy on three different occasions.
“Pshaw! there are nothing but foxes in this part of the world,” said Pencroff, as, for the third time, he drew one of these animals out of the pit. “Good-for-nothing beasts;”
“Pshaw! there are nothing but foxes around here,” said Pencroff, as he pulled one of these animals out of the pit for the third time. “Good-for-nothing creatures;”
“Stop,” said Spilett; “they are good for something.”
“Stop,” said Spilett; “they're helpful.”
“For what?”
"Why?"
“To serve as bait to attract others!”
“To be used as bait to draw in more people!”
The reporter was right, and from this time the traps were baited with the dead bodies of foxes. The sailor had made snares out of the threads of curry-jonc, and these snares were more profitable than the traps. It was a rare thing for a day to pass without some rabbit from the warren being captured. It was always a rabbit, but Neb knew how to vary his sauces, and his companions did not complain. However, once or twice in the second week in August, the traps contained other and more useful animals than the foxes. There were some of those wild boars which had been already noticed at the north of the lake. Pencroff had no need to ask if these animals were edible, that was evident from their resemblance to the hog of America and Europe.
The reporter was right, and from that point on, the traps were baited with dead foxes. The sailor had made snares using curry-jonc threads, and these snares proved to be more effective than the traps. It was rare for a day to go by without catching a rabbit from the warren. It was always a rabbit, but Neb knew how to mix up his sauces, and his friends didn’t complain. However, once or twice in the second week of August, the traps held other more useful animals aside from the foxes. There were some of those wild boars that had already been spotted north of the lake. Pencroff didn’t need to ask if these animals were edible; it was clear from their resemblance to the hogs of America and Europe.
“But these are not hogs, let me tell you,” said Herbert.
“But these aren’t pigs, trust me,” said Herbert.
“My boy,” replied the sailor, handing over the trap and drawing out one of these representatives of the swine family by the little appendage which served for a tail, “do let me believe them to be hogs.”
“My boy,” replied the sailor, handing over the trap and pulling out one of these representatives of the pig family by the small appendage that served as a tail, “please let me think of them as hogs.”
“Why?”
"Why?"
“Because it pleases me.”
“Because it makes me happy.”
“You are fond of hogs, then, Pencroff?”
"Do you like pigs, Pencroff?"
“I am very fond of them,” replied the sailor, “especially of their feet, and if any had eight instead of four I would like them twice as much.”
“I really like them,” replied the sailor, “especially their feet, and if any had eight instead of four, I would like them even more.”
These animals were peccaries, belonging to one of the four genera, which make up that family. This particular species were the “tajassans,” known by there dark color and the absence of those long fangs which belong to the others of their race. Peccaries generally live in herds, and it was likely that these animals abounded in the woody parts of the island. At all events they were edible from head to foot, and Pencroff asked nothing more.
These animals were peccaries, part of one of the four genera that make up the family. This specific species was the "tajassans," recognized by their dark color and lack of the long fangs found in others of their kind. Peccaries usually live in groups, and it was likely that these animals were plentiful in the forested areas of the island. In any case, they were edible from head to toe, and Pencroff wanted nothing more.
About the 15th of August the weather moderated suddenly by a change of wind to the northwest. The temperature rose several degrees higher, and the vapors accumulated in the air were soon resolved into snow. The whole island was covered with a white mantle, and presented a new aspect to its inhabitants. It snowed hard for several days and the ground was covered two feet deep. The wind soon rose with great violence and from the top of Granite House they could hear the sea roaring against the reefs.
Around August 15th, the weather suddenly changed with a shift in the wind to the northwest. The temperature increased several degrees, and the moisture in the air quickly turned into snow. The entire island was blanketed in white, giving it a fresh look to its residents. It snowed heavily for several days, piling up two feet of snow on the ground. The wind soon picked up violently, and from the top of Granite House, they could hear the ocean crashing against the reefs.
At certain angles the wind made eddies in the air, and the snow, forming itself into high whirling columns, looked like those twisting waterspouts which vessels attack with cannon. The hurricane, coming steadily from the northwest, spent its force on the other side of the island, and the eastern lookout of Granite House preserved it from a direct attack.
At certain angles, the wind created swirling eddies in the air, and the snow, forming into tall, swirling columns, resembled the twisting waterspouts that ships try to fend off with cannons. The hurricane, blowing steadily from the northwest, lost its power on the other side of the island, while the eastern lookout of Granite House protected it from a direct hit.
During this snow-storm, as terrible as those of the polar regions, neither Smith nor his companions could venture outside. They were completely housed for five days, from the 20th to the 25th of August. They heard the tempest roar though Jacamar Woods, which must have suffered sadly. Doubtless numbers of trees were uprooted, but Pencroff comforted himself with the reflection that there would be fewer to cut down.
During this snowstorm, as bad as those in the polar regions, neither Smith nor his friends could go outside. They were stuck indoors for five days, from August 20th to 25th. They could hear the storm raging through Jacamar Woods, which must have taken a serious hit. Surely many trees were blown down, but Pencroff reassured himself by thinking that there would be fewer to chop down.
“The wind will be wood-cutter; let it alone,” said he.
“The wind will clear the way; just let it be,” he said.
How fervently now the inhabitants of Granite House must have thanked Heaven for having given to them this solid and impenetrable shelter! Smith had his share of their gratitude, but after all, it was nature which had hollowed out this enormous cave, and he had only discovered it. Here all were in safety, the violence of the tempest could not reach them. If they had built a house of brick and wood on Prospect Plateau, it could not have resisted the fury of this hurricane. As for the Chimneys, they heard the billows strike them with such violence that they knew they must be uninhabitable, for the sea, having entirely covered their islet, beat upon them with all its force.
How gratefully the people of Granite House must have thanked Heaven for providing them with such a solid and impenetrable shelter! Smith received some of their gratitude, but ultimately, it was nature that carved out this massive cave, and he merely discovered it. Here, everyone was safe; the storm's violence couldn't reach them. If they had built a house of bricks and wood on Prospect Plateau, it wouldn't have withstood the rage of this hurricane. As for the Chimneys, they heard the waves crashing against them so violently that they realized they must be unlivable, as the sea completely covered their islet and pounded on them with full force.
But here at Granite House, between these solid walls which neither wind nor water could effect, they had nothing to fear. During this confinement the colonists were not idle. There was plenty of wood in the storehouse cut into planks, and little by little they completed their stock of furniture. As far as tables and chairs went they were certainly solid enough, for the material was not spared. This furniture was a little too heavy to fulfil its essential purpose of being easily moved, but it was the pride of Neb and Pencroff, who would not have exchanged it for the handsomest Buhl.
But here at Granite House, between these solid walls that neither wind nor water could affect, they had nothing to worry about. During this time indoors, the colonists were busy. There was plenty of wood in the storehouse, cut into planks, and little by little they finished their furniture. The tables and chairs were definitely solid enough because they didn’t hold back on the materials. This furniture was a bit too heavy to be easily moved around, but it was the pride of Neb and Pencroff, who wouldn’t have traded it for the finest Buhl.
Then the carpenters turned basket-makers, and succeeded remarkably well at this new occupation.
Then the carpenters became basket-makers and did exceptionally well at this new job.
They had discovered at the northern part of the lake a thick growth of purple osiers. Before the rainy season, Pencroff and Herbert had gathered a good many of these useful shrubs; and their branches, being now well seasoned, could be used to advantage. Their first specimens were rough; but, thanks to the skill and intelligence of the workmen consulting together, recalling the models they had seen, and rivalling each other in their efforts, hampers and baskets of different sizes here soon added to the stock of the colony. The storehouse was filled with them, and Neb set away in special baskets his stock of pistachio nuts and roots of the dragon tree.
They had found a thick patch of purple willows at the northern part of the lake. Before the rainy season, Pencroff and Herbert had gathered a lot of these useful shrubs, and their branches were now well-seasoned and could be used effectively. Their first attempts were rough, but thanks to the skill and creativity of the workers collaborating, remembering the models they had seen, and pushing each other to do better, a variety of hampers and baskets soon increased the colony's supplies. The storehouse was filled with them, and Neb set aside his collection of pistachio nuts and dragon tree roots in special baskets.
During the last week in August the weather changed again, the temperature fell a little, and the storm was over. The colonists at once started out. There must have been at least two feet of snow on the shore, but it was frozen over the top, which made it easy to walk over. Smith and his companions climbed up Prospect Plateau. What a change they beheld! The woods which they had left in bloom, especially the part nearest to them where the conifers were plenty, were now one uniform color.
During the last week of August, the weather shifted again; the temperature dropped a bit, and the storm had passed. The colonists immediately set out. There must have been at least two feet of snow on the shore, but it was frozen on top, making it easy to walk over. Smith and his companions climbed up Prospect Plateau. What a change they saw! The woods they had left in bloom, especially the part closest to them where the conifers were abundant, were now all one uniform color.
Everything was white, from the top of Mount Franklin to the coast—forests, prairie, lake, river, beach. The waters of the Mercy ran under a vault of ice, which cracked and broke with a loud noise at every change of tide. Thousands of birds—ducks and wood-peckers—flew over the surface of the lake. The rocks between which the cascade plunged to the borders of the Plateau were blocked up with ice. One would have said that the water leaped out of a huge gargoyle, cut by some fantastic artist of the Renaissance. To calculate the damage done to the forest by this hurricane would be impossible until the snow had entirely disappeared.
Everything was white, from the top of Mount Franklin to the coast—forests, prairies, lakes, rivers, beaches. The waters of the Mercy flowed under a layer of ice, which cracked and broke with a loud sound at every change of tide. Thousands of birds—ducks and woodpeckers—flew over the surface of the lake. The rocks where the waterfall rushed down to the edges of the Plateau were frozen solid with ice. It looked like the water was bursting out of a huge gargoyle, crafted by some incredible Renaissance artist. It would be impossible to estimate the damage to the forest from this hurricane until the snow had completely melted away.
Spilett, Pencroff, and Herbert took this opportunity to look after their traps and had hard work finding them under their bed of snow. There was danger of their falling in themselves; a humiliating thing to be caught in one’s own trap! They were spared this annoyance, however, and found the traps had been untouched; not an animal had been caught, although there were a great many footprints in the neighborhood, among others, very clearly impressed marks of claws.
Spilett, Pencroff, and Herbert took this chance to check on their traps and had a tough time locating them under the blanket of snow. They were at risk of getting caught in their own traps—what a humiliating situation that would be! Thankfully, they avoided this embarrassment and discovered that the traps had remained untouched; not a single animal was caught, even though there were plenty of footprints nearby, including some very clear claw marks.
Herbert at once classified these carnivora among the cat tribe, a circumstance which justified the engineer’s belief in the existence of dangerous beasts on Lincoln Island. Doubtless these beasts dwelt in the dense forests of the Far West; but driven by hunger, they had ventured as far as Prospect Plateau. Perhaps they scented the inhabitants of Granite House.
Herbert immediately categorized these carnivores as part of the cat family, which validated the engineer’s belief that dangerous animals existed on Lincoln Island. These creatures likely lived in the thick forests of the Far West; however, driven by hunger, they had come as far as Prospect Plateau. Perhaps they caught the scent of the residents of Granite House.
“What, exactly, are these carnivora?” asked Pencroff.
“What exactly are these carnivores?” asked Pencroff.
“They are tigers,” replied Herbert.
“They're tigers,” replied Herbert.
“I thought those animals were only found in warm countries.”
“I thought those animals were only found in warm countries.”
“In the New World,” replied the lad, “they are to be found from Mexico to the pampas of Buenos Ayres. Now, as Lincoln Island is in almost the same latitude as La Plata, it is not surprising that tigers are found here.”
“In the New World,” the boy replied, “they can be found from Mexico to the plains of Buenos Aires. Since Lincoln Island is in nearly the same latitude as La Plata, it’s not surprising that tigers are found here.”
“All right, we will be on our guard,” replied Pencroff.
“All right, we’ll stay alert,” replied Pencroff.
In the meantime, the temperature rising, the snow began to melt, it came on to rain, and gradually the white mantle disappeared. Notwithstanding the bad weather the colonists renewed their stock of provisions, both animal and vegetable.
In the meantime, as the temperature rose, the snow started to melt, it began to rain, and slowly the white cover vanished. Despite the bad weather, the colonists restocked their supplies, both meat and vegetables.
This necessitated excursions into the forest, and thus they discovered how many trees had been beaten down by the hurricane. The sailor and Neb pushed forward with their wagon as far as the coal deposit in order to carry back some fuel. They saw on their way that the chimney of the pottery oven had been much damaged by the storm; at least six feet had been blown down.
This required trips into the forest, where they found out how many trees had been knocked down by the hurricane. The sailor and Neb moved ahead with their wagon all the way to the coal deposit to load up on some fuel. On their way, they noticed that the chimney of the pottery oven had been badly damaged by the storm; at least six feet had been blown off.
They also renewed their stock of wood as well as that of coal, and the Mercy having become free once more, they employed the current to draw several loads to Granite House. It might be that the cold season was not yet over.
They also restocked their supply of wood and coal, and with the Mercy free again, they used the current to bring several loads to Granite House. The cold season might not be over yet.
A visit had been made to the Chimneys also, and the colonists could not be sufficiently grateful that this had not been their home during the tempest. The sea had left undoubted signs of its ravages. Lashed by the fury of the wind from the offing, and rushing over Safety Island, it spent its full force upon these passages, leaving them half full of sand and the rocks thickly covered with seaweed.
A visit was made to the Chimneys too, and the colonists were extremely grateful that this hadn’t been their home during the storm. The sea had clearly left its mark. Beaten by the intense wind from offshore and crashing over Safety Island, it unleashed its full power on these areas, leaving them partially filled with sand and the rocks heavily coated in seaweed.
While Neb, Herbert, and Pencroff spent their time in hunting and renewing their supply of fuel, Smith andSpilett set to work to clear out the Chimneys. They found the forge and furnaces almost unhurt, so carefully protected had they been by the banks of sand which the colonists had built around them.
While Neb, Herbert, and Pencroff focused on hunting and restocking their fuel supply, Smith and Spilett got to work clearing out the Chimneys. They found the forge and furnaces almost untouched, so well protected had they been by the banks of sand the colonists had built around them.
It was a fortunate thing that they laid in a fresh supply of fuel, for the colonists had not yet seen the end of the intense cold. It is well known that in the Northern Hemisphere, the month of February is noted for its low temperature. The same rule held good in the Southern Hemisphere, and the end of August, which is the February of North America, did not escape from this climatic law.
It was a lucky thing that they stocked up on fresh fuel because the colonists had not yet escaped the extreme cold. It's widely known that in the Northern Hemisphere, February is known for its low temperatures. The same applies to the Southern Hemisphere, and the end of August, which is like February in North America, didn't break this weather pattern.
About the 25th, after another snow and rain storm, the wind veered to the southeast, and suddenly the cold became intense. In the engineer’s opinion, a Fahrenheit thermometer would have indicated about eight degrees below zero, and the cold was rendered more severe by a cutting wind which lasted for several days.
About the 25th, after another snow and rain storm, the wind shifted to the southeast, and suddenly it got really cold. The engineer believed that a Fahrenheit thermometer would have shown about eight degrees below zero, and the cold felt even worse because of a harsh wind that lasted for several days.
The colonists were completely housed again, and as they were obliged to block up all their windows, only leaving one narrow opening for ventilation, the consumption of candles was considerable. In order to economize them, the colonists often contented themselves with only the light from the fire; for fuel was plenty.
The colonists were fully housed again, and since they had to cover all their windows, leaving just a narrow opening for ventilation, they went through a lot of candles. To save on candles, the colonists often made do with just the light from the fire, as fuel was abundant.
Once or twice some of them ventured to the beach, among the blocks of ice which were heaped up there by every fresh tide. But they soon climbed up to Granite House again. This ascent was very painful, as their hands were frostbitten by holding on to the frozen sides of the ladder.
Once or twice, some of them went to the beach, where the ice blocks were piled up by each new tide. But they quickly climbed back up to Granite House. This climb was really tough because their hands were frostbitten from gripping the icy sides of the ladder.
There were still many leisure hours to be filled up during this long confinement, so Smith undertook another indoor occupation.
There were still plenty of free hours to fill during this long confinement, so Smith took on another indoor activity.
The only sugar which they had had up to this time was a liquid substance which they had procured by making deep cuts in the bark of the maple tree. They collected this liquid in jars and used it in this condition for cooking purposes. It improved with age, becoming whiter and more like a syrup in consistency. But they could do better than this, and one day Cyrus Smith announced to his companions that he was going to turn them into refiners.
The only sugar they had up to this point was a liquid they got by making deep cuts in the bark of the maple tree. They collected this liquid in jars and used it as is for cooking. It improved over time, becoming whiter and more syrup-like in texture. But they could do better than this, and one day Cyrus Smith told his friends that he was going to turn them into sugar refiners.
“Refiners! I believe that’s a warm trade?” said Pencroff.
“Refiners! I think that’s a good trade?” said Pencroff.
“Very warm!” replied the engineer.
“Super warm!” replied the engineer.
“Then it will suit this season!” answered the sailor.
“Then it’ll work for this season!” replied the sailor.
Refining did not necessitate a stock of complicated tools or skilled workmen; it was a very simple operation.
Refining didn't require a bunch of complicated tools or skilled workers; it was a pretty straightforward process.
To crystallize this liquid they first clarified it, by putting it on the fire in earthenware jars, and submitting it to evaporation. Soon a scum rose to the surface, which, when it began to thicken, Neb removed carefully with a wooden ladle. This hastened the evaporation, and at the same time prevented it from scorching.
To turn this liquid into crystals, they first clarified it by heating it in clay pots and letting it evaporate. Soon, a layer of scum formed on the surface, which Neb carefully removed with a wooden ladle as it started to thicken. This sped up the evaporation process and kept it from burning.
After several hours boiling over a good fire, which did as much good to the cooks as it did to the boiling liquid, it turned into a thick syrup. This syrup was poured into clay moulds which they had made beforehand, in various shapes in the same kitchen furnace.
After several hours simmering over a good fire, which benefited both the cooks and the boiling liquid, it turned into a thick syrup. This syrup was poured into clay molds that they had made earlier, in various shapes in the same kitchen furnace.
The next day the syrup hardened, forming cakes and loaves. It was sugar of a reddish color, but almost transparent, and of a delicious taste.
The next day, the syrup hardened into cakes and loaves. It was a reddish sugar, nearly transparent, and tasted delicious.
The cold continued until the middle of September, and the inmates of Granite House began to find their captivity rather tedious. Almost every day they took a run out-doors, but they always soon returned. They were constantly at work over their household duties, and talked while they worked.
The cold lasted until mid-September, and the residents of Granite House started to feel their confinement was pretty boring. Almost every day, they went outside for a run, but they always came back quickly. They were always busy with their household chores and chatted while they worked.
Smith instructed his companions in everything, and especially explained to them the practical applications of science.
Smith taught his friends everything and particularly went over the practical uses of science with them.
The colonists had no library at their disposal, but the engineer was a book, always ready, always open at the wished-for page. A book which answered their every question, and one which they often read. Thus the time passed, and these brave man had no fear for the future.
The colonists didn’t have a library available to them, but the engineer was like a book, always ready and open to the page they needed. A book that answered all their questions and one they often referred to. Time went by, and these brave men had no worries about the future.
However, they were all anxious for the end of their captivity, and longed to see, if not fine weather, at least a cessation of the intense cold. If they had only had warmer clothing, they would have attempted excursions to the downs and to Tadorns’ Fens, for game would have been easy to approach, and the hunt would assuredly have been fruitful. But Smith insisted that no one should compromise his health, as he had need of every hand; and his advice was taken.
However, they were all eager for the end of their captivity and hoped to see, if not nice weather, at least a break from the intense cold. If they had only had warmer clothes, they would have tried to explore the downs and Tadorns’ Fens, since game would have been easy to get close to, and the hunt would definitely have been successful. But Smith insisted that no one should risk their health, as he needed every person available; and his advice was followed.
The most impatient of the prisoners, after Pencroff, was Top. The poor dog found himself in close quarters in Granite House, and ran from room to room, showing plainly the uneasiness he felt at this confinement.
The most restless of the prisoners, after Pencroff, was Top. The poor dog felt trapped in Granite House and darted from room to room, clearly showing his discomfort with being confined.
Smith often noticed that whenever he approached the dark well communicating with the sea, which had its opening in the rear of the storehouse, Top whined in a most curious manner, and ran around and around the opening, which had been covered over with planks of wood. Sometimes he even tried to slip his paws under the planks, as if trying to raise them up, and yelped in a way which indicated at the same time anger and uneasiness.
Smith often noticed that whenever he got close to the dark well that connected to the sea, located at the back of the storehouse, Top would whine in a very strange way and run around the opening, which had been covered with wooden planks. Sometimes he even tried to slip his paws underneath the planks, as if trying to lift them up, and yelped in a way that showed both anger and anxiety.
The engineer several times noticed this strange behavior, and wondered what there could be in the abyss to have such a peculiar effect upon this intelligent dog.
The engineer noticed this strange behavior several times and wondered what could be in the abyss to have such a peculiar effect on this intelligent dog.
This well, of course, communicated with the sea. Did it then branch off into narrow passages through the rock-work of the island? Was it in communication with other caves? Did any sea-monsters come into it from time to time from the bottom of these pits?
This well, of course, connected to the sea. Did it then split into narrow passages through the rock formations of the island? Was it connected to other caves? Did any sea monsters come into it now and then from the depths of these pits?
The engineer did not know what to think, and strange thoughts passed through his mind. Accustomed to investigate scientific truths, he could not pardon himself for being drawn into the region of the mysterious and supernatural; but how explain why Top, the most sensible of dogs, who never lost his time in barking at the moon, should insist upon exploring this abyss with nose and ear, if there was nothing there to arouse his suspicions?
The engineer was at a loss for thoughts, and odd ideas raced through his mind. Used to uncovering scientific truths, he couldn't forgive himself for getting pulled into the realm of the mysterious and supernatural; but how could he explain why Top, the smartest dog around who never wasted time barking at the moon, was so determined to investigate this void with his nose and ears if there was nothing there to raise his concerns?
Top’s conduct perplexed Smith more than he cared to own to himself. However, the engineer did not mention this to any one but Spilett, thinking it useless to worry his companions with what might be, after all, only a freak of the dog.
Top’s behavior confused Smith more than he wanted to admit. However, the engineer didn’t mention this to anyone except Spilett, believing it was pointless to distress his companions over what might just be a quirk of the dog.
At last the cold spell was over. They had rain, snow-squalls, hail-storms, and gales of wind, but none of these lasted long. The ice thawed and the snow melted; the beach, plateau, banks of the Mercy, and the forest were again accessible. The return of spring rejoiced the inmates of Granite House, and they soon passed all their time in the open air, only returning to eat and sleep.
At last, the cold snap was over. They had rain, snow flurries, hailstorms, and strong winds, but none of these lasted long. The ice melted and the snow cleared; the beach, plateau, banks of the Mercy, and the forest were accessible again. The arrival of spring thrilled the residents of Granite House, and they quickly spent all their time outdoors, only coming back to eat and sleep.
They hunted a good deal during the latter part of September, which led Pencroff to make fresh demands for those fire-arms which he declared Smith had promised him. Smith always put him off, knowing that without a special stock of tools it would be almost impossible to make a gun which would be of any use to them.
They did a lot of hunting in late September, which made Pencroff ask again for the firearms that he said Smith had promised him. Smith always brushed him off, knowing that without a specific set of tools, it would be nearly impossible to make a gun that would actually be useful to them.
Besides, he noticed that Herbert and Spilett had become very clever archers, that all sorts of excellent game, both feathered and furred—agoutis, kangaroos, cabiais, pigeons, bustards, wild ducks, and snipe—fell under their arrows; consequently the firearms could wait. But the stubborn sailor did not see it in this light, and constantly reminded the engineer that he had not provided them with guns; and Gideon Spilett supported Pencroff.
Besides, he noticed that Herbert and Spilett had become really good archers, and all kinds of excellent game, both feathered and furry—agoutis, kangaroos, capybaras, pigeons, bustards, wild ducks, and snipe—were falling to their arrows; so the firearms could wait. But the stubborn sailor didn't see it that way and kept reminding the engineer that he hadn't provided them with guns; and Gideon Spilett backed Pencroff up.
“If,” said he, “the island contains, as we suppose, wild beasts, we must consider how to encounter and exterminate them. The time may come when this will be our first duty.”
“If,” he said, “if the island has, as we think, wild animals, we need to figure out how to face and get rid of them. There might come a time when this will be our top priority.”
But just now it was not the question of firearms which occupied Smith’s mind, but that of clothes. Those which the colonists were wearing had lasted through the winter, but could not hold out till another. What they must have at any price was skins of the carnivora, or wool of the ruminants; and as moufflons (mountain goats), were plenty, they must consider how to collect a flock of them which they could keep for the benefit of the colony. They would also lay out a farm yard in a favorable part of the island, where they could have an enclosure for domestic animals and a poultry yard.
But right now, Smith wasn’t worried about firearms; he was focused on clothing. The outfits the colonists were wearing had made it through the winter, but they wouldn't last until another one. What they desperately needed was skins from carnivores or wool from ruminants. Since moufflons (mountain goats) were abundant, they needed to think about how to gather a flock that they could keep for the colony's benefit. They also planned to set up a farmyard in a good spot on the island, where they could have an enclosure for domestic animals and a poultry yard.
These important projects must be carried out during the good weather. Consequently, in view of these future arrangements, it was important to undertake a reconnoissance into the unexplored part of Lincoln Island, to wit:—the high forests which extended along the right bank of the Mercy, from its mouth to the end of Serpentine Peninsula. But they must be sure of their weather, and a month must yet elapse before it would be worth while to undertake this exploration. While they were waiting impatiently, an incident occurred which redoubled their anxiety to examine the whole island.
These important projects need to be completed during good weather. Therefore, considering these upcoming plans, it was essential to scout the uncharted area of Lincoln Island, specifically the dense forests along the right bank of the Mercy, from its mouth to the end of Serpentine Peninsula. However, they needed to be certain about the weather, and they would have to wait at least a month before it would be worthwhile to begin this exploration. While they waited impatiently, an incident happened that increased their eagerness to investigate the entire island.
It was now the 24th of October. On this day Pencroff went to look after his traps which he always kept duly baited. In one of them, he found three animals, of a sort welcome to the kitchen. It was a female peccary with her two little ones. Pencroff returned to Granite House, delighted with his prize, and, as usual, made a great talk about it.
It was now October 24th. On this day, Pencroff went to check on his traps, which he always kept properly baited. In one of them, he found three animals that were a great addition to the kitchen. It was a female peccary with her two little ones. Pencroff returned to Granite House, thrilled with his catch, and, as usual, made a big fuss about it.
“Now, we’ll have a good meal, Mr Smith,” cried he, “and you too, Mr. Spilett, must have some.”
“Now, we’re going to enjoy a nice meal, Mr. Smith,” he exclaimed, “and you too, Mr. Spilett, should join in.”
“I shall be delighted,” said the reporter, “but what is it you want me to eat?”
“I’d be happy to,” said the reporter, “but what do you want me to eat?”
“Sucking pig,” said Pencroff.
“Pig in a blanket,” said Pencroff.
“Oh, a suckling-pig! To hear you talk one would think you had brought back a stuffed partridge!”
“Oh, a baby pig! From the way you’re talking, you'd think you brought back a stuffed partridge!”
“Umph,” said Pencroff, “so you turn up your nose at my suckling pig?”
“Umph,” said Pencroff, “so you look down on my suckling pig?”
“No,” answered Spilett coolly, “provided one does not get too much of them—”
“No,” Spilett replied calmly, “as long as you don’t have too many of them—”
“Very well, Mr. Reporter!” returned the sailor, who did not like to hear his game disparaged. “You are getting fastidious! Seven months ago, when we were cast upon this island, you would have been only too glad to have come across such game.”
“Alright, Mr. Reporter!” replied the sailor, who didn’t appreciate his hunting being criticized. “You’re being picky! Seven months ago, when we ended up on this island, you would have been more than happy to find such prey.”
“Well, well,” said the reporter, “men are never satisfied.”
“Well, well,” said the reporter, “men are never satisfied.”
“And now,” continued Pencroff, “I hope Neb will distinguish himself. Let us see; these little peccaries are only three months old, they will be as tender as quail. Come, Neb, I will superintend the cooking of them myself.”
“And now,” Pencroff said, “I hope Neb will show what he can do. Let’s see; these little peccaries are only three months old, so they should be as tender as quail. Come on, Neb, I’ll oversee the cooking myself.”
The sailor, followed by Neb, hastened to the kitchen, and was soon absorbed over the oven. The two prepared a magnificent repast; the two little peccaries, kangaroo soup, smoked ham, pistachio nuts, dragon-tree wine, Oswego tea; in a word, everything of the best. But the favorite dish of all was the savory peccaries made into a stew. At 5 o’clock, dinner was served in the dining-room of Granite House. The kangaroo soup smoked upon the table. It was pronounced excellent.
The sailor, followed by Neb, rushed to the kitchen and quickly got busy by the oven. The two made a fantastic meal; there were two little peccaries, kangaroo soup, smoked ham, pistachio nuts, dragon-tree wine, and Oswego tea—in short, all the best stuff. But the standout dish was the delicious peccaries stewed together. At 5 o’clock, dinner was served in the dining room of Granite House. The kangaroo soup was steaming on the table. It was said to be excellent.
After the soup came the peccaries, which Pencroff begged to be allowed to carve, and of which he gave huge pieces to every one. These suckling pigs were indeed delicious, and Pencroff plied his knife and fork with intense earnestness, when suddenly a cry and an oath escaped him.
After the soup, the peccaries arrived, and Pencroff eagerly asked to carve them, giving large portions to everyone. These young pigs were truly delicious, and Pencroff went at it with great focus when suddenly he let out a shout and a curse.
“What’s the matter?” said Smith.
"What's wrong?" said Smith.
“The matter is that I have just lost a tooth!” replied the sailor.
“The thing is, I just lost a tooth!” replied the sailor.
“Are there pebbles in your peccaries, then?” said Spilett.
“Are there pebbles in your peccaries, then?” asked Spilett.
“It seems so,” said the sailor, taking out of his mouth the object which had cost him a grinder.
“It seems so,” said the sailor, taking the object out of his mouth that had cost him a tooth.
It was not a pebble, it was a leaden pellet.
It wasn't a pebble; it was a heavy lead pellet.
CHAPTER XXIII.
CONCERNING THE LEADEN PELLET—MAKING A CANOE—HUNTING—IN THE TOP OF A KAURI—NOTHING TO INDICATE THE PRESENCE OF MAN—THE TURTLE ON ITS BACK—THE TURTLE DISAPPEARS—SMITH’S EXPLANATION.
CONCERNING THE LEAD PELLET—MAKING A CANOE—HUNTING—AT THE TOP OF A KAURI—NO SIGN OF HUMAN PRESENCE—THE TURTLE ON ITS BACK—THE TURTLE DISAPPEARS—SMITH’S EXPLANATION.
It was exactly seven months since the passengers in the balloon had been thrown upon Lincoln Island. In all this time no human being had been seen. No smoke had betrayed the presence of man upon he island. No work of man’s hands, either ancient or modern, had attested his passage. Not only did it seem uninhabited at present, but it appeared to have been so always. And now all the framework of deductions fell before a little bit of metal found in the body of a pig.
It had been exactly seven months since the balloon passengers had been stranded on Lincoln Island. During that entire time, no human had been seen. No smoke had revealed the presence of people on the island. No signs of human activity, whether old or new, indicated that anyone had been there. It seemed not only uninhabited now but as if it always had been. And now, all the conclusions drawn crumbled upon the discovery of a small piece of metal found in the body of a pig.
It was certainly a bullet from a gun, and what but a human being would be so provided?
It was definitely a bullet from a gun, and who else but a human could have done this?
When Pencroff had placed it upon the table, his companions looked at it with profound astonishment. The possibilities suggested by this seemingly trivial incident flashed before them. The sudden appearance of a supernatural being could not have impressed them more.
When Pencroff set it down on the table, his friends stared at it in utter amazement. The potential suggested by this seemingly minor event flashed before their eyes. The unexpected arrival of a supernatural being couldn't have impacted them more.
Smith instantly began to reason upon the theories which this incident, as surprising as it was unexpected, suggested. Taking the bit of lead between his fingers he turned it round and about for some time before he spoke.
Smith immediately started to think about the theories that this incident, surprising as it was unexpected, brought to mind. Holding the piece of lead between his fingers, he examined it from every angle for a while before he said anything.
“You are sure, Pencroff,” he asked, at length, “that the peccary was hardly three months old?”
“You're sure, Pencroff,” he asked finally, “that the peccary was barely three months old?”
“I’m sure, sir,” answered the sailor. “It was sucking its mother when I found it in the ditch.”
“I’m sure, sir,” replied the sailor. “It was nursing from its mother when I found it in the ditch.”
“Well, then, that proves that within three months a gun has been fired upon Lincoln Island.”
“Well, that proves that a gun has been fired on Lincoln Island within three months.”
“And that the bullet has wounded, though not mortally, this little animal,” added Spilett.
“And that the bullet has injured, but not fatally, this little animal,” added Spilett.
“Undoubtedly,” replied Smith; “and now let us see what conclusions are to be drawn from this incident. Either the island was inhabited before our arrival, or men have landed here within three months. How these men arrived, whether voluntarily or involuntarily, whether by landing or by shipwreck, cannot be settled at present. Neither have we any means of determining whether they are Europeans or Malays, friends or enemies; nor do we know whether they are living here at present or whether they have gone. But these questions are too important to be allowed to remain undecided.”
“Definitely,” replied Smith; “and now let’s see what conclusions we can draw from this situation. Either the island was inhabited before we got here, or people have arrived in the past three months. We can’t figure out how these people came, whether it was voluntary or involuntary, by landing or by shipwreck, at this moment. We also have no way of knowing if they are Europeans or Malays, whether they are friends or enemies; we don’t even know if they are currently living here or if they have left. But these questions are too significant to stay unanswered.”
“No!” cried the sailor springing from the table. “There can be no men besides ourselves on Lincoln Island. Why, the island is not large: and if it had been inhabited, we must have met some one of its people before this.”
“No!” shouted the sailor, jumping up from the table. “There can’t be anyone else on Lincoln Island besides us. The island isn’t that big, and if it had been inhabited, we would have encountered some of its people by now.”
“It would, indeed, be astonishing if we had not,” said Herbert.
“It would definitely be surprising if we hadn't,” said Herbert.
“But it would be much more astonishing, I think,” remarked the reporter, “if this little beast had been born with a bullet in his body!”
“But I think it would be way more surprising,” the reporter said, “if this little creature had been born with a bullet inside him!”
“Unless,” suggested Neb, seriously, “Pencroff had had it—”
“Unless,” suggested Neb, seriously, “Pencroff might have had it—”
“How’s that, Neb?” interrupted the sailor, “I, to have had a bullet in my jaw for five or six months, without knowing it? Where would it have been?” he added, opening his mouth and displaying the thirty-two splendid teeth that ornamented it. “Look, Neb, and if you can find one broken one in the whole set you may pull out half-a-dozen!”
“How's that, Neb?” interrupted the sailor. “I’ve had a bullet in my jaw for five or six months without even knowing it? Where would it have been?” He added, opening his mouth to show off the thirty-two beautiful teeth gleaming inside. “Look, Neb, and if you can find even one broken one in this whole set, you can pull out half a dozen!”
“Neb’s theory is inadmissible,” said Smith, who, in spite of the gravity of his thoughts, could not restrain a smile. “It is certain that a gun has been discharged on the island within three months. But I am bound to believe that the persons on this island have been here but a short time, or else simply landed in passing; as, had the island had inhabitants when we made the ascent of Mount Franklin, we must have seen them or been seen. It is more probable, that within the past few weeks some people have been shipwrecked somewhere upon the coast; the thing, therefore, to do is to discover this point.”
“Neb’s theory doesn't hold up,” said Smith, who, despite the seriousness of his thoughts, couldn't help but smile. “It’s clear that a gun has been fired on the island in the last three months. But I believe that the people on this island have only been here for a short time or just landed here briefly; if there had been inhabitants when we climbed Mount Franklin, we would have seen them or they would have seen us. It’s more likely that some people have been shipwrecked along the coast in the last few weeks; so, the thing to do now is to find out where that happened.”
“I think we should act cautiously,” said the reporter.
“I think we should be careful,” said the reporter.
“I think so, too,” replied Smith, “as I fear that they must be Malay pirates;”
“I think so, too,” replied Smith, “because I’m worried they might be Malay pirates.”
“How would it do, Mr. Smith,” said the sailor, “to build A canoe so that we could go up this river, or, if need be, round the coast? It won’t do to be taken unawares.”
“How about this, Mr. Smith,” said the sailor, “why don’t we build a canoe so we can go up this river, or if we have to, around the coast? We can’t afford to be caught off guard.”
“It’s a good idea,” answered the engineer; “but we have not the time now. It would take at least a month to build a canoe—”
“It’s a good idea,” replied the engineer; “but we don’t have the time right now. It would take at least a month to build a canoe—”
“A regular one, yes,” rejoined the sailor; “but we don’t want it to stand the sea. I will guarantee to make one in less than five days that will do to use on the Mercy.”
“A standard one, sure,” replied the sailor; “but we don’t want it to take on the sea. I can promise to make one in under five days that will be good for use on the Mercy.”
“Build a boat in five days,” cried Neb.
"Let's build a boat in five days," shouted Neb.
“Yes, Neb, one of Indian fashion.”
“Yes, Neb, one that’s in style in India.”
“Of wood?” demanded the negro, still incredulous.
“Of wood?” asked the black man, still skeptical.
“Of wood, or what is better, of bark,” answered Pencroff. “Indeed, Mr. Smith, it could be done in five days!”
“Of wood, or even better, bark,” replied Pencroff. “Honestly, Mr. Smith, it could be finished in five days!”
“Be it so, then,” answered the engineer. “In five days.”
“Alright then,” replied the engineer. “In five days.”
“But we must look out for ourselves in the meantime!” said Herbert.
“But we have to watch out for ourselves in the meantime!” said Herbert.
“With the utmost caution, my friends,” answered Smith. “And be very careful to confine your hunting expeditions to the neighborhood of Granite House.”
“With the greatest care, my friends,” replied Smith. “And make sure to keep your hunting trips limited to the area around Granite House.”
The dinner was finished in lower spirits than Pencroff had expected. The incident of the bullet proved beyond doubt that the island had been, or was now, inhabited by others, and such a discovery awakened the liveliest anxiety in the breasts of the colonists.
The dinner ended on a less cheerful note than Pencroff had anticipated. The incident with the bullet confirmed that the island had been, or currently was, occupied by others, and this revelation sparked intense worry among the settlers.
Smith and Spilett, before retiring, had a long talk about these things. They questioned, if by chance this incident had an connection with the unexplained rescue of the engineer, and other strange events which they had encountered in so many ways. Smith, after having discussed the pros and cons of the question, ended by saying:—
Smith and Spilett, before going to bed, had an extensive conversation about these matters. They wondered if this incident was somehow linked to the mysterious rescue of the engineer and other odd occurrences they had experienced in various ways. After weighing the arguments for and against the issue, Smith concluded by saying:—
“In short, Spilett, do you want to know my opinion?”
“In short, Spilett, do you want to hear what I think?”
“Yes, Cyrus.”
“Yeah, Cyrus.”
“Well, this is it. No matter how minutely we examine the island, we will find nothing!”
“Well, this is it. No matter how closely we look at the island, we won't find anything!”
Pencroff began his work the next day. He did not mean to build a boat with ribs and planks, but simply a flat bottomed float, which would do admirably in the Mercy, especially in the shallow water and its sources. Strips of bark fastened together would be sufficient for their purpose, and in places where a portage would be necessary the affair would be neither heavy nor cumbersome. The sailor’s idea was to fasten the strips of bark together with clinched nails, and thus to make the craft staunch.
Pencroff started his work the next day. He didn’t plan to build a boat with ribs and planks, but rather a flat-bottomed raft, which would work perfectly in the Mercy, especially in the shallow areas and its sources. Strips of bark tied together would be enough for their needs, and in places where they needed to carry it, it wouldn't be heavy or awkward. The sailor's idea was to secure the strips of bark together with clinched nails to make the craft sturdy.
The first thing was to select trees furnishing a supple and tough bark. Now, it had happened that the last storm had blown down a number of Douglass pines, which were perfectly adapted to this purpose. Some of these lay prone upon the earth, and all the colonists had to do was to strip them of their bark, though this indeed was somewhat difficult, on account of the awkwardness of their tools.
The first thing was to choose trees with flexible and strong bark. Well, the last storm had knocked down a number of Douglas firs, which were just right for this. Some of these were lying flat on the ground, and all the colonists needed to do was peel off the bark, although this was a bit tricky because of the clumsiness of their tools.
While the sailor, assisted by the engineer was thus occupied, Herbert and Spilett, who had been made purveyors to the colony, were not idle. The reporter could not help admiring the young lad, who had acquired a remarkable proficiency in the use of the bow and arrows, and who exhibited, withal, considerable hardiness and coolness. The two hunters, remembering the caution of the engineer, never ventured more than two miles from Granite House, but the outskirts of the forest furnished a sufficient supply of agoutis, cabiais, kangaroos, peccaries, etc., and although the traps had not done so well since the cold had abated, the warren furnished a supply sufficient for the wants of the colonists.
While the sailor, with help from the engineer, was busy, Herbert and Spilett, who had been assigned roles to supply the colony, were also hard at work. The reporter couldn't help but admire the young guy, who had become quite skilled with the bow and arrows and showed a lot of toughness and composure. The two hunters, keeping the engineer's advice in mind, never went more than two miles from Granite House, but the edge of the forest provided enough agoutis, cabiais, kangaroos, peccaries, and more. Although the traps hadn’t been as successful since the cold weather eased up, the warren still offered enough to meet the needs of the colonists.
Often, while on these excursions, Herbert conversed with Spilett about the incident of the bullet and of the engineer’s conclusions, and one day—the 26th of October—he said:—
Often, during these trips, Herbert talked with Spilett about the bullet incident and the engineer’s conclusions, and one day—the 26th of October—he said:—
“Don’t you think it strange, Mr. Spilett, that any people should have been wrecked on this island, and never have followed up the coast to Granite House?”
“Don’t you think it’s odd, Mr. Spilett, that anyone would be shipwrecked on this island and never have explored the coast to Granite House?”
“Very strange if they are still here,” answered the reporter, “but not at all astonishing if they are not.”
“It's pretty weird if they're still around,” replied the reporter, “but not surprising at all if they aren't.”
“Then you think they have gone again?”
“Do you think they’ve left again?”
“It is likely, my boy, that, if they had staid any time, or were still here, something would have discovered their presence.”
“It’s likely, my boy, that if they had stayed any longer, or were still here, something would have revealed their presence.”
“But if they had been able to get off again they were not really shipwrecked.”
“But if they had been able to get away again, they weren't actually shipwrecked.”
“No, Herbert, they were what I should call shipwrecked temporarily. That is, it is possible that they were driven by stress of weather upon the island, without having to abandon their vessel, and when the wind moderated they set out again.”
“No, Herbert, I would say they were temporarily stranded. That is, it’s possible they were pushed by bad weather onto the island without having to abandon their boat, and when the wind calmed down, they left again.”
“One thing is certain,” said Herbert, “and that is, that Mr. Smith has always seemed to dread, rather than to desire, the presence of human beings on our island.”
“One thing is certain,” said Herbert, “and that is that Mr. Smith has always seemed to fear, rather than welcome, the presence of people on our island.”
“The reason is, that he knows that only Malays frequent these seas, and these gentlemen are a kind of rascals that had better be avoided.”
“The reason is that he knows that only Malays come to these waters, and those guys are the kind of troublemakers you’d be better off steering clear of.”
“Is it not possible, sir, that some time we will discover traces of their landing and, perhaps, be able to settle this point?”
“Isn’t it possible, sir, that someday we’ll find evidence of their landing and maybe be able to clear this up?”
“It is not unlikely, my boy. An abandoned camp or the remains of a fire, we would certainly notice, and these are what we will look for on our exploration.”
“It’s quite possible, my boy. We would definitely notice an abandoned camp or the remnants of a fire, and these are what we will search for during our exploration.”
The hunters, talking in this way, found themselves in a portion of the forest near the Mercy, remarkable for its splendid trees. Among others, were those magnificent conifera, called by the New Zealanders “kauris,” rising mere than 200 feet in height.
The hunters, chatting like this, ended up in a part of the forest near the Mercy, known for its impressive trees. Among them were the magnificent conifers, referred to by the New Zealanders as “kauris,” towering over 200 feet tall.
“I have an idea, Mr. Spilett,” said Herbert, “supposing I climb to the top of one of these kauris, I could see, perhaps, for a good ways.”
“I have an idea, Mr. Spilett,” said Herbert. “If I climb to the top of one of these kauris, I might be able to see for quite a distance.”
“It’s a good idea,” answered the other, “but can you climb one of these giants?”
“It’s a good idea," the other replied, "but can you climb one of these giants?”
“I am going to try, anyhow,” exclaimed the boy, springing upon the lower branches of one, which grew in such a manner as to make the tree easy to mount. In a few minutes he was in its top, high above all the surrounding leafage of the forest.
“I’m going to try, anyway,” the boy shouted, jumping onto the lower branches of a tree that was easy to climb. In a few minutes, he was at the top, high above all the surrounding leaves of the forest.
From this height, the eye could take in all the southern portion of the island between Claw Cape on the southeast and Reptile Promontory on the southwest. To the northwest rose Mount Franklin, shutting out more than one-fourth of the horizon.
From this height, the eye could see all of the southern part of the island between Claw Cape on the southeast and Reptile Promontory on the southwest. To the northwest stood Mount Franklin, blocking more than a quarter of the horizon.
But Herbert, from his perch, could overlook the very portion of the island which was giving, or had given, refuge to the strangers whose presence they suspected. The lad looked about him with great attention, first towards the sea, where not a sail was visible, although it was possible that a ship, and especially one dismasted, lying close in to shore, would be concealed from view by the trees which hid the coast. In the woods of the Far West nothing could be seen. The forest formed a vast impenetrable dome many miles in extent, without an opening or glade. Even the course of the Mercy could not be seen, and it might be that there were other streams flowing westward, which were equally invisible.
But Herbert, from his spot, could see the part of the island that was either currently hiding the strangers they suspected were there or had previously offered them refuge. The boy scanned the area carefully, first looking toward the sea, where not a single sail was in sight. However, it was possible that a ship—especially one without a mast—could be lying close to shore, hidden from view by the trees along the coast. In the woods of the Far West, nothing was visible. The forest formed a vast, impenetrable dome stretching for miles, with no openings or glades. Even the path of the Mercy River was out of sight, and there could be other streams flowing westward that were equally unseen.
But, other signs failing, could not the lad catch in the air some smoke that would indicate the presence of man? The atmosphere was pure, and the slightest vapor was sharply outlined against the sky. For an instant Herbert thought he saw a thin film rising in the west, but a more careful observation convinced him that he was mistaken. He looked again, however, with all care, and his sight was excellent. No, certainly, it was nothing.
But, with no other signs, couldn’t the boy catch a whiff of smoke in the air that would show there was someone around? The air was clear, and even the faintest bit of vapor stood out against the sky. For a moment, Herbert thought he saw a thin wisp rising in the west, but when he looked more closely, he realized he was wrong. He carefully looked again, and his vision was sharp. No, it was definitely nothing.
Herbert climbed down the tree, and he and the reporter returned to Granite House. There Smith listened to the lad’s report without comment. It was plain he would not commit himself until after the island had been explored.
Herbert climbed down the tree, and he and the reporter went back to Granite House. There, Smith listened to the boy’s report without saying anything. It was clear he wouldn’t make any decisions until the island had been explored.
Two days later—the 28th of October—another unaccountable incident happened.
Two days later—the 28th of October—another inexplicable incident occurred.
In strolling along the beach, two miles from Granite House, Herbert and Neb had been lucky enough to capture a splendid specimen of the chelonia mydas (green turtle), whose carapace shone with emerald reflections. Herbert had caught sight of it moving among the rocks towards the sea.
In walking along the beach, two miles from Granite House, Herbert and Neb had been fortunate enough to catch a beautiful green turtle, its shell sparkling with emerald reflections. Herbert had spotted it moving among the rocks toward the ocean.
“Stop him, Neb, stop him!” he cried.
“Stop him, Neb, stop him!” he shouted.
Neb ran to it.
Neb ran to it.
“It’s a fine animal,” said Neb, “but how are we going to keep it?”
“It’s a great animal,” said Neb, “but how are we going to take care of it?”
“That’s easy enough, Neb. All we have to do is to turn it on its back, and then it cannot get away. Take your spear and do as I do.”
“That’s simple, Neb. All we need to do is flip it onto its back, and then it won’t be able to escape. Grab your spear and follow my lead.”
The reptile had shut itself in its shell, so that neither its head nor eyes were visible, and remained motionless as a rock. The lad and the negro placed their spears underneath it, and, after some difficulty, succeeded in turning it over. It measured three feet in length, and must have weighed at least 400 pounds.
The reptile had tucked itself into its shell, hiding both its head and eyes, and stayed completely still like a rock. The boy and the man placed their spears underneath it and, after some effort, managed to flip it over. It was three feet long and must have weighed at least 400 pounds.
“There, that will please Pencroff,” cried Neb.
“There, that will make Pencroff happy,” shouted Neb.
Indeed, the sailor could not fail to be pleased, as the flesh of these turtles, which feed upon eel-grass, is very savory.
Indeed, the sailor couldn't help but be pleased, as the meat of these turtles, which eat eel grass, is quite tasty.
“And now what can we do with our game?” asked Neb; “we can’t carry it to Granite House.”
“And now what can we do with our game?” asked Neb. “We can’t take it to Granite House.”
“Leave it here, since it cannot turn back again,” answered Herbert, “and we will come for it with the cart.”
“Leave it here, since it can’t be turned back now,” replied Herbert, “and we’ll come for it with the cart.”
Neb agreed, and Herbert, as an extra precaution, which the negro thought useless, propped up the reptile with large stones. Then the two returned to Granite House, following the beach, on which the tide was down. Herbert, wishing to surprise Pencroff, did not tell him of the prize which was lying on its back upon the sand; but two hours later Neb and he returned with the cart to where they had left it, and—the “splendid specimen of chelonia mydas” was not there!
Neb agreed, and Herbert, as an extra precaution that Neb thought was unnecessary, propped up the turtle with large stones. Then the two of them walked back to Granite House, following the beach where the tide was low. Herbert, wanting to surprise Pencroff, didn’t mention the prize that was lying on its back in the sand; but two hours later, Neb and he returned with the cart to where they had left it, and—the “splendid specimen of chelonia mydas” was gone!
The two looked about them. Certainly, this was where they had left it. Here were the stones he had used, and, therefore, the lad could not be mistaken.
The two looked around. This was definitely where they had left it. Here were the stones he had used, so the kid couldn't be wrong.
“Did the beast turn over, after all?” asked Neb.
“Did the beast really turn over, after all?” asked Neb.
“It seems so,” replied Herbert, puzzled, and examining the stones scattered over the sand.
“It seems that way,” replied Herbert, confused, as he looked at the stones scattered across the sand.
“Pencroff will be disappointed.”
"Pencroff will be let down."
“And Mr. Smith will be troubled to explain this!” thought Herbert.
“And Mr. Smith is going to have a hard time explaining this!” thought Herbert.
“Well,” said Neb, who wished to conceal their misadventure, “we won’t say anything about it.”
“Well,” said Neb, who wanted to keep their mishap a secret, “we won’t mention it.”
“Indeed, we will tell the whole story,” answered Herbert.
“Sure, we'll tell the whole story,” replied Herbert.
And taking with them the useless cart, they returned to Granite House.
And bringing the useless cart with them, they went back to Granite House.
At the shipyard they found the engineer and the sailor working together. Herbert related all that happened.
At the shipyard, they found the engineer and the sailor collaborating. Herbert shared everything that had happened.
“You foolish fellows,” cried the sailor, “to let at least fifty pounds of soup, escape!”
“You foolish guys,” yelled the sailor, “to let at least fifty pounds of soup slip away!”
“But, Pencroff,” exclaimed Neb, “it was not our fault that the reptile got away; haven’t I told you we turned it on its back?”
“But, Pencroff,” Neb exclaimed, “it wasn't our fault that the reptile got away; didn't I tell you we flipped it onto its back?”
“Then you didn’t turn it enough!” calmly asserted the stubborn sailor.
“Then you didn’t turn it enough!” calmly stated the stubborn sailor.
“Not enough!” cried Herbert; and he told how he had taken care to prop the turtle up with stones.
“Not enough!” shouted Herbert, and he explained how he had made sure to support the turtle with stones.
“Then it was a miracle!” exclaimed Pencroff.
“Then it was a miracle!” Pencroff exclaimed.
“Mr. Smith,” asked Herbert, “I thought that turtles once placed on their backs could not get over again, especially the very large ones?”
“Mr. Smith,” Herbert asked, “I thought that turtles put on their backs couldn't flip over again, especially the really big ones?”
“That is the fact,” answered Smith.
“That is the fact,” replied Smith.
“Then how did it—”
“Then how did it happen—”
“How far off from the sea did you leave this turtle,” asked the engineer, who had stopped working and was turning this incident over in his mind.
“How far from the sea did you leave this turtle?” asked the engineer, who had stopped working and was pondering the situation.
“About fifteen feet,” answered Herbert.
"About fifteen feet," Herbert replied.
“And it was low water?”
"And was it low tide?"
“Yes, sir.”
"Yes, sir."
“Well,” responded the engineer, “what the turtle could not do on land, he could do in water. When the tide rose over him he turned over, and—tranquilly paddled off.”
“Well,” replied the engineer, “what the turtle couldn't do on land, he could do in water. When the tide rose over him, he flipped over and—calmly paddled away.”
“How foolish we are,” cried Neb.
“How foolish we are,” exclaimed Neb.
“That is just what I said you were,” answered Pencroff.
"That's exactly what I said you were," replied Pencroff.
Smith had given this explanation, which was doubtless admissible; but was he himself satisfied with it? He did not venture to say that.
Smith had provided this explanation, which was certainly acceptable; but was he genuinely convinced by it? He didn't dare to say that.
CHAPTER XXIV.
TRIAL OF THE CANOE—A WRECK ON THE SHORE—THE TOW—JETSAM POINT—INVENTORY OF THE BOX—WHAT PENCROFF WANTED—A BIBLE—A VERSE FROM THE BIBLE.
TRIAL OF THE CANOE—A WRECK ON THE SHORE—THE TOW—JETSAM POINT—INVENTORY OF THE BOX—WHAT PENCROFF WANTED—A BIBLE—A VERSE FROM THE BIBLE.
On the 29th of October the canoe was finished. Pencroff had kept his word, and had built, in five days, a sort of bark shell, stiffened with flexible crejimba rods. A seat at either end, another midway to keep it open, a gunwale for the thole-pins of a pair of oars, and a paddle to steer with, completed this canoe, which was twelve feet in length, and did not weigh 200 pounds.
On October 29th, the canoe was finished. Pencroff had kept his promise and built, in five days, a kind of bark shell, reinforced with flexible crejimba rods. It had a seat at both ends, another in the middle to keep it open, a gunwale for the thole-pins of a pair of oars, and a paddle for steering. This canoe was twelve feet long and weighed less than 200 pounds.
“Hurrah!” cried the sailor, quite ready to applaud his own success. “With this we can make the tour of—”
“Awesome!” shouted the sailor, totally ready to celebrate his own success. “With this, we can make the round of—”
“Of the world?” suggested Spilett.
"Of the world?" Spilett suggested.
“No, but of the island. Some stones for ballast, a mast in the bow, with a sail which Mr. Smith will make some day, and away we’ll go! But now let us try our new ship, for we must see if it will carry all of us.”
“No, but about the island. Some stones for balance, a mast in the front, with a sail that Mr. Smith will make someday, and off we’ll go! But for now, let’s test our new boat, because we need to see if it can hold all of us.”
The experiment was made. Pencroff, by a stroke of the paddle, brought the canoe close to the shore by a narrow passage between the rocks, and he was confident that they could at once make a trial trip of the craft by following the bank as far as the lower point where the rocks ended.
The experiment was conducted. Pencroff, with a swift movement of the paddle, steered the canoe toward the shore through a narrow gap between the rocks, and he was sure they could immediately take the boat for a test trip by following the bank all the way to the lower point where the rocks ended.
As they were stepping in, Neb cried:—
As they were stepping in, Neb shouted:—
“But your boat leaks, Pencroff.”
"But your boat has leaks, Pencroff."
“Oh, that’s nothing, Neb,” answered the sailor. “The wood has to drink! But in two days it will not show, and there will be as little water in our canoe as in the stomach of a drunkard! Come, get in!”
“Oh, that’s nothing, Neb,” replied the sailor. “The wood has to soak up the water! But in two days, it won’t make a difference, and there will be as little water in our canoe as in the stomach of a drunkard! Come on, get in!”
They all embarked, and Pencroff pushed off. The weather was splendid, the sea was as calm as a lake, and the canoe could venture upon it with as much security as upon the tranquil current of the Mercy.
They all got on board, and Pencroff set off. The weather was beautiful, the sea was as calm as a lake, and the canoe could glide over it as safely as it would on the peaceful waters of the Mercy.
Neb and Herbert took the oars, and Pencroff sat in the stern with the paddle as steersman.
Neb and Herbert took the oars, while Pencroff sat at the back with the paddle as the steersman.
The sailor crossed the channel, and rounded the southern point of the islet. A gentle breeze was wafted from the south. There were no billows, but the canoe rose and fell with the long undulations of the sea, and they rowed out half a mile from the coast so as to get a view of the outline of Mount Franklin. Then, putting about, Pencroff returned towards the mouth of the river, and followed along the rounded shore which hid the low marshy ground of Tadorn’s Fen. The point, made longer by the bend of the coast, was three miles from the Mercy, and the colonists resolved to go past it far enough to obtain a hasty glance at the coast as far as Claw Cape.
The sailor crossed the channel and rounded the southern tip of the island. A gentle breeze blew in from the south. There were no waves, but the canoe moved up and down with the long swells of the sea, and they rowed out half a mile from the shore to get a view of the outline of Mount Franklin. Then, turning around, Pencroff headed back toward the mouth of the river and followed along the curved shore that concealed the low marshy area of Tadorn’s Fen. The point, extended by the curve of the coastline, was three miles from the Mercy, and the colonists decided to go far enough past it to get a quick look at the coast as far as Claw Cape.
The canoe followed along the shore, keeping off some two cables length so as to avoid the line of rocks beginning to be covered by the tide. The cliff, beginning at the mouth of the river, lowered as it approached the promontory. It was a savage-looking, unevenly-arranged heap of granite blocks, very different from the curtain of Prospect Plateau. There was not a trace of vegetation on this sharp point, which projected two miles beyond the forest, like a giant’s arm, thrust out from a green sleeve.
The canoe moved along the shore, staying about two hundred yards away to avoid the line of rocks that were starting to get covered by the tide. The cliff, starting at the mouth of the river, sloped down as it got closer to the promontory. It was a rugged-looking pile of jagged granite blocks, completely different from the smooth surface of Prospect Plateau. There was no sign of vegetation on this sharp point, which jutted out two miles beyond the forest, like a giant’s arm extending from a green sleeve.
The canoe sped easily along. Spilett sketched the outline of the coast in his note-book, and Neb, Pencroff, and Herbert discussed the features of their new domain; and as they moved southward the two Mandible Capes seemed to shut together and enclose Union Bay. As to Smith, he regarded everything in silence, and from his distrustful expression it seemed as if he was observing some suspicious land.
The canoe glided smoothly along. Spilett drew the coastline in his notebook, while Neb, Pencroff, and Herbert talked about the characteristics of their new territory. As they headed south, the two Mandible Capes appeared to close in and surround Union Bay. Meanwhile, Smith looked on quietly, and his wary expression suggested he was watching some dubious land.
The canoe had reached the end of the point and was about doubling it, when Herbert rose, and pointing out a black object, said:—
The canoe had reached the end of the point and was about to go around it when Herbert stood up and, pointing to a dark object, said:—
“What is that down there on the sand?”
“What is that down there on the beach?”
Every one looked in the direction indicated.
Everyone looked in the direction pointed out.
“There is something there, indeed,” said the reporter. “It looks like a wreck half buried in the sand.”
“There’s definitely something there,” said the reporter. “It looks like a wreck partially buried in the sand.”
“Oh, I see what it is!” cried Pencroff.
“Oh, I get it!” exclaimed Pencroff.
“What?” asked Neb.
“What?” Neb asked.
“Barrels! they are barrels, and, may be, they are full!”
“Barrels! They are barrels, and maybe they’re full!”
“To shore, Pencroff!” said Smith.
"To shore, Pencroff!" Smith said.
And with a few strokes the canoe was driven into a little cove, and the party went up the beach.
And with a few strokes, the canoe was paddled into a small cove, and the group made their way up the beach.
Pencroff was not mistaken. There were two barrels half buried in the sand; but firmly fastened to them was a large box, which, borne up by them, had been floated on to the shore.
Pencroff was not wrong. There were two barrels half-buried in the sand; but attached to them was a large box, which, supported by them, had been washed up onto the shore.
“Has there been a shipwreck here?” asked Herbert.
“Has there been a shipwreck here?” asked Herbert.
“Evidently,” answered Spilett.
“Clearly,” answered Spilett.
“But what is in this box?” exclaimed Pencroff, with a natural impatience. “What is in this box? It is closed, and we have nothing with which to raise the lid. However, with a stone—”
“But what’s in this box?” exclaimed Pencroff, with a natural impatience. “What’s in this box? It’s closed, and we have nothing to lift the lid. However, with a stone—”
And the sailor picked up a heavy rock, and was about to break one of the sides, when the engineer, stopping him, said:—
And the sailor picked up a heavy rock and was about to smash one of the sides when the engineer, stopping him, said:—
“Cannot you moderate your impatience for about an hour, Pencroff?”
“Can’t you control your impatience for about an hour, Pencroff?”
“But, think, Mr. Smith! May be there is everything we want in it!”
“But think about it, Mr. Smith! Maybe there’s everything we want in there!”
“We will find out, Pencroff,” answered the engineer, “but do not break the box, as it will be useful. Let us transport it to Granite House, where we can readily open it without injuring it. It is all prepared for the voyage, and since it has floated here, it can float again to the river month.”
“We'll find out, Pencroff,” replied the engineer, “but don’t break the box, since it will be useful. Let’s take it to Granite House, where we can open it without damaging it. It’s all set for the journey, and since it floated here, it can float again to the river mouth.”
“You are right, sir, and I am wrong,” answered the sailor, “but one is not always his own master!”
“You're right, sir, and I'm wrong,” replied the sailor, “but you can't always be in charge of your own life!”
The engineer’s advice was good. It was likely that the canoe could not carry the things probably enclosed in the box, since the latter was so heavy that it had to be buoyed up by two empty barrels. It was, therefore, better to tow it in this condition to the shore at the Granite House.
The engineer’s advice was sound. It was probably not realistic for the canoe to carry the items that were likely in the box since it was so heavy that it needed to be supported by two empty barrels. So, it was better to tow it like this to the shore at the Granite House.
And now the important question was, from whence came this jetsam? Smith and his companions searched the beach for several hundred paces, but there was nothing else to be seen. They scanned the sea, Herbert and Neb climbing up a high rock, but not a sail was visible on the horizon.
And now the important question was, where did this debris come from? Smith and his friends searched the beach for several hundred steps, but there was nothing else in sight. They looked out at the sea, with Herbert and Neb climbing up a tall rock, but there wasn’t a single sail on the horizon.
Nevertheless, there must have been a shipwreck, and perhaps this incident was connected with the incident of the bullet. Perhaps the strangers had landed upon another part of the island. Perhaps they were still there. But the natural conclusion of the colonists was that these strangers could not be Malay pirates, since the jetsam was evidently of European or American production.
Nevertheless, there must have been a shipwreck, and maybe this event was linked to the bullet incident. Maybe the strangers had landed on another part of the island. Maybe they were still there. But the obvious conclusion for the colonists was that these strangers couldn’t be Malay pirates, since the debris was clearly of European or American origin.
They all went back to the box, which measured five feet by three. It was made of oak, covered with thick leather, studded with copper nails. The two large barrels, hermetically sealed, but which sounded empty, were fastened to its sides by means of strong ropes, tied in what Pencroff recognized to be “sailor’s knots.” That it was uninjured seemed to be accounted for by the fact of its having been thrown upon the sand instead of the rocks. And it was evident that it had not been long either in the sea or upon the beach. It seemed probable, also, that the water had not penetrated, and that its contents would be found uninjured. It therefore looked as if this box must have been thrown overboard from a disabled ship making for the island. And, in the hope that it would reach the island, where they would find it later, the passengers had taken the precaution to buoy it up.
They all returned to the box, which was five feet by three. It was made of oak, covered in thick leather, and studded with copper nails. Two large barrels, sealed tightly but sounding empty, were secured to its sides with strong ropes tied in what Pencroff recognized as "sailor’s knots." The fact that it was unharmed seemed to be because it had landed on the sand instead of the rocks. It was clear that it hadn't spent much time in the sea or on the beach. It also seemed likely that water hadn't gotten inside, and that its contents would be undamaged. So, it appeared this box had been tossed overboard from a disabled ship heading for the island. To ensure it would reach the island where they could retrieve it later, the passengers had taken the precaution of buoying it up.
“We will tow this box to Granite House,” said the engineer, “and take an inventory of its contents; then, if we discover any of the survivors of this supposed shipwreck, we will return them what is theirs. If we find no one—”
“We'll tow this box to Granite House,” said the engineer, “and check what's inside. Then, if we find any survivors from this supposed shipwreck, we’ll give them back what belongs to them. If we don’t find anyone—”
“We will keep the things ourselves!” cried the sailor. “But I wish I knew what is in it.”
“We'll keep the stuff for ourselves!” shouted the sailor. “But I wish I knew what's inside.”
The sailor was already working at the prize, which would doubtless float at high water. One of the ropes which was fastened to the barrels was partly untwisted and served to fasten these latter to the canoe. Then, Neb and Pencroff dug out the sand with their oars, and soon the canoe, with the jetsam in tow, was rounding the promontory to which they gave the name of Jetsam Point. The box was so heavy that the barrels just sufficed to sustain it above the water; and Pencroff feared each moment that it would break loose and sink to the bottom. Fortunately his fears were groundless, and in an hour and a half the canoe touched the bank before Granite House.
The sailor was already working on the prize, which would definitely float at high tide. One of the ropes tied to the barrels was partially untwisted and was used to secure those barrels to the canoe. Then, Neb and Pencroff scooped out the sand with their oars, and soon the canoe, with the debris in tow, was rounding the promontory they named Jetsam Point. The box was so heavy that the barrels barely kept it above the water, and Pencroff worried at any moment that it would break free and sink. Fortunately, his fears were unfounded, and in an hour and a half, the canoe reached the shore in front of Granite House.
The boat and the prize were drawn upon the shore, and as the tide was beginning to fall, both soon rested on dry ground. Neb brought some tools so as to open the box without injury, and the colonists forthwith proceeded to examine its contents.
The boat and the prize were pulled up on the shore, and as the tide started to go out, both soon settled on dry land. Neb brought some tools to open the box without damaging it, and the colonists immediately began to check out what was inside.
Pencroff did not try to hide his anxiety. He began by unfastening the barrels, which would be useful in the future, then the fastenings were forced with pincers, and the cover taken off. A second envelope, of zinc, was enclosed within the case, in such a manner that its contents were impervious to moisture.
Pencroff didn’t hide his anxiety. He started by unfastening the barrels, which would be useful later, then pried open the fastenings with pliers and removed the cover. Inside the case was a second envelope made of zinc, designed to keep its contents safe from moisture.
“Oh!” cried Pencroff, “they must be preserves which are inside.”
“Oh!” shouted Pencroff, “they must be the preserves that are inside.”
“I hope for something better than that,” answered the reporter.
“I hope for something better than that,” replied the reporter.
“If it should turn out that there was—” muttered the sailor.
“If it turns out that there was—” muttered the sailor.
“What?” asked Neb.
"What?" Neb asked.
“Nothing!”
“Zero!”
The zinc cover was split, lengthwise and turned back, and, little by little, many different objects were lifted out on the sand. At each new discovery Pencroff cheered, Herbert clapped his hands, and Neb danced. There were books which made the lad crazy with pleasure, and cooking implements which Neb covered with kisses.
The zinc cover was ripped open along its length and flipped back, and slowly, a variety of objects were pulled out onto the sand. With each new find, Pencroff cheered, Herbert clapped his hands, and Neb danced. There were books that thrilled the boy with joy, and cooking tools that Neb showered with kisses.
In truth the colonists had reason to be satisfied, as the following inventory, copied from Spilett’s note-book, will show:—
In reality, the colonists had good reason to be pleased, as the following inventory, taken from Spilett’s notebook, will demonstrate:—
TOOLS.—3 pocket-knives, with-several blades, 2 wood-chopper’s hatchets, 2 carpenter’s hatchets, 3 planes, I adzes, l axe, 6 cold chisels, 2 files, 3 hammers, 3 gimlets, 2 augers, 10 bags of nails and screws, 3 saws of different sizes, 2 boxes of needles.
TOOLS.—3 pocket knives with several blades, 2 wood-chopping hatchets, 2 carpenter's hatchets, 3 planes, 1 adze, 1 axe, 6 cold chisels, 2 files, 3 hammers, 3 gimlets, 2 augers, 10 bags of nails and screws, 3 saws of different sizes, 2 boxes of needles.
ARMS.—2 flint-lock guns, 2 percussion guns, 2 central-fire carbines; 5 cutlasses, 4 boarding sabres, 2 barrels of powder, holding l5 pounds each, l2 boxes of caps.
ARMS.—2 flintlock guns, 2 percussion guns, 2 centerfire carbines; 5 cutlasses, 4 boarding sabers, 2 barrels of powder, each holding 15 pounds, 12 boxes of caps.
INSTRUMENTS.—1 sextant, 1 opera-glass, 1 spyglass, 1 box compass, 1 pocket compass, 1 Fahrenheit thermometer, 1 aneroid barometer, 1 box containing a photographic apparatus, together with glasses, chemicals, etc.
INSTRUMENTS.—1 sextant, 1 binoculars, 1 telescope, 1 box compass, 1 pocket compass, 1 Fahrenheit thermometer, 1 aneroid barometer, 1 box with a camera setup, along with lenses, chemicals, etc.
CLOTHING.—2 dozen shirts of a peculiar material resembling wool, though evidently a vegetable substance; 3 dozen stockings of the same material.
CLOTHING.—2 dozen shirts made from a unique material that looks like wool but is clearly a plant-based substance; 3 dozen stockings made from the same material.
UTENSILS.—1 Iron pot, 6 tinned copper stewpans, 3 iron plates, 10 aluminium knives and forks, 2 kettles, 1 small portable stove. 5 table knives.
UTENSILS.—1 iron pot, 6 tin-coated copper stewpans, 3 iron plates, 10 aluminum knives and forks, 2 kettles, 1 small portable stove, 5 table knives.
BOOKS.-l Bible, 1 atlas, 1 dictionary of Polynesian languages, 1 dictionary of the Natural Sciences, 3 reams of blank paper, 2 blank books.
BOOKS.-1 Bible, 1 atlas, 1 dictionary of Polynesian languages, 1 dictionary of the Natural Sciences, 3 reams of blank paper, 2 blank notebooks.
“Unquestionably,” said the reporter, after the inventory had been taken, “the owner of this box was a practical man! Tools, arms, instruments, clothing, utensils, books, nothing is wanting. One would say that he had made ready for a shipwreck before-hand!”
“Without a doubt,” said the reporter, after the inventory was done, “the owner of this box was a practical guy! Tools, weapons, instruments, clothing, utensils, books—there’s nothing missing. It’s like he had prepared for a shipwreck in advance!”
“Nothing, Indeed, is wanting,” murmured Smith, thoughtfully.
“Nothing, really, is missing,” Smith murmured, pondering.
“And it is a sure thing,” added Herbert, “that the ship that brought this box was not a Malay pirate!”
“And it’s a sure thing,” added Herbert, “that the ship that brought this box wasn’t a Malay pirate!”
“Unless its owner had been taken prisoner,” said Pencroff.
“Unless its owner had been captured,” said Pencroff.
“That is not likely,” answered the reporter. “It is more probable that an American or European ship has been driven to this neighborhood, and that the passengers, wishing to save what was, at least, necessary, have prepared this box and have thrown it overboard.”
“That is unlikely,” replied the reporter. “It’s more likely that an American or European ship has been pushed into this area, and that the passengers, wanting to save what was at least essential, put this box together and tossed it overboard.”
“And do you think so, Mr. Smith?” asked Herbert.
“And do you think that, Mr. Smith?” asked Herbert.
“Yes, my boy,” answered the engineer, “that might have been the case. It is possible, that, anticipating a ship wreck, this chest has been prepared, so that it might be found again on the coast—”
“Yes, my boy,” replied the engineer, “that could be true. It’s possible that, anticipating a shipwreck, this chest was prepared so that it could be found again on the shore—”
“But the photographic apparatus!” observed the sailor incredulously.
“But the camera!” the sailor exclaimed, incredulous.
“As to that,” answered the engineer, “I do not see its use; what we, as well as any other ship wrecked person, would have valued more, would have been a greater assortment of clothing and more ammunition!”
“As to that,” replied the engineer, “I don’t see its usefulness; what we, like any other shipwrecked person, would have appreciated more, would have been a better variety of clothing and more ammunition!”
“But have none of these things any mark by which we can tell where they came from,” askedSpilett.
“But do any of these things have a mark that shows where they came from?” asked Spilett.
They looked to see. Each article was examined attentively, but, contrary to custom, neither books, instruments, nor arms had any name or mark; nevertheless, they were in perfect order, and seemed never to have been used. So also with the tools and utensils; everything was new, and this went to prove that the things had not been hastily thrown together in the box, but that their selection had been made thoughtfully and with care. This, also, was evident from the zinc case which had kept everything watertight, and which could not have been soldered in a moment.
They looked closely. Each item was carefully examined, but, unlike usual, neither the books, tools, nor weapons had any labels or markings; still, they were all in perfect condition and appeared to be unused. The same was true for the tools and utensils; everything was new, which indicated that the items weren’t just tossed together in the box, but that they were chosen deliberately and with attention to detail. This was also clear from the zinc case that kept everything waterproof, which clearly couldn’t have been put together in a hurry.
The two dictionaries and the Bible were in English, and the latter showed that it had been often read. The Atlas was a splendid work, containing maps of every part of the world, and many charts laid out on Mercator’s Projection. The nomenclature in this book was in French, but neither in it, nor in any of the others, did the name of the editor or publisher appear.
The two dictionaries and the Bible were in English, and the Bible clearly showed it had been read often. The Atlas was an impressive work, featuring maps of every part of the world and many charts made using Mercator’s Projection. The names in this book were in French, but neither this nor any of the others included the name of the editor or publisher.
The colonists, therefore, were unable to even conjecture the nationality of the ship that had so recently passed near them. But no matter where it came from, this box enriched the party on Lincoln Island. Until now, in transforming the products of nature, they had created everything for themselves, and had succeeded by their own intelligence. Did it not now seem as if Providence had intended to reward them by placing these divers products of human industry in their hands? Therefore, with one accord, they all rendered thanks to Heaven.
The colonists were unable to guess the nationality of the ship that had just passed by them. But no matter where it came from, this box was a great addition for the group on Lincoln Island. Until now, they had created everything for themselves by transforming the resources of nature, relying on their own skills and ingenuity. Didn't it seem like fate had decided to reward them by giving them these various products of human industry? So, together, they all expressed their gratitude to Heaven.
Nevertheless, Pencroff was not entirely satisfied. It appeared that the box did not contain something to which he attached an immense importance, and as its contests lessened, his cheers had become less hearty, and when the inventory was closed, he murmured:—
Nevertheless, Pencroff wasn't completely satisfied. It seemed that the box didn't hold something he placed great importance on, and as its contents dwindled, his cheers became less enthusiastic. When the inventory was finished, he murmured:—
“That’s all very fine, but you see there is nothing for me here!”
“That’s all great, but you see there’s nothing for me here!”
“Why, what did you expect, Pencroff?” exclaimed Neb.
“Why, what did you expect, Pencroff?” shouted Neb.
“A half pound of tobacco,” answered the sailor, “and then I would have been perfectly happy!”
“A half pound of tobacco,” the sailor replied, “and then I would have been completely happy!”
The discovery of this jetsam made the thorough exploration of the island more necessary than ever. It was, therefore, agreed that they should set out early the next morning, proceeding to the western coast via the Mercy. If anyone had been shipwrecked on that part of the island, they were doubtless without resources, and help must be given them at once.
The discovery of this debris made a detailed exploration of the island more necessary than ever. So, they agreed to set out early the next morning, heading to the western coast via the Mercy. If anyone had shipwrecked on that part of the island, they were likely out of resources, and help needed to be given to them immediately.
During the day the contents of the box were carried to Granite House and arranged in order in the great hall. And that evening—the 29th of October—Herbert before retiring asked Mr. Smith to read some passages from the Bible.
During the day, the items from the box were taken to Granite House and organized in the great hall. That evening—the 29th of October—Herbert, before going to bed, asked Mr. Smith to read some passages from the Bible.
“Gladly,” answered the engineer, taking the sacred book in his hands; when Pencroff checking him, said:—
“Sure,” replied the engineer, taking the sacred book in his hands; but Pencroff stopped him, saying:—
“Mr. Smith, I am superstitious. Open the book at random and read the first verse which you meet with. We will see if it applies to our situation.”
“Mr. Smith, I believe in superstitions. Open the book at random and read the first verse you find. Let’s see if it fits our situation.”
Smith smiled at the words of the sailor, but yielding to his wishes he opened the Bible where the marker lay between the leaves. Instantly his eye fell upon a red cross made with a crayon, opposite the 8th verse of the seventh chapter of St. Matthew.
Smith smiled at the sailor's words, but giving in to his request, he opened the Bible where the bookmark was placed. Immediately, his eyes landed on a red cross drawn with a crayon, next to the 8th verse of the seventh chapter of St. Matthew.
He read these words:—
He read these words:—
“For every one that asketh, receiveth; and he that seeketh, findeth.”
“For everyone who asks, receives; and whoever seeks, finds.”
CHAPTER XXV.
THE DEPARTURE—THE RISING TIDE—ELMS AND OTHER TREES—DIFFERENT PLANTS—THE KINGFISHER—APPEARANCE OF THE FOREST—THE GIGANTIC EUCALYPTI—WHY THEY ARE CALLED FEVER-TREES—MONKEYS—THE WATERFALL—ENCAMPMENT FOR THE NIGHT.
THE DEPARTURE—THE RISING TIDE—ELMS AND OTHER TREES—DIFFERENT PLANTS—THE KINGFISHER—APPEARANCE OF THE FOREST—THE GIGANTIC EUCALYPTUS TREES—WHY THEY ARE CALLED FEVER TREES—MONKEYS—THE WATERFALL—CAMPING FOR THE NIGHT.
The next day—the 30th of October—everything was prepared for the proposed exploration, which these last events had made so necessary. Indeed, as things had turned out, the colonists could well imagine themselves in a condition to give, rather than to receive, help.
The next day—the 30th of October—everything was ready for the planned exploration, which recent events had made essential. In fact, given how things had developed, the colonists felt they were in a position to provide help rather than just receive it.
It was agreed that they ascend the Mercy as far as practicable. They would thus be able to transport their arms and provisions a good part of the way without fatigue.
It was agreed that they would climb the Mercy as far as possible. This way, they could carry their weapons and supplies for a good distance without getting tired.
It was also necessary to think, not only of what they now carried, but of what they might perhaps bring back to Granite House. If, as all thought, there had been a shipwreck on the coast, they would find many things they wanted on the shore, and the cart would doubtless have proved more convenient than the canoe. But the cart was so heavy and unwieldy that it would have been too hard work to drag it, which fact made Pencroff regret that the box had not only held his half-pound of tobacco, but also a pair of stout New Jersey horses, which would have been so useful to the colony.
It was important to consider not just what they had with them, but also what they might bring back to Granite House. If, as everyone believed, there had been a shipwreck on the coast, they would come across many things they needed on the shore, and the cart would definitely have been more practical than the canoe. However, the cart was so heavy and bulky that dragging it would have been too much work, which made Pencroff wish that the box hadn’t just contained his half-pound of tobacco, but also a pair of strong horses from New Jersey, which would have been really helpful for the colony.
The provisions, already packed by Neb, consisted of enough dried meat, beer, and fermented liquor to last them for the three days which Smith expected they would be absent. Moreover, they counted on being able to replenish their stock at need along the route, and Neb had taken care not to forget the portable stove.
The supplies, already prepared by Neb, included enough dried meat, beer, and alcohol to last them for the three days Smith thought they would be gone. Plus, they planned to restock as needed along the way, and Neb made sure not to forget the portable stove.
They took the two wood-choppers’ hatchets to aid in making their way through the thick forest, and also the glass and the pocket compass.
They took the two woodcutter's hatchets to help clear a path through the dense forest, along with the glass and the pocket compass.
Of the arms, they chose the two flint-lock guns in preference to the others, as the colonists could always renew the flints; whereas the caps could not be replaced. Nevertheless, they took one of the carbines and some cartridges. As for the powder, the barrels held fifty pounds, and it was necessary to take a certain amount of that; but the engineer expected to manufacture an explosive substance, by which it could be saved in the future. To the firearms they added the five cutlasses, in leather scabbards. And thus equipped, the party could venture into the forest with some chance of success.
Of the weapons, they chose the two flintlock guns over the others since the colonists could always replace the flints, while the caps couldn’t be restocked. However, they also took one of the carbines and some cartridges. The barrels held fifty pounds of powder, and they needed to take a certain amount of it; but the engineer planned to make an explosive substance that would allow them to save it for the future. They added five cutlasses in leather sheaths to the firearms. With this gear, the group could head into the forest with a better chance of success.
Armed in this manner, Pencroff, Herbert, and Neb had all they could desire, although Smith made them promise not to fire a shot unnecessarily.
Armed this way, Pencroff, Herbert, and Neb had everything they needed, although Smith made them promise not to fire a shot unless it was absolutely necessary.
At 6 o’clock the party, accompanied by Top, started for the mouth of the Mercy. The tide had been rising half an hour, and there were therefore some hours yet of the flood which they could make use of. The current was strong, and they did not need to row to pass rapidly up between the high banks and the river. In a few minutes the explorers had reached the turn where, seven months before, Pencroff had made his first raft. Having passed this elbow, the river, flowing from the southwest, widened out under the shadow of the grand ever-green conifers; and Smith and his companions could not but admire the beautiful scenery. As they advanced the species of forest trees changed. On the right bank rose splendid specimens of ulmaceæ, those valuable elms so much sought after by builders, which have the property of remaining sound for a long time in water. There was, also, numerous groups belonging to the same family, among them the micocouliers, the root of which produces a useful oil. Herbert discovered some lardizabalaceæ, whose flexible branches, soaked in water, furnish excellent ropes, and two or three trunks of ebony of a beautiful black color, curiously veined.
At 6 o’clock, the group, along with Top, set out for the mouth of the Mercy. The tide had been rising for half an hour, so they still had several hours of the flood to take advantage of. The current was strong, and they didn’t need to row to quickly navigate between the high banks of the river. In just a few minutes, the explorers reached the spot where, seven months earlier, Pencroff had built his first raft. After passing this bend, the river, flowing from the southwest, widened beneath the shade of the magnificent evergreen conifers, and Smith and his companions couldn’t help but admire the beautiful scenery. As they moved forward, the types of forest trees changed. On the right bank stood impressive examples of ulmaceae, those valuable elms that builders highly seek because they can stay sound for a long time in water. There were also many groups from the same family, including the micocouliers, whose roots produce a useful oil. Herbert spotted some lardizabalaceæ, with flexible branches that, when soaked in water, make excellent ropes, and two or three trunks of strikingly beautiful black ebony, intricately veined.
From time to time, where a landing was easy, the canoe stopped, and Spilett, Herbert, and Pencroff, accompanied by Top, explored the bank. In addition to the game, Herbert thought that he might meet with some useful little plant which was not to be despised, and the young naturalist was rewarded by discovering a sort of wild spinach and numerous specimens of the genus cabbage, which would, doubtless, bear transplanting; they were cresses, horse-radishes, and a little, velvety, spreading plant, three-feet high, bearing brownish-colored seeds.
From time to time, whenever landing was easy, the canoe would stop, and Spilett, Herbert, and Pencroff, along with Top, would explore the shore. Besides looking for game, Herbert thought he might come across some useful little plants that wouldn’t be ignored, and the young naturalist was rewarded by finding a type of wild spinach and several examples of cabbage that would likely thrive if transplanted; they included cresses, horseradishes, and a small, velvety, spreading plant about three feet high, bearing brownish seeds.
“Do you know what this is?” asked Herbert of the sailor.
“Do you know what this is?” Herbert asked the sailor.
“Tobacco!” cried Pencroff, who had evidently never seen the plant which he fancied so much.
“Tobacco!” exclaimed Pencroff, who clearly had never seen the plant he was so fond of.
“No, Pencroff,” answered Herbert, “It is not tobacco, it is mustard.”
“No, Pencroff,” answered Herbert, “It’s not tobacco, it’s mustard.”
“Only mustard!” exclaimed the other. “Well if you happen to come across a tobacco plant, my boy, do not pass it by.”
“Only mustard!” the other exclaimed. “Well, if you come across a tobacco plant, my boy, don’t let it slip by.”
“We will find it someday,” said Spilett.
“We'll find it someday,” said Spilett.
“All right,” cried Pencroff, “and then I will be able to say that the island lacks nothing!”
"Okay," shouted Pencroff, "then I'll be able to say that the island has everything it needs!"
These plants were taken up carefully and carried back to the canoe, where Cyrus Smith had remained absorbed in his own thoughts.
These plants were picked up carefully and brought back to the canoe, where Cyrus Smith had been lost in his own thoughts.
The reporter, Herbert, and Pencroff, made many of these excursions, sometimes on the right bank of the Mercy and sometimes upon the left. The latter was less abrupt, but more wooded. The engineer found, by reference to the pocket-compass, that the general direction of the river from its bend was southwest, and that it was nearly straight for about three miles. But it was probable that the direction would change further up, and that it would flow from the spurs of Mount Franklin, which fed its waters in the northwest.
The reporter, Herbert, and Pencroff often went on these outings, sometimes along the right bank of the Mercy and sometimes along the left. The left bank was less steep but had more trees. The engineer checked his pocket compass and saw that the river generally flowed southwest from its bend and was almost straight for about three miles. However, it was likely that the direction would change further along, and that the river would flow from the slopes of Mount Franklin, which supplied its waters from the northwest.
During one of these excursions Spilett caught a couple of birds with long, slim beaks, slender necks, short wings, and no tails, which Herbert called tinamous, and which they resolved should be the first occupants of the future poultry-yard.
During one of these outings, Spilett caught a couple of birds with long, slim beaks, slender necks, short wings, and no tails, which Herbert named tinamous, and they decided that these would be the first residents of the future poultry yard.
But the first report of a gun that echoed through the forests of the Far West, was provoked by the sight of a beautiful bird, resembling a kingfisher.
But the first sound of a gun that rang out through the forests of the Far West was triggered by the sight of a stunning bird that looked like a kingfisher.
“I know it,” cried Pencroff.
“I know it,” shouted Pencroff.
“What do you know?” asked the reporter.
“What do you know?” the reporter asked.
“That bird! It is the bird which escaped on our first exploration, the one after which we named this part of the forest!”
“That bird! It’s the one that got away during our first exploration, the one we named this part of the forest after!”
“A jacamar!” exclaimed Herbert.
"A jacamar!" Herbert exclaimed.
It was, indeed, one of those beautiful birds, whose harsh plumage is covered with a metallic lustre. Some small shot dropped it to the earth, and Top brought it, and also some touracolories, climbing birds, the size of pigeons, to the canoe. The honor of this first shot belonged to the lad, who was pleased enough with the result. The touracolories were better game than the jacamar, the flash of the latter being tough, but it would have been hard to persuade Pencroff that they had not killed the most delicious of birds.
It was definitely one of those stunning birds, whose rough feathers shine with a metallic luster. Some small shot brought it down to the ground, and Top retrieved it along with some touracolories, climbing birds about the size of pigeons, and brought them to the canoe. The honor of the first shot went to the boy, who was pretty happy with the outcome. The touracolories were better game than the jacamar, whose flash was tough, but it would have been difficult to convince Pencroff that they hadn’t killed the tastiest of birds.
It was 10 o’clock when the canoe reached the second bend of the river, some five miles from the mouth. Here they stopped half an hour, under the shadow of the trees, for breakfast.
It was 10 o'clock when the canoe got to the second bend of the river, about five miles from the mouth. They stopped here for half an hour, in the shade of the trees, for breakfast.
The river measured from sixty to seventy feet in width, and was five or six feet deep. The engineer had remarked its several affluents, but they were simply unnavigable streams. The Forests of the Far West, or Jacamar Wood, extended farther than they could see, but no where could they detect the presence of man. If, therefore, any persons had been shipwrecked on the island, they had not yet quitted the shore, and it was not in those thick coverts that search must be made for the survivors.
The river was about sixty to seventy feet wide and five or six feet deep. The engineer noted its various tributaries, but they were just small streams that couldn’t be navigated. The Forests of the Far West, or Jacamar Wood, stretched further than they could see, yet there was no sign of human presence. So, if anyone had been shipwrecked on the island, they hadn't left the shore yet, and it wasn’t in those dense woods that they should look for the survivors.
The engineer began to manifest some anxiety to get to the western coast of the island, distant, as he calculated, about five miles or less. The journey was resumed, and, although the course of the Mercy, sometimes towards the shore, was oftener towards the mountain, it was thought better to follow it as long as possible, on account of the fatigue and loss of time incident to hewing a way through the wood. Soon, the tide having attained its height, Herbert and Neb took the oars, and Pencroff the paddle, wad they continued the ascent by rowing.
The engineer started to feel anxious about reaching the western coast of the island, which he estimated was about five miles away or even less. They continued their journey, and although the path of the Mercy sometimes headed towards the shore, it more often headed towards the mountain. It was deemed best to stick to this route as long as they could, considering the fatigue and time wasted in trying to cut a path through the woods. Soon, when the tide reached its highest point, Herbert and Neb took the oars, while Pencroff took the paddle, and they continued to move upward by rowing.
It seemed as if the forest of the Far West began to grow thinner. But, as the trees grew farther apart, they profited by the increased space, and attained a splendid growth.
It felt like the forest of the Far West was starting to thin out. But as the trees became more spaced out, they took advantage of the extra room and grew even more beautifully.
“Eucalypti!” cried Herbert, descrying some of these superb plants, the loftiest giants of the extra-tropical zone, the congeners of the eucalypti of Australia and New Zealand, both of which countries were situated in the same latitude as Lincoln Island. Some rose 200 feet in height and measured twenty feet in circumference, and their bark, five fingers in thickness, exuded an aromatic resin. Equally wonderful were the enormous specimens of myrtle, their leaves extending edgewise to the sun, and permitting its rays to penetrate and fall upon the ground.
“Eucalyptus!” shouted Herbert, spotting some of these amazing trees, the tallest giants of the subtropical region, related to the eucalyptus trees of Australia and New Zealand, which were both in the same latitude as Lincoln Island. Some reached heights of 200 feet and had a circumference of twenty feet, with bark that was five inches thick and oozed a fragrant resin. Equally impressive were the massive myrtle trees, their leaves angled towards the sun, allowing its rays to shine through and reach the ground.
“What trees!” exclaimed Neb. “Are they good for anything?”
“What amazing trees!” exclaimed Neb. “Are they useful for anything?”
“Pshaw!” answered Pencroff. “They are like overgrown men, good for nothing but to show in fairs!”
“Pshaw!” replied Pencroff. “They’re like grown-up kids, useless except for showing off at fairs!”
“I think you’re wrong, Pencroff,” said Spilett, “the eucalyptus wood is beginning to be extensively used in cabinet work.”
“I think you're mistaken, Pencroff,” Spilett said, “eucalyptus wood is starting to be widely used in furniture making.”
“And I am sure,” added Herbert, “that it belongs to a most useful family,” and thereupon the young naturalist enumerated many species of the plant and their uses.
“And I’m sure,” Herbert added, “that it belongs to a really useful family,” and then the young naturalist listed many species of the plant and their uses.
Every one listened to the lad’s lesson in botany, Smith smiling, Pencroff with an indescribable pride. “That’s all very well, Herbert,” answered the sailor, “but I dare swear that of all these useful specimens none are as large as these!”
Everyone listened to the kid's lesson in botany, with Smith smiling and Pencroff filled with an indescribable pride. “That’s great, Herbert,” the sailor replied, “but I bet none of these useful specimens are as big as these!”
“That is so.”
"That's true."
“Then, that proves what I said,” replied the sailor, “that giants are good for nothing.”
“Then that proves my point,” replied the sailor, “that giants are useless.”
“There’s where you are wrong, Pencroff,” said the engineer, “these very eucalypti are good for something.”
“That's where you’re mistaken, Pencroff,” said the engineer, “these eucalypti are actually useful for something.”
“For what?”
"Why?"
“To render the country healthy about them. Do you know what they call them In Australia and New Zealand?”
“To make the country healthy around them. Do you know what they call them in Australia and New Zealand?”
“No sir.”
“Nope.”
“They call them ‘fever’ trees.”
“They call them ‘fever’ trees.”
“Because they give it?”
“Is it because they give it?”
“No; because they prevent it!”
“No, because they stop it!”
“Good. I shall make a note of that,” said the reporter.
"Great. I'll take note of that," said the reporter.
“Note then, my dear Spilett, that it has been proved that the presence of these trees neutralizes marsh miasmas. They have tried this natural remedy in certain unhealthy parts of Europe, and northern Africa, with the best results. And there are no intermittent fevers in the region of these forests, which is a fortunate thing for us colonists of Lincoln Island.”
“Now, my dear Spilett, it's been shown that these trees can counteract marsh miasmas. They’ve tested this natural remedy in some unhealthy areas of Europe and North Africa, and it worked really well. Plus, there are no intermittent fevers where these forests are, which is great news for us settlers on Lincoln Island.”
“What a blessed island!” cried Pencroff. “It would lack nothing—if it was not—”
“What a fantastic island!” exclaimed Pencroff. “It wouldn't be missing anything—if it wasn't—”
“That will come, Pencroff, we will find it,” answered the reporter; “but now let us attend to our work and push on as far as we can get with the canoe.”
“That will come, Pencroff, we’ll find it,” replied the reporter; “but for now, let’s focus on our work and see how far we can go with the canoe.”
They continued on through the woods two miles further, the river becoming more winding, shallow, and so narrow that Pencroff pushed along with a pole. The sun was setting, and, as it would be impossible to pass in the darkness through the five or six miles of unknown woods which the engineer estimated lay between them and the coast, it was determined to camp wherever the canoe was obliged to stop.
They went on through the woods for another two miles, the river getting more winding, shallow, and so narrow that Pencroff pushed along with a pole. The sun was setting, and since it would be impossible to navigate through the five or six miles of unknown woods estimated by the engineer between them and the coast in the dark, they decided to camp wherever the canoe had to stop.
They now pushed on without delay through the forest, which grew more dense, and seemed more inhabited, because, if the sailor’s eyes did not deceive him, he perceived troops of monkeys running among the underbrush. Sometimes, two or three of these animals would halt at a distance from the canoe and regard its occupants, as if, seeing men for the first time, they had not then learned to fear them. It would have been easy to have shot some of these quadrumanes, but Smith was opposed to the useless slaughter. Pencroff, however, looked upon the monkey from a gastronomic point of view, and, indeed, as these animals are entirely herberiferous, they make excellent game; but since provisions abounded, it was useless to waste the ammunition.
They pushed through the forest without wasting any time, which was getting denser and felt more alive because, if the sailor's eyes weren't tricking him, he noticed groups of monkeys moving around in the underbrush. Sometimes, two or three of these animals would stop at a distance from the canoe and stare at its passengers, as if they were seeing humans for the first time and hadn’t learned to be afraid of them yet. It would have been easy to shoot some of these monkeys, but Smith was against pointless killing. Pencroff, on the other hand, saw the monkeys as potential food, and since these animals are entirely herbivorous, they make great game. But since there was plenty of food available, it was unnecessary to waste the ammunition.
Towards 4 o’clock the navigation of the Mercy became very difficult, its course being obstructed by rocks and aquatic plants. The banks rose higher and higher, and, already, the bed of the stream was confined between the outer spurs of Mount Franklin. Its sources could not be far off, since the waters were fed by the southern watershed of that mountain.
Towards 4 o’clock, navigating the Mercy became really tough, with rocks and water plants blocking the way. The banks grew higher and higher, and the stream’s bed was already squeezed between the outer spurs of Mount Franklin. Its sources couldn’t be too far away since the waters were fed by the southern watershed of that mountain.
“Before a quarter of an hour we will have to stop, sir,” said Pencroff.
“Before fifteen minutes are up, we’ll have to stop, sir,” said Pencroff.
“Well, then, we will make a camp for the night.”
“Well, then, let’s set up camp for the night.”
“How far are we from Granite House?” asked Herbert.
“How far are we from Granite House?” Herbert asked.
“About seven miles, counting the bends of the river, which have taken us to the northwest.”
“About seven miles, including the twists of the river, which have taken us to the northwest.”
“Shall we keep on?” asked the reporter.
“Should we continue?” asked the reporter.
“Yes, as far as we can get,” answered the engineer. “To-morrow, at daylight, we will leave the canoe, and traverse, in two hours I hope, the distance which separates us from the coast, and then we will have nearly the whole day in which to explore the shore.”
“Yes, as far as we can go,” replied the engineer. “Tomorrow, at dawn, we’ll leave the canoe and hopefully cover the distance to the coast in two hours. That way, we’ll have almost the entire day to explore the shore.”
“Push on,” cried Pencroff.
"Keep going," shouted Pencroff.
Very soon the canoe grated on the stones at the bottom of the river, which was not more than twenty feet wide. A thick mass of verdure overhung and descended the stream, and they heard the noise of a waterfall, which indicated that some little distance further on there existed a natural barrier.
Very soon, the canoe scraped against the stones at the bottom of the river, which was no more than twenty feet wide. A thick mass of greenery hung over and descended along the stream, and they could hear the sound of a waterfall, indicating that a natural barrier existed some distance ahead.
And, indeed, at the last turn in the river, they saw the cascade shining through the trees. The canoe scraped over the bottom and then grounded on a rock near the right bank.
And, sure enough, at the last bend in the river, they saw the waterfall shining through the trees. The canoe lightly scraped the bottom and then came to a stop on a rock by the right bank.
It was 5 o’clock, and the level rays of the setting sun illuminated the little fall. Above, the Mercy, supplied from a secret source, was hidden by the bushes. The various streams together had made it a river, but here it was but a shallow, limpid brook.
It was 5 o’clock, and the soft light of the setting sun lit up the small waterfall. Above, the Mercy, fed by a hidden source, was concealed by the bushes. The different streams combined to form a river, but here it was just a shallow, clear brook.
They made camp in this lovely spot. Having disembarked, a fire was lighted under a group of micocouliers, in whose branches Smith and his companions could, if need be, find a refuge for the night.
They set up camp in this beautiful spot. After getting off the boat, they started a fire under a group of micocouliers, where Smith and his companions could find shelter for the night if they needed to.
Supper was soon finished, as they were very hungry, and then there was nothing to do but to go to sleep. But some suspicious growling being heard at nightfall, the fire was so arranged as to protect the sleepers by its flames. Neb and Pencroff kept it lit, and perhaps they were not mistaken in believing to have seen some moving shadows among the trees and bushes; but the night passed without accident, and the next day—the 31st of October—by 5 o’clock all were on foot ready for the start.
Supper was quickly finished since they were really hungry, and then there was nothing to do but go to sleep. However, they heard some suspicious growling at nightfall, so they arranged the fire to protect the sleepers with its flames. Neb and Pencroff kept it burning, and maybe they weren't wrong in thinking they'd seen some moving shadows among the trees and bushes; but the night went by without any incidents, and the next day—the 31st of October—by 5 o'clock everyone was up and ready to go.
CHAPTER XXVI.
GOING TOWARD THE COAST—TROOPS OF MONKEYS—A NEW WATER-COURSE—WHY THE TIDE WAS NOT FELT—A FOREST ON THE SHORE—REPTILE PROMONTORY—SPILETT MAKES HERBERT ENVIOUS—THE BAMBOO FUSILADE.
GOING TOWARD THE COAST— TROOPS OF MONKEYS— A NEW WATERCOURSE— WHY THE TIDE WASN'T FELT— A FOREST ON THE SHORE— REPTILE PROMONTORY— SPILETT MAKES HERBERT JEALOUS— THE BAMBOO FUSILADE.
It was 6 o’clock when the colonists, after an early breakfast, started with the intention of reaching the coast by the shortest route. Smith had estimated that it would take them two hours, but it must depend largely on the nature of the obstacles in the way. This part of the Far West was covered with trees, like an immense thicket composed of many different species. It was, therefore, probable that they would have to make a way with hatchets in hand—and guns also, if they were to judge from the cries heard over night.
It was 6 o’clock when the colonists, after an early breakfast, set out to reach the coast by the quickest route. Smith estimated it would take them two hours, but that would largely depend on the obstacles in their way. This part of the Far West was densely forested, like a huge thicket made up of many different types of trees. So, it was likely that they would have to clear a path with hatchets in hand—and guns too, judging by the cries they heard overnight.
The exact position of the camp had been determined by the situation of Mount Franklin, and since the volcano rose less than three miles to the north, it was only necessary to go directly toward the southwest to reach the west coast.
The exact location of the camp was based on where Mount Franklin was situated, and since the volcano was less than three miles to the north, it was only necessary to head directly southwest to reach the west coast.
After having seen to the mooring of the canoe, the party started, Neb and Pencroff carrying sufficient provisions to last the little troop for two days at least. They were no longer hunting, and the engineer recommended his companions to refrain from unnecessary firing, so as not to give warning of their presence on the coast. The first blows of the hatchet were given in the bushes just above the cascade, while Smith, compass in hand, indicated the route. The forest was, for the most part, composed of such trees as had already been recognized about the lake and on Prospect Plateau. The colonists could advance but slowly, and the engineer believed that in time their route would join with that of Red Creek.
After securing the canoe, the group set off, with Neb and Pencroff carrying enough supplies to last at least two days. They weren't hunting anymore, and the engineer advised his friends to avoid unnecessary gunfire to not alert anyone to their presence on the coast. The first strikes of the hatchet were heard in the bushes just above the waterfall, while Smith, holding a compass, pointed out the way. The forest mostly consisted of the same types of trees they recognized around the lake and on Prospect Plateau. The colonists could only progress slowly, and the engineer believed that eventually, their path would connect with that of Red Creek.
Since their departure, the party had descended the low declivities which constituted the orography of the island, over a very dry district, although the luxuriant vegetation suggested either a hydrographic network permeating the ground beneath, or the proximity to some stream. Nevertheless, Smith did not remember having seen, during the excursion to the crater, any other water courses than Bed Creek and the Mercy.
Since they left, the group had gone down the gentle slopes that made up the island's landscape, through a very dry area, even though the lush greenery hinted at either a hidden water system underground or the nearby presence of a stream. Still, Smith couldn’t recall seeing any other bodies of water during the trip to the crater besides Bed Creek and the Mercy.
During the first few hours of the march, they saw troops of monkeys, who manifested the greatest astonishment at the sight of human beings. Spilett laughingly asked if these robust quadrumanes did not look upon their party as degenerate brethren; and, in truth, the simple pedestrians, impeded at each step by the bushes, entangled in the lianas, stopped by tree trunks, did not compare favorably with these nimble animals, which bounded from branch to branch, moving about without hindrance. These monkeys were very numerous, but, fortunately, they did not manifest any hostile disposition.
During the first few hours of the march, they encountered troops of monkeys, who seemed incredibly surprised to see humans. Spilett joked about whether these strong primates considered their group to be weak relatives. Honestly, the travelers, slowed down at every turn by bushes, caught in vines, and halted by tree trunks, didn’t seem to stack up against these agile creatures that leaped effortlessly from branch to branch. There were a lot of monkeys, but thankfully, they showed no signs of aggression.
They saw, also, some wild-boars, some agoutis, kangaroos, and other rodents, and two or three koulas, which latter Pencroff would have been glad to shoot.
They also spotted some wild boars, a few agoutis, kangaroos, and other rodents, along with two or three koulas, which Pencroff would have been eager to hunt.
“But,” said he, “the hunt has not begun. Play now, my friends, and we will talk to you when we come back.”
“But,” he said, “the hunt hasn’t started yet. Enjoy yourself now, my friends, and we’ll catch up with you when we get back.”
At half-past 9, the route, which bore directly southwest, was suddenly interrupted by a rapid stream, rushing over rocks, and pent in between banks but thirty or forty feet apart. It was deep and clear, but absolutely unnavigable.
At 9:30, the path, which headed straight southwest, was suddenly blocked by a fast-moving stream, rushing over rocks and confined between banks that were only thirty or forty feet apart. It was deep and clear, but completely impassable.
“We are stopped!” cried Neb.
"We're stopped!" cried Neb.
“No,” replied Herbert; “we can swim such a brook as this.”
“No,” Herbert replied; “we can swim across a brook like this.”
“Why should we do that?” answered Smith. “It is certain that this creek empties into the sea. Let us keep to this bank and I will be astonished if it does not soon bring us to the coast. Come on!”
“Why should we do that?” Smith replied. “It’s clear that this creek flows into the sea. Let’s stick to this bank, and I’ll be surprised if it doesn’t lead us to the coast soon. Let’s go!”
“One minute,” said the reporter. “The name of this creek, my friends? We must not leave our geography incomplete.”
“One minute,” said the reporter. “What’s the name of this creek, everyone? We can’t leave our geography unfinished.”
“True enough,” said Pencroff.
"That's true," said Pencroff.
“You name it, my boy,” said the engineer, addressing Herbert.
“You name it, kid,” said the engineer, talking to Herbert.
“Will not it be better to wait till we have discovered its mouth?” asked Herbert.
“Won’t it be better to wait until we find its mouth?” asked Herbert.
“Right,” replied Smith, “let us push on.”
“Okay,” replied Smith, “let's keep moving.”
“Another minute,” exclaimed Pencroff.
“Just another minute,” Pencroff exclaimed.
“What more?” demanded the reporter.
“What else?” demanded the reporter.
“If hunting is forbidden, fishing is allowed, I suppose,” said the sailor.
“If hunting is banned, I guess fishing is okay,” said the sailor.
“We haven’t the time to waste,” answered the engineer.
“We don’t have time to waste,” replied the engineer.
“But just five minutes,” pleaded Pencroff; “I only want five minutes for the sake of breakfast!” And lying down on the bank he plunged his arms in the running waters and soon brought up several dozen of the fine crawfish which swarmed between the rocks.
“But just five minutes,” pleaded Pencroff; “I just need five minutes for breakfast!” And lying down on the bank, he plunged his arms into the flowing water and soon brought up several dozen of the fine crawfish that swarmed between the rocks.
“These will be good!” cried Neb, helping the sailor.
“These are going to be great!” shouted Neb, assisting the sailor.
“Did not I tell you that the island had everything but tobacco?” sighed the sailor.
“Didn’t I tell you that the island had everything except tobacco?” sighed the sailor.
It took but five minutes to fill a sack with these little blue crustaceæ, and then the journey was resumed.
It only took five minutes to fill a bag with these little blue crustaceans, and then the journey continued.
By following the bank the colonists moved more freely. Now and then they found traces of large animals which came to the stream for water, but they found no sign of human beings, and they were not yet in that part of the Far West where the peccary had received the leaden pellet which cost Pencroff a tooth.
By following the bank, the colonists were able to move around more easily. Occasionally, they came across signs of large animals that came to the stream for water, but they saw no evidence of human beings, and they weren't yet in the part of the Far West where the peccary had gotten the lead pellet that cost Pencroff a tooth.
Smith and his companions judged, from the fact that the current rushed towards the sea with such rapidity, that they must be much farther from, the coast than they imagined, because at this time the tide was rising, and its’ effect would have been visible near the mouth of the creek. The engineer was greatly astonished, and often consulted his compass to be sure that the stream, was not returning towards the depths of the forest. Meantime, its waters, gradually widening, became less tumultuous. The growth of trees on the right bank was much denser than on the left, and it was impossible to see through this thicket; but these woods were certainly not inhabited, or Top would have discovered it. At half-past 10, to the extreme surprise of Smith, Herbert, who was walking some paces ahead, suddenly stopped, exclaiming, “The sea!”
Smith and his companions realized, because the current rushed toward the sea so quickly, that they must be much farther from the coast than they thought. At this moment, the tide was coming in, and its effect would have been noticeable near the mouth of the creek. The engineer was very surprised and often checked his compass to make sure the stream wasn't pulling them back into the depths of the forest. Meanwhile, its waters gradually widened and became less turbulent. The trees on the right bank were much thicker than on the left, and it was impossible to see through this dense growth; but these woods definitely weren't inhabited, or Top would have noticed. At 10:30, much to Smith's surprise, Herbert, who was walking a few steps ahead, suddenly stopped and exclaimed, “The sea!”
And a few minutes later the colonists, standing upon the border of the forest, saw the western coast of the island spread before them.
And a few minutes later, the settlers, standing at the edge of the forest, saw the western coastline of the island stretching out in front of them.
But what a contrast was this coast to the one on which chance had thrown them! No granite wall, no reef in the offing, not even a beach. The forest formed the shore, and its furthermost trees, washed by the waves, leaned over the waters. It was in no sense such a beach as is usually met with, composed of vast reaches of sand or heaps of rocks, but a fine border of beautiful trees. The bank was raised above the highest tides, and upon this rich soil, supported by a granite base, the splendid monarchs of the forest seemed to be as firmly set as were those which stood in the interior of the island.
But what a contrast this coast was to the one they had ended up on! No granite cliffs, no reef off in the distance, not even a beach. The forest made up the shore, and its outermost trees, touched by the waves, leaned over the water. It wasn't your typical beach, made of wide stretches of sand or piles of rocks, but a beautiful edge of stunning trees. The bank was raised above the highest tide, and on this rich soil, resting on a granite base, the magnificent trees of the forest seemed as firmly planted as those that grew deeper within the island.
The colonists stood in a hollow by a tiny rivulet, which served as a neck to the other stream; but, curiously enough, these waters, instead of emptying into the sea by a gently sloping opening, fell from a height of more than forty feet—which fact explained why the rising tide did not affect the current. And, on this account, they were unanimous in giving this water-course the name of Fall River.
The colonists stood in a low area by a small stream, which connected to another river; but interestingly, instead of flowing into the sea through a gentle slope, it dropped from over forty feet high—this explained why the incoming tide didn’t change the current. Because of this, they all agreed to name the stream Fall River.
Beyond, towards the north, the forest shore extended for two miles; then the trees became thinner, and, still further on, a line of picturesque heights extended from north to south. On the other hand, all that part of the coast comprised between Fall River and the promontory of Reptile End was bordered by masses of magnificent trees, some upright and others leaning over the sea, whose waves lapped their roots. It was evidently, therefore, on this part of the coast that the exploration must be continued, as this shore offered to the castaways, whoever they might be, a refuge, which the other, desert and savage, had refused.
Beyond, to the north, the forest stretched for two miles; then the trees became sparser, and further on, a series of beautiful hills ran from north to south. On the other side, the coastline between Fall River and the point known as Reptile End was lined with impressive trees, some standing tall and others leaning over the sea, their roots washed by the waves. It was clear that this part of the coast was where the exploration should continue, as this shore offered a refuge for the castaways, whoever they might be, which the other, barren, and wild shore did not.
The weather was beautiful, and from the cliff where the breakfast had been prepared, the view extended far and wide. The horizon was perfectly distinct, without a sail in sight, and upon the coast, as far as could be seen, there was neither boat nor wreck, but the engineer was not willing to be satisfied in this respect, until they had explored the whole distance as far as Serpentine Peninsula.
The weather was amazing, and from the cliff where breakfast was set up, the view went on forever. The horizon was crystal clear, with no ships in sight, and along the coast, as far as the eye could see, there was no boat or wreck. However, the engineer wasn’t satisfied with this and wanted to explore all the way to Serpentine Peninsula.
After a hurried breakfast he gave the signal to start. Instead of traversing a beach, the colonists followed along the coast, under the trees. The distance to Reptile End was about twelve miles, and, had the way been clear, they could have accomplished it in four hours, but the party were constantly obliged to turn out from the way, or to cut branches, or to break through thickets, and these hindrances multiplied as they proceeded. But they saw no signs of a recent shipwreck on the shore; although, as Spilett observed, as the tide was up, they could not say with certainty that there had not been one.
After a quick breakfast, he signaled to start. Instead of walking along the beach, the colonists went along the coast, under the trees. The distance to Reptile End was about twelve miles, and if the path had been clear, they could have made it in four hours, but the group had to constantly veer off the path, cut branches, or push through thick bushes, and these obstacles increased as they went. However, they didn’t see any signs of a recent shipwreck on the shore; although, as Spilett pointed out, since the tide was high, they couldn't say for sure that there hadn’t been one.
This reasoning was just, and, moreover, the incident of the bullet proved, indubitably, that within three months a gun had been fired on the island.
This reasoning was fair, and, in addition, the bullet incident clearly showed that a gun had been fired on the island within the past three months.
At 5 o’clock the extremity of the peninsula was still two miles distant, and it was evident that the colonists would have to camp for the night on the promontory of Reptile End. Happily, game was as plenty here as on the other coast, and birds of different kinds abounded. Two hours later, the party, tired out, reached the promontory. Here the forest border ended, and the shore assumed the usual aspect of a coast. It was possible that an abandoned vessel might be here, but, as the night was falling, it was necessary to postpone the exploration until the morrow.
At 5 o'clock, the end of the peninsula was still two miles away, and it was clear that the colonists would have to camp for the night at Reptile End. Fortunately, there was as much game here as on the other coast, and various birds were plentiful. Two hours later, the group, completely worn out, reached the promontory. Here, the edge of the forest ended, and the shore looked like a typical coast. It was possible there might be an abandoned ship nearby, but with night approaching, they decided to put off the search until the next day.
Pencroff and Herbert hastened to find a suitable place for a camp. The outskirts of the forest died away here, and near them the lad found a bamboo thicket.
Pencroff and Herbert rushed to find a good spot for a camp. The edge of the forest faded away here, and nearby, the boy discovered a bamboo thicket.
“Good,” said he, “this is a valuable discovery.”
“Great,” he said, “this is a significant find.”
“Valuable?” asked Pencroff.
“Worth it?” asked Pencroff.
“Yes, indeed, I need not tell you, Pencroff, all its uses, such as for making baskets, paper, and water-pipes; that the larger ones make excellent building material and strong jars. But—”
“Yes, I definitely don’t need to explain to you, Pencroff, all its uses, like making baskets, paper, and water pipes; that the bigger ones are great for building and strong jars. But—”
“But?”
“But?”
“But perhaps you do not know that in India they eat bamboo as we do asparagus.”
“But maybe you don’t know that in India, they eat bamboo like we eat asparagus.”
“Asparagus thirty feet high?” cried, Pencroff. “And is it good?”
“Asparagus thirty feet tall?” Pencroff exclaimed. “And is it any good?”
“Excellent,” answered the lad. “But they eat only the young sprouts.”
“Great,” replied the young man. “But they only eat the young sprouts.”
“Delicious!” cried Pencroff.
“Yummy!” exclaimed Pencroff.
“And I am sure that the pith of young plants preserved in vinegar makes an excellent condiment.”
“And I’m sure that the core of young plants kept in vinegar makes a great seasoning.”
“Better and better.”
"Getting better and better."
“And, lastly, they exude a sweet liquor which makes a pleasant drink.”
“And, finally, they release a sweet liquid that makes a nice drink.”
“Is that all?” demanded the sailor.
“Is that it?” asked the sailor.
“That’s all.”
"That's it."
“Isn’t it good to smoke?”
"Isn’t smoking good?"
“No, my poor Pencroff, you cannot smoke it!”
“No, my poor Pencroff, you can't smoke it!”
They did not have to search far for a good place for the camp. The rocks, much worn by the action of the sea, had many hollows that would afford shelter from the wind. But just as they were about to enter one of these cavities they were arrested by formidable growlings.
They didn’t have to look hard for a good spot for the camp. The rocks, worn down by the sea, had plenty of hollows that would provide shelter from the wind. But just as they were about to enter one of these openings, they were stopped by loud growling.
“Get back!” cried Pencroff, “we have only small shot in our guns, and these beasts would mind it no more than salt!”
“Get back!” shouted Pencroff. “We only have small shots in our guns, and these creatures wouldn’t care about it any more than salt!”
And the sailor, seizing Herbert, dragged him behind some rocks, just as a huge jaguar appeared at the mouth of the cavern. Its skin was yellow, striped with black, and softened off with white under its belly. The beast advanced, and looked about. Its hair was bristling, and its eyes sparkling as if it was not scenting man for the first time.
And the sailor, grabbing Herbert, pulled him behind some rocks, just as a massive jaguar showed up at the entrance of the cave. Its fur was yellow with black stripes and faded to white underneath its belly. The animal moved forward and scanned the area. Its fur was on edge, and its eyes sparkled as if it was encountering a human for the first time.
Just then Spilett appeared, coming round the high rocks, and Herbert, thinking he had not seen the jaguar, was about rushing towards him, when the reporter, motioning with his hand, continued his approach. It was not his first tiger.
Just then, Spilett showed up, coming around the high rocks, and Herbert, believing he hadn’t seen the jaguar, was about to rush toward him when the reporter, signaling with his hand, kept walking forward. It wasn’t his first tiger.
Advancing within ten paces of the animal, he rested motionless, his gun at his shoulder, not a muscle quivering. The jaguar, crouching back, made a bound towards the hunter, but as it sprung a bullet struck it between the eyes, dropping it dead.
Advancing within ten steps of the animal, he stood still, his gun at his shoulder, not a muscle twitching. The jaguar, crouching low, jumped toward the hunter, but as it leaped, a bullet hit it between the eyes, dropping it dead.
Herbert and Pencroff rushed to it, and Smith and Neb coming up at the moment, all stopped to look at the splendid animal lying at length upon the sand.
Herbert and Pencroff hurried over, and just then Smith and Neb arrived, all stopping to admire the magnificent animal stretched out on the sand.
“Oh, Mr. Spilett, how I envy you!” cried Herbert, in an excess of natural enthusiasm.
“Oh, Mr. Spilett, I really envy you!” exclaimed Herbert, filled with natural excitement.
“Well, my boy, you would have done as well,” answered the reporter.
"Well, my boy, you would have done just as well," replied the reporter.
“I have been as cool as that!”
"I've been as chill as that!"
“Only imagine, Herbert, that a jaguar is a hare, and you will shoot him as unconcernedly as anything in the world! And now,” continued the reporter, “since the jaguar has left his retreat I don’t see, my friends, why we should not occupy the place during the night”
“Just picture it, Herbert, if a jaguar were a hare, you'd shoot it without a second thought! And now,” the reporter continued, “since the jaguar has come out of hiding, I don’t see, my friends, why we shouldn’t take over the spot for the night.”
“But some others may return!” said Pencroff.
“But some others might come back!” said Pencroff.
“We will only have to light a fire at the entrance of the cavern,” said the reporter, “and they will not dare to cross the threshold.”
“We just need to light a fire at the entrance of the cave,” said the reporter, “and they won’t dare to cross the threshold.”
“To the jaguar house, then,” cried the sailor, dragging the body of the animal after him.
“To the jaguar house, then,” shouted the sailor, pulling the animal’s body behind him.
The colonists went to the abandoned cave, and, while Neb was occupied in skinning the carcass, the others busied themselves with piling a great quantity of dry wood around the threshold. This done they installed themselves in the cave, whose floor was strewn with bones; the arms were loaded for an emergency; and, having eaten supper, as soon as the time for sleep was come, the fire at the entrance was lit.
The colonists went to the empty cave, and while Neb was busy skinning the carcass, the others worked on stacking a large amount of dry wood around the entrance. Once that was done, they settled into the cave, which was filled with bones; their arms were ready for any emergency; and after having dinner, when it was time to sleep, they lit the fire at the entrance.
Immediately a tremendous fusilade ensued! It was the bamboo which, in burning, exploded like fire-works! The noise, in itself, would have been sufficient to frighten off the bravest beasts.
Immediately a huge barrage followed! It was the bamboo that, when burning, exploded like fireworks! The noise alone would have been enough to scare off the bravest animals.
CHAPTER XXVII.
PROPOSAL TO RETURN BY THE SOUTH COAST—ITS CONFIGURATION—SEARCH FOR THE SHIPWRECKED—A WAIF IN THE AIR—DISCOVERY OF A SMALL NATURAL HARBOR—MIDNIGHT ON THE MERCY—A DRIFTING CANOE.
PROPOSAL TO RETURN BY THE SOUTH COAST—ITS LAYOUT—SEARCH FOR THE SHIPWRECKED—A STRAY IN THE AIR—DISCOVERY OF A SMALL NATURAL HARBOR—MIDNIGHT ON THE MERCY—A DRIFTING CANOE.
Smith and his companions slept like mice in the cavern which the jaguar had so politely vacated, and, by sunrise, all were on the extremity of the promontory, and scrutinizing the horizon visible on either hand. No ship or wreck was to be seen, and not even with the spy-glass could any suspicious object be discerned. It was the same along the shore, at least on all that portion, three miles in length, which formed the south side of the promontory; as, beyond that, a slope of the land concealed the rest of the coast, and even from the extremity of Serpentine Peninsula, Claw Cape was hidden by high rocks.
Smith and his friends slept soundly in the cave that the jaguar had kindly left behind, and by sunrise, they were all at the edge of the promontory, scanning the horizon on either side. No ship or wreck was in sight, and even with the telescope, they couldn't spot anything unusual. The same was true along the shore, at least for the three-mile stretch that made up the south side of the promontory; beyond that, a slope of land blocked the view of the rest of the coastline, and even from the tip of Serpentine Peninsula, Claw Cape was obscured by tall rocks.
The southern bank of the island remained to be explored. Had they not better attempt this at once, and give up this day to it? This procedure had not entered into their first calculations, as, when the canoe was left at the sources of the Mercy, the colonists thought that, having explored the west coast, they would return by the river; Smith having then believed that this coast sheltered either a wreck or a passing ship. But as soon as this shore disclosed no landing place, it became necessary to search the south side of the island for those whom they had failed to discover on the west.
The southern side of the island still needed to be explored. Wouldn't it be better to do that right away and dedicate today to it? This wasn't part of their original plan since, when they left the canoe at the sources of the Mercy, the colonists thought they would return by the river after exploring the west coast. Smith had believed that the coast might hide either a wreck or a passing ship. However, when they found that this shore had no landing spots, it became essential to look for those they hadn’t found on the west side of the island.
It was Spilett who proposed continuing the exploration so as to settle definitely the question of the supposed shipwreck, and he inquired how far it would be to Claw Cape.
It was Spilett who suggested continuing the exploration to finally resolve the issue of the supposed shipwreck, and he asked how far it was to Claw Cape.
“About thirty miles,” answered the engineer, “if we allow for the irregularity of the shore.”
“About thirty miles,” replied the engineer, “if we take into account the unevenness of the shore.”
“Thirty miles!” exclaimed Spilett, “that would be a long walk. Nevertheless, I think we should return to Granite House by the south coast.”
“Thirty miles!” Spilett exclaimed, “that’s a long walk. Still, I think we should head back to Granite House along the south coast.”
“But,” observed Herbert, “from Claw Cape to Granite House is at least ten miles further.”
“But,” Herbert noted, “it’s at least ten miles further from Claw Cape to Granite House.”
“Call it forty miles altogether,” answered the reporter, “and do not let us hesitate to do it. At least we will have seen this unknown shore, and will not have it to explore over again.”
“Let's say it's a total of forty miles,” replied the reporter, “and let's not hesitate to do it. At least we'll have seen this unfamiliar coast and won't have to explore it again.”
“That is so,” said Pencroff. “But how about the canoe?”
“That’s true,” said Pencroff. “But what about the canoe?”
“The canoe can stay where it is for a day or two,” replied Spilett. “We can hardly say that the island is infested with thieves!” ‘
“The canoe can stay where it is for a day or two,” replied Spilett. “We can hardly say that the island is crawling with thieves!”
“Nevertheless, when I remember that affair of the turtle, I am not so confident.”
“Still, when I think about that turtle situation, I’m not so sure.”
“The turtle! the turtle!” cried the reporter, “don’t you know that the sea turned it over?”
“Look, the turtle!” shouted the reporter. “Don’t you know the sea flipped it over?”
“Who can say?” murmured the engineer.
“Who can say?” the engineer murmured.
“But—,” began Neb, who, it was evident, wished to say something.
“But—,” started Neb, who clearly wanted to say something.
“What is it, Neb?” questioned the engineer.
“What’s up, Neb?” asked the engineer.
“If we do return by the shore to Claw Cape, after having gone round it, we will be stopped—”
“If we make our way back to the shore at Claw Cape after going around it, we will be stopped—”
“By the Mercy!” cried Herbert. “And we have no bridge or boat!”
“By the Mercy!” shouted Herbert. “And we don’t have a bridge or a boat!”
“Oh!” answered Pencroff, “we can cross it readily enough with some logs.”
“Oh!” replied Pencroff, “we can easily cross it with some logs.”
“Nevertheless,” said Spilett, “it would be well to build a bridge some time if we wish to have ready access to the Far West.”
“Still,” Spilett said, “it would be a good idea to build a bridge at some point if we want to have easy access to the Far West.”
“A bridge!” cried Pencroff. “Well isn’t Mr. Smith State Engineer? If we shall need a bridge we will have one. As to carrying you over the Mercy to-night without getting wet, I will look out for that. We still have a day’s provision, which is all that is necessary, and, besides, the game may not give out to-day as It did yesterday. So let us go.”
“A bridge!” shouted Pencroff. “Isn’t Mr. Smith the State Engineer? If we need a bridge, we’ll make one. As for getting you across the Mercy tonight without getting wet, I’ll take care of that. We still have enough food for the day, which is all we need, and besides, the game might hold up better today than it did yesterday. So let’s go.”
The proposal of the reporter, strongly seconded by the sailor, obtained general approval, as every one wished to end their doubts, and by returning by Claw Cape the exploration would be complete. But no time was to be lost, for the tramp was long, and they counted on reaching Granite House that night. So by 6 o’clock the little party was on its way, the guns loaded with ball in case of an encounter, and Top, who went ahead, ordered to search the edge of the forest.
The reporter's proposal, which the sailor enthusiastically supported, received widespread approval since everyone wanted to put their doubts to rest, and returning via Claw Cape would complete the exploration. But they couldn't waste any time because the journey was long, and they planned to reach Granite House that night. So by 6 o’clock, the small group was on their way, with their guns loaded with ammunition in case they encountered any danger, and Top, who led the way, was instructed to check the forest's edge.
The first five miles of the distance was rapidly traversed, and not the slightest sign of any human being was seen. When the colonists arrived at the point where the curvature of the promontory ended, and Washington Bay began, they were able to take in at one view the whole extent of the southern coast. Twenty-five miles distant the shore was terminated by Claw Cape, which was faintly visible through the morning mists, and reproduced as a mirage in mid-air. Between the place occupied by the colonists and the upper end of the Great Bay the shore began with a flat and continuous beach, bordered in the background by tall trees; following this, it became very irregular, and thrust sharp points into the sea, and finally a heap of black rocks, thrown together in picturesque disorder, completed the distance to Claw Cape.
The first five miles were quickly covered, and there was not a single sign of any human being. When the colonists reached the point where the curve of the promontory ended and Washington Bay began, they could see the entire southern coast all at once. Twenty-five miles away, the shore ended at Claw Cape, which was faintly visible through the morning mist, appearing almost like a mirage in the air. Between where the colonists stood and the upper end of the Great Bay, the shore started with a flat, continuous beach, lined at the back with tall trees. After that, it became very irregular, jutting out into the sea with sharp points, and finally, a jumble of black rocks, haphazardly piled, completed the view to Claw Cape.
“A ship would surely be lost on these sands and shoals and reefs,” said Pencroff.
“A ship would definitely get stuck on these sands and shallow areas and reefs,” said Pencroff.
“It is poor quarters!”
“Those are terrible living conditions!”
“But at least a portion of her would be left,” observed the reporter.
“But at least part of her would remain,” the reporter noted.
“Some bits of wood would remain on the reefs, nothing on the sands,” answered the sailor.
“Some pieces of wood would stay on the reefs, nothing on the sand,” replied the sailor.
“How is that?”
"How's that?"
“Because the sands are even more dangerous than the rocks, and swallow up everything that is thrown upon them; a few days suffice to bury out of sight the hull of a ship of many tons measurement.”
“Because the sands are even more dangerous than the rocks and consume everything thrown onto them; just a few days are enough to completely bury the hull of a large ship.”
“Then, Pencroff,” questioned the engineer, “if a vessel had been lost on these banks, it would not be surprising if there was no trace left?”
“Then, Pencroff,” asked the engineer, “if a ship had gone down on these shores, it wouldn’t be surprising if there was no evidence left?”
“No, sir, that is after a time or after a tempest. Nevertheless, it would be surprising, as now, that no spars or timbers were thrown upon the shore beyond the reach of the sea.”
“No, sir, that's after a while or after a storm. Still, it would be surprising, just like now, that no debris or wood was washed up on the shore beyond the tide’s reach.”
“Let us continue our search,” replied Smith.
“Let’s keep searching,” Smith replied.
By 1 o’clock the party had accomplished twenty miles, having reached the upper end of Washington Bay, and they stopped to lunch.
By 1 o’clock, the party had covered twenty miles, reaching the upper end of Washington Bay, and they took a break for lunch.
Here began an irregular shore, oddly cut into by a long line of rocks, succeeding the sand banks, and just beginning to show themselves by long streaks of foam, above the undulations of the receding waves. From this point to Claw Cape the beach was narrow and confined between the reef of rocks and the forest, and the march would therefore be more difficult. The granite wall sunk more and more, and above it the tops of the trees, undisturbed by a breath of air, appeared in the background.
Here began an uneven shoreline, strangely shaped by a long stretch of rocks, following the sandy banks, and just starting to reveal themselves with long streaks of foam above the rolling waves. From here to Claw Cape, the beach was narrow and squeezed between the rocky reef and the forest, making the hike more challenging. The granite wall sank lower and lower, and above it, the tops of the trees stood still, untouched by a breath of wind, appearing in the background.
After half an hour’s rest the colonists took up the march again, on the lookout for any sign of a wreck, but without success. They found out, however, that edible mussels were plenty on this beach, although they would not gather them until means of transport between the two banks of the river should have been perfected.
After half an hour of resting, the colonists resumed their march, keeping an eye out for any sign of a wreck, but they had no luck. They did discover, though, that there were plenty of edible mussels on this beach, although they wouldn’t collect them until they had a better way to transport them across the river.
Towards 3 o’clock, Smith and his companions reached a narrow inlet, unfed by any water-course. It formed a veritable little natural harbor, invisible from without, and approached by a narrow passage guarded by the reefs. At the upper end of this creek some violent convulsion had shattered the rock, and a narrow, sloping passage gave access to the upper plateau, which proved to be ten miles from Claw Cape, and therefore four miles in a direct line from Prospect Plateau.
Towards 3 o’clock, Smith and his friends arrived at a narrow inlet, without any stream feeding it. It created a real little natural harbor, hidden from view, and accessed by a tight passage protected by the reefs. At the top end of this creek, a powerful upheaval had broken the rock, and a steep, sloping passage led up to the higher plateau, which was ten miles from Claw Cape, or four miles in a straight line from Prospect Plateau.
Spilett proposed to his companions to halt here, and, as the march had sharpened their appetites, although it was not dinner time, no one objected to a bit of venison, and with this lunch they would be able to await supper at Granite House.
Spilett suggested to his friends that they stop here, and since the walk had made them hungry, even though it wasn't dinner time, nobody argued about having some venison. With this snack, they'd be able to wait for supper at Granite House.
Soon the colonists, seated under a group of splendid pines, were eating heartily of the provisions which Neb had brought out from his haversack. The place was some fifty or sixty feet above the sea, and the view, extending beyond the furthest rock of the cape, was lost in Union Bay. But the islet and Prospect Plateau were invisible, as the high ground and the curtain of high trees shut out the horizon to the north. Neither over the extent of sea nor on that part of the coast which it was still necessary to explore could they discover even with the spyglass any suspicious object.
Soon the colonists, sitting under a group of beautiful pine trees, were enjoying the food that Neb had brought out from his backpack. The spot was about fifty or sixty feet above sea level, and the view, stretching beyond the farthest rock of the cape, disappeared into Union Bay. However, the small island and Prospect Plateau were hidden from sight, as the elevated ground and the thick line of tall trees blocked the view to the north. Neither over the wide expanse of ocean nor along the coastline they still needed to explore could they spot any suspicious objects, even with the binoculars.
“Well” said Spilett, “we can console ourselves by thinking that no one is disputing the island with us.”
“Well,” said Spilett, “we can take comfort in knowing that no one is contesting the island with us.”
“But how about the pellet?” said Herbert. “It was not a dream.”
“But what about the pellet?” Herbert said. “It wasn’t a dream.”
“Indeed it was not!” cried Pencroff, thinking of his missing tooth.
“Absolutely not!” yelled Pencroff, remembering his missing tooth.
“Well, what are we to conclude?” asked the reporter.
“Well, what are we supposed to conclude?” asked the reporter.
“This,” said Smith, “that within three months a ship, voluntarily or otherwise, has touched—”
“This,” said Smith, “is that within three months a ship, whether by choice or not, has touched—”
“What! You will admit, Cyrus, that it has been swallowed up without leaving any trace?” cried the reporter.
“What! You have to agree, Cyrus, that it has disappeared without a trace?” the reporter exclaimed.
“No, my dear Spilett; but you must remember that while it is certain that a human being has been here, it seems just as certain that he is not here now.”
“No, my dear Spilett; but you have to remember that while it’s clear a person has been here, it’s just as clear that they are not here now.”
“Then, if I understand you sir,” said Herbert, “the ship has gone again?”
“Then, if I understand you correctly, sir,” said Herbert, “the ship has left again?”
“Evidently.”
"Clearly."
“And we have lost, beyond return, a chance to get home?” said Neb.
“And we’ve lost, with no way back, a chance to get home?” said Neb.
“I believe without return.”
“I believe without expectation.”
“Well then, since the chance is lost, let us push on,” said Pencroff, already home-sick for Granite House.
“Well then, since the opportunity is gone, let’s keep going,” said Pencroff, already longing for Granite House.
“But, just as they were rising, Top’s barking was heard, and the dog burst from the forest, holding in his mouth a soiled rag.
“But, just as they were getting up, Top’s barking was heard, and the dog came running out of the forest, holding a dirty rag in his mouth.”
Neb took it from him. It was a bit of strong cloth. Top, still barking, seemed by his motions to invite his master to follow into the wood.
Neb took it from him. It was a piece of strong fabric. Top, still barking, appeared to urge his master to follow him into the woods.
“Here is something which will explain my bullet,” cried Pencroff.
“Here’s something that will explain my bullet,” shouted Pencroff.
“A shipwrecked person!” answered Herbert.
“A shipwrecked person!” replied Herbert.
“Wounded, perhaps!” exclaimed Neb.
"Wounded, maybe!" exclaimed Neb.
“Or dead!” responded the reporter.
"Or dead!" replied the reporter.
And all holding their arms in readiness, hurried after the dog through the outskirts of the forests. They advanced some distance into the wood, but, to their disappointment, they saw no tracks. The underbrush and lianas were uninjured and had to be cut away with the hatchet, as in the depths of the forest. It was hard to imagine that any human creature had passed there, and yet Top’s action showed no uncertainty, but was more like that of a human being having a fixed purpose.
And all with their arms ready, hurried after the dog through the edges of the forest. They moved further into the woods, but to their disappointment, they found no tracks. The underbrush and vines were untouched and had to be cleared away with the hatchet, just like in the deeper parts of the forest. It was hard to believe that any human had been there, and yet Top's behavior showed no hesitation, resembling that of a person with a clear purpose.
In a few minutes the dog stopped. The colonists, who had arrived at a sort of glade surrounded by high trees, looked all about them, but neither in the underbrush or between the tree trunks could they discover a thing.
In a few minutes, the dog stopped. The colonists, who had arrived at a clearing surrounded by tall trees, looked around, but neither in the underbrush nor between the tree trunks could they find anything.
“What is it, Top?” said Smith.
"What's up, Top?" Smith asked.
Top, barking louder, ran to the foot of a gigantic pine.
Top barked even louder and raced to the base of a huge pine tree.
Suddenly Pencroff exclaimed:—
Suddenly, Pencroff shouted:—
“This is capital!”
“This is awesome!”
“What’s that,” asked Spilett.
“What's that?” asked Spilett.
“We’ve been hunting for some waif on the sea or land—”
“We’ve been searching for some stray on the sea or land—”
“Well?”
"What's up?"
“And here it is in the air!”
“And here it is in the air!”
And the sailor pointed out a mass of faded cloth caught on the summit of the pine, a piece of which Top had found on the ground.
And the sailor pointed to a bunch of worn-out fabric stuck on the top of the pine tree, a piece of which Top had found on the ground.
“But that is no waif!” exclaimed Spilett.
“But that is no stray!” exclaimed Spilett.
“Indeed it is,” answered Pencroff.
"Definitely," Pencroff replied.
“How is it!”
"How's it going!"
“It is all that is left of our balloon, of our ship which is stranded on the top of this tree.”
“It’s all that’s left of our balloon, of our ship that’s stuck on top of this tree.”
Pencroff was not mistaken, and he added, with a shout:—
Pencroff was right, and he added, with a shout:—
“And there is good stuff in it which will keep us in linen for years. It will make us handkerchiefs and shirts. Aha, Mr. Spilett! what do you say of an island where shirts grow on the trees?”
“And there’s great stuff in it that will keep us in linen for years. It’ll make us handkerchiefs and shirts. Aha, Mr. Spilett! What do you think about an island where shirts grow on trees?”
It was, indeed, a fortunate thing for the colonists that the aerostat, after having made its last bound into the air, had fallen again on the island. They could, either keep the envelope in its present shape, in case they might desire to attempt a new flight through the air, or, after having taken off the varnish, they could make use of its hundreds of ells of good cotton cloth. At these thoughts all shared Pencroff’s joy.
It was, in fact, a lucky break for the colonists that the airship, after making its final ascent, had come back down on the island. They could either keep the balloon as it was if they decided to try flying again, or after removing the varnish, they could use its hundreds of yards of good cotton fabric. At this idea, everyone shared in Pencroff’s excitement.
It was no easy task to take down this envelope from the tree top. But Neb, Herbert, and the sailor climbed up to it, and after two hours of hard work not only the envelope, with its valve, springs, and leather mountings, but the net, equivalent to a large quantity of cordage and ropes, together with the iron ring and the anchor, lay upon the ground. The envelope, excepting the rent, was in good order, and only its lower end had been torn away.
It wasn’t easy to get that envelope down from the top of the tree. But Neb, Herbert, and the sailor climbed up and, after two hours of hard work, managed to bring down not just the envelope, with its valve, springs, and leather attachments, but also the net, which was like a large amount of cord and ropes, along with the iron ring and the anchor, all lying on the ground. The envelope was in good shape, except for a tear at the bottom.
It was a gift from heaven.
It was a gift from the universe.
“Nevertheless, Mr. Smith,” said the sailor, “if we ever do decide to leave the island it won’t be in a balloon, I hope. These air ships don’t always go the way you want them to, as we have found out. If you will let me have my way, we will build a ship of twenty tons, and you will allow me to cut from this cloth a foresail and jib. The rest of it will do for clothes.”
“Still, Mr. Smith,” said the sailor, “if we ever decide to leave the island, I really hope it’s not in a balloon. These airships don’t always go where you want them to, as we’ve learned. If you let me have my way, we’ll build a twenty-ton ship, and you’ll let me cut a foresail and jib from this cloth. The rest can be used for clothes.”
“We will see about it, Pencroff,” answered Smith.
“We'll see about that, Pencroff,” replied Smith.
“And meanwhile it must all be put away carefully,” said Neb.
“And in the meantime, everything needs to be put away carefully,” Neb said.
In truth, they could not think of carrying all this weight of material to Granite House; and while waiting for a proper means of removing it, it was important not to leave it exposed to the weather. The colonists, uniting their efforts, succeeded in dragging it to the shore, where they discovered a cave so situated that neither wind, rain, nor sea could get at it.
In reality, they couldn’t imagine hauling all this heavy material to Granite House; and while they waited for a proper way to move it, it was crucial not to leave it vulnerable to the elements. The colonists joined forces and managed to pull it to the shore, where they found a cave that was positioned so that neither wind, rain, nor sea could reach it.
“It is a wardrobe,” said Pencroff; “but since it does not kick, it will be prudent to hide the opening, not, perhaps from two-footed, but from four-footed thieves!”
“It’s a wardrobe,” said Pencroff; “but since it doesn’t kick, it would be wise to hide the opening, not necessarily from two-legged thieves, but from four-legged ones!”
By 6 o’clock everything was stored away, and after having named the little inlet, Balloon, Harbor, they took the road for Claw Cape. Pencroff and the engineer discussed several projects, which it would be well to attend to at once. The first thing was to build a bridge across the Mercy, and, as the canoe was too small, to bring the balloon over in the cart. Then to build a decked launch, which Pencroff would make cutter-rigged, and in which they could make voyages of circumnavigation—around the island; then, etc.
By 6 o’clock, everything was put away, and after naming the small inlet Balloon Harbor, they headed towards Claw Cape. Pencroff and the engineer talked about several projects that needed immediate attention. The first task was to build a bridge across the Mercy, and since the canoe was too small, they would transport the balloon in the cart. Next, they planned to build a decked launch, which Pencroff would rig as a cutter, allowing them to navigate around the island, and so on.
In the meantime the night approached, and it was already dark, when the colonists reached Jetsam Point, where they had discovered the precious box. But here, as elsewhere, there was nothing to indicate a shipwreck, and it became necessary to adopt the opinions expressed by Smith.
In the meantime, night fell, and it was already dark when the colonists arrived at Jetsam Point, where they had found the valuable box. But here, like in other places, there was no sign of a shipwreck, and they had to agree with Smith's views.
The four miles from Jetsam Point to Granite House were quickly traversed, but it was midnight when the colonists arrived at the first bend above the mouth of the Mercy. There the river was eighty feet wide, and Pencroff, who had undertaken to overcome the difficulty of crossing it, set to work. It must be admitted that the colonists were fatigued. The tramp had been long, and the incident of the balloon had not rested their arms or legs. They were therefore anxious to get back to Granite House to supper and bed, and if they had only had the bridge, in a quarter of an hour they could have been at home.
The four miles from Jetsam Point to Granite House were covered quickly, but it was midnight when the colonists reached the first bend above the mouth of the Mercy. There, the river was eighty feet wide, and Pencroff, who had taken on the challenge of crossing it, got to work. It's worth noting that the colonists were tired. The hike had been long, and the incident with the balloon had not given them any break for their arms or legs. They were eager to get back to Granite House for dinner and rest, and if they had just had the bridge, they could have been home in a quarter of an hour.
The night was very dark. Pencroff and Neb, armed with the hatchets, chose two trees near the bank, and began cutting them down, in order to make a raft. Smith and Spilett, seated on the ground, waited to assist their companions, and Herbert sauntered about, doing nothing.
The night was really dark. Pencroff and Neb, with their hatchets, picked two trees by the riverbank and started chopping them down to build a raft. Smith and Spilett sat on the ground, ready to help their friends, while Herbert strolled around, not doing anything.
All at once the lad, who had gone up the stream, returned hurriedly, and, pointing back, exclaimed:—
All of a sudden, the boy who had gone upstream came back quickly and, pointing behind him, shouted:—
“What is that drifting there?”
"What’s that drifting over there?"
Pencroff stopped work and perceived an object resting motionless in the gloom.
Pencroff paused his work and noticed an object sitting still in the shadows.
“A canoe!” he exclaimed.
"A canoe!" he said.
All came up and saw, to their astonishment, a boat following the current.
Everyone came up and was amazed to see a boat floating with the current.
“Canoe, ahoy!” shouted Pencroff from force of habit, forgetting that it might be better to keep quiet.
“Canoe, ahoy!” shouted Pencroff out of habit, forgetting that it might be better to stay quiet.
There was no answer. The boat continued to drift, and it was not more than a dozen paces off, when the sailor exclaimed:—
There was no response. The boat kept drifting, and it was no more than a dozen steps away when the sailor shouted:—
“Why, it’s our canoe! She has broken away and drifted down with the current. Well, we must admit that she comes in the nick of time!”
“Wow, it’s our canoe! It got loose and floated away with the current. Well, we have to admit that it arrives just in time!”
“Our canoe!” murmured the engineer.
"Our canoe!" whispered the engineer.
Pencroff was right. It was indeed their canoe, which had doubtless broken loose and drifted all the way from the headwaters of the Mercy! It was important to seize it in passing before it should be drawn into the rapid current at the mouth of the river, and Pencroff and Neb, by the aid of a long pole, did this, and drew the canoe to the bank.
Pencroff was right. It was their canoe, which must have come loose and floated all the way from the headwaters of the Mercy! It was crucial to grab it quickly before it got caught in the fast current at the river's mouth, and Pencroff and Neb used a long pole to do just that, pulling the canoe to the shore.
The engineer stepped in first, and, seizing the rope, assured himself that it had been really worn in two against the rocks.
The engineer was the first to enter, and grabbing the rope, confirmed that it had indeed been worn in two by the rocks.
“This,” said the reporter in an undertone; “this is a coincidence—”
“This,” said the reporter quietly, “this is a coincidence—”
“It is very strange!” answered the engineer.
“It’s really odd!” replied the engineer.
At least it was fortunate, and while no one could doubt that the rope had been broken by friction, the astonishing part of the affair was that the canoe had arrived at the moment when the colonists were there to seize it, for a quarter of an hour later, and it would have been carried out to sea. Had there been such things as genii, this incident would have been sufficient to make the colonists believe that the island was inhabited by a supernatural being, who placed his power at their disposal.
At least it was lucky, and while no one could argue that the rope had broken from friction, the surprising part of the situation was that the canoe showed up just when the colonists were there to grab it; a quarter of an hour later, and it would have been swept out to sea. If genies existed, this event would have been enough to convince the colonists that the island was home to a supernatural being, who was using their power to help them.
With a few strokes the party arrived at the mouth of the Mercy. The canoe was drawn on shore at the Chimneys, and all took their way to the ladder at Granite House.
With a few strokes, the group reached the mouth of the Mercy. The canoe was pulled ashore at the Chimneys, and everyone headed to the ladder at Granite House.
But, just then, Top began barking furiously, and Neb, who was feeling for the lower rung, cried out:—
But just then, Top started barking wildly, and Neb, who was searching for the lower rung, shouted out:—
“The ladder’s gone!”
“The ladder is gone!”
CHAPTER XXVIII
PENCROFF’S HALLOOS—A NIGHT IN THE CHIMNEYS—HERBERT’S ARROW—SMITH’S PLAN—AN UNEXPECTED SOLUTION—WHAT HAD HAPPENED IN GRANITE HOUSE—HOW THE COLONISTS OBTAINED A NEW DOMESTIC.
PENCROFF’S SHOUTS—A NIGHT IN THE CHIMNEYS—HERBERT’S ARROW—SMITH’S PLAN—AN UNEXPECTED SOLUTION—WHAT HAD HAPPENED IN GRANITE HOUSE—HOW THE COLONISTS GOT A NEW HOUSEHOLD MEMBER.
Smith stood silent. His companions searched in the obscurity along the wall, over the ground, for the broken part of the ladder, supposing it had been torn off by the wind. But the ladder had certainly disappeared, although it was impossible to tell in the darkness whether a gust of wind had not carried it up and lodged it on the first ledge.
Smith stood quietly. His friends looked around in the darkness along the wall and on the ground for the broken part of the ladder, thinking it might have been blown away by the wind. But the ladder was definitely gone, even though it was hard to tell in the dark if a strong gust had lifted it up and placed it on the first ledge.
“If this is a joke, it’s a pretty poor one,” cried Pencroff. “To get home and not be able to find the staircase, won’t do for tired men.”
“If this is a joke, it’s a pretty bad one,” shouted Pencroff. “Getting home and not being able to find the stairs doesn’t work for tired guys.”
Neb stood in open-mouthed amazement.
Neb stood in stunned amazement.
“It could not have been carried away by the wind!” said Herbert.
“It couldn't have been blown away by the wind!” said Herbert.
“I’m beginning to think that strange things happen in Lincoln Island!” said Pencroff.
“I’m starting to think that weird stuff happens on Lincoln Island!” said Pencroff.
“Strange?” rejoined Spilett. “Why no, Pencroff, nothing is more natural. Somebody has come while we have been absent, and has taken possession of the house and drawn up the ladder!”.
“Strange?” replied Spilett. “Not at all, Pencroff, that’s completely natural. Someone came while we were away, took over the house, and pulled up the ladder!”
“Some one!” cried the sailor. “Who could it be?”
“Someone!” shouted the sailor. “Who could it be?”
“Why, the man who shot the bullet,” answered the reporter “How else can you explain it?”
“Why, the guy who fired the shot,” replied the reporter. “How else can you explain it?”
“Very well, if any one is up there,” replied Pencroff, beginning to get angry, “I will hail him, and he had better answer.”
“Alright, if anyone is up there,” replied Pencroff, starting to feel angry, “I’ll call out to him, and he better respond.”
And in a voice of thunder the sailor gave a prolonged “Ohe,” which was loudly repeated by the echoes.
And in a booming voice, the sailor shouted a long “Ohe,” which was loudly echoed back.
The colonists listened, and thought that they heard a sort of chuckling proceed from Granite House. But there was no answering voice to the sailor, who repeated his appeal in vain.
The colonists listened and thought they heard a kind of chuckling coming from Granite House. But there was no reply to the sailor, who repeated his request in vain.
Here was an event that would have astonished people the most indifferent, and from their situation the colonists could not be that. To them, the slightest incident was of moment, and certainly during their seven months’ residence nothing equal to this had happened.
Here was an event that would have amazed even the most indifferent people, and given their situation, the colonists couldn't be indifferent. For them, even the smallest incident was significant, and certainly, during their seven months of living there, nothing like this had happened.
They stood there at the foot of Granite House not knowing what to do or to say. Neb was disconsolate at not being able to get back to the kitchen, especially as the provisions taken for the journey had all been eaten, and they had no present means of renewing them.
They stood there at the base of Granite House, unsure of what to do or say. Neb was upset about not being able to get back to the kitchen, especially since they had eaten all the supplies they took for the trip and had no way to replenish them.
“There is but one thing to do, my friends,” said Smith, “to wait until daylight, and then to be governed by circumstances. Meanwhile let us go to the Chimneys, where we will be sheltered, and, even if we cannot eat, we can sleep.”
“There’s just one thing to do, my friends,” said Smith, “wait until dawn and let circumstances guide us. In the meantime, let’s head to the Chimneys, where we’ll be safe, and even if we can’t eat, at least we can sleep.”
“But who is the ill-mannered fellow that has played us this trick?” asked Pencroff again, who thought it no joke.
“But who is the rude person who played this trick on us?” asked Pencroff again, who didn’t think it was funny at all.
Whoever he was, there was nothing to do but to follow the engineer’s advice. Top having been ordered to lie down under the windows of Granite House, took his place without complaint. The brave dog remained at the foot of the wall, while his master and his companions took shelter among the rocks.
Whoever he was, there was nothing to do but follow the engineer’s advice. Top, having been told to lie down under the windows of Granite House, took his place without a fuss. The loyal dog stayed at the base of the wall while his owner and friends took cover among the rocks.
The colonists, tired as they were, slept but little. Not only were their beds uncomfortable, but it was certain that their house was occupied at present, and they were unable to get into it. Now Granite House was not only their dwelling, it was their storehouse. Everything they possessed was stored there. It would be a serious thing if this should be pillaged and they should have again to begin at the beginning. In their anxiety, one or the other went out often to see if the dog remained on watch. Smith, alone, waited with his accustomed patience, although he was exasperated at finding himself confronted by something utterly inexplicable, and his reason shrank from the thought that around him, over him, perhaps, was exercising an influence to which he could give no name. Spilett sharing his thoughts, they conversed together in an undertone of those unaccountable events which defied all their knowledge and experience. Certainly, there was a mystery about this island, but how discover it? Even Herbert did not know what to think, and often questioned Smith. As to Neb, he said that this was his master’s business and not his; and if he had not feared offending his companions, the brave fellow would have slept this night as soundly as if he had been in his bed in Granite House.
The colonists, as tired as they were, barely slept. Their beds were uncomfortable, and they knew that their house was currently occupied, making it impossible for them to get inside. Granite House was not just their home; it was also their storage. Everything they owned was stored there. If it were to be looted, it would be a serious problem, forcing them to start over from scratch. In their worry, one or another of them frequently checked to see if the dog was still on guard. Smith, left alone, waited with his usual patience, even though he was frustrated by the completely inexplicable situation he faced, and his mind recoiled at the thought that some unknown force might be influencing him right now. Spilett shared his thoughts, and they quietly discussed these mysterious events that defied all their knowledge and experience. There was definitely a mystery surrounding this island, but how could they uncover it? Even Herbert was uncertain and often asked Smith for his thoughts. As for Neb, he stated that this was his master’s concern, not his; and if he hadn’t been worried about upsetting his friends, the brave guy would have slept as soundly that night as if he were back in his bed at Granite House.
Pencroff, however, was very much put out.
Pencroff, however, was really upset.
“It’s a joke,” he said. “It’s a joke that is played on us. Well, I don’t like such jokes, and the joker won’t like it, if I catch him!”
“It’s a joke,” he said. “It’s a joke that's played on us. Well, I don’t like those kinds of jokes, and the person behind it won’t like it if I catch him!”
At dawn the colonists, well armed, followed along the shore to the reefs. By 5 o’clock the closed windows of Granite House appeared through their leafy curtain. Everything, from this side, appeared to be in order, but an exclamation escaped from the colonists when they perceived that the door which they had left closed was wide open. There could be no more doubt that some one was in Granite House, The upper ladder was in its place; but the lower had been drawn up to the threshold. It was evident that the intruders wished to guard against a surprise. As to telling who or how many they were, that was still impossible, as none had yet shown themselves.
At dawn, the colonists, well armed, made their way along the shore to the reefs. By 5 o’clock, the closed windows of Granite House came into view through the leafy curtain. Everything seemed to be in order from this side, but a gasp escaped from the colonists when they noticed that the door they had left shut was wide open. There was no doubt that someone was inside Granite House. The upper ladder was in its place, but the lower one had been pulled up to the threshold. It was clear that the intruders wanted to avoid being caught off guard. However, identifying who they were or how many were there was still impossible, as none had shown themselves yet.
Pencroff shouted again, but without answer.
Pencroff shouted again, but there was no response.
“The beggars!” he exclaimed, “to sleep as soundly as if they were at home! Halloo! pirates! bandits! corsairs! sons of John Bull!”
“The beggars!” he shouted, “sleeping as peacefully as if they were in their own homes! Hey! pirates! bandits! corsairs! sons of John Bull!”
When Pencroff, as an American, called any one a “son of John Bull,” he had reached the acme of insult.
When Pencroff, as an American, called someone a “son of John Bull,” he had hit the peak of insult.
Just then, the day broke and the facade of Granite House was illuminated by the rays of the rising sun. But inside as well as without all was still and calm. It was evident from the position of the ladder that whoever had been inside the house had not come out. But how could they get up to them?
Just then, the day began, and the front of Granite House was lit up by the rays of the rising sun. But inside and out, everything was still and calm. It was clear from the position of the ladder that whoever had been inside the house had not come out. But how could they reach them?
Herbert conceived the idea of shooting an arrow attached to a cord between the lower rungs of the ladder which were hanging from the doorway: They would thus be able by means of the cord to pull this ladder down, and gain access to Granite House. There was evidently nothing else to do, and with a little skill this attempt might prove successful. Fortunately there were bows and arrows at the Chimneys, and they found there, also, some twenty fathoms of light hibiscus cord. Pencroff unrolled this, and fastened the end to a well-feathered arrow. Then Herbert having placed the arrow in his bow took careful aim at the hanging part of the ladder.
Herbert came up with the idea of shooting an arrow tied to a cord between the lower rungs of the ladder hanging from the doorway. This way, they could pull the ladder down with the cord and get access to Granite House. There was clearly no other option, and with a bit of skill, this attempt might work. Luckily, there were bows and arrows at the Chimneys, and they also found about twenty fathoms of light hibiscus cord. Pencroff unrolled the cord and tied one end to a well-feathered arrow. Then Herbert, having put the arrow in his bow, carefully aimed at the hanging part of the ladder.
The others stationed themselves some distance in the background to observe what might happen, and the reporter covered the doorway with his carbine.
The others positioned themselves a short distance back to watch what might occur, and the reporter aimed his carbine at the doorway.
The bow bent, the arrow shot upward with the cord, and passed between the two lower rungs of the ladder. The operation had succeeded. But just as Herbert, having caught the end of the cord, was about giving it a pull to make the ladder fall, an arm thrust quickly between the door and the wall seized the ladder and drew it within Granite House.
The bow bent, the arrow shot up with the cord, and went between the two lower rungs of the ladder. The operation had worked. But just as Herbert, having grabbed the end of the cord, was about to pull it to make the ladder fall, an arm quickly reached between the door and the wall, grabbed the ladder, and pulled it inside Granite House.
“You little beggar!” cried Pencroff. “If a ball would settle you, you would not have to wait long!”
“You little beggar!” shouted Pencroff. “If a ball would take care of you, you wouldn’t have to wait long!”
“But what is it?” demanded Neb.
“But what is it?” Neb asked.
“What! didn’t you see?”
"What! Didn't you see that?"
“No.”
“Nope.”
“Why, it’s a monkey, a macauco, a sapajo, an orang, a baboon, a gorilla, a sagoin! Our house has been invaded by monkeys, which have climbed up the ladder while we were away.”
“Why, it’s a monkey, a macaque, a sapajo, an orangutan, a baboon, a gorilla, a sagoin! Our house has been invaded by monkeys that climbed up the ladder while we were away.”
And at the moment, as if to prove the truth of what the sailor said, three or four quadrumana threw open the window shutters and saluted the true proprietors of the place with a thousand contortions and grimaces.
And at that moment, as if to confirm what the sailor had just said, three or four monkeys threw open the window shutters and greeted the real owners of the place with a thousand twists and funny faces.
“I knew all the time it was a joke,” cried Pencroff, “But here’s one of the jokers that will pay for the others!” he added, covering a monkey with his gun and firing. All disappeared but, this one, which, mortally wounded, fell to the ground.
“I knew all along it was a joke,” shouted Pencroff, “But here’s one of the jokers that will pay for the others!” he added, aiming his gun at a monkey and shooting. Everything else vanished, except for this one, which, gravely injured, dropped to the ground.
This monkey was very large and evidently belonged to the first order of quadrumana. Whether a chimpanzee, an orang, a gorilla, or a gibbon, it ranked among these anthropomorphi, so called on account of their likeness to the human race. Herbert declared it was an orang-outang, and we all know that the lad understood zoology.
This monkey was very large and clearly belonged to the highest category of primates. Whether it was a chimpanzee, an orangutan, a gorilla, or a gibbon, it was classified among these anthropoid apes, named for their resemblance to humans. Herbert claimed it was an orangutan, and we all know the kid understood zoology.
“What a fine beast!” cried Neb.
“What a great animal!” shouted Neb.
“As fine as you choose!” answered the reporter, “but I don’t see yet how we are going to get in!”
“As good as you want!” replied the reporter, “but I still don’t see how we’re going to get in!”
“Herbert is a good shot,” said the reporter, “and his bow is sure! We will try again—”
“Herbert is a good shot,” said the reporter, “and his bow is reliable! We’ll try again—”
“But these monkeys are mischievous,” cried Pencroff, “and if they don’t come to the windows, we cannot shoot them; and when I think of the damage they can do in the rooms and, in the magazine—”
“But these monkeys are troublemakers,” shouted Pencroff, “and if they don’t come to the windows, we can’t shoot them; and when I think about the damage they could cause in the rooms and in the magazine—”
“Have patience,” answered Smith. “These animals cannot hold us in check, very long.”
“Be patient,” Smith replied. “These animals can't keep us back for too long.”
“I will be sure of that when they are out of there, “rejoined Pencroff, “Can you say how many dozens of these fools there may be?”
“I'll believe that when they’re out of there,” Pencroff replied, “Can you tell me how many dozens of these idiots there might be?”
It would hare been hard to answer Pencroff, but it was harder to try again the experiment of the arrow, as the lower end of the ladder had been drawn within the doorway, and when they pulled on the cord again, it broke, and the ladder remained, as before.
It would have been tough to respond to Pencroff, but it was even tougher to attempt the arrow experiment again, since the lower end of the ladder had been pulled inside the doorway, and when they tugged on the cord again, it snapped, leaving the ladder in the same position as before.
It was, Indeed, vexatious. Pencroff was in a fury, and, although the situation had a certain comic aspect, he did not think it funny at all. It was evident that the colonists would, eventually, get back into their house and drive out the monkeys, but when and how they could not say.
It was definitely frustrating. Pencroff was furious, and even though the situation had a funny side, he didn’t find it amusing at all. It was clear that the colonists would eventually get back into their house and chase out the monkeys, but they couldn’t say when or how that would happen.
Two hours passed, during which the monkeys avoided showing themselves; but they were there, for all that, and, two or three times, a muzzle or paw slipped by the door or the windows, and was saluted by a shot.
Two hours went by, during which the monkeys stayed hidden; however, they were still around, and a couple of times, a snout or a paw slipped by the door or the windows, only to be greeted by a shot.
“Let us conceal ourselves,” said the engineer, at length. “And then the monkeys will think we have gone off, and will show themselves again. Let Herbert and Spilett remain hidden behind the rocks and fire on any that appear.
“Let’s hide,” said the engineer, finally. “Then the monkeys will think we’ve left and will come out again. Let Herbert and Spilett stay hidden behind the rocks and shoot at any that show up.”
The directions of the engineer were followed, and while the reporter and the lad, who were the best shots in the party, took their positions, the others went over the plateau to the forest to shoot some game, as it was breakfast time and they had no food.
The engineer's instructions were followed, and while the reporter and the kid, who were the best shots in the group, got into position, the others headed over the plateau to the forest to hunt for some game, since it was breakfast time and they had no food.
In half an hour the hunters returned with some wild pigeons, which would be pretty good roasted. Not a monkey had shown itself.
In half an hour, the hunters came back with some wild pigeons, which would be pretty tasty when roasted. Not a single monkey had appeared.
Spilett and Herbert went to their breakfast, while Top kept watch under the windows. Then they returned to their post. Two hours later the situation was unchanged. The quadrumana gave no sign of existence, and it seemed as if they must have disappeared; but it was more likely that, frightened by the death of one of their number and the detonations of the guns, they kept themselves hidden in the chambers or the store-room of Granite House. And, when the colonists thought of all that was stored in this latter room, the patience which the engineer had recommended turned into irritation, and indeed they could not be blamed for it.
Spilett and Herbert went to have breakfast while Top kept watch under the windows. Then they went back to their post. Two hours later, the situation hadn’t changed. The monkeys showed no signs of life, and it seemed like they must have vanished; but it was more likely that, scared by the death of one of their own and the loud gunfire, they were hiding in the rooms or the storage area of Granite House. And when the colonists thought about everything that was stored in that storage room, the patience that the engineer had suggested turned into frustration, and honestly, they couldn’t be blamed for feeling that way.
“It is too bad!” exclaimed the reporter, at length; “and is there no way we can put an end to this?”
“It’s such a shame!” the reporter exclaimed finally. “Is there really no way we can stop this?”
“We must make these beggars give up!” cried Pencroff. “We can readily do it, even if there are twenty of them, in a hand-to hand fight! Oh, is there no way we can get at them?”
“We've got to make these beggars back down!” yelled Pencroff. “We can easily take them on, even if there are twenty of them, in a close fight! Oh, is there any way we can reach them?”
“Yes,” replied Smith, struck by an idea.
“Yes,” replied Smith, hit by a sudden thought.
“Only one?” rejoined Pencroff. “Well, that’s better than none at all. What is it?”
“Only one?” replied Pencroff. “Well, that’s better than nothing. What is it?”
“Try to get into Granite House by the old weir,” answered the engineer.
“Try to get into Granite House by the old dam,” replied the engineer.
“Why in the mischief didn’t I think of that!” cried the sailor.
“Why on earth didn’t I think of that!” yelled the sailor.
This was, indeed, the only way to get into Granite House, in order to fight the band and drive them out. It is true that, if they tore down the cemented wall which closed the weir, the work would have all to be done over again; but, fortunately, Smith had not yet effected his design of hiding this opening by covering it again with the lake, as that operation necessitated a good deal of time.
This was, in fact, the only way to access Granite House to confront the gang and drive them away. It’s true that if they broke down the cemented wall blocking the weir, the entire project would have to be redone; however, luckily, Smith hadn’t yet carried out his plan to hide this entrance by covering it back up with the lake, as that process would take quite a bit of time.
It was already past noon when the colonists, well armed and furnished with picks and mattocks, left the Chimneys, passed under the windows of Granite House, and, having ordered Top to remain at his post, made ready to climb the left bank of the Mercy, so as to reach Prospect Plateau. But they had hardly gone fifty paces, when they heard the loud barkings of the dog, as if making a desperate appeal. All halted.
It was already past noon when the colonists, armed and equipped with picks and mattocks, left the Chimneys, passed under the windows of Granite House, and, having told Top to stay at his post, got ready to climb the left bank of the Mercy to reach Prospect Plateau. But they had barely gone fifty steps when they heard the loud barking of the dog, sounding like a desperate call for help. They all stopped.
“Let us run back,” cried Pencroff. And all did as proposed as fast as possible.
“Let’s head back,” shouted Pencroff. And everyone did as he suggested as quickly as they could.
Arrived at the turn, the whole situation was changed. The monkeys, seized with a sudden fright, startled by some unknown cause, were trying to escape. Two or three were running and springing from window to window, with the agility of clowns. In their fright they seemed to have forgotten to replace the ladder, by which they could easily have descended. In a moment half a dozen were in such a position that they could be shot, and the colonists, taking aim, fired. Some fell, wounded or killed, within the chambers, uttering sharp cries. Others, falling to the ground without, were crushed by the fall, and a few moments afterwards it seemed as if there was not one living quadrumana in Granite House.
When they reached the turn, everything changed. The monkeys, suddenly frightened by something unknown, were trying to escape. A couple of them were running and jumping from window to window, as agile as clowns. In their panic, they appeared to have forgotten to put the ladder back, which they could have easily used to get down. In no time, half a dozen were in positions where they could be shot, and the colonists took aim and fired. Some fell, either wounded or dead, inside the rooms, letting out sharp cries. Others crashed to the ground outside and were injured by the fall, and a few moments later, it seemed like there wasn’t a single living monkey left in Granite House.
“Hurrah,” said Pencroff, “hurrah, hurrah!”
"Yay," said Pencroff, "yay, yay!"
“Don’t cheer yet,” saidSpilett.
"Don't cheer yet," said Spilett.
“Why not,” asked Pencroff. “Ain’t they all killed.”
“Why not?” Pencroff asked. “Aren't they all dead?”
“Doubtless: but that does not give us the means of getting in.”
“Sure, but that doesn't help us get in.”
“Let us go the weir!” exclaimed Pencroff.
“Let’s go to the weir!” exclaimed Pencroff.
“We will have to,” said the engineer. “Nevertheless it would have been preferable—”
“We will have to,” said the engineer. “Still, it would have been better—”
And at the instant, as if in answer to the observation of the engineer, they saw the ladder slide over the door-sill and roll over to the ground.
And at that moment, almost as if responding to the engineer's comment, they saw the ladder slide over the door frame and tumble down to the ground.
“By the thousand pipes, but that is lucky!” cried Pencroff, looking at Smith.
“By the thousand pipes, that's lucky!” yelled Pencroff, glancing at Smith.
“Too lucky!” muttered Smith, springing up the ladder.
“Too lucky!” Smith muttered as he jumped up the ladder.
“Take care, Mr. Smith!” exclaimed Pencroff, “if there should be any sojourners—”
“Take care, Mr. Smith!” shouted Pencroff, “if there are any travelers—”
“We will soon see,” responded the other.
“We’ll find out soon,” replied the other.
All his companions followed him and in a moment were within the doorway.
All his friends followed him and in no time were at the doorway.
They searched everywhere. No one was in the chambers or in the storeroom, which remained undisturbed by the quadrumana.
They looked everywhere. No one was in the chambers or in the storage room, which stayed untouched by the primates.
“And the ladder,” said Pencroff; “where is the gentleman who pushed it down to us?”
“And the ladder,” said Pencroff; “where’s the guy who pushed it down to us?”
But just then a cry was heard, and a huge monkey, that had taken refuge in the corridor, sprang into the great hall, followed by Neb.
But just then a shout was heard, and a huge monkey, which had taken shelter in the corridor, leaped into the great hall, followed by Neb.
“Ah, the thief!” cried Pencroff, about to spring with his hatchet at the head of the animal, when Smith stopped him.
“Ah, the thief!” yelled Pencroff, ready to swing his hatchet at the animal’s head, when Smith stopped him.
“Spare it, Pencroff.”
“Let it go, Pencroff.”
“What, spare this black ape?”
“What, spare this guy?”
“Yes, it is he that has thrown us the ladder,” said the engineer, in a voice so strange, that it was hard to say whether he was in earnest or not.
“Yeah, he’s the one who threw us the ladder,” said the engineer, in such a strange voice that it was hard to tell if he was serious or not.
Nevertheless, all threw themselves on the monkey, which, after a brave resistance, was thrown down and tied.
Nevertheless, everyone jumped on the monkey, which, after putting up a strong fight, was thrown down and tied up.
“Ugh!” exclaimed Pencroff; “and now what will we do with it?”
“Ugh!” Pencroff exclaimed; “so what are we supposed to do with it now?”
“Make a servant of it,” answered Herbert, half in earnest, as the lad knew how great was the intelligence of this race of quadrumana.
“Make a servant out of it,” replied Herbert, half joking, since the kid understood how smart these primates were.
The colonists gathered round the monkey and examined it attentively. It appeared to belong to that species of anthropomorphi in which the facial angle is not visibly inferior to that of the Australians or Hottentots. He was an orang of the kind which has neither the ferocity of the baboon nor the macauco, nor the thoughtlessness of the sagoin, nor the impatience of the magot, nor the bad instincts of the cynocephalous. It was of a family of anthropomorphi which has traits indicating a half-human intelligence. Employed in houses, they can wait on the table, do chamber-work, brush clothes, black boots, clean the knives and forks, and—empty the bottles, as well as the best trained flunkey. Buffon possessed one of these monkeys, which served him a long time as a zealous and faithful servant.
The colonists gathered around the monkey and looked at it closely. It seemed to belong to a type of primate where the facial structure isn't noticeably less advanced than that of Australians or Hottentots. He was an orangutan, not as aggressive as a baboon or macaque, nor as careless as a tamarin, nor as restless as a macaque, nor having the bad traits of a gelada. This monkey was from a family of primates that shows signs of semi-human intelligence. When kept in homes, they can serve at the table, do housework, brush clothes, polish shoes, clean knives and forks, and—empty bottles—just as well as the best-trained servant. Buffon had one of these monkeys that served him faithfully for a long time.
The one at present tied in the hall of Granite House was a big fellow, six feet high, deep-chested, and finely built, a medium-sized head, with a sharp facial angle, a well-rounded skull, and a prominent nose, and a skin covered with smooth hair, soft and shining,—in short, a finished type of anthropomorphi. Its eyes, somewhat smaller than those of a human being, sparkled with intelligence; its teeth glistened beneath its moustache, and it wore a small nut-brown beard.
The one currently tied up in the hall of Granite House was a big guy, six feet tall, broad-chested, and well-built, with a medium-sized head, a sharp facial structure, a nicely shaped skull, and a prominent nose, and its skin was covered with smooth, soft, shiny hair—in short, a complete example of anthropomorphism. Its eyes, a bit smaller than a human's, sparkled with intelligence; its teeth shone beneath its mustache, and it sported a small, dark brown beard.
“He is a fine chap,” said Pencroff. “If we only understood his language, one might talk with him!”
“He's a great guy,” said Pencroff. “If we only understood his language, we could have a conversation with him!”
“Then,” said Neb, “are they in earnest, my master? Will we take it as a domestic?”
“Then,” said Neb, “are they serious, my master? Will we treat it as a home?”
“Yes, Neb,” said the engineer, smiling. “But you need not be jealous.”
“Yes, Neb,” said the engineer with a smile. “But you don’t need to be jealous.”
“And I hope it will make an excellent servant. As it is young its education will be easy, and we will not have to use force to make it mind, nor to pull out its teeth as is sometimes done. It cannot fail to become attached to masters who only treat it well.”
“And I hope it will make a great companion. Since it’s young, training it will be easy, and we won’t have to use force to make it listen or remove its teeth like some do. It’s bound to become fond of owners who treat it kindly.”
“And we will do that,” said Pencroff, who having forgotten his recent wrath against the “jokers,” approached the orang and accosted him with:—
“And we will do that,” said Pencroff, who, having forgotten his recent anger towards the “jokers,” walked up to the orang and said to him:—
“Hullo, my boy, how goes it?”
“Halo, my dude, how's it going?”
The orang responded with a little grunt, which seemed to denote a not bad temper.
The orangutan responded with a small grunt, which seemed to indicate a decent mood.
“You want to join the colony, do you? Would you like to enter the service of Mr. Smith?”
“You want to join the colony, right? Are you interested in serving Mr. Smith?”
The monkey gave another affirmative grunt.
The monkey gave another confirming grunt.
“And you’ll be satisfied with your board as wages?”
“And you’ll be okay with your board as payment?”
A third affirmative grunt.
A third approving grunt.
“His conversation is a little monotonous,” observed Spilett.
“His conversation is a bit dull,” noted Spilett.
“Well,” replied Pencroff, “the best domestics are those that speak least. And then, no wages! Do you hear, my boy? At first we give you no wages, but we will double them later, if you suit us!”
“Well,” Pencroff said, “the best servants are the ones who talk the least. Plus, no salary! Do you get that, my boy? At first, we won’t pay you anything, but we’ll double it later if you impress us!”
Thus the colonists added to their number one who had already done them a service. As to a name, the sailor asked that he should be called, in remembrance of another monkey, Jupiter, or by abbreviation, Jup. And thus, without more ado, Master Jup was installed in Granite House.
Thus the colonists welcomed someone who had already helped them. As for a name, the sailor requested that he be called, in memory of another monkey, Jupiter, or simply Jup for short. And so, without further delay, Master Jup was settled in Granite House.
CHAPTER XXIX.
PROJECTS TO BE CARRIED OUT—A BRIDGE OVER THE MERCY—TO MAKE AN ISLAND OF PROSPECT PLATEAU—THE DRAW-BRIDGE—THE CORN HARVEST—THE STREAM—THE CAUSEWAY—THE POULTRY YARD—THE PIGEON-HOUSE—THE TWO WILD ASSES—HARNESSED TO THE WAGON—EXCURSION TO BALLOON HARBOR.
PROJECTS TO BE DONE—A BRIDGE OVER THE MERCY—TO CREATE AN ISLAND ON PROSPECT PLATEAU—THE DRAW-BRIDGE—THE CORN HARVEST—THE STREAM—THE CAUSEWAY—THE POULTRY YARD—THE PIGEON HOUSE—THE TWO WILD DONKEYS—HARNESSED TO THE WAGON—TRIP TO BALLOON HARBOR.
The colonists had now reconquered their domicile without having been obliged to follow the weir. It was, indeed, fortunate, that at the moment they decided to destroy their masonry, the band of monkeys, struck by a terror not less sudden than inexplicable, had rushed from Granite House. Had these animals a presentiment that a dangerous attack was about to be made on them from another direction? This was the only way to account for their retreat.
The colonists had now taken back their home without having to follow the trap. It was certainly lucky that when they chose to destroy their structure, the group of monkeys, struck by a fear that was sudden and inexplicable, had fled from Granite House. Did these animals somehow sense that a dangerous attack was about to come from another direction? This was the only explanation for their retreat.
The rest of the day was occupied in carrying the dead monkeys to the wood and burying them there, and in repairing the disorder made by the intruders,—disorder and not damage, as, though they had upset the furniture in the rooms, they had broken nothing. Neb rekindled the range, and the supply in the pantry furnished a substantial repast that was duly honored.
The rest of the day was spent taking the dead monkeys to the woods and burying them there, as well as tidying up the mess caused by the intruders—mess and not damage, since they had messed up the furniture in the rooms but hadn’t broken anything. Neb rekindled the stove, and the food in the pantry provided a hearty meal that was enjoyed.
Jup was not forgotten, and he ate with avidity the pistachio nuts and the roots of the sumach, with which he saw himself abundantly provided. Pencroff had unfastened his arms, although he thought it best to keep the monkey’s legs bound until they could be sure he had surrendered.
Jup wasn't forgotten, and he eagerly ate the pistachio nuts and the roots of the sumac, which he saw himself had plenty of. Pencroff had untied his arms, although he figured it was best to keep the monkey's legs bound until they could be sure he had given up.
Seated at the table, before going to bed, Smith and his companions discussed three projects, the execution of which was urgent. The most important and the most pressing was the establishment of a bridge across the Mercy, then the building of a corral, designed for the accommodation of moufflons or other woolly animals which they had agreed to capture. These two plans tended to solve the question of clothing, which was then the most serious question.
Seated at the table before heading to bed, Smith and his friends talked about three projects that needed to be tackled urgently. The most important and urgent was building a bridge across the Mercy, followed by constructing a corral intended to house moufflons or other woolly animals they had agreed to catch. These two plans aimed to address the issue of clothing, which was the most pressing concern at the time.
It was Smith’s intention to establish this corral at the sources of Red Creek, where there was abundant pasturage. Already the path between there and Prospect Plateau was partially cleared, and with a better constructed cart, carriage would be easy, especially if they should capture some animal that could draw it.
It was Smith's plan to set up this corral at the sources of Red Creek, where there was plenty of grazing land. The path between there and Prospect Plateau was already partly cleared, and with a better-built cart, transportation would be simple, especially if they managed to capture an animal that could pull it.
But while it would not be inconvenient to have the corral some distance from Granite House, it was different with the poultry-yard, to which Neb called attention. It was necessary that the “chickens” should be at the hand of the cook, and no place seemed more favorable for an establishment of this kind than that portion of the lake shore bordering on the former weir. The aquatic birds also would thrive there, and the pair of tinamons, taken in the last excursion, would serve as a beginning.
But while it wouldn't be a problem to have the corral a bit away from Granite House, the same couldn't be said for the poultry yard, which Neb pointed out. It was important for the “chickens” to be close to the cook, and no spot seemed better for this than the section of the lake shore next to the old weir. The waterfowl would do well there too, and the pair of tinamons we brought back from the last trip would be a good start.
The next day—the 3d of November—work was begun on the bridge, and all hands were required on the important undertaking. Laden with tools the colonists descended to the shore.
The next day—the 3rd of November—work started on the bridge, and everyone was needed for the important project. Carrying tools, the colonists made their way down to the shore.
Here Pencroff reflected as follows:—
Here Pencroff thought as follows:—
“Supposing while we are away Master Jup takes the notion of hauling up the ladder, which he so gallantly unrolled for us yesterday.”
“Let’s say that while we’re gone, Master Jup decides to pull up the ladder that he so bravely set out for us yesterday.”
“We would be dependent on his tail!” answered Spilett.
“We would be relying on his tail!” answered Spilett.
The ladder was therefore made fast to two stakes driven firmly into the ground. The colonists ascended the river, and soon arrived at its narrow bend, where they halted to examine whether the bridge could not be thrown across at this place. The situation was suitable, as from this point to Balloon Harbor the distance was three miles and a half, and a wagon road connecting Granite House with the southern part of the island, could easily be constructed.
The ladder was securely tied to two stakes that were driven firmly into the ground. The colonists moved up the river and soon reached its narrow bend, where they stopped to see if they could build a bridge at this location. The spot was ideal, as the distance from there to Balloon Harbor was three and a half miles, and a wagon road linking Granite House with the southern part of the island could be easily built.
Then Smith communicated to his companions a project which he had had in view for some time. This was to completely isolate Prospect Plateau, so as to protect it from all attacks of quadrupeds or quadrumana. By this means Granite House, the Chimneys, the poultry yard, and all the upper part of the plateau destined for sowing would be protected against the depredations of animals.
Then Smith shared with his companions a plan he had been considering for a while. This plan was to completely isolate Prospect Plateau to protect it from any attacks by four-legged animals or primates. This way, Granite House, the Chimneys, the poultry yard, and the entire upper part of the plateau meant for planting would be safe from animal damage.
Nothing could be easier than to do this, and the engineer proposed to accomplish it as follows:—The plateau was already protected on three sides by either natural or artificial water courses. On the northwest, by the bank of Lake Grant, extending from the angle against the former weir to the cut made in the east bank to draw off the water. On the north, by this new water course which had worn itself a bed both above and below the fall, which could be dug out sufficiently to render the passage impracticable to animals. And upon the east, by the sea itself, from the mouth of this new creek to the mouth of the Mercy. Therefore the only part remaining open was the western part of the plateau included between the bend in the river and the southern angle of the lake, a distance of leas than a mile. But nothing could be easier than to dig a ditch, wide and deep, which would be filled from the lake, and flow into the Mercy. Doubtless the level of the lake would be lowered somewhat by this new drain on its resources, but Smith had assured himself that the flow of Red Creek was sufficient for his purpose.
Nothing could be simpler than this, and the engineer suggested doing it like this:—The plateau was already protected on three sides by either natural or artificial water channels. On the northwest, by the bank of Lake Grant, extending from the angle against the old weir to the cut made in the east bank to draw off the water. On the north, by this new water channel that had carved a bed both above and below the fall, which could be dug out enough to make it impassable for animals. And on the east, by the sea itself, from the mouth of this new creek to the mouth of the Mercy. So, the only open part was the western section of the plateau, between the bend in the river and the southern angle of the lake, a distance of less than a mile. But it would be very easy to dig a wide and deep ditch, which could be filled from the lake and flow into the Mercy. Sure, the level of the lake would drop a bit from this new drain on its resources, but Smith had assured himself that the flow of Red Creek was enough for what he needed.
“Thus,” added the engineer, “Prospect Plateau will be a veritable island, unconnected with the rest of our domain, save by the bridge which we will throw over the Mercy, by the two causeways already built above and below the fall, and by the two others which are to be constructed, one over the proposed ditch, and the other over the left bank of the Mercy. Now if this bridge and the causeways can be raised at will, Prospect Plateau will be secured from surprise.”
“Thus,” added the engineer, “Prospect Plateau will be like an island, disconnected from the rest of our area, except by the bridge we’ll build over the Mercy, the two causeways already constructed above and below the waterfall, and the two additional ones we plan to make—one over the proposed ditch and the other over the left bank of the Mercy. Now, if we can lift this bridge and the causeways whenever needed, Prospect Plateau will be protected from unexpected attacks.”
Smith, in order to make his companions comprehend clearly his plans, had made a plot of the plateau, and his project was rendered perfectly plain. It met with unanimous approval; and Pencroff, brandishing his hatchet, exclaimed:—
Smith, to help his friends fully understand his plans, had created a map of the plateau, making his project completely clear. It received unanimous approval, and Pencroff, waving his hatchet, exclaimed:—
“And first, for the bridge!”
“And first, for the bridge!”
This work was the most urgent. Trees were selected, felled, lopped, and cut into beams, planks, and boards. The bridge was to be stationary on the right bank of the Mercy, but on the left it was to be so constructed as to raise by means of counterweights, as in some draw-bridges.
This project was a top priority. Trees were chosen, chopped down, trimmed, and processed into beams, planks, and boards. The bridge was meant to be fixed on the right bank of the Mercy, but on the left, it was designed to lift using counterweights, similar to some drawbridges.
It will be seen that this work, even if it could be easily accomplished, would take considerable time, as the Mercy was eighty feet wide at this point. It was first necessary to drive piles in the bed of the river, to sustain the flooring of the bridge, and to set up a pile-driver to drive the piles, so as to form two arches capable of supporting heavy weights.
It’s clear that even if this project could be done easily, it would take a significant amount of time since the Mercy was eighty feet wide at this spot. First, it would be necessary to drive piles into the riverbed to support the bridge's flooring and set up a pile-driver to drive those piles, creating two arches strong enough to hold heavy weights.
Fortunately they lacked neither the necessary tools for preparing the timber, nor the iron work, to bind it together, nor the ingenuity of a man who was an adept at this sort of work, nor, finally, the zeal of his companions who in these seven months had necessarily acquired considerable manual skill. And it should be added that Spilett began to do nearly as well as the sailor himself “who would never have expected so much from a newspaper man!”
Fortunately, they had all the tools needed to prepare the timber, the metalwork to hold it together, the skill of a man who was good at this kind of work, and, finally, the enthusiasm of his companions who had gained a lot of manual skill over these seven months. It’s also worth mentioning that Spilett started to perform almost as well as the sailor himself, “who would never have expected so much from a newspaper guy!”
It took three weeks of steady work to build this bridge. And as the weather was fine they lunched on the ground, and only returned to Granite House for supper.
It took three weeks of consistent work to build this bridge. And since the weather was nice, they had lunch outside and only went back to Granite House for dinner.
During this period it was observed that Master Jup took kindly to and familiarized himself with his new masters, whom he watched with the greatest curiosity. Nevertheless, Pencroff was careful not to give him complete liberty until the limits of the plateau had been rendered impassible. Top and he were the best possible friends, and got on capitally together although Jup took everything gravely.
During this time, it was noticed that Master Jup got along well with his new masters and watched them with great curiosity. However, Pencroff was careful not to give him full freedom until the edges of the plateau were completely blocked off. Jup and Top were the best of friends and got along really well, even though Jup took everything seriously.
The bridge was finished on the 20th of November. The movable part balanced perfectly with the counterpoise, and needed but little effort to raise it; between the hinge and crossbeam on which the draw rested when closed, the distance was twenty feet, a gap sufficiently wide to prevent animals from getting across.
The bridge was completed on November 20th. The movable section balanced perfectly with the counterweight and required minimal effort to lift; the distance between the hinge and the crossbeam where the draw rested when closed was twenty feet, a gap wide enough to keep animals from crossing.
It was next proposed to go for the envelope of the balloon, which the colonists were anxious to place in safety; but in order to bring it, the cart would have to be dragged to Balloon Harbor, necessitating the breaking of a road through the dense underwood of the Far West, all of which would take time. Therefore Neb and Pencroff made an excursion to the harbor, and as they reported that the supply of cloth was well protected in the cave, it was decided that the works about the plateau should not be discontinued.
It was then suggested to retrieve the balloon’s envelope, which the colonists were eager to keep safe; however, to do this, they would need to pull the cart to Balloon Harbor, which meant clearing a path through the thick underbrush of the Far West, and that would take time. So Neb and Pencroff took a trip to the harbor, and since they reported that the supply of cloth was well protected in the cave, it was decided that the work around the plateau should continue.
“This,” said Pencroff, “will enable us to establish the poultry-yard under the most advantageous conditions, since we need have no fear of the visits of foxes or other noxious animals.”
“This,” said Pencroff, “will allow us to set up the poultry yard in the best conditions possible, since we won’t have to worry about visits from foxes or other harmful animals.”
“And also,” added Neb, “we can clear the plateau, and transplant wild plants”—
“And also,” added Neb, “we can clear the plateau and move wild plants.”
“And make ready our second corn-field,” continued the sailor with a triumphant air.
“And prepare our second cornfield,” the sailor continued confidently.
Indeed the first corn-field, sowed with a single grain, had prospered admirably, thanks to the care of Pencroff. It had produced the ten ears foretold by the engineer, and as each ear had eighty grains, the colonists found themselves possessed of 800 grains—in six months—which promised them a double harvest each year. These 800 grains, excepting fifty which it was prudent to reserve, were now about to be sowed in a new field with as much care as the first solitary specimen.
Indeed, the first cornfield, planted with a single seed, had thrived beautifully, thanks to Pencroff's efforts. It produced the ten ears predicted by the engineer, and since each ear had eighty grains, the colonists ended up with 800 grains—after just six months—which suggested a double harvest each year. These 800 grains, aside from fifty that it was wise to keep in reserve, were now ready to be sown in a new field with the same care as the first solitary one.
The field was prepared, and inclosed with high, sharp-pointed palisades, which quadrupeds would have found very difficult to surmount. As to the birds, the noisy whirligigs and astonishing scarecrows, the product of Pencroff’s genius, were enough to keep them at a distance. Then the 750 grains were buried in little hills, regularly disposed, and Nature was left to do the rest.
The field was prepared and surrounded by tall, sharp palisades that would have been very hard for animals to get over. As for the birds, the loud windmills and impressive scarecrows, created by Pencroff’s ingenuity, were enough to keep them away. Then the 750 grains were planted in small mounds, arranged neatly, and Nature was left to take care of the rest.
On the 21st of November, Smith began laying out the ditch which was to enclose the plateau on the west. There were two or three feet of vegetable earth, and beneath that the granite. It was, therefore, necessary to manufacture some more nitro-glycerine, and the nitro-glycerine had its accustomed effect. In less than a fortnight a ditch, twelve feet wide and six feet deep was excavated in the plateau. A new outlet was in like manner made in the rocky border of the lake, and the waters rushed into this new channel, forming a small stream, to which they gave the name of Glycerine Creek. As the engineer had foreseen the level of the lake was lowered but very slightly. Finally, for completing the enclosure, the bed of the stream across the beach was considerably enlarged, and the sand was kept up by a double palisade.
On November 21st, Smith started to dig the ditch that would surround the plateau to the west. There were two or three feet of topsoil, and underneath that, granite. So, it was necessary to make more nitroglycerin, which had its usual effect. In less than two weeks, a ditch twelve feet wide and six feet deep was dug into the plateau. A new outlet was similarly created in the rocky edge of the lake, and the water rushed into this new channel, forming a small stream they named Glycerine Creek. As the engineer had predicted, the lake’s level dropped only slightly. Lastly, to complete the enclosure, the streambed across the beach was significantly widened, and the sand was held in place by a double palisade.
By the middle of December all these works were completed, and Prospect Plateau, shaped something like an irregular pentagon, having a perimeter of about four miles, was encircled with a liquid belt, making it absolutely safe from all aggression.
By mid-December, all these projects were finished, and Prospect Plateau, shaped like an irregular pentagon with a perimeter of about four miles, was surrounded by a water barrier, making it completely secure from any attacks.
During this month the heat was very great. Nevertheless, the colonists, not wishing to cease work, proceeded to construct the poultry-yard. Jup, who since the enclosing of the plateau had been given his liberty, never quitted his masters nor manifested the least desire to escape. He was a gentle beast, though possessing immense strength and wonderful agility. No one could go up the ladder to Granite House as he could. Already he was given employment; he was instructed to fetch wood and carry off the stones which had been taken from the bed of Glycerine Creek.
During this month, the heat was intense. However, the colonists, not wanting to stop working, continued to build the poultry yard. Jup, who had been given his freedom since the enclosure of the plateau, never left his masters or showed any desire to escape. He was a gentle creature but had immense strength and incredible agility. No one could climb the ladder to Granite House as well as he could. He was already given tasks; he was told to fetch firewood and remove the stones that had been taken from Glycerine Creek.
“Although he’s not yet a mason, he is already a ‘monkey,’“ said Herbert, making a joking allusion to the nickname masons give their apprentices. And if ever a name was well applied, it was so in this instance!
“Even though he’s not a mason yet, he’s already a ‘monkey,’” said Herbert, making a playful reference to the nickname masons use for their apprentices. And if there was ever a name that fit, it’s this one!
The poultry-yard occupied an area of 200 square yards on the southeast bank of the lake. It was enclosed with a palisade, and within were separate divisions for the proposed inhabitants, and huts of branches divided into compartments awaiting their occupants.
The chicken yard took up 200 square yards on the southeast side of the lake. It was surrounded by a fence, and inside were separate sections for the future residents, along with branch huts divided into compartments waiting for the animals.
The first was the pair of tinamons, who were not long in breeding numerous little ones. They had for companions half-a-dozen ducks, who were always by the water-side. Some of these belonged to that Chinese variety whose wings open like a fan, and whose plumage rivals in brilliance that of the golden pheasant. Some days later, Herbert caught a pair of magnificent curassows, birds of the gallinaceæ family, with long rounding tails. These soon bred others, and as to the pellicans, the kingfishers, the moorhens, they came of themselves to the poultry-yard. And soon, all this little world, after some disputing, cooing, scolding, clucking, ended by agreeing and multiplying at a rate sufficient for the future wants of the colony.
The first were the pair of tinamou, who quickly had many little ones. They had six ducks for company, always hanging out by the water. Some of these were from that Chinese breed with wings that spread like a fan, and their feathers were as bright as those of the golden pheasant. A few days later, Herbert caught a pair of stunning curassows, birds from the gallinaceæ family with long, rounded tails. They soon had more offspring, and the pelicans, kingfishers, and moorhens showed up on their own at the poultry yard. Before long, this small community, after some arguing, cooing, scolding, and clucking, ended up getting along and multiplying quickly enough to meet the future needs of the colony.
Smith, in order to complete his work, established a pigeon-house in the corner of the poultry-yard, and placed therein a dozen wild pigeons. These birds readily habituated themselves to their new abode, and returned there each evening, showing a greater propensity to domestication than the wood pigeons, their congeners, which do not breed except in a savage state.
Smith, to finish his work, built a pigeon coop in the corner of the poultry yard and put a dozen wild pigeons in it. These birds quickly got used to their new home and came back every evening, showing a stronger tendency to be domesticated than the wood pigeons, their relatives, which only breed in the wild.
And now the time was come to make use of the envelope in the manufacture of clothing, for to keep it intact in order to attempt to leave the island by risking themselves in a balloon filled with heated air over a sea, which might be called limitless, was only to be thought of by men deprived of all other resources, and Smith, being eminently practical, did not dream of such a thing.
And now it was time to use the envelope to make clothing, because keeping it whole to try to escape the island by risking a balloon filled with hot air over what could be considered an endless sea was only a thought for those who had no other options. Smith, being very practical, didn't entertain such an idea.
It was necessary to bring the envelope to Granite House, and the colonists busied themselves in making their heavy cart less unwieldly and lighter. But though the vehicle was provided, the motor was still to be found! Did not there exist in the island some ruminant of indiginous species which could replace the horse, ass, ox, or cow? That was the question.
It was necessary to take the envelope to Granite House, so the colonists focused on making their heavy cart easier to handle and lighter. But even though the vehicle was ready, they still needed a way to power it! Was there not some native animal on the island that could serve as a substitute for a horse, donkey, ox, or cow? That was the question.
“Indeed,” said Pencroff, “a draught animal would be very useful to us, while we are waiting until Mr. Smith is ready to build a steam-wagon or a locomotive, though doubtless, some day we will have a railway to Balloon Harbor, with a branch road up Mount Franklin!”
“Absolutely,” said Pencroff, “a draft animal would be really helpful for us while we wait for Mr. Smith to get ready to build a steam wagon or a locomotive. I’m sure one day we’ll even have a railway to Balloon Harbor, with a branch line up Mount Franklin!”
And the honest sailor, in talking thus, believed what he said. Such is the power of imagination combined with faith!
And the honest sailor, speaking like this, genuinely believed what he said. That's the power of imagination mixed with faith!
But, in truth, an animal capable of being harnessed would have just suited Pencroff, and as Fortune favored him, she did not let him want.
But really, an animal that could be trained would have been perfect for Pencroff, and since Fortune smiled on him, she didn't let him go without.
One day, the 23d of December, the colonists, busy at the Chimneys, heard Neb crying and Top barking in such emulation, that dreading some terrible accident, they ran to them.
One day, on December 23rd, the colonists, working at the Chimneys, heard Neb crying and Top barking so loudly that, fearing a terrible accident, they hurried over to them.
What did they see? Two large, beautiful animals, which had imprudently ventured upon the plateau, the causeways not having been closed. They seemed like two horses, or rather two asses, male and female, finely shaped, of a light bay color, striped with black on the head, neck, and body, and with white legs and tail. They advanced tranquilly, without showing any fear, and looked calmly on these men in whom they had not yet recognized their masters.
What did they see? Two large, beautiful animals that had foolishly wandered onto the plateau since the paths hadn’t been blocked off. They looked like two horses or, more accurately, two donkeys—a male and a female—with elegant bodies, a light bay color, striped with black on their heads, necks, and bodies, and having white legs and tails. They moved forward calmly, showing no fear, and gazed at the men, not yet realizing they were their masters.
“They are onagers,” cried Herbert. “Quadrupeds of a kind between the zebra and the quagga.”
“They’re onagers,” shouted Herbert. “They’re animals that are sort of between a zebra and a quagga.”
“Why aren’t they asses?” asked Neb.
“Why aren’t they idiots?” asked Neb.
“Because they have not long ears, and their forms are more graceful.”
“Because they don’t have long ears, and their shapes are more graceful.”
“Asses or horses,” added Pencroff—“they are what Mr. Smith would call “motors,” and it will be well to capture them!”
“Donkeys or horses,” added Pencroff—“they're what Mr. Smith would call ‘motors,’ and it would be a good idea to catch them!”
The sailor, without startling the animals, slid through the grass to the causeway over Glycerine Creek, raised it, and the onagers were prisoners. Should they be taken by violence, and made to submit to a forced domestication? No. It was decided that for some days they would let these animals wander at will over the plateau where the grass was abundant, and a stable was at once constructed near to the poultry-yard in which the onagers would find a good bedding, and a refuge for the night.
The sailor quietly moved through the grass to the causeway over Glycerine Creek, lifted it, and the onagers were captured. Should they be taken by force and made to submit to being domesticated? No. It was decided that for a few days, they would let the animals roam freely across the plateau where the grass was plentiful, and a stable was quickly built near the poultry yard where the onagers would find comfortable bedding and shelter for the night.
The fine pair were thus left entirely at liberty, and the colonists avoided approaching them. In the meantime the onagers often tried to quit the plateau, which was too confined for them, accustomed to wide ranges and deep forests. The colonists saw them following around the belt of water impossible to cross, whinnying and galloping over the grass, and then resting quietly for hours regarding the deep woods from which they were shut off.
The two were completely free, and the colonists kept their distance. Meanwhile, the wild donkeys often attempted to leave the plateau, which felt too cramped for them since they were used to open spaces and dense forests. The colonists watched as they circled the water that was impossible to cross, whinnying and running over the grass, then resting quietly for hours while looking at the thick woods they couldn't reach.
In the meantime, harness had been made from vegetable fibres, and some days after the capture of the onagers, not only was the cart ready, but a road, or rather a cut, had been made through the forest all the way from the bend in the Mercy to Balloon Harbor. They could therefore get to this latter place with the cart, and towards the end of the month the onagers were tried for the first time.
In the meantime, they had made a harness from plant fibers, and a few days after capturing the onagers, not only was the cart ready, but a path, or rather a cleared area, had been made through the forest all the way from the bend in the Mercy to Balloon Harbor. They could now take the cart to this location, and toward the end of the month, the onagers were tested for the first time.
Pencroff had already coaxed these animals so that they ate from his hand, and he could approach them without difficulty, but, once harnessed, they reared and kicked, and were with difficulty kept from breaking loose, although it was not long before they submitted to this new service.
Pencroff had already managed to get these animals to eat from his hand, and he could get close to them with ease. However, once harnessed, they reared up and kicked, making it hard to keep them from breaking free, although it didn’t take long for them to accept this new role.
This day, every one except Pencroff, who walked beside his team, rode in the cart to Balloon Harbor. They were jolted about a little over this rough road, but the cart did not break down, and they were able to load it, the same day, with the envelope and the appurtenances to the balloon.
This day, everyone except Pencroff, who walked next to his team, rode in the cart to Balloon Harbor. They were jostled a bit over this rough road, but the cart didn’t break down, and they were able to load it the same day with the envelope and the equipment for the balloon.
By 8 o’clock in the evening, the cart, having recrossed the bridge, followed down the bank of the Mercy and stopped on the beach. The onagers were unharnessed, placed in the stable, and Pencroff, before sleeping, gave a sigh of satisfaction that resounded throughout Granite House.
By 8 o’clock in the evening, the cart, having crossed the bridge again, moved along the bank of the Mercy and stopped at the beach. The donkeys were unharnessed, put in the stable, and Pencroff, before going to bed, let out a satisfied sigh that echoed through Granite House.
CHAPTER XXX.
CLOTHING—SEAL-SKIN BOOTS—MAKING PYROXYLINE—PLANTING—THE FISH—TURTLES’ EGGS—JUP’S EDUCATION—THE CORRAL-HUNTING MOUFFLONS—OTHER USEFUL ANIMALS AND VEGETABLES—HOME THOUGHTS.
CLOTHING—SEAL-SKIN BOOTS—MAKING PYROXYLINE—PLANTING—THE FISH—TURTLES’ EGGS—JUP’S EDUCATION—THE CORRAL-HUNTING MOUFFLONS—OTHER USEFUL ANIMALS AND VEGETABLES—HOME THOUGHTS.
The first week In January was devoted to making clothing. The needles found in the box were plied by strong, if not supple fingers, and what was sewed, was sewed strongly. Thread was plenty, as Smith had thought of using again that with which the strips of the balloon had been fastened together. These long bands had been carefully unripped by Spilett and Herbert with commendable patience, since Pencroff had thrown aside the work, which bothered him beyond measure; but when it came to sewing again the sailor was unequalled.
The first week in January was dedicated to making clothing. The needles found in the box were used by strong, though not very flexible, fingers, and whatever was sewn was done so with strength. There was plenty of thread, as Smith had decided to reuse the one that had been used to stitch the balloon's strips together. Spilett and Herbert had carefully taken apart these long bands with admirable patience, since Pencroff had discarded the task, which frustrated him to no end; however, when it came to sewing again, the sailor was unmatched.
The varnish was then removed from the cloth by means of soda procured as before, and the cloth was afterwards bleached in the sun. Some dozens of shirts and socks—the latter, of course, not knitted, but made of sewed strips—were thus made. How happy it made the colonists to be clothed again in white linen—linen coarse enough, it is true, but they did not mind that—and to lie between sheets, which transformed the banks of Granite House into real beds! About this time they also made boots from seal leather, which were a timely substitute for those brought from America. They were long and wide enough, and never pinched the feet of the pedestrians.
The varnish was then removed from the fabric using soda as before, and the cloth was later bleached in the sun. Dozens of shirts and socks—the latter, of course, not knitted but made from sewn strips—were made this way. The colonists were thrilled to be dressed again in white linen—coarse, sure, but they didn’t mind—and to sleep between sheets, which turned the banks of Granite House into actual beds! Around this time, they also made boots from seal leather, which were a timely replacement for those brought from America. They were long and wide enough, and never pinched the feet of those walking.
In the beginning of the year (1866) the hot weather was incessant, but the hunting in the woods, which fairly swarmed with birds and beasts, continued; and Spilett and Herbert were too good shots to waste powder. Smith had recommended them to save their ammunition, and that they might keep it for future use the engineer took measures to replace it by substances easily renewable. How could he tell what the future might have in store for them in case they left the island? It behooved them, therefore, to prepare for all emergencies.
In the beginning of the year (1866), the hot weather was relentless, but the hunting in the woods, which was full of birds and animals, carried on; and Spilett and Herbert were skilled enough shooters not to waste any bullets. Smith had advised them to conserve their ammo, and to ensure they had enough for the future, the engineer took steps to substitute it with easily replenishable materials. How could he know what the future might hold for them if they left the island? It was therefore essential for them to get ready for any situation.
As Smith had not discovered any lead in the island he substituted iron shot, which were easily made. As they were not so heavy as leaden ones they had to be made larger, and the charges contained a less number, but the skill of the hunters counterbalanced this defect. Powder he could have made, since he had all the necessary materials but as its preparation requires extreme care, and as without special apparatus it is difficult to make it of good quality, Smith proposed to manufacture pyroxyline, a kind of gun-cotton, a substance in which cotton is not necessary, except as cellulose. Now cellulose is simply the elementary tissue of vegetables, and is found in almost a pure state not only in cotton, but also in the texile fibres of hemp and flax, in paper and old rags, the pith of the elder, etc. And it happened that elder trees abounded in the island towards the mouth of Red Creek:—the colonists had already used its shoots and berries in place of coffee.
As Smith hadn’t found any lead on the island, he switched to using iron shot, which were easier to make. Since they weren’t as heavy as lead ones, they needed to be larger, and the charges contained fewer of them, but the hunters’ skill made up for this flaw. He could have produced gunpowder since he had all the necessary materials, but its preparation requires a lot of care, and it’s difficult to make it high quality without special equipment. So, Smith suggested making pyroxyline, a type of gun-cotton, which doesn’t need cotton itself, just cellulose. Cellulose is basically the fundamental tissue of plants, and it can be found in almost pure form not only in cotton but also in the textile fibers of hemp and flax, in paper and old rags, the pith of elder, and more. Fortunately, elder trees were abundant on the island near the mouth of Red Creek; the colonists had already used its shoots and berries as a substitute for coffee.
Thus they had the cellulose at hand, and the only other substance necessary for the manufacture of pyroxyline was nitric acid, which Smith could easily produce as before. The engineer, therefore, resolved to make and use this combustible, although he was aware that it had certain serious inconveniences, such as inflaming at 170° instead of 240°, and a too instantaneous deflagration for firearms. On the other hand, pyroxyline had these advantages—it was not affected by dampness, it did not foul the gun-barrels, and its explosive force was four times greater than that of gunpowder.
So they had the cellulose ready, and the only other ingredient needed to make pyroxyline was nitric acid, which Smith could easily produce like before. The engineer decided to create and use this explosive, even though he knew it came with some serious drawbacks, like igniting at 170° instead of 240°, and it had too quick of a deflagration for firearms. On the flip side, pyroxyline had some great benefits—it wasn’t affected by moisture, it didn’t dirty the gun barrels, and its explosive power was four times stronger than that of gunpowder.
In order to make the pyroxyline, Smith made a mixture of three parts of nitric acid with five of concentrated sulphuric acid, and steeped the cellulose in this mixture for a quarter of an hour; afterwards it was washed in fresh water and left to dry. The operation succeeded perfectly, and the hunters had at their disposal a substance perfectly prepared, and which, used with discretion, gave excellent results.
To create the pyroxyline, Smith mixed three parts nitric acid with five parts concentrated sulfuric acid, then soaked the cellulose in this mixture for fifteen minutes; after that, it was rinsed in clean water and left to dry. The process worked flawlessly, and the hunters had a well-prepared substance that, when used carefully, produced excellent results.
About this time the colonists cleared three acres of Prospect Plateau, leaving the rest as pasture for the onagers. Many excursions were made into Jacamar Wood and the Far West, and they brought back a perfect harvest of wild vegetables, spinach, cresses, charlocks, and radishes, which intelligent culture would greatly change, and which would serve to modify the flesh diet which the colonists had been obliged to put up with. They also hauled large quantities of wood and coal, and each excursion helped improve the roads by grinding down its inequalities under the wheels.
About this time, the colonists cleared three acres of Prospect Plateau, leaving the rest for the onagers to graze. They made many trips into Jacamar Wood and the Far West, bringing back an abundance of wild vegetables like spinach, cresses, charlocks, and radishes. With some smart cultivation, these could be transformed, helping to diversify the meat-heavy diet the colonists had been stuck with. They also carried back large amounts of wood and coal, and each trip helped improve the roads by smoothing out the bumps under the wheels.
The warren always furnished its contingent of rabbits, and as it was situated without Glycerine creek, its occupants could not reach nor damage the new plantations. As to the oyster-bed among the coast rocks, it furnished a daily supply of excellent mollusks. Further, fish from the lake and river were abundant, as Pencroff had made set-lines on which they often caught trout and another very savory fish marked with small yellow spots on a silver-colored body. Thus Neb, who had charge of the culinary department, was able to make an agreeable change in the menu of each repast. Bread alone was wanting at the colonists’ table, and they felt this privation exceedingly.
The warren always provided its share of rabbits, and since it was located outside Glycerine Creek, the rabbits couldn't reach or harm the new plantations. As for the oyster bed among the coastal rocks, it offered a daily supply of excellent mollusks. Additionally, there were plenty of fish from the lake and river, as Pencroff had set up some lines on which they often caught trout and another very tasty fish with small yellow spots on a silver-colored body. This allowed Neb, who was in charge of cooking, to make each meal a bit more interesting. The colonists only missed bread at their table, and they felt this lack quite keenly.
Sometimes the little party hunted the sea-turtles, which frequented the coast at Mandible Cape. At this season the beach was covered with little mounds enclosing the round eggs, which were left to the sun to hatch; and as each turtle produces two hundred and fifty eggs annually, their number was very great.
Sometimes the small group went hunting for sea turtles, which often showed up along the coast at Mandible Cape. During this time, the beach was dotted with little mounds holding the round eggs, left out in the sun to hatch; since each turtle lays about two hundred and fifty eggs each year, there were a lot of them.
“It is a true egg-field,” said Spilett, “and all we have to do is to gather them.”
“It’s a real egg field,” Spilett said, “and all we need to do is gather them.”
But they did not content themselves with these products; they hunted also the producers, and took back to Granite House a dozen of these reptiles, which were excellent eating. Turtle soup, seasoned with herbs, and a handful of shell-fish thrown in, gained high praise for its concoctor, Neb.
But they weren't satisfied with just these products; they also hunted the suppliers and brought back a dozen of these reptiles to Granite House, which made for excellent eating. Turtle soup, seasoned with herbs and a handful of shellfish added in, received high praise for its creator, Neb.
Another fortunate event, which permitted them to make new provision for winter, must be mentioned. Shoals of salmon ascended the Mercy for many miles, in order to spawn. The river was full of these fish, which measured upwards of two feet in length, and it was only necessary to place some barriers in the stream in order to capture a great many. Hundreds were caught in this way, and salted down for winter, when the ice would stop the fishing.
Another lucky event that allowed them to prepare for winter should be noted. Large groups of salmon swam up the Mercy for many miles to spawn. The river was packed with these fish, which were over two feet long, and it just took some barriers in the stream to catch plenty of them. Hundreds were caught this way and salted away for winter when the ice would make fishing impossible.
Jup, during this time, was elevated to the position of a domestic. He had been clothed in a jacket, and short trowsers, and an apron with pockets, which were his joy, as he kept his hands in them and allowed no one to search them. The adroit orang had been wonderfully trained by Neb, and one would have said they understood each other’s conversation. Jup had, moreover, a real affection for the Negro, which was reciprocated. When the monkey was not wanted to carry wood or to climb to the top of some tree, he was passing his time in the kitchen, seeking to imitate Neb in all that he was doing. The master also showed great patience and zeal in instructing his pupil, and the pupil showed remarkable intelligence in profiting by these lessons.
Jup, during this time, was promoted to the role of a helper. He wore a jacket, short pants, and an apron with pockets, which he loved, as he kept his hands in them and didn’t let anyone search them. The skilled orangutan had been incredibly trained by Neb, and it seemed they understood each other's conversation. Jup also had a genuine affection for Neb, which was mutual. When the monkey wasn’t needed to carry wood or climb up a tree, he spent his time in the kitchen, trying to copy Neb in everything he did. The master also showed great patience and enthusiasm in teaching his student, and the student demonstrated remarkable intelligence in learning from these lessons.
Great was the satisfaction one day when Master Jup, napkin on arm, came without having been called to wait on the table. Adroit and attentive, he acquitted himself perfectly, changing the plates, bringing the dishes, and pouring the drink, all with a gravity which greatly amused the colonists, and completely overcame Pencroff.
Great was the satisfaction one day when Master Jup, napkin on his arm, showed up uninvited to serve at the table. Skillful and attentive, he did an excellent job, switching out plates, bringing dishes, and pouring drinks, all with a seriousness that really amused the colonists and completely overwhelmed Pencroff.
“Jup, some more soup! Jup, a bit more agouti! Jup, another plate! Jup, brave, honest Jup!”
“Jup, some more soup! Jup, a little more agouti! Jup, another plate! Jup, brave, honest Jup!”
Jup, not in the least disconcerted, responded to every call, looked out for everything, and nodded his head intelligently when the sailor, alluding to his former pleasantry said:—
Jup, completely unfazed, answered every call, kept an eye on everything, and nodded his head knowingly when the sailor, referring to his earlier joke, said:—
“Decidedly, Jup, we must double your wages!”
“Definitely, Jup, we need to double your pay!”
The orang had become perfectly accustomed, to Granite House, and often accompanied his masters to the forest without manifesting the least desire to run off. It was laughable to see him march along with a stick of Pencroff’s on his shoulder, like a gun. If any one wanted some fruit gathered from a treetop how quickly be was up there. If the wagon wheels stuck in the mire, with what strength he raised it onto the road again.
The orangutan had completely gotten used to Granite House and often went with his owners to the forest without showing any desire to run away. It was funny to see him walk along with one of Pencroff’s sticks on his shoulder like a rifle. If anyone needed some fruit picked from a tree, he was quick to climb up there. If the wagon wheels got stuck in the mud, he would lift it back onto the road with impressive strength.
“What a Hercules!” exclaimed Pencroff. “If he was as mischievous as he is gentle we could not get along with him.”
“What a Hercules!” exclaimed Pencroff. “If he was as playful as he is gentle, we wouldn’t be able to get along with him.”
Towards the end of January the colonists undertook great work in the interior of the island. It had been decided that they would establish at the foot of Mount Franklin, near the sources of Red Creek, the corral destined to contain the animals whose presence would have been unpleasant near Granite House, and more particularly the moufflons, which were to furnish wool for winter clothing. Every morning all the colonists, or oftener Smith, Herbert, and Pencroff, went with the onagers to the site, five miles distant, over what they called Corral Road. There an extensive area had been chosen opposite the southern slope of the mountain. It was a level plain, having here and there groups of trees, situated at the base of one of the spurs, which closed it in on that side. A small stream, rising close by, crossed it diagonally, and emptied into Red Creek. The grass was lush, and the position of the trees allowed the air to circulate freely. All that was necessary was to build a palisade around to the mountain spur sufficiently high to keep in the animals. The enclosure would be large enough to contain one hundred cattle, moufflons or wild goats and their young.
Towards the end of January, the colonists took on a major project in the interior of the island. They decided to set up a corral at the base of Mount Franklin, near the sources of Red Creek, which would hold the animals that wouldn't be suitable near Granite House, especially the moufflons, as they were needed for wool for winter clothing. Every morning, all the colonists—or more frequently Smith, Herbert, and Pencroff—would travel with the onagers to the site, five miles away, along what they called Corral Road. They had chosen a large area directly opposite the southern slope of the mountain. It was a flat plain with clusters of trees scattered around, located at the base of one of the mountain's spurs, which provided a natural boundary on that side. A small stream, starting nearby, flowed diagonally across the plain and fed into Red Creek. The grass was thick, and the placement of the trees allowed for good airflow. All they needed to do was build a palisade around the mountain spur high enough to keep the animals in. The enclosure would be spacious enough to hold a hundred cattle, moufflons, or wild goats and their young.
The line of the corral was marked out by the engineer, and they all set to work to cut down the trees necessary for the palisade. The road which they had made furnished some hundred trees, which were drawn to the place and set firmly in the ground. At the back part of the palisade they made an entranceway, closed by a double gate made from thick plank, which could be firmly fastened on the outside.
The engineer marked out the fence line, and everyone got to work cutting down the trees needed for the palisade. The road they had made provided about a hundred trees, which were brought to the site and securely planted in the ground. At the back of the palisade, they created an entrance that was secured with a double gate made of thick planks, which could be locked tightly from the outside.
The building of this corral took all of three weeks, as, besides the work on the palisades, Smith put up large sheds for the animals. These were made of planks, and, indeed, everything had to be made solidly and strong, as moufflons have great strength, and their first resistance was to be feared. The uprights, pointed at the end and charred, had been bolted together, and the strength of the whole had been augmented by placing braces at intervals.
The construction of this corral took a full three weeks, as, in addition to the work on the fences, Smith built large sheds for the animals. These were made of planks, and really, everything needed to be built solidly and strongly, since moufflons are very powerful, and their initial resistance was something to worry about. The posts, pointed at the ends and charred, were bolted together, and the overall strength was further increased by adding braces at regular intervals.
The corral finished, the next thing was to inaugurate a grand hunt at the pasturages, near the foot of Mount Franklin, frequented by the animals. The time chosen was the 7th of February, a lovely summer day, and everybody took part in the affair. The two onagers, already pretty well trained, were mounted by Spilett and Herbert and did excellent service. The plan was to drive together the moufflons and goats by gradually narrowing the circle of the chase around them. Smith, Pencroff, Neb, and Jup posted themselves in different parts of the wood, while the two horsemen and Top scoured the country for half a mile around the corral. The moufflons were very numerous in this neighborhood. These handsome animals were as large as deer, with larger horns than those of rams, and a greyish-colored wool, mingled with long hair, like argali.
The corral was done, so the next step was to kick off a big hunt at the pastures near the foot of Mount Franklin, where the animals often gathered. They chose the 7th of February, a beautiful summer day, and everyone got involved. Spilett and Herbert rode the two onagers, which were already pretty well trained, and they performed brilliantly. The plan was to herd the moufflons and goats together by slowly closing in the chase around them. Smith, Pencroff, Neb, and Jup positioned themselves in different areas of the woods, while the two riders and Top explored the land for half a mile around the corral. There were a lot of moufflons in this area. These striking animals were about the size of deer, with larger horns than rams, and had greyish wool mixed with long hair, like argali.
The hunt, with its going and coming, the racing backwards and forwards, the shouting and hallooing, was fatiguing enough. Out of a hundred animals that were driven together many escaped, but little by little some thirty moufflons and a dozen wild goats were driven within the corral, whose open gate seemed to offer a chance of escape. The result was, therefore, satisfactory; and as many of these moufflons were females with young, it was certain that the herd would prosper, and milk and skins be plenty in the future.
The hunt, with all its comings and goings, the frantic back-and-forth, the shouting and yelling, was exhausting enough. Out of a hundred animals that were herded together, many got away, but little by little, around thirty moufflons and a dozen wild goats were driven into the corral, whose open gate seemed to offer a chance for escape. The outcome was, therefore, positive; and since many of these moufflons were females with young ones, it was clear that the herd would thrive, ensuring plenty of milk and skins in the future.
In the evening the hunters returned to Granite House nearly tired out. Nevertheless the next day they went back to look at the corral. The prisoners had tried hard to break down the palisade, but, not succeeding, they had soon become quiet.
In the evening, the hunters returned to Granite House almost exhausted. However, the next day they went back to check on the corral. The captives had attempted to break down the palisade, but when that didn’t work, they quickly settled down.
Nothing of any importance happened during February. The routine of daily work continued, and while improving the condition of the existing roads, a third, starting from the enclosure, and directed towards the southern coast, was begun. This unknown portion of Lincoln Island was one mass of forest, such as covered Serpentine Peninsula, giving shelter to the beasts from whose presence Spilett proposed to rid their domain.
Nothing significant happened in February. The daily work routine went on, and while they were improving the existing roads, they started a third one that began at the enclosure and headed toward the southern coast. This uncharted part of Lincoln Island was completely covered in forest, similar to the Serpentine Peninsula, providing refuge for the animals that Spilett suggested they should eliminate from their territory.
Before the winter returned careful attention was given to the cultivation of the wild plants which had been transplanted to the plateau, and Herbert seldom returned from an excursion without bringing back some useful vegetable. One day it was a kind of succory, from the seed of which an excellent oil can be pressed; another time, it was the common sorrel, whose anti-scorbutic properties were not to be neglected; and again, it was some of those valuable tubercles which have always been cultivated in South America, those potatoes, of which more than two hundred species are known at present. The kitchen garden, already well enclosed, well watered, and well defended against the birds, was divided into small beds of lettuce, sorrel, radish, charlock, and other crucifers; and as the soil upon the plateau was of wonderful richness, abundant crops might be anticipated.
Before winter returned, careful attention was given to the cultivation of the wild plants that had been transplanted to the plateau, and Herbert rarely returned from an outing without bringing back some useful vegetable. One day it was a type of succory, from the seeds of which great oil can be pressed; another time, it was common sorrel, whose anti-scurvy properties shouldn't be overlooked; and again, it was some of those valuable tubers that have always been grown in South America, those potatoes, of which there are more than two hundred known species. The kitchen garden, already well-fenced, well-watered, and well-protected from the birds, was divided into small beds of lettuce, sorrel, radish, charlock, and other crucifers; and since the soil on the plateau was incredibly rich, plentiful crops were expected.
Neither were various drinks wanting, and unless requiring wine, the most fastidious could not have complained. To the Oswego tea, made from the mountain mint, and the fermented liquor made from the roots of the dragon-tree, Smith added a genuine beer; this was made from the young shoots of the “abies nigra,” which, after having been boiled and fermented, yielded that agreeable and particularly healthful drink, known to Americans as “spring beer,” that is, spruce beer.
There was no shortage of drinks, and unless you needed wine, even the fussiest would have found something to enjoy. Along with the Oswego tea, made from mountain mint, and the fermented drink from the roots of the dragon tree, Smith included an authentic beer; this was brewed from the young shoots of the “abies nigra,” which, after being boiled and fermented, produced that pleasant and particularly healthy drink known in America as “spring beer,” or spruce beer.
Toward the close of summer the poultry yard received a fine pair of bustards belonging to the species “houbara,” remarkable for a sort of short cloak of feathers and a membranous pouch extending on either side of the upper mandible; also some fine cocks, with black skin, comb, and wattles, like those of Mozambique, which strutted about the lake shore.
Toward the end of summer, the poultry yard welcomed a beautiful pair of bustards of the "houbara" species, known for their short feather cloaks and a pouch on either side of their upper beak. There were also some impressive roosters with black skin, combs, and wattles like those from Mozambique, proudly strutting around the lake shore.
Thus the zeal of these intelligent and brave men made every thing prosper. Providence, doubtless, assisted them; but, faithful to the precept, they first helped themselves, and Heaven helped them accordingly.
Thus the enthusiasm of these smart and courageous men made everything thrive. Providence surely assisted them; but, staying true to the principle, they first helped themselves, and Heaven helped them in return.
In the evenings, during this warm summer weather, after the day’s work was ended, and when the sea breeze was springing up, the colonists loved to gather together on the edge of Prospect Plateau in an arbor of Neb’s building, covered with climbing plants. There they conversed and instructed each other, and planned for the future; or the rough wit of the sailor amused this little world, in which the most perfect harmony had never ceased to reign.
In the evenings, during the warm summer weather, after finishing the day’s work, and as the sea breeze started to blow, the colonists enjoyed gathering at the edge of Prospect Plateau in an arbor of Neb’s building, which was draped with climbing plants. There, they chatted and shared knowledge, and made plans for the future; or the sailor's rough humor entertained this small community, where perfect harmony had always prevailed.
They talked, too, of their country, dear and grand America. In what condition was the Rebellion? It certainly could not have continued. Richmond had, doubtless, soon fallen into General Grant’s hands. The capture of the Confederate capital was necessarily the last act in that unhappy struggle. By this time the North must have triumphed. How a newspaper would have been welcomed by the colonists of Lincoln Island! It was eleven months since all communication between them and the rest of the world had been interrupted, and pretty soon, the 24th of March, the anniversary of the day when the balloon had thrown them on this unknown coast, would have arrived. Then they were castaways, struggling with the elements for life. Now thanks to the knowledge of their leader, thanks to their own intelligence, they were true colonists, furnished with arms, tools, instruments, who had turned to their use the animals, vegetables and minerals of the island, the three kingdoms of nature.
They also talked about their country, dear and mighty America. What was the status of the Rebellion? It surely couldn't still be going on. Richmond had likely fallen into General Grant’s hands by now. The capture of the Confederate capital was bound to be the final act in that unfortunate conflict. By this point, the North must have won. How eagerly the colonists of Lincoln Island would have welcomed a newspaper! It had been eleven months since all communication with the outside world had been cut off, and soon, on March 24th, the anniversary of the day they were cast onto this unknown shore, would arrive. Back then, they were castaways, fighting against the elements for survival. Now, thanks to their leader’s expertise and their own resourcefulness, they had become true colonists, equipped with weapons, tools, and instruments, who had utilized the island’s animals, plants, and minerals, representing the three kingdoms of nature.
As to Smith, he listened to the conversation of his companions oftener than he spoke himself. Sometimes he smiled at some thought of Herbert’s, or some sally of Pencroff’s, but always and above all other things, he reflected upon those inexplicable events, upon that strange enigma whose secret still escaped him.
As for Smith, he listened to his friends’ conversations more often than he spoke. Sometimes he smiled at something Herbert said or a joke by Pencroff, but mostly, he focused on those puzzling events, that strange mystery whose answer still evaded him.
CHAPTER XXXI.
BAD WEATHER—THE HYDRAULIC ELEVATOR—MAKING WINDOW GLASS AND TABLE WARE—THE BREAD TREE—FREQUENT VISITS TO THE CORRAL—THE INCREASE OF THE HERD—THE REPORTER’S QUESTION—THE EXACT POSITION OF LINCOLN ISLAND—PENCROFF’S PROPOSAL.
BAD WEATHER—THE HYDRAULIC ELEVATOR—MAKING WINDOW GLASS AND TABLEWARE—THE BREAD TREE—FREQUENT VISITS TO THE CORRAL—THE INCREASE OF THE HERD—THE REPORTER’S QUESTION—THE EXACT POSITION OF LINCOLN ISLAND—PENCROFF’S PROPOSAL.
The weather changed during the first week in March. There was a full moon in the beginning of the month, and the heat was excessive. The electricity in the air could be felt, and the stormy weather was at hand. On the 2d the thunder was very violent, the wind came out east, and the hail beat against the front of Granite House, pattering like a volley of musketry. It was necessary to fasten the doors and shutters in order to keep the rooms from being inundated. Some of the hailstones were as large as pigeons’ eggs, and made Pencroff think of his cornfield. He instantly ran there, and by covering the tiny young sprouts with a large cloth was able to protect them. The sailor was well pelted, but he did not mind that.
The weather changed during the first week of March. There was a full moon at the start of the month, and the heat was intense. You could feel the electricity in the air, and a storm was on the way. On the 2nd, the thunder was really loud, the wind came from the east, and the hail hit the front of Granite House, sounding like a barrage of gunfire. It was necessary to secure the doors and shutters to prevent the rooms from flooding. Some of the hailstones were as big as pigeon eggs, and it reminded Pencroff of his cornfield. He quickly ran there, and by covering the small young sprouts with a large cloth, he managed to protect them. The sailor got pelted pretty well, but he didn't mind.
The stormy weather lasted for eight days, and the thunder was almost continuous. The heavens were full of lightning, and many trees in the forest were struck, and also a huge pine growing upon the border of the lake. Two or three times the electric fluid struck the beach, melting and vitrifying the sand. Finding these fulgurites, Smith conceived the idea that it would be possible to furnish the windows of Granite House with glass thick and solid enough to resist the wind and rain and hail.
The stormy weather went on for eight days, with nearly constant thunder. The sky was filled with lightning, and many trees in the forest were hit, including a massive pine near the edge of the lake. Two or three times, lightning struck the beach, melting and turning the sand into glass. Discovering these fulgurites, Smith came up with the idea that it would be possible to make the windows of Granite House with glass thick and strong enough to withstand the wind, rain, and hail.
The colonists, having no immediate out-of-doors work, profited by the bad weather to complete and perfect the interior arrangements of Granite House. The engineer built a lathe with which they were able to turn some toilette articles and cooking utensils, and also some buttons, the need of which had been pressing. They also made a rack for the arms, which were kept with the utmost care. Nor was Jup forgotten; he occupied a chamber apart, a sort of cabin with a frame always full of good bedding, which suited him exactly.
The colonists, having no immediate outdoor tasks, took advantage of the bad weather to finish and enhance the interior layout of Granite House. The engineer built a lathe that allowed them to create some toiletry items and cooking utensils, as well as some buttons they urgently needed. They also made a rack for the weapons, which were stored with great care. Jup wasn’t neglected either; he had a separate room, a kind of cabin that was always filled with comfortable bedding, which was just right for him.
“There’s no such thing as fault-finding with Jup,” said Pencroff. “What a servant he is, Neb!”
“There’s no way to find fault with Jup,” said Pencroff. “What an amazing servant he is, Neb!”
“He is my pupil and almost my equal!”
"He's my student and nearly my equal!"
“He’s your superior,” laughed the sailor, “as you can talk, Neb, and he cannot!”
"He's your boss," laughed the sailor, "since you can talk, Neb, and he can't!"
Jup had by this time become perfectly familiar with all the details of his work. He brushed the clothes, turned the spit, swept the rooms, waited at table, and—what delighted Pencroff—never laid down at night before he had tucked the worthy sailor in his bed.
Jup was now completely familiar with every detail of his work. He brushed the clothes, turned the spit, swept the rooms, served at the table, and—what made Pencroff happy—never went to bed at night before he tucked the good sailor in.
As to the health of the colony, bipeds and bimana, quadrupeds and quadrumana, it left nothing to be desired. With the out-of-doors work, on this salubrious soil, under this temperate zone, laboring with head and hand, they could not believe that they could ever be sick, and all were in splendid health. Herbert had grown a couple of inches during the year; his figure had developed and knitted together, and he promised to become a fine man physically and morally. He profited by the lessons which he learned practically and from the books in the chest, and he found in the engineer and the reporter masters pleased to teach him. It was the engineer’s desire to teach the lad all he himself knew.
As for the health of the colony, both humans and animals were thriving. With all the outdoor work on this healthy land, in this mild climate, working with both mind and body, they couldn't imagine ever getting sick, and everyone was in great shape. Herbert had grown a couple of inches over the year; his figure had developed well, and he showed promise of becoming a strong man both physically and morally. He took advantage of the lessons he learned practically and from the books in the chest, and he found in the engineer and the reporter eager teachers. The engineer was keen to pass on everything he knew to the boy.
“If I die,” thought Smith, “he will take my place.”
“If I die,” Smith thought, “he will take over for me.”
The storm ended on the 9th of March, but the sky remained clouded during the remainder of the month, and, with the exception of two or three fine days, rainy or foggy.
The storm finished on March 9th, but the sky stayed overcast for the rest of the month, and, except for two or three nice days, it was rainy or foggy.
About this time a little onager was born, and a number of moufflons, to the great joy of Neb and Herbert, who had each their favorites among these new comers.
About this time, a little onager was born, along with several moufflons, much to the delight of Neb and Herbert, who each had their favorites among these newcomers.
The domestication of piccaries was also attempted—a pen being built near the poultry-yard, and a number of the young animals placed therein under Neb’s care. Jup was charged with taking them their daily nourishment, the kitchen refuse, and he acquitted himself conscientiously of the task. He did, indeed, cut off their tails, but this was a prank and not naughtiness, because those little twisted appendages amused him like a toy, and his instinct was that of a child.
The domestication of peccaries was also tried—a pen was built near the poultry yard, and several young animals were placed there under Neb’s care. Jup was assigned the job of delivering their daily food, which was kitchen scraps, and he took this responsibility seriously. He did, however, cut off their tails, but this was more for fun than mischief, as he found those little twisted tails amusing like a toy, and his instinct was that of a child.
One day in March, Pencroff, talking with the engineer, recalled to his mind a promise made some time before.
One day in March, Pencroff, chatting with the engineer, remembered a promise he had made some time ago.
“You have spoken of something to take the place of our long ladder, Mr. Smith. Will you make it some day?”
“You mentioned something to replace our long ladder, Mr. Smith. Will you create it one day?”
“You mean a kind of elevator?” answered Smith.
“You mean like an elevator?” Smith replied.
“Call it an elevator if you wish,” responded the sailor. “The name does not matter, provided we can get to our house easily.”
“Call it an elevator if you want,” said the sailor. “The name doesn’t matter, as long as we can get to our house easily.”
“Nothing is easier, Pencroff; but is it worth while?”
“Nothing is easier, Pencroff; but is it really worth it?”
“Certainly, sir, it is. After we have the necessaries, let us think of the conveniences. For people this will be a luxury, if you choose; but for things, it is indispensable. It is not so easy to climb a long ladder when one is heavily loaded.”
“Of course, sir, it is. Once we have what we need, let’s consider the comforts. For people, this may be a luxury if you like; but for things, it is essential. It’s not easy to climb a long ladder when you’re carrying a heavy load.”
“Well, Pencroff, we will try to satisfy you,” answered Smith.
“Well, Pencroff, we'll do our best to make you happy,” replied Smith.
“But you haven’t the machine.”
“But you don’t have the machine.”
“We will make one.”
"We'll make one."
“To go by steam?”
"Travel by steam?"
“No, to go by water.”
“No, taking the water route.”
Indeed, a natural force was at hand. All that was necessary was to enlarge the passage which furnished Granite House with water, and make a fall at the end of the corridor. Above this fall the engineer placed a paddle-wheel, and wrapped around its axle a strong rope attached to a basket. In this manner, by means of a long cord which reached to the ground, they could raise or lower the basket by means of the hydraulic motor.
Indeed, a natural force was at play. All that was needed was to widen the passage that supplied Granite House with water and create a drop at the end of the hallway. Above this drop, the engineer installed a paddle wheel and wrapped a sturdy rope around its axle, connecting it to a basket. This way, with a long cord that reached down to the ground, they could raise or lower the basket using the hydraulic motor.
On the 17th of March the elevator was used for the first time, and after that everything was hoisted into Granite House by its means. Top was particularly pleased by this improvement, as he could not climb like Jup, and he had often made the ascent on the back of Neb or of the orang.
On March 17th, the elevator was used for the first time, and after that, everything was lifted into Granite House using it. Top was especially happy about this upgrade, as he couldn't climb like Jup, and he had often made the trip on Neb's back or the orangutan's.
Smith also attempted to make glass, which was difficult enough, but after numerous attempts he succeeded in establishing a glass-works at the old pottery, where Herbert and Spilett spent several days. The substances entering into the composition of glass—sand, chalk, and soda—the engineer had at hand; but the “cane” of the glassmaker, an iron tube five or six feet long, was wanting. This Pencroff, however, succeeded in making, and on the 28th of March the furnace was heated.
Smith also tried to make glass, which was challenging, but after many attempts, he managed to set up a glassworks at the old pottery, where Herbert and Spilett spent several days. The materials needed for glass—sand, chalk, and soda—were available to the engineer; however, he was missing the “cane” of the glassmaker, an iron tube about five or six feet long. Pencroff, however, was able to make it, and on March 28th, the furnace was heated.
One hundred parts of sand, thirty-five of chalk, forty of sulphate of soda, mixed with two of three parts of powdered charcoal, composed the substance which was placed in earthen vessels and melted to a liquid, or rather to the consistency of paste. Smith “culled” a certain quantity of this paste with his cane, and turned it back and forth on a metal plate so placed that it could be blown on; then he passed the cane to Herbert, telling him to blow in it.
One hundred parts of sand, thirty-five of chalk, forty of sodium sulfate, mixed with two to three parts of powdered charcoal, made up the mixture that was put in clay containers and melted down to a liquid, or more accurately, to a paste-like consistency. Smith scooped a certain amount of this paste with his cane and moved it back and forth on a metal plate positioned so that it could be blown on; then he handed the cane to Herbert, telling him to blow into it.
“As you do to make soap bubbles?”
“As you do to make soap bubbles?”
“Exactly.”
“Exactly.”
So Herbert, puffing out his cheeks, blew through the cane, which he kept constantly turning about, in such a manner as to inflate the vitreous mass. Other quantities of the substance in fusion were added to the first, and the result was a bubble, measuring a foot in diameter. Then Smith took the cane again, and swinging it like a pendulum, he made this bubble lengthen into the shape of cylinder.
So Herbert, puffing out his cheeks, blew through the cane, which he kept turning around, in such a way as to inflate the glassy mass. He added more of the molten substance to the first amount, and the result was a bubble about a foot in diameter. Then Smith took the cane again and, swinging it like a pendulum, stretched the bubble into the shape of a cylinder.
This cylinder was terminated at either end by two hemispherical caps, which were easily cut off by means of a sharp iron dipped in cold water; in the same way the cylinder was cut lengthwise, and after having been heated a second time it was spread on the plate and smoothed with a wooden roller.
This cylinder had two rounded caps on each end that could be easily cut off using a sharp iron tool dipped in cold water. The cylinder was also sliced lengthwise, and after being heated again, it was laid out on the plate and smoothed down with a wooden roller.
Thus the first glass was made, and by repeating the operation fifty times they had as many glasses, and the windows of Granite House were soon garnished with transparent panes, not very clear, perhaps, but clear enough.
Thus, the first glass was made, and by repeating the process fifty times, they had as many glasses, and the windows of Granite House were soon decorated with transparent panes—maybe not very clear, but clear enough.
As to the glassware, that was mere amusement. They took whatever shape happened to come at the end of the cane. Pencroff had asked to be allowed to blow in his turn and he enjoyed it, but he blew so hard that his products took the most diverting forms, which pleased him amazingly.
As for the glassware, that was just for fun. They shaped whatever came out of the end of the cane. Pencroff wanted a turn to blow in it, and he had a great time, but he blew so hard that his creations ended up with the most amusing shapes, which delighted him greatly.
During one of the excursions undertaken about this time a new tree was discovered, whose products added much to the resources of the colony.
During one of the outings taken around this time, a new tree was discovered, whose fruits greatly increased the colony's resources.
Smith and Herbert, being out hunting one day, went into the forests of the Far West, and as usual the lad asked the engineer a thousand questions, and as Smith was no sportsman, and Herbert was deep in physics and chemistry, the game did not suffer; and so it fell out that the day was nearly ended, and the two hunters were likely to have made a useless excursion, when Herbert, stopping suddenly, exclaimed joyfully:—
Smith and Herbert were out hunting one day in the forests of the Far West. As usual, the kid asked the engineer a ton of questions. Since Smith wasn’t much of a sportsman and Herbert was really into physics and chemistry, they weren’t too focused on hunting. The day was almost over, and it looked like their trip would be a bust when Herbert suddenly stopped and exclaimed joyfully:—
“Oh, Mr. Smith, do you see that tree?”
“Oh, Mr. Smith, do you see that tree?”
And he pointed out a shrub rather than a tree, as it was composed of a single stem with a scaly bark, and leaves striped with small parallel veins.
And he pointed out a bush instead of a tree, as it had a single stem with scaly bark and leaves that had small parallel veins running through them.
“It looks like a small palm. What is it?” asked Smith.
“It looks like a tiny palm tree. What is it?” asked Smith.
“It is a “cycas revoluta,” about which I have read in our Dictionary of Natural History.”
“It is a ‘cycas revoluta,’ which I have read about in our Dictionary of Natural History.”
“But I see no fruit on this shrub?”
“But I don’t see any fruit on this shrub?”
“No, sir, but its trunk contains a flour which Nature furnishes all ground.”
“No, sir, but its trunk has a powder that Nature provides for all flour.”
“Is it a bread-tree?”
“Is it a bread tree?”
“That’s it, exactly.”
"That's it, right on."
“Then, my boy, since we are waiting for our wheat crop, this is a valuable discovery. Examine it, and pray heaven you are not mistaken.”
“Then, my boy, since we are waiting for our wheat crop, this is an important discovery. Check it out, and hope to God you’re not wrong.”
Herbert was not mistaken. He broke the stem of the cycas, which was composed of a glandular tissue containing a certain quantity of farinaceous flour, traversed by ligneous fibres and separated by concentric rings of the same substance. From the fecula oozed a sticky liquid of a disagreeable taste, but this could readily be removed by pressure. The substance itself formed a real flour of superior quality, extremely nourishing, and which used to be forbidden exportation by the laws of Japan.
Herbert was right. He broke the stem of the cycas, which had glandular tissue filled with a certain amount of starchy flour, woven with woody fibers and separated by concentric rings of the same material. A sticky liquid with an unpleasant taste oozed from the starch, but this could easily be squeezed out. The substance itself created a genuine high-quality flour that was very nourishing and was once prohibited from being exported by Japanese law.
Smith and Herbert, after baring carefully noted the location of the cycas, returned to Granite House and made known their discovery, and the next day all the colonists went to the place, and, Pencroff, jubilant, asked the engineer:—
Smith and Herbert, after carefully noting the location of the cycas, returned to Granite House and shared their discovery. The next day, all the colonists went to the site, and Pencroff, excited, asked the engineer:—
“Mr Smith, do you believe there are such things as castaways’ islands?”
“Mr. Smith, do you think there are islands where people are stranded?”
“What do you mean, Pencroff?.”
"What do you mean, Pencroff?"
“Well, I mean islands made especially for people to be shipwrecked upon, where the poor devils could always get along!”
“Well, I mean islands made just for people to get shipwrecked on, where the poor souls could always manage!”
“Perhaps,” said the engineer, smiling.
“Maybe,” said the engineer, smiling.
“Certainly!” answered the sailor, “and just as certainly Lincoln Island is one of them!”
“Absolutely!” replied the sailor, “and just as definitely, Lincoln Island is one of those!”
They returned to Granite House with an ample supply of cycas stems, and the engineer made a press by which the liquid was expelled, and they obtained a goodly quantity of flour which Neb transformed into cakes and puddings. They had not yet real wheaten bread, but it was the next thing to do.
They came back to Granite House with plenty of cycas stems, and the engineer created a press to extract the liquid, resulting in a good amount of flour that Neb turned into cakes and puddings. They still hadn't made real wheat bread, but that was the next thing on their list.
The onager, the goats, and the sheep in the corral furnished a daily supply of milk to the colony, and the cart, or rather a light wagon, which had taken its place, made frequent trips to the corral. And when Pencroff’s turn came, he took Jup along, and made him drive, and Jup, cracking his whip, acquitted himself with his usual intelligence. Thus everything prospered, and the colonists, if they had not been so far from their country, would have had nothing to complain of. They liked the life and they were so accustomed to the island that they would have left it with regret. Nevertheless, such is man’s love of country, that had a ship hove in sight the colonists would have signalled it, have gone aboard and departed. Meantime, they lived this happy life and they had rather to fear than to wish for any interruption of its course.
The onager, the goats, and the sheep in the corral provided a daily supply of milk to the colony, and the cart, or rather a light wagon that had replaced it, made frequent trips to the corral. When it was Pencroff’s turn, he brought Jup along and had him drive, and Jup, cracking his whip, did his job with his usual smarts. Everything thrived, and the colonists, if they hadn’t been so far from their homeland, would have had nothing to complain about. They enjoyed their life and had become so accustomed to the island that they would have left it with a sense of loss. Still, such is humanity’s love for their homeland that if a ship appeared on the horizon, the colonists would have signaled it, gone aboard, and left. In the meantime, they lived this happy life and were more likely to fear any interruption of it than to wish for one.
But who is able to flatter himself that he has attained his fortune and reached the summit of his desires?
But who can honestly think they have achieved their dreams and reached the peak of their desires?
The colonists often discussed the nature of their Island, which they had inhabited for more than a year, and one day a remark was made which, was destined, later, to bring about the most serious result.
The colonists often talked about their Island, where they had lived for over a year, and one day someone made a comment that would later lead to serious consequences.
It was the 1st of April, a Sunday, and the Pascal feast, which Smith and his companions had sanctified by rest and prayer. The day had been lovely, like a day in October in the Northern Hemisphere. Towards evening all were seated in the arbor on the edge of the plateau, watching the gradual approach of night, and drinking some of Neb’s elderberry coffee. They had been talking of the island and its isolated position in the Pacific, when something made Spilett say:—
It was April 1st, a Sunday, and the Easter celebration that Smith and his friends had honored with rest and prayer. The day had been beautiful, like an October day in the Northern Hemisphere. As evening approached, everyone was gathered in the arbor on the edge of the plateau, watching nightfall and sipping on Neb’s elderberry coffee. They had been discussing the island and its remote location in the Pacific when something prompted Spilett to say:—
“By the way, Cyrus, have you ever taken the position of the island again since you have had the sextant?”
“By the way, Cyrus, have you taken the position of the island again since you got the sextant?”
“No,” answered the engineer.
“No,” the engineer replied.
“Well, wouldn’t it be well enough to do so?”.
“Well, wouldn’t it be good enough to do that?”
“What would be the use?” asked Pencroff. “The island is well enough where it is.”
“What would be the point?” asked Pencroff. “The island is just fine where it is.”
“Doubtless,” answered Spilett, “but it is possible that the imperfections of the other instruments may have caused an error in that observation, and since, it is easy to verify it exactly—”
“Definitely,” replied Spilett, “but it’s possible that the flaws in the other instruments might have led to an error in that observation, and since it’s easy to confirm it accurately—”
“You are right, Spilett,” responded the engineer, “and I would have made this verification before, only that if I have made an error it cannot exceed five degrees in latitude or longitude.”
“You're right, Spilett,” replied the engineer, “and I would have checked this earlier, but if I made a mistake, it can't be more than five degrees in latitude or longitude.”
“Who knows,” replied the reporter, “who knows but that we are much nearer an inhabited land than we believe?”
“Who knows,” replied the reporter, “who knows if we are much closer to a land with people than we think?”
“We will know to-morrow,” responded the engineer,” and had it not been for the other work, which has left us no leisure, we would have known already.”
“We'll find out tomorrow,” the engineer replied, “and if it weren't for the other work, which has left us no free time, we would have known already.”
“Well,” said Pencroff, “Mr. Smith is too good an observer to have been mistaken, and if the island has not moved, it is just where he put it!”
“Well,” said Pencroff, “Mr. Smith is too keen an observer to have been wrong, and if the island hasn’t moved, it’s exactly where he placed it!”
So the next day the engineer made the observations with the sextant with the following result:—Longitude 150° 30’ west; latitude 34° 57’ south. The previous observation had given the situation of the island as between longitude 150° and 155° west, and latitude 36° and 35° south, so that, notwithstanding the rudeness of his apparatus, Smith’s error had not been more than five degrees.
So the next day, the engineer took measurements with the sextant, getting the following results: — Longitude 150° 30' west; latitude 34° 57' south. The previous observation had placed the island between longitude 150° and 155° west and latitude 36° and 35° south, so even with his basic equipment, Smith’s error was only about five degrees.
“Now,” said Spilett, “since, beside a sextant, we have an atlas, see, my dear Cyrus, the exact position of Lincoln Island in the Pacific.”
“Now,” said Spilett, “since we have a sextant and an atlas, look, my dear Cyrus, at the exact location of Lincoln Island in the Pacific.”
Herbert brought the atlas, which it will be remembered gave the nomenclature in the French language, and the volume was opened at the map of the Pacific. The engineer, compass in hand, was about to determine their situation, when, suddenly he paused, exclaiming:—
Herbert brought the atlas, which, as you may recall, provided the names in French, and the book was opened to the map of the Pacific. The engineer, compass in hand, was about to figure out their location when, suddenly, he stopped and exclaimed:—
“Why, there is an island marked in this part of the Pacific!”
“Look, there’s an island marked in this part of the Pacific!”
“An island?” cried Pencroff.
"An island?" shouted Pencroff.
“Doubtless it is ours.” added Spilett.
“There's no doubt it's ours,” Spilett added.
“No.” replied Smith. “This island is situated in 153° of longitude and 37° 11’ of latitude.”
“No,” Smith replied. “This island is located at 153° longitude and 37° 11’ latitude.”
“And what’s the name?” asked Herbert.
“And what’s the name?” Herbert asked.
“Tabor Island.”
“Tabor Island.”
“Is it important?”
"Does it matter?"
“No, it is an island lost in the Pacific, and which has never, perhaps, been visited.”
“No, it’s an island lost in the Pacific that has probably never been visited.”
“Very well, we will visit it,” said Pencroff.
“Okay, we’ll go visit it,” said Pencroff.
“We?”
"Are we?"
“Yes, sir; We will build a decked boat, and I will undertake to steer her. How far are we from this Tabor Island?”
“Yes, sir; we will build a decked boat, and I will take charge of steering it. How far are we from Tabor Island?”
“A hundred and fifty miles to the northeast.”
“A hundred and fifty miles to the northeast.”
“Is that all?” responded Pencroff.
“Is that it?” responded Pencroff.
“Why in forty-eight hours, with a good breeze, we will be there!”
“Just wait, in forty-eight hours, with a nice breeze, we’ll be there!”
“But what would be the use?” asked the reporter.
"But what would be the point?" asked the reporter.
“We cannot tell till we see it!”
“We can’t know until we see it!”
And upon this response it was decided that a boat should be built so that it might be launched by about the next October, on the return of good weather.
And based on this response, it was decided that a boat should be built so it could be launched around the next October, with the return of good weather.
CHAPTER XXXII.
SHIP BUILDING—THE SECOND HARVEST—AI HUNTING—A NEW PLANT—A WHALE—THE HARPOON FROM THE VINEYARD—CUTTING UP THIS CETACEA—USE OF THE WHALEBONE—THE END OF MAY—PENCROFF IS CONTENT.
SHIP BUILDING—THE SECOND HARVEST—AI HUNTING—A NEW PLANT—A WHALE—THE HARPOON FROM THE VINEYARD—CUTTING UP THIS CETACEAN—USE OF THE WHALEBONE—THE END OF MAY—PENCROFF IS CONTENT.
When Pencroff was possessed of an idea, he would not rest till it was executed. Now, he wanted to visit Tabor Island, and as a boat of some size was necessary, therefore the boat must be built. He and the engineer accordingly determined upon the following model:—
When Pencroff had an idea, he didn’t stop until it was done. Now, he wanted to visit Tabor Island, and since a decent-sized boat was necessary, they needed to build one. He and the engineer decided on the following model:—
The boat was to measure thirty-five feet on the keel by nine feet beam—with the lines of a racer—and to draw six feet of water, which would be sufficient to prevent her making leeway. She was to be flush-decked, with the two hatchways into two holds separated by a partition, and sloop-rigged with mainsail, topsail, jib, storm-jib and brigantine, a rig easily handled, manageable in a squall, and excellent for lying close in the wind. Her hull was to be constructed of planks, edge to edge, that is, not overlapping, and her timbers would be bent by steam after the planking had been adjusted to a false frame.
The boat was designed to be thirty-five feet long on the keel and nine feet wide at the beam, with a sleek racer’s shape. It would draw six feet of water, enough to keep it from drifting sideways. The design included a flush deck, with two hatchways leading to two holds separated by a partition. It was sloop-rigged with a mainsail, topsail, jib, storm jib, and brigantine, making it easy to handle, manageable in a squall, and great for sailing close to the wind. The hull would be built with planks laid edge to edge, meaning not overlapping, and the timbers would be bent using steam after the planking was fitted onto a temporary frame.
On the question of wood, whether to use elm or deal, they decided on the latter as being easier to work, and supporting immersion in water the better.
On the question of wood, whether to use elm or deal, they chose the latter as it is easier to work with and holds up better when immersed in water.
These details having been arranged, it was decided that, as the fine weather would not return before six months, Smith and Pencroff should do this work alone. Spilett and Herbert were to continue hunting, and Neb and his assistant, Master Jup, were to attend to the domestic cares as usual.
These details sorted out, it was decided that since nice weather wouldn't come back for another six months, Smith and Pencroff would handle this work on their own. Spilett and Herbert would keep hunting, while Neb and his assistant, Master Jup, would take care of the usual household tasks.
At once trees were selected and cut down and sawed into planks, and a week later a ship-yard was made in the hollow between Granite House and the Cliff, and a keel thirty-five feet long, with stern-post and stem lay upon the sand.
Trees were quickly chosen, chopped down, and turned into planks, and a week later a shipyard was set up in the hollow between Granite House and the Cliff, where a thirty-five-foot keel, along with the stern-post and stem, lay on the sand.
Smith had not entered blindly upon this undertaking. He understood marine construction as he did almost everything else, and he had first drawn the model on paper. Moreover, he was well aided by Pencroff, who had worked as a ship-carpenter. It was, therefore, only after deep thought and careful calculation that the false frame was raised on the keel.
Smith hadn't jumped into this project without thinking. He understood marine construction just like he did most things, and he had initially sketched the model on paper. Plus, he had solid support from Pencroff, who had experience as a ship carpenter. So, it was only after thorough consideration and meticulous planning that the false frame was positioned on the keel.
Pencroff was very anxious to begin the new enterprise, and but one thing took him away, and then only for a day, from the work. This was the second harvest, which was made on the 15th of April. It resulted as before, and yielded the proportion of grains calculated.
Pencroff was eager to start the new project, and the only thing that interrupted him, and just for a day, was the second harvest, which took place on April 15th. It turned out just like before and produced the expected amount of grains.
“Five bushels, Mr. Smith,” said Pencroff, after having scrupulously measured these riches.
“Five bushels, Mr. Smith,” Pencroff said, having carefully measured these riches.
“Five bushels,” answered the engineer, “or 650,000 grains of corn.”
“Five bushels,” replied the engineer, “which is 650,000 kernels of corn.”
“Well, we will sow them all this time, excepting a small reserve.”
“Well, we’ll plant all of them this time, except for a small reserve.”
“Yes, and if the next harvest is proportional to this we will have 4,000 bushels.”
“Yes, and if the next harvest is similar to this one, we’ll have 4,000 bushels.”
“And we will eat bread.”
"And we'll eat bread."
“We will, indeed.”
"We will, for sure."
“But we must build a mill?”
“But we have to build a mill?”
“We will build one.”
"We'll build one."
The third field of corn, though incomparably larger than the others, was prepared with great care and received the precious seed. Then Pencroff returned to his work.
The third field of corn, while much larger than the others, was carefully prepared and received the valuable seed. Then Pencroff went back to his work.
In the meantime, Spilett and Herbert hunted in the neighborhood, or with their guns loaded with ball, adventured into the unexplored depths of the Far West. It was an inextricable tangle of great trees growing close together. The exploration of those thick masses was very difficult and the engineer never undertook it without taking with him the pocket compass, as the sun was rarely visible through the leaves. Naturally, game was not plenty in these thick undergrowths, but three ai were shot during the last fortnight in April, and their skins were taken to Granite House, where they received a sort of tanning with sulfuric acid.
In the meantime, Spilett and Herbert explored the area around them, or with their guns loaded, ventured into the uncharted territories of the Far West. It was a complicated mix of large trees growing closely together. Exploring those dense thickets was very challenging, and the engineer never attempted it without bringing his pocket compass, as the sun was hardly visible through the leaves. Naturally, there wasn’t a lot of game in these thick underbrush areas, but three ai were shot during the last two weeks of April, and their skins were taken to Granite House, where they underwent a kind of tanning with sulfuric acid.
On the 30th of April, a discovery, valuable for another reason, was made by Spilett. The two hunters were deep in the south-western part of the Far West when the reporter, walking some fifty paces ahead of his companion, came to a sort of glade, and was surprised to perceive an odor proceeding from certain straight stemmed plants, cylindrical and branching, and bearing bunches of flowers and tiny seeds. The reporter broke off some of these stems, and, returning to the lad, asked him if he knew what they were.
On April 30th, Spilett made a noteworthy discovery for another reason. The two hunters were deep in the southwestern part of the Far West when the reporter, walking about fifty paces ahead of his companion, stumbled upon a kind of glade. He was surprised to smell a fragrance coming from certain straight-stemmed plants that were cylindrical, branching, and had clusters of flowers and small seeds. The reporter broke off some of these stems and, returning to the young man, asked if he knew what they were.
“Where did you find this plant?” asked Herbert.
“Where did you get this plant?” asked Herbert.
“Over there in the glade; there is plenty of it.”
“Over there in the clearing; there's a lot of it.”
“Well, this is a discovery that gives you Pencroff’s everlasting gratitude.”
"Well, this is a discovery that earns you Pencroff’s eternal gratitude."
“Is it tobacco?”
“Is it a vape?”
“Yes, and if it is not first quality it is all the same, tobacco.”
“Yes, and if it’s not top quality, it’s all the same, tobacco.”
“Good Pencroff, how happy he’ll be. But he cannot smoke all. He’ll have to leave some for us.”
“Good Pencroff, he’ll be so happy. But he can’t smoke it all. He’ll need to save some for us.”
“I’ll tell you what, sir. Let us say nothing to Pencroff until the tobacco has been prepared, and then some fine day we will hand him a pipe full.”
“I’ll tell you what, sir. Let’s not say anything to Pencroff until the tobacco is ready, and then one fine day we’ll give him a pipe full.”
“And you may be sure, Herbert, that on that day the good fellow will want nothing else in the world.”
“And you can be sure, Herbert, that on that day the good guy will want nothing else in the world.”
The two smuggled a good supply of the plant into Granite House with as much precaution as if Pencroff had been the strictest of custom house officers. Smith and Neb were let into the secret, but Pencroff never suspected any thing during the two months it took to prepare the leaves, as he was occupied all day at the ship-yard.
The two sneaked a good amount of the plant into Granite House, being as careful as if Pencroff were the strictest customs officer. Smith and Neb were in on the secret, but Pencroff never suspected a thing during the two months it took to prepare the leaves, since he was busy all day at the shipyard.
On the 1st of May the sailor was again interrupted at his favorite work by a fishing adventure, in which all the colonists took part.
On May 1st, the sailor was once again interrupted from his favorite task by a fishing trip that all the colonists joined in on.
For some days they had noticed an enormous animal swimming in the sea some two or three miles distant from the shore. It was a huge whale, apparently belonging to the species australis, called “cape whales.”
For several days, they had seen a massive animal swimming in the sea about two or three miles from the shore. It was a gigantic whale, likely from the species australis, known as “cape whales.”
“How lucky for us if we could capture it!” cried the sailor. “Oh, if we only had a suitable boat and a harpoon ready, so that I could say:—Let’s go for him! For he’s worth all the trouble he’ll give us!”
“How lucky for us if we could catch it!” shouted the sailor. “Oh, if we only had a decent boat and a harpoon ready, I could say:—Let’s go after him! Because he’s worth all the effort he’ll give us!”
“Well, Pencroff, I should like to see you manage a harpoon. It must be interesting.”
“Well, Pencroff, I’d love to see you use a harpoon. It has to be interesting.”
“Interesting and somewhat dangerous,” said the engineer, “but since we have not the means to attack this animal, it is useless to think about him.”
“Interesting and a bit risky,” said the engineer, “but since we don’t have the tools to deal with this creature, it’s pointless to think about him.”
“I am astonished to see a whale in such comparatively high latitude.”
“I’m amazed to see a whale in such a relatively high latitude.”
“Why, Mr. Spilett, we are in that very part of the Pacific which whalers call the ‘whale-field,’ and just here whales are found in the greatest number.”
“Why, Mr. Spilett, we are in the exact area of the Pacific that whalers refer to as the ‘whale-field,’ and right here is where whales are found in the largest quantities.”
“That is so,” said Pencroff, “and I wonder we have not seen one before, but it don’t matter much since we cannot go to it.”
"That's true," said Pencroff, "and I'm surprised we haven't seen one before, but it doesn't really matter since we can't get to it."
And the sailor turned with a sigh to his work, as all sailors are fishermen; and if the sport is proportionate to the size of the game, one can imagine what a whaler must feel in the presence of a whale. But, aside from the sport, such spoil would have been very acceptable to the colony, as the oil, the fat, and the fins could be turned to various uses.
And the sailor turned with a sigh to his work, since all sailors are fishermen; and if the excitement matches the size of the catch, you can only imagine what a whaler must feel when facing a whale. But aside from the thrill, such a catch would have been very welcome to the colony, as the oil, fat, and fins could be used in various ways.
It appeared as if the animal did not wish to leave these waters. He kept swimming about in Union Bay for two days, now approaching the shore, when his black body could be seen perfectly, and again darting through the water or spouting vapor to a vast height in the air. Its presence continually engaged the thoughts of the colonists, and Pencroff was like a child longing for some forbidden object.
It seemed like the animal didn’t want to leave the water. It kept swimming around in Union Bay for two days, sometimes coming close to the shore where its black body was clearly visible, and other times diving through the water or shooting vapor high into the air. Its presence constantly occupied the minds of the colonists, and Pencroff was like a child yearning for something he couldn't have.
Fortune, however, did for the colonists what they could not have done for themselves, and on the 3d of May, Neb looking from his kitchen shouted that the whale was aground on the island.
Fortune, however, did for the colonists what they could not have done for themselves, and on May 3rd, Neb, looking from his kitchen, shouted that the whale was stuck on the island.
Herbert and Spilett, who were about starting on a hunt, laid aside their guns, Pencroff dropped his hatchet, and Smith and Neb, joining their companions, hurried down to the shore. It had grounded on Jetsam Point at high water, and it was not likely that the monster would be able to get off easily; but they must hasten in order to cut off its retreat if necessary. So seizing some picks and spears they ran across the bridge, down the Mercy and along the shore, and in less than twenty minutes the party were beside the huge animal, above whom myriads of birds were already hovering.
Herbert and Spilett, who were about to go on a hunt, set aside their guns. Pencroff dropped his hatchet, and Smith and Neb, joining their friends, rushed down to the shore. The creature had come to rest on Jetsam Point at high tide, and it wasn’t likely the monster would be able to get away easily; but they needed to hurry to cut off its escape if necessary. So, grabbing some picks and spears, they ran across the bridge, down the Mercy, and along the shore, and in under twenty minutes, the group was beside the massive animal, above which swarms of birds were already circling.
“What a monster!” exclaimed Neb.
"What a beast!" exclaimed Neb.
And the term was proper, as it was one of the largest of the southern whales, measuring forty-five feet in length and weighing not less than 150,000 pounds.
And the term was accurate, as it was one of the largest southern whales, measuring forty-five feet long and weighing at least 150,000 pounds.
Meantime the animal, although the tide was still high, made no effort to get off the shore, and the reason for this was explained later when at low water the colonists walked around its body.
Meantime, the animal, even though the tide was still high, didn't try to get off the shore, and the reason for this was explained later when the colonists walked around its body at low tide.
It was dead, and a harpoon protruded from its left flank.
It was lifeless, and a harpoon was sticking out of its left side.
“Are there whalers in our neighborhood?” asked Spilett.
“Are there whalers in our area?” asked Spilett.
“Why do you ask?”
"Why are you asking?"
“Since the harpoon is still there—”
“Since the harpoon is still there—”
“Oh that proves nothing, sir,” said Pencroff. “Whales sometimes go thousands of miles with a harpoon in them, and I should not be surprised if this one which came to die here had been struck in the North Atlantic.”
“Oh, that doesn't prove anything, sir,” said Pencroff. “Whales can swim thousands of miles with a harpoon in them, and I wouldn’t be surprised if this one that came to die here was hit in the North Atlantic.”
“Nevertheless”—began Spilett, not satisfied with Pencroff’s affirmation.
“Nevertheless”—began Spilett, not satisfied with Pencroff’s statement.
“It is perfectly possible,” responded the engineer, “but let us look at the harpoon. Probably it will have the name of the ship on it.”
“It’s totally doable,” replied the engineer, “but let’s check out the harpoon. It probably has the ship’s name on it.”
Pencroff drew out the harpoon, and read this inscription:—
Pencroff pulled out the harpoon and read this inscription:—
Maria-Stella Vineyard.
Maria-Stella Winery.
“A ship from the Vineyard! A ship of my country!” be cried. “The Maria-Stella! a good whaler! and I know her well! Oh, my friends, a ship from the Vineyard! A whaler from the Vineyard!”
“A ship from the Vineyard! A ship from my country!” he shouted. “The Maria-Stella! A great whaler! I know her well! Oh, my friends, a ship from the Vineyard! A whaler from the Vineyard!”
And the sailor, brandishing the harpoon, continued to repeat that name dear to his heart, the name of his birthplace.
And the sailor, holding the harpoon, kept saying that name close to his heart, the name of the place where he was born.
But as they could not wait for the Maria-Stella to come and reclaim their prize, the colonists resolved to cut it up before decomposition set in. The birds of prey were already anxious to become possessors of the spoil, and it was necessary to drive them away with gunshots.
But since they couldn’t wait for the Maria-Stella to arrive and take back their prize, the colonists decided to butcher it before it started to rot. The scavengers were already eager to claim the remains, so they needed to scare them off with gunfire.
The whale was a female, and her udders furnished a great quantity of milk, which, according to Dieffenbach, resembles in taste, color, and density, the milk of cows.
The whale was a female, and her udders produced a large amount of milk, which, according to Dieffenbach, is similar in taste, color, and thickness to cow's milk.
As Pencroff had served on a whaler he was able to direct the disagreeable work of cutting up the animal—an operation which lasted during three days. The blubber, cut in strips two feet and a half thick and divided into pieces weighing a thousand pounds each, was melted down in large earthen vats, which had been brought on to the ground. And such was its abundance, that notwithstanding a third of its weight was lost by melting, the tongue alone yielded 6,000 pounds of oil. The colonists were therefore supplied with an abundant supply of stearine and glycerine, and there was, besides, the whalebone, which would find its use, although there were neither umbrellas nor corsets in Granite House.
As Pencroff had worked on a whaler, he managed the tough task of cutting up the whale, which took three days. The blubber was cut into strips two and a half feet thick and divided into chunks weighing a thousand pounds each, then melted down in large earthen vats that had been brought to the site. There was so much of it that even though a third of its weight was lost during melting, the tongue alone produced 6,000 pounds of oil. The colonists ended up with a plentiful supply of stearine and glycerine, plus the whalebone, which would still be useful, even though they didn’t have umbrellas or corsets in Granite House.
The operation ended, to the great satisfaction of the colonists, the rest of the animal was left to the birds, who made away with it to the last vestiges, and the daily routine of work was resumed. Still, before going to the ship-yard, Smith worked on certain affairs which excited the curiosity of his companions. He took a dozen of the plates of baleen (the solid whalebone), which he cut into six equal lengths, sharpened at the ends.
The operation wrapped up, much to the delight of the colonists. The remaining parts of the animal were left for the birds, which finished it off completely, and everyone got back to their daily tasks. However, before heading to the shipyard, Smith dealt with a few matters that intrigued his companions. He picked up a dozen plates of baleen (the solid whalebone), cut them into six equal pieces, and sharpened the ends.
“And what is that for?” asked Herbert, when they were finished.
“And what’s that for?” asked Herbert when they were done.
“To kill foxes, wolves, and jaguars,” answered the engineer.
“To kill foxes, wolves, and jaguars,” the engineer replied.
“Now?”
"Right now?"
“No, but this winter, when we have the ice.”
“No, but this winter, when we have the ice.”
“I don’t understand,” answered Herbert.
“I don’t get it,” answered Herbert.
“You shall understand, my lad,” answered the engineer. “This is not my invention; it is frequently employed by the inhabitants of the Aleutian islands. These whalebones which you see, when the weather is freezing I will bend round and freeze in that position with a coating of ice; then having covered them with a bit of fat, I will place them in the snow. Supposing a hungry animal swallows one of these baits? The warmth will thaw the ice, and the whalebone, springing back, will pierce the stomach.”
“You need to understand, my boy,” replied the engineer. “This isn't my invention; it's often used by the people of the Aleutian Islands. These whalebones you see, when the weather is freezing, I bend them and freeze them in that position with a layer of ice. Then, I cover them with a bit of fat and place them in the snow. What happens if a hungry animal swallows one of these baits? The warmth will melt the ice, and the whalebone will spring back and pierce the stomach.”
“That is ingenious!” said Pencroff.
"That's genius!" said Pencroff.
“And it will save powder and ball,” said Smith.
“And it will save ammo,” said Smith.
“It will be better than the traps.”
“It'll be better than the traps.”
“Just wait till winter comes.”
“Just wait until winter comes.”
The ship-building continued, and towards the end of the month the little vessel was half-finished. Pencroff worked almost too hard, but his companions were secretly preparing a recompense for all his toil, and the 31st of May was destined to be one of the happiest times in his life.
The shipbuilding went on, and by the end of the month, the small vessel was halfway done. Pencroff was working almost too hard, but his friends were secretly planning a reward for all his efforts, and May 31st was set to be one of the happiest moments of his life.
After dinner on that day, just as he was leaving table, Pencroff felt a hand on his shoulder and heard Spilett saying to him:—
After dinner that day, just as he was getting up from the table, Pencroff felt a hand on his shoulder and heard Spilett say to him:—
“Don’t go yet awhile, Pencroff. You forget the dessert.”
“Don’t leave just yet, Pencroff. You’re forgetting the dessert.”
“Thank you, Spilett, but I must get back to work.”
“Thanks, Spilett, but I need to get back to work.”
“Oh, well, have a cup of coffee.”
“Oh, well, grab a cup of coffee.”
“Not any.”
"None."
“Well, then, a pipe?”
"Well, then, a pipe?"
Pencroff started up quickly, and when he saw the reporter holding him a pipe full of tobacco, and Herbert with a light, his honest, homely face grew pale, and he could not say a word; but taking the pipe, he placed it to his lips, lit it, and drew five or six long puffs, one after the other.
Pencroff got up quickly, and when he saw the reporter offering him a pipe full of tobacco and Herbert with a lighter, his plain, sincere face went pale, and he couldn’t say anything; but taking the pipe, he put it to his lips, lit it, and took five or six long puffs one after the other.
A fragrant, blueish-colored smoke filled the air, and from the depths of this cloud came a voice, delirious with joy, repeating,
A fragrant, bluish smoke filled the air, and from the depths of this cloud came a voice, overwhelmed with joy, repeating,
“Tobacco! real tobacco!”
“Tobacco! Genuine tobacco!”
“Yes, Pencroff,” answered Smith, “and good tobacco at that.”
“Yeah, Pencroff,” Smith replied, “and it’s good tobacco too.”
“Heaven be praised!” ejaculated the sailor. “Nothing now is wanting in our island. And he puffed and puffed and puffed.
“Thank goodness!” the sailor exclaimed. “Our island has everything we need now.” And he puffed and puffed and puffed.
“Who found it?” he asked, at length. “It was you, Herbert, I suppose?”
“Who found it?” he finally asked. “Was it you, Herbert, I guess?”
“No, Pencroff, it was Mr. Spilett.”
“No, Pencroff, it was Mr. Spilett.”
“Mr. Spilett!” cried the sailor, hugging the reporter, who had never been treated that way before.
“Mr. Spilett!” shouted the sailor, embracing the reporter, who had never experienced anything like that before.
“Yes, Pencroff,”—taking advantage of a cessation in the embrace to get his breath—“But include in your thanksgiving Herbert, who recognized the plant, Mr. Smith, who prepared it, and Neb, who has found it hard to keep the secret.”
“Yes, Pencroff,”—taking advantage of a pause in the embrace to catch his breath—“But don’t forget to thank Herbert, who identified the plant, Mr. Smith, who made it, and Neb, who has struggled to keep the secret.”
“Well, my friends, I will repay you for this some day! Meanwhile I am eternally grateful!.”
“Well, my friends, I will pay you back for this someday! In the meantime, I am forever grateful!”
CHAPTER XXXIII
WINTER—FULLING CLOTH—THE MILL —PENCROFF’S FIXED PURPOSE—THE WHALEBONES—THE USE OF AN ALBATROSS —TOP AND JUP—STORMS—DAMAGE TO THE POULTRY-YARD—AN EXCURSION TO THE MARSH—SMITH ALONE—EXPLORATION OF THE PITS.
WINTER—FULLING CLOTH—THE MILL—PENCROFF’S DETERMINATION—THE WHALEBONES—HOW TO USE AN ALBATROSS—TOP AND JUP—STORMS—DAMAGE TO THE CHICKEN COOP—A TRIP TO THE MARSH—SMITH ALONE—EXPLORING THE PITS.
Winter came with June, and the principal work was the making of strong warm clothing. The moufflons had been clipped, and the question was how to transform the wool into cloth.
Winter arrived in June, and the main task was making warm, sturdy clothing. The moufflons had been sheared, and the challenge was figuring out how to turn the wool into fabric.
Smith, not having any mill machinery, was obliged to proceed in the simplest manner, in order to economize the spinning and weaving. Therefore he proposed to make use of the property possessed by the filaments of wool of binding themselves together under pressure, and making by their mere entanglement the substance known as felt. This felt can be obtained by a simple fulling, an operation which, while it diminishes the suppleness of the stuff, greatly augments its heat-preserving qualities; and as the moufflons’ wool was very short it was in good condition for felting.
Smith, not having any mill equipment, had to proceed in the simplest way to save on spinning and weaving. So, he suggested using the property of wool fibers to bind together under pressure, creating the material known as felt through their entanglement. This felt can be made through a straightforward fulling process, which reduces the softness of the fabric but significantly enhances its ability to retain heat; and since the moufflon's wool was very short, it was well-suited for felting.
The engineer, assisted by his companions, including Pencroff—who had to leave his ship again—cleansed the wool of the grease and oil by soaking it in warm water and washing it with soda, and, when it was partially dried by pressure it was in a condition to be milled, that is, to produce a solid stuff, too coarse to be of any value in the industrial centres of Europe, but valuable enough in the Lincoln Island market.
The engineer, with the help of his friends, including Pencroff—who had to leave his ship once more—cleaned the wool of grease and oil by soaking it in warm water and washing it with soap. Once it was partially dried by pressing, it was ready to be processed, meaning it could be turned into a solid material that was too rough to be useful in industrial centers in Europe, but valuable enough in the local market of Lincoln Island.
The engineer’s professional knowledge was of great service in constructing the machine destined to mill the wool, as he knew how to make ready use of the power, unemployed up to this time, in the water-fall at the cliff, to move a fulling mill.
The engineer’s expertise was extremely helpful in building the machine intended to mill the wool, as he understood how to effectively harness the power that had previously gone unused in the waterfall at the cliff to operate a fulling mill.
Its construction was most simple. A tree furnished with cams, which raised and dropped the vertical millers, troughs for the wool, into which the millers fell, a strong wooden building containing and sustaining the contrivance, such was the machine in question.
Its construction was very simple. A tree equipped with cams raised and lowered the vertical millers, troughs for the wool, into which the millers dropped, and a sturdy wooden structure that housed and supported the mechanism—such was the machine in question.
The work, superintended by Smith, resulted admirably. The wool, previously impregnated with a soapy solution, came from the mill in the shape of a thick felt cloth. The striæ and roughnesses of the material had caught and blended together so thoroughly that they formed a stuff equally suitable for cloths or coverings. It was not, indeed, one of the stuffs of commerce, but it was “Lincoln felt,” and the island had one more industry.
The project, overseen by Smith, turned out great. The wool, which had been soaked in a soapy solution, came from the mill as a thick felt fabric. The fibers and roughness of the material had combined so completely that they created a substance perfect for fabrics or coverings. It wasn't exactly a type of fabric found in stores, but it was "Lincoln felt," and the island gained another industry.
The colonists, being thus provided with good clothes and warm bed-clothing, saw the winter of 1866-67 approach without any dread. The cold really began to be felt on the 20th of June, and, to his great regret, Pencroff was obliged to suspend work on his vessel, although it would certainly be finished by the next spring.
The colonists, equipped with good clothes and warm bedding, faced the winter of 1866-67 without fear. The cold started to set in on June 20th, and to his disappointment, Pencroff had to pause work on his boat, although it would definitely be completed by the next spring.
The fixed purpose of the sailor was to make a voyage of discovery to Tabor Island, although Smith did not approve of this voyage of simple curiosity, as there was evidently no succor to be obtained from that desert and half arid rock. A voyage of 150 miles in a boat, comparatively small, in the midst of unknown seas, was cause for considerable anxiety. If the frail craft, once at sea, should be unable to reach Tabor Island, or to return to Lincoln Island, what would become of her in the midst of this ocean so fertile in disasters?
The sailor was determined to set out on a journey to Tabor Island, though Smith disapproved of this trip driven by mere curiosity since it was clear that there was no help to be found from that barren, semi-arid rock. A 150-mile journey in a relatively small boat through uncharted waters was a huge source of worry. If the fragile vessel couldn’t make it to Tabor Island or get back to Lincoln Island once it hit the sea, what would happen to it in an ocean so full of potential disasters?
Smith often talked of this project with Pencroff, and he found in the sailor a strange obstinacy to make the voyage, an obstinacy for which Pencroff himself could not account.
Smith often discussed this project with Pencroff, and he noticed a curious stubbornness in the sailor to undertake the voyage, a stubbornness that Pencroff himself couldn’t explain.
“Well,” said the engineer one day, “you must see, Pencroff, after having said every good of Lincoln Island, and expressing the regret you would feel should you have to leave it, that you are the first to want to get away.”
“Well,” said the engineer one day, “you have to admit, Pencroff, after praising Lincoln Island and expressing how much you’d regret leaving it, that you’re the first one wanting to get out of here.”
“Only for a day or two,” answered Pencroff, “for a few days, Mr. Smith; just long enough to go and return, and see what this island is.”
“Just for a day or two,” replied Pencroff, “for a few days, Mr. Smith; just enough time to go and come back, and find out what this island is like.”
“But it cannot compare with ours.”
“But it can't compare to ours.”
“I know that.””
"I get that."
“Then why go?”
“Then why leave?”
“To find out what’s going on there!”
"To see what's going on there!"
“But there is nothing; there can be nothing there.”
“But there’s nothing; there can’t be anything there.”
“Who knows?”
"Who knows?"
“And supposing you are caught in a storm?”
“And what if you get caught in a storm?”
“That is not likely in that season,” replied Pencroff. “But, sir, as it is necessary to foresee everything, I want your permission to take Herbert with me.”
“That's probably not going to happen in that season,” Pencroff replied. “But, sir, since it's important to plan for everything, I’d like your permission to take Herbert with me.”
“Pencroff,” said the engineer, laying his hand on the shoulder of the sailor, “If anything should happen to you and this child, whom chance has made our son, do you think that we would ever forgive ourselves?”
“Pencroff,” said the engineer, placing his hand on the sailor's shoulder, “If anything happened to you and this child, whom fate has made our son, do you think we would ever be able to forgive ourselves?”
“Mr. Smith,” responded Pencroff with unshaken confidence, “we won’t discuss such mishaps. But we will talk again of this voyage when the time comes. Then, I think, when you have seen our boat well rigged, when you have seen how well she behaves at sea, when you have made the tour of the island—as we will, together—I think, I say, that you will not hesitate to let me go. I do not conceal from you that this will be a fine work, your ship.”
“Mr. Smith,” Pencroff replied confidently, “let's not dwell on accidents. We can talk about this journey again when the time is right. I believe that once you see our boat fully prepared, once you see how smoothly she sails, and after we've toured the island together, you’ll agree to let me go. I won’t hide from you that this will be a great project, your ship.”
“Say rather, our ship, Pencroff,” replied the engineer, momentarily disarmed. And the conversation, to be renewed later, ended without convincing either of the speakers.
“Say instead, our ship, Pencroff,” replied the engineer, briefly caught off guard. And the conversation, which would continue later, ended without convincing either of them.
The first snow fell towards the end of the month. The corral had been well provisioned, and there was no further necessity for daily visits, but it was decided to go there at least once a week. The traps were set again, and the contrivances of Smith were tried, and worked perfectly. The bent whalebones, frozen, and covered with fat, were placed near the edge of the forest, at a place frequented by animals, and some dozen foxes, some wild boars, and a jaguar were found killed by this means, their stomachs perforated by the straightened whalebones.
The first snow fell towards the end of the month. The corral was well stocked, so there was no need for daily visits, but it was decided to go there at least once a week. The traps were set up again, and Smith's devices were tested and worked perfectly. The bent whalebones, frozen and coated in fat, were placed near the edge of the forest in a spot often visited by animals, and a dozen foxes, some wild boars, and a jaguar were found killed this way, their stomachs pierced by the straightened whalebones.
At this time, an experiment, thought of by the reporter, was made. It was the first attempt of the colonists to communicate with their kindred.
At this time, the reporter came up with an experiment. It was the colonists' first attempt to reach out to their relatives.
Spilett had already often thought of throwing a bottle containing a writing into the sea, to be carried by the currents, perhaps, to some inhabited coast, or to make use of the pigeons. But it was pure folly to seriously believe that pigeons or bottles could cross the 1,200 miles separating the island from all lands.—
Spilett had often considered tossing a bottle with a message into the sea, hoping it would be carried by the currents to some inhabited shore, or using pigeons instead. But it was just plain foolish to think that either pigeons or bottles could make the 1,200-mile journey from the island to any land.
But on the 30th of June they captured, not without difficulty, an albatross, which Herbert had slightly wounded in the foot. It was a splendid specimen of its kind, its wings measuring ten feet from tip to tip, and it could cross seas as vast as the Pacific.
But on June 30th, they managed to capture an albatross, not without some struggle, which Herbert had slightly injured in the foot. It was a magnificent example of its species, with wings measuring ten feet from tip to tip, and it could fly across oceans as vast as the Pacific.
Herbert would have liked to have kept the bird and tamed it, but Spilett made him understand that they could not afford to neglect this chance of corresponding by means of this courier with the Pacific coasts. So Herbert gave up the bird, as, if it had come from some inhabited region, it was likely to return there if at liberty.
Herbert wanted to keep the bird and train it, but Spilett made him realize that they couldn’t miss the opportunity to communicate with the Pacific coasts through this courier. So, Herbert let the bird go, knowing that if it came from a populated area, it would probably go back there if it was free.
Perhaps, in his heart, Spilett, to whom the journalistic spirit returned sometimes, did not regret giving to the winds an interesting article relating the adventures of the colonists of Lincoln Island. What a triumph for the reporters of the New York Herald, and for the issue containing the chronicle, if ever the latter should reach his director, the honorable John Bennett!
Perhaps, deep down, Spilett, who occasionally felt the journalistic urge, didn’t really regret sharing an intriguing article about the adventures of the colonists on Lincoln Island. What a win it would be for the reporters of the New York Herald, and for the edition that featured the story, if it ever made its way to his boss, the esteemed John Bennett!
Spilett, therefore, wrote out a succinct article, which was enclosed in a waterproof-cloth bag, with the request to whoever found it to send it to one of the offices of the Herald. This little bag was fastened around the neck of the albatross and the bird given its freedom, and it was not without emotion that the colonists saw this rapid courier of the air disappear in the western clouds.
Spilett then wrote a brief article, which he placed in a waterproof bag, asking anyone who found it to send it to one of the offices of the Herald. This small bag was tied around the albatross's neck, and the bird was set free. The colonists watched with mixed emotions as this fast messenger of the sky vanished into the western clouds.
“Where does he go that way?” asked Pencroff.
“Where is he going that way?” asked Pencroff.
“Towards New Zealand,” answered Herbert.
“Heading to New Zealand,” answered Herbert.
“May he have a good voyage,” said the sailor, who did not expect much from this method of communication.
“Hopefully, he has a safe trip,” said the sailor, who didn’t expect much from this way of communicating.
With the winter, in-door work was resumed; old clothes were repaired, new garments made, and the sails of the sloop made from the inexhaustible envelope of the balloon. During July the cold was intense, but coal and wood were abundant, and Smith had built another chimney in the great hall, where they passed the long evenings. It was a great comfort to the colonists, when, seated in this well-lighted and warm hall, a good dinner finished, coffee steaming in the cups, the pipes emitting a fragrant smoke, they listened to the roar of the tempest without. They were perfectly comfortable, if that is possible where one is far from his kindred and without possible means of communicating with them. They talked about their country, of their friends at home, of the grandeur of the republic, whose influence must increase; and Smith, who had had much to do with the affairs of the Union, entertained his hearers with his stories, his perceptions and his prophecies.
With winter setting in, indoor work resumed; old clothes were mended, new outfits were made, and the sails for the sloop were crafted from the endless fabric of the balloon. During July, the cold was severe, but coal and wood were plentiful, and Smith had built another chimney in the great hall, where they spent the long evenings. It was a real comfort for the colonists when, seated in this well-lit and cozy hall after a satisfying dinner, with coffee steaming in their cups and pipes giving off a fragrant smoke, they listened to the storm raging outside. They felt completely comfortable, even if that’s possible when you’re far from your loved ones and have no way to communicate with them. They chatted about their homeland, their friends back home, and the greatness of the republic, whose influence was destined to grow; and Smith, who had been deeply involved in Union matters, entertained his listeners with his stories, insights, and predictions.
One evening as they had been sitting talking in this way for some time, they were interrupted by Top, who began barking in that peculiar way which had previously attracted the attention of the engineer, and running around the mouth of the well which opened at the end of the inner corridor.
One evening, after they had been sitting and chatting for a while, they were interrupted by Top, who started barking in that distinctive way that had caught the engineer's attention before, and was running around the mouth of the well that was at the end of the inner corridor.
“Why is Top barking that way again?” asked Pencroff.
“Why is Top barking like that again?” asked Pencroff.
“And Jup growling so?” added Herbert.
“And Jup growling like that?” added Herbert.
Indeed, both the dog and the orang gave unequivocal signs of agitation, and curiously enough these two animals seemed to be more alarmed than irritated.
Indeed, both the dog and the orangutan showed clear signs of distress, and interestingly, these two animals appeared to be more scared than annoyed.
It is evident,” said Spilett, “that this well communicates directly with the sea, and that some animal comes to breathe in its depths.”
“It’s clear,” said Spilett, “that this well connects directly with the sea, and that some animal comes here to breathe in its depths.”
“It must be so, since there is no other explanation to give. Be quiet, Top! and you, Jup! go to your room.”
“It has to be this way, since there’s no other explanation. Quiet down, Top! And you, Jup! Go to your room.”
The animals turned away, Jup went to his bed, but Top remained in the hall, and continued whining the remainder of the evening. It was not, however, the question of this incident that darkened the countenance of the engineer.
The animals looked away, Jup went to his bed, but Top stayed in the hall and kept whining for the rest of the evening. However, it wasn't the issue of this incident that troubled the engineer's expression.
During the remainder of the month, rain and snow alternated, and though the temperature was not as low as during the preceding winter, there were more storms and gales. On more than one occasion the Chimneys had been threatened by the waves, and it seemed as if an upraising of the sea, caused by some submarine convulsion, raised the monstrous billows and hurled them against Granite House.
During the rest of the month, rain and snow took turns, and even though the temperature wasn’t as low as the previous winter, there were more storms and strong winds. Several times, the Chimneys were in danger from the waves, and it felt like an upheaval of the sea, triggered by some underwater disturbance, lifted the huge waves and slammed them against Granite House.
During these storms it was difficult, even dangerous, to attempt using the roads on the island, as the trees were falling constantly. Nevertheless, the colonists never let a week pass without visiting the corral, and happily this enclosure, protected by the spur of the mountain, did not suffer from the storms. But the poultry-yard, from its position, exposed to the blast, suffered considerable damage. Twice the pigeon-house was unroofed, and the fence also was demolished, making it necessary to rebuild it more solidly. It was evident that Lincoln Island was situated in the worst part of the Pacific. Indeed, it seemed as if the island formed the central point of vast cyclones which whipped it as if it were a top; only in this case the top was immovable and the whip spun about.
During these storms, it was difficult and even dangerous to use the roads on the island because trees were constantly falling. Nonetheless, the colonists never let a week go by without visiting the corral, and fortunately, this enclosure, protected by the mountain's spur, remained unharmed by the storms. However, the poultry yard, due to its location and exposure to the wind, suffered significant damage. Twice, the pigeon house lost its roof, and the fence was also destroyed, requiring it to be rebuilt more sturdily. It was clear that Lincoln Island was located in the worst part of the Pacific. In fact, it seemed as if the island was the central point of vast cyclones that whipped around it as if it were a top; but in this case, the top was immovable while the whip spun around it.
During the first week in August the storm abated, and the atmosphere recovered a calm which it seemed never to have lost. With the calm the temperature lowered, and the thermometer of the colonists indicated 8° below zero.
During the first week of August, the storm settled down, and the air became calm again, as if it had never been disturbed. With the calm, the temperature dropped, and the colonists' thermometer showed 8° below zero.
On the 3d of August, an excursion, which had been planned for some time was made to Tadorn’s Fen. The hunters were tempted by the great number of aquatic birds which made these marshes their home, and not only Spilett and Herbert, but Pencroff and Neb took part in the expedition. Smith alone pleaded some excuse for remaining behind at Granite House.
On August 3rd, a long-planned trip took place to Tadorn’s Fen. The hunters were excited by the large number of waterfowl that made these marshes their home, and not just Spilett and Herbert, but Pencroff and Neb also joined in on the adventure. Smith, however, came up with an excuse to stay behind at Granite House.
The hunters promised to return by evening. Top and Jup accompanied them. And when they had crossed the bridge over the Mercy the engineer left them, and returned with the idea of executing a project in which he wished to be alone. This was to explore minutely the well opening into the corridor.
The hunters promised to be back by evening. Top and Jup went with them. Once they crossed the bridge over the Mercy, the engineer parted ways and went back, planning to work on a project that he wanted to keep to himself. This project involved thoroughly exploring the well that opened into the corridor.
Why did Top run round this place so often? Why did he whine in that strange way? Why did Jup share Top’s anxiety? Had this well other branches beside the communication with the sea? Did it ramify towards other portions of the island? This is what Smith wanted to discover, and, moreover, to be alone in his discovery. He had resolved to make this exploration during the absence of his companions, and here was the opportunity.
Why did Top run around this place so often? Why did he whine in that weird way? Why did Jup share Top’s anxiety? Did this well connect to other parts besides just the sea? Did it lead to other areas of the island? This is what Smith wanted to find out, and he also wanted to do it alone. He had planned to make this exploration while his companions were away, and now he had the chance.
It was easy to descend to the bottom of the well by means of the ladder, which had not been used since the elevator had taken its place. The engineer dragged this ladder to the opening of the well, and, having made fast one end, let it unroll itself into the abyss. Then, having lit a lantern, and placing a revolver and cutlass in his belt, he began to descend the rungs. The sides of the well were smooth, but some projections of rocks appeared at intervals, and by means of these projections an athlete could have raised himself to the mouth of the well. The engineer noticed this, but in throwing the light of the lantern on these points he could discover nothing to indicate that they had ever been used in that way.
It was easy to climb down to the bottom of the well using the ladder, which hadn’t been used since the elevator replaced it. The engineer dragged the ladder to the well's opening, secured one end, and let it roll down into the abyss. After lighting a lantern and putting a revolver and cutlass in his belt, he started to descend the rungs. The walls of the well were smooth, but there were some rock projections at intervals, which an athlete could have used to pull himself up to the top of the well. The engineer noticed this, but when he shone the lantern light on those spots, he couldn’t find any sign that they had ever been used in that way.
Smith descended deeper, examining every part of the well, but he saw nothing suspicious. When he had reached the lowermost rung, he was at the surface of the water, which was perfectly calm. Neither there, nor in any other part of the well, was there any lateral opening. The wall, struck by the handle of Smith’s cutlass, sounded solid. It was a compact mass, through which no human being could make his way. In order to reach the bottom of the well, and from thence climb to its mouth, it was necessary to traverse the submerged passage under the shore, which connected with the sea, and this was only possible for marine animals. As to knowing whereabouts on the shore, and at what depth under the waves, this passage came out, that was impossible to discover.
Smith went deeper, checking every part of the well, but he didn’t see anything suspicious. When he reached the bottom rung, he found himself at the surface of the water, which was completely calm. There were no side openings, not there nor anywhere else in the well. The wall, when struck by the handle of Smith’s cutlass, sounded solid. It was a dense mass that no human could penetrate. To get to the bottom of the well and then climb up to its mouth, it was necessary to go through the submerged passage under the shore, which connected to the sea, and that was only possible for marine creatures. As for knowing where on the shore and at what depth under the waves this passage emerged, that was impossible to find out.
Smith, having ended his exploration, remounted the ladder, covered over again the mouth of the well, and returned thoughtfully to the great hall of Granite House, saying to himself:—
Smith, having finished his exploration, climbed back up the ladder, covered the well again, and walked back thoughtfully to the grand hall of Granite House, saying to himself:—
“I have seen nothing, and yet, there is something there.”
“I haven’t seen anything, but still, there’s something there.”
CHAPTER XXXIV.
RIGGING THE LAUNCH—ATTACKED BY FOXES—JUP WOUNDED—JUP NURSED—JUP CURED—COMPLETION OF THE LAUNCH—PENCROFF’S TRIUMPH—THE GOOD LUCK—TRIAL TRIP, TO THE SOUTH OF THE ISLAND—AN UNEXPECTED DOCUMENT.
RIGGING THE LAUNCH—ATTACKED BY FOXES—JUP WOUNDED—JUP NURSED—JUP CURED—COMPLETION OF THE LAUNCH—PENCROFF’S TRIUMPH—THE GOOD LUCK—TRIAL TRIP, TO THE SOUTH OF THE ISLAND—AN UNEXPECTED DOCUMENT.
The same evening the hunters returned, fairly loaded down with game, the four men having all they could carry. Top had a circlet of ducks round his neck, and Jup belts of woodcock round his body.
The same evening the hunters came back, pretty loaded up with game, the four men had all they could carry. Top had a necklace of ducks around his neck, and Jup had belts of woodcock around his body.
“See, my master,” cried Neb, “see how we have used our time. Preserves, pies, we will have a good reserve! But some one must help me, and I count upon you, Pencroff.”
“Look, my master,” shouted Neb, “look at how we’ve spent our time. We’ll have preserves and pies, a nice stash! But I need someone to help me, and I’m counting on you, Pencroff.”
“No, Neb,” responded the sailor, “the rigging of the launch occupies my time, and you will have to do without me.”
“No, Neb,” the sailor replied, “I’m busy with the rigging of the launch, so you’ll have to manage without me.”
“And you, Master Herbert?”
"And you, Master Herb?"
“I, Neb, must go to-morrow to the corral.”
“I, Neb, must go to the corral tomorrow.”
“Then will you help me, Mr. Spilett?”
“Then will you help me, Mr. Spilett?”
“To oblige you, I will, Neb,” answered the reporter, “but I warn you that if you discover your recipes to me I will publish them.”
“To do what you want, I will, Neb,” replied the reporter, “but I warn you that if you share your recipes with me, I will publish them.”
“Whenever you choose, sir,” responded Neb; “whenever you choose.”
“Whenever you want, sir,” replied Neb; “whenever you want.”
And so the next day the reporter was installed as Neb’s aid in his culinary laboratory. But beforehand the engineer had given him the result of the previous day’s exploration, and Spilett agreed with Smith in his opinion that, although he had found out nothing, still there was a secret to be discovered.
And so the next day, the reporter was set up as Neb’s assistant in his kitchen lab. But first, the engineer had shared the findings from the previous day’s exploration, and Spilett agreed with Smith that, even though he hadn’t learned anything, there was still a mystery waiting to be uncovered.
The cold continued a week longer, and the colonists did not leave Granite House excepting to look after the poultry-yard. The dwelling was perfumed by the good odors which the learned manipulations of Neb and the reporter emitted; but all the products of the hunt in the fen had not been made into preserves, and as the game kept perfectly in the intense cold, wild ducks and others, were eaten fresh, and declared better than any waterfowl in the world.
The cold lasted another week, and the colonists stayed in Granite House except to tend to the poultry yard. The place was filled with the delicious aromas produced by Neb and the reporter's skilled cooking; however, not all the game from the marsh had been turned into preserves, and since the game stayed fresh in the freezing weather, they enjoyed wild ducks and others right away, claiming they were better than any waterfowl in the world.
During the week, Pencroff, assisted by Herbert, who used the sailor’s needle skilfully, worked with such diligence that the sails of the launch were finished. Thanks to the rigging which had been recovered with the envelope of the balloon, hemp cordage was not wanting. The sails were bordered by strong bolt-ropes, and there was enough left to make halliards, shrouds, and sheets. The pulleys were made by Smith on the lathe which he had set up, acting under Pencroff’s instruction. The rigging was, therefore, completed before the launch was finished. Pencroff made a red, white, and blue flag, getting the dye from certain plants; but to the thirty-seven stars representing the thirty-seven States of the Union, the sailor added another star, the star of the “State of Lincoln:” as he considered his island as already annexed to the great republic.
During the week, Pencroff, with help from Herbert, who was skilled with the sailor’s needle, worked so hard that the sails for the launch were completed. Thanks to the rigging that had been salvaged from the balloon’s envelope, they had plenty of hemp cordage. The sails were reinforced with strong bolt-ropes, and there was enough material left to make halyards, shrouds, and sheets. Smith crafted the pulleys on the lathe he had set up, following Pencroff’s guidance. As a result, the rigging was finished before the launch itself was complete. Pencroff made a red, white, and blue flag, using dye from certain plants; however, instead of the thirty-seven stars that represented the thirty-seven States of the Union, the sailor added another star, the star of the “State of Lincoln,” as he viewed his island as already part of the great republic.
“And,” said he, “it is in spirit, if it is not in fact!”
“And,” he said, “it exists in spirit, even if it’s not a reality!”
For the present the flag was unfurled from the central window of Granite House and saluted with three cheers.
For now, the flag was raised from the central window of Granite House and greeted with three cheers.
Meantime, they had reached the end of the cold season; and it seemed as if this second winter would pass without any serious event, when during the night of the 11th of August, Prospect Plateau was menaced by a complete devastation. After a busy day the colonists were sleeping soundly, when towards 4 o’clock in the morning, they were suddenly awakened by Top’s barking. The dog did not bark this time at the mouth of the pit, but at the door, and he threw himself against it as if he wished to break it open. Jup, also, uttered sharp cries.
Meantime, they had reached the end of the cold season, and it seemed like this second winter would go by without any major incidents. However, during the night of August 11th, Prospect Plateau faced a threat of complete destruction. After a busy day, the colonists were sound asleep when, around 4 o’clock in the morning, they were suddenly jolted awake by Top’s barking. The dog wasn’t barking at the mouth of the pit this time, but at the door, and he crashed against it as if he wanted to break it open. Jup also made sharp cries.
“Be quiet, Top!” cried Neb, who was the first awake.
“Be quiet, Top!” shouted Neb, who was the first one awake.
But the dog only barked the louder.
But the dog just barked even louder.
“What’s the matter?” cried Smith. And every one dressing in haste, hurried to the windows and opened them.
“What’s wrong?” shouted Smith. Everyone quickly got dressed and rushed to the windows to open them.
“Beneath them a fall of snow shone white through the darkness. The colonists could see nothing, but they heard curious barkings penetrating the night. It was evident that the shore had been invaded by a number of animals which they could not see.”
“Below them, a blanket of snow glowed white in the darkness. The colonists couldn’t see anything, but they could hear strange barking cutting through the night. It was clear that the shore had been overrun by several animals they couldn’t see.”
“What can they be?” cried Pencroff.
“What could they be?” shouted Pencroff.
“Wolves, jaguars, or monkeys!” replied Neb.
“Wolves, jaguars, or monkeys!” responded Neb.
“The mischief! They can get on to the plateau!” exclaimed the reporter.
“The trouble! They can make it to the plateau!” exclaimed the reporter.
“And our poultry-yard, and our garden!” cried Herbert.
“And our chicken coop, and our garden!” shouted Herbert.
“How have they got in?” asked Pencroff.
“How did they get in?” asked Pencroff.
“They have come through the causeway,” answered the engineer, “which one of us must have forgotten to close!”
“They came across the causeway,” replied the engineer, “one of us must have forgotten to close it!”
“In truth,” said Spilett, “I remember that I left it open—”
“In truth,” said Spilett, “I remember that I left it open—”
“A nice mess you have made of it, sir!” cried the sailor.
“A nice mess you've made of it, sir!” shouted the sailor.
“What is done, is done,” replied Spilett. “Let us consider what it is necessary to do!”
“What’s done is done,” replied Spilett. “Let’s think about what we need to do!”
These questions and answers passed rapidly between Smith and his companions. It was certain that the causeway had been passed, that the shore had been invaded by animals, and that, whatever they were, they could gain Prospect Plateau by going up the left bank of the Mercy. It was, therefore, necessary quickly to overtake them, and, if necessary, to fight them!
These questions and answers flew back and forth quickly between Smith and his friends. It was clear that the causeway had been crossed, that animals had overrun the shore, and that, no matter what they were, they could reach Prospect Plateau by going up the left bank of the Mercy. It was, therefore, essential to catch up to them quickly and, if needed, to confront them!
“But what are they?” somebody asked a second time, as the barking resounded more loudly.
“But what are they?” someone asked again, as the barking grew louder.
Herbert started at the sound, and he remembered having heard it during his first visit to the sources of Red Creek.
Herbert jumped at the sound, recalling that he had heard it during his first visit to the sources of Red Creek.
“They are foxes! they are foxes!” he said.
“They're foxes! They're foxes!” he said.
“Come on!” cried the sailor. And all, armed with hatchets, carbines, and revolvers, hurried into the elevator, and were soon on the shore.
“Come on!” shouted the sailor. Everyone, armed with hatchets, rifles, and handguns, rushed into the elevator and soon reached the shore.
These foxes are dangerous animals, when numerous or irritated by hunger. Nevertheless, the colonists did not hesitate to throw themselves into the midst of the band, and their first shots, darting bright gleams through the darkness, drove back the foremost assailants.
These foxes are dangerous animals, especially when they are many or agitated by hunger. However, the colonists didn't hesitate to charge into the middle of the pack, and their first shots, bright flashes cutting through the darkness, pushed back the leading attackers.
It was most important to prevent these thieves from gaining Prospect Plateau, as the garden and the poultry-yard would have been at their mercy, and the result would have been immense, perhaps, irreparable damage, especially to the corn-field. But as the plateau could only be invaded by the left bank of the Mercy, it would suffice to oppose a barrier to the foxes on the narrow portion of the shore comprised between the river and the granite wall.
It was crucial to stop these thieves from taking over Prospect Plateau, as the garden and the poultry yard would have been vulnerable, leading to significant, possibly irreversible damage, especially to the cornfield. However, since the plateau could only be accessed from the left bank of the Mercy, it would be enough to set up a barrier against the foxes on the narrow section of the shore between the river and the granite wall.
This was apparent to all, and under Smith’s direction the party gained this position and disposed themselves so as to form an impassable line. Top, his formidable jaws open, preceded the colonists, and was followed by Jup, armed with a knotty cudgel, which he brandished like a cricket-bat.
This was obvious to everyone, and under Smith’s leadership, the group secured this position and arranged themselves to create an unbreakable line. Top, with his impressive jaws wide open, led the colonists, followed by Jup, who wielded a heavy stick, swinging it like a cricket bat.
The night was very dark, and it was only by the flash of the discharges that the colonists could perceive their assailants, who numbered at least 100, and whose eyes shone like embers.
The night was pitch black, and it was only through the flashes of the discharges that the colonists could see their attackers, who numbered at least 100 and whose eyes glowed like embers.
“They must not pass!” cried Pencroff.
“They can't get through!” shouted Pencroff.
“They shall not pass!” answered the engineer.
“They can’t get through!” replied the engineer.
But if they did not it was not because they did not try. Those behind kept pushing on those in front, and it was an incessant struggle; the colonists using their hatchets and revolvers. Already the dead bodies of the foxes were strewn over the ground, but the band did not seem to lessen; and it appeared as if reinforcements were constantly pouring in through the causeway on the shore. Meantime the colonists fought side by side, receiving some wounds, though happily but trifling. Herbert shot one fox, which had fastened itself on Neb like a tiger-cat. Top fought with fury, springing at the throats of the animals and strangling them at once. Jup, armed with his cudgel, laid about him like a good fellow, and it was useless to try to make him stay behind. Gifted, doubtless, with a sight able to pierce the darkness, he was always in the thick of the fight, uttering from time to time a sharp cry, which was with him a mark of extreme jollification. At one time he advanced so far, that by the flash of a revolver he was seen, surrounded by five or six huge foxes, defending himself with rare coolness.
But if they didn’t succeed, it wasn’t for lack of trying. Those in the back kept pushing the ones in front, and it was a nonstop struggle; the colonists using their hatchets and revolvers. The dead bodies of the foxes were already scattered across the ground, but the group didn’t seem to thin out; it looked like reinforcements were constantly arriving through the causeway on the shore. Meanwhile, the colonists fought side by side, sustaining some injuries, though thankfully, they were minor. Herbert shot one fox that had latched onto Neb like a tiger-cat. Top fought with rage, leaping at the animals’ throats and taking them down instantly. Jup, armed with his club, swung it around like a champ, and it was pointless to try to keep him back. Surely gifted with a sight that could see through the darkness, he was always in the heart of the fight, occasionally letting out a sharp cry that was his way of showing extreme joy. At one point, he advanced so far that by the flash of a revolver, he was seen surrounded by five or six large foxes, defending himself with remarkable calm.
At length the fight ended in a victory for the colonists, but only after two hours of resistance. Doubtless the dawn of day determined the retreat of the foxes, who scampered off toward the north across the drawbridge, which Neb ran at once to raise. When daylight lit the battlefield, the colonists counted fifty dead bodies upon the shore.
At last, the fight ended in a victory for the colonists, but only after two hours of resistance. Surely, the break of day prompted the retreat of the foxes, who rushed off north across the drawbridge, which Neb quickly ran to raise. When daylight illuminated the battlefield, the colonists counted fifty dead bodies on the shore.
“And Jup! Where is Jup?” cried Neb.
“And Jup! Where's Jup?” yelled Neb.
Jup had disappeared. His friend Neb called him, and for the first time he did not answer the call. Every one began to search for the monkey, trembling lest they should find him among the dead. At length, under a veritable mound of carcasses, each one marked by the terrible cudgel of the brave animal, they found Jup. The poor fellow still held in his hand the handle of his broken weapon; but deprived of this arm, he had been overpowered by numbers, and deep wounds scored his breast.
Jup had vanished. His friend Neb called him, and for the first time, he didn’t pick up. Everyone started looking for the monkey, anxious that they might find him among the dead. Eventually, under a huge pile of bodies, each marked by the fierce blows of the brave animal, they found Jup. The poor thing still clutched the handle of his broken weapon; but without this arm, he had been overwhelmed by numbers, and deep wounds marked his chest.
“He’s alive!” cried Neb, who knelt beside him.
"He's alive!" shouted Neb, who was kneeling next to him.
“And we will save him,” answered the sailor, “We will nurse him as one of ourselves!”
“And we’ll save him,” the sailor replied, “We’ll take care of him like he’s one of us!”
It seemed as if Jup understood what was said, for he laid his head on Pencroff’s shoulder as if to thank him. The sailor himself was wounded, but his wounds, like those of his companions, were trifling, as thanks to their firearms, they had always been able to keep the assailants at a distance. Only the orang was seriously hurt.
It felt like Jup understood what was being said, as he rested his head on Pencroff’s shoulder as a way of expressing gratitude. The sailor was injured too, but his wounds, like those of his friends, were minor, since they had managed to keep their attackers at bay with their firearms. Only the orangutan was seriously injured.
Jup, borne by Neb and Pencroff, was carried to the elevator, and lifted gently to Granite House. There he was laid upon one of the beds, and his wounds carefully washed. No vital organ seemed to have been injured, but the orang was very feeble from loss of blood, and a strong fever had set in. His wounds having been dressed, a strict diet was imposed upon him, “just as for a real person,” Neb said, and they gave him a refreshing draught made from herbs.
Jup, carried by Neb and Pencroff, was brought to the elevator and gently lifted to Granite House. There, he was laid on one of the beds, and his wounds were carefully cleaned. No vital organs appeared to be injured, but the orangutan was very weak from blood loss, and he had developed a high fever. After his wounds were treated, they put him on a strict diet, “just like a real person,” Neb said, and they gave him a revitalizing drink made from herbs.
He slept at first but brokenly, but little by little, his breathing became more regular, and they left him in a heavy sleep. From time to time Top came “on tip-toe” to visit his friend, and seemed to approve of the attentions which had been bestowed upon it.
He initially dozed off, but it was restless; gradually, his breathing became steadier, and they let him fall into a deep sleep. Occasionally, Top crept over “on tip-toe” to check on his friend and appeared to appreciate the care that had been given.
One of Jup’s hands hung over the side of the bed, and Top licked it sympathetically.
One of Jup's hands dangled off the edge of the bed, and Top licked it affectionately.
The same morning they disposed of the dead foxes by dragging the bodies to the Far West and burying them there.
The same morning, they took care of the dead foxes by dragging the bodies to the Far West and burying them there.
This attack, which might have been attended with very grave results, was a lesson to the colonists, and thenceforth they never slept before having ascertained that all the bridges were raised and that no invasion was possible.
This attack, which could have had very serious consequences, served as a lesson to the colonists, and from that point on, they never went to sleep without checking that all the bridges were raised and that no invasion was possible.
Meantime Jup, after having given serious alarm for some days, began to grow better. The fever abated gradually, and Spilett, who was something of a physician, considered him out of danger. On the 16th of August Jup began to eat. Neb made him some nice, sweet dishes, which the invalid swallowed greedily, for if he had a fault, it was that he was a bit of a glutton, and Neb had never done anything to correct this habit.
Meantime, Jup, after causing serious concern for several days, started to improve. The fever gradually decreased, and Spilett, who had some medical knowledge, believed he was out of danger. On August 16th, Jup began to eat. Neb prepared some tasty, sweet dishes, which Jup devoured eagerly, because if he had one flaw, it was that he tended to overindulge, and Neb had never made any effort to change this habit.
“What would you have?” he said to Spilett, who sometimes rebuked the negro for indulging him. “Poor Jup has no other pleasure than to eat! and I am only too glad to be able to reward his services in this way!”
“What do you want?” he said to Spilett, who sometimes scolded the man for pampering him. “Poor Jup has no other joy but to eat! and I’m more than happy to reward him for his help this way!”
By the 21st of August he was about again. His wounds were healed, and the colonists saw that he would soon recover his accustomed suppleness and vigor. Like other convalescents he was seized with an excessive hunger, and the reporter let him eat what he wished, knowing that the monkey’s instinct would preserve him from excess. Neb was overjoyed to see his pupil’s appetite returned.
By August 21st, he was up and about again. His wounds had healed, and the colonists noticed that he would soon get back his usual flexibility and energy. Like other people recovering from illness, he was hit with an intense hunger, and the reporter allowed him to eat whatever he wanted, knowing that the monkey's instincts would keep him from overdoing it. Neb was thrilled to see his pupil's appetite back.
“Eat Jup,” he said, “and you shall want for nothing. You have shed your blood for us, and it is right that I should help you to make it again!”
“Eat Jup,” he said, “and you won’t lack for anything. You’ve sacrificed for us, and it’s only fair that I help you recover!”
At length, on the 25th of August, the colonists seated in the great hall, were called by Neb to Jup’s room.
At last, on August 25th, the colonists gathered in the great hall were summoned by Neb to Jup's room.
“What is it?” asked the reporter.
“What is it?” the reporter asked.
“Look!” answered Neb, laughing, and what did they see but Jup, seated like a Turk within the doorway of Granite House, tranquilly and gravely smoking!
“Look!” Neb replied, laughing, and what did they see but Jup, sitting like a Turk in the doorway of Granite House, calmly and seriously smoking!
“My pipe!” cried Pencroff. “He has taken my pipe! Well, Jup, I give it to you. Smoke on my friend, smoke on!”
“My pipe!” shouted Pencroff. “He took my pipe! Well, Jup, I’m giving it to you. Smoke up, my friend, smoke up!”
And Jup gravely puffed on, seeming to experience the utmost enjoyment.
And Jup seriously puffed away, looking like he was having the best time.
Smith was not greatly astonished at this incident, and he cited numerous examples of tamed monkeys that had become accustomed to the use of tobacco.
Smith wasn't really surprised by this incident, and he pointed out several examples of tame monkeys that had gotten used to smoking tobacco.
And after this day master Jup had his own pipe hung in his room beside his tobacco-bag, and, lighting it himself with a live coal, he appeared to be the happiest of quadrumana. It seemed as if this community of taste drew closer together the bonds of friendship already existing between the worthy monkey and the honest sailor.
And after this day, Master Jup had his own pipe hung up in his room next to his tobacco bag. Lighting it himself with a live coal, he looked like the happiest of monkeys. It seemed that this shared interest only strengthened the bond of friendship that was already there between the good monkey and the honest sailor.
“Perhaps he is a man,” Pencroff would sometimes say to Neb. “Would it astonish you if some day he was to speak?”
“Maybe he’s a man,” Pencroff would sometimes say to Neb. “Would you be surprised if he spoke one day?”
“Indeed it would not,” replied Neb. “The wonder is that he don’t do it, as that is all he lacks!”
“Actually, it wouldn’t,” Neb responded. “The amazing thing is that he doesn’t do it, since that’s all he needs!”
“Nevertheless, it would be funny if some fine day he said to me:—Pencroff, suppose we change pipes!”
“Still, it would be funny if one day he said to me:—Pencroff, what if we switch pipes!”
“Yes,” responded Neb. “What a pity he was born mute!”
“Yes,” replied Neb. “What a shame he was born unable to speak!”
Winter ended with September, and the work was renewed with ardor. The construction of the boat advanced rapidly. The planking was completed, and as wood was plenty Pencroff proposed that they line the interior with a stout ceiling, which would insure the solidity of the craft. Smith, not knowing what might be in store for them, approved the sailor’s idea of making his boat as strong as possible. The ceiling and the deck were finished towards the 13th of September. For caulking, they used some dry wrack, and the seams were then covered with boiling pitch, made from the pine trees of the forest.
Winter ended with September, and work resumed with enthusiasm. The boat’s construction moved quickly. The planking was done, and since there was plenty of wood, Pencroff suggested that they line the interior with a sturdy ceiling to ensure the craft's strength. Smith, unsure of what challenges lay ahead, agreed with the sailor's idea to make the boat as strong as possible. The ceiling and deck were completed around September 13th. For caulking, they used some dry seaweed, and the seams were then sealed with boiling pitch made from the pine trees in the forest.
The arrangement of the boat was simple. She had been ballasted with heavy pieces of granite, set in a bed of lime, and weighing 12,000 pounds. A deck was placed over this ballast, and the interior was divided into two compartments, the larger containing two bunks, which served as chests. The foot of the mast was at the partition separating the compartments, which were entered through hatchways.
The setup of the boat was straightforward. It was weighted down with heavy granite blocks, set in lime, and weighed 12,000 pounds. A deck was placed over this ballast, and the inside was split into two sections, the larger one having two bunks that worked as storage chests. The base of the mast was at the divider between the sections, which were accessed through hatchways.
Pencroff had no difficulty in finding a tree suitable for a mast. He chose a young straight fir, without knots, so that all he had to do was to square the foot and round it off at the head. All the iron work had been roughly but solidly made at the Chimneys; and in the first week of October yards, topmast, spars, oars, etc., everything, in short, was completed; and it was determined that they would first try the craft along the shores of the island, so as to see how she acted.
Pencroff easily found a tree that would work as a mast. He picked a young, straight fir with no knots, so all he needed to do was square the base and round off the top. The ironwork had been done roughly but solidly at the Chimneys, and by the first week of October, the yards, topmast, spars, oars, and everything else were finished. They decided to first test the boat along the shores of the island to see how it performed.
She was launched on the 10th of October. Pencroff was radiant with delight. Completely rigged, she had been pushed on rollers to the edge of the shore, and, as the tide rose, she was floated on the surface of the water, amid the applause of the colonists, and especially of Pencroff, who showed no modesty on this occasion. Moreover, his vanity looked beyond the completion of the craft, as, now that she was built, he was to be her commander. The title of captain was bestowed upon him unanimously.
She was launched on October 10th. Pencroff was overjoyed. Fully rigged, she had been rolled to the edge of the shore, and as the tide came in, she floated on the water, amid the cheers of the colonists, especially from Pencroff, who was feeling quite proud at that moment. Besides, his pride went beyond just finishing the boat, since now that it was built, he was going to be her captain. Everyone agreed to give him the title of captain.
In order to satisfy Captain Pencroff it was necessary at once to name his ship, and after considerable discussion they decided upon Good Luck—the name chosen by the honest sailor. Moreover, as the weather was fine, the breeze fresh, and the sea calm, the trial must be made at once in an excursion along the coast.
To satisfy Captain Pencroff, they needed to name his ship right away, and after a lot of discussion, they settled on Good Luck—the name chosen by the honest sailor. Also, since the weather was nice, the breeze was fresh, and the sea was calm, they had to take the ship out for a test run along the coast immediately.
“Get aboard! Get aboard!” cried Captain Pencroff.
“Get on board! Get on board!” shouted Captain Pencroff.
At half-past 10, after having eaten breakfast and put some provisions aboard, everybody, including Top and Jup, embarked, the sails were hoisted, the flag set at the masthead, and the Good Luck, with Pencroff at the helm, stood out to sea.
At 10:30, after having breakfast and loaded some supplies onto the boat, everyone, including Top and Jup, got on board. The sails were raised, the flag was flown at the masthead, and the Good Luck, with Pencroff at the helm, headed out to sea.
On going out from Union Bay they had a fair wind, and they were able to see that, sailing before it, their speed was excellent. After doubling Jetsam Point and Claw Cape, Pencroff had to lie close to the wind in order to skirt along the shore, and he observed the Good Luck would sail to within five points of the wind, and that she made but little lee-way. She sailed very well, also, before the wind, minding her helm perfectly, and gained even in going about.
On leaving Union Bay, they had a good wind, and they could tell that their speed was great. After rounding Jetsam Point and Claw Cape, Pencroff had to sail close to the wind to hug the shore, and he noticed that the Good Luck could sail within five points of the wind, hardly making any lee-way. She also sailed well with the wind, steering perfectly and even gaining ground when changing direction.
The passengers were enchanted. They had a good boat, which, in case of need, could render them great service, and in this splendid weather, with the fair wind, the sail was delightful. Pencroff stood out to sea two or three miles, opposite Balloon Harbor, and then the whole varied panorama of the island from Claw Cape to Reptile Promontory was visible under a new aspect. In the foreground were the pine forests, contrasting with the foliage of the other trees, and over all rose Mt. Franklin, its head white with snow.
The passengers were spellbound. They had a great boat that could really come in handy if needed, and with the beautiful weather and perfect wind, sailing was a joy. Pencroff went out to sea two or three miles, right across from Balloon Harbor, and then the entire stunning view of the island from Claw Cape to Reptile Promontory was visible in a new light. In the foreground were the pine forests, standing out against the greenery of the other trees, and towering above it all was Mt. Franklin, its peak capped with snow.
“How beautiful it is!” exclaimed Herbert.
“How beautiful it is!” Herbert exclaimed.
“Yes, she is a pretty creature,” responded Pencroff. “I love her as a mother. She received us poor and needy, and what has she denied to these five children who tumbled upon her out of the sky?”
“Yes, she’s a beautiful person,” Pencroff replied. “I care for her like a mother. She welcomed us when we were poor and in need, and what has she ever denied these five kids who just fell into her life from nowhere?”
“Nothing, captain, nothing,” answered Neb. And the two honest fellows gave three hearty cheers in honor of their island.
“Nothing, captain, nothing,” Neb replied. And the two honest guys let out three loud cheers to celebrate their island.
Meantime, Spilett, seated by the mast, sketched the panorama before him, while Smith looked on in silence.
Meantime, Spilett, sitting by the mast, sketched the view in front of him, while Smith watched in silence.
“What do you say of our boat, now, sir?” demanded Pencroff.
“What do you think of our boat now, sir?” asked Pencroff.
“It acts very well,” replied the engineer.
“It works really well,” replied the engineer.
“Good. And now don’t you think it could undertake a voyage of some length?”
“Good. Now, don’t you think it could go on a journey of some length?”
“Where, Pencroff?”
"Where to, Pencroff?"
“To Tabor Island, for instance.”
"To Tabor Island, for example."
“My friend,” replied the engineer, “I believe that in a case of necessity there need be no hesitancy in trusting to the Good Luck even for a longer journey; but, you know, I would be sorry to see you leave for Tabor Island, because nothing obliges you to go.”
“My friend,” replied the engineer, “I think that in an emergency, there shouldn’t be any hesitation in relying on Good Luck, even for a longer trip; but, you know, I’d hate to see you head off to Tabor Island because you don’t have to go.”
“One likes to know one’s neighbors,” answered Pencroff, whose mind was made up. “Tabor Island is our neighbor, and is all alone. Politeness requires that at least we make her a visit.”
“One likes to know their neighbors,” replied Pencroff, who had already made up his mind. “Tabor Island is our neighbor, and it’s all alone. It’s only polite that we pay her a visit.”
“The mischief!” exclaimed Spilett, “our friend Pencroff is a stickler for propriety.”
“The trouble!” shouted Spilett, “our buddy Pencroff is really into being proper.”
“I am not a stickler at all,” retorted the sailor, who was a little vexed by the engineer’s opposition.
“I’m not a stickler at all,” replied the sailor, who was a bit annoyed by the engineer’s disagreement.
“Remember, Pencroff,” said Smith, “that you could not go the island alone.”
“Remember, Pencroff,” Smith said, “that you couldn’t go to the island alone.”
“One other would be all I would want.”
"One more is all I would want."
“Supposing so,” replied the engineer, “would you risk depriving our colony of five, of two of its colonists?”
“Supposing so,” replied the engineer, “would you risk depriving our colony of five, of two of its colonists?”
“There are six,” rejoined Pencroff. “You forget Jup.”
“There are six,” Pencroff replied. “You’re forgetting Jup.”
“There are seven,” added Neb. “Top is as good as another.”
“There are seven,” added Neb. “The top one is just as good as another.”
“There is no risk in it, Mr. Smith,” said Pencroff again.
“There’s no risk in it, Mr. Smith,” Pencroff said again.
“Possibly not, Pencroff; but, I repeat, that it is exposing oneself without necessity.”
“Maybe not, Pencroff; but I’ll say it again, it’s putting oneself at risk for no reason.”
The obstinate sailor did not answer, but let the conversation drop for the present. He little thought that an incident was about to aid him, and change to a work of humanity what had been merely a caprice open to discussion.
The stubborn sailor didn't respond but let the conversation fade for now. He had no idea that an event was about to assist him and turn what had been just a whim into a matter of compassion.
The Good Luck, after having stood out to sea, was returning towards the coast and making for Balloon Harbor, as it was important to locate the channel-way between the shoals and reefs so as to buoy them, for this little inlet was to be resting place of the sloop.
The Good Luck, after going out to sea, was heading back toward the coast and making its way to Balloon Harbor. It was important to find the channel between the shallow areas and reefs so they could mark them, as this small inlet was going to be the resting place for the sloop.
They were half a mile off shore, beating up to windward and moving somewhat slowly, as the boat was under the lee of the land. The sea was as smooth as glass. Herbert was standing in the bows indicating the channel-way. Suddenly he cried:—
They were half a mile offshore, sailing against the wind and moving quite slowly since the boat was sheltered by the land. The sea was as calm as glass. Herbert was standing at the front, pointing out the channel. Suddenly, he shouted:—
“Luff, Pencroff, luff.”
"Turn into the wind, Pencroff."
“What is it?” cried the sailor, springing to his feet. “A rock?”
“What is it?” shouted the sailor, jumping to his feet. “A rock?”
“No—hold on, I cannot see very well—luff again—steady—bear away a little—” and while thus speaking, the lad lay down along the deck, plunged his arm quickly into the water, and then rising up again with something in his hand, exclaimed:—
“No—wait, I can’t see very well—turn up again—steady—steer away a little—” and while saying this, the boy lay down on the deck, quickly plunged his arm into the water, and then stood up again with something in his hand, exclaiming:—
“It is a bottle!”
"It's a bottle!"
Smith took it, and without saying a word, withdrew the cork and took out a wet paper, on which was written these words:—
Smith took it, and without saying a word, pulled out the cork and took out a damp piece of paper, on which these words were written:—
“A shipwrecked man—Tabor Island:—l53° W. lon.—37° 11’ S. lat.”
“A shipwrecked man—Tabor Island:—153° W. longitude—37° 11’ S. latitude.”
CHAPTER XXXV.
DEPARTURE DECIDED UPON—PREPARATIONS—THE THREE PASSENGERS—THE FIRST NIGHT—THE SECOND NIGHT—TABOR ISLAND—SEARCH ON THE SHORE—SEARCH IN THE WOODS—NO ONE—ANIMALS—PLANTS—A HOUSE—DESERTED.
DEPARTURE CONFIRMED—PREPARATIONS—THE THREE PASSENGERS—THE FIRST NIGHT—THE SECOND NIGHT—TABOR ISLAND—SEARCH ON THE SHORE—SEARCH IN THE WOODS—NO ONE—ANIMALS—PLANTS—A HOUSE—DESERTED.
“Some one shipwrecked!” cried Pencroff, “abandoned some hundred miles from us upon Tabor Island! Oh! Mr. Smith, you will no longer oppose my project!”
“Someone's shipwrecked!” yelled Pencroff, “left all alone about a hundred miles away on Tabor Island! Oh! Mr. Smith, you can’t say no to my plan anymore!”
“No, Pencroff, and you must leave as soon as possible.”.
“No, Pencroff, and you need to leave as soon as possible.”
“To-morrow?”
“Tomorrow?”
“To-morrow.”
"Tomorrow."
The engineer held the paper which he had taken from the bottle in his hand. He considered for a few moments, and then spoke:—
The engineer held the paper he had pulled from the bottle in his hand. He thought for a moment, and then said:—
“From this paper, my friends,” said he, “and from the manner in which it is worded, we must conclude that, in the first place, the person cast away upon Tabor Island is a man well informed, since he gives the latitude and longitude of his island exactly; secondly, that he is English or American, since the paper is written in English.”
“From this note, my friends,” he said, “and the way it’s written, we can conclude that, first of all, the person stranded on Tabor Island is someone knowledgeable, since he provides the exact latitude and longitude of his island; secondly, he is either English or American, because the note is written in English.”
“That is a logical conclusion,” answered Spilett, “and the presence of this person explains the arrival of the box on our coast. There has been a shipwreck, since some one has been shipwrecked. And he is fortunate in that Pencroff had the idea of building this boat and even of trying it to-day, for in twenty-four hours the bottle would have been broken on the rocks.”
“That makes sense,” Spilett replied. “This person’s presence explains how the box ended up on our shore. There’s been a shipwreck since someone has been stranded. And he’s lucky that Pencroff thought to build this boat and even tried it today, because if he hadn’t, the bottle would have shattered against the rocks within twenty-four hours.”
“Indeed,!’ said Herbert, “it is a happy chance that the Good Luck passed by the very spot where this bottle was floating.”
“Absolutely!” said Herbert, “it’s a lucky coincidence that the Good Luck happened to pass by the exact spot where this bottle was floating.”
“Don’t it seem to you odd?” asked Smith of Pencroff.
“Doesn’t it seem strange to you?” Smith asked Pencroff.
“It seems fortunate, that’s all,” replied the sailor. “Do you see anything extraordinary in it, sir? This bottle must have gone somewhere, and why not here as well as anywhere else?”
“It seems lucky, that’s all,” replied the sailor. “Do you see anything special about it, sir? This bottle must have come from somewhere, and why not here like anywhere else?”
“Perhaps you are right, Pencroff,” responded the engineer, “and nevertheless—”
“Maybe you're right, Pencroff,” replied the engineer, “but still—”
“But,” interrupted Herbert, “nothing proves that this bottle has floated in the water for a long time.”
“But,” interrupted Herbert, “nothing shows that this bottle has been floating in the water for a long time.”
“Nothing,” responded Spilett, “and moreover the paper seems to have been recently written. What do you think, Cyrus?”
“Nothing,” Spilett replied, “and it looks like the paper was written recently. What do you think, Cyrus?”
“It is hard to decide.” answered Smith..
“It’s hard to decide,” answered Smith.
Meanwhile Pencroff had not been idle. He had gone about, and the Good Luck, with a free wind, all her sails drawing, was speeding toward Claw Cape. Each one thought of the castaway on Tabor Island. Was there still time to save him? This was a great event in the lives of the colonists. They too were but castaways, but it was not probable that another had been as favored as they had been, and it was their duty to hasten at once to this one’s relief. By 2 o’clock Claw Cape was doubled, and the Good Luck anchored at the mouth of the Mercy.
Meanwhile, Pencroff had been busy. He navigated the Good Luck, which, with a strong wind, had all its sails up and was racing toward Claw Cape. Each person was thinking about the castaway on Tabor Island. Was there still time to rescue him? This was a significant moment in the lives of the colonists. They were also castaways, but it was unlikely that anyone else had been as fortunate as they had been, and it was their responsibility to rush to this person's aid. By 2 o'clock, they rounded Claw Cape, and the Good Luck dropped anchor at the entrance of the Mercy.
That evening all the details of the expedition were arranged. It was agreed that Herbert and Pencroff, who understood the management of a boat, were to undertake the voyage alone. By leaving the next day, the 11th of October, they would reach the island, supposing the wind continued, in forty-eight hours. Allowing for one day there, and three or four days to return in, they could calculate on being at Lincoln Island again on the 17th. The weather was good, the barometer rose steadily, the wind seemed as if it would continue, everything favored these brave men, who were going so far to do a humane act.
That evening, all the details of the expedition were settled. It was decided that Herbert and Pencroff, who knew how to handle a boat, would take the journey on their own. If they left the next day, October 11th, they would reach the island in about forty-eight hours, assuming the wind stayed favorable. With one day on the island and three or four days for the return trip, they expected to be back at Lincoln Island by the 17th. The weather was good, the barometer was steadily rising, the wind seemed likely to hold, and everything was in favor of these brave men who were going so far to perform a kind act.
Thus, Smith, Neb, and Spilett was to remain at Granite House; but at the last moment, the latter, remembering his duty as reporter to the New York Herald, having declared that he would swim rather than lose such an opportunity, was allowed to take part in the voyage.
Thus, Smith, Neb, and Spilett were to stay at Granite House; but at the last minute, Spilett, remembering his responsibility as a reporter for the New York Herald, declared that he would rather swim than miss out on such an opportunity, so he was allowed to join the voyage.
The evening was employed in putting bedding, arms, munitions, provisions, etc., on board, and the next morning, by 5 o’clock, the good-byes were spoken, and Pencroff, hoisting the sails, headed for Claw Cape, which had to be doubled before taking the route to the southeast. The Good Luck was already a quarter of a mile from shore when her passengers saw upon the heights of Granite House two men signalling farewells. They were Smith and Neb, from whom they were separating for the first time in fifteen months.
The evening was spent loading bedding, weapons, supplies, and other essentials onto the ship, and by 5 o’clock the next morning, they said their goodbyes. Pencroff raised the sails and steered towards Claw Cape, which they had to navigate around before heading southeast. The Good Luck was already a quarter of a mile from shore when the passengers spotted two men on the heights of Granite House waving goodbye. It was Smith and Neb, and this was the first time they were parting ways in fifteen months.
Pencroff, Herbert, and the reporter returned the signal, and soon Granite House disappeared behind the rocks of the Cape.
Pencroff, Herbert, and the reporter signaled back, and soon Granite House vanished behind the rocks of the Cape.
During the morning, the Good Luck remained in view of the southern coast of the island, which appeared like a green clump of trees, above which rose Mount Franklin. The heights, lessened by distance, gave it an appearance little calculated to attract ships on its coasts. At 1 o’clock Reptile Promontory was passed ten miles distant. It was therefore impossible to distinguish the western coast, which extended to the spurs of the mountain, and three hours later, Lincoln Island had disappeared behind the horizon.
During the morning, the Good Luck stayed in sight of the southern coast of the island, which looked like a green mass of trees, with Mount Franklin rising above it. The heights, diminished by distance, made it look uninviting to ships along its shores. At 1 o’clock, they passed Reptile Promontory, which was ten miles away. Because of this, it was impossible to see the western coast, which stretched out to the mountains' foothills, and three hours later, Lincoln Island vanished beyond the horizon.
The Good Luck behaved admirably. She rode lightly over the seas and sailed rapidly. Pencroff had set his topsail, and with a fair wind he followed a straight course by the compass. Occasionally Herbert took the tiller, and the hand of the young lad was so sure, that the sailor had nothing to correct.
The Good Luck performed excellently. She glided smoothly over the waves and sailed quickly. Pencroff had set the topsail, and with a favorable wind, he followed a direct path by the compass. Occasionally, Herbert took the tiller, and the young boy's grip was so steady that the sailor had nothing to adjust.
Spilett chatted with one and the other, and lent a hand when necessary in manœuvring the sloop. Captain Pencroff was perfectly satisfied with his crew, and was constantly promising them an extra allowance of grog.
Spilett talked with everyone and helped out when needed in steering the sloop. Captain Pencroff was really happy with his crew and kept promising them a little extra grog.
In the evening the slender crescent of the moon glimmered in the twilight. The night came on dark but starlit, with the promise of a fine day on the morrow. Pencroff thought it prudent to take in the topsail, which was perhaps an excess of caution in so still a night, but he was a careful sailor, and was not to be blamed.
In the evening, the thin crescent moon shone in the dusk. The night fell dark but filled with stars, hinting at a nice day ahead. Pencroff decided it was wise to take in the topsail, which might have been overly cautious on such a calm night, but he was a careful sailor and couldn't be criticized for it.
The reporter slept during half the night, Herbert and Pencroff taking two-hour turns at the helm. The sailor had as much confidence in his pupil as he had in himself, and his trust was justified by the coolness and judgment of the lad. Pencroff set the course as a captain to his helmsman, and Herbert did not allow the Good Luck to deviate a point from her direction.
The reporter slept for half the night while Herbert and Pencroff took turns at the helm for two hours each. The sailor had as much confidence in his student as he did in himself, and his trust was well-placed thanks to the calmness and judgment of the boy. Pencroff directed the course like a captain to his helmsman, and Herbert made sure the Good Luck stayed on course without veering off even slightly.
The night and the next day passed quietly and safely. The Good Luck held her southeast course, and, unless she was drawn aside by some unknown current, she would make Tabor Island exactly. The sea was completely deserted, save that sometimes an albatross or frigate-bird passed within gun-shot distance.
The night and the next day went by peacefully and without incident. The Good Luck kept her southeast course, and unless she was pulled off track by some unseen current, she would reach Tabor Island right on target. The sea was completely empty, except for the occasional albatross or frigate bird flying by within shooting distance.
“And yet,” said Herbert, “this is the season when the whalers usually come towards the southern part of the Pacific. I don’t believe that there is a sea more deserted than this.”
“And yet,” Herbert said, “this is the season when the whalers usually head towards the southern part of the Pacific. I don’t think there’s a sea more empty than this.”
“It is not altogether deserted,” responded Pencroff.
“It’s not completely deserted,” Pencroff replied.
“What do you mean?”
"What do you mean by that?"
“Why we are here. Do you take us for porpoises or our sloop for driftwood?” And Pencroff laughed at his pleasantry.
“Why are we here? Do you think we're porpoises or that our boat is just driftwood?” And Pencroff laughed at his joke.
By evening they calculated the distance traversed at 130 miles, or three and a third miles an hour. The breeze was dying away, but they had reason to hope, supposing their course to have been correct, that they would sight Tabor Island at daylight.
By evening, they figured they had traveled 130 miles, averaging three and a third miles per hour. The breeze was calming down, but they had reason to be hopeful, assuming they had taken the right route, that they would see Tabor Island by dawn.
No one of the three slept during this night. While waiting for morning they experienced the liveliest emotions. There was so much uncertainty in their enterprise. Were they near the island? Was the shipwrecked man still there? Who was he? Might not his presence disturb the unity of the colony? Would he, indeed, consent to exchange one prison for another? All these questions, which would doubtless be answered the next day, kept them alert, and at the earliest dawn they began to scan the western horizon.
No one among the three slept that night. As they waited for morning, they felt a whirlwind of emotions. There was so much uncertainty in their mission. Were they close to the island? Was the shipwrecked man still there? Who was he? Could his presence disrupt the harmony of the colony? Would he actually agree to trade one prison for another? All these questions, which would likely be answered the next day, kept them on edge, and at the first light of dawn, they started to look out toward the western horizon.
What was the joy of the little crew when towards 6 o’clock Pencroff shouted—
What was the joy of the little crew when around 6 o’clock Pencroff shouted—
“Land!”
“Land ho!”
In a few hours they would be upon its shore.
In a few hours, they would reach its shore.
The island was a low coast, raised but a little above the waves, not more than fifteen miles away. The sloop, which had been heading south of it, was put about, and, as the sun rose, a few elevations became visible here and there.
The island was a low coastline, slightly elevated above the waves, no more than fifteen miles away. The sloop, which had been sailing south of it, changed direction, and as the sun rose, a few hills became visible here and there.
“It is not as large as Lincoln Island,” said Herbert, “and probably owes its origin to like submarine convulsions.”
“It’s not as big as Lincoln Island,” said Herbert, “and it probably came from similar underwater eruptions.”
By 11 o’clock the Good Luck was only two miles distant from shore, and Pencroff, while seeking some place to land, sailed with extreme caution through these unknown waters. They could see the whole extent of this island, on which were visible groups of gum and other large trees of the same species as those on Lincoln Island. But, it was astonishing, that no rising smoke indicated that the place was inhabited, nor was any signal visible upon the shore. Nevertheless the paper had been precise: it stated that there was a shipwrecked man here; and he should have been upon the watch.
By 11 o’clock, the Good Luck was just two miles from shore, and Pencroff, while looking for a place to land, navigated these unfamiliar waters very carefully. They could see the entire island, where groups of gum trees and other large trees of the same type as those on Lincoln Island were visible. However, it was surprising that no smoke was rising to indicate that the place was inhabited, and there were no visible signals on the shore. Still, the paper had been clear: it said there was a shipwrecked man here, and he should have been keeping an eye out.
Meanwhile the Good Luck went in through the tortuous passages between the reefs, Herbert steering, and the sailor stationed forward, keeping a sharp lookout, with the halliards in his hand, ready to run down the sail. Spilett, with the spy-glass, examined all the shore without perceiving anything. By noon the sloop touched the beach, the anchor was let go, the sails furled, and the crew stepped on shore.
Meanwhile, the Good Luck made its way through the winding paths between the reefs, with Herbert at the helm and a sailor at the front, keeping a close watch and ready to lower the sail. Spilett used the binoculars to scan the shoreline but didn’t see anything. By noon, the sloop reached the beach, the anchor was dropped, the sails were brought in, and the crew got off the boat.
There could be no doubt that that was Tabor Island, since the most recent maps gave no other land in all this part of the Pacific.
There was no doubt that this was Tabor Island, as the latest maps showed no other land in this part of the Pacific.
After having securely moored the sloop, Pencroff and his companion, well armed, ascended the coast towards a round hill, some 250 feet high, which was distant about half a mile, from the summit of which they expected to have a good view of the island.
After safely tying up the sloop, Pencroff and his friend, equipped with weapons, made their way up the coast toward a round hill that was about 250 feet high and half a mile away. They anticipated getting a great view of the island from the top.
The explorers followed the edge of grassy plain which ended at the foot of the hill. Rock-pigeons and sea-swallows circled about them, and in the woods bordering the plain to the left they heard rustlings in the bushes and saw movements in the grass indicating the presence of very timid animals, but nothing, so far, indicated that the island was inhabited.
The explorers trekked along the edge of a grassy plain that met the foot of a hill. Rock pigeons and sea swallows flew overhead, and in the woods to the left of the plain, they heard rustling in the bushes and spotted movements in the grass that suggested the presence of very shy animals, but so far, there was no sign that the island was occupied.
Having reached the hill the party soon climbed to its summit, and their gaze traversed the whole horizon. They were certainly upon an island, not more than six miles in circumference, in shape a long oval, and but little broken by inlets or promontories. All around it, the sea, absolutely deserted, stretched away to the horizon.
Having reached the hill, the group quickly climbed to the top, and their eyes scanned the entire horizon. They were definitely on an island, no more than six miles around, shaped like a long oval, with very few inlets or points of land. All around it, the sea, completely empty, extended to the horizon.
This islet differed greatly from Lincoln Island in that it was covered over its entire surface with woods, and the uniform mass of verdure clothed two or three less elevated hills. Obliquely to the oval of the island a small stream crossed a large grassy plain and emptied into the sea on the western side by a narrowed mouth.
This small island was very different from Lincoln Island because it was completely covered in trees, and a thick layer of greenery dressed two or three lower hills. A small stream flowed across a large grassy plain at an angle to the island's oval shape and emptied into the sea on the western side through a narrow opening.
“The place is small,” said Herbert.
“The place is tiny,” said Herbert.
“Yes,” replied the sailor. “It would have been too small for us.”
“Yes,” replied the sailor. “It would have been too small for us.”
“And,” added the reporter, “it seems uninhabited.”
“And,” added the reporter, “it looks uninhabited.”
“Nevertheless,” said Pencroff, “let us go down and search.”
“Still,” said Pencroff, “let’s go down and take a look.”
The party returned to the sloop, and they decided to walk round the entire island before venturing into its interior, so that no place could escape their investigation.
The group went back to the sloop and agreed to walk around the whole island before exploring its interior, making sure that no spot was overlooked in their investigation.
The shore was easily followed, and the explorers proceeded towards the south, starting up flocks of aquatic birds and numbers of seals, which latter threw themselves into the sea as soon as they caught sight of the party.
The shore was easy to navigate, and the explorers continued south, stirring up flocks of waterfowl and a bunch of seals, which jumped into the sea as soon as they spotted the group.
“Those beasts are not looking on man for the first time. They fear what they know,” said the reporter.
“Those beasts aren't seeing humans for the first time. They’re afraid of what they know,” said the reporter.
An hour after their departure the three had reached the southern point of the islet, which terminated in a sharp cape, and they turned towards the north, following the western shore, which was sandy, like the other, and bounded by a thick wood.
An hour after they left, the three had arrived at the southern tip of the islet, which ended in a sharp cape, and they headed north along the western shore, which was sandy like the other side and bordered by a dense forest.
In four hours after they had set out the party had made the circuit of the island, without having seen any trace of a habitation, and not even a footprint. It was most extraordinary, to say the least, and it seemed necessary to believe that the place was not and had not been inhabited. Perhaps, after all, the paper had been in the water for many months, or even years, and it was possible, in that case, that the shipwrecked one had been rescued or that he had died from suffering.
In four hours after they set out, the group had made a complete loop around the island without seeing any signs of a home or even a footprint. It was truly unbelievable, to say the least, and it seemed necessary to think that the place was uninhabited and had never been. Maybe the paper had been in the water for many months, or even years, and in that case, it was possible that the shipwrecked person had been rescued or that he had died from suffering.
The little party, discussing all sorts of possibilities, made a hasty dinner on board the sloop, and at 5 o’clock started to explore the woods.
The small group, chatting about all kinds of possibilities, quickly had dinner on the sloop and at 5 o’clock set out to explore the woods.
Numerous animals fled before their approach, principally, indeed solely, goats and pigs, which it was easy to see were of European origin. Doubtless some whaler had left them here, and they had rapidly multiplied. Herbert made up his mind to catch two or three pairs to take back to Lincoln Island.
Numerous animals ran away as they got closer, mainly—actually only—goats and pigs, which were clearly of European origin. It was likely that some whaler had left them here, and they had quickly multiplied. Herbert decided to catch two or three pairs to bring back to Lincoln Island.
There was no longer any doubt that the island had previously been visited. This was the more evident as in passing through the forest they saw the traces of pathways, and the trunks of trees felled by the hatchet, and all about, marks of human handiwork; but these trees had been felled years before; the hatchet marks were velvetted with moss, and the pathways were so overgrown with grass that it was difficult to discover them.
There was no longer any doubt that the island had been visited before. It became even more obvious as they walked through the forest and saw the signs of pathways, tree trunks cut down with an axe, and various marks made by humans. However, these trees had been cut down years earlier; the axe marks were covered in moss, and the pathways were so overgrown with grass that it was hard to find them.
“But,” observed Spilett, “this proves that men not only landed here, but that they lived here. Now who and how many were these men, and how many remain?”
“But,” noted Spilett, “this shows that people not only landed here, but that they lived here. Now, who were these people, and how many were there? And how many are still here?”
“The paper speaks of but one,” replied Herbert.
“The paper only mentions one,” replied Herbert.
“Well,” said Pencroff, “if he is still here we cannot help finding him.”
“Well,” said Pencroff, “if he’s still here, we can’t miss him.”
The exploration was continued, following diagonally across the island, and by this means the sailor and his companions reached the little stream which flowed towards the sea.
The exploration continued, moving diagonally across the island, and this way the sailor and his companions reached the small stream that flowed toward the sea.
If animals of European origin, if works of human hands proved conclusively that man had once been here, many specimens of the vegetable kingdom also evidenced the fact. In certain clear places it was plain that kitchen vegetables had formerly been planted. And Herbert was overjoyed when he discovered potatoes, succory, sorrel, carrots, cabbage, and turnips, the seeds of which would enrich the garden at Granite House.
If animals from Europe and human-made objects clearly showed that people had been here before, many plants also proved the same point. In some open areas, it was obvious that garden vegetables had been grown there in the past. Herbert was thrilled when he found potatoes, chicory, sorrel, carrots, cabbage, and turnips, the seeds of which would enhance the garden at Granite House.
“Indeed,” exclaimed Pencroff, “this will rejoice Neb. Even if we don’t find the man, our voyage will not have been useless, and Heaven will have rewarded us.”
“Absolutely,” shouted Pencroff, “this will make Neb happy. Even if we don’t find the man, our journey won’t have been in vain, and Heaven will have rewarded us.”
“Doubtless,” replied Spilett, “but from the conditions of these fields, it looks as if the place had not been inhabited for a long time.”
“Sure,” replied Spilett, “but based on the state of these fields, it seems like this place hasn't been lived in for a long time.”
“An inhabitant, whoever he was, would not neglect anything so important as this.”
“Any resident, no matter who they were, wouldn’t overlook something as important as this.”
“Yes, this man has gone. It must be—”
“Yes, this man is gone. It has to be—”
“That the paper had been written a long time ago?”
“That the paper was written a long time ago?”
“Undoubtedly.”
"Definitely."
“And that the bottle had been floating in the sea a good while before it arrived at Lincoln Island?”
“And that the bottle had been floating in the ocean for quite some time before it reached Lincoln Island?”
“Why not?” said Pencroff. “But, see, it is getting dark,” he added, “and I think we had better give over the search.”
“Why not?” said Pencroff. “But, look, it’s getting dark,” he added, “and I think we should stop the search.”
“We will go aboard, and to-morrow we will begin again,” replied the reporter.
“We’ll go aboard, and tomorrow we’ll start over,” replied the reporter.
They were about adopting this counsel, when Herbert, pointing to something dimly visible, through the trees, exclaimed:—
They were about to take this advice when Herbert, pointing to something faintly visible through the trees, exclaimed:—
“There’s a house!”
"There's a house!"
All three directed their steps towards the place indicated, and they made out in the twilight that it was built of planks, covered with heavy tarpaulin. The door, half closed, was pushed back by Pencroff, who entered quickly.
All three headed towards the indicated spot, and in the fading light, they saw it was made of wooden planks and covered with heavy tarpaulin. Pencroff pushed open the half-closed door and quickly stepped inside.
The place was empty!
The place was deserted!
CHAPTER XXXVI.
THE INVENTORY—THE NIGHT—SOME LETTERS—THE SEARCH CONTINUED—PLANTS AND ANIMALS—HERBERT IN DANGER—ABOARD—THE DEPARTURE—BAD WEATHER—A GLIMMER OF INTELLIGENCE —LOST AT SEA—A TIMELY LIGHT.
THE INVENTORY—THE NIGHT—SOME LETTERS—THE SEARCH CONTINUES—PLANTS AND ANIMALS—HERBERT IN DANGER—ON BOARD—THE DEPARTURE—BAD WEATHER—A GLIMMER OF INTELLIGENCE—LOST AT SEA—A TIMELY LIGHT.
Pencroff, Spilett and Herbert stood silent In darkness. Then the former gave a loud call. There was no answer. He lit a twig, and the light illuminated for a moment a small room, seemingly deserted. At one end was a large chimney, containing some cold cinders and an armful of dry wood. Pencroff threw the lighted twig into it, and the wood caught fire and gave out a bright light.
Pencroff, Spilett, and Herbert stood silently in the dark. Then Pencroff called out loudly. There was no response. He lit a twig, and the light briefly revealed a small room that looked empty. At one end was a large chimney, filled with cold ashes and a pile of dry wood. Pencroff tossed the lit twig into it, and the wood ignited, giving off a bright light.
The sailor and his companions thereupon discovered a bed in disorder, its damp and mildewed covers proving that it had been long unused; in the corner of the fireplace were two rusty kettles and an overturned pot; a clothes-press with some sailors’ clothing, partially moulded; on the table a tin plate, and a Bible, injured by the dampness; in a corner some tools, a shovel, a mattock, a pick, two shot guns, one of which was broken; on a shelf was a barrel full of powder, a barrel of lead, and a number of boxes of caps. All were covered with a thick coating of dust.
The sailor and his companions then found a messy bed, its damp and moldy covers showing it had been untouched for a long time. In the fireplace corner were two rusty kettles and a tipped-over pot. A clothes-press held some sailors' clothes, partly moldy. On the table sat a tin plate and a Bible, damaged by moisture. In one corner were some tools: a shovel, a mattock, a pick, and two shotguns, one of which was broken. On a shelf was a barrel full of powder, a barrel of lead, and several boxes of caps. Everything was covered in a thick layer of dust.
“There is no one here,” said the reporter.
“There’s no one here,” said the reporter.
“Not a soul.”
“Not a single person.”
“This room has not been occupied in a long time.”
“This room hasn't been used in a long time.”
“Since a very long time.”
"Since a long time ago."
“Mr. Spilett,” said Pencroff, “I think that instead of going on board we had better stay here all night.”
“Mr. Spilett,” Pencroff said, “I think it’s better if we stay here all night instead of going on board.”
“You are right, Pencroff, and if the proprietor returns he will not be sorry, perhaps, to find the place occupied.”
“You're right, Pencroff, and if the owner comes back, he might not mind finding the place taken.”
“He won’t come back, though,” said the sailor, shaking his head.
“He’s not coming back, though,” said the sailor, shaking his head.
“Do you think he has left the island?”
“Do you think he’s left the island?”
“If he had left the island he would have taken these things with him. You know how much a shipwrecked person would be attached to these objects. No, no,” repeated the sailor, in the tone of a man perfectly convinced; “no, he has not left the island. He is surely here.”
“If he had left the island, he would have taken these things with him. You know how attached a shipwrecked person would be to these objects. No, no,” the sailor repeated, sounding completely sure; “no, he hasn’t left the island. He’s definitely here.”
“Alive?”
“Is it alive?”
“Alive or dead. But if he is dead he could not have buried himself, I am sure, and we will at least find his remains.”
“Alive or dead. But if he’s dead, he couldn’t have buried himself, I’m sure, and we’ll at least find his remains.”
It was therefore agreed to pass the night in this house, and a supply of wood in the corner gave them the means of heating it. The door having been closed, the three explorers, seated upon a bench, spoke little, but remained deep in thought. They were in the mood to accept anything that might happen, and they listened eagerly for any sound from without. If the door had suddenly opened and a man had stood before them, they would not have been much surprised, in spite of all the evidence of desolation throughout the house; and their hands were ready to clasp the hands of this man, of this shipwrecked one, of this unknown friend whose friends awaited him.
It was agreed to spend the night in this house, and a stack of wood in the corner provided them with a way to keep it warm. With the door shut, the three explorers sat on a bench, speaking little but lost in their own thoughts. They were open to whatever might happen next and listened intently for any sound from outside. If the door had suddenly swung open and a man had appeared, they wouldn't have been too surprised, despite the signs of abandonment throughout the house; their hands were ready to reach out to this man, this shipwrecked individual, this unknown friend whose loved ones were waiting for him.
But no sound was heard, the door did not open, and the hours passed by.
But no sound was heard, the door didn’t open, and the hours went by.
The night seemed interminable to the sailor and his companions. Herbert, alone, slept for two hours, as at his age, sleep is a necessity. All were anxious to renew the search of the day before, and to explore the innermost recesses of the islet. Pencroff’s conclusions were certainly just, since the house and its contents had been abandoned. They determined, therefore, to search for the remains of its inhabitant, and to give them Christian burial.
The night felt endless to the sailor and his friends. Herbert, on his own, managed to sleep for two hours because, at his age, he really needed it. Everyone was eager to continue the search from the previous day and to investigate the deepest corners of the islet. Pencroff's conclusions were definitely correct, as the house and its belongings had been deserted. They decided to look for the remains of its former occupant and to give them a proper burial.
As soon as it was daylight they began to examine the house. It was prettily situated under a small hill, on which grew several fine gum trees. Before it a large space had been cleared, giving a view over the sea. A small lawn, surrounded by a dilapidated fence, extended to the bank of the little stream. The house had evidently been built from planks taken from a ship. It seemed likely that a ship had been thrown upon the island, that all or at least one of the crew had been saved, and that this house had been built from the wreck. This was the more probable, as Spilett, in going round the dwelling, saw on one of the planks these half-effaced letters:—
As soon as it got light, they started to look over the house. It was nicely located under a small hill with several beautiful gum trees growing on it. In front of it, a large area had been cleared, offering a view of the sea. A small lawn, surrounded by a rundown fence, stretched down to the bank of a little stream. The house clearly appeared to be made from planks taken from a ship. It seemed likely that a ship had been wrecked on the island, that all or at least some of the crew had been saved, and that this house had been built from the remains of the wreck. This was even more plausible since Spilett, while walking around the house, noticed some half-worn letters on one of the planks:—
BR ... TAN ... A.
BR ... TAN ... A.
“Britannia,” exclaimed Pencroff, who had been called by the reporter to look at it; “that is a common name among ships, and I cannot say whether it is English or American. However, it don’t matter to what country the man belongs, we will save him, if he is alive. But before we begin our search let us go back to the Good Luck.”
“Britannia,” shouted Pencroff, who had been called over by the reporter to take a look; “that’s a common name for ships, and I can’t tell if it’s English or American. But it doesn’t matter where the guy is from, we’ll save him if he’s alive. But before we start our search, let’s head back to the Good Luck.”
Pencroff had been seized with a sort of anxiety about his sloop. Supposing the island was inhabited, and some one had taken it—but he shrugged his shoulders at this unlikely thought. Nevertheless the sailor was not unwilling to go on board to breakfast. The route already marked was not more than a mile in length, and they started on their walk, looking carefully about them in the woods and underbrush, through which ran hundreds of pigs and goats.
Pencroff was feeling a bit anxious about his sloop. What if the island had people on it and someone had taken it? He shook off the thought since it seemed unlikely. Still, the sailor was up for going on board for breakfast. The path they had marked out was just under a mile long, and they set off on their walk, keeping a close eye on the woods and underbrush where hundreds of pigs and goats roamed.
In twenty minutes the party reached the place where the Good Luck rode quietly at anchor. Pencroff gave a sigh of satisfaction.
In twenty minutes, the party arrived at the spot where the Good Luck was peacefully anchored. Pencroff let out a sigh of satisfaction.
After all, this boat was his baby, and it is a father’s right to be often anxious without reason.
After all, this boat was his pride and joy, and it's a father's right to be worried for no good reason.
All went on board and ate a hearty breakfast, so as not to want anything before a late dinner; then the exploration was renewed, and conducted with the utmost carefulness. As it was likely that the solitary inhabitant of this island was dead, the party sought rather to find his remains than any traces of him living. But during all the morning they were unable to find anything; if he was dead, some animal must have devoured his body.
Everyone boarded and enjoyed a hearty breakfast to avoid feeling hungry before a late dinner. Then the exploration began again, and it was done with the utmost caution. Since it was likely that the lone inhabitant of the island was dead, the group focused more on finding his remains than any signs of him being alive. However, all morning they couldn’t find anything; if he was dead, some animal must have eaten his body.
“We will leave to-morrow at daylight,” said Pencroff to his companions, who towards 2 o’clock were resting for a few moments under a group of trees.
“We will leave tomorrow at daylight,” said Pencroff to his companions, who around 2 o’clock were taking a short break under a group of trees.
“I think we need not hesitate to take those things which belonged to him?” queried Herbert.
“I think we shouldn't hesitate to take the things that belonged to him?” asked Herbert.
“I think not,” answered Spilett; “and these arms and tools will add materially to the stock at Granite House. If I am not mistaken, what is left of the lead and powder is worth a good deal.”
“I don’t think so,” replied Spilett; “and these arms and tools will significantly increase the supplies at Granite House. If I’m not mistaken, what’s left of the lead and powder is quite valuable.”
“And we must not forget to capture a couple of these pigs,” said Pencroff.
“And we shouldn’t forget to catch a few of these pigs,” said Pencroff.
“Nor to gather some seed,” added Herbert, “which will give us some of our own vegetables.”
“Nor to collect some seeds,” added Herbert, “which will give us some of our own vegetables.”
“Perhaps it would be better to spend another day here, in order to get together everything that we want,” suggested the reporter.
“Maybe it would be better to spend another day here to gather everything we need,” suggested the reporter.
“No, sir;” replied the sailor. “I want to get away to-morrow morning. The wind seems to be shifting to the west, and will be in our favor going back.”
“No, sir,” the sailor replied. “I want to leave tomorrow morning. It looks like the wind is shifting to the west, which will help us on our way back.”
“Then don’t let us lose any time,” said Herbert, rising.
“Then let’s not waste any time,” said Herbert, standing up.
“We will not,” replied Pencroff. “Herbert, you get the seed, and Spilett and I will chase the pigs, and although we haven’t Top, I think we will catch some.”
“We won’t,” replied Pencroff. “Herbert, you grab the seed, and Spilett and I will go after the pigs. Even though we don’t have Top, I think we can catch some.”
Herbert, therefore, followed the path which led to the cultivated part of the island, while the others plunged at once into the forest. Although the pigs were plenty they were singularly agile, and not in the humor to be captured. However, after half an hour’s chasing the hunters had captured a couple in their lair, when cries mingled with horrible hoarse sounds, having nothing human in them, were heard. Pencroff and Spilett sprang to their feet, regardless of the pigs, which escaped.
Herbert, therefore, took the path that led to the cultivated area of the island, while the others immediately dove into the forest. Although there were plenty of pigs, they were surprisingly quick and not in the mood to be caught. However, after half an hour of chasing, the hunters managed to catch a couple in their den when screams mixed with terrible, hoarse sounds, completely inhuman, echoed around them. Pencroff and Spilett jumped to their feet, ignoring the pigs that got away.
“It is Herbert!” cried the reporter.
“It’s Herbert!” yelled the reporter.
“Hurry!” cried the sailor, as the two ran with their utmost speed towards the place from whence the cries came.
“Hurry!” yelled the sailor, as the two ran as fast as they could toward the source of the cries.
They had need to hasten, for at a turn in the path they saw the lad prostrate beneath a savage, or perhaps a gigantic ape, who was throttling him.
They needed to hurry, because around a turn in the path, they saw the boy lying flat under a fierce, or maybe a huge, ape that was choking him.
To throw themselves on this monster and pinion him to the ground, dragging Herbert away, was the work of a moment. The sailor had herculean strength. Spilett, too, was muscular, and, in spite of the resistance of the monster, it was bound so that it could not move.
To tackle this monster and pin it down, pulling Herbert away, took no time at all. The sailor was incredibly strong. Spilett was also muscular, and despite the monster's struggle, it was restrained so it couldn't move.
“You are not wounded, Herbert?”
"You're not hurt, Herbert?"
“No, oh no.”
“No, no way.”
“Ah! if it had hurt you, this ape-”
“Ah! if this ape had hurt you-”
“But he is not an ape!” cried Herbert.
“But he isn’t an ape!” shouted Herbert.
At these words Pencroff and Spilett looked again at the object lying on the ground. In fact, it was not an ape, but a human being—a man! But what a man! He was a savage, in all the horrible acceptation of the word; and, what was more frightful, he seemed to have fallen to the last degree of brutishness.
At these words, Pencroff and Spilett looked again at the object lying on the ground. In fact, it wasn’t an ape, but a human being—a man! But what a man! He was a savage, in every terrible sense of the word; and, even more frightening, he seemed to have sunk to the lowest level of brutality.
Matted hair, tangled beard descending to his waist, his body naked, save for a rag about his loins, wild eyes, long nails, mahogany-colored skin, feet as hard as if they had been made of horn; such was the miserable creature which it was, nevertheless, necessary to call a man. But one might well question whether this body still contained a soul, or whether the low, brutish instinct alone survived.
Matted hair, a tangled beard reaching his waist, his body naked except for a rag around his waist, wild eyes, long nails, mahogany-colored skin, feet as tough as if they were made of horn; this was the pitiful being that, nonetheless, had to be called a man. But one might wonder if this body still held a soul, or if only the low, animalistic instinct remained.
“Are you perfectly sure that this is what has been a man?” questioned Pencroff of the reporter.
“Are you absolutely sure that this is what a man has become?” asked Pencroff of the reporter.
“Alas! there can be no doubt of it,” replied Spilett.
“Unfortunately! there’s no doubt about it,” replied Spilett.
“Can he be the person shipwrecked?” asked Herbert
“Could he be the person who was shipwrecked?” Herbert asked.
“Yes,” responded the reporter, “but the poor creature is no longer human.”
“Yes,” replied the reporter, “but the poor thing isn't human anymore.”
Spilett was right. Evidently, if the castaway had ever been civilized, isolation had made him a savage, a real creature of the woods. He gave utterance to hoarse sounds, from between teeth which were as sharp as those of animals living on raw flesh. Memory had doubtless long ago left him, and he had long since forgotten the use of arms and tools, and even how to make a fire. One could see that he was active and supple, but that his physical qualities had developed to the exclusion of his moral perception.
Spilett was correct. Clearly, if the castaway had ever been civilized, his time alone had turned him into a savage, a true creature of the woods. He made hoarse sounds from between teeth as sharp as those of animals that eat raw meat. His memory had probably left him long ago, and he had completely forgotten how to use tools and weapons, or even how to start a fire. It was clear that he was agile and flexible, but his physical abilities had developed at the expense of his moral awareness.
Spilett spoke to him, but he neither understood nor listened, and, looking him in the eye, the reporter could see that all intelligence had forsaken him. Nevertheless, the prisoner did not struggle or strive to break his bonds. Was he cowed by the presence of these men, whom he had once resembled? Was there in some corner of his brain a flitting remembrance which drew him towards humanity? Free, would he have fled or would he have remained? They did not know, and they did not put him to the proof. After having looked attentively at the miserable creature, Spilett said:—
Spilett talked to him, but he neither understood nor listened, and looking him in the eye, the reporter could see that all intelligence had left him. Still, the prisoner didn’t struggle or try to break free from his restraints. Was he intimidated by the presence of these men, whom he once resembled? Was there a fleeting memory somewhere in his mind that connected him to humanity? If he were free, would he have run away or stayed? They didn’t know, and they didn’t put him to the test. After studying the miserable creature closely, Spilett said:—
“What he is, what he has been, and what he will be; it is still our duty to take him to Lincoln Island.”
“What he is, what he’s been, and what he’ll be; it’s still our responsibility to take him to Lincoln Island.”
“Oh yes, yes,” exclaimed Herbert, “and perhaps we can, with care, restore to him some degree of intelligence.”
“Oh yes, yes,” exclaimed Herbert, “and maybe we can, with some effort, bring back a bit of his intelligence.”
“The soul never dies,” answered the reporter, “and it would be a great thing to bring back this creature of God’s making from his brutishness.”
“The soul never dies,” replied the reporter, “and it would be amazing to rescue this being created by God from his savagery.”
Pencroff shook his head doubtfully.
Pencroff shook his head skeptically.
“It is necessary to try at all events,” said the reporter, “humanity requires it of us.”
“It’s important to try no matter what,” said the reporter, “humanity demands it from us.”
“It was, indeed, their duty as civilized and Christian beings, and they well knew that Smith would approve of their course.
“It was certainly their duty as civilized and Christian individuals, and they knew that Smith would support their decision.
“Shall we leave him bound?” inquired the sailor.
“Should we leave him tied up?” asked the sailor.
“Perhaps if we unfasten his feet he will walk,” said Herbert.
“Maybe if we untie his feet, he’ll walk,” said Herbert.
“Well, let us try,” replied the sailor.
“Well, let's give it a shot,” replied the sailor.
And the cords binding the creature’s legs were loosened, although his arms were kept firmly bound. He rose without manifesting any desire to escape. His tearless eyes darted sharp glances upon the three men who marched beside him, and nothing denoted that he remembered being or having been like them. A wheezing sound escaped from his lips, and his aspect was wild, but he made no resistance.
And the ropes tying the creature’s legs were loosened, although its arms remained tightly bound. It got up without showing any wish to escape. Its tearless eyes shot quick glances at the three men walking beside it, and there was no sign that it remembered being like them. A wheezing sound came from its lips, and it looked wild, but it didn’t resist.
By the advice of the reporter, the poor wretch was taken to the house, where, perhaps, the sight of the objects in it might make some impression upon him. Perhaps a single gleam would awaken his sleeping consciousness, illuminate his darkened mind.
By the reporter's suggestion, the poor soul was taken to the house, where maybe the sight of the things inside would affect him in some way. Maybe a single spark would stir his dormant awareness and light up his clouded mind.
The house was near by, and in a few minutes they were there; but the prisoner recognized nothing—he seemed to have lost consciousness of everything. Could it be that this brutish state was due to his long imprisonment on the island? That, having come here a reasoning being, his isolation had reduced him to this state?
The house was close by, and in a few minutes they arrived; but the prisoner didn’t recognize anything—he seemed to have lost awareness of everything. Could this primitive state be a result of his long imprisonment on the island? That, having come here as a thinking person, his isolation had brought him down to this level?
The reporter thought that perhaps the sight of fire might affect him, and in a moment one of those lovely flames which attract even animals lit up the fireplace. The sight of this flame seemed at first to attract the attention of the unfortunate man, but very soon he ceased regarding it. Evidently, for the present at least, there was nothing to do but take him aboard the Good Luck, which was accordingly done. He was left in charge of Pencroff, while the two others returned to the island and brought over the arms and implements, a lot of seeds, some game, and two pairs of pigs which they had caught. Everything was put on board, and the sloop rode ready to hoist anchor as soon as the next morning’s tide would permit.
The reporter wondered if seeing the fire might affect him, and soon one of those beautiful flames that even captivated animals lit up the fireplace. At first, the sight of the flame seemed to catch the attention of the unfortunate man, but he quickly lost interest. Clearly, for now at least, there was nothing to do but take him aboard the Good Luck, which they did. He was left in Pencroff's care while the other two went back to the island to gather the weapons and tools, a bunch of seeds, some game, and two pairs of pigs they had caught. Everything was loaded onto the boat, and the sloop was ready to set sail as soon as the tide allowed in the morning.
The prisoner had been placed in the forward hold, where he lay calm, quiet, insensible, and mute. Pencroff offering him some cooked meat to eat, he pushed it away; but, on being shown one of the ducks which Herbert had killed, he pounced on it with bestial avidity and devoured it.
The prisoner was in the front hold, where he lay calm, quiet, unresponsive, and silent. When Pencroff offered him some cooked meat, he pushed it away; however, when shown one of the ducks that Herbert had killed, he lunged at it with animalistic eagerness and devoured it.
“You think he’ll be himself again?” asked the sailor, shaking his head.
“You think he’ll be back to normal?” asked the sailor, shaking his head.
“Perhaps,” replied the reporter. “It is not impossible that our attentions will react on him, since it is the isolation that has done this; and he will be alone no longer.”
“Maybe,” replied the reporter. “It’s not impossible that our attention will affect him, since it’s the isolation that caused this; and he won’t be alone anymore.”
“The poor fellow has doubtless been this way for a long time.”
“The poor guy has probably been like this for a long time.”
“Perhaps so.”
"Maybe."
“How old do you think he is?” asked the lad.
“How old do you think he is?” the kid asked.
“That is hard to say,” replied the reporter, “as his matted beard obscures his face; but he is no longer young, and I should say he was at least fifty years old.”
“That’s hard to tell,” replied the reporter, “since his tangled beard covers his face; but he’s not young anymore, and I’d say he’s at least fifty years old.”
“Have you noticed how his eyes are set deep in his head?”
“Have you noticed how his eyes are deeply set in his head?”
“Yes, but I think that they are more human than one would suspect from his general appearance.”
“Yes, but I think they are more human than you might expect from their overall appearance.”
“Well, we will see,” said Pencroff; “and I am curious to have Mr. Smith’s opinion of our savage. We went to find a human being, and we are bringing back a monster. Any how, one takes what he can get.”
“Well, we’ll see,” said Pencroff; “and I’m curious to hear Mr. Smith’s opinion about our savage. We set out to find a human, and we’re bringing back a monster. Anyway, you take what you can get.”
The night passed, and whether the prisoner slept or not he did not move, although he had been unbound. He was like one of those beasts that in the first moments of their capture submit, and to whom the rage returns later.
The night went by, and whether the prisoner slept or not, he didn't move, even though he had been untied. He was like one of those animals that, in the initial moments of their capture, give in, only to feel their fury come back later.
At daybreak the next day, the 17th, the change in the weather was as Pencroff had predicted. The wind hauled round to the northwest and favored the return of the Good Luck; but at the same time it had freshened, so as to make the sailing more difficult. At 5 o’clock the anchor was raised, Pencroff took a reef in the mainsail and headed directly towards home.
At dawn the next day, the 17th, the weather changed just as Pencroff had predicted. The wind shifted to the northwest, which helped the Good Luck return; however, it also picked up, making sailing tougher. At 5 o’clock, they raised the anchor, Pencroff reefed the mainsail, and steered straight toward home.
The first day passed without incident. The prisoner rested quietly in the forward cabin, and, as he had once been a sailor, the motion of the sloop produced upon him a sort of salutary reaction. Did it recall to him some remembrance of his former occupation? At least he rested tranquil, more astonished than frightened.
The first day went by without any problems. The prisoner rested quietly in the front cabin, and since he had once been a sailor, the movement of the sloop had a beneficial effect on him. Did it bring back memories of his old job? At least he rested peacefully, more amazed than scared.
On the 16th the wind freshened considerably, coming round more to the north, and therefore in a direction less favorable to the course of the Good Luck, which bounded over the waves. Pencroff was soon obliged to hold her nearer to the wind, and without saying so, he began to be anxious at the lookout ahead. Certainly, unless the—wind moderated, it would take much longer to go back than it had taken to come.
On the 16th, the wind picked up significantly, shifting more to the north, which wasn’t great for the Good Luck’s course as it bounced over the waves. Pencroff quickly had to steer her closer to the wind, and without mentioning it, he started to feel worried about what lay ahead. Clearly, unless the wind eased up, it would take much longer to return than it had to set out.
On the 17th they had been forty-eight hours out, and yet nothing indicated they were in the neighborhood of Lincoln Island. It was, moreover, impossible to reckon their course, or even to estimate the distance traversed, as the direction and the speed had been too irregular. Twenty-four hours later there was still no land in view. The wind was dead ahead, and an ugly sea running. On the 18th a huge wave struck the sloop, and had not the crew been lashed to the deck, they would have been swept overboard.
On the 17th, they had been at sea for forty-eight hours, and still, there was no sign they were near Lincoln Island. It was also impossible to determine their course or even estimate how far they had traveled, as the direction and speed had been too variable. Twenty-four hours later, there was still no land in sight. The wind was blowing directly against them, and the sea was rough. On the 18th, a massive wave hit the sloop, and if the crew hadn't been secured to the deck, they would have been thrown overboard.
On this occasion Pencroff and his companions, busy in clearing things away, received an unhoped-for assistance from the prisoner, who sprang from the hatchway as if his sailor instinct had returned to him, and breaking the rail by a, vigorous blow—with a spar, enabled the water on the deck to flow off more freely. Then, the boat cleared, without having said a word, he returned to his cabin.
On this occasion, Pencroff and his friends, actively clearing things away, received unexpected help from the prisoner, who jumped out from the hatch like his sailor instincts had kicked in. He broke the railing with a strong hit using a spar, allowing the water on the deck to drain off more easily. After that, the boat was cleared, and without saying a word, he went back to his cabin.
Nevertheless, the situation was bad, and the sailor had cause to believe himself lost upon this vast sea, without the possibility of regaining his course. The night of the 18th was dark and cold. But about 11 o’clock the wind lulled, the sea fell, and the sloop, less tossed about, moved more rapidly. None of the crew thought of sleep. They kept an eager lookout, as either Lincoln Island must be near at hand and they would discover it at daybreak, or the sloop had been drifted from her course by the currents, and it would be next to impossible to rectify the direction.
Nevertheless, the situation was dire, and the sailor had reason to believe he was lost on this vast sea, with no way to find his course again. The night of the 18th was dark and cold. But around 11 o’clock, the wind calmed, the sea settled, and the sloop, less tossed around, moved faster. None of the crew thought about sleeping. They kept a close watch, knowing that either Lincoln Island must be nearby and they would spot it at daybreak, or the sloop had been pushed off course by the currents, making it nearly impossible to correct the direction.
Pencroff, anxious to the last degree, did not, however, despair; but, seated at the helm, he tried to see through the thick darkness around him. Towards 2 o’clock he suddenly started up, crying:—“A light! a light!” It was indeed a bright light appearing twenty miles to—the northeast. Lincoln Island was there, and this light, evidently lit by Smith, indicated the direction to be followed.
Pencroff, extremely anxious, did not lose hope; instead, sitting at the helm, he tried to see through the thick darkness surrounding him. Around 2 o’clock, he suddenly jumped up, shouting, “A light! A light!” It was indeed a bright light appearing twenty miles to the northeast. Lincoln Island was there, and this light, clearly lit by Smith, showed the way to go.
Pencroff, who had been heading much too far towards the north, changed his course, and steered directly towards the light, which gleamed above the horizon like a star of the first magnitude.
Pencroff, who had been going way too far north, changed his direction and headed straight toward the light, which shone above the horizon like a bright star.
CHAPTER XXXVII.
THE RETURN-DISCUSSION—SMITH AND THE UNKNOWN—BALLOON HARBOR-THE DEVOTION OF THE ENGINEER-A TOUCHING EXPERIENCE-TEARS.
THE RETURN-DISCUSSION—SMITH AND THE UNKNOWN—BALLOON HARBOR-THE DEVOTION OF THE ENGINEER-A TOUCHING EXPERIENCE-TEARS.
At 7 o’clock the next morning the boat touched the shore at the mouth of the Mercy. Smith and Neb, who had become very anxious at the stormy weather and the prolonged absence of their companions, had climbed, at daylight, to Prospect Plateau, and had at length perceived the sloop in the distance.
At 7 o'clock the next morning, the boat arrived at the shore at the mouth of the Mercy. Smith and Neb, who had become quite worried about the stormy weather and the long absence of their friends, had climbed up to Prospect Plateau at dawn and finally spotted the sloop in the distance.
“Thank Heaven! There they are,” exclaimed Smith; while Neb, dancing with pleasure, turned towards his master, and, striking his hands together, cried, “Oh, my master!”-a more touching expression than, the first polished phrase.
“Thank goodness! There they are,” exclaimed Smith; while Neb, dancing with joy, turned towards his master and, clapping his hands together, cried, “Oh, my master!”—a more heartfelt expression than the first polished phrase.
The engineer’s first thought, on counting the number of persons on the deck of the Good Luck, was that Pencroff had found no one on Tabor Island, or that the unfortunate man had refused to exchange one prison for another.
The engineer’s first thought, upon counting the number of people on the deck of the Good Luck, was that Pencroff had found no one on Tabor Island, or that the unfortunate man had refused to swap one prison for another.
The engineer and Neb were on the beach at the moment the sloop arrived, and before the party had leaped ashore, Smith said:—
The engineer and Neb were on the beach when the sloop arrived, and before the group jumped ashore, Smith said:—
“We have been very anxious about you, my friends. Did anything happen to you?” “No, indeed; everything went finely,” replied Spilett. “We will tell you all about it.”
“We’ve been really worried about you, my friends. Did something happen to you?” “No, not at all; everything went well,” replied Spilett. “We’ll fill you in on everything.”
“Nevertheless, you have failed in your search, since you are all alone.”, “But, sir, there are four of us,” said the sailor.
“Still, you’ve failed in your search, since you’re all alone.”, “But, sir, there are four of us,” said the sailor.
“Have you found this person?”. “Yes.”
“Have you found this person?” “Yes.”
“And brought him back?” “Yes.” “Living?” “Where is he, and what is he, then?” “He is, or rather, he was a human being; and that is all, Cyrus, that we can say.”
“And brought him back?” “Yes.” “Alive?” “Where is he, and what is he, then?” “He is, or rather, he was a human being; and that’s all, Cyrus, that we can say.”
The engineer was thereupon, informed of everything that had happened; of the search, of the long-abandoned house, of the capture of the scarcely human inhabitant.
The engineer was then informed about everything that had happened: the search, the long-abandoned house, and the capture of the barely human inhabitant.
“And,” added Pencroff,” I don’t know whether we have done right in bringing him here.”
“And,” Pencroff added, “I’m not sure if it was a good idea to bring him here.”
“Most certainly you have done right,” replied the engineer.
“I'm sure you did the right thing,” replied the engineer.
“But the poor fellow has no sense at all.” “Not now, perhaps; in a few months, he will be as much a man as any of us. “Who knows what might happen to the last one of us, after living for a long time alone on this island? It is terrible to be all alone, my friends, and it is probable that solitude quickly overthrows reason, since you have found this poor being in such a condition.”
“But the poor guy has no sense at all.” “Not right now, maybe; in a few months, he’ll be just as much a man as any of us. Who knows what could happen to any of us after spending so much time alone on this island? It’s awful to be completely alone, my friends, and it’s likely that solitude can quickly mess with your mind, since you’ve found this poor soul in such a state.”
“But, Mr. Smith,” asked Herbert, “what makes you think that the brutishness of this man has come on within a little while?”
“But, Mr. Smith,” Herbert asked, “what makes you think that this man's brutality has developed so recently?”
“Because the paper we found had been recently written, and no one but this shipwrecked man could have written it.”
“Because the paper we found was recently written, and no one but this shipwrecked man could have written it.”
“Unless,” suggested Spilett, “it had been written by a companion of this man who has since died.”
“Unless,” suggested Spilett, “it was written by a companion of this man who has since passed away.”
“That is impossible, Spilett.”
"That's impossible, Spilett."
“Why so?”
“Why is that?”
“Because, then, the paper would have mentioned two persons instead of one.”
“Because then, the paper would have mentioned two people instead of one.”
Herbert briefly related the incident of the sea striking the sloop, and insisted that the prisoner must then have had a glimmer of his sailor instinct.
Herbert briefly recounted the incident of the sea hitting the sloop and insisted that the prisoner must have then had a hint of his sailor instinct.
“You are perfectly right, Herbert,” said the engineer, “to attach great importance to this fact. This poor man will not be incurable; despair has made him what he is. But here he will find his kindred, and if he still has any reason, we will save it.”
“You're absolutely right, Herbert,” said the engineer, “to emphasize the importance of this fact. This poor guy won't be beyond help; it's despair that has brought him to this point. But here he will find his people, and if he still has any will to fight, we will help him.”
Then, to Smith’s great pity and Neb’s wonderment, the man was brought up from the cabin of the sloop, and as soon as he was on land, he manifested a desire to escape. But Smith, approaching him, laid his hand authoritatively upon his shoulder and looked at him with infinite tenderness. Thereupon the poor wretch, submitting to a sort of instantaneous power, became quiet, his eyes fell, his head dropped forward, and he made no further resistance.
Then, to Smith’s great sadness and Neb’s amazement, the man was brought up from the cabin of the sloop, and as soon as he was on land, he showed a desire to flee. But Smith, approaching him, placed his hand firmly on his shoulder and looked at him with deep compassion. As a result, the poor guy, yielding to a sudden kind of strength, became calm, his eyes dropped, his head hung forward, and he didn’t resist anymore.
“Poor shipwrecked sailor,” murmured the reporter.
“Poor shipwrecked sailor,” the reporter whispered.
Smith regarded him attentively. To judge from his appearance, this miserable creature had little of the human left in him; but Smith caught in his glance, as the reporter had done, an almost imperceptible gleam of intelligence.
Smith watched him closely. From his looks, this pathetic being seemed to have lost most of his humanity; but Smith, just like the reporter, noticed a barely noticeable spark of intelligence in his eyes.
It was decided that the Unknown, as his new companions called him, should stay in one of the rooms of Granite House, from which he could not escape. He made no resistance to being conducted there, and with good care they might, perhaps, hope that some day he would prove a companion to them.
It was decided that the Unknown, as his new companions referred to him, should stay in one of the rooms in Granite House, from which he couldn’t escape. He didn’t resist being taken there, and with proper care, they might, hopefully, one day find that he would become a companion to them.
Neb hastened to prepare breakfast, for the voyagers were very hungry, and during the meal Smith made them relate in detail every incident of the cruise. He agreed with them in thinking that the name of the Britannia gave them reason to believe that the Unknown was either English or American; and, moreover, under all the growth of hair covering the man’s face, the engineer thought he recognized the features characteristic of an Anglo-Saxon.
Neb hurried to make breakfast since the travelers were really hungry, and during the meal, Smith asked them to share every detail of their journey. He agreed with them that the name Britannia made it likely that the Unknown was either English or American; plus, despite all the hair on the man’s face, the engineer thought he could see the features typical of an Anglo-Saxon.
“But, by the way, Herbert,” said the reporter, “you have never told us how you met this savage, and we know nothing, except that he would have strangled you, had we not arrived so opportunely.”
“But, by the way, Herbert,” said the reporter, “you’ve never told us how you met this savage, and we know nothing except that he would have strangled you if we hadn’t arrived just in time.”
“Indeed, I am not sure that I can tell just what happened,” replied Herbert. “I was, I think, gathering seeds, when I heard a tremendous noise in a high tree near by. I had hardly time to turn, when this unhappy creature, who had, doubtless, been hidden crouching in the tree, threw himself upon me; and, unless Mr. Spilett and Pencroff—”
“Honestly, I’m not entirely sure what happened,” replied Herbert. “I was, I think, collecting seeds when I heard a huge noise from a tree nearby. I barely had time to turn around when this poor creature, who must have been hiding in the tree, jumped at me; and, unless Mr. Spilett and Pencroff—”
“You were in great danger, indeed, my boy,” said Smith; “but perhaps, if this had not happened, this poor being would have escaped your search, and we would have been without another companion.”
“You were in real danger, my boy,” said Smith; “but maybe if this hadn’t happened, this poor soul would have avoided your search, and we would have been without another companion.”
“You expect, then, to make him a man again?” asked the reporter.
“You think you can turn him back into a man?” asked the reporter.
“Yes,” replied Smith.
“Yes,” Smith replied.
Breakfast ended, all returned to the shore and began unloading the sloop; and the engineer examined the arms and tools, but found nothing to establish the identity of the Unknown.
Breakfast finished, everyone went back to the shore and started unloading the sloop; the engineer checked the weapons and tools but found nothing to identify the Unknown.
The pigs were taken to the stables, to which they would soon become accustomed. The two barrels of powder and shot and the caps were a great acquisition, and it was determined to make a small powder magazine in the upper cavern of Granite House, where there would be no danger of an explosion. Meantime, since the pyroxyline answered very well, there was no present need to use this powder.
The pigs were brought to the stables, which they would soon get used to. The two barrels of powder, shot, and caps were a valuable addition, and it was decided to create a small powder magazine in the upper cavern of Granite House, where there would be no risk of an explosion. In the meantime, since the pyroxyline was working well, there was no immediate need to use this powder.
When the sloop was unloaded Pencroff said:—
When the sloop was unloaded, Pencroff said:—
“I think, Mr. Smith, that it would be better to put the Good Luck in a safe place.”
“I think, Mr. Smith, that it would be better to keep the Good Luck in a safe place.”
“Is it not safe enough at the mouth of the Mercy?”
“Isn't it safe enough at the entrance of the Mercy?”
“No, sir,” replied the sailor. “Most of the time she is aground on the sand, which strains her.”
“No, sir,” the sailor replied. “Most of the time, she’s stuck on the sand, which puts a lot of stress on her.”
“Could not she be moored out in the stream?”
“Could she be docked out in the river?”
“She could, but the place is unsheltered, and in an easterly wind I am afraid she would suffer from the seas.”
“She could, but the spot is exposed, and in an east wind, I worry she would struggle with the waves.”
“Very well; where do you want to put her?”
"Alright; where do you want to place her?"
“In Balloon Harbor,” replied the sailor. “It seems to me that that little inlet, hidden by the rocks, is just the place for her.”
“In Balloon Harbor,” replied the sailor. “It looks to me like that small inlet, hidden by the rocks, is just the right spot for her.”
“Isn’t it too far off?”
"Isn't it too far away?"
“No, it is only three miles from Granite House, and we have a good straight road there.”
“No, it's only three miles from Granite House, and we have a nice straight road to get there.”
“Have your way, Pencroff,” replied the engineer. “Nevertheless, I should prefer to have the sloop under our sight. We must, when we have time, make a small harbor.”
“Do what you want, Pencroff,” replied the engineer. “Still, I’d rather have the sloop in view. We need to, when we have the chance, create a small harbor.”
“Capital!” cried Pencroff. “A harbor with a light house, a breakwater, and a dry dock! Oh, indeed, sir, everything will be easy enough with you!”
“Capital!” exclaimed Pencroff. “A harbor with a lighthouse, a breakwater, and a dry dock! Oh, yes, sir, everything will be simple enough with you!”
“Always provided, my good man, that you assist me, as you do three fourths of the work.”
“Of course, my good man, as long as you help me, since you do three-fourths of the work.”
Herbert and the sailor went aboard the Good Luck, and set sail, and in a couple of hours the sloop rode quietly at anchor in the tranquil water of Balloon Harbor.
Herbert and the sailor boarded the Good Luck and set off. In a couple of hours, the sloop was peacefully anchored in the calm waters of Balloon Harbor.
During the first few days that the Unknown was at Granite House, had he given any indication of a change in his savage nature? Did not a brighter light illumine the depths of his intelligence? Was not, in short, his reason returning to him? Undoubtedly, yes; and Smith and Spilett questioned whether this reason had ever entirely forsaken him.
During the first few days that the Unknown was at Granite House, did he show any signs of a shift in his wild nature? Was there not a clearer light shining on the depths of his intelligence? Was his reasoning not, in fact, coming back to him? Definitely, yes; and Smith and Spilett wondered whether this reasoning had ever completely left him.
At first this man, accustomed to the air and liberty which he had had in Tabor Island, was seized with fits of passion, and there was danger of his throwing himself out of one of the windows of Granite House. But little by little he grew more quiet, and he was allowed to move about without restraint.
At first, this man, used to the freedom and fresh air he had on Tabor Island, was overwhelmed with anger, and there was a risk of him jumping out of one of the windows of Granite House. However, he gradually calmed down, and he was permitted to move around without any restrictions.
Already forgetting his carnivorous instincts, he accepted a less bestial nourishment, and cooked food did not produce in him the sentiment of disgust which he had shown on board the Good Luck.
Already forgetting his predatory instincts, he accepted a less savage food, and cooked meals no longer made him feel the disgust he had experienced on the Good Luck.
Smith had taken advantage of a time when the man was asleep to cut the hair and beard which had grown like a mane about his face, and had given him such a savage aspect. He had also been clothed more decently, and the result was that the Unknown appeared more like a human being, and it seemed as if the expression of his eyes was softened. Certainly, sometimes, when intelligence was visible, the expression of this man had a sort of beauty.
Smith had waited until the man was asleep to trim the hair and beard that had grown wildly around his face, giving him a fierce look. He had also dressed him more appropriately, and as a result, the Unknown looked more human, and his eyes seemed to have a softer expression. Often, when a hint of intelligence showed, this man's expression held a certain beauty.
Every day, Smith made a point of passing some hours in his company. He worked beside him, and occupied himself in various ways to attract his attention. It would suffice, if a single ray of light illuminated his reason, if a single remembrance crossed his mind. Neither did the engineer neglect to speak in a loud voice, so as to penetrate by both sound and sight to the depths of this torpid intelligence. Sometimes one or another of the party joined the engineer, and they usually talked of such matters pertaining to the sea as would be likely to interest the man. At times the Unknown gave a sort of vague attention to what was said, and soon the colonists began to think that he partly understood them. Again his expression would be dolorous, proving that he suffered inwardly. Nevertheless, he did not speak, although they thought, at times, from his actions, that words were about to pass his lips.
Every day, Smith made it a point to spend several hours with him. He worked alongside him and found various ways to catch his attention. It would be enough if just one spark of understanding lit up his mind or if just one memory crossed his thoughts. The engineer also made sure to speak loudly, trying to reach the depths of his sluggish intellect through both sound and sight. Sometimes, one or another of the group would join the engineer, and they would usually discuss topics related to the sea that might interest the man. Occasionally, the Unknown would seem to pay some vague attention to what was being said, and soon the colonists began to believe he partially understood them. However, at times, his expression would be pained, showing that he was suffering inside. Still, he didn’t speak, although there were moments when it seemed his actions suggested that words were on the verge of coming out.
The poor creature was very calm and sad. But was not the calmness only on the surface, and the sadness the result of his confinement? They could not yet say. Seeing only certain objects and in a limited space, always with the colonists, to whom he had become accustomed, having no desire to satisfy, better clothed and better fed, it was natural that his physical nature should soften little by little; but was he imbued with the new life, or, to use an expression justly applicable to the case, was he only tamed, as an animal in the presence of its master? This was the important question Smith was anxious to determine, and meantime he did not wish to be too abrupt with his patient. For to him, the unknown was but a sick person. Would he ever be a convalescent?
The poor creature was very calm and sad. But was that calmness just on the surface, and was the sadness a result of his confinement? They couldn't say yet. Seeing only certain objects in a limited space, always with the colonists, whom he had grown used to, without any desires to fulfill, better dressed and better fed, it was natural for his physical nature to gradually soften. But was he experiencing new life, or, to put it another way, was he just tamed like an animal in front of its master? This was the important question that Smith was eager to answer, and in the meantime, he didn’t want to be too harsh with his patient. To him, the unknown was just a sick person. Would he ever recover?
Therefore, the engineer watched him unceasingly. How he laid in wait for his reason, so to speak, that he might lay hold of it.
Therefore, the engineer watched him constantly. How he waited for his rationale, so to speak, so that he could grasp it.
The colonists followed with strong interest all the phases of this cure undertaken by Smith. All aided him in it, and all, save perhaps the incredulous Pencroff, came to share in his belief and hope.
The colonists closely watched every step of the cure that Smith was working on. Everyone helped him with it, and everyone, except maybe the skeptical Pencroff, began to share in his belief and hope.
The submission of the Unknown was entire, and it seemed as if he showed for the engineer, whose influence over him was apparent, a sort of attachment, and Smith resolved now to test it by transporting him to another scene, to that ocean which he had been accustomed to look upon, to the forest border, which would recall those woods where he had lived such a life!”
The submission of the Unknown was complete, and it seemed like he had a kind of bond with the engineer, whose influence over him was clear. Smith decided to test this bond by taking him to a different place, to the ocean he was used to seeing, to the edge of the forest, which would remind him of the woods where he had lived such a life!
“But,” said Spilett, “can we hope that once at liberty, he will not escape?”
“But,” Spilett said, “can we hope that once he’s free, he won’t run away?”
“We must make the experiment,” replied the engineer.
“We have to try it out,” replied the engineer.
“All right,” said Pencroff. “You will see, when this fellow snuffs the fresh air and sees the coast clear, if he don’t make his legs spin!”
“All right,” said Pencroff. “You'll see, when this guy gets a whiff of fresh air and sees that the coast is clear, he’ll really take off!”
“I don’t think it,” replied the engineer.
“I don’t believe that,” replied the engineer.
“We will try, any how,” said Spilett.
"We'll give it a shot," said Spilett.
It was the 30th of October, and the Unknown had been a prisoner for nine days. It was a beautiful, warm, sunshiny day. Smith and Pencroff went to the room of the Unknown, whom they found at the window gazing out at the sky.
It was October 30th, and the Unknown had been a prisoner for nine days. It was a beautiful, warm, sunny day. Smith and Pencroff went to the Unknown's room, where they found him at the window looking out at the sky.
“Come, my friend,” said the engineer to him.
“Come on, my friend,” said the engineer to him.
The Unknown rose immediately. His eye was fixed on Smith, whom he followed; and the sailor, little confident in the results of the experiment, walked with him.
The Unknown stood up right away. His gaze was locked on Smith, who he followed; and the sailor, not very sure about how the experiment would turn out, walked alongside him.
Having reached the door, they made him get into the elevator, at the foot of which the rest of the party were waiting. The basket descended, and in a few seconds all were standing together on the shore.
Having reached the door, they made him get into the elevator, where the rest of the group was waiting. The lift descended, and in a few seconds, they were all standing together on the shore.
The colonists moved off a little distance from the Unknown, so as to leave him quite at liberty. He made some steps forward towards the sea, and his face lit up with pleasure, but he made no effort to escape. He looked curiously at the little waves, which, broken by the islet, died away on the shore.
The colonists moved a short distance away from the Unknown, giving him plenty of space. He took a few steps forward toward the sea, and his face brightened with delight, but he didn’t try to run away. He looked curiously at the small waves, which, interrupted by the islet, faded away on the shore.
“It is not, indeed, the ocean,” remarked Spilett, “and it is possible that this does not give him the idea of escaping.”
“It’s not the ocean,” Spilett said, “and it’s likely that this doesn’t make him think about escaping.”
“Yes,” replied Smith, “we must take him to the plateau on the edge of the forest. There the experiment will be more conclusive.”
“Yes,” replied Smith, “we need to take him to the plateau at the edge of the forest. That’s where the experiment will be more conclusive.”
“There he cannot get away, since the bridges are all raised,” said Neb.
“There he can’t escape, since all the bridges are up,” said Neb.
“Oh, he is not the man to be troubled by such a brook as Glycerine Creek; he could leap it at a bound,” returned Pencroff.
“Oh, he’s not the type to be bothered by a little stream like Glycerine Creek; he could jump over it in one go,” replied Pencroff.
“We will see presently,” said Smith, who kept his eye fixed on his patient.
“We'll see soon,” said Smith, who kept his eyes on his patient.
And thereupon all proceeded towards Prospect Plateau. Having reached the place they encountered the outskirts of the forest, with its leaves trembling in the wind, The Unknown seemed to drink in with eagerness the perfume in the air, and a long sigh escaped from his breast.
And then everyone headed towards Prospect Plateau. When they arrived at the spot, they came to the edge of the forest, its leaves quivering in the breeze. The Unknown appeared to enthusiastically inhale the fragrance in the air, and a long sigh escaped from his chest.
The colonists stood some paces back, ready to seize him if he attempted to escape.
The colonists stayed a few steps back, prepared to catch him if he tried to run away.
The poor creature was upon the point of plunging in the creek that separated him from the forest; he placed himself ready to spring—then all at once he turned about, dropping his arms beside him, and tears coursed down his cheeks.
The poor creature was about to jump into the creek that separated him from the forest; he got ready to spring—then suddenly he turned around, letting his arms drop to his sides, and tears streamed down his face.
“Ah!” cried Smith, “you will be a man again, since you weep!”
“Ah!” cried Smith, “you’ll be a man again, since you’re crying!”
CHAPTER XXXVIII
A MYSTERY TO BE SOLVED—THE FIRST WORDS OF THE UNKNOWN—TWELVE YEARS ON THE ISLAND—CONFESSIONS—DISAPPEARANCE—SMITH’S CONFIDENCE —BUILDING A WIND-MILL—THE FIRST BREAD—AN ACT OF DEVOTION—HONEST HANDS.
A MYSTERY TO BE SOLVED—THE FIRST WORDS OF THE UNKNOWN—TWELVE YEARS ON THE ISLAND—CONFESSIONS—DISAPPEARANCE—SMITH’S CONFIDENCE —BUILDING A WINDMILL—THE FIRST BREAD—AN ACT OF DEVOTION—HONEST HANDS.
Yes, the poor creature had wept. Some remembrance had flashed across his spirit, and, as Smith had said, he would be made a man through his tears.
Yes, the poor creature had cried. Some memory had crossed his mind, and, as Smith had said, he would become a man through his tears.
The colonists left him for some time, withdrawing themselves, so that he could feel perfectly at liberty; but he showed no inclination to avail himself of this freedom, and Smith soon decided to take him back to Granite House.
The colonists left him for a while, stepping away so that he could feel completely free; however, he didn't seem interested in taking advantage of this freedom, and Smith soon decided to bring him back to Granite House.
Two days after this occurrence, the Unknown showed a disposition to enter little by little into the common life. It was evident that he heard, that he understood, but it was equally evident that he manifested a strange disinclination to speak to them. Pencroff, listening at his room, heard these words escape him:—
Two days after this happened, the Unknown seemed willing to gradually engage in everyday life. It was clear that he was listening and understood, but it was also clear that he showed a strange reluctance to talk to them. Pencroff, eavesdropping from his room, heard him say:—
“No! here! I! never!”
“No! Not here! Never!”
The sailor reported this to his companions, and Smith said:—
The sailor told his friends about this, and Smith said:—
“There must be some sad mystery here.”
“There has to be some sad mystery here.”
The Unknown had begun to do some little chores, and to work in the garden. When he rested, which was frequent, he seemed entirely self-absorbed; but, on the advice of the engineer, the others respected the silence, which he seemed desirous of keeping. If one of the colonists approached him he recoiled, sobbing as if overcome. Could it be by remorse? or, was it, as Spilett once suggested:—
The Unknown had started doing some chores and working in the garden. Whenever he took a break, which happened often, he appeared completely lost in his thoughts; however, following the engineer's advice, the others respected his need for silence. If one of the colonists came near him, he would flinch, sobbing as if he were overwhelmed. Could it be due to guilt? Or was it, as Spilett once suggested:—
“If he does not speak I believe it is because he has something on his mind too terrible to mention.”
“If he doesn’t speak, I think it’s because he has something on his mind that’s too awful to bring up.”
Some days later the Unknown was working on the plantation, when, of a sudden, he stopped and let his spade fall, and Smith, who was watching him from a distance, saw that he was weeping again. An irresistible pity drew the engineer to the poor fellow’s side; and, touching his arm lightly,
Some days later, the Unknown was working on the plantation when, suddenly, he paused and dropped his spade. Smith, watching from a distance, noticed that he was crying again. An overwhelming sense of pity compelled the engineer to approach the poor man, and, lightly touching his arm,
“My friend,” said he.
“My friend,” he said.
The Unknown tried to look away, and when Smith sought to take his hand he drew back quickly.
The Unknown tried to look away, and when Smith reached for his hand, he quickly pulled back.
“My friend,” said Smith, with decision, “I wish you to look at me.”
“Hey, my friend,” Smith said firmly, “I want you to look at me.”
The Unknown obeyed, raising his eyes and regarding the other as one does who is under the influence of magnetism. At first he wished to break away, then his whole expression changed; his eyes flashed, and, unable longer to contain himself, he muttered some incoherent words. Suddenly he crossed his arms, and in a hollow voice:—
The Unknown complied, lifting his gaze and looking at the other person as if he were under a spell. Initially, he wanted to pull away, but then his entire demeanor shifted; his eyes lit up, and, unable to hold back any longer, he mumbled some jumbled phrases. Suddenly, he folded his arms and, in a deep voice, said:—
“Who are you?” he demanded.
“Who are you?” he asked.
“Men shipwrecked as you have been,” replied the engineer, greatly moved. “We have brought you here among your kindred.”
“Men shipwrecked like you have been,” replied the engineer, deeply affected. “We’ve brought you here with your family.”
“My kindred! I have none!
"My family! I have none!"
“You are among friends—,”
"You’re among friends—,”
“Friends! I! Friends!” cried the Unknown, hiding his face in his hands. “Oh, no! never! Leave me! leave me!” and he rushed to the brink of the plateau overlooking the sea, and stood there, motionless, for a long time.
“Friends! It’s me! Friends!” cried the Unknown, covering his face with his hands. “Oh, no! Never! Leave me! Leave me!” He then rushed to the edge of the plateau that overlooked the sea and stood there, motionless, for a long time.
Smith had rejoined his companions and had related to them what had happened.
Smith had reunited with his friends and shared what had happened.
“There certainly is a mystery in this man’s life,” said Spilett, “and it seems as if his first human sensation was remorse.”
“There’s definitely a mystery in this man’s life,” said Spilett, “and it feels like his first human emotion was remorse.”
“I don’t understand what kind of a man we have brought back,” says the sailor. “He has secrets—”
“I don’t get what kind of guy we’ve brought back,” says the sailor. “He has secrets—”
“Which we will respect,” answered the engineer, quickly. “If he has committed some fault he has cruelly expiated it, and in our sight it is absolved.”
“Which we will respect,” the engineer replied swiftly. “If he has made a mistake, he has paid for it dearly, and in our eyes, it is forgiven.”
For two hours the Unknown remained upon the shore, evidently under the influence of remembrances which brought back to him all his past, a past which, doubtless, was hateful enough, and the colonists, though keeping watch upon him, respected his desire to be alone.
For two hours, the Unknown stayed on the shore, clearly caught up in memories that brought back his entire past, a past that was likely pretty miserable. The colonists, while keeping an eye on him, honored his wish to be alone.
Suddenly he seemed to have taken a resolution, and he returned to the engineer. His eyes were red with the traces of tears, and his face wore an expression of deep humility. He seemed apprehensive, ashamed, humiliated, and his looks were fixed on the ground.
Suddenly, he seemed to have made a decision, and he went back to the engineer. His eyes were red from tears, and his face showed deep humility. He looked anxious, ashamed, and humiliated, keeping his gaze on the ground.
“Sir,” said he, “are you and your companions English?”
“Sir,” he said, “are you and your friends English?”
“No,” replied Smith, “we are Americans.”
“No,” replied Smith, “we're U.S. citizens.”
“Ah!” murmured the Unknown, “I am glad of that.”
“Ah!” whispered the Unknown, “I’m glad to hear that.”
“And what are you, my friend?” asked the engineer.
“And what are you, my friend?” the engineer asked.
“English,” he responded, as if these few words had cost him a great effort. He rushed to the shore, and traversed its length to the mouth of the Mercy, in a state of extreme agitation.
“English,” he replied, as if those few words had taken a lot of effort. He hurried to the shore and walked its length to the mouth of the Mercy, filled with intense agitation.
Having, at one place, met Herbert, he stopped, and in a choking voice, accosted him:—
Having met Herbert in one spot, he stopped and, with a trembling voice, addressed him:—
“What month is it?”
"What month is it now?"
“November,” replied the lad.
"November," the kid replied.
“And what year?”
"And what year is it?"
“1866.”
“1866.”
“Twelve years! Twelve years!” he cried, and then turned quickly away.
“Twelve years! Twelve years!” he shouted, and then quickly turned away.
Herbert related this incident to the others.
Herbert shared this incident with the others.
“The poor creature knew neither the month nor the year,” remarked Spilett.
“The poor creature didn’t know what month or year it was,” Spilett remarked.
“And he had been twelve years on the island, when we found him.”
“And he had been on the island for twelve years when we found him.”
“Twelve years,” said Smith. “Twelve years of isolation, after a wicked life, perhaps; that would indeed affect a man’s reason.”
“Twelve years,” said Smith. “Twelve years of being isolated, maybe after a tough life; that would definitely mess with a person’s mind.”
“I cannot help thinking,” observed Pencroff, “that this man was not wrecked on that island, but that he has been left there for some crime.”
“I can’t help but think,” Pencroff remarked, “that this guy wasn’t wrecked on that island, but that he was left there for some kind of crime.”
“You may be right, Pencroff,” replied the reporter, “and if that is the case, it is not impossible that whoever left him there may return for him some day.”
“You might be right, Pencroff,” the reporter responded, “and if that’s the case, it’s possible that whoever left him there could come back for him someday.”
“And they would not find him,” said Herbert.
“And they won’t find him,” said Herbert.
“But, then,” exclaimed Pencroff, “he would want to go back, and—”
“But, then,” exclaimed Pencroff, “he would want to go back, and—”
“My friends,” interrupted Smith, “do not let us discuss this question till we know what we are talking about. I believe that this unhappy man has suffered, and that he has paid bitterly for his faults, whatever they may have been, and that he is struggling with the need of opening his heart to someone. Do not provoke him to speak; he will tell us of his own accord some day, and when we have learned all, we will see what course it will be necessary to follow. He alone can tell us if he has more than the hope, the certainty of some day being restored to his country, but I doubt it.”
“My friends,” interrupted Smith, “let's not discuss this issue until we really understand it. I believe this unfortunate man has suffered and has paid dearly for his mistakes, whatever they were, and he’s struggling with the need to open up to someone. Don’t push him to speak; he will share in his own time, and when we know everything, we’ll see what actions we need to take. Only he can tell us if he has more than just the hope, the certainty of one day returning to his country, but I doubt it.”
“Why?” asked the reporter.
"Why?" the reporter asked.
“Because, had he been sure of being delivered after a fixed time, he would have awaited the hour of his deliverance, and not have thrown that paper in the sea. No, it is more likely that be was condemned to die upon this island, to never look upon his kind again.”
“Because if he had been certain that he would be rescued after a certain time, he would have waited for the moment of his rescue and wouldn’t have thrown that paper into the sea. No, it’s more likely that he was meant to die on this island, to never see another person again.”
“But there still is something which I cannot understand,” said the sailor.
“But there’s still something I don’t understand,” said the sailor.
“What is that?”
"What's that?"
“Why, if this man had been left on Tabor Island twelve years ago, it seems probable that he must have been in this savage condition for a long time.”
“Why, if this guy had been left on Tabor Island twelve years ago, it seems likely that he must have been in this wild state for a long time.”
“That is probable,” replied the engineer.
"That seems likely," replied the engineer.
“And, therefore, it is a long time since he wrote that paper.”
“And so, it’s been a long time since he wrote that paper.”
“Doubtless—and yet that paper seemed to have been written recently—”
“Surely—and yet that paper looked like it was written recently—”
“Yes, and how account for the bottle taking so many years in coming from Tabor Island here?”
“Yes, and how do you explain the bottle taking so many years to get here from Tabor Island?”
“It is not absolutely impossible,” responded the reporter. “Could not it have been in the neighborhood of the island for a long time?”
“It’s not completely impossible,” replied the reporter. “Couldn’t it have been around the island for a while?”
“And have remained floating? No,” answered the sailor, “for sooner or later it would have been dashed to pieces on the rocks.”
“And stayed afloat? No,” the sailor replied, “because eventually it would have crashed into the rocks.”
“It would, indeed,” said Smith, thoughtfully.
“It definitely would,” Smith said, deep in thought.
“And, moreover,” continued the sailor, if the paper had been enclosed in the bottle for a long time, it would have been injured by the moisture, whereas, it was not damaged in the least.”
“And, furthermore,” continued the sailor, “if the paper had been in the bottle for a long time, it would have been harmed by the moisture, yet it’s not damaged at all.”
The sailor’s remark was just, and, moreover, this paper, recently written, gave the situation of the island with an exactness which implied a knowledge of hydrography, such as a simple sailor could not have.
The sailor’s comment was accurate, and, in addition, this recently written document provided the exact location of the island, indicating a level of hydrographic knowledge that a regular sailor wouldn’t possess.
“There is, as I said before, something inexplicable in all this,” said the engineer, “but do not let us urge our new companion to speak, When he wishes it we will be ready to listen.”
“There’s something inexplicable about all this,” said the engineer, “but let’s not push our new friend to talk. When he’s ready, we’ll be here to listen.”
For several days after this the Unknown neither spoke nor left the plateau. He worked incessantly, digging in the garden apart from the colonists, and at meal times, although he was often asked to join them, he remained alone, eating but a few uncooked vegetables. At night, instead of returning to his room in Granite House, he slept under the trees, or hid himself, if the weather was bad, in some hollow of the rocks. Thus he returned again to that manner of life in which he had lived when he had no other shelter than the forests of Tabor Island, and all endeavor to make him modify this life having proved fruitless, the colonists waited patiently. But the moment came when, irresistibly and as if involuntarily forced from him by his conscience, the terrible avowals were made.
For several days after this, the Unknown neither spoke nor left the plateau. He worked constantly, digging in the garden away from the colonists, and at mealtimes, even though he was often invited to join them, he stayed alone, eating just a few raw vegetables. At night, instead of going back to his room in Granite House, he slept under the trees, or if the weather was bad, he hid in a rock hollow. This brought him back to the way of life he had when he had no other shelter than the forests of Tabor Island, and all efforts to change this lifestyle had proven fruitless, so the colonists waited patiently. But the moment came when, irresistibly and seemingly involuntarily, he was compelled by his conscience to make the awful confessions.
At dusk on the evening of the 10th of November, as the colonists were seated in the arbor, the Unknown stood suddenly before them. His eyes glowed, and his whole appearance wore again the savage aspect of former days. He stood there, swayed by some terrible emotion, his teeth chattering like those of a person in a fever. The colonists were astounded. “What was the matter with him? Was the sight of his fellow-creatures unendurable? Had he had enough of this honest life? Was he homesick for his brutish life? One would have thought so, hearing him give utterance to these incoherent phrases:-
At dusk on the evening of November 10th, as the colonists relaxed in the arbor, the Unknown suddenly appeared before them. His eyes glowed, and he looked wild, resembling the savage days of the past. He stood there, overwhelmed by some intense emotion, his teeth chattering like someone with a fever. The colonists were shocked. “What was wrong with him? Was being around people too much for him? Had he tired of this decent life? Was he longing for his primal existence? One would think so, judging by the incoherent words he spoke:-
“Why am I here? By what right did you drag me from my island? Is there any bond between you and me? Do you know who I am—what I have done—why I was there—alone? And who has told you that I was not abandoned—that I was not condemned to die there? Do you know my past? Do you know whether I have not robbed, murdered—if I am not a miserable—a wicked being—fit to live like a wild beast—far from all—say—do you know?”
“Why am I here? By what right did you bring me from my island? Is there any connection between us? Do you know who I am—what I’ve done—why I was there—alone? And who told you that I wasn’t abandoned—that I wasn’t sentenced to die there? Do you know my history? Do you know whether I haven’t robbed, murdered—if I’m not a wretched—a wicked person—worthy of living like a wild animal—far from everyone—tell me—do you know?”
The colonists listened silently to the unhappy creature, from whom these half avowals came in spite of himself. Smith, wishing to soothe him, would have gone to him, but the Unknown drew back quickly.
The colonists listened in silence to the distressed figure, who made these half-hearted confessions against his will. Smith, wanting to comfort him, tried to approach, but the Unknown quickly stepped back.
“No! no!” he cried. “One word only—am I free?”.
“No! No!” he exclaimed. “Just one word—am I free?”
“You are free,” replied the engineer.
“You're free,” said the engineer.
“Then, good-bye!” he cried, rushing off.
“Then, goodbye!” he shouted, running off.
Neb, Pencroff, and Herbert ran to the border of the wood, but they returned alone.
Neb, Pencroff, and Herbert rushed to the edge of the woods, but they came back by themselves.
“We must let him have his own way,” said the engineer.
“We should let him do things his way,” said the engineer.
“He will never come back,” exclaimed Pencroff.
“He will never come back,” shouted Pencroff.
“He will return,” replied the engineer.
“He will come back,” replied the engineer.
And after that conversation many days passed, but Smith—was it a presentiment—persisted in the fixed idea that the unhappy man would return sooner or later.
And after that conversation, many days went by, but Smith—was it a feeling?—kept holding onto the idea that the unfortunate man would come back sooner or later.
“It is the last struggle of this rude nature, which is touched by remorse, and which would be terrified by a new isolation.”
“It is the final battle of this rough nature, which feels remorse and would be scared by a new loneliness.”
In the meantime, work of all kinds was continued, both on Prospect Plateau and at the corral, where Smith proposed to make a farm. It is needless to say that the seeds brought from Tabor Island had been carefully sown. The plateau was a great kitchen-garden, well laid out and enclosed, which kept the colonists always busy. As the plants multiplied, it was necessary to increase the size of the beds, which threatened to become fields, and to take the place of the grass land. But as forage abounded in other parts of the island, there was no fear of the onagers having to be placed on rations; and it was also better to make Prospect Plateau, defended by its belt of creeks, a garden of this kind, and to extend the fields, which required no protection, beyond the belt.
In the meantime, all kinds of work continued, both on Prospect Plateau and at the corral, where Smith planned to create a farm. It's obvious that the seeds brought from Tabor Island had been carefully planted. The plateau served as a large kitchen garden, well organized and enclosed, keeping the colonists busy all the time. As the plants grew, it became necessary to expand the beds, which looked like they were turning into fields, replacing the grassland. However, since there was plenty of forage available in other parts of the island, there was no concern about the onagers needing to be put on rations. It was also better to turn Prospect Plateau, protected by its surrounding creeks, into this kind of garden and to extend the fields, which didn't need protection, beyond that area.
On the 15th of November they made their third harvest. Here was a field which had indeed increased in the eighteen months since the first grain of corn had been sown. The second crop of 600,000 grains produced this time 4,000 bushels or more than 500,000,000 grains. The colonists were, therefore, rich in corn; as it was only necessary to sow a dozen bushels each year in order to have a supply sufficient for the nourishment of man and beast.
On November 15th, they had their third harvest. This field had really grown in the eighteen months since the first grain of corn was planted. The second crop of 600,000 grains produced over 4,000 bushels, which was more than 500 million grains. The colonists were therefore rich in corn; they only needed to plant a dozen bushels each year to have enough food for both people and animals.
After harvesting they, gave up the last fortnight in the month to bread-making. They had the grain but not the flour, and a mill was therefore necessary. Smith could have used the other waterfall which fell into the Mercy, but, after discussing the question, it was decided to build a simple wind-mill on the summit of the plateau. Its construction would be no more difficult than a water-mill, and they would be sure of always having a breeze on this open elevation.
After the harvest, they dedicated the last two weeks of the month to making bread. They had the grain but not the flour, so they needed a mill. Smith could have used the other waterfall that flowed into the Mercy, but after discussing it, they decided to build a simple windmill on top of the plateau. It would be just as easy to build as a watermill, and they would always have a breeze on this open high ground.
“Without counting,” said Pencroff, “the fine aspect a wind-mill will give to the landscape.”
“Not to mention,” said Pencroff, “how great a windmill will look in the landscape.”
They began the work by selecting timber for the cage and machinery for the mill. Some large sand-stones, which the colonists found to the north of the lake, were readily made into mill-stones, and the inexhaustible envelope of the balloon furnished the cloth necessary for the sails.
They started the project by choosing wood for the cage and equipment for the mill. Some large sandstones that the settlers discovered north of the lake were easily turned into millstones, and the endless covering of the balloon provided the fabric needed for the sails.
Smith made his drawings, and the site for the mill was chosen a little to the right of the poultry-yard, and close to the lake shore. The whole cage rested upon a pivot, held in position by heavy timbers, in such a manner that it could turn, with all the mechanism within it, towards any quarter of the wind.
Smith created his drawings, and the spot for the mill was selected just to the right of the chicken coop and near the lake shore. The entire cage rested on a pivot, secured in place by large beams, allowing it to rotate, along with all the machinery inside it, to face any direction of the wind.
The work progressed rapidly. Neb and Herbert had become expert carpenters, and had only to follow the plans furnished by the engineer, so that in a very short time a sort of round watch-house, a regular pepper-box, surmounted by a sharp roof, rose upon the site selected. The four wings had been firmly fastened by iron tenons to the main shaft, in such a manner as to make a certain angle with it. As for the various parts of the interior mechanism—the two mill-stones, the runner and the feeder; the hopper, a sort of huge square trough, large above and small below, permitting the grains to fall upon the mill-stones; the oscillating bucket, designed to regulate the passage of the grain; and, finally, the bolter, which, by the operation of the sieve, separated the bran from the flour—all these were easily made. And as their tools were good, the work simple, and everybody took part in it, the mill was finished by the 1st of December.
The work moved quickly. Neb and Herbert had become skilled carpenters and just needed to follow the plans provided by the engineer. As a result, in no time, a sort of round watchtower, like a pepper-box, topped with a pointed roof, appeared at the chosen site. The four wings were securely attached by iron tenons to the main structure, creating a specific angle with it. As for the different parts of the internal mechanism—the two millstones, the runner and the feeder; the hopper, a large square trough that was wide at the top and narrow at the bottom to let the grains fall onto the millstones; the oscillating bucket that controlled the flow of grain; and finally, the bolter, which used a sieve to separate the bran from the flour—all these were made easily. And since their tools were good, the work was straightforward, and everyone got involved, the mill was completed by December 1st.
As usual, Pencroff was overjoyed by his work, and he was sure that the machine was perfection.
As usual, Pencroff was thrilled with his work, and he was confident that the machine was perfect.
“Now, with a good wind, we will merrily grind our corn.”
“Now, with a good breeze, we can happily grind our corn.”
“Let it be a good wind, Pencroff, but not too strong,” said the engineer.
“Let's hope for a good wind, Pencroff, but not too strong,” said the engineer.
“Bah! our mill will turn the faster.”
“Bah! our mill will run faster.”
“It is not necessary to turn rapidly,” replied the engineer. “Experience has demonstrated that the best results are obtained by a mill whose wings make six times the number of turns in a minute that the wind travels feet in a second. Thus, an ordinary wind, which travels twenty-four feet in a second, will turn the wings of the mill sixteen times in a minute, which is fast enough.”
“It’s not necessary to spin quickly,” the engineer replied. “Experience shows that the best results come from a mill whose blades turn six times for every minute that the wind travels feet in a second. So, a regular wind that moves at twenty-four feet per second will turn the mill’s blades sixteen times in a minute, which is fast enough.”
“Already!” exclaimed Herbert, “there is a fine breeze from the northeast, which will be just the thing!”
“Already!” exclaimed Herbert, “there’s a nice breeze coming from the northeast, which will be perfect!”
There was no reason to delay using the mill, and the colonists were anxious to taste the bread of Lincoln Island; so this very morning two or three bushels of corn were ground, and the next day, at breakfast, a splendid loaf, rather heavy perhaps, which had been raised with the barm of beer, was displayed upon the table of Granite House. Each munched his portion with a pleasure perfectly inexpressible.
There was no reason to wait to use the mill, and the colonists were eager to taste the bread of Lincoln Island; so this very morning, two or three bushels of corn were ground, and the next day, at breakfast, a wonderful loaf, a bit heavy perhaps, which had been leavened with beer yeast, was on the table at Granite House. Everyone enjoyed their share with a pleasure that was impossible to explain.
Meantime the Unknown had not come back again. Often Spilett and Herbert had searched the forest in the neighborhood of Granite House without finding any trace of him, and all began to be seriously alarmed at his prolonged absence. Undoubtedly the former savage of Tabor Island would not find it difficult to live in the forests of the Far West, which were so rich in game; but was it not to be feared that he would resume his former habits, and that his independence would revive in him his brutish instincts? Smith alone, by a sort of presentiment, persisted in saying that the fugitive would return.
In the meantime, the Unknown still hadn’t come back. Spilett and Herbert often searched the forest around Granite House but found no sign of him, and everyone began to seriously worry about his long absence. There’s no doubt that the former savage from Tabor Island could survive in the rich game-filled forests of the Far West; however, wasn’t there a risk that he would slip back into his old ways and that his independence would bring back his wild instincts? Only Smith, with a kind of intuition, kept insisting that the fugitive would return.
“Yes, he will come back,” he repeated with a confidence in which his companions could not share. “When this poor creature was on Tabor Island, he knew he was alone, but here, he knows that his kindred await him. Since he half-spoke of his past life, he will return to tell us everything, and on that day he will be ours.”
“Yes, he will come back,” he repeated with a confidence that his companions couldn’t share. “When this poor soul was on Tabor Island, he knew he was alone, but here, he knows that his family is waiting for him. Since he barely mentioned his past life, he will come back to tell us everything, and on that day he will be ours.”
The event proved the correctness of Cyrus Smith’s reasoning.
The event proved that Cyrus Smith's reasoning was right.
On the 3d of December, Herbert had gone to the southern shore of the lake, to fish, and, since the dangerous animals never showed themselves in this part of the island, he had gone unarmed.
On December 3rd, Herbert had gone to the southern shore of the lake to fish, and since the dangerous animals never appeared in this part of the island, he had gone without a weapon.
Pencroff and Neb were working in the poultry-yard, while Smith and the reporter were occupied at the Chimneys making soda, the supply of soap being low.
Pencroff and Neb were working in the chicken coop, while Smith and the reporter were busy at the Chimneys making soda, as they were low on soap.
Suddenly sharp cries of help were heard by Neb and Pencroff, who summoned the others, and all rushed towards the lake.
Suddenly, Neb and Pencroff heard loud cries for help, so they called the others, and everyone rushed toward the lake.
But before them, the Unknown, whose presence in the neighborhood had not been suspected, leapt over Glycerine Creek and bounded along the opposite bank.
But in front of them, the Unknown, whose presence in the area hadn't been noticed, jumped over Glycerine Creek and sprinted along the other bank.
There, Herbert stood facing a powerful jaguar, like the one which had been killed at Reptile End. Taken by surprise, he stood with his back against a tree, and the animal, crouching on his haunches, was about to spring upon him, when the Unknown, with no other arm than his knife, threw himself on the brute, which turned upon its new adversary.
There, Herbert stood facing a strong jaguar, similar to the one that had been killed at Reptile End. Caught off guard, he pressed his back against a tree, and the animal, crouching on its haunches, was about to leap at him when the Unknown, armed only with his knife, lunged at the beast, which then turned to confront its new attacker.
The struggle was short. This man, whose strength and agility was prodigious, seized the jaguar by the throat in a vice-like grip, and, not heeding the claws of the beast tearing his flesh, he thrust his knife into its heart.
The struggle was brief. This man, whose strength and agility were impressive, grabbed the jaguar by the throat with a vice-like grip, and, ignoring the claws of the beast ripping into his flesh, he drove his knife into its heart.
The jaguar fell, and the Unknown was about turning to go away, when the colonists came up, and Herbert, catching hold of him, exclaimed:—
The jaguar fell, and the Unknown was about to turn and leave when the colonists arrived, and Herbert, grabbing hold of him, shouted:—
“No, no, you must not leave us!”
“No, no, you can’t leave us!”
Smith walked towards the man, who frowned at his approach. The blood was flowing from a wound in his shoulder, but he did not heed it.
Smith walked toward the man, who scowled at him as he approached. Blood was dripping from a wound in his shoulder, but he didn’t pay it any mind.
“My friend,” said Smith, “we are in your debt. You have risked your life to save our boy.”
“My friend,” Smith said, “we owe you. You put your life on the line to save our son.”
“My life,” murmured the Unknown; “what is it worth? less than nothing.”
“My life,” murmured the Unknown; “what is it worth? Less than nothing.”
“You are wounded?”
"Are you hurt?"
“That does not matter.”
"That doesn't matter."
“Will you not shake hands with me?” asked Herbert.
“Will you not shake my hand?” asked Herbert.
But on the lad’s seeking to take his hand, the Unknown folded his arms, his chest heaved, and he looked about as if he wished to escape; but, making a violent effort at self-control, and in a gruff voice:—
But when the kid tried to take his hand, the Unknown crossed his arms, his chest heaved, and he looked around as if he wanted to run away; but, with a strong effort to hold himself together, he said in a gruff voice:—
“Who are you?” he asked, “and what are you going to do with me?”
“Who are you?” he asked, “and what are you going to do with me?”
It was their history that he thus asked for, for the first time. Perhaps, if that was related, he would tell his own. So Smith, in a few words, recounted all that had happened since their departure from Richmond; how they had succeeded, and the resources now at their disposal.
It was their history that he asked for, for the first time. Maybe if he heard that, he would share his own. So Smith briefly explained everything that had happened since they left Richmond; how they had succeeded, and the resources they now had available.
The Unknown listened with the utmost attention.
The Unknown listened closely.
Then Smith told him who they all were, Spilett, Herbert, Pencroff, Neb, himself, and he added that the greatest happiness that had come to them since their arrival on Lincoln Island was on their return from the islet, when they could count one more companion.
Then Smith told him who they all were: Spilett, Herbert, Pencroff, Neb, and himself. He added that the greatest happiness they had experienced since arriving on Lincoln Island was when they returned from the islet and could count one more companion.
At these words the other colored up, and bowing his head, seemed greatly agitated.
At these words, the other person flushed and lowered his head, appearing very upset.
“And now that you know us,” asked Smith, “will you give us your hand?”
“And now that you know us,” Smith asked, “will you give us your hand?”
“No,” answered the Unknown in a hoarse voice; “no! You are honest men. But I—”
“No,” replied the Unknown in a raspy voice; “no! You are honest people. But I—”
CHAPTER XXXIX
ALWAYS APART—A BEQUEST OF THE UNKNOWN’S—THE FARM ESTABLISHED AT THE CORRAL—TWELVE YEARS—THE BOATSWAIN’S MATE OF THE BRITANNIA —LEFT ON TABOR ISLAND—THE HAND OF SMITH—THE MYSTERIOUS PAPER
ALWAYS SEPARATE—A LEGACY OF THE UNKNOWN—THE FARM SET UP AT THE CORRAL—TWELVE YEARS—THE BOATSWAIN’S MATE OF THE BRITANNIA—LEFT ON TABOR ISLAND—THE HAND OF SMITH—THE MYSTERIOUS DOCUMENT
These last events justified the presentiments of the colonists. There was some terrible past in the life of this man, expiated, perhaps, in the eyes of men, but which his conscience still held unabsolved. At any rate, he felt remorse; he had repented, and his new friends would have cordially grasped that hand, but he did not feel himself worthy to offer it to honest men. Nevertheless, after the struggle with the jaguar, he did not go back to the forest, but remained within the bounds of Granite House.
These recent events confirmed the colonists' fears. This man had a dark past, which might have been forgiven by others, but his conscience still felt the weight of it. He felt guilt; he had changed, and his new friends would have eagerly taken his hand, but he didn’t think he deserved to offer it to good people. Still, after fighting the jaguar, he didn’t return to the forest, but stayed within the walls of Granite House.
What was the mystery of this life? Would he speak of it some day? The colonists thought so, but they agreed that, under no circumstances, would they ask him for his secret; and, in the meantime, to associate with him as if they suspected nothing.
What was the mystery of this life? Would he share it one day? The colonists thought so, but they agreed that they would never ask him for his secret; meanwhile, they would interact with him as if they suspected nothing.
For some days everything went on as usual. Smith and Spilett worked together, sometimes as chemists, sometimes as physicists, the reporter never leaving the engineer, except to hunt with Herbert, as it was not prudent to allow the young lad to traverse the forest alone. As to Neb and Pencroff, the work in the stables and poultry-yard, or at the corral, besides the chores about Granite House, kept them busy.
For several days, everything continued normally. Smith and Spilett worked together, sometimes as chemists and other times as physicists, with the reporter never leaving the engineer except to hunt with Herbert, since it wasn't wise to let the young boy wander through the forest alone. Meanwhile, Neb and Pencroff were busy with tasks in the stables, poultry yard, and corral, as well as chores around Granite House.
The Unknown worked apart from the others. He had gone back to his former habit of taking no share in the meals, of sleeping under the trees, of having nothing to do with his companions. It seemed, indeed, as if the society of those who had saved him was intolerable.
The Unknown stayed away from the others. He had returned to his old ways of not joining in for meals, sleeping under the trees, and keeping his distance from his companions. It really seemed like being around the people who had rescued him was unbearable.
“But why, then,” asked Pencroff, “did he seek succor from his fellow-creatures; why did he throw this paper in the sea?”
“But why, then,” asked Pencroff, “did he seek help from others; why did he throw this paper into the sea?”
“He will tell us everything,” was Smith’s invariable answer.
“He will tell us everything,” was Smith’s constant reply.
“But when?”
"But when will it happen?"
“Perhaps sooner than you think, Pencroff.”
“Maybe sooner than you think, Pencroff.”
And, indeed, on the 10th of December, a week after his return to Granite House, the Unknown accosted the engineer and in a quiet humble voice said:—
And on December 10th, a week after he got back to Granite House, the Unknown approached the engineer and spoke in a soft, humble voice:—
“Sir, I have a request to make.”
“Sir, I have a favor to ask.”
“Speak,” replied the engineer, “but, first, let me ask you a question?”
“Go ahead,” replied the engineer, “but first, can I ask you a question?”
At these words the Unknown colored and drew back. Smith saw what was passing in the mind of the culprit, who feared, doubtless, that the engineer would question him upon his past.
At these words, the Unknown blushed and stepped back. Smith noticed what was going through the culprit's mind, who likely feared that the engineer would ask him about his past.
Smith took him by the hand.
Smith took him by the hand.
“Comrade,” said he, “we are not only companions, we are friends. I wanted to say this to you first, now I will listen.”
“Buddy,” he said, “we're not just partners, we're friends. I wanted to tell you this first; now I’m all ears.”
The Unknown covered his eyes with his hand; a sort of tremor seized him, and for some moments he was unable to articulate a word.
The Unknown covered his eyes with his hand; a kind of tremor shook him, and for a few moments he couldn't find the words to speak.
“Sir,” said he, at length, “I came to implore a favor from you.”
“Sir,” he said finally, “I came to ask you for a favor.”
“What is it?”
"What's that?"
“You have, four or five miles from here, at the foot of the mountain, a corral for your animals. These require looking after. Will you permit me to live over there with them?”
“You have, four or five miles from here, at the foot of the mountain, a corral for your animals. These need care. Will you let me stay over there with them?”
Smith regarded the unhappy man for some time, with deep commiseration. Then:—
Smith looked at the unhappy man for a while, feeling deep sympathy. Then:—
“My friend,” said he, “the corral has nothing but sheds, only fit for the animals—”
“My friend,” he said, “the corral has nothing but sheds, only good for the animals—”
“It will be good enough, for me, sir.”
“It'll be good enough for me, sir.”
“My friend,” replied Smith, “we will never thwart you in anything. If you wish to live in the corral, you may; nevertheless, you will always be welcome at Granite House. But since you desire to stay at the corral, we will do what is necessary to make you comfortable.”
“My friend,” replied Smith, “we will never stand in your way. If you want to stay in the corral, you can; however, you will always be welcome at Granite House. But since you choose to stay at the corral, we will do what it takes to make you comfortable.”
“Never mind about that, I will get along well enough.”
“Don’t worry about that, I’ll be just fine.”
“My friend,” responded Smith, who persisted in the use of this cordial title, “you must let us be the judges in that matter.”
“My friend,” replied Smith, who insisted on using this friendly title, “you have to let us be the judges in that matter.”
The Unknown thanked the engineer and went away. And Smith, having told his companions of the proposition that had been made, they decided to build a log house at the corral, and to make it as comfortable as possible.
The Unknown thanked the engineer and left. Smith, after telling his friends about the proposal, they decided to build a log cabin at the corral and make it as cozy as possible.
The same day the colonists went, with the necessary tools, to the place, and before the week was out the house was ready for its guest. It was built twenty feet from the sheds, at a place where the herd of moufflons, now numbering twenty-four animals, could be easily overlooked. Some furniture, including a bed, table, bench, clothes-press, and chest was made, and some arms, ammunition, and tools, were carried there.
The same day, the colonists went to the site with the needed tools, and by the end of the week, the house was ready for its guest. It was built twenty feet from the sheds, in a spot where the herd of moufflons, now numbering twenty-four, could be easily seen. Some furniture was made, including a bed, table, bench, clothes-press, and chest, along with some weapons, ammunition, and tools being brought there.
The Unknown, meanwhile, had not seen his new home, letting the colonists work without him, while he remained at the plateau, wishing, doubtless, to finish up his work there. And, indeed, by his exertion the ground was completely tilled, and ready for the sowing when the time should arrive.
The Unknown, on the other hand, hadn’t checked out his new home, allowing the colonists to work without him while he stayed on the plateau, likely wanting to finish his tasks there. And, in fact, thanks to his efforts, the ground was fully prepared and ready for sowing when the time came.
On the 20th everything was prepared at the corral, aid the engineer told the Unknown that his house was ready for him, to which the other replied that he would sleep there that night.
On the 20th, everything was set up at the corral, and the engineer informed the Unknown that his house was ready for him, to which the other responded that he would stay there that night.
The same evening, the colonists were all together in the great hall of Granite House. It was 8 o’clock, the time of their companion’s departure; and not wishing by their presence to impose on him the leave-taking, which would, perhaps, have cost him an effort, they had left him alone and gone up into Granite House.
The same evening, the colonists were all gathered in the great hall of Granite House. It was 8 o’clock, the time for their companion to leave; not wanting to make his farewell any harder, they left him alone and headed up to Granite House.
They had been conversing together in the hall for some minutes, when there was a light knock on the door, the Unknown entered, and without further introduction:—
They had been chatting in the hallway for a few minutes when there was a soft knock on the door. The Unknown stepped in and, without any further introduction:—
“Before I leave you, sirs,” said he, “it is well that you should know my history. This is it.”
“Before I go, gentlemen,” he said, “it’s important for you to know my story. Here it is.”
These simple words greatly affected Smith and companions. The engineer started up.
These straightforward words had a big impact on Smith and his friends. The engineer got moving.
“We ask to hear nothing, my friend,” he said. “It is your right to be silent—”
“We don’t want to hear anything, my friend,” he said. “You have the right to stay silent—”
“It is my duty to speak.”
“I have to speak up.”
“Then sit down.”
“Then take a seat.”
“I will stand where I am.”
“I'll stay here.”
“We are ready to hear what you have to say,” said Smith.
“We're ready to hear what you have to say,” said Smith.
The Unknown stood in a shadowed corner of the hall, bare-headed, his arms crossed on his breast. In this position, in a hoarse voice, speaking as one who forces himself to speak, he made the following recital, uninterrupted by any word from his auditors:—
The Unknown stood in a dark corner of the hall, his head bare and arms crossed over his chest. In this stance, with a raspy voice, speaking like someone who has to push himself to talk, he delivered the following account, without any interruptions from his audience:—
“On the 20th of December, 1854, a steam pleasure-yacht, the Duncan, belonging to a Scotch nobleman, Lord Glenarvan, cast anchor at Cape Bernoulli, on the western coast of Australia, near the thirty-seventh parallel. On board the yacht were Lord Glenarvan, his wife, a major in the English army, a French geographer, a little boy, and a little girl. These two last were the children of Captain Grant, of the ship Britannia, which, with its cargo, had been lost the year before. The Duncan was commanded by Captain John Mangles, and was manned by a crew of fifteen men.
“On December 20, 1854, a steam yacht called the Duncan, owned by a Scottish nobleman, Lord Glenarvan, dropped anchor at Cape Bernoulli on the western coast of Australia, near the thirty-seventh parallel. On board the yacht were Lord Glenarvan, his wife, an English army major, a French geographer, a little boy, and a little girl. The two children were the kids of Captain Grant from the ship Britannia, which had been lost along with its cargo the year before. The Duncan was captained by John Mangles and had a crew of fifteen men.”
“This is the reason why the yacht was on the Australian coast at that season:—
“This is why the yacht was on the Australian coast at that time of year:—
“Six months before, a bottle containing a paper written in English, German, and French, had been picked up by the Duncan in the Irish Sea. This paper said, in substance, that three persons still survived from the wreck of the Britannia; that they were the captain and two of the men; that they had found refuge on a land of which the latitude and longitude was given, but the longitude, blotted by the sea water, was no longer legible.
“Six months earlier, a bottle with a paper inside written in English, German, and French was found by the Duncan in the Irish Sea. The paper basically stated that three people had survived the wreck of the Britannia; specifically, the captain and two crew members. They had found safety on an island, the latitude and longitude of which were provided, but the longitude had been washed out by seawater and was no longer readable.”
“The latitude was 37° 11’ south. Now, as the longitude was unknown, if they followed the latitude across continents and seas, they were certain to arrive at the land inhabited by Captain Grant and his companions.
“The latitude was 37° 11’ south. Since the longitude was unknown, if they continued along the latitude across continents and oceans, they were sure to reach the land where Captain Grant and his companions lived.
“The English Admiralty, having hesitated to undertake the search, Lord Glenarvan had resolved to do everything in his power to recover the captain. Mary and Robert Grant had been in correspondence with him, and the yacht Duncan was made ready for a long voyage, in which the family of Lord Glenarvan and the children of the captain intended to participate. The Duncan, leaving Glasgow, crossed the Atlantic, passed the Straits of Magellan, and proceeded up the Pacific to Patagonia, where, according to the first theory suggested by the paper, they might believe that Captain Grant was a prisoner to the natives.
“The English Admiralty had been reluctant to start the search, so Lord Glenarvan decided to do everything he could to rescue the captain. Mary and Robert Grant had been in touch with him, and the yacht Duncan was prepared for a long journey, which Lord Glenarvan's family and the captain’s children planned to join. The Duncan left Glasgow, crossed the Atlantic, navigated the Straits of Magellan, and headed up the Pacific to Patagonia, where, according to the first theory proposed by the article, they suspected that Captain Grant was being held captive by the natives.”
“The Duncan left its passengers on the western coast of Patagonia, and sailed for Cape Corrientes on the eastern coast, there to wait for them.
“The Duncan dropped off its passengers on the western coast of Patagonia and set sail for Cape Corrientes on the eastern coast, where it would wait for them.”
“Lord Glenarvan crossed Patagonia, following the 37th parallel, and, not having found any trace of the captain, he reembarked on the 13th of November, in order to continue his search across the ocean.
“Lord Glenarvan crossed Patagonia, following the 37th parallel, and, not having found any trace of the captain, he reembarked on November 13th to continue his search across the ocean.”
“After having visited without success the islands of Tristan d’Acunha and of Amsterdam, lying in the course, the Duncan, as I have stated, arrived at Cape Bernouilli on the 20th of December, 1854.
“After unsuccessfully visiting the islands of Tristan d’Acunha and Amsterdam, which are along the route, the Duncan, as I mentioned, reached Cape Bernouilli on December 20, 1854.”
“It was Lord Glenarvan’s intention to cross Australia, as he had crossed Patagonia, and he disembarked. Some miles from the coast was a farm belonging to an Irishman, who offered hospitality to the travellers. Lord Glenarvan told the Irishman the object which had brought him to that region, and asked if he had heard of an English three-master, the Britannia, having been lost, within two years, on the west coast of Australia.
“It was Lord Glenarvan’s intention to cross Australia, just like he had crossed Patagonia, and he got off the boat. A few miles from the coast, there was a farm owned by an Irishman, who welcomed the travelers. Lord Glenarvan explained to the Irishman why he had come to that area and asked if he had heard about an English three-masted ship, the Britannia, that had gone missing on the west coast of Australia in the past two years.”
“The Irishman had never heard of this disaster, but, to the great surprise of everybody, one of his servants, intervening, said:—
“The Irishman had never heard of this disaster, but, to everyone’s surprise, one of his servants spoke up and said:—
“‘Heaven be praised, my lord. If Captain Grant is still alive he is in Australia.’
“‘Thank goodness, my lord. If Captain Grant is still alive, he’s in Australia.’”
“‘Who are you?’ demanded Lord Glenarvan.
“‘Who are you?’ asked Lord Glenarvan.
“‘A Scotchman, like yourself, my lord,’ answered this man, ‘and one of the companions of Captain Grant, one of the survivors of the Britannia.’
“‘A Scotsman, like you, my lord,’ the man replied, ‘and one of Captain Grant's companions, one of the survivors of the Britannia.’”
“This man called himself Ayrton. He had been, in short, boatswain’s mate of the Britannia, as his papers proved. But, separated from Captain Grant at the moment when the ship went to pieces on the rocks, he had believed until this moment that every one had perished but himself.
“This man called himself Ayrton. He had been, in short, the boatswain's mate of the Britannia, as his documents confirmed. But, after getting separated from Captain Grant when the ship crashed on the rocks, he had thought until now that everyone else had died except for him.”
“‘Only,’ he added, ‘it was not on the western but on the eastern coast of Australia that the Britannia was lost; and if the Captain is still living he is a prisoner to the natives, and he must be searched for there.’
“‘Only,’ he added, ‘it was not on the western coast but on the eastern coast of Australia that the Britannia was lost; and if the Captain is still alive, he is a prisoner of the natives, and he must be searched for there.’”
“This man said these things frankly and with a confident expression. No one would have doubted what he said. The Irishman, in whose service he had been for more than a year, spoke in his favor. Lord Glenarvan believed in his loyalty, and, following his advice, he resolved to cross Australia, following the 37th parallel. Lord Glenarvan, his wife, the children, the major, the Frenchman, Captain Mangles and some sailors formed the little party under the guidance of Ayrton, while the Duncan, under the command of the mate, Tom Austin, went to Melbourne, to await further instructions.
“This man spoke openly and confidently. No one would doubt his words. The Irishman, who had been in his service for over a year, spoke highly of him. Lord Glenarvan trusted his loyalty and, taking his advice, decided to cross Australia along the 37th parallel. Lord Glenarvan, his wife, the children, the major, the Frenchman, Captain Mangles, and a few sailors made up the small group guided by Ayrton, while the Duncan, under the command of the mate, Tom Austin, headed to Melbourne to await further instructions.”
“They left on the 23d of December, 1861.
“They left on December 23, 1861.”
“It is time to say that this Ayrton was a traitor. He was, indeed, the boatswain’s mate of the Britannia; but, after some dispute with his captain, he had tried to excite the crew to mutiny and seize the ship, and Captain Grant had put him ashore, the 8th of April, 1832, on the west coast of Australia, and had gone off, leaving him there, which was no more than right.
“It’s time to say that this Ayrton was a traitor. He was, in fact, the boatswain’s mate of the Britannia; however, after a disagreement with his captain, he tried to incite the crew to mutiny and take over the ship. Captain Grant had put him ashore on April 8, 1832, on the west coast of Australia, and left him there, which was entirely justified.”
“Thus this wretch knew nothing of the shipwreck of the Britannia. He had just learned it from Lord Glenarvan’s recital! Since his abandonment, he had become, under the name of Ben Joyce, the leader of some escaped convicts; and, if he impudently asserted the ship had been lost on the east coast, if he urged Lord Glenarvan to go in that direction, it was in the hope of separating him from his ship, of seizing the Duncan, and of making this yacht a pirate of the Pacific.”
“Therefore, this unfortunate guy knew nothing about the Britannia shipwreck. He had just found out from Lord Glenarvan's story! Since he had been left behind, he had taken on the name Ben Joyce and become the leader of a group of escaped convicts; and if he shamelessly claimed that the ship had gone down on the east coast, encouraging Lord Glenarvan to head that way, it was in hopes of splitting him from his ship, taking the Duncan, and turning this yacht into a pirate ship in the Pacific.”
Here the Unknown stopped for a moment. His voice trembled, but he began again in these words:—
Here the Unknown paused for a moment. His voice shook, but he began again with these words:—
“The expedition across Australia set out. It was naturally unfortunate, since Ayrton, or Ben Joyce, whichever you wish, led it, sometimes preceded, sometimes followed by the band of convicts, who had been informed of the plot.
“The expedition across Australia set out. It was obviously unfortunate, since Ayrton, or Ben Joyce, whichever you prefer, led it, sometimes ahead of, sometimes behind the group of convicts, who had been made aware of the plan.
“Meanwhile, the Duncan had been taken to Melbourne to await instructions. It was therefore necessary to persuade Lord Glenarvan to order her to leave Melbourne and to proceed to the east coast of Australia, where it would be easy to seize her. After having led the expedition sufficiently near this coast, into the midst of vast forests, where all resources were wanting, Ayrton obtained a letter which he was ordered to deliver to the mate of the Duncan; a letter which gave the order directing the yacht to proceed immediately to the east coast, to Twofold Bay, a place some days journey from the spot where the expedition had halted. It was at this place that Ayrton had given the rendezvous to his accomplices.
“Meanwhile, the Duncan had been taken to Melbourne to wait for further instructions. It was essential to convince Lord Glenarvan to instruct her to leave Melbourne and head to the east coast of Australia, where it would be easy to capture her. After bringing the expedition close enough to this coast, surrounded by vast forests with no resources, Ayrton received a letter that he was instructed to deliver to the mate of the Duncan; this letter contained the order for the yacht to proceed immediately to the east coast, specifically to Twofold Bay, which was several days' journey from where the expedition had stopped. It was at this location that Ayrton had arranged to meet with his accomplices.”
“At the moment when this letter was to have been sent, the traitor was unmasked and was obliged to flee. But this letter, giving him the Duncan, must be had at any cost. Ayrton succeeded in getting hold of it, and, in two days afterwards, he was in Melbourne.
“At the moment this letter was supposed to be sent, the traitor was exposed and had to run away. But this letter, which would put him in the clear, had to be obtained at any cost. Ayrton managed to get his hands on it, and two days later, he was in Melbourne.”
“So far, the criminal had succeeded in his odious projects. He could take the Duncan to this Twofold Bay, where it would be easy for the convicts to seize her; and, her crew massacred, Ben Joyce would be master of the sea. Heaven stopped him in the consummation of these dark designs.
“So far, the criminal had succeeded in his terrible plans. He could take the Duncan to this Twofold Bay, where it would be easy for the convicts to capture her; and, with her crew slaughtered, Ben Joyce would be the master of the sea. Heaven prevented him from completing these dark designs.”
“Ayrton, having reached Melbourne, gave the letter to the mate, Tom Austin, who made ready to execute the order; but one can judge of the disappointment and the rage of Ayrton, when, the second day out, he learned that the mate was taking the ship, not to Twofold Bay on the east coast of Australia, but to the east coast of New Zealand. He wished to oppose this, but the mate showed him his order. And, in truth, by a providential error of the French geographer who had written this letter, the eastern coast of New Zealand had been named as their place of destination.
“Ayrton, having arrived in Melbourne, handed the letter to the first mate, Tom Austin, who prepared to follow the instructions. However, one can imagine Ayrton's disappointment and anger when, on the second day out, he discovered that the mate was steering the ship not to Twofold Bay on the east coast of Australia, but to the east coast of New Zealand. He wanted to challenge this decision, but the mate showed him the order. In fact, due to a fortunate mistake by the French geographer who had written the letter, the eastern coast of New Zealand had been designated as their destination.”
“All the plans of Ayrton had miscarried. He tried to mutiny. They put him in irons; and he was taken to the coast of New Zealand, unaware of what had become of his accomplices, or of Lord Glenarvan.
“All of Ayrton's plans had failed. He attempted to start a mutiny. They shackled him; and he was taken to the coast of New Zealand, unaware of what had happened to his partners or to Lord Glenarvan.
“The Duncan remained on this coast until the 3d of March. On that day, Ayrton heard firing. It was a salute from the Duncan, and, very soon, Lord Glenarvan and all his party came on board.
“The Duncan stayed along this coast until March 3rd. On that day, Ayrton heard gunfire. It was a salute from the Duncan, and shortly after, Lord Glenarvan and his entire group came on board.”
“This is what had happened:—
"This is what happened:"
“After innumerable fatigues and dangers, Lord Glenarvan had been able to accomplish his journey and arrived at Twofold Bay. The Duncan was not there! He telegraphed to Melbourne, and received a reply:—’Duncan sailed on the 18th. Destination unknown.’
“After countless challenges and risks, Lord Glenarvan finally completed his journey and reached Twofold Bay. The Duncan wasn't there! He sent a telegram to Melbourne and got a reply:—’Duncan sailed on the 18th. Destination unknown.’”
“Lord Glenarvan could think of but one explanation, that was that the good yacht had fallen into the hands of Ben Joyce, and had become a pirate ship.
“Lord Glenarvan could think of only one explanation: the good yacht had fallen into the hands of Ben Joyce and had turned into a pirate ship.”
“Nevertheless, Lord Glenarvan did not wish to give up his undertaking. He was an intrepid and a generous man. He embarked on a merchant vessel, which took him to the west coast of New Zealand, and he crossed the country, following the 37th parallel without finding any trace of Captain Grant; but on the other coast, to his great surprise, and by the bounty of Heaven, he found the Duncan, commanded by the mate, which had been waiting for him for five weeks!
“Nonetheless, Lord Glenarvan didn’t want to abandon his mission. He was a brave and generous man. He boarded a merchant ship that took him to the west coast of New Zealand, and he traveled across the country, following the 37th parallel but found no sign of Captain Grant; however, on the other coast, to his great surprise, and thanks to a stroke of luck, he discovered the Duncan, commanded by the mate, which had been waiting for him for five weeks!”
“It was the 3d of March, 1855. Lord Glenarvan was again on the Duncan, but Ayrton was there also. He was brought before his lordship, who wished to get from this bandit all that he knew concerning Captain Grant. Ayrton refused to speak. Lord Glenarvan told him, then, that at the first port, he would be given over to the English authorities. Ayrton remained silent.
“It was March 3rd, 1855. Lord Glenarvan was once again on the Duncan, but Ayrton was also there. He was brought before his lordship, who wanted to get all the information he could from this bandit about Captain Grant. Ayrton refused to say anything. Lord Glenarvan told him that at the first port, he would be handed over to the English authorities. Ayrton stayed silent.”
“The Duncan continued along the thirty-seventh parallel. Meanwhile, Lady Glenarvan undertook to overcome the obstinacy of the bandit, and, finally, her influence conquered him. Ayrton, in exchange for what he would tell, proposed to Lord Glenarvan to leave him upon one of the islands in the Pacific, instead of giving him up to the English authorities. Lord Glenarvan, ready to do anything to gain information concerning Captain Grant, consented.
“The Duncan continued along the thirty-seventh parallel. Meanwhile, Lady Glenarvan worked to break the stubbornness of the bandit, and, in the end, her influence won him over. Ayrton, in exchange for the information he would provide, offered Lord Glenarvan the option to leave him on one of the islands in the Pacific instead of turning him over to the British authorities. Lord Glenarvan, eager to find out anything about Captain Grant, agreed.”
“Then Ayrton told the history of his life, and declared that he knew nothing about Captain Grant since the day when the latter had left him on the Australian coast.
“Then Ayrton shared the story of his life and stated that he hadn’t heard anything about Captain Grant since the day the captain left him on the Australian coast.”
“Nevertheless, Lord Glenarvan kept the promise he had made. The Duncan, continuing her route, arrived at Tabor Island. It was there that Ayrton was to be left, and it was there, too, that, by a miracle, they found Captain Grant and his two companions. The convict was put upon the island in their stead, and when he left the yacht, Lord Glenarvan spoke to him in these words:—
“Nonetheless, Lord Glenarvan honored the promise he had made. The Duncan, continuing her journey, reached Tabor Island. It was there that Ayrton was to be left, and it was also there, by a stroke of luck, that they found Captain Grant and his two companions. The convict was placed on the island in their place, and when he left the yacht, Lord Glenarvan addressed him with these words:—
“‘Here, Ayrton, you will be far from any country, and without any possible means of communicating with your fellow-men. You will not be able to leave this island. You will be alone, under the eye of a God who looks into the depths of our hearts, but you will neither be lost nor neglected, like Captain Grant. Unworthy as you are of the remembrance of men, you will be remembered. I know where you are, Ayrton, and I know where to find you. I will never forget it.’
“‘Here, Ayrton, you will be far from any country, and without any way to communicate with other people. You won’t be able to leave this island. You will be alone, under the gaze of a God who sees into the depths of our hearts, but you won’t be lost or forgotten, like Captain Grant. Despite what you may think of your worthiness to be remembered, you will not be forgotten. I know where you are, Ayrton, and I know how to find you. I will never forget it.’”
“And the Duncan, setting sail, soon disappeared.
“And the Duncan, setting sail, quickly vanished from sight.
“This was the 18th of March, 1855.
This was March 18, 1855.
“Ayrton was alone; but he lacked neither ammunition nor arms nor seeds. He, the convict, had at his disposal the house built by the honest Captain Grant. He had only to live and to expiate in solitude the crimes which he had committed.
“Ayrton was alone, but he had plenty of ammo, weapons, and seeds. He, the convict, had the house built by the honest Captain Grant at his disposal. All he had to do was live and atone for the crimes he had committed in solitude.”
“Sirs, he repented; he was ashamed of his crimes, and he was very unhappy. He said to himself that, as some day men would come to seek him on this islet, he must make himself worthy to go back with them. How he suffered, the miserable man! How he labored to benefit himself by labor! How he prayed to regenerate himself by prayer!
“Sirs, he felt regret; he was ashamed of his actions, and he was very unhappy. He told himself that, someday, people would come to find him on this islet, so he needed to make himself worthy to return with them. How he suffered, the poor man! How he worked hard to improve himself through labor! How he prayed to change through prayer!
“For two years, for three years, it was thus. Ayrton, crushed by this isolation, ever on the watch for a ship to appear upon the horizon of his island, asking himself if the time of expiation was nearly ended, suffered as one has rarely suffered. Oh! but solitude is hard, for a soul gnawed by remorse!
“For two years, for three years, it was like this. Ayrton, overwhelmed by this isolation, always on the lookout for a ship to appear on the horizon of his island, wondering if his time of atonement was almost over, suffered like hardly anyone has suffered. Oh! but solitude is tough for a soul tormented by guilt!
“But, doubtless, Heaven found this unhappy wretch insufficiently punished, for he fell, little by little, till he became a savage! He felt, little by little, the brute nature taking possession of him. He cannot say whether this was after two or four years of
“But, without a doubt, Heaven thought this unfortunate person was not punished enough, as he gradually fell until he became a savage! He felt, little by little, the animalistic nature taking over him. He can't say whether this happened after two or four years of
abandonment, but at last he became the miserable being whom you found.
abandonment, but eventually he became the miserable person you found.
“I need not tell you, sirs, that Ayrton and Ben Joyce and I are one!”
“I don’t need to tell you, gentlemen, that Ayrton, Ben Joyce, and I are one!”
Smith and his companions rose as this recital was finished. It is hard to say how deeply they were affected! Such misery, such grief, and such despair, had been shown to them!
Smith and his friends got up when the recital was over. It's tough to describe how much it impacted them! They had witnessed such misery, such grief, and such despair!
“Ayrton,” said Smith, “you have been a great criminal, but Heaven has, doubtless, witnessed the expiation of your crimes. This is proved, in that you have been restored to your fellow-men. Ayrton, you are pardoned! And now, will you be our companion?”
“Ayrton,” Smith said, “you’ve been a serious criminal, but Heaven has surely seen the atonement for your crimes. This is evident since you have been returned to society. Ayrton, you are pardoned! So, will you join us as our companion?”
The man drew back.
The man stepped back.
“Here is my hand,” said the engineer.
“Here is my hand,” said the engineer.
Ayrton darted forward and seized it, great tears streaming from his eyes.
Ayrton rushed forward and grabbed it, huge tears rolling down his cheeks.
“Do you desire to live with us?” asked Smith.
“Do you want to live with us?” asked Smith.
“Oh, Mr. Smith, let me have yet a little time,” he answered, “let me remain alone in the house at the corral!”
“Oh, Mr. Smith, please give me a little more time,” he replied, “let me stay alone in the house by the corral!”
“Do as you wish, Ayrton,” responded Smith.
“Do whatever you want, Ayrton,” replied Smith.
The unhappy man was about retiring, when Smith asked him a last question.
The unhappy man was about to retire when Smith asked him one last question.
“One word more, my friend. Since it is your wish to live in solitude, why did you throw that paper, which put us in the way of finding you, into the sea?”
“One more thing, my friend. Since you want to live in solitude, why did you throw that paper, which led us to find you, into the sea?”
“A paper?” answered Ayrton, who seemed not to understand what was said.
“A paper?” replied Ayrton, who didn’t seem to grasp what was being said.
“Yes, that paper, which we found enclosed in a bottle, and which gave the exact situation of Tabor Island?”
“Yes, that paper we found in a bottle, which detailed the exact location of Tabor Island?”
The man put his hand to his forehead, and, after some reflection, said:—
The man placed his hand on his forehead and, after thinking for a moment, said:—
“I never threw any paper into the sea!”
“I never tossed any paper into the sea!”
“Never!” cried Pencroff.
“Never!” shouted Pencroff.
“Never!”
"Not a chance!"
And then, inclining his head, Ayrton left the room.
And then, tilting his head, Ayrton exited the room.
CHAPTER XL.
A TALK—SMITH AND SPILETT—THE ENGINEER’S IDEA—THE ELECTRIC TELEGRAPH—THE WIRES—THE BATTER-THE ALPHABET—FINE WEATHER—THE PROSPERITY OF THE COLONY—PHOTOGRAPHY—A SNOW EFFECT—TWO YEARS ON LINCOLN ISLAND.
A CHAT—SMITH AND SPILETT—THE ENGINEER’S IDEA—THE ELECTRIC TELEGRAPH—THE WIRES—THE BATTERY—THE ALPHABET—NICE WEATHER—THE SUCCESS OF THE COLONY—PHOTOGRAPHY—A SNOW EFFECT—TWO YEARS ON LINCOLN ISLAND.
“The poor man!” said Herbert, returning from the door, after having watched Ayrton slide down the rope of the elevator and disappear in the darkness.
“The poor guy!” said Herbert, coming back from the door after watching Ayrton slide down the elevator rope and vanish into the darkness.
“He will come back,” said Smith.
“He’ll be back,” Smith said.
“What does it mean?” exclaimed Pencroff. “That he had not thrown this bottle into the sea? Then who did it?”
“What does that mean?” shouted Pencroff. “That he didn’t throw this bottle into the sea? Then who did?”
Certainly, if there was a reasonable question this was.
Certainly, if there was a reasonable question, this was it.
“He did it,” replied Neb; “only the poor fellow was half out of his senses at the time.”
“He did it,” answered Neb; “but the poor guy was barely in his right mind at the time.”
“Yes,” said Herbert, “and he had no knowledge of what he was doing.”
"Yes," Herbert said, "and he had no idea what he was doing."
“It can be explained in no other way, my friends,” responded Smith, hurriedly, “and I understand, now, how Ayrton was able to give the exact situation of the island, since the events prior to his abandonment gave him that knowledge.”
“It can’t be explained any other way, my friends,” Smith said quickly, “and I get it now, how Ayrton was able to provide the precise location of the island, since the events before he was left there gave him that knowledge.”
“Nevertheless,” observed Pencroff, “he was not a brute when he wrote that paper, and if it is seven or eight years since it was thrown into the sea, how is it that the paper has not been injured by moisture?”
“Still,” Pencroff remarked, “he wasn’t an idiot when he wrote that note, and if it’s been seven or eight years since it was tossed into the sea, how come the paper hasn’t been damaged by moisture?”
“It proves,” said Smith, “that Ayrton retained possession of his faculties to a period much more recent than he imagines.”
“It shows,” said Smith, “that Ayrton kept his wits about him for a much longer time than he thinks.”
“That must be it,” replied Pencroff, “for otherwise the thing would be inexplicable.”
"That has to be it," replied Pencroff, "because otherwise, it wouldn't make any sense."
“Inexplicable, indeed,” answered the engineer, who seemed not to wish to prolong this talk.
“Inexplicable, for sure,” replied the engineer, who didn't seem interested in continuing this conversation.
“Has Ayrton told the truth?” questioned the sailor.
“Did Ayrton tell the truth?” asked the sailor.
“Yes,” answered the reporter, “the history he has related is true in every particular. I remember, perfectly well, that the papers reported Lord Glenarvan’s undertaking and its result.”
“Yes,” replied the reporter, “the story he shared is true in every detail. I remember clearly that the news articles covered Lord Glenarvan’s mission and its outcome.”
“Ayrton has told the truth,” added Smith, “without any doubt, Pencroff, since it was trying enough for him to do so. A man does not lie when he accuses himself in this way.”
“Ayrton has told the truth,” added Smith, “without a doubt, Pencroff, since it was hard enough for him to do so. A man doesn’t lie when he admits something like this.”
The next day—the 21st—the colonists went down to the beach, and then clambered up to the plateau, but they saw nothing of Ayrton. The man had gone to his house the night before, and they judged it best not to intrude upon him. Time would, doubtless, effect what sympathy would fail to accomplish.
The next day—the 21st—the colonists headed down to the beach, then climbed up to the plateau, but they didn’t see Ayrton anywhere. He had gone home the night before, and they figured it was best not to bother him. Time would, no doubt, achieve what sympathy would not.
Herbert, Pencroff, and Neb resumed their accustomed occupations; and it happened that their work brought Smith and Spilett together at the Chimneys.
Herbert, Pencroff, and Neb went back to their usual tasks, and it turned out that their work brought Smith and Spilett together at the Chimneys.
“Do you know, Cyrus, that your explanation of yesterday about the bottle does not satisfy me at all? It is impossible to suppose that this unhappy creature could have written that paper, and thrown the bottle into the sea, without remembering anything about it!”
“Do you know, Cyrus, that your explanation from yesterday about the bottle doesn’t satisfy me at all? It’s impossible to believe that this poor person could have written that note and tossed the bottle into the sea without remembering anything about it!”
“Consequently, it is not he who threw it there, my dear Spilett!”
“So, it wasn’t him who tossed it there, my dear Spilett!”
“Then you believe—”
“Then you think—”
“I believe nothing, I know nothing!” replied Smith, interrupting the reporter. “I place this incident with those others which I have not been able to explain!”
“I don't believe anything, I don’t know anything!” Smith replied, cutting off the reporter. “I put this incident in the same category as those others that I can’t explain!”
“In truth, Cyrus,” said Spilett, “these things are incredible. Your rescue, the box thrown up on the beach, Top’s adventures, and now this bottle. Will we never have an answer to these enigmas?”
“In truth, Cyrus,” Spilett said, “these things are unbelievable. Your rescue, the box that washed up on the beach, Top’s adventures, and now this bottle. Will we ever find answers to these mysteries?”
“Yes,” answered the engineer, earnestly, “yes, when I shall have penetrated the bowels of this island!”
“Yes,” answered the engineer seriously, “yes, when I have explored the depths of this island!”
“Chance will, perhaps, give us the key to this mystery.”
“Maybe luck will give us the key to this mystery.”
“Chance, Spilett! I do not believe in chance any more than I believe in mystery in this world. There is a cause for everything, however inexplicable, which has happened here, and I will discover it. But, while waiting, let us watch and work.”
“Luck, Spilett! I don’t believe in luck any more than I believe in mystery in this world. There’s a reason for everything, no matter how puzzling, that has happened here, and I will find it out. But, while we wait, let’s observe and get to work.”
January arrived, and the year 1867 began. The works had been pushed forward vigorously. One day Herbert and Spilett, passing the corral, ascertained that Ayrton had taken possession of his abode. He occupied himself with the large herd confided to his care, and thus saved his companions the necessity of visiting it two or three times a week. Nevertheless, in order not to leave Ayrton too much alone, they frequently went there.
January arrived, and the year 1867 began. The work had been moving ahead quickly. One day, Herbert and Spilett were passing by the corral and found out that Ayrton had settled into his home. He was taking care of the large herd entrusted to him, which allowed his companions to avoid having to visit it two or three times a week. Still, to keep Ayrton from being too lonely, they often went to see him.
It was just as well—owing to certain suspicions shared by Smith and Spilett—that this part of the island should be under a certain supervision, and Ayrton, if anything happened, would not fail to let the inhabitants of Granite House know of it.
It was probably for the best—because of some suspicions shared by Smith and Spilett—that this part of the island should be monitored, and Ayrton, if anything happened, would definitely inform the people at Granite House.
Possibly, some sudden event might happen, which it would be important to communicate to the engineer without delay. And, aside from whatever might be connected with the mystery of the island, other things, requiring the prompt intervention of the colonists, might occur, as, for example, the discovering of a ship in the offing and in sight of the west coast, a wreck on that shore, the possible arrival of pirates, etc.
Possibly, something unexpected could happen that would be important to share with the engineer right away. Besides whatever might be related to the mystery of the island, other issues needing the immediate attention of the colonists could arise, such as spotting a ship on the horizon off the west coast, discovering a wreck on that shore, or the potential arrival of pirates, etc.
So Smith determined to place the corral in instant communication with Granite House.
So Smith decided to set up the corral for immediate communication with Granite House.
It was the 10th of January when he told his project to his companions.
It was January 10th when he shared his project with his friends.
“How are you going to do such a thing as that, Mr. Smith?” asked Pencroff. “Maybe you propose to erect a telegraph!”
“How are you planning to do something like that, Mr. Smith?” asked Pencroff. “Maybe you’re thinking of putting up a telegraph!”
“That is precisely what I propose to do.”
"That's exactly what I plan to do."
“Electric?” exclaimed Herbert.
"Electric?" Herbert exclaimed.
“Electric,” responded Smith. “We have everything necessary for making a battery, and the most difficult part will be to make the wires, but I think we can succeed.”
“Electric,” replied Smith. “We have everything we need to make a battery, and the hardest part will be creating the wires, but I believe we can pull it off.”
“Well, after this,” replied the sailor, “I expect some day to see us riding along on a railway!”
“Well, after this,” replied the sailor, “I expect that one day we’ll be traveling on a train!”
They entered upon the work at once, beginning with the most difficult part, that is to say, the manufacture of the wires, since, if that failed, it would be useless to make the battery and other accessories.
They immediately started the work, tackling the hardest part first, which was making the wires, because if that didn't work, there was no point in making the battery and other accessories.
The iron of Lincoln Island was, as we know, of excellent quality, and, therefore, well adapted to the purpose. Smith began by making a steel plate, pierced with conical holes of different sizes, which would bring the wire to the desired size. This piece of steel, after having been tempered “through and through,” was fixed firmly to a solid frame-work sunk in the ground, only a few feet distant from the waterfall—the motive power which the engineer intended to use.
The iron from Lincoln Island was, as we know, of excellent quality and, therefore, well-suited for the task. Smith started by creating a steel plate with conical holes of various sizes to shape the wire to the desired thickness. This piece of steel, after being thoroughly tempered, was securely attached to a solid framework anchored in the ground, just a few feet away from the waterfall—the power source the engineer planned to use.
And, indeed, there was the fulling-mill, not then in use, the main shaft of which turned with great force, and would serve to draw out the wire and roll it around itself.
And, sure enough, there was the fulling mill, not currently in use, the main shaft of which turned with great force and would help pull out the wire and wrap it around itself.
The operation was delicate and required great care. The iron, previously made into long and thin bars, with tapering ends, having been introduced into the largest hole of the drawing-plate, was drawn out by the main shaft of the mill, rolled out to a length of 25 or 30 feet, then unrolled, and pulled, in turn, through the smaller holes; and at length, the engineer obtained wires 30 or 40 feet long, which it was easy to join together and place along the five miles between the corral and Granite House.
The process was sensitive and needed a lot of attention. The iron, which had been shaped into long, thin bars with pointed ends, was put into the biggest hole of the drawing plate. It was then pulled out by the main shaft of the mill, stretched to a length of 25 or 30 feet, then unrolled and drawn through smaller holes. Eventually, the engineer produced wires that were 30 or 40 feet long, which were easy to connect and lay out over the five miles from the corral to Granite House.
It took but a little while to get this work under way, and then, Smith, making his companions the wire-drawers, busied himself in the construction of his battery.
It only took a short time to get this project started, and then Smith, with his companions handling the details, focused on building his battery.
It was necessary to make a battery with a constant circuit. We know that modern batteries are usually made of a certain kind of coke, zinc, and copper. Copper the engineer was without, since, in spite of all his efforts, he had been unable to find a trace of it on the island. The coke, which is that hard deposit obtained from gas retorts could be procured, but it would be necessary to arrange a special apparatus—a difficult thing to do. As to the zinc, it will be remembered that the box found on Jetsam Point, was lined with a sheet of that metal, which could not be better utilized than at present.
It was necessary to create a battery with a constant circuit. We know that modern batteries are typically made from a specific type of coke, zinc, and copper. The engineer was out of copper, as he had been unable to find any on the island despite his best efforts. The coke, which is that hard residue obtained from gas retorts, could be sourced, but it would require setting up a special apparatus—something quite challenging to do. As for the zinc, it's important to remember that the box found at Jetsam Point was lined with a sheet of that metal, which could be used perfectly right now.
Smith, after deep reflection, resolved to make a very simple battery, something like that which Becquerel invented in 1820, in which zinc alone is used. The other substances, nitric-acid and potash, he had at hand.
Smith, after thinking it over seriously, decided to create a very simple battery, similar to the one Becquerel invented in 1820, which uses only zinc. He already had the other materials, nitric acid and potash, available.
The manner in which he made this battery, in which the current was produced by the action of the acid and the potash on each other, was as follows:—
The way he created this battery, where the current was generated by the reaction of the acid and the potash with each other, was as follows:—
A certain number of glass vessels were made and filled with nitric-acid. They were corked with perforated corks, containing glass tubes reaching into the acid, and stopped: with clay plugs, connected with threads. Into these tubes the engineer poured a solution of potash—obtained from burnt plants—and thus the acid and the potash reacted on each other through the clay.
A number of glass containers were created and filled with nitric acid. They were sealed with corks that had holes, with glass tubes extending into the acid, and covered with clay plugs attached with threads. The engineer then poured a potash solution—made from burned plants—into these tubes, allowing the acid and potash to react with each other through the clay.
Then Smith plunged two plates of zinc, the one in the nitric acid, the other in the solution, and thus produced a circuit between the tube and jar, and as these plates had been connected by a bit of wire, the one in the tube became the positive and the other the negative pole of the apparatus. Each jar produced its currents, which, together, were sufficient to cause all the phenomena of the electric telegraph.
Then Smith dipped two plates of zinc, one in the nitric acid and the other in the solution, creating a circuit between the tube and the jar. Since these plates were connected by a piece of wire, the one in the tube became the positive pole, while the other became the negative pole of the apparatus. Each jar generated its own currents, which combined were enough to create all the effects of the electric telegraph.
On the 6th of February they began to erect the poles, furnished with glass insulators, and some days later the wire was stretched, ready to produce the electric current, which travels with the speed of 100,000 kilometres a second.
On February 6th, they started putting up the poles equipped with glass insulators, and a few days later, the wire was stretched out, prepared to generate the electric current that moves at a speed of 100,000 kilometers per second.
Two batteries had been made, one for Granite House, and the other for the corral, as, if the corral had to communicate with Granite House, it might, also, be needful for Granite House to communicate with the corral.
Two batteries had been made, one for Granite House and the other for the corral, because if the corral needed to communicate with Granite House, it might also be necessary for Granite House to communicate with the corral.
As to the indicator and manipulator, they were very simple. At both stations the wire was wrapped around an electro-magnet of soft iron. Communication was established between the two poles; the current, leaving the positive pole, traversed the wire, passed into the electro-magnet, and returned under ground to the negative pole. The current closed, the attraction of the electro-magnet ceased. It was, therefore, sufficient to place a plate of soft iron before the electro-magnet which, attracted while the current is passing, falls, when it is interrupted. The movement of the plate thus obtained, Smith easily fastened to it a needle, pointing to a dial, which bore the letters of the alphabet upon its face.
The indicator and manipulator were quite straightforward. At both stations, the wire was wrapped around a soft iron electromagnet. A connection was made between the two poles; the current, leaving the positive pole, flowed through the wire, into the electromagnet, and then returned underground to the negative pole. When the current was closed, the electromagnet's attraction stopped. Therefore, it was enough to place a soft iron plate in front of the electromagnet, which was attracted while the current was on and fell when it was interrupted. Smith easily attached a needle to the movement of the plate, which pointed to a dial that displayed the letters of the alphabet.
Everything was finished by the 12th of February. On that day Smith, having turned on the current, asked if everything was all right at the corral, and received, in a few moments, a satisfactory reply from Ayrton.
Everything was done by February 12th. That day, Smith switched on the power and asked if everything was okay at the corral, and shortly after, he got a reassuring response from Ayrton.
Pencroff was beside himself with delight, and every morning and evening he sent a telegraph to the corral, which never remained unanswered.
Pencroff was overjoyed, and every morning and evening he sent a telegram to the corral, which was always replied to.
This method of communication presented evident advantages, both in informing the colonists of Ayrton’s presence at the corral, and in preventing his complete isolation. Moreover, Smith never allowed a week to pass without visiting him, and Ayrton came occasionally to Granite House, where he always found a kind reception.
This way of communicating clearly had benefits, both in keeping the colonists updated about Ayrton's presence at the corral and in preventing him from being completely isolated. Additionally, Smith made sure to visit him at least once a week, and Ayrton would occasionally come to Granite House, where he was always welcomed warmly.
Continuing their accustomed work, the fine weather passed away, and the resources of the colony, particularly in vegetables and cereals, increased from day to day, and the plants brought from Tabor Island had been perfectly acclimated. The plateau presented a most attractive appearance. The fourth crop of corn had been excellent, and no one undertook to count the 400,000,000,000 grains produced in the harvest; although Pencroff had had some such idea, until Smith informed him that, supposing he could count 300 grains a minute, or 18,000 an hour, it would take him 5,500 years to accomplish his undertaking.
Continuing with their usual work, the nice weather came to an end, and the colony's resources, especially in vegetables and grains, grew every day. The plants brought from Tabor Island had fully adapted. The plateau looked very appealing. The fourth corn harvest had been excellent, and no one bothered to count the 400 billion grains produced in the harvest; although Pencroff had thought about it, until Smith told him that if he could count 300 grains a minute, or 18,000 an hour, it would take him 5,500 years to finish the task.
The weather was superb, though somewhat warm during the day; but, in the evening, the sea-breeze sprung up, tempering the air and giving refreshing nights to the inhabitants of Granite House. Still there were some storms, which, although not long continued, fell upon Lincoln Island with extraordinary violence. For several hours at a time the lightning never ceased illuminating the heavens, and the thunder roared without cessation.
The weather was great, although it was a bit hot during the day; however, in the evening, the sea breeze picked up, cooling the air and providing refreshing nights for the residents of Granite House. Still, there were some storms that, although brief, hit Lincoln Island with remarkable force. For several hours straight, lightning lit up the sky, and the thunder rumbled continuously.
This was a season of great prosperity to the little colony. The denizens of the poultry-yard increased rapidly, and the colonists lived on this increase, as it was necessary to keep the population within certain limits. The pigs had littered, and Pencroff and Neb’s attention to these animals absorbed a great part of their time. There were too young onagers, and their parents were often ridden by Spilett and Herbert, or hitched to the cart to drag wood or bring the minerals which the engineer made use of.
This was a season of great prosperity for the small colony. The residents of the poultry yard multiplied quickly, and the colonists relied on this growth to maintain their population within certain limits. The pigs had given birth, and Pencroff and Neb devoted a significant amount of their time to caring for these animals. There were also two young onagers, and their parents were often ridden by Spilett and Herbert, or hitched to the cart to haul wood or transport the minerals that the engineer used.
Many explorations were made about this time into the depths of the Far West. The explorers did not suffer from the heat, as the sun’s rays could not penetrate the leafy roof above them. Thus, they visited all that part to the left of the Mercy, bordering on the route from the corral to the mouth of Fall River.
Many explorations took place around this time into the depths of the Far West. The explorers didn’t feel the heat, as the sun’s rays couldn’t reach them through the leafy canopy overhead. As a result, they explored all the area to the left of the Mercy, along the route from the corral to the mouth of Fall River.
But during these excursions the colonists took care to be well armed, as they often encountered exceedingly savage and ferocious wild boars. They also waged war against the jaguars, for which animals Spilett had a special hatred, and his pupil, Herbert, seconded him well. Armed as they were, the hunters never shunned an encounter with these beasts, and the courage of Herbert was superb, while the coolness of the reporter was astonishing. Twenty magnificent skins already ornamented the hall at Granite House, and at this rate the jaguars would soon be exterminated.
But during these outings, the colonists made sure to be well-armed, as they frequently ran into extremely wild and fierce wild boars. They also fought against the jaguars, which Spilett had a particular dislike for, and his student, Herbert, supported him well. Equipped as they were, the hunters never backed down from a confrontation with these animals, and Herbert's bravery was remarkable, while the reporter's composure was impressive. Twenty beautiful skins already decorated the hall at Granite House, and at this pace, the jaguars would soon be wiped out.
Sometimes the engineer took part in explorations of the unknown portions of the island, which he observed with minute attention. There were other traces than those of animals which he sought for in the thickest places in the forests, but not once did anything suspicions appear. Top and Jup, who accompanied him, showed by their action that there was nothing there, and yet the dog had growled more than once again above that pit which the engineer had explored without result.
Sometimes the engineer joined in the exploration of the unknown areas of the island, which he observed closely. He looked for signs beyond just animal tracks in the densest parts of the forests, but he never found anything suspicious. Top and Jup, who were with him, made it clear through their behavior that there was nothing there, yet the dog had growled several times near that pit the engineer had checked without any results.
During this season Spilett, assisted by Herbert, took numerous views of the most picturesque portions of the island, by means of the photographic apparatus, which had not been used until now.
During this season, Spilett, with help from Herbert, captured many images of the island's most beautiful areas using the photographic equipment, which hadn’t been used until now.
This apparatus, furnished with a powerful lens, was very complete. All the substances necessary in photographic work were there; the nitrate of silver, the hyposulphata of soda, the chloride of ammonium, the acetate of soda, and the chloride of gold. Even the paper was there, all prepared, so that all that was necessary, in order to use it, was to steep it for a few moments in diluted nitrate of silver.
This setup, equipped with a strong lens, was very thorough. All the materials needed for photography were present: silver nitrate, sodium hyposulfite, ammonium chloride, sodium acetate, and gold chloride. The paper was also included, already prepared, so all that was required to use it was to soak it for a few moments in diluted silver nitrate.
The reporter and his assistant soon became expert operators, and they obtained fine views of the neighborhood, such as a comprehensive view of the island taken from Prospect Plateau, with Mount Franklin on the horizon, the mouth of the Mercy so picturesquely framed between its high rocks, the glade and the corral, with the lower spurs of the mountain in the background, the curious outline of Claw Cape, Jetsam Point, etc. Neither did the photographers forget to take portraits of all the inhabitants of the island, without exception.
The reporter and his assistant quickly became skilled operators, capturing great views of the area, like a wide shot of the island from Prospect Plateau, with Mount Franklin in the distance, the entrance of the Mercy beautifully framed by its tall rocks, the clearing and the corral, along with the lower slopes of the mountain in the background, and the unique shape of Claw Cape, Jetsam Point, and so on. The photographers also made sure to take portraits of all the island's inhabitants, without leaving anyone out.
“Its people,” as Pencroff expressed it.
“Its people,” as Pencroff put it.
And the sailor was charmed to see his likeness, faithfully reproduced, ornamenting the walls of Granite House, and he stood before this display as pleased as if he had been gazing in one of the richest show-windows on Broadway.
And the sailor was delighted to see his likeness, accurately reproduced, decorating the walls of Granite House, and he stood before this display as pleased as if he were looking into one of the most extravagant shop windows on Broadway.
It must be confessed, however, that the portrait, showing the finest execution, was that of master Jup. Master Jup has posed with a gravity impossible to describe, and his picture was a speaking likeness!
It must be acknowledged, however, that the portrait, showcasing exceptional skill, was that of Master Jup. Master Jup posed with a seriousness that’s hard to put into words, and his picture was a striking resemblance!
“One would say he was laughing!” exclaimed Pencroff.
“One could say he was laughing!” exclaimed Pencroff.
And if Jup had not been satisfied, he must have been hard to please. But there it was, and he contemplated his image with such a sentimental air, that it was evident he was a little conceited.
And if Jupiter hadn’t been satisfied, he must have been hard to please. But there it was, and he looked at his reflection with such a sentimental expression that it was clear he was a bit full of himself.
The heat of the summer ended with March. The season was rainy, but the air was still warm, and the month was not as pleasant as they had expected. Perhaps it foreboded an early and a rigorous winter.
The summer heat ended with March. It was a rainy season, but the air was still warm, and the month wasn't as enjoyable as they had hoped. Maybe it was a sign of an early and harsh winter ahead.
One morning, the 21st, Herbert had risen early, and, looking from the window, exclaimed:—
One morning, the 21st, Herbert got up early and, looking out the window, said:—
“Hullo, the islet is covered with snow!”
“Hellо, the islet is covered in snow!”
“Snow at this season!” cried the reporter, joining the lad.
“Snow at this time of year!” the reporter exclaimed, joining the boy.
Their companions were soon beside them, and every one saw that not only the islet, but that the entire beach below Granite House, was covered with the white mantle.
Their friends soon joined them, and everyone noticed that not just the islet, but the whole beach below Granite House, was covered with a white blanket.
“It is, indeed, snow,” said Pencroff.
“It is, indeed, snow,” Pencroff said.
“Or something very much like it,” replied Neb.
“Or something pretty similar,” replied Neb.
“But the thermometer stands at 58°,” said Spilett.
“But the thermometer reads 58°,” said Spilett.
Smith looked at the white covering without speaking, for he was, indeed, at a loss how to explain such a phenomenon in this season and in this temperature.
Smith stared at the white covering in silence, as he truly didn’t know how to explain such an occurrence in this season and weather.
“The deuce!” cried the sailor; “our crops will have been frost-bitten.”
“The heck!” shouted the sailor; “our crops will have been frost-bitten.”
And he was about descending when Jup sprang before him and slid down the rope to the ground.
And he was about to go down when Jup jumped in front of him and slid down the rope to the ground.
The orang had scarcely touched the earth before the immense body of snow rose and scattered itself through the air in such innumerable flocks as to darken all the heavens for a time.
The orang had barely landed on the ground when the massive snow began to rise and spread through the air in so many flocks that it darkened the sky for a while.
“They are birds!” cried Herbert.
“They're birds!” cried Herbert.
The effect had, indeed, been produced by myriads of sea-birds, with plumage of brilliant whiteness. They had come from hundreds of miles around on to the islet and the coast, and they now disappeared in the horizon, leaving the colonists as amazed as if they had witnessed a transformation scene, from winter to summer, in some fancy spectacle. Unfortunately, the change had been so sudden that neither the reporter nor the lad had had an opportunity of knocking over some of these birds, whose species they did not recognize.
The effect was really created by countless sea birds with bright white feathers. They had flown in from hundreds of miles away to the islet and the shore, and now they were fading into the horizon, leaving the colonists as amazed as if they had seen a scene change from winter to summer in some fancy show. Unfortunately, the change had happened so quickly that neither the reporter nor the boy had the chance to take down some of these birds, whose species they didn’t know.
A few days later, and it was the 26th of March. Two years had passed since the balloon had been thrown upon Lincoln Island.
A few days later, it was March 26th. Two years had gone by since the balloon was sent to Lincoln Island.
CHAPTER XLI.
THOUGHTS OF HOME—CHANCES OF RETURN —PLAN TO EXPLORE THE COAST—THE DEPARTURE OF THE 16TH OF APRIL—SERPENTINE PENINSULA SEEN FROM SEA—THE BASALTIC CLIFFS OF THE WESTERN COAST—BAD WEATHER—NIGHT—A NEW INCIDENT.
THOUGHTS OF HOME—CHANCES OF RETURN—PLAN TO EXPLORE THE COAST—THE DEPARTURE ON APRIL 16TH—SERPENTINE PENINSULA VIEWED FROM THE SEA—BASALT CLIFFS OF THE WEST COAST—BAD WEATHER—NIGHT—A NEW INCIDENT.
Two years already! For two years the colonists had had no communication with their fellows! They knew no more of what was happening in the world, lost upon this island, than if they had been upon the most distant asteroid of the solar system.
Two years already! For two years, the colonists had no contact with their fellow humans! They were just as clueless about what was happening in the world, stranded on this island, as if they were on the farthest asteroid in the solar system.
What was going on in their country? Their fatherland was always present to their eyes, that land which, when they left it, was torn by civil strife, which perhaps was still red with rebellious blood. It was a great grief to them, this war, and they often talked about it, never doubting, however, that the cause of the North would triumph for the honor of the American confederation.
What was happening in their country? Their homeland was always in their sight, the land that, when they left it, was being ripped apart by civil war, which might still be stained with the blood of rebellion. This war was a great sorrow for them, and they often talked about it, never doubting, though, that the North's cause would prevail for the honor of the American union.
During these two years not a ship had been seen. It was evident that Lincoln Island was out of the route of vessels; that it was unknown—the maps proved this—was evident, because, although it had no harbor, yet its streams would have drawn thither vessels desiring to renew their supply of water. But the surrounding sea was always desert, and the colonists could count on no outside help to bring them to their home.
During these two years, no ships had been spotted. It was clear that Lincoln Island was off the usual shipping routes; the maps confirmed this. Even though it had no harbor, its streams should have attracted vessels looking to refill their water supplies. However, the surrounding sea was always empty, and the colonists could rely on no outside help to bring them back home.
Nevertheless, one chance of rescue existed, which was discussed one day in the first week of April, when the colonists were gathered in the hall of Granite House.
Nevertheless, there was one chance for rescue, which was talked about one day during the first week of April, when the colonists were gathered in the hall of Granite House.
They had been talking of America and of the small hope of ever seeing it again.
They had been discussing America and the slim chance of ever seeing it again.
“Undoubtedly, there is but one way of leaving the island,” said Spilett, “which is, to build a vessel large enough to make a voyage of some hundreds of miles. It seems to me, that, when one can build a shallop, they can readily build a ship.”
“Clearly, there's only one way to leave the island,” said Spilett, “and that’s to build a boat big enough to travel hundreds of miles. It seems to me that if someone can build a small boat, they can easily build a larger ship.”
“And that they can as easily go to the Low Archipelago as to Tabor Island,” added Herbert.
“And they can just as easily go to the Low Archipelago as to Tabor Island,” added Herbert.
“I do not say we cannot,” replied Pencroff, who always had the most to say on questions of a maritime nature; “I do not say we cannot, although it is very different whether one goes far or near! If our sloop had been threatened with bad weather when we went to Tabor Island, we knew that a shelter was not far off in either direction; but 1,200 miles to travel is a long bit of road, and the nearest land is at least that distance!”
“I’m not saying we can’t,” replied Pencroff, who always had the most to say about maritime matters. “I’m not saying we can’t, but it’s a whole different story whether we’re going far or near! When our sloop faced bad weather on the way to Tabor Island, we knew a shelter wasn’t far in either direction; but traveling 1,200 miles is a long way, and the nearest land is at least that far!”
“Do you mean, supposing the case to occur, Pencroff, that you would not risk it?” questioned the reporter.
“Are you saying, if that situation came up, Pencroff, that you wouldn't take the chance?” asked the reporter.
“I would undertake whatever you wished, sir,” replied the sailor, “and you know I am not the man to draw back.”
“I would do whatever you wanted, sir,” the sailor replied, “and you know I’m not the kind of person to back down.”
“Remember, moreover, that we have another sailor with us, now,” said Neb.
“Also, keep in mind that we have another sailor with us now,” said Neb.
“Who do you mean,” asked Pencroff.
“Who are you talking about?” Pencroff asked.
“Ayrton.”
“Ayrton.”
“That is true,” responded Herbert.
"That's true," replied Herbert.
“If he would join us,” remarked Pencroff.
“If he would join us,” Pencroff said.
“Why,” said the reporter, “do you think that if Lord Glenarvan’s yacht had arrived at Tabor Island while Ayrton was living there, that he would have refused to leave?”
“Why,” said the reporter, “do you think that if Lord Glenarvan’s yacht had arrived at Tabor Island while Ayrton was living there, he would have refused to leave?”
“You forget, my friends,” said Smith, “that Ayrton was not himself during the last few years there. But that is not the question. It is important to know whether we can count on the return of this Scotch vessel as among our chances for rescue. Now, Lord Glenarvan promised Ayrton that he would return to Tabor Island, when he judged his crimes sufficiently punished, and I believe that he will return.
“You're forgetting, my friends,” said Smith, “that Ayrton wasn't himself in the last few years there. But that’s not the main point. What’s important is whether we can rely on the return of this Scottish ship as one of our chances for rescue. Now, Lord Glenarvan promised Ayrton that he would come back to Tabor Island when he felt his crimes had been sufficiently punished, and I believe he will return.”
“Yes,” said the reporter, “and, moreover, I think he will return soon, as already Ayrton has been here twelve years!”
“Yes,” said the reporter, “and I believe he will be back soon, especially since Ayrton has already been here for twelve years!”
“I, also, think this lord will come back, and, probably, very soon. But where will he come to? Not here, but to Tabor Island.”
“I also think this lord will be back, and probably pretty soon. But where will he arrive? Not here, but at Tabor Island.”
“That is as sure as that Lincoln Island is not on the maps,” said Herbert.
"That's as certain as Lincoln Island not being on the maps," said Herbert.
“Therefore, my friends,” replied Smith, “we must take the necessary precautions to have Ayrton’s and our presence on Lincoln Island advertised on Tabor Island.”
“Therefore, friends,” replied Smith, “we need to make sure that Ayrton’s and our presence on Lincoln Island is announced on Tabor Island.”
“Evidently,” said the reporter, “and nothing can be easier than to place in Captain Grant’s cabin a notice, giving the situation of our island.”
“Obviously,” said the reporter, “and it would be easy to put a notice in Captain Grant’s cabin, explaining the location of our island.”
“It is, nevertheless, annoying,” rejoined the sailor, “that we forgot to do that on our first voyage to the place.”
“It’s really annoying,” the sailor replied, “that we forgot to do that on our first trip to the place.”
“Why should we have done so?” replied Herbert. “We knew nothing about Ayrton at that time, and when we learned his history, the season was too far advanced to allow of our going back there.”
“Why should we have done that?” replied Herbert. “We didn’t know anything about Ayrton back then, and by the time we learned his history, the season was too far along for us to go back there.”
“Yes,” answered Smith, “it was too late then, and we had to postpone the voyage until spring.”
“Yes,” Smith replied, “it was too late then, and we had to postpone the trip until spring.”
“But supposing the yacht comes in the meantime?” asked Pencroff.
“But what if the yacht arrives in the meantime?” asked Pencroff.
“It is not likely,” replied the engineer, “as Lord Glenarvan would not choose the winter season to adventure into these distant seas. Either it has already been to the island, in the five months that Ayrton has been with us, or it will come later, and it will be time enough, in the first fine weather of October, to go to Tabor Island and leave a notice there.”
“It’s unlikely,” replied the engineer, “since Lord Glenarvan wouldn’t choose to venture into these distant seas during the winter. Either it has already been to the island in the five months since Ayrton joined us, or it will come later, and we can wait until the first nice weather in October to go to Tabor Island and leave a message there.”
“It would, indeed, be unfortunate,” said Neb, “if the Duncan has been to and left these seas within a few months.”
“It would really be a shame,” said Neb, “if the Duncan has been in and left these waters in just a few months.”
“I hope that it is not so,” answered Smith, “and that Heaven has not deprived us of this last remaining chance.”
“I hope that's not the case,” Smith replied, “and that Heaven hasn't taken away this last remaining chance from us.”
“I think,” observed the reporter, “that, at least, we will know what our chances are, when we have visited the island; for those Stockmen would, necessarily, leave some trace of their visit, had they been there.”
“I think,” the reporter noted, “that at least we’ll know what our chances are once we’ve visited the island; after all, those stockmen would have left some sign of their presence if they were there.”
“Doubtless,” answered the engineer. “And, my friends, since we have this chance of rescue, let us wait patiently, and if we find it has been taken from us, we will see then what to do.”
“Definitely,” replied the engineer. “And, my friends, since we have this opportunity for rescue, let’s wait patiently, and if we find it’s been taken away from us, we’ll figure out what to do then.”
“At any rate,” said Pencroff, “it is agreed that if we do leave the inland by some way or another, it will not be on account of ill-treatment!”
“At any rate,” said Pencroff, “we all agree that if we leave the inland somehow, it won’t be because of mistreatment!”
“No indeed, Pencroff,” replied the reporter, “it will be because we are far from everything which a man loves in this world, his family, his friends, his country!”
“No way, Pencroff,” replied the reporter, “it’s because we’re far from everything a person loves in this world: their family, their friends, their country!”
Everything having been thus arranged there was no longer any question of building a ship, and the colonists occupied themselves in preparing for their third winter in Granite House.
Everything having been arranged this way, there was no longer any question of building a ship, and the colonists focused on getting ready for their third winter in Granite House.
But they determined, before the bad weather set in, to make a voyage in the sloop around the island. The exploration of the coast had never been completed, and the colonists had only an imperfect idea of its western and northern portions from the mouth of Fall River to the Mandible Capes, and of the narrow bay between them.
But they decided, before the bad weather hit, to take a trip in the sloop around the island. The exploration of the coast had never been finished, and the colonists only had a partial understanding of its western and northern parts from the mouth of Fall River to the Mandible Capes, and of the narrow bay in between.
Pencroff had proposed this excursion, and Smith had gladly agreed to it, as he wished to see for himself all that part of his domain.
Pencroff had suggested this trip, and Smith had happily accepted, as he wanted to see for himself all of that part of his territory.
The weather was still unsettled, but the barometer made no rapid changes, and they might expect fair days. So, in the first week of April, after a very low barometer, its rise was followed by a strong west wind, which lasted for five or six weeks; then the needle of the instrument became stationary at a high figure, and everything seemed propitious for the exploration.
The weather was still unpredictable, but the barometer wasn't showing any quick changes, so fair days were expected. In the first week of April, after a very low barometer reading, it started to rise, followed by a strong west wind that lasted for five or six weeks. Then the needle on the instrument stayed steady at a high figure, making everything seem favorable for the exploration.
The day of departure was set for the 16th, and the Good Luck, moored in Balloon Harbor, was provisioned for a long cruise.
The departure day was scheduled for the 16th, and the Good Luck, anchored in Balloon Harbor, was stocked up for a long journey.
Smith told Ayrton of the excursion, and proposed to him to take part in it; but as Ayrton preferred to remain on shore, it was decided that he should come to Granite House while his companions were absent. Jup was left to keep him company, and made no objection.
Smith told Ayrton about the trip and suggested that he join in; however, since Ayrton preferred to stay on land, they decided that he should come to Granite House while the others were away. Jup was left to keep him company and didn’t mind at all.
On the morning of the 16th all the colonists, including Top, went on board the Good Luck. The breeze blew fresh from the south-west, so that from Balloon Harbor they had to beat up against the wind in order to make Reptile End. The distance between these two points, following the coast, was twenty miles. As the wind was dead ahead, and they had had on starting but two hours of the ebb, it took all day to reach the promontory, and it was night before the point was doubled.
On the morning of the 16th, all the colonists, including Top, boarded the Good Luck. The breeze blew briskly from the southwest, so they had to sail against the wind from Balloon Harbor to reach Reptile End. The distance between the two locations, following the coast, was twenty miles. Since the wind was directly in front of them, and they had only two hours of outgoing tide when they started, it took all day to reach the promontory, and it was nighttime before they rounded the point.
Pencroff proposed to the engineer that they should keep on slowly, sailing under a double-reef, but Smith preferred mooring some cable lengths from shore, in order to survey this part of the coast by daylight.
Pencroff suggested to the engineer that they should continue slowly, sailing with a double-reefed sail, but Smith preferred to anchor a few cable lengths from the shore to survey this part of the coast in daylight.
And it was agreed that henceforth, as a minute exploration of the island was to be made, they would not sail at night, but cast anchor every evening at the most available point.
And it was agreed that from now on, since a detailed exploration of the island was to take place, they wouldn't sail at night, but would anchor every evening at the most convenient spot.
The wind fell as night approached, and the silence was unbroken. The little party, excepting Pencroff, slept less comfortably than in their beds at Granite House, but still they slept; and at daylight the next morning the sailor raised anchor, and, with a free wind, skirted the shore.
The wind died down as night drew near, and the silence was complete. The small group, aside from Pencroff, didn't sleep as well as they did in their beds at Granite House, but they still managed to sleep; and at dawn the next morning, the sailor lifted anchor and, with a favorable breeze, sailed along the shore.
The colonists knew this magnificently wooded border, as they had traversed it formerly, on foot; but its appearance excited renewed admiration. They ran as close in as possible, and moderated their speed in order to observe it carefully. Often, they would cast anchor that Spilett might take photographic views of the superb scenery.
The colonists were familiar with this beautifully wooded border since they had walked through it before, but seeing it again sparked new admiration. They got as close as they could and slowed down to take a good look. Often, they would drop anchor so that Spilett could take photos of the stunning scenery.
About noon the Good Luck arrived at the mouth of the Fall River. Above, upon the right bank, the trees were less numerous, and three miles further on they grew in mere isolated groups between the western spurs of the mountain, whose arid declivities extended to the very edge of the ocean.
About noon, the Good Luck reached the mouth of the Fall River. Up ahead, on the right bank, there were fewer trees, and three miles further, they stood in small, scattered groups between the western foothills of the mountain, whose dry slopes dropped off right to the edge of the ocean.
How great was the contrast between the southern and the northern portions of this coast! The one wooded and verdant, the other harsh and savage! It was what they call in certain countries, an “iron-bound coast,” and its tempestuous aspect seemed to indicate a sudden crystallization of the boiling basalt in the geologic epochs. How appalling would this hideous mass have been to the colonists if they had chanced to have been thrown on this part of the island! When they were on Mount Franklin, their position had been too elevated for them to recognize the awfully forbidding aspect of this shore; but, viewed from the sea, it presented an appearance, the like of which cannot be seen, perhaps, in any portion of the globe.
How stark was the contrast between the southern and northern parts of this coast! One was lush and green, while the other was rough and wild! It was what they call in some places an “iron-bound coast,” and its stormy look seemed to suggest a sudden solidification of the boiling basalt from geological ages. How terrifying would this ugly mass have been to the colonists if they had ended up on this part of the island! When they were on Mount Franklin, their location was too high for them to see the dreadfully intimidating look of this shore; but from the sea, it appeared unlike anything else, perhaps, found anywhere in the world.
The sloop passed for half a mile before this coast. It was composed of blocks of all dimensions from twenty to thirty feet high, and of all sorts of shapes, towers, steeples, pyramids, obelisks, and cones. The ice-bergs of the polar seas could not have been thrown together in more frightful confusion! Here, the rocks formed bridges, there, nave-like arches, of indistinguishable depth; in one place, were excavations resembling monumental vaults, in another a crowd of points outnumbering the pinnacles of a Gothic cathedral. All the caprices of nature, more varied than those of the imagination, were here displayed over a distance of eight or nine miles.
The sloop sailed for half a mile along this coastline. It was made up of blocks of various sizes ranging from twenty to thirty feet tall, and all sorts of shapes: towers, steeples, pyramids, obelisks, and cones. The icebergs of the polar seas couldn't have been piled up in a more chaotic way! Here, the rocks formed bridges, and there, archways with depths that were impossible to determine; in one spot, there were cavities resembling monumental vaults, and in another, a cluster of points surpassing the spires of a Gothic cathedral. Nature's whims, more diverse than human imagination, were on full display over a stretch of eight or nine miles.
Smith and companions gazed with a surprise approaching stupefaction. But, though they rested mute, Top kept up an incessant barking, which awoke a thousand echoes. The engineer noticed the same strangeness in the dog’s action as he showed at the month of the well in Granite House.
Smith and his friends stared in astonishment. However, while they were speechless, Top continued to bark non-stop, creating a chorus of echoes. The engineer observed the same odd behavior in the dog as he had at the mouth of the well in Granite House.
“Go alongside,” said Smith.
“Come with me,” said Smith.
And the Good Luck ran in as close to the rocks as possible. Perhaps there was some cavern here which it would be well to explore. But Smith saw nothing, not even a hollow which could serve as a retreat for any living thing, and the base of the rocks was washed by the surf of the sea. After a time the dog stopped barking, and the sloop kept off again at some cable lengths from the shore.
And the Good Luck sailed as close to the rocks as it could. Maybe there was a cave here worth checking out. But Smith didn't see anything, not even a spot that could hide any living creature, and the base of the rocks was constantly hit by the waves. After a while, the dog stopped barking, and the sloop drifted further away from the shore by several cable lengths.
In the northwest portion of the island the shore became flat and sandy. A few trees rose above the low and swampy ground, the home of myriads of aquatic birds.
In the northwest part of the island, the shore was flat and sandy. A few trees stood above the low, marshy land, which was home to countless water birds.
In the evening the sloop moored in a slight hollow of the shore, to the north of the island. She was close into the bank, as the water here was of great depth. The breeze died away with nightfall, and the night passed without incident.
In the evening, the sloop anchored in a small dip along the shore, to the north of the island. She was tucked close to the bank since the water here was very deep. The breeze faded away as night fell, and the night went by without any events.
The next morning Spilett and Herbert went ashore for a couple of hours and brought back many bunches of ducks and snipe, and by 8 o’clock the Good Luck, with a fair, freshening breeze, was speeding on her way to North Mandible Cape.
The next morning, Spilett and Herbert went ashore for a couple of hours and returned with lots of ducks and snipe, and by 8 o’clock, the Good Luck, with a nice, fresh breeze, was making good speed toward North Mandible Cape.
“I should not be surprised,” said Pencroff, “if we had a squall. Yesterday the sun set red, and, this morning, the cats-tails foreboded no good.”
“I wouldn't be surprised,” said Pencroff, “if we got a squall. Yesterday the sun set red, and this morning, the cat-tails aren't looking good.”
These “cats-tails”—were slender cyrrhi, scattered high above, in the zenith. These feathery messengers usually announce the near disturbance of the elements.
These “cats-tails” were slim, curly features high up in the sky. These feathery signs usually indicate an upcoming change in the weather.
“Very well, then,” said Smith, “crowd on all sail and make for Shark Gulf. There, I think the sloop will be safe.”
“Alright, then,” said Smith, “put up all the sails and head for Shark Gulf. I believe the sloop will be safe there.”
“Perfectly,” replied the sailor, “and, moreover, the north coast is nothing but uninteresting downs.”
“Absolutely,” answered the sailor, “and, on top of that, the north coast is just boring hills.”
“I shall not regret,” added the engineer, “passing, not only the night, but also tomorrow in that bay, which deserves to be explored with care.”
“I won’t regret,” the engineer added, “spending not just the night, but also tomorrow in that bay, which is worth exploring thoroughly.”
“I guess we’ll have to, whether we want to or no,” replied Pencroff, “as it is beginning to be threatening in the west. See how dirty it looks!”
“I guess we’ll have to, whether we want to or not,” replied Pencroff, “since it’s starting to look threatening in the west. Look how grimy it appears!”
“Any how, we have a good wind to make Mandible Cape,” observed the reporter.
“Anyway, we have a good wind to reach Mandible Cape,” noted the reporter.
“First rate; but, we will have to tack to get into the gulf, and I would rather have clear weather in those parts which I know nothing about.”
“First rate; but we'll have to maneuver to get into the gulf, and I’d prefer clear weather in those areas I know nothing about.”
“Parts which are sown with reefs,” added Herbert, “if I may judge from what we have seen of the coast to the south of the gulf.”
“Areas that are covered with reefs,” Herbert added, “if I can judge by what we've observed of the coast south of the gulf.”
“Pencroff,” said Smith, “do whatever you think best, we leave everything to you.”
“Pencroff,” Smith said, “do what you think is best; we’re leaving it all up to you.”
“Rest assured, sir,” responded the sailor, “I will not run any unnecessary risk. I would rather have a knife in my vitals, than that my Good Luck should run on a rock!”
“Don’t worry, sir,” the sailor replied, “I won’t take any unnecessary risks. I’d rather take a knife to my gut than let my Good Luck hit a rock!”
“What time is it?” asked Pencroff.
“What time is it?” Pencroff asked.
“10 o’clock.”
“10 AM.”
“And how far is it to the cape?”
“And how far is it to the cape?”
“About fifteen miles.”
“Approximately fifteen miles.”
“That will take two hours and a half. Unfortunately, the tide then will be going down, and it will be a hard matter to enter the gulf with wind and tide against us.”
“That will take two and a half hours. Unfortunately, the tide will be going out then, and it will be difficult to enter the gulf with the wind and tide against us.”
“Moreover,” said Herbert, “it is full moon to-day, and these April tides are very strong.”
“Also,” said Herbert, “it’s a full moon today, and these April tides are really strong.”
“But, Pencroff,” asked Smith, “cannot you anchor at the cape?”
“But, Pencroff,” asked Smith, “can’t you anchor at the cape?”
“Anchor close to land, with bad weather coming on!” cried the sailor. “That would be to run ourselves ashore.”
“Drop anchor near the shore, bad weather is on the way!” shouted the sailor. “That would just be sailing straight into trouble.”
“Then what will you do?”
“What will you do next?”
“Keep off, if possible, until the tide turns, which will be about 1 o’clock, and if there is any daylight left try to enter the gulf; if not, we will beat on and off until daylight.”
“Stay away, if you can, until the tide changes, which will be around 1 o’clock. If there's still some daylight, try to enter the gulf; if not, we’ll just cruise back and forth until it’s light out.”
“I have said, Pencroff, that we will leave everything to your judgment.”
“I’ve said, Pencroff, that we’ll leave everything up to your judgment.”
“Ah,” said Pencroff, “if only there was a light-house on this coast it would be easier for sailors.”
“Ah,” said Pencroff, “if only there were a lighthouse on this coast, it would be easier for sailors.”
“Yes,” answered Herbert, “and this time we have no thoughtful engineer to light a fire to guide us into harbor.”
“Yes,” replied Herbert, “and this time we don’t have a thoughtful engineer to light a fire to guide us into port.”
“By the way, Cyrus,” said Spilett, “we have never thanked you for that; but indeed, without that fire we would not have reached—”
“By the way, Cyrus,” Spilett said, “we’ve never thanked you for that; but honestly, without that fire we wouldn’t have made it—”
“A fire?” demanded Smith, astounded by the words of the reporter.
“A fire?” Smith asked, astonished by the reporter's words.
“We wish to say, sir,” said Pencroff, “that we would have been in a bad fix on board the Good Luck, when we were nearly back, and that we would have passed to windward of the island unless you had taken the precaution to light a fire, on the night of the 19th of October, upon the plateau above Granite House.”
“We want to say, sir,” said Pencroff, “that we would have been in a tough situation on board the Good Luck when we were almost back, and that we would have sailed past the island if you hadn’t taken the precaution to start a fire on the night of October 19th, up on the plateau above Granite House.”
“Oh, yes, yes! It was a happy thought!” replied Smith.
“Oh, yes, yes! That was a great idea!” replied Smith.
“And now,” added Pencroff, “unless Ayrton thinks of it, there is not a soul to do us this little service.”
“And now,” Pencroff added, “unless Ayrton comes up with it, there’s not a single person around to do us this little favor.”
“No—no one!” replied Smith.
“No—nobody!” replied Smith.
And a moment or two later, being alone with Spilett, the engineer whispered to him:—
And a moment or two later, being alone with Spilett, the engineer whispered to him:—
“If there is anything sure in this world, Spilett, it is that I never lit a fire on that night, either on the plateau or anywhere else!”
“If there's one thing that's certain in this world, Spilett, it’s that I never started a fire that night, either on the plateau or anywhere else!”
CHAPTER XLII.
NIGHT AT SEA—SHARK GULF—CONFIDENCES—PREPARATIONS FOR WINTER—EARLY ADVENT OF BAD WEATHER—COLD—IN-DOOR WORK—SIX MONTHS LATER—A SPECK ON THE PHOTOGRAPH—AN UNEXPECTED EVENT.
NIGHT AT SEA—SHARK GULF—SECRETS—GETTING READY FOR WINTER—THE EARLY ARRIVAL OF BAD WEATHER—COLD—INDOOR WORK—SIX MONTHS LATER—A SPOT ON THE PHOTO—AN UNEXPECTED EVENT.
The sailor’s predictions were well founded. The breeze changed to a strong blow such as would hare caused a ship in the open sea to have lowered her topmasts and sailed under close reefs. The sloop was opposite the gulf at 6 o’clock, but the tide was running out, so all that Pencroff could do was to bend the jib down to the mainmast as a stay-sail and lie to with the bows of the Good Luck pointing on shore.
The sailor's predictions were right on point. The breeze turned into a strong wind that would have forced a ship in the open sea to lower its topmasts and sail under close reefs. The sloop was near the gulf at 6 o'clock, but the tide was going out, so all Pencroff could do was tie the jib down to the mainmast as a stay-sail and let the bows of the Good Luck point toward the shore.
Fortunately, although the wind was strong, the ocean, protected by the coast, was not very rough, and there was no danger from heavy seas, which would have tried the staunchness of the little craft. Pencroff, although he had every confidence in his boat, waited anxiously for daylight.
Fortunately, even though the wind was strong, the ocean, sheltered by the coast, wasn't too choppy, and there was no threat from huge waves that would have tested the durability of the small boat. Pencroff, despite having complete faith in his vessel, waited nervously for the morning light.
During the night Smith and Spilett had not another opportunity to talk alone, although the whispered words of the engineer made the reporter anxious to discuss with him again the mysterious influence which seemed to pervade Lincoln Island. Spilett could not rid himself of the thought of this new and inexplicable incident. He and his companions also had certainly seen this light, and yet Smith declared that he knew nothing about it.
During the night, Smith and Spilett didn't have another chance to talk privately, even though the engineer's quiet comments made the reporter eager to discuss again the strange presence that seemed to fill Lincoln Island. Spilett couldn’t shake off the thought of this new and puzzling event. He and his companions definitely saw the light, and yet Smith claimed he knew nothing about it.
He determined to return to this subject as soon as they returned home, and to urge Smith to inform their companions of these strange events. Perhaps, then, they would decide to make, altogether, a thorough search into every part of the island.
He decided to bring this up again as soon as they got home and to encourage Smith to tell their friends about these strange events. Maybe then they would all agree to do a complete search of every part of the island.
Whatever it was, no light appeared upon these unknown shores during this night, and at daylight the wind, which had moderated somewhat, shifted a couple of points, and permitted Pencroff to enter the gulf without difficulty. About 7 o’clock the Good Luck passed into these waters enclosed in a grotesque frame of lava.
Whatever it was, no light showed up on these unknown shores that night, and by morning the wind, which had calmed down a bit, changed direction slightly, allowing Pencroff to enter the gulf without any problems. Around 7 o'clock, the Good Luck made its way into these waters surrounded by a strange frame of lava.
“Here,” said Pencroff, “is a fine roadstead, where fleets could ride at ease.”
“Here,” said Pencroff, “is a great harbor where fleets could anchor comfortably.”
“It is curious,” remarked Smith, “that this gulf has been formed by two successive streams of lava, completely enclosing its waters; and it is probable that, in the worst weather, the sea here is perfectly calm.”
“It’s interesting,” said Smith, “that this gulf was created by two flows of lava, completely surrounding its waters; and it’s likely that, during the worst weather, the sea here is completely calm.”
“It is a little too large for the Good Luck,” remarked the reporter.
“It's a bit too big for the Good Luck,” the reporter noted.
“I admit that,” replied the sailor, “but if the navy of the United States needed a shelter in the Pacific, I don’t think they could find a better roadstead than this!”
“I admit that,” replied the sailor, “but if the U.S. Navy needed a place to take shelter in the Pacific, I don’t think they could find a better hideout than this!”
“We are in the shark’s jaws,” said Neb, alluding to the form of the gulf.
“We're in the shark's jaws,” said Neb, referring to the shape of the gulf.
“We are, indeed,” replied Herbert; “but, Neb, you are not afraid that they will close on us?”
“We are, for sure,” replied Herbert; “but, Neb, aren’t you worried they’ll close in on us?”
“No, sir, not that; and yet I don’t like the looks of the place. It has a wicked aspect.”
“No, sir, not that; but I really don’t like how the place looks. It has a sinister vibe.”
“So Neb begins running down my roadstead just as I was thinking to offer it to the United States!” cried Pencroff.
“So Neb starts running down my path just as I was thinking about offering it to the United States!” exclaimed Pencroff.
“But are its waters deep enough?” asked the engineer.
“But are the waters deep enough?” asked the engineer.
“That is easily seen,” answered the sailor, taking the sounding line, which measured fifty fathoms, and letting it down. It unrolled to the end without touching bottom.
“That is easy to see,” replied the sailor, grabbing the sounding line, which was fifty fathoms long, and letting it down. It unraveled to the end without touching the bottom.
“There,” said Pencroff, “our iron-clads could come here without running aground!”
“There,” said Pencroff, “our warships could come here without hitting the bottom!”
“In truth,” said Smith, “this gulf is an abyss; but when we remember the plutonic origin of the island, that is not extraordinary.”
“In truth,” said Smith, “this gulf is an abyss; but when we remember the underground origin of the island, that is not surprising.”
“One might think,” said Herbert, “that these walls had been cut with an instrument, and I believe that at their very base, even with a line six times as long, we could not reach the bottom.”
“One might think,” said Herbert, “that these walls were shaped with a tool, and I believe that even at their very base, with a line six times longer, we still couldn’t reach the bottom.”
“All this is very well,” said the reporter, “but I would suggest that Pencroff’s roadstead lacks one important element.”
“All this is great,” said the reporter, “but I think Pencroff’s harbor is missing one important thing.”
“What is that?”
"What's that?"
“A cut, or pathway of some kind, by which one could go inland. I do not see a place where there is even a foothold.”
“A path or route of some sort that leads inland. I can’t find anywhere to even get a foothold.”
And, indeed, these steep lava walls afforded no landing place on all their circumference. The Good Luck, skirting within touching distance of the lava, found no place where the passengers could disembark.
And, in fact, these steep lava walls offered no landing spot all around. The Good Luck, hugging the edge of the lava, found no spot where the passengers could get off.
Pencroff consoled himself by saying that they could blow up the wall, if they wanted to, and then, as there was certainly nothing to be done here, he turned towards the narrow opening, which was passed at 2 o’clock.
Pencroff comforted himself by stating that they could blow up the wall if they wanted to. Since there was clearly nothing else to do here, he turned toward the narrow opening, which was passed at 2 o’clock.
Neb gave a long sigh of relief. It was evident that the brave negro had not been comfortable in those enormous jaws!
Neb let out a long sigh of relief. It was clear that the brave man hadn’t been comfortable in those huge jaws!
The sloop was now headed for Granite House, eight miles distant, and, with a fair wind, coasted along within a mile of the shore. The enormous lava rocks were soon succeeded by the oddly-disposed downs, among which the engineer had been so singularly discovered, and the place was covered with sea-birds.
The sloop was now making its way to Granite House, eight miles away, and with a favorable wind, sailed along within a mile of the shore. The massive lava rocks were quickly replaced by the strangely shaped hills, where the engineer had been so uniquely found, and the area was filled with sea birds.
Towards 4 o’clock, Pencroff, leaving the islet to the left, entered the channel separating it from the island, and an hour later cast anchor in the Mercy.
Towards 4 o’clock, Pencroff, leaving the islet to the left, entered the channel separating it from the island, and an hour later dropped anchor in the Mercy.
The colonists had been absent three days. Ayrton was waiting for them on the shore, and Jup came joyously to welcome them, grinning with satisfaction.
The colonists had been gone for three days. Ayrton was waiting for them on the shore, and Jup came happily to greet them, grinning with delight.
The entire exploration of the coast had been made, and nothing suspicious had been seen. So that if any mysterious being resided on the island, it must be under cover of the impenetrable woods on Serpentine Peninsula, which the colonists had not, as yet, investigated.
The whole exploration of the coast had been completed, and nothing unusual had been spotted. So if there was any mysterious being living on the island, it had to be hidden in the dense woods of Serpentine Peninsula, which the colonists hadn't looked into yet.
Spilett talked the matter over with the engineer, and it was agreed that they should call their comrades’ attention to these strange events, the last one of which was the most inexplicable of all.
Spilett discussed the situation with the engineer, and they agreed to bring their friends' attention to these unusual events, the latest of which was the most baffling of all.
“Are you sure you saw it, Spilett?” asked Smith, for the twentieth time. “Was it not a partial eruption of the volcano, or some meteor?”
“Are you sure you saw it, Spilett?” Smith asked for the twentieth time. “Was it just a partial eruption of the volcano, or maybe a meteor?”
“No, Cyrus, it wag certainly a fire lit by the hand of man. For that matter, question Pencroff and Herbert. They saw it also, and they will confirm my words.”
“No, Cyrus, it was definitely a fire made by a person. In fact, ask Pencroff and Herbert. They saw it too, and they will back me up.”
So, some evenings later, on the 26th of April, when all the colonists were gathered together on Prospect Plateau, Smith began:—
So, a few evenings later, on April 26th, when all the colonists were assembled on Prospect Plateau, Smith started:—
“My friends, I want to call your attention to certain things which are happening in our island, and to a subject on which I am anxious to have your advice. These things are almost supernatural—”
“My friends, I want to draw your attention to some things that are happening on our island, and to a topic where I’m eager to get your advice. These events are almost supernatural—”
“Supernatural!” exclaimed the sailor, puffing his pipe. “Can anything be supernatural?”
“Supernatural!” the sailor exclaimed, puffing on his pipe. “Can anything really be supernatural?”
“No, Pencroff, but certainly mysterious; unless, indeed, you can explain what Spilett and I have been unable to account for up to this time.”
“No, Pencroff, but definitely mysterious; unless, of course, you can explain what Spilett and I haven't been able to figure out until now.”
“Let us hear it, Mr. Smith,” replied the sailor.
“Let’s hear it, Mr. Smith,” said the sailor.
“Very well. Have you understood, then, how, after being thrown into the sea, I was found a quarter of a mile inland, without my having been conscious of getting there?”
“Okay. Do you understand how, after being tossed into the sea, I ended up a quarter of a mile inland, without even realizing how I got there?”
“Possibly, having fainted,”—began the sailor.
"Maybe I passed out," the sailor began.
“That is not admissible,” answered the engineer; “but, letting that go, have you understood how Top discovered your retreat five miles from the place where I lay?”
"That's not allowed," said the engineer. "But putting that aside, do you understand how Top found your hideout five miles away from where I was?"
“The dog’s instinct,” replied Herbert.
"The dog's instinct," replied Herbert.
“A singular instinct,” remarked the reporter, “since, in spite of the storm that was raging, Top arrived at the Chimneys dry and clean!”
“A unique instinct,” said the reporter, “especially since, despite the storm that was going on, Top showed up at the Chimneys dry and clean!”
“Let that pass,” continued the engineer; “have you understood how our dog was so strangely thrown up from the lake, after his struggle with the dugong?”
“Let that go,” the engineer continued; “did you understand how our dog was so unexpectedly tossed up from the lake after his fight with the dugong?”
“No! that I avow,” replied Pencroff, “and the wound in the dugong which seemed to have been made by some sharp instrument, I don’t understand that at all.”
“No! I admit that,” replied Pencroff, “and the wound on the dugong that looks like it was made by some sharp tool, I don’t get that at all.”
“Let us pass on again,” replied Smith. “Have you understood, my friends, how that leaden bullet was in the body of the peccary; how that box was so fortunately thrown ashore, without any trace of a shipwreck; how that bottle, enclosing the paper, was found so opportunely; how our canoe, having broken its rope, floated down the Mercy to us at the very moment when we needed it; how, after the invasion of the monkeys, the ladder was let down from Granite House; how, finally, the document, which Ayrton pretends not to have written, came into our hands?”
“Let’s move on,” replied Smith. “Do you all understand how that lead bullet ended up in the peccary's body; how that box was thrown ashore so conveniently, without any sign of a shipwreck; how that bottle, holding the paper, was found just at the right time; how our canoe, which had broken its rope, floated down the Mercy to us exactly when we needed it; how, after the monkey invasion, the ladder was lowered from Granite House; and finally, how the document that Ayrton claims he didn’t write came into our possession?”
Smith had thus enumerated, without forgetting one, the strange events that had happened on the island. Herbert, Pencroff, and Neb looked at each other, not knowing what to say, as this succession of events, thus grouped together, gave them the greatest surprise.
Smith had listed all the strange events that had happened on the island, not missing a single one. Herbert, Pencroff, and Neb exchanged glances, unsure of what to say, as this series of events, grouped together like this, surprised them the most.
“Upon my faith,” said Pencroff, at length, “you are right, Mr. Smith, and it is hard to explain those things.”
“Honestly,” said Pencroff, finally, “you’re right, Mr. Smith, and it’s tough to explain those things.”
“Very well, my friends,” continued the engineer, “one thing more is to be added, not less incomprehensible than the others!”
“Okay, my friends,” the engineer went on, “there’s one more thing to add, just as puzzling as the rest!”
“What is that?” demanded Herbert, eagerly.
“What is that?” Herbert asked eagerly.
“When you returned from Tabor Island, Pencroff, you say that you saw a light on Lincoln Island?”
“When you came back from Tabor Island, Pencroff, you mentioned that you saw a light on Lincoln Island?”
“Certainly I did.”
"Of course I did."
“And you are perfectly sure that you saw it?”
“And you’re absolutely sure you saw it?”
“As sure as that I see you.”
“As certain as I see you.”
“And you, Herbert?”
"And you, Herbert?"
“Why, Mr. Smith,” cried Herbert, “it shone like a star of the first magnitude!”
“Why, Mr. Smith,” exclaimed Herbert, “it shone like a bright star!”
“But was it not a star?” insisted the engineer.
“But wasn't it a star?” the engineer insisted.
“No,” replied Pencroff, “because the sky was covered with heavy clouds, and, under any circumstances, a star would not have been so low on the horizon. But Mr. Spilett saw it, and he can confirm what we say.”
“No,” replied Pencroff, “because the sky was covered with thick clouds, and, in any case, a star wouldn’t have been so low on the horizon. But Mr. Spilett saw it, and he can back us up on what we’re saying.”
“I would add,” said the reporter, “that it was as bright as an electric light.”
“I would add,” said the reporter, “that it was as bright as a light bulb.”
“Yes, and it was certainly placed above Granite House!” exclaimed Herbert.
“Yes, and it was definitely put above Granite House!” exclaimed Herbert.
“Very well, my friends,” replied Smith, “during all that night neither Neb nor I lit any fire at all!”
“Alright, my friends,” Smith replied, “neither Neb nor I started a fire at all that night!”
“You did not!—” cried Pencroff, so overcome with astonishment that he could not finish the sentence.
“You did not!—” exclaimed Pencroff, so overwhelmed with shock that he couldn't finish the sentence.
“We did not leave Granite House, and if any fire appeared upon the coast, it was lit by another hand!”
“We didn't leave Granite House, and if there was any fire on the coast, it was started by someone else!”
The others were stupefied with amazement. Undoubtedly a mystery existed! Some inexplicable influence, evidently favorable to the colonists, but exciting their curiosity, made itself felt upon Lincoln Island. Was there then some being hidden in its innermost retreats? They wished to know this, cost what it might!
The others were stunned with amazement. Clearly, a mystery was present! Some unexplainable force, clearly beneficial to the colonists but also piquing their curiosity, was at work on Lincoln Island. Was there some being hidden in its deepest corners? They wanted to uncover this, no matter the cost!
Smith also recalled to his companions the singular actions of Top and Jup, about the mouth of the well, and he told them that he had explored its depths without discovering anything. And the conversation ended by a determination, on the part of the colonists, to make a thorough search of the island as soon as the spring opened.
Smith also told his friends about the strange actions of Top and Jup near the well, and he mentioned that he had looked into its depths without finding anything. The conversation wrapped up with the colonists deciding to conduct a thorough search of the island as soon as spring arrived.
After this Pencroff became moody. This island, which he had looked upon as his own, did not belong to him alone, but was shared by another, to whom, whether he would or not, the sailor felt himself inferior. Neb and he often discussed these inexplicable circumstances, and readily concluded that Lincoln Island was subject to some supernatural influence.
After this, Pencroff started to feel down. This island, which he had thought of as his own, didn’t belong to him alone and was shared with someone else, to whom, whether he liked it or not, the sailor felt inferior. Neb and he often talked about these strange circumstances and easily decided that Lincoln Island was under some kind of supernatural influence.
The bad weather began early, coming in with May; and the winter occupations were undertaken without delay. The colonists were well protected from the rigor of the season. They had plenty of felt clothing, and the moufflons had furnished a quantity of wool for its further manufacture.
The bad weather started early, arriving with May, and the winter tasks were taken on without hesitation. The colonists were well shielded from the harshness of the season. They had plenty of felt clothing, and the moufflons had provided a good amount of wool for making more.
Ayrton had been comfortably clothed, and when the bad weather began, he had returned to Granite House; but he remained humble and sad, never joining in the amusements of his companions.
Ayrton had been dressed comfortably, and when the bad weather started, he returned to Granite House; but he stayed humble and sad, never joining in the fun with his companions.
The most of this third winter was passed by the colonists indoors at Granite House. The storms were frequent and terrible, the sea broke over the islet, and any ship driven upon the coast would have been lost without any chance of rescue. Twice the Mercy rose to such a height that the bridge and causeways were in danger of destruction. Often the gusts of wind, mingled with snow and rain, damaged the fields and the poultry-yard, and made constant repairs necessary.
Most of this third winter was spent by the colonists indoors at Granite House. The storms were frequent and fierce, the sea crashed over the islet, and any ship caught on the coast would have been doomed with no hope of rescue. Twice the Mercy rose to such a level that the bridge and causeways were at risk of being destroyed. Often, the gusts of wind, mixed with snow and rain, damaged the fields and the poultry yard, making constant repairs necessary.
In the midst of this season, some jaguars and quadrumanes came to the very border of the plateau, and there was danger of the bolder of these beasts making a descent on the fields and domestic animals of the colonists. So that a constant watch had to be kept upon these dangerous visitors, and this, together with the work indoors, kept the little party in Granite House busy.
In the middle of this season, some jaguars and four-handed creatures came to the edge of the plateau, and there was a risk that the bolder of these animals would attack the crops and livestock of the settlers. Therefore, a constant watch had to be maintained on these dangerous visitors, and this, along with the work inside, kept the small group in Granite House occupied.
Thus the winter passed, with now and then a grand hunt in the frozen marshes of Tadorn’s Fen. The damage done to the corral during the winter was unimportant, and was soon repaired by Ayrton, who, in the latter part of October, returned there to spend some days at work.
Thus the winter passed, with an occasional grand hunt in the frozen marshes of Tadorn’s Fen. The damage to the corral during the winter was minor and was quickly fixed by Ayrton, who returned there in late October to spend a few days working.
The winter had passed without any new incident. Top and Jup passed by the well without giving any sign of anxiety, and it seemed as if the series of supernatural events had been interrupted. Nevertheless, the colonists were fixed in their determination to make a thorough exploration of the most inaccessible parts of the island, when an event of the gravest moment, which set aside all the plans of Smith and his companions, happened.
The winter had gone by without any new incidents. Top and Jup walked past the well without showing any signs of worry, and it felt like the string of supernatural events had come to a halt. Still, the colonists were determined to thoroughly explore the more inaccessible parts of the island, when a serious event occurred that disrupted all the plans of Smith and his friends.
It was the 28th of October. Spring was rapidly approaching, and the young leaves were appearing on the trees on the edge of the forest. Herbert, tempted by the beauty of the day, determined to take a photograph of Union Bay, as it lay facing Prospect Plateau, between Mandible and Claw Capes.
It was October 28th. Spring was quickly coming, and young leaves were starting to show on the trees at the edge of the forest. Herbert, inspired by the beauty of the day, decided to take a photo of Union Bay as it stretched out in front of Prospect Plateau, between Mandible and Claw Capes.
It was 3 o’clock, the horizon was perfectly clear, and the sea, just stirred by the breeze, scintillated with light. The instrument had been placed at one of the windows of Granite House, and the lad, having secured his negative, took the glass into the dark room, where the chemicals were kept, in order to fix it. Returning to the light, after this operation, he saw a speck on the plate, just at the horizon, which he was unable to wash out.
It was 3 o’clock, the horizon was perfectly clear, and the sea, lightly ruffled by the breeze, sparkled with light. The camera had been set up at one of the windows of Granite House, and the boy, having secured his shot, took the film into the dark room, where the chemicals were stored, to process it. When he returned to the light after this task, he noticed a spot on the film, right at the horizon, that he couldn’t clean off.
“It is a defect in the glass,” he thought.
“It’s a flaw in the glass,” he thought.
And then he was seized by a curiosity to examine this speck by means of a magnifying glass made from one of the lenses of the instrument.
And then he felt a strong curiosity to take a closer look at this speck using a magnifying glass made from one of the lenses of the device.
Hardly had he given one look, when, uttering a cry of amazement, he ran with the plate and the glass to Smith. The latter examined the speck, and immediately seizing the spy-glass hurried to the window.
Hardly had he taken a glance when, letting out a gasp of astonishment, he rushed with the plate and the glass to Smith. Smith examined the speck and quickly grabbed the spyglass before hurrying to the window.
The engineer, sweeping the horizon with the glass, found the speck, and spoke one word. “A ship!”
The engineer, scanning the horizon with the telescope, spotted the speck and said one word. “A ship!”
In truth, a ship was in sight of Lincoln Island.
In fact, a ship was in sight of Lincoln Island.
CHAPTER XLIII.
LOST OR SAVED?—AYRTON RECALLED—IMPORTANT DISCUSSION—IT IS NOT THE DUNCAN—SUSPICION AND PRECAUTION—APPROACH OF THE SHIP—A CANNON SHOT—THE BRIG ANCHORS IN SIGHT OF THE ISLAND—NIGHT FALL.
LOST OR SAVED?—AYRTON REMEMBERED—IMPORTANT DISCUSSION—IT’S NOT THE DUNCAN—SUSPICION AND CAUTION—APPROACH OF THE SHIP—A CANNON SHOT—THE BRIG ANCHORS IN SIGHT OF THE ISLAND—NIGHT FALL.
Two years and a half ago, the castaways had been thrown on Lincoln Island; and up to this time they had been cut off from their kind. Once the reporter had attempted to establish communication with the civilized world, by a letter tied to the neck of a bird; but this was an expedient on whose success they could place no reliance. Ayrton, indeed, under the circumstances which have been related, had joined the little colony. And now, on the 17th of October, other men had appeared within sight of the island, on that desert sea! There could be no doubt of it; there was a ship, but would she sail away into the offing, or put in shore? The question would soon be decided. Smith and Herbert hastened to call the others into the great hall of Granite House, and inform them of what had been observed. Pencroff seized the spy-glass and swept the horizon till his gaze fell upon the point indicated.
Two and a half years ago, the castaways had been stranded on Lincoln Island, and since then, they had been isolated from civilization. Once, the reporter had tried to communicate with the outside world by attaching a letter to a bird’s neck, but they had no real hope that it would work. Ayrton, under the circumstances previously described, had joined their small group. Now, on October 17th, other men were visible from the island, out on that empty sea! There was no doubt about it; a ship was present, but would it sail away or come to shore? That question would soon be answered. Smith and Herbert rushed to gather the others in the main hall of Granite House to share what they had seen. Pencroff grabbed the spyglass and scanned the horizon until he spotted the indicated point.
“No doubt of it, she’s a ship!” said he in a tone of no great pleasure.
“No doubt about it, she’s a ship!” he said in a tone that showed little enthusiasm.
“Is she coming towards us?” asked Spilett.
“Is she coming over here?” asked Spilett.
“Impossible to say yet,” replied Pencroff, “for only her sails are visible; her hull is below the horizon.
“Can't say for sure yet,” replied Pencroff, “because only her sails are visible; her hull is below the horizon."
“What must we do?” said the boy.
“What do we need to do?” said the boy.
“We must wait,” said Smith.
“We have to wait,” said Smith.
And for a time which seemed interminable, the colonists remained in silence, moved alternately by fear and hope. They were not in the situation of castaways upon a desert island, constantly struggling with niggardly Nature for the barest means of living, and always longing to got back to their fellow-men. Pencroff and Neb, especially, would have quitted the island with great regret. They were made, in truth, for the new life which they were living in a region civilized by their own exertions! Still, this ship would bring them news of the Continent; perhaps it was an American vessel; assuredly it carried men of their own race, and their hearts beat high at the thought!
And for what felt like an eternity, the colonists remained silent, caught between fear and hope. They weren’t like castaways on a deserted island, constantly battling a harsh environment for the simplest means of survival and always wishing to return to their fellow humans. Pencroff and Neb, in particular, would have left the island with great regret. They were truly suited for the new life they were living in a place shaped by their own hard work! Still, this ship would bring them news from the mainland; maybe it was an American vessel; surely it carried people like themselves, and they felt a surge of excitement at the thought!
From time to time, Pencroff went to the window with the glass. From thence he examined the ship carefully. She was still twenty miles to the east, and they had no means of communication with her. Neither flag nor fire would have been seen; nor would the report of a gun be heard. Yet the island, with Mount Franklin towering high above it, must be visible to the lookout men on the ship. But why should the vessel land there? Was it not mere chance which brought it into that part of the Pacific, out of the usual track, and when Tabor Island was the only land indicated on the maps? But here a suggestion came from Herbert.
From time to time, Pencroff went to the window with the glass. From there, he carefully examined the ship. It was still twenty miles to the east, and they had no way to communicate with her. They wouldn’t have seen any flags or fires, nor would the sound of a gun reach them. Still, the island, with Mount Franklin rising high above it, should be visible to the lookout men on the ship. But why would the vessel land there? Was it just a coincidence that it ended up in that part of the Pacific, off the usual route, when Tabor Island was the only land shown on the maps? But then, Herbert had an idea.
“May it not be the Duncan?” cried he.
“Could it be the Duncan?” he exclaimed.
The Duncan, as our readers will remember, was Lord Glenarvan’s yacht, which had abandoned Ayrton on the islet, and was one day to come back for him. Now the islet was not so far from Lincoln Island but that a ship steering for one might pass within sight of the other. They were only 150 miles distant in longitude, and 75 in latitude.
The Duncan, as our readers will recall, was Lord Glenarvan’s yacht, which had left Ayrton on the islet and was meant to return for him one day. The islet wasn’t so far from Lincoln Island that a ship heading for one couldn’t be seen from the other. They were only 150 miles apart in longitude and 75 in latitude.
“We must warn Ayrton,” said Spilett, “and tell him to come at once. Only he can tell us whether she is the Duncan.”
“We need to warn Ayrton,” Spilett said, “and tell him to come right away. He’s the only one who can tell us if she is the Duncan.”
This was every one’s opinion, and the reporter, going to the telegraph apparatus, which communicated with the corral, telegraphed. “Come at once.” Soon the wire clicked, “I am coming.” Then the colonists turned again to watch the ship.
This was everyone’s opinion, and the reporter, heading to the telegraph machine that connected to the corral, sent a message. “Come right away.” Soon the wire clicked back, “I’m on my way.” Then the colonists turned back to watch the ship.
“If it is the Duncan,” said Herbert, “Ayrton will readily recognize her, since he was aboard her so long.”
“If it’s the Duncan,” said Herbert, “Ayrton will easily recognize her since he was on board for so long.”
“It will make him feel pretty queer!” said Pencroff.
“It will make him feel really strange!” said Pencroff.
“Yes,” replied Smith, “but Ayrton is now worthy to go on board again, and may Heaven grant it to be indeed the Duncan! These are dangerous seas for Malay pirates.”
“Yes,” replied Smith, “but Ayrton is now deserving of getting back on board, and may Heaven grant that it really is the Duncan! These seas are dangerous because of the Malay pirates.”
“We will fight for our island,” said Herbert.
“We'll fight for our island,” Herbert said.
“Yes, my boy,” answered the engineer, smiling, “but it will be better not to have to fight for her.”
“Yes, my boy,” replied the engineer with a smile, “but it would be better not to have to fight for her.”
“Let me say one thing,” said Spilett. “Our island is unknown to navigators, and it is not down in the most recent maps. Now, is not that a good reason for a ship which unexpectedly sighted it to try to run in shore?”
“Let me point out one thing,” said Spilett. “Our island isn’t known to navigators, and it isn’t on the latest maps. So, isn’t that a good reason for a ship that unexpectedly spots it to try to come ashore?”
“Certainly,” answered Pencroff.
"Sure," replied Pencroff.
“Yes,” said the engineer, “it would even be the duty of the captain to report the discovery of any island not on the maps, and to do this he must pay it a visit.”
“Yes,” said the engineer, “it would even be the captain's responsibility to report the discovery of any island not on the maps, and to do this he needs to pay it a visit.”
“Well,” said Pencroff, “suppose this ship casts anchor within a few cables’ length of our island, what shall we do?”
“Well,” said Pencroff, “let’s say this ship drops anchor a short distance from our island, what are we going to do?”
This downright question for a while remained unanswered. Then Smith, after reflection, said in his usual calm tone:—
This straightforward question went unanswered for a while. Then Smith, after thinking it over, said in his usual calm tone:—
“What we must do, my friends, is this. We will open communication with the ship, take passage on board of her, and leave our island, after having taken possession of it in the name of the United States of America.
“What we need to do, my friends, is this. We will connect with the ship, get on board, and leave our island after officially claiming it in the name of the United States of America.”
Afterwards we will return with a band of permanent colonists, and endow our Republic with a useful station on the Pacific!”
After that, we'll come back with a group of permanent settlers and give our Republic a valuable outpost on the Pacific!
“Good!” said Pencroff, “that will be a pretty big present to our country! We have really colonized it already. We have named every part of the island; there is a natural port, a supply of fresh water, roads, a line of telegraph, a wood yard, a foundry; we need only put the island on the maps!”
“Awesome!” said Pencroff, “that’s going to be quite a gift to our country! We’ve really settled it already. We’ve named every part of the island; there’s a natural harbor, a fresh water supply, roads, a telegraph line, a lumber yard, a foundry; we just need to get the island on the maps!”
“But suppose some one else should occupy it while we are gone?” said Spilett.
“But what if someone else takes it while we’re away?” said Spilett.
“I would sooner stay here alone to guard it,” cried the sailor, “and, believe me, they would not steal it from me, like a watch from a gaby’s pocket!”
“I’d rather stay here alone to protect it,” yelled the sailor, “and trust me, they wouldn’t be able to steal it from me, like swiping a watch from a clueless kid’s pocket!”
For the next hour, it was impossible to say whether or not the vessel was making for the island. She had drawn nearer, but Pencroff could not make out her course. Nevertheless, as the wind blew from the northeast, it seemed probable that she was on the starboard tack. Besides, the breeze blew straight for the landing, and the sea was so calm that she would not hesitate to steer for the island, though the soundings were not laid down in the charts.
For the next hour, it was hard to tell if the ship was heading toward the island. She had come closer, but Pencroff couldn't figure out her direction. However, since the wind was blowing from the northeast, it seemed likely that she was on the starboard tack. Also, the breeze was blowing directly towards the landing, and the sea was so calm that she wouldn't hesitate to head for the island, even though the depth wasn't marked on the charts.
About 4 o’clock, an hour after he had been telegraphed for, Ayrton arrived. He entered the great hall, saying, “Here I am, gentlemen.”
About 4 o’clock, an hour after he had been notified by telegram, Ayrton showed up. He walked into the large hall and said, “Here I am, gentlemen.”
Smith shook hands with him, and drawing him to the window, “Ayrton,” said he, “we sent for you for a weighty reason. A ship is within sight of the island.”
Smith shook hands with him and pulled him over to the window. “Ayrton,” he said, “we called you here for an important reason. A ship is in sight of the island.”
For a moment Ayrton looked pale, and his eyes were troubled. Then he stooped down and gazed around the horizon.
For a moment, Ayrton looked pale, and his eyes were filled with concern. Then he bent down and scanned the horizon.
“Take this spy-glass,” said Spilett, “and look well, Ayrton, for it may be the Duncan come to take you home.”
“Take this binocular,” said Spilett, “and have a good look, Ayrton, because it might be the Duncan come to bring you home.”
“The Duncan!” murmured Ayrton. “Already!”
“The Duncan!” whispered Ayrton. “Already!”
The last word escaped him involuntarily and he buried his face in his hands. Did not twelve years’ abandonment on a desert island seem to him a sufficient expiation?
The last word slipped out of him without meaning to, and he buried his face in his hands. Did twelve years of being stranded on a deserted island not seem like enough punishment to him?
“No,” said he, “no, it cannot be the Duncan.”
“No,” he said, “no, it can’t be the Duncan.”
“Look, Ayrton,” said the engineer, “for we must know beforehand with whom we have to deal.”
“Listen, Ayrton,” the engineer said, “because we need to know ahead of time who we’re dealing with.”
Ayrton took the glass and levelled it in the direction indicated. For some minutes he observed the horizon in silence. Then he said:—
Ayrton took the glass and aimed it where indicated. For a few minutes, he silently watched the horizon. Then he said:—
“Yes, it is a ship, but I do not think it is the Duncan.
“Yes, it’s a ship, but I don’t think it’s the Duncan."
“Why not?” asked Spilett.
“Why not?” Spilett asked.
“Because the Duncan is a steam-yacht, and I see no trace of smoke about this vessel.”
“Since the Duncan is a steam yacht, and I don’t see any signs of smoke coming from this vessel.”
“Perhaps she is only under sail,” observed Pencroff. “The wind is behind her, and she may want to save her coal, being go far from land.”
“Maybe she’s just sailing,” Pencroff noted. “The wind is at her back, and she might be trying to conserve her coal since she’s so far from shore.”
“You may be right, Mr. Pencroff,” said Ayrton. “But, let her come in shore, and we shall soon know what to make of her.”
“You might be right, Mr. Pencroff,” said Ayrton. “But once she comes ashore, we’ll quickly figure out what to do.”
So saying, he sat down in a corner and remained silent, taking no part in the noisy discussion about the unknown ship. No more work was done. Spilett and Pencroff were extremely nervous; they walked up and down, changing place every minute. Herbert’s feeling was one of curiosity. Neb alone remained calm; his master was his country. The engineer was absorbed in his thoughts, and was inclined to believe the ship rather an enemy than a friend. By the help of the glass they could make out that she was a brig, and not one of those Malay proas, used by the pirates of the Pacific. Pencroff, after a careful look, affirmed that the ship was square-rigged, and was running obliquely to the coast, on the starboard tack, under mainsail, topsail, and top-gallant sail set.
So saying, he sat down in a corner and stayed quiet, not joining in the loud discussion about the unknown ship. No more work got done. Spilett and Pencroff were extremely anxious; they paced back and forth, switching places every minute. Herbert felt curious. Neb alone stayed calm; his master was his world. The engineer was lost in his thoughts, leaning toward the idea that the ship was more of an enemy than a friend. With the help of the binoculars, they could see that it was a brig, not one of those Malay proas used by Pacific pirates. Pencroff, after a careful look, confirmed that the ship was square-rigged and was headed diagonally toward the coast, on the starboard tack, with the mainsail, topsail, and top-gallant sail set.
Just then the ship changed her tack, and drove straight towards the island. She was a good sailer, and rapidly neared the coast. Ayrton took the glass to try to ascertain whether or not she was the Duncan. The Scotch yacht, too, was square-rigged. The question therefore was whether a smokestack could be seen between the two masts of the approaching vessel. She was now only ten miles off, and the horizon was clear. Ayrton looked for a moment, and then dropped his glass.
Just then, the ship changed direction and headed straight for the island. She was fast and quickly closed in on the coast. Ayrton took the binoculars to see if she was the Duncan. The Scottish yacht was also square-rigged. The question was whether a smokestack could be seen between the two masts of the approaching vessel. She was now only ten miles away, and the horizon was clear. Ayrton looked for a moment and then lowered his binoculars.
“It is not the Duncan,” said he.
“It’s not the Duncan,” he said.
Pencroff sighted the brig again, and made out that she was from 300 to 400 tons burden, and admirably built for sailing. To what nation she belonged no one could tell.
Pencroff spotted the brig again and noted that it was between 300 to 400 tons and well-designed for sailing. No one could determine which nation it belonged to.
“And yet,” added the sailor, “there’s a flag floating at her peak, but I can’t make out her colors.”
“And yet,” the sailor added, “there’s a flag flying at her peak, but I can’t tell what the colors are.”
“In half an hour we will know for certain,” answered the reporter. “Besides, it is evident that their captain means to run in shore, and to-day, or to-morrow at latest, we shall make her acquaintance.”
“In half an hour, we’ll know for sure,” replied the reporter. “Besides, it’s clear their captain intends to head for the shore, and today, or tomorrow at the latest, we’ll meet her.”
“No matter, “said Pencroff, “we ought to know with whom we have to deal, and I shall be glad to make out those colors.”
“No problem,” said Pencroff, “we need to know who we’re dealing with, and I’ll be happy to figure out those colors.”
And he kept the glass steadily at his eye. The daylight began to fail, and the sea-wind dropped with it. The brig’s flag wrapped itself around the tackle, and could hardly be seen.
And he held the glass steadily to his eye. The daylight started to fade, and the sea breeze calmed down along with it. The brig’s flag twisted around the tackle and was barely visible.
“It is not the American flag,” said Pencroff, at intervals, “nor the English, whose red would be very conspicuous, nor the French, nor German colors, nor the white flag of Russia, nor the yellow flag of Spain. It seems to be of one solid color. Let us see; what would most likely be found in these waters? The Chilian—no, that flag is tri-colored; the Brazilian is green; the Japanese is black and yellow; while this—”
“It’s not the American flag,” Pencroff said every so often, “nor the English flag, which has a bright red that would stand out, nor the French or German colors, nor the white flag of Russia, nor the yellow flag of Spain. It looks like it’s one solid color. Let’s see; what’s most likely to be found in these waters? The Chilean flag—no, that one is tri-colored; the Brazilian flag is green; the Japanese flag is black and yellow; while this—”
Just then a breeze struck the flag. Ayrton took the glass and raised it to his eyes.
Just then, a breeze caught the flag. Ayrton picked up the glass and held it up to his eyes.
“Black!” cried he, in a hollow voice.
“Black!” he shouted, in a hollow voice.
They had suspected the vessel with good reason. The piratical ensign was fluttering at the peak!
They had good reason to suspect the ship. The pirate flag was flying at the top!
A dozen ideas rushed across the minds of the colonists; but there was no doubt as to the meaning of the flag. It was the ensign of the spoilers of the sea; the ensign which the Duncan would have carried, if the convicts had succeeded in their criminal design. There was no time to be lost in discussion.
A dozen ideas raced through the colonists’ minds, but there was no doubt about what the flag meant. It represented the pirates of the sea; the flag that the Duncan would have flown if the criminals had succeeded in their wicked plan. There was no time to waste on discussion.
“My friends,” said Smith, “this vessel, perhaps, is only taking observations of the coast of our island, and will send no boats on shore. We must do all we can to hide our presence here. The mill on Prospect Plateau is too conspicuous. Let Ayrton and Neb go at once and take down its fans. “We must cover, the windows of Granite House under thicker branches. Let the fires be put out, and nothing be left to betray the existence of man!”
“My friends,” Smith said, “this ship might just be surveying the coastline of our island and won’t send any boats ashore. We need to do everything possible to hide our presence here. The mill on Prospect Plateau stands out too much. Let Ayrton and Neb go right away and take down its fans. We need to cover the windows of Granite House with thicker branches. Let’s put out the fires, and make sure there’s nothing to reveal that humans are here!”
“And our sloop?” said Herbert.
"And what about our sloop?" said Herbert.
“Oh,” said Pencroff, “she is safe in port in Balloon Harbor, and I defy the rascals to find her there!”
“Oh,” said Pencroff, “she's safe in port in Balloon Harbor, and I dare those scoundrels to find her there!”
The engineer’s orders were instantly carried out. Neb and Ayrton went up to the plateau and concealed every trace of human habitation. Meanwhile their companions went to Jacamar Woods and brought back a great quantity of branches and climbing plants, which could not, from a distance, be distinguished from a natural foliation, and would hide well enough the windows in the rock. At the same time their arms and munitions were piled ready at hand, in case of a sudden attack. When all these precautions had been taken Smith turned to his comrades—
The engineer’s orders were immediately followed. Neb and Ayrton went up to the plateau and hid all signs of human presence. Meanwhile, their friends went to Jacamar Woods and brought back a large amount of branches and climbing plants, which looked like natural foliage from a distance and would effectively cover the windows in the rock. At the same time, their weapons and supplies were stacked nearby, just in case of a surprise attack. Once all these precautions were in place, Smith turned to his teammates—
“My friends,” said he, in a voice full of emotion, “if these wretches try to get possession of the island we will defend it, will we not?”
“My friends,” he said, his voice filled with emotion, “if these wretches try to take over the island, we will defend it, won’t we?”
“Yes, Cyrus,” answered the reporter, “and, if need be, we will die in its defense.”
“Yes, Cyrus,” replied the reporter, “and if necessary, we will die to protect it.”
And they shook hands upon it. Ayrton alone remained seated in his corner. Perhaps he who had been a convict himself once, still deemed himself unworthy! Smith understood what was passing in his mind, and, stepping towards him, asked
And they shook hands on it. Ayrton stayed in his corner, still seated. Maybe he, who had once been a convict, still thought he was unworthy! Smith sensed what was going through his mind and, stepping toward him, asked
“And what will you do, Ayrton?”
“And what are you going to do, Ayrton?”
“My duty,” replied Ayrton. Then he went to the window, and his eager gaze sought to penetrate the foliage. It was then half-past 7 o’clock. The sun had set behind Granite House twenty minutes before, and the eastern horizon was darkening. The brig was nearing Union Bay. She was now about eight miles away, and just abreast of Prospect Plateau, for having tacked off Claw Cape, she had been carried in by the rising tide. In fact she was already in the bay, for a straight line drawn from Claw Cape to Mandible Cape would have passed to the other side of her.
“My duty,” Ayrton replied. Then he walked to the window, and his eager gaze tried to see through the trees. It was just past 7:30. The sun had set behind Granite House twenty minutes earlier, and the eastern horizon was getting darker. The brig was approaching Union Bay. She was about eight miles away, and right opposite Prospect Plateau, having tacked off Claw Cape and was carried in by the rising tide. In fact, she was already in the bay, because a straight line drawn from Claw Cape to Mandible Cape would have gone on the other side of her.
Was the brig going to run into the bay? And if so, would she anchor there? Perhaps they would be satisfied with taking an observation. They could do nothing but wait. Smith was profoundly anxious. Had the pirates been on the island before, since they hoisted their colors on approaching it? Might they not have effected a descent once before, and might not some accomplice be now concealed in the unexplored part of the island. They were determined to resist to the last extremity. All depended on the arms and the number of the pirates.
Was the ship going to enter the bay? And if so, would she drop anchor there? Maybe they would just settle for taking a look. There was nothing to do but wait. Smith was extremely worried. Had the pirates been to the island before they raised their flag? Could they have made a landing previously, and could there be an accomplice hiding in the uncharted area of the island? They were resolved to fight to the very end. Everything hinged on the weapons and the number of the pirates.
Night had come. The new moon had set a few moments after the sun. Profound darkness enveloped land and sea. Thick masses of clouds were spread over the sky. The wind had entirely died away. Nothing could be seen of the vessel, for all her lights were hidden—they could tell nothing of her whereabouts.
Night had fallen. The new moon had disappeared shortly after sunset. Deep darkness covered both land and sea. Thick clouds were spread across the sky. The wind had completely died down. The vessel was invisible, as all her lights were obscured—they had no way of knowing where she was.
“Who knows?” said Pencroff. “Perhaps the confounded ship will be off by morning.”
“Who knows?” said Pencroff. “Maybe that damn ship will be gone by morning.”
His speech was answered by a brilliant flash from the offing, and the sound of a gun. The ship was there, and she had artillery. Six seconds had elapsed between the flash and the report; the brig, therefore, was about a mile and a-quarter from the shore. Just then, they heard the noise of chain-cables grinding across the hawse-holes. The vessel was coming to anchor in sight of Granite House!
His speech was interrupted by a bright flash from the horizon and the sound of a gun. The ship was there, and it had artillery. Six seconds passed between the flash and the sound; the brig was about a mile and a quarter from the shore. Just then, they heard the noise of chain cables grinding across the hawse-holes. The vessel was coming to anchor in sight of Granite House!
CHAPTER XLIV.
DISCUSSIONS—PRESENTIMENTS—AYRTON’S PROPOSAL—IT IS ACCEPTED—AYRTON AND PENCROFF ON SAFETY ISLET—NORFOLK CONVICTS—THEIR PROJECTS—HEROIC ATTEMPT OF AYRTON—HIS RETURN—SIX AGAINST FIFTY.
DISCUSSIONS—FEELINGS OF INEVITABILITY—AYRTON’S SUGGESTION—IT IS APPROVED—AYRTON AND PENCROFF AT SAFETY ISLET—NORFOLK PRISONERS—THEIR PLANS—AYRTON'S BRAVE ATTEMPT—HIS COMEBACK—SIX AGAINST FIFTY.
There was no longer room for doubt as to the pirate’s intentions. They had cast anchor at a short distance from the island, and evidently intended to land on the morrow.
There was no longer any doubt about the pirate's intentions. They had dropped anchor not far from the island and clearly planned to come ashore tomorrow.
Brave as they were, the colonists felt the necessity of prudence. Perhaps their presence could yet be concealed in case the pirates were contented with landing on the coast without going up into the interior. The latter, in fact, might have nothing else in view than a supply of fresh water, and the bridge, a mile and a half up stream, might well escape their eye.
Brave as they were, the colonists recognized the need for caution. Maybe they could still hide if the pirates were satisfied with just landing on the coast and didn’t venture inland. In reality, the pirates might only be after fresh water, and the bridge, a mile and a half upstream, might easily go unnoticed.
The colonists knew now that the pirate ship carried heavy artillery, against which they had nothing but a few shot-guns.
The colonists now realized that the pirate ship was armed with heavy artillery, while they had nothing but a few shotguns.
“Still,” said Smith, “our situation is impregnable. The enemy cannot discover the opening in the weir, so thickly is it covered with reeds and grass, and consequently cannot penetrate into Granite House.”
“Still,” said Smith, “our situation is secure. The enemy can’t find the opening in the weir, as it’s so heavily covered with reeds and grass, and therefore can’t get into Granite House.”
“But our plantations, our poultry-yard, our corral,—in short everything,” cried Pencroff, stamping his foot. “They can destroy everything in a few hours.”
“But our farms, our chicken coop, our corral—everything!” shouted Pencroff, stomping his foot. “They can ruin everything in just a few hours.”
“Everything, Pencroff!” answered Smith, “and we have no means of preventing them?”
“Everything, Pencroff!” Smith replied, “and we have no way to stop them?”
“Are there many of them?” said the reporter. “That’s the question. If there are only a dozen, we can stop them, but forty, or fifty, or more—”
“Are there a lot of them?” said the reporter. “That’s the question. If there are only a dozen, we can stop them, but forty, fifty, or more—”
“Mr. Smith,” said Ayrton, coming up to the engineer, “will you grant me one request!”
“Mr. Smith,” Ayrton said as he approached the engineer, “can I ask you for one favor?”
“What, my friend?”
"What’s up, my friend?"
“To go to the ship, and ascertain how strongly she is manned.”
“To head to the ship and find out how well-staffed it is.”
“But, Ayrton,” said the engineer, hesitating, “your life will be in danger.”
“But, Ayrton,” the engineer said, hesitating, “your life will be at risk.”
“And why not, sir?”
"Why not, sir?"
“That is more than your duty.”
"That's more than your work."
“I must do more than my duty,” replied Ayrton.
“I have to do more than what’s expected of me,” replied Ayrton.
“You mean to go to the ship in the canoe?” asked Spilett.
“You're planning to go to the ship in the canoe?” asked Spilett.
“No, sir. I will swim to her. A man can slip in where a boat could not pass.”
“No, sir. I’ll swim to her. A man can get through where a boat can’t.”
“Do you know that the brig is a mile and a half from the coast?” said Herbert.”
“Did you know that the brig is a mile and a half from the shore?” said Herbert.
“I am a good swimmer, sir.”
“I’m a great swimmer, sir.”
“I repeat to you that you are risking your life,” resumed the engineer.
“I’m telling you again that you’re putting your life at risk,” the engineer continued.
“No matter,” answered Ayrton—”Mr. Smith, I ask it as a favor. It may raise me in my own estimation.”
“No worries,” Ayrton replied. “Mr. Smith, I’m asking this as a favor. It might help me feel better about myself.”
“Go, Ayrton,” said the engineer, who knew how deeply a refusal would affect the ex-convict, now become an honest man.
“Go ahead, Ayrton,” said the engineer, who understood how much a refusal would impact the ex-convict, now turned honest.
“I will go with you,” said Pencroff.
“I'll go with you,” said Pencroff.
“You distrust me!” said Ayrton, quickly. Then, he added, more humbly, “and it is just.”
“You don't trust me!” said Ayrton, quickly. Then, he added, more humbly, “and that's fair.”
“No, no!” cried Smith, eagerly, “Pencroff has no such feeling. You have misunderstood him.”
“No, no!” cried Smith, eagerly, “Pencroff doesn’t feel that way at all. You’ve misunderstood him.”
“Just so,” answered the sailor; “I am proposing to Ayrton to accompany him only as far as the islet. One of these rascals may possibly have gone on shore there, and if so, it will take two men to prevent him from giving the alarm. I will wait for Ayrton on the islet.”
“Exactly,” replied the sailor; “I’m suggesting to Ayrton that I go with him only to the islet. One of these troublemakers might have landed there, and if that's the case, it’ll take two people to stop him from raising the alarm. I’ll wait for Ayrton on the islet.”
Everything thus arranged, Ayrton got ready for departure. His project was bold but not impracticable, thanks to the dark night. Once having reached the ship, Ayrton, by clinging to the chains of the shrouds, might ascertain the number and perhaps the designs of the convicts. They walked down upon the beach. Ayrton stripped himself and rubbed himself with grease, the better to endure the chill of the water; for he might have to be in it several hours. Meanwhile Pencroff and Neb had gone after the canoe, fastened on the bank of the Mercy some hundreds of paces further up. When they came back, Ayrton was ready to start.
Everything set, Ayrton got ready to leave. His plan was daring but doable, thanks to the dark night. Once he reached the ship, Ayrton could hang on to the chains of the rigging to figure out the number and possibly the intentions of the convicts. They walked down to the beach. Ayrton took off his clothes and coated himself in grease to better handle the cold water since he might have to be in it for several hours. Meanwhile, Pencroff and Neb had gone to get the canoe, which was tied up on the bank of the Mercy a few hundred paces further up. When they returned, Ayrton was all set to go.
They threw a wrap over his shoulders, and shook hands with him all round. Then he got into the boat with Pencroff, and pushed off into the darkness. It was now half-past 10, and their companions went back to wait for them at the Chimneys.
They threw a warm wrap over his shoulders and shook hands with him all around. Then he got into the boat with Pencroff and pushed off into the darkness. It was now 10:30, and their friends headed back to wait for them at the Chimneys.
The channel was crossed without difficulty, and the canoe reached the opposite bank of the islet. They moved cautiously, lest pirates should have landed there. But the island was deserted. The two walked rapidly over it, frightening the birds from their nests in the rocks. Having reached the further side, Ayrton cast himself unhesitatingly into the sea, and swam noiselessly towards the ship’s lights, which now were streaming across the water. Pencroff hid himself among the rocks, to await his companion’s return.
The channel was crossed easily, and the canoe made it to the other side of the islet. They moved carefully, in case pirates had landed there. But the island was empty. The two hurried across it, scaring the birds from their nests in the rocks. Once they reached the far side, Ayrton jumped into the sea without hesitation and swam silently towards the ship's lights, which were now shining across the water. Pencroff concealed himself among the rocks to wait for his companion's return.
Meanwhile, Ayrton swam strongly towards the ship, slipping through the water. His head only appeared above the surface; his eyes were fixed on the dark hull of the brig, whose lights were reflected in the water. He thought only of his errand, and nothing of the danger he encountered, not only from the pirates but from the sharks which infested these waters. The current was in his favor, and the shore was soon far behind.
Meanwhile, Ayrton swam powerfully towards the ship, gliding through the water. His head barely broke the surface; his eyes were locked on the dark hull of the brig, its lights shimmering in the water. He had only his mission on his mind, completely ignoring the danger around him, not just from the pirates but also from the sharks lurking in these waters. The current was on his side, and the shore quickly disappeared behind him.
Half an hour afterwards, Ayrton, without having been perceived by any one, dived under the ship, and clung with one hand to the bowsprit. Then he drew breath, and, raising himself by the chains, climbed to the end of the cut-water. There some sailors’ clothes hung drying. He found an easy position, and listened.
Half an hour later, Ayrton, without anyone noticing him, dove under the ship and held on to the bowsprit with one hand. Then he took a breath and, pulling himself up by the chains, climbed to the end of the cut-water. There, he found some sailors' clothes hanging out to dry. He settled into a comfortable position and listened.
They were not asleep on board of the brig. They were talking, singing, and laughing. These words, intermingled with oaths, came to Ayrton’s ears;—
They weren’t asleep on the brig. They were talking, singing, and laughing. These words, mixed with curses, reached Ayrton’s ears;—
“What a famous find our brig was!”
“What a famous discovery our ship was!”
“The Speedy is a fast sailor. She deserves her name.”
“The Speedy is a fast sailboat. She lives up to her name.”
“All the Norfolk shipping may do their best to take her.”
“All the Norfolk ships can do their best to capture her.”
“Hurrah for her commander. Hurrah for Bob Harvey!”
“Cheers for her commander. Cheers for Bob Harvey!”
Our readers will understand what emotion was excited in Ayrton by this name, when they learn that Bob Harvey was one of his old companions in Australia, who had followed out his criminal projects by getting possession, off Norfolk Island, of this brig, charged with arms, ammunition, utensils, and tools of all kinds, destined for one of the Sandwich Islands. All his band had gotten on board, and, adding piracy to their other crimes, the wretches scoured the Pacific, destroying ships and massacring their crews. They were drinking deep and talking loudly over their exploits, and Ayrton gathered the following facts:—
Our readers will understand the emotions stirred in Ayrton by this name when they find out that Bob Harvey was one of his old friends from Australia. Bob had carried out his criminal plans by taking control of this brig off Norfolk Island, which was loaded with weapons, ammunition, tools, and equipment meant for one of the Sandwich Islands. All his gang had boarded, and, piling piracy onto their list of crimes, the scoundrels roamed the Pacific, destroying ships and slaughtering their crews. They were drinking heavily and bragging about their exploits, and Ayrton picked up the following facts:—
The crew were composed entirely of English convicts, escaped from Norfolk Island. In 29° 2’ south latitude, and 165° 42’ east longitude, to the east of Australia, is a little island about six leagues in circumference, with Mount Pitt rising in the midst, 1,100 feet above the level of the sea. It is Norfolk Island, the seat of an establishment where are crowded together the most dangerous of the transported English convicts. There are 500 of them; they undergo a rigid discipline, with severe punishment for disobedience, and are guarded by 150 soldiers and 150 civil servants, under the authority of a Governor. A worse set of villains cannot be imagined. Sometimes, though rarely, in spite of the extreme precautions of their jailors, some of them contrive to escape by seizing a ship, and become the pest of the Polynesian archipelagos. Thus had done Harvey and his companions. Thus had Ayrton formerly wished to do. Harvey had seized the Speedy, which was anchored within sight of Norfolk Island, had massacred the crew, and for a year had made the brig the terror of the Pacific.
The crew was made up entirely of English convicts who had escaped from Norfolk Island. Located at 29° 2’ south latitude and 165° 42’ east longitude, east of Australia, there's a small island about six leagues around, featuring Mount Pitt, which rises 1,100 feet above sea level. This is Norfolk Island, home to a facility where the most dangerous transported English convicts are held. There are 500 of them, subjected to strict discipline and severe punishments for disobedience, guarded by 150 soldiers and 150 civil servants, all under the authority of a Governor. You can't imagine a worse group of villains. Occasionally, although rarely, despite the extreme precautions taken by their guards, some manage to escape by seizing a ship and become a nuisance in the Polynesian archipelagos. That's what Harvey and his crew had done. Ayrton had also once wanted to do the same. Harvey took control of the Speedy, which was anchored in sight of Norfolk Island, killed the crew, and for a year made the brig a terror of the Pacific.
The convicts were most of them gathered on the poop, in the after part of the ship; but a few were lying on deck, talking in loud voices. The conversation went on amid noise and drunkenness. Ayrton gathered that chance only had brought them within sight of Lincoln Island. Harvey had never set foot there; but, as Smith had foreseen, coming upon an island not in the maps, he had determined to go on shore, and, if the land suited him, to make it the Speedy’s headquarters. The black flag and the cannon-shot were a mere freak of the pirates, to imitate a ship-of-war running up her colors.
The convicts were mostly gathered on the poop deck at the back of the ship, but a few were lying on the deck, talking loudly. Their conversation continued amidst the noise and drunkenness. Ayrton figured that luck had simply led them to see Lincoln Island. Harvey had never been there; however, as Smith had anticipated, upon discovering an island that wasn’t on the maps, he decided to go ashore and, if the land suited him, to make it the Speedy’s headquarters. The black flag and the cannon shot were just a prank by the pirates to mimic a warship raising its colors.
The colonists were in very serious danger. The island, with its easy water supply, its little harbor, its varied resources so well turned to account by the colonists, its secret recesses of Granite House—all these would be just what the convicts wanted. In their hands the island would become an excellent place of refuge, and the fact of its being unknown would add to their security. Of course the colonists would instantly be put to death. They could not even escape to the interior, for the convicts would make the island their headquarters, and if they went on an expedition would leave some of the crew behind. It would be a struggle for life and death with these wretches, every one of whom must be destroyed before the colonists would be safe. Those were Ayrton’s thoughts, and he knew that Smith would agree with him. But was a successful resistance possible? Everything depended on the calibre of the brig’s guns and the number of her men. These were facts which Ayrton must know at any cost.
The colonists were in serious danger. The island, with its easy access to water, its small harbor, its diverse resources so well utilized by the colonists, and its hidden spots in Granite House—all of these would be exactly what the convicts desired. In their hands, the island would become a perfect hideout, and the fact that it was unknown would increase their security. Of course, the colonists would be killed immediately. They couldn’t even escape inland because the convicts would make the island their base, and if they went on an expedition, they would leave some of their crew behind. It would be a fight for survival against these villains, and all of them would have to be eliminated before the colonists would be safe. Those were Ayrton’s thoughts, and he knew Smith would agree with him. But was successful resistance possible? Everything depended on the firepower of the brig’s guns and the number of her crew. These were details Ayrton needed to find out at any cost.
An hour after he had reached the brig the noise began to subside, and most of the convicts lay plunged in a drunken sleep. Ayrton determined to risk himself on the ship’s deck, which the extinguished lanterns left in profound darkness. He got in the chains by the cut-water, and by means of the bowsprit climbed to the brig’s forecastle. Creeping quietly through the sleeping crew, who lay stretched here and there on the deck, he walked completely around the vessel and ascertained that the Speedy carried four guns, from eight to ten-pounders. He discovered also that the guns were breech-loading, of modern make, easily worked, and capable of doing great damage.
An hour after he arrived at the brig, the noise started to fade, and most of the convicts were deep in drunken sleep. Ayrton decided to take a chance and venture onto the ship’s deck, which was plunged into complete darkness by the extinguished lanterns. He climbed onto the chains by the cut-water and used the bowsprit to reach the brig’s forecastle. Moving silently among the sleeping crew, who were scattered across the deck, he made his way around the entire vessel and confirmed that the Speedy had four guns, ranging from eight to ten-pounders. He also found out that the guns were breech-loading, modern designs that were easy to operate and capable of inflicting serious damage.
There were about ten men lying on deck, but it might be that others were asleep in the hold. Moreover, Ayrton had gathered from the conversation that there were some fifty on board; rather an overmatch for the six colonists. But, at least, the latter would not be surprised; thanks to Ayrton’s devotion, they would know their adversaries force, and would make their dispositions accordingly. Nothing remained for Ayrton but to go back to his comrades with the information he had gathered, and he began walking towards the forecastle to let himself down into the sea.
There were about ten men lying on the deck, but others might be sleeping below. Additionally, Ayrton had picked up from the conversation that there were around fifty people on board; definitely more than the six colonists could handle. However, at least the colonists wouldn’t be caught off guard; thanks to Ayrton’s efforts, they would be aware of their opponents' numbers and could prepare accordingly. All Ayrton had left to do was return to his friends with the information he had gathered, so he started walking toward the forecastle to lower himself into the sea.
And now to this man, who wished to do more than his duty, there came a heroic thought, the thought of sacrificing his life for the safety of his comrades. Smith could not of course resist fifty well-armed marauders, who would either overcome him or starve him out. Ayrton pictured to himself his preservers who had made a man of him, and an honest man, to whom he owed everything, pitilessly murdered, their labors brought to nothing, their island changed to a den of pirates. He said to himself that he, Ayrton, was the first cause of these disasters, since his old companion, Harvey, had only carried out Ayrton’s projects; and a feeling of horror came over him. Then came the irresistible desire to blow up the brig, with all on board. He would perish in the explosion, but he would have done his duty.
And now this man, who wanted to do more than just his job, had a brave idea: sacrificing his life for the safety of his fellow comrades. Smith, of course, couldn't fight off fifty well-armed attackers, who would either overpower him or starve him out. Ayrton imagined his rescuers, who had transformed him into a man, and an honest one at that, to whom he owed everything, being mercilessly killed, their hard work wasted, and their island turned into a hideout for pirates. He told himself that he, Ayrton, was the root cause of these troubles, since his old friend, Harvey, had merely followed Ayrton’s plans; a wave of horror washed over him. Then came the overwhelming urge to blow up the ship, taking everyone on board with it. He would die in the explosion, but he would have fulfilled his duty.
He did not hesitate! It was easy to reach the powder magazine, which is always in the after part of the ship. Powder must be plenty on board such a vessel, and a spark would bring destruction.
He didn't hesitate! It was easy to get to the powder magazine, which is always located at the back of the ship. There must be plenty of powder on board such a vessel, and a spark would mean disaster.
Ayrton lowered himself carefully between-decks, where he found many of the pirates lying about, overcome rather by drunkenness than sleep. A ship’s lantern, was lighted at the foot of the mainmast, from which hung a rack full of all sorts of firearms. Ayrton took from the rack a revolver, and made sure that it was loaded and capped. It was all that he needed to accomplish the work of destruction. Then he glided back to the poop, where the powder magazine would be.
Ayrton carefully made his way between decks, where he found many of the pirates sprawled out, more drunk than asleep. A ship's lantern was lit at the foot of the main mast, and a rack full of various firearms hung nearby. Ayrton grabbed a revolver from the rack and checked that it was loaded and ready to go. That was all he needed to carry out his plan for destruction. Then he slipped back to the poop, where the powder magazine was located.
Between decks it was dark, and he could hardly step without knocking against some half-asleep convict, and meeting with an oath or a blow. More than once he had to stop short, but at length he reached the partition separating the after-compartment, and found the door of the magazine. This he had to force, and it was a difficult matter to accomplish without noise, as he had to break a padlock. But at last, under his vigorous hand, the padlock fell apart and the door opened.
Between the decks, it was dark, and he could barely move without bumping into some half-asleep convict, resulting in an oath or a punch. More than once, he had to stop abruptly, but eventually, he reached the partition separating the back compartment and found the door to the magazine. He had to force it open, which was tricky to do quietly since he had to break a padlock. But finally, with his strong efforts, the padlock shattered, and the door swung open.
Just then a hand was laid upon his shoulder.
Just then, someone put a hand on his shoulder.
“What are you doing there?” said a harsh voice, and a tall form rose from the shadow and turned the light of a lantern fall on Ayrton’s face.
“What are you doing there?” asked a harsh voice, and a tall figure stepped out of the shadows, shining the light of a lantern onto Ayrton’s face.
Ayrton turned around sharply. By a quick flash from the lantern, he saw his old accomplice, Harvey; but the latter, believing Ayrton, as he did, to be dead, failed to recognize him.
Ayrton turned around quickly. In a brief flash from the lantern, he saw his old partner, Harvey; but Harvey, thinking Ayrton was dead as he did, didn’t recognize him.
“What are you doing there?” said Harvey, seizing Ayrton by the strap of his trousers. Ayrton made no answer but a vigorous push, and sprang forward to the magazine. One shot into those tons of powder, and all would have been over!
“What are you doing there?” said Harvey, grabbing Ayrton by the strap of his pants. Ayrton didn’t respond but shoved back hard and dashed toward the magazine. One shot into those tons of powder, and it would have all been over!
“Help, lads!” cried Harvey.
"Help, guys!" cried Harvey.
Two or three pirates, roused by his voice, threw themselves upon Ayrton, and strove to drag him to the ground. He rid himself of them with two shots from his revolver; but received in so doing, a wound from a knife in the fleshy part of the shoulder. He saw in a moment that his project was no longer feasible. Harvey had shut the door of the magazine, and a dozen pirates were half-awake. He most save himself for the sake of his comrades.
Two or three pirates, alerted by his voice, lunged at Ayrton and tried to bring him down. He managed to shake them off with two shots from his revolver but got wounded by a knife in the meaty part of his shoulder. He quickly realized that his plan was no longer viable. Harvey had closed the door of the magazine, and about a dozen pirates were stirring awake. He had to save himself for the sake of his friends.
Four barrels were left. He discharged two of them right and left, one at Harvey, though without effect; and then, profiting by his enemies’ momentary recoil, rushed towards the ladder which led to the deck of the brig. As he passed the lantern he knocked it down with a blow from the butt-end of his pistol, and left everything in darkness.
Four barrels remained. He fired two of them, one at Harvey, but missed; then, taking advantage of his enemies’ brief retreat, he dashed toward the ladder that led up to the brig’s deck. As he went past the lantern, he knocked it down with the butt of his pistol, plunging everything into darkness.
Two or three pirates, awakened by the noise, were coming down the ladder at that moment. A fifth shot stretched one at the foot of the steps, and the others got out of the way, not understanding what was going on. In two bounds Ayrton was on the brig’s deck, and three seconds afterwards, after discharging his last shot at a pirate who tried to seize him by the neck, he made his way down the netting and leaped into the sea. He had not swam six fathoms before the bullets began to whistle around him like hail.
Two or three pirates, woken by the commotion, were coming down the ladder at that moment. A fifth shot dropped one at the bottom of the steps, and the others stepped aside, confused about what was happening. In two leaps, Ayrton was on the brig's deck, and three seconds later, after firing his last shot at a pirate who tried to grab him by the neck, he climbed down the netting and jumped into the sea. He had barely swum six fathoms before the bullets started whizzing around him like hail.
What were the feelings of Pencroff, hidden behind a rock on the islet, and of his comrades in the Chimneys, when they heard these shots from the brig! They rushed out upon the shore, and, with their guns at their shoulders, stood ready to meet any attack. For them no doubt remained. They believed that Ayrton had been killed, and the pirates were about to make a descent on the island. Thus half an hour passed away. They suffered torments of anxiety. They could not go to the assistance of Ayrton or Pencroff, for the boat had been taken, and the high tide forbade them crossing the channel.
What were the feelings of Pencroff, hiding behind a rock on the islet, and his friends in the Chimneys, when they heard those shots from the brig? They rushed out to the shore, guns at the ready, prepared to face any threat. There was no doubt in their minds. They thought Ayrton had been killed, and the pirates were about to attack the island. Half an hour passed in tormenting anxiety. They couldn't rush to help Ayrton or Pencroff because the boat was gone, and the high tide prevented them from crossing the channel.
Finally, at half-past 12, a boat with two men came along shore. It was Ayrton, with a slight wound in his shoulder, and Pencroff. Their friends received them with open arms.
Finally, at 12:30, a boat carrying two men arrived on the shore. It was Ayrton, who had a minor wound on his shoulder, and Pencroff. Their friends welcomed them with open arms.
Then all took refuge at the Chimneys. There Ayrton told them all that happened, including his plan to blow up the brig.
Then everyone took shelter at the Chimneys. There, Ayrton told them everything that happened, including his plan to blow up the ship.
Every one grasped the man’s hand, but the situation was desperate. The pirates knew that Lincoln Island was inhabited, and would come down upon it in force. They would respect nothing. If the colonists fell into their hands they had no mercy to hope for!
Everyone grabbed the man’s hand, but the situation was dire. The pirates were aware that Lincoln Island had inhabitants and would come down on it with full force. They would show no respect. If the colonists were caught by them, there was no mercy to be expected!
“We can die like men,” said the reporter.
“We can die like men,” said the reporter.
“Let us go in and keep watch,” said the engineer.
“Let’s go in and keep watch,” said the engineer.
“Do you think there is any chance, Mr. Smith?” said the sailor.
“Do you think there’s any chance, Mr. Smith?” said the sailor.
“Yes, Pencroff.”
“Yeah, Pencroff.”
“How! Six against fifty!”
"Wow! Six against fifty!"
“Yes, six—and one other—”
"Yes, six—and one more—"
“Who?” asked Pencroff.
“Who?” Pencroff asked.
Smith did not answer, but he looked upwards
Smith didn't respond, but he looked up.
CHAPTER XLV.
THE MIST RISES—THE ENGINEER’S DISPOSITION OF FORCES—THREE POSTS—AYRTON AND PENCROFF—THE FIRST ATTACK —TWO OTHER BOAT LOADS—ON THE ISLET—SIX CONVICTS ON SHORE—THE BRIG WEIGHS ANCHOR—THE SPEEDY’S PROJECTILES—DESPERATE SITUATION—UNEXPECTED DENOUEMENT.
THE MIST RISES—THE ENGINEER’S DISPOSITION OF FORCES—THREE POSTS—AYRTON AND PENCROFF—THE FIRST ATTACK—TWO OTHER BOAT LOADS—ON THE ISLET—SIX CONVICTS ON SHORE—THE BRIG WEIGHS ANCHOR—THE SPEEDY’S PROJECTILES—DESPERATE SITUATION—UNEXPECTED DENOUEMENT.
The night passed without incident. The colonists were still at the Chimneys, keeping a constant lookout. The pirates made no attempt at landing. Since the last shots fired at Ayrton, not a sound betrayed the presence of the brig in the bay. They might have supposed she had weighed anchor and gone off in the night.
The night went by without any problems. The colonists remained at the Chimneys, keeping a steady watch. The pirates didn't try to come ashore. Since the last shots fired at Ayrton, there had been no noise to indicate the brig was still in the bay. They might have thought that it had weighed anchor and left during the night.
But it was not so, and when daylight began to appear the colonists could see her dark hulk dim through the morning mists.
But that wasn't the case, and as daylight started to break, the colonists could see her dark shape faintly through the morning fog.
“Listen, my friends,” then said the engineer. “These are the dispositions it seems to me best to make before the mist dispels, which conceals us from view. We must make these convicts believe that the inhabitants of the island are numerous and well able to resist them. Let us divide ourselves into three groups, one posted at the Chimneys, one at the mouth of the Mercy, and the third upon the islet, to hinder, or at least, retard, every attempt to land. We have two carbines and four guns, so that each of us will be armed; and as we have plenty of powder and ball, we will not spare our shots. We have nothing to fear from the guns, nor even from the cannon of the brig. What can they effect against these rocks? And as we shall not shoot from the windows of Granite House, the pirates will never think of turning their guns upon it. What we have to fear is a hand-to-hand fight with an enemy greatly superior in numbers. We must try to prevent their landing without showing ourselves. So don’t spare your ammunition. Shoot fast, and shoot straight. Each of us has eight or ten enemies to kill, and must kill them.”
“Listen up, everyone,” the engineer said. “Here’s what I think we should do before the mist clears and reveals us. We need to make these convicts believe that there are a lot of people on this island who can fight back. Let’s split into three groups: one at the Chimneys, one at the mouth of the Mercy, and the last on the islet to block or at least slow down any attempts to land. We have two carbines and four guns, so everyone will be armed. Plus, we've got plenty of powder and ammo, so let's not hold back on our shots. We don't have to worry about their guns or even the brig's cannon. What can they do against these rocks? And since we won't shoot from the windows of Granite House, the pirates won’t even think about targeting it. Our main concern is getting into direct combat with an enemy that has way more people than us. We need to stop them from landing without revealing ourselves. So conserve your ammo. Shoot quickly and accurately. Each of us needs to take out eight or ten enemies and make sure to do it.”
Smith had precisely defined the situation, in a voice as quiet as if he were directing some ordinary work. His companions acted upon his proposal without a word. Each hastened to take his place before the mist should be entirely dissipated.
Smith clearly defined the situation, speaking in a voice as calm as if he were managing some routine task. His companions followed his suggestion without saying a word. Each one hurried to take their position before the mist completely cleared away.
Neb and Pencroff went back to Granite House and brought back thence abundance of ammunition. Spilett and Ayrton, both excellent shots, were armed with the two carbines, which would carry nearly a mile. The four shot-guns were divided between Smith, Neb, Pencroff, and Herbert. The posts were thus filled:—Smith and Herbert remained in ambush at the Chimneys, commanding a large radius of the shore in front of Granite House. Spilett and Neb hid themselves among the rocks at the mouth of the Mercy (the bridge and causeways over which had been removed), so as to oppose the passage of any boat or even any landing on the opposite side. As to Ayrton and Pencroff, they pushed the canoe into the water, and got ready to push across the channel, to occupy two different points on the islet, so that the firing, coming from four different points, might convince the pirates that the island was both well manned and vigorously defended.
Neb and Pencroff went back to Granite House and returned with a lot of ammo. Spilett and Ayrton, both great shots, were armed with two carbines that could shoot nearly a mile. The four shotguns were split between Smith, Neb, Pencroff, and Herbert. The positions were filled as follows: Smith and Herbert stayed hidden at the Chimneys, covering a wide area of the shore in front of Granite House. Spilett and Neb concealed themselves among the rocks at the mouth of the Mercy (where the bridge and causeways had been removed) to block any boats or landings on the opposite side. As for Ayrton and Pencroff, they launched the canoe into the water and prepared to cross the channel to occupy two different spots on the islet, ensuring that the shooting would come from four different positions, convincing the pirates that the island was well-staffed and strongly defended.
In case a landing should be effected in spite of their opposition, or should they be in danger of being cut off by a boat from the brig, Pencroff and Ayrton could return with the canoe to the shore of the island, and hasten to the threatened point.
In case a landing happens despite their resistance, or if they risk being isolated by a boat from the brig, Pencroff and Ayrton could go back to the island shore with the canoe and hurry to the threatened area.
Before going to their posts, the colonists shook hands all round. Pencroff concealed his emotion as he embraced “his boy” Herbert, and they parted. A few minutes afterwards each was at his post. None of them could have been seen, for the brig itself was barely visible through the mist. It was half-past 6 in the morning. Soon the mist rose gradually; the ocean was covered with ripples, and, a breeze rising, the sky was soon clear. The Speedy appeared, anchored by two cables, her head to the north, and her larboard quarter to the island. As Smith had calculated, she was not more than a mile and a quarter from the shore. The ominous black flag floated at the peak. The engineer could see with his glass that the four guns of the ship had been trained on the island, ready to be fired at the first signal; but so far there was no sound. Full thirty pirates could be seen coming and going on the deck. Some were on the poop; two on the transoms of the main topmast were examining the island with spy-glasses. In fact, Harvey and his crew must have been exceedingly puzzled by the adventure of the night, and especially by Ayrton’s attempt upon the powder magazine. But they could not doubt that the island before them was inhabited by a colony ready to defend it. Yet no one could be seen either on the shore or the high ground.
Before heading to their posts, the colonists shook hands all around. Pencroff hid his feelings as he hugged “his boy” Herbert, and they said goodbye. A few minutes later, each was at their station. None of them could be seen, as the brig was only just visible through the mist. It was 6:30 in the morning. Soon the mist gradually lifted; the ocean was covered in ripples, and as a breeze picked up, the sky quickly cleared. The Speedy appeared, anchored by two cables, facing north, with her left side toward the island. As Smith had figured, she was no more than a mile and a quarter from the shore. The ominous black flag flew at the top. The engineer could see through his binoculars that the four cannons on the ship were aimed at the island, ready to fire at the first sign; but so far, there was no sound. A full thirty pirates could be seen moving around on the deck. Some were on the stern; two on the crossbeams of the main topmast were scanning the island with spyglasses. In fact, Harvey and his crew must have been very confused about the events of the night, especially regarding Ayrton’s attempted raid on the powder magazine. But they couldn’t doubt that the island in front of them was occupied by a colony prepared to defend itself. Yet no one could be seen either on the shore or the high ground.
For an hour and a half there was no sign of attack from the brig. Evidently Harvey was hesitating. But about 8 o’clock there was a movement on board. They were hauling at the tackle, and a boat was being let down into the sea. Seven men jumped into it, their guns in their hands. One was at the tiller, four at the oars, and the two others squatting in the bow, ready to shoot, examined the island. No doubt their intention was to make a reconnoissance, and not to land, or they would have come in greater number.
For an hour and a half, there was no sign of an attack from the brig. Clearly, Harvey was hesitating. But around 8 o’clock, there was some movement on board. They were pulling at the ropes, and a boat was being lowered into the water. Seven men jumped in, guns in hand. One was at the tiller, four at the oars, and the other two crouched in the bow, ready to shoot, scanning the island. There’s no doubt they intended to do a reconnaissance, not to land, or they would have come in greater numbers.
The pirates, perched on the rigging of the topmast, had evidently perceived that an islet concealed the shore, lying about half a mile away. The boat was apparently not running for the channel, but was making for the islet, as the most prudent beginning of the reconnoissance. Pencroff and Ayrton, lying hidden among the rocks, saw it coming down upon them, and even waiting for it to get within good reach.
The pirates, sitting on the rigging of the topmast, had clearly noticed that an islet was hiding the shore, located about half a mile away. The boat didn’t seem to be heading for the channel but was instead approaching the islet, which was the smartest move to start the reconnaissance. Pencroff and Ayrton, hidden among the rocks, saw it coming towards them and were even waiting for it to get within good range.
It came on with extreme caution. The oars fell at considerable intervals. One of the convicts seated in front had a sounding-line in his hand, with which he was feeling for the increased depth of water caused by the current of the Mercy. This indicated Harvey’s intention of bringing his brig as near shore as possible. About thirty pirates were scattered among the shrouds watching the boat and noting certain sea-marks which would enable them to land without danger. The boat was but two cables’ length from the islet when it stopped. The helmsman, standing erect, was trying to find the best place to land. In a moment burst forth a double flash and report. The helmsman and the man with the line fell over into the boat. Ayrton and Pencroff had done their work. Almost at once came a puff of smoke from the brig, and a cannon ball struck the rock, at whose foot the two lay sheltered, making it fly into shivers; but the marksmen remained unhurt.
It approached with great caution. The oars dipped in and out of the water at random intervals. One of the convicts in front held a sounding line, checking the deeper water created by the current of the Mercy. This showed Harvey’s plan to bring his ship as close to shore as possible. About thirty pirates were spread out among the rigging, watching the boat and taking note of certain landmarks that would help them land safely. The boat had barely reached two cables’ length from the islet when it halted. The helmsman stood up, trying to find the best spot to land. Suddenly, there was a loud bang and flash. The helmsman and the man with the line fell back into the boat. Ayrton and Pencroff had done their job. Almost immediately, a puff of smoke rose from the brig, and a cannonball hit the rock where the two were taking cover, shattering it into pieces; however, the marksmen remained unharmed.
With horrible imprecations the boat resumed its course. The helmsman was replaced by one of his comrades, and the crew bent to their oars, eager to get beyond reach of bullets. Instead of turning back, they pulled for the southern extremity of the islet, evidently with the intention of coming up on the other side and putting Pencroff and Ayrton between two fires. A quarter of an hour passed thus without a sound. The defenders of the islet, though they understood the object of the flanking movement, did not leave their post. They feared the cannon of the Speedy, and counted upon their comrades in ambush.
With terrible curses, the boat continued on its path. The helmsman was replaced by one of his mates, and the crew rowed hard, eager to get out of range of the bullets. Instead of turning back, they headed for the southern tip of the islet, clearly planning to come up on the other side and trap Pencroff and Ayrton in a crossfire. A quarter of an hour passed in silence. The defenders of the islet, even though they knew the purpose of the flanking maneuver, stayed at their posts. They feared the cannon from the Speedy and relied on their friends in ambush.
Twenty minutes after the first shots, the boat was less than two cables’ length off the Mercy. The tide was running up stream with its customary swiftness, due to the narrowness of the river, and the convicts had to row hard to keep themselves in the middle of the channel. But as they were passing within easy range of the river’s mouth, two reports were heard, and two of the crew fell back into the boat. Neb and Spilett had not missed their shot. The brig opened fire upon their hiding place, which was indicated by the puff of smoke; but with no result beyond shivering a few rocks.
Twenty minutes after the first shots, the boat was less than two cables' length from the Mercy. The tide was flowing upstream as usual, thanks to the narrowness of the river, and the convicts had to row hard to stay in the middle of the channel. But as they passed within easy reach of the river’s mouth, two shots rang out, and two members of the crew fell back into the boat. Neb and Spilett didn’t miss their mark. The brig fired at their hiding spot, revealed by the puff of smoke, but it only resulted in a few rocks being shattered.
The boat now contained only three men fit for action. Getting into the current, it shot up the channel like an arrow, passed Smith and Herbert, who feared to waste a shot upon it, and turned the northern point of the islet, whence the two remaining oarsmen pulled across to the brig.
The boat now had just three men ready for action. As they entered the current, it sped up the channel like an arrow, passing Smith and Herbert, who were reluctant to waste a shot on it, and rounded the northern tip of the islet, from where the two remaining oarsmen paddled over to the brig.
So far the colonists could not complain. Their adversaries had lost the first point in the game. Four pirates had been grievously wounded, perhaps killed, while they were without a scratch. Moreover, from the skilful disposition of their little force, it had no doubt given the impression of a much greater number.
So far, the colonists had nothing to complain about. Their enemies had lost the first round. Four pirates had been badly injured, maybe even killed, while they hadn't received a single scratch. Additionally, the clever arrangement of their small group likely made it seem like they had many more people.
A half hour elapsed before the boat, which was rowing against the current, could reach the Speedy. The wounded were lifted on deck, amid howls of rage. A dozen furious convicts manned the boat; another was lowered into the sea, and eight more jumped into it; and while the former rowed straight for the islet, the latter steered around its southern point, heading for the Mercy.
A half hour passed before the boat, which was rowing against the current, could reach the Speedy. The injured were lifted onto the deck, amid screams of anger. A dozen furious convicts manned the boat; another was lowered into the sea, and eight more jumped in; while the former rowed straight for the islet, the latter steered around its southern point, heading for the Mercy.
Pencroff and Ayrton were in a perilous situation. They waited till the first boat was within easy range, sent two balls into her, to the great discomfort of the crew; then they took to their heels, running the gauntlet of a dozen shots, reached their canoe on the other side of the islet, crossed the channel just as the second boat load of pirates rounded the southern point, and hastened to hide themselves at the Chimneys. They had hardly rejoined Smith and Herbert, when the islet was surrounded and thoroughly searched by the pirates.
Pencroff and Ayrton were in a dangerous situation. They waited until the first boat was close enough, fired two shots at it, which really upset the crew; then they ran for their lives, dodging a dozen bullets, reached their canoe on the other side of the island, crossed the channel just as the second boat of pirates turned the southern point, and quickly hid at the Chimneys. They had barely reunited with Smith and Herbert when the island was surrounded and thoroughly searched by the pirates.
Almost at the same moment shots were heard from the mouth of the Mercy. As the second boat approached them, Spilett and Neb disposed of two of the crew; and the boat itself was irresistibly hurried upon the rocks at the mouth of the river. The six survivors, holding their guns above their heads to keep them from contact with the water, succeeded in getting on shore on the right bank of the river; and, finding themselves exposed to the fire of a hidden enemy, made off towards Jetsam Point, and were soon out of range.
Almost at the same moment, shots rang out from the mouth of the Mercy. As the second boat came closer, Spilett and Neb took out two members of the crew, and the boat was pushed uncontrollably onto the rocks at the river's mouth. The six survivors, holding their guns above their heads to keep them dry, managed to reach the shore on the right bank of the river. Realizing they were exposed to fire from a hidden enemy, they quickly headed towards Jetsam Point and were soon out of range.
On the islet, therefore, there were twelve convicts, of whom some no doubt were wounded, but who had a boat at their service. Six more had landed on the island itself, but Granite House was safe from them, for they could rot get across the river, the bridges over which were raised.
On the islet, there were twelve convicts, some of whom were likely injured, but they had a boat at their disposal. Six more had made it to the island itself, but Granite House was safe from them since they couldn't get across the river; the bridges were raised.
“What do you think of the situation, Mr. Smith?” said Pencroff.
“What do you think about the situation, Mr. Smith?” Pencroff asked.
“I think,” said the engineer, “that unless these rascals are very stupid, the battle will soon take a new form.”
“I think,” said the engineer, “that unless these guys are really dumb, the battle will soon change into something different.”
“They will never get across the channel,” said Pencroff. “Ayrton and Mr. Spilett have guns that will carry a mile!”
“They're never going to get across the channel,” said Pencroff. “Ayrton and Mr. Spilett have guns that can shoot a mile!”
“No doubt,” said Herbert, “but of what avail are two carbines against the brig’s cannon?”
“No doubt,” said Herbert, “but what good are two carbines against the brig’s cannon?”
“The brig is not in the channel yet,” replied Pencroff.
“The ship isn't in the channel yet,” replied Pencroff.
“And suppose she comes there?” said Smith.
“And what if she shows up?” said Smith.
“She will risk foundering and utter destruction.”
“She will risk sinking and complete destruction.”
“Still it is possible,” said Ayrton. “The convicts may profit by the high tide to run into the channel, taking the risk of running aground; and then, under their heavy guns, our position will become untenable.”
“It's still possible,” Ayrton said. “The convicts might take advantage of the high tide to make their way into the channel, even if it means risking running aground; and then, with their heavy firepower, our position will become untenable.”
“By Jove!” said the sailor, “the beggars are weighing anchor.”
“Wow!” said the sailor, “those guys are weighing anchor.”
It was but too true. The Speedy began to heave her anchor, and showed her intention of approaching the islet.
It was unfortunately true. The Speedy started to raise her anchor and indicated she was planning to head toward the islet.
Meanwhile, the pirates on the islet had collected on the brink of the channel. They knew that the colonists were out of reach of their shot-guns, but forgot that their enemies, might carry weapons of longer range. Suddenly, the carbines of Ayrton and Spilett rang out together, carrying news to the convicts, which must have been very disagreeable, for two of them fell flat on their faces. There was a general scamper. The other ten, leaving their wounded or dying comrades, rushed to the other side of the islet, sprang into the boat which had brought them over, and rowed rapidly off.
Meanwhile, the pirates on the small island had gathered at the edge of the channel. They thought the colonists were out of range of their shotguns, but they forgot that their enemies might have longer-range weapons. Suddenly, the carbines of Ayrton and Spilett fired simultaneously, sending alarming news to the convicts, which must have been very unsettling, as two of them dropped flat on their faces. Chaos ensued. The other ten, leaving their injured or dying comrades behind, rushed to the other side of the island, jumped into the boat that had brought them over, and quickly rowed away.
“Eight off!” cried Pencroff, exultingly.
“Eight off!” shouted Pencroff, excitedly.
But a more serious danger was at hand. The Speedy had raised her anchor, and was steadily nearing the shore. From their two posts at the Mercy and the Chimneys, the colonists watched her movements without stirring a finger, but not without lively apprehension. Their situation would be most critical, exposed as they would be at short range to the brig’s cannon, without power to reply by an effective fire. How then could they prevent the pirates from landing?
But a more serious danger was approaching. The Speedy had lifted her anchor and was slowly heading towards the shore. From their two lookout points at the Mercy and the Chimneys, the colonists observed her movements without making a move, but not without intense worry. Their situation would be extremely critical, as they would be at short range to the brig’s cannon, with no ability to respond effectively. So how could they stop the pirates from landing?
Smith felt that in a few minutes he must make up his mind what to do. Should they shut themselves up in Granite House, and stand a siege there? But their enemies would thus become masters of the island, and starve them out at leisure. One chance was still left; perhaps Harvey would not risk his ship in the channel. If he kept outside his shots would be fired from a distance of half a mile, and would do little execution.
Smith realized that he had to decide what to do in just a few minutes. Should they lock themselves in Granite House and ride out a siege? But that would allow their enemies to take control of the island and starve them out at their leisure. There was still one chance left; maybe Harvey wouldn't take the risk of bringing his ship into the channel. If he stayed outside, his shots would come from half a mile away and wouldn't do much damage.
“Bob Harvey is too good a sailor,” repeated Pencroff, “to risk his ship in the channel. He knows that he would certainly lose her if the sea turned rough! And what would become of him without his ship?”
“Bob Harvey is too good of a sailor,” repeated Pencroff, “to risk his ship in the channel. He knows he would definitely lose her if the sea got rough! And what would happen to him without his ship?”
But the brig came nearer and nearer, and was evidently heading for the lower extremity of the islet. The breeze was faint, the current slack, and Harvey could manœuvre in safety. The route followed by the boats had enabled him to ascertain where the mouth of the river was, and he was making for it with the greatest audacity. He intended to bring his broadside to bear on the Chimneys, and to riddle them with shell and cannon balls. The Speedy soon reached the extremity of the islet, easily turning it, and, with a favoring wind, was soon off the Mercy.
But the brig came closer and closer, clearly heading for the lower end of the islet. The breeze was light, the current weak, and Harvey could maneuver safely. The path taken by the boats had helped him figure out where the river mouth was, and he was heading straight for it with boldness. He planned to target the Chimneys, bombarding them with shells and cannonballs. The Speedy soon reached the end of the islet, easily navigating around it, and with the wind at its back, was quickly approaching the Mercy.
“The villains are here!” cried Pencroff. As he spoke, Neb and Spilett rejoined their comrades. They could do nothing against the ship, and it was better that the colonists should be together when the decisive action was about to take place. Neither of the two were injured, though a shower of balls had been poured upon them as they ran from rock to rock.
“The villains are here!” shouted Pencroff. As he said this, Neb and Spilett returned to their friends. They couldn’t do anything against the ship, and it was better for the colonists to stick together when the big moment was about to happen. Neither of them was hurt, even though a hail of bullets had rained down on them while they dashed from rock to rock.
“You are not wounded, lad?” said the engineer.
“You're not hurt, are you, kid?” said the engineer.
“No, only a few contusions from the ricochet of a ball. But that cursed brig is in the channel!”
“No, just a few bruises from a bouncing ball. But that damn ship is in the channel!”
“We must take refuge in Granite House,” said Smith, “while we have time, and before the convicts can see us. Once inside, we can act as the occasion demands.”
“We need to get to Granite House,” said Smith, “while we still can, and before the convicts spot us. Once we’re inside, we can do what’s necessary.”
“Let us start at once, then,” said the reporter.
“Let’s get started right away, then,” said the reporter.
There was not a moment to lose. Two or three detonations, and the thud of balls on the rocks apprised them that the Speedy was near at hand.
There was no time to waste. A couple of explosions and the sound of balls hitting the rocks told them that the Speedy was close by.
To jump into the elevator, to hoist themselves to the door of Granite House, where Top and Jup had been shut up since the day before, and to rush into the great hall, was the work of a moment. Through the leaves they saw the Speedy, environed with smoke, moving up the channel. They had not left a moment too soon, for balls were crashing everywhere through the hiding places they had quitted. The rocks were splintered to pieces.
To hop into the elevator, to lift themselves to the door of Granite House, where Top and Jup had been locked up since the day before, and to rush into the great hall, took no time at all. Through the leaves, they spotted the Speedy, surrounded by smoke, moving up the channel. They hadn’t left a moment too soon, as bullets were crashing everywhere through the hiding places they had just vacated. The rocks were shattered to pieces.
Still they hoped that Granite House would escape notice behind its leafy covering, when suddenly a ball passed through the doorway and penetrated into the corridor.
Still, they hoped that Granite House would go unnoticed behind its leafy cover when suddenly, a ball flew through the doorway and rolled into the corridor.
“The devil! we are discovered!” cried Pencroff.
“The devil! We’ve been found out!” cried Pencroff.
But perhaps the colonists had not been seen, and Harvey had only suspected that something lay behind the leafy screen of the rock. And soon another ball, tearing apart the foliage, exposed the opening in the granite.
But maybe the colonists hadn’t been spotted, and Harvey had just guessed that something was hidden behind the leafy cover of the rock. Soon, another shot tore through the leaves, revealing the opening in the granite.
The situation of the colonists was now desperate. They could make no answer to the fire, under which the rock was crashing around them. Nothing remained but to take refuge in the upper corridor of Granite House, giving up their abode to devastation, when a hollow sound was heard, followed by dreadful shrieks!
The colonists were in a dire situation. They had no way to respond to the gunfire, which was causing the rock to crash around them. The only option left was to seek safety in the upper corridor of Granite House, abandoning their home to destruction, when a strange sound echoed, followed by terrifying screams!
Smith and his comrades rushed to the window.
Smith and his friends hurried to the window.
The brig, lifted on the summit of a sort of waterspout, had just split in half; and in less than ten seconds she went to the bottom with her wicked crew!!
The brig, raised on the top of a kind of waterspout, had just split in two; and in less than ten seconds, she sank to the bottom with her evil crew!!
CHAPTER XLVI.
THE COLONISTS ON THE BEACH—AYRTON AND PENCROFF AS SALVORS—TALK AT BREAKFAST—PENCROFF’S REASONING—EXPLORATION OF THE BRIG’S HULL IN DETAIL—THE MAGAZINE UNINJURED—NEW RICHES—A DISCOVERY—A PIECE OF A BROKEN CYLINDER.
THE COLONISTS ON THE BEACH—AYRTON AND PENCROFF AS SALVORS—TALK AT BREAKFAST—PENCROFF’S REASONING—EXPLORATION OF THE BRIG’S HULL IN DETAIL—THE MAGAZINE UNINJURED—NEW RICHES—A DISCOVERY—A PIECE OF A BROKEN CYLINDER.
“They have blown up!” cried Herbert.
"They've blown up!" shouted Herbert.
“Yes, blown up as if Ayrton had fired the magazine,” answered Pencroff, jumping into the elevator with Neb and the boy,
“Yes, it looks like Ayrton fired the magazine,” replied Pencroff, jumping into the elevator with Neb and the boy,
“But what has happened?” said Spilett, still stupefied at the unexpected issue.
“But what’s happened?” said Spilett, still shocked by the unexpected outcome.
“Ah, this time we shall find out—” said the engineer,
“Ah, this time we’ll find out—” said the engineer,
“What shall we find out?”
“What will we find out?”
“All in time; the chief thing is that the pirates have been disposed of.”
“All in good time; the main thing is that the pirates have been taken care of.”
And they rejoined the rest of the party on beach. Not a sign of the brig could be seen, not even the masts. After having been upheaved by the water-spout, it had fallen back upon its side, and had sunk in this position, doubtless owing to some enormous leak.’ As the channel here was only twenty feet deep, the masts of the brig would certainly reappear at low tide.
And they went back to the rest of the group on the beach. There wasn’t a trace of the brig anywhere, not even its masts. After being tossed by the waterspout, it had tipped over and sunk in that position, probably because of a huge leak. Since the channel was only twenty feet deep here, the masts of the brig would definitely show up at low tide.
Some waifs were floating on the surface of the sea. There was a whole float, made up of masts and spare yards, chicken coops with the fowls still living, casks and barrels, which little by little rose to the surface, having escaped by the traps; but no debris was adrift, no flooring of the deck, no plankage of the hull; and the sudden sinking of the Speedy seemed still more inexplicable.
Some small boats were bobbing on the surface of the sea. There was an entire collection of stuff, made up of masts and spare sails, chicken coops with the chickens still alive, barrels and casks, which gradually floated to the top after breaking free from the traps; but there was no wreckage floating around, no decking from the ship, no planks from the hull; and the unexpected sinking of the Speedy seemed even more puzzling.
However, the two masts, which had been broken some feet above the “partner,” after having snapped their stays and shrouds, soon rose to the surface of the channel, with their sails attached, some of them furled and some unfurled. But they could not wait for low tide to carry away all their riches, and Ayrton and Pencroff jumped into the canoe, for the purpose of lashing these waifs either to the shore of the island or of the islet. But just as they were about to start, they were stopped by a word from Spilett.
However, the two masts, which had been broken a few feet above the “partner,” after snapping their stays and shrouds, soon rose to the surface of the channel with their sails attached, some furled and some unfurled. But they couldn't wait for low tide to take away all their treasures, so Ayrton and Pencroff jumped into the canoe to tie these drifted items either to the island's shore or to the islet. Just as they were about to head off, Spilett called out to stop them.
“And the six convicts who landed on the right bank of the Mercy,” said he.
“And the six convicts who reached the right side of the Mercy,” he said.
In fact, it was as well to remember the six men who had landed at Jetsam Point, when their boat was wrecked off the rocks. They looked in that direction, but the fugitives were not to be seen. Very likely, when they saw the brig go down, they had taken flight into the interior of the island.
In fact, it was good to remember the six men who had landed at Jetsam Point when their boat was wrecked on the rocks. They looked in that direction, but the fugitives were nowhere to be seen. Most likely, when they saw the brig sink, they had fled into the interior of the island.
“We will see after them later,” said Smith. “They may still be dangerous, for they are armed; but with six to six, we have an even chance. Now we have more urgent work on hand.”
“We'll deal with them later,” said Smith. “They could still be a threat since they're armed, but with six against six, we have a fair shot. Right now, we have more pressing matters to attend to.”
Ayrton and Pencroff jumped into the canoe and pulled vigorously out to the wreck. The sea was quiet now and very high, for the moon was only two days old. It would be a full hour before the hull of the brig would appear above the water of the channel.
Ayrton and Pencroff jumped into the canoe and paddled hard toward the wreck. The sea was calm now but still quite high, since the moon was only two days old. It would take a full hour before the hull of the brig would rise above the water in the channel.
Ayrton and Pencroff had time enough to lash together the masts and spars by means of ropes, whose other end was carried along the shore to Granite House, where the united efforts of the colonists succeeded in hauling them in. Then the canoe picked up the chicken coops, barrels, and casks which were floating in the water, and brought them to the Chimneys.
Ayrton and Pencroff had plenty of time to tie together the masts and poles using ropes, the other ends of which were pulled along the shore to Granite House, where the combined efforts of the colonists managed to pull them in. Then the canoe collected the chicken coops, barrels, and casks that were floating in the water and brought them to the Chimneys.
A few dead bodies were also floating on the surface. Among them Ayrton recognized that of Bob Harvey, and pointed it out to his companion, saying with emotion:—
A few dead bodies were also floating on the surface. Among them, Ayrton recognized Bob Harvey’s body and pointed it out to his companion, saying with emotion:—
“That’s what I was, Pencroff.”
"That's who I was, Pencroff."
“But what you are no longer, my worthy fellow,” replied the sailor.
“But what you’re not anymore, my good friend,” replied the sailor.
It was a curious thing that so few bodies could be seen floating on the surface. They could count only five or six, which the current was already carrying out to sea. Very likely the convicts, taken by surprise, had not had time to escape, and the ship having sunk on its side, the greater part of the crew were left entangled under the nettings. So the ebb which was carrying the bodies of these wretches out to sea would spare the colonists the unpleasant task of burying them on the island.
It was strange that so few bodies were visible floating on the surface. They could only see five or six, which the current was already pulling out to sea. Most likely, the convicts, caught off guard, hadn’t had time to escape, and with the ship having capsized, most of the crew were trapped under the nets. So, the tide carrying the bodies of these unfortunate souls out to sea would save the colonists from the unpleasant job of burying them on the island.
For two hours Smith and his companions were wholly occupied with hauling the spars up on the sands, and in unfurling the sails, which were entirely uninjured, and spreading them out to dry. The work was so absorbing that they talked but little; but they had time for thought. What a fortune was the possession of the brig, or rather of the brig’s contents! A ship is a miniature world, and the colonists could add to their stock a host of useful articles. It was a repetition, on a large scale, of the chest found on Jetsam Point.
For two hours, Smith and his friends were completely focused on dragging the spars up onto the beach and unfurling the sails, which were in perfect condition, and spreading them out to dry. The work was so engrossing that they barely talked, but they had time to think. What a treasure the brig and its contents were! A ship is like a small world, and the colonists could add a ton of useful items to their supplies. It was a larger version of the chest they found at Jetsam Point.
“Moreover,” thought Pencroff, “why should it be impossible to get this brig afloat? If she has only one leak, a leak can be stopped up, and a ship of 300 or 400 tons is a real ship compared to our Good Luck! We would go where we pleased in her. We must look into this matter. It is well worth the trouble.”
“Besides,” thought Pencroff, “why should it be impossible to get this ship in the water? If it only has one leak, we can fix that, and a ship of 300 or 400 tons is a real ship compared to our Good Luck! We could go wherever we wanted in her. We need to investigate this. It’s definitely worth the effort.”
In fact, if the brig could be repaired, their chance of getting home again would be very much greater. But in order to decide this important question, they must wait until the tide was at its lowest, so that the brig’s hull could be examined in every part.
In fact, if they could fix the brig, their chances of getting home would be much better. But to decide this important question, they had to wait until the tide was at its lowest, so they could check every part of the brig’s hull.
After their prizes had been secured upon the beach, Smith and his companions, who were nearly famished, allowed themselves a few minutes for breakfast. Fortunately the kitchen was not far off, and Neb could cook them a good breakfast in a jiffy. They took this meal at the Chimneys, and one can well suppose that they talked of nothing during the repast but the miraculous deliverance of the colony.
After they had secured their prizes on the beach, Smith and his friends, who were almost starving, took a few minutes for breakfast. Luckily, the kitchen was nearby, and Neb could whip up a good breakfast quickly. They ate this meal at the Chimneys, and you can imagine they talked about nothing else during the meal except the amazing rescue of the colony.
“Miraculous is the word,” repeated Pencroff, “for we must own that these blackguards were blown up just in time! Granite House was becoming rather uncomfortable.”
“Miraculous is the word,” repeated Pencroff, “because we have to admit that these crooks were blown up just in time! Granite House was getting pretty uncomfortable.”
“Can you imagine, Pencroff, how it happened that the brig blew up?” asked the reporter.
“Can you believe, Pencroff, how the ship exploded?” asked the reporter.
“Certainly, Mr. Spilett; nothing is more simple,” replied Pencroff. “A pirate is not under the same discipline as a ship-of-war. Convicts don’t make sailors. The brig’s magazine must have been open, since she cannonaded us incessantly, and one awkward fellow might have blown up the ship.”
“Of course, Mr. Spilett; it's nothing complicated,” replied Pencroff. “A pirate ship doesn’t follow the same rules as a warship. Convicts aren’t sailors. The brig’s magazine must have been open, since she kept firing at us, and one careless person could have blown the whole ship up.”
“Mr. Smith,” said Herbert, “what astonishes me is that this explosion did not produce more effect. The detonation was not loud, and the ship is very little broken up. She seems rather to have sunk than to have blown up.”
“Mr. Smith,” said Herbert, “what surprises me is that this explosion didn’t have a bigger impact. The blast wasn’t loud, and the ship is barely damaged. It looks like it sank instead of blowing up.”
“That astonishes you, does it, my boy?” asked the engineer.
“That surprises you, does it, kid?” asked the engineer.
“Yes, sir.”
"Yes, sir."
“And it astonishes me too, Herbert,” replied the engineer; “but when we examine the hull of the brig, we shall find some explanation of this mystery.”
“And it surprises me too, Herbert,” replied the engineer; “but when we look at the hull of the ship, we’ll uncover some explanation for this mystery.”
“Why, Mr. Smith,” said Pencroff, “you don’t mean to say that the Speedy has just sunk like a ship which strikes upon a rock?”
“Why, Mr. Smith,” said Pencroff, “are you actually saying that the Speedy just sank like a ship crashing into a rock?”
“Why not,” asked Neb, “if there are rocks in the channel?”
“Why not,” asked Neb, “if there are rocks in the channel?”
“Good, Neb,” said Pencroff. “You did not look at the right minute. An instant before she went down I saw the brig rise on an enormous wave, and fall back over to larboard. Now, if she had struck a rock, she’d have gone straight to the bottom like an honest ship.”
“Good job, Neb,” said Pencroff. “You didn’t look at the right moment. Just before she went down, I saw the brig rise on a huge wave and then fall back to the left. If she had hit a rock, she would have sunk straight to the bottom like a proper ship.”
“And that’s just what she is not,” said Neb.
“And that’s exactly what she isn’t,” said Neb.
“Well, we’ll soon find out, Pencroff,” said the engineer.
“Well, we’ll find out soon, Pencroff,” said the engineer.
“We will find out,” added the sailor, “but I’ll bet my head there are no rocks in the channel. But do you really think, Mr. Smith, that there is anything wonderful in this event?”
“We'll find out,” the sailor added, “but I bet my life there are no rocks in the channel. But do you really think, Mr. Smith, that there’s anything amazing about this event?”
Smith did not answer.
Smith didn’t respond.
“At all events,” said Spilett, “whether shock or explosion, you must own, Pencroff, that it came in good time.”
“At any rate,” said Spilett, “whether it was a shock or an explosion, you have to admit, Pencroff, that it happened at just the right moment.”
“Yes! yes!” replied the sailor, “but that is not the question. I ask Mr. Smith if he sees anything supernatural in this affair?”
“Yes! yes!” replied the sailor, “but that's not the question. I’m asking Mr. Smith if he sees anything supernatural about this situation?”
“I give no opinion, Pencroff,” said the engineer; a reply which was not satisfactory to Pencroff, who believed in the explosion theory, and was reluctant to give it up. He refused to believe that in the channel which he had crossed so often at low tide, and whose bottom was covered with sand as fine as that of the beach, there existed an unknown reef.
“I have no opinion, Pencroff,” said the engineer; a response that didn’t satisfy Pencroff, who believed in the explosion theory and was unwilling to abandon it. He couldn’t accept that in the channel he had crossed so many times at low tide, with a bottom covered in sand as fine as that of the beach, there was an unknown reef.
At about half-past 1, the colonists got into the canoe, and pulled out to the stranded brig. It was a pity that her two boats had not been saved; but one, they knew, had gone to pieces at the mouth of the Mercy, and was absolutely useless, and the other had gone down with the brig, and had never reappeared.
At around 1:30, the colonists got into the canoe and paddled out to the stranded ship. It was a shame that her two lifeboats hadn’t been saved; one, they knew, had fallen apart at the mouth of the Mercy and was completely useless, and the other had gone down with the ship and never resurfaced.
Just then the hull of the Speedy began to show itself above the water. The brig had turned almost upside down, for after having broken its masts under the weight of its ballast, displaced by the fall, it lay with its keel in the air. The colonists rowed all around the hull, and as the tide fell, they perceived, if not the cause of the catastrophe, at least the effect produced. In the fore part of the brig, on both sides of the hull, seven or eight feet before the beginning of the stem, the sides were fearfully shattered for at least twenty feet. There yawned two large leaks which it would have been impossible to stop. Not only had the copper sheathing and the planking disappeared, no doubt ground to powder, but there was not a trace of the timbers, the iron bolts, and the treenails which fastened them. The false-keel had been torn off with surprising violence, and the keel itself, torn from the carlines in several places, was broken its whole length.
Just then, the hull of the Speedy started to appear above the water. The brig had nearly flipped over because, after its masts broke under the weight of the ballast that had fallen, it was lying on its keel. The colonists paddled all around the hull, and as the tide went down, they noticed, if not the cause of the disaster, at least its aftermath. In the front part of the brig, on both sides of the hull, seven or eight feet before the start of the bow, the sides were severely damaged for at least twenty feet. There were two large leaks that would have been impossible to seal. Not only was the copper sheathing and the planking gone, likely reduced to dust, but there was also no sign of the timbers, iron bolts, or treenails that held them together. The false keel had been ripped off with surprising force, and the keel itself, torn from the carlines in several spots, was broken along its entire length.
“The deuce!” cried Pencroff, “here’s a ship which will be hard to set afloat.”
“The heck!” shouted Pencroff, “here’s a ship that’s going to be tough to get off the ground.”
“Hard! It will be impossible,” said Ayrton.
“Hard! It’s going to be impossible,” said Ayrton.
“At all events,” said Spilett, “the explosion, if there has been an explosion, has produced the most remarkable effects. It has smashed the lower part of the hull, instead of blowing up the deck and the topsides. These great leaks seem rather to have been made by striking a reef than by the explosion of a magazine.”
“At any rate,” said Spilett, “the explosion, if there actually was one, has created some very unusual effects. It has destroyed the lower part of the hull, rather than blowing up the deck and the upper parts. These huge leaks seem more like they were caused by hitting a reef than by the explosion of a magazine.”
“There’s not a reef in the channel,” answered the sailor. “I will admit anything but striking a reef.”
“There’s no reef in the channel,” the sailor replied. “I'll accept anything but hitting a reef.”
“Let us try to get into the hold,” said the engineer. “Perhaps that will help us to discover the cause of the disaster.”
“Let’s try to get into the hold,” said the engineer. “Maybe that will help us figure out what caused the disaster.”
This was the best course to take, and would moreover enable them to make an inventory of the treasures contained in the brig, and to get them ready for transportation to the island. Access to the hold was now easy; the tide continued to fall, and the lower deck, which, as the brig lay, was now uppermost, could easily be reached. The ballast, composed of heavy pigs of cast iron, had staved it in several places. They heard the roaring of the sea, as it rushed through the fissures of the hull.
This was the best course of action, and it would also allow them to take stock of the treasures in the ship and prepare them for transport to the island. Access to the hold was now straightforward; the tide kept going down, and the lower deck, which was now facing up since the ship was lying that way, could be easily reached. The ballast, made up of heavy cast iron blocks, had caused damage in several spots. They could hear the ocean roaring as it surged through the cracks in the hull.
Smith and his companions, axe in hand, walked along the shattered deck. All kinds of chests encumbered it, and as they had not been long under water, perhaps their contents had not been damaged.
Smith and his friends, axe in hand, walked along the broken deck. It was cluttered with all sorts of chests, and since they hadn't been underwater for long, maybe their contents were still intact.
They set to work at once to put this cargo in safety. The tide would not return for some hours, and these hours were utilized to the utmost at the opening into the hull. Ayrton and Pencroff had seized upon tackle which served to hoist the barrels and chests. The canoe received them, and took them ashore at once. They took everything indiscriminately, and left the sorting of their prizes to the future.
They immediately got to work to secure the cargo. The tide wouldn't come back for a few hours, so they made the most of that time at the opening into the hull. Ayrton and Pencroff grabbed some equipment that helped them lift the barrels and chests. The canoe took them and brought everything ashore right away. They grabbed everything without sorting and left the organization of their haul for later.
In any case, the colonists, to their extreme satisfaction, had made sure that the brig possessed a varied cargo, an assortment of all kinds of articles, utensils, manufactured products, and tools, such as ships are loaded with for the coasting trade of Polynesia. They would probably find there a little of everything, which was precisely what they needed on Lincoln Island.
In any case, the colonists were very pleased that the ship had a diverse cargo, filled with all sorts of items, utensils, manufactured goods, and tools, just like ships are loaded for coastal trade in Polynesia. They were likely to find a bit of everything, which was exactly what they needed on Lincoln Island.
Nevertheless, Smith noticed, in silent astonishment, that not only the hull of the brig had suffered frightfully from whatever shock it was which caused the catastrophe, but the machinery was destroyed, especially in the fore part. Partitions and stanchions were torn down as if some enormous shell had burst inside of the brig. The colonists, by piling on one side the boxes which littered their path, could easily go from stem to stern. They were not heavy bales which would have been difficult to handle, but mere packages thrown about in utter confusion.
Nevertheless, Smith noticed with silent amazement that not only had the hull of the brig been severely damaged by whatever shock caused the disaster, but the machinery was wrecked, especially in the front part. Walls and support beams were knocked down as if some massive shell had exploded inside the brig. The colonists were able to move from the front to the back easily by stacking the boxes that cluttered their way on one side. These weren't heavy bales that would have been hard to move, but simple packages scattered in complete disarray.
The colonists soon reached that part of the stern where the poop formerly stood. It was here Ayrton told them they must search for the powder magazine. Smith, believing that this had not exploded, thought they might save some barrels, and that the powder, which is usually in metal cases, had not been damaged by the water. In fact, this was just what had happened. They found, among a quantity of projectiles, at least twenty barrels, which were lined with copper, and which they pulled out with great care. Pencroff was now convinced by his own eyes that the destruction of the Speedy could not have been caused by an explosion. The part of the hull in which the powder magazine was situated was precisely the part which had suffered the least.
The colonists soon reached the part of the stern where the raised deck used to be. It was here that Ayrton told them they needed to look for the powder magazine. Smith, thinking that it hadn’t exploded, believed they could retrieve some barrels and that the powder, which is usually in metal cases, hadn’t been damaged by the water. In fact, that’s exactly what happened. They found at least twenty barrels, lined with copper, among a lot of projectiles, which they carefully pulled out. Pencroff was now convinced by what he saw that the destruction of the Speedy couldn’t have been caused by an explosion. The part of the hull where the powder magazine was located was precisely the part that had sustained the least damage.
“It may be so,” replied the obstinate sailor, “but as to a rock, there is not one in the channel.” Then he added:—”I know nothing about it, even Mr. Smith does not know. No one knows, or ever will.”
“It might be true,” replied the stubborn sailor, “but there isn't a single rock in the channel.” Then he added, “I don't know anything about it; even Mr. Smith doesn’t know. No one knows, and no one ever will.”
Several hours passed in these researches, and the tide was beginning to rise. They had to stop their work of salvage, but there was no fear that the wreck would be washed out to sea, for it was as solidly imbedded as if it had been anchored to the bottom. They could wait with impunity for the turn of the tide to commence operations. As to the ship itself, it was of no use; but they must hasten to save the debris of the hull, which would not take long to disappear in the shifting sands of the channel.
Several hours went by during these searches, and the tide was starting to come in. They had to pause their salvage work, but there was no worry that the wreck would be washed away, as it was securely lodged as if it had been anchored to the seabed. They could wait safely for the tide to turn before starting their operations. As for the ship itself, it was beyond saving; however, they needed to quickly recover the remains of the hull, which wouldn’t take long to vanish in the shifting sands of the channel.
It was 5 o’clock in the afternoon. The day had been a hard one, and they sat down to their dinner with great appetite; but afterwards, notwithstanding their fatigue, they could not resist the desire of examining some of the chests. Most of them contained ready-made clothes, which, as may be imagined, were very welcome. There was enough to clothe a whole colony, linen of every description, boots of all sizes.
It was 5 o’clock in the afternoon. The day had been a tough one, and they sat down to dinner with a big appetite; but later, despite their tiredness, they couldn’t help but want to look through some of the chests. Most of them had ready-made clothes, which, as you can imagine, were greatly appreciated. There was enough to outfit an entire colony, with all kinds of fabric and boots in every size.
“Now we are too rich,” cried Pencroff. “What shall we do with all these things?”
“Now we have too much stuff,” exclaimed Pencroff. “What are we going to do with all of this?”
Every moment the sailor uttered exclamations of joy, as he came upon barrels of molasses and rum, hogsheads of tobacco, muskets and side-arms, bales of cotton, agricultural implements, carpenters’ and smiths’ tools, and packages of seeds of every kind, uninjured by their short sojourn in the water. Two years before, how these things would have come in season! But even now that the industrious colonists were so well supplied, these riches would be put to use.
Every moment, the sailor shouted with joy as he discovered barrels of molasses and rum, huge barrels of tobacco, muskets and pistols, bales of cotton, farming tools, carpentry and blacksmith tools, and packages of seeds of all kinds, all untouched by their brief stay in the water. Two years ago, how useful these items would have been! But even now that the hardworking colonists were well-stocked, these treasures would still be put to good use.
There was plenty of storage room in Granite House, but time failed them now to put everything in safety. They must not forget that six survivors of the Speedy’s crew were now on the island, scoundrels of the deepest dye, against whom they must be on their guard.
There was a lot of storage space in Granite House, but they were running out of time to secure everything. They couldn't forget that six survivors from the Speedy’s crew were now on the island, ruthless men they needed to watch out for.
Although the bridge over the Mercy and the culverts had been raised, the convicts would make little account of a river or a brook; and, urged by despair, these rascals would be formidable. Later, the colonists could decide what course to take with regard to them; in the meantime, the chests and packages piled up near the Chimneys must be watched over, and to this they devoted themselves during the night.
Although the bridge over the Mercy and the culverts had been raised, the convicts would not care much about a river or a stream; driven by desperation, these troublemakers could be dangerous. Later, the colonists could determine what to do about them; in the meantime, they needed to keep an eye on the chests and packages stacked near the Chimneys, and that was what they focused on during the night.
The night passed, however, without any attack from the convicts. Master Jup and Top, of the Granite House guard, would have been quick to give notice.
The night went by without any attack from the convicts. Master Jup and Top, who were on guard at the Granite House, would have quickly notified us.
The three days which followed, the 19th, 20th, and 21st of October, were employed in carrying on shore everything of value either in the cargo or in the rigging. At low tide they cleaned out the hold, and at high tide, stowed away their prizes. A great part of the copper sheathing could be wrenched from the hull, which every day sank deeper; but before the sands had swallowed up the heavy articles which had sunk to the bottom, Ayrton and Pencroff dived and brought up the chains and anchors of the brig, the iron ballast, and as many as four cannon, which could be eased along upon empty barrels and brought to land; so that the arsenal of the colony gained as much from the wreck as the kitchens and store-rooms. Pencroff, always enthusiastic in his projects, talked already about constructing a battery which should command the channel and the mouth of the river. With four cannon, he would guarantee to prevent any fleet, however powerful, from coming within gunshot of the island.
The three days that followed, the 19th, 20th, and 21st of October, were spent bringing ashore everything of value from the cargo or rigging. At low tide, they cleared out the hold, and at high tide, they stored their treasures. A lot of the copper sheathing could be pried off the hull, which sank deeper each day; but before the sands consumed the heavy items that had sunk to the bottom, Ayrton and Pencroff dived and retrieved the brig's chains and anchors, iron ballast, and even four cannons, which they could slide along on empty barrels and take to shore. This way, the colony's arsenal benefited just as much from the wreck as the kitchens and storerooms did. Pencroff, always eager about his plans, was already talking about building a battery to control the channel and the river’s mouth. With four cannons, he believed he could stop any fleet, no matter how powerful, from coming within gunshot of the island.
Meanwhile, after nothing of the brig had been left but a useless shell, the bad weather came to finish its destruction. Smith had intended to blow it up, so as to collect the debris on shore, but a strong northeast wind and a high sea saved his powder for him. On the night of the 23d, the hull was thoroughly broken up, and part of the wreck stranded on the beach. As to the ship’s papers, it is needless to say, although they carefully rummaged the closet in the poop, Smith found no trace of them. The pirates had evidently destroyed all that concerned either the captain or the owner of the Speedy, and as the name of its port was not painted on the stern, there was nothing to betray its nationality. However, from the shape of the bow, Ayrton and Pencroff believed the brig to be of English construction.
Meanwhile, after the brig was left as nothing but a useless shell, the bad weather came to finish its destruction. Smith had planned to blow it up to collect the debris on the shore, but a strong northeast wind and rough seas saved his explosives for him. On the night of the 23rd, the hull was completely broken apart, and part of the wreck washed up on the beach. As for the ship’s papers, there’s no need to say that despite thoroughly searching the closet in the poop, Smith found no trace of them. The pirates had clearly destroyed everything related to either the captain or the owner of the Speedy, and since the name of its port wasn't painted on the stern, there was nothing to reveal its nationality. However, based on the shape of the bow, Ayrton and Pencroff believed the brig was of English construction.
A week after the ship went down, not a trace of her was to be seen even at low tide. The wreck had gone to pieces, and Granite House had been enriched with almost all its contents. But the mystery of its strange destruction would never have been cleared up, if Neb, rambling along the beach, had not come upon a piece of a thick iron cylinder, which bore traces of an explosion. It was twisted and torn at the edge, as if it had been submitted to the action of an explosive substance. Neb took it to his master, who was busy with his companions in the workshop at the Chimneys. Smith examined it carefully, and then turned to Pencroff.
A week after the ship sank, there was no sign of it, even at low tide. The wreck had broken apart, and Granite House had been filled with almost all of its contents. But the cause of its strange destruction would have remained a mystery if Neb hadn’t stumbled upon a piece of a thick iron cylinder while walking along the beach, showing signs of an explosion. It was twisted and ripped at the edge, as if it had been exposed to some explosive substance. Neb brought it to his master, who was working with his friends in the workshop at the Chimneys. Smith examined it closely and then turned to Pencroff.
“Do you still maintain, my friend,” said he, “that the Speedy did not perish by a collision?”
“Do you still believe, my friend,” he said, “that the Speedy didn't sink from a collision?”
“Yes, Mr. Smith,” replied the sailor, “you know as well as I that there are no rocks in the channel.”
“Yes, Mr. Smith,” replied the sailor, “you know just as well as I do that there are no rocks in the channel.”
“But suppose it struck against this piece of iron?” said the engineer, showing the broken cylinder.
“But what if it hit this piece of iron?” said the engineer, pointing at the broken cylinder.
“What, that pipe stem!” said Pencroff, incredulously.
“What, that pipe stem!” Pencroff said in disbelief.
“Do you remember, my friends,” continued Smith, “that before foundering the brig was lifted up by a sort of waterspout?”
“Do you remember, my friends,” Smith continued, “that before the brig sank, it was lifted up by something like a waterspout?”
“Yes, Mr. Smith,” said Herbert.
“Yeah, Mr. Smith,” said Herbert.
“Well, this was the cause of the waterspout,” said Smith, holding up the broken tube.
“Well, this was what caused the waterspout,” said Smith, holding up the broken tube.
“That?” answered Pencroff.
"That?" replied Pencroff.
“Yes; this cylinder is all that is left of a torpedo!”
“Yes, this cylinder is all that remains of a torpedo!”
“A torpedo!” cried they all.
“A torpedo!” they all cried.
“And who put a torpedo there?” asked Pencroff, unwilling to give up.
“And who put a torpedo there?” asked Pencroff, not ready to back down.
“That I cannot tell you,” said Smith, “but there it was, and you witnessed its tremendous effects!”
“Honestly, I can’t say,” Smith replied, “but it was right there, and you saw the huge impact it had!”
CHAPTER XLVII
THE ENGINEER’S THEORY—PENCROFF’S MAGNIFICENT SUPPOSITIONS—A BATTERY IN THE AIR—FOUR PROJECTILES—THE SURVIVING CONVICTS—AYRTON HESITATES—SMITH’S GENEROSITY AND PENCROFF’S DISSATISFACTION.
THE ENGINEER’S THEORY—PENCROFF’S AMAZING IDEAS—A BATTERY IN THE AIR—FOUR PROJECTILES—THE SURVIVING CONVICTS—AYRTON HESITATES—SMITH’S GENEROSITY AND PENCROFF’S DISCONTENT.
Thus, then, everything was explained by the submarine action of this torpedo. Smith had had some experience during the civil war of these terrible engines of destruction, and was not likely to be mistaken. This cylinder, charged with nitro-glycerine, had been the cause of the column of water rising in the air, of the sinking of the brig, and of the shattered condition of her hull. Everything was accounted for, except the presence of this torpedo in the waters of the channel!
Thus, everything was explained by the underwater action of this torpedo. Smith had some experience during the Civil War with these terrible machines of destruction and was unlikely to be mistaken. This cylinder, filled with nitroglycerin, had caused the column of water to shoot up into the air, the brig to sink, and the damage to her hull. Everything was accounted for, except for the presence of this torpedo in the waters of the channel!
“My friends,” resumed Smith, “we can no longer doubt the existence of some mysterious being, perhaps a castaway like ourselves, inhabiting our island. I say this that Ayrton may be informed of all the strange events which have happened for two years. Who our unknown benefactor may be, I cannot say, nor why he should hide himself after rendering us so many services; but his services are not the less real, and such as only a man could render who wielded some prodigious power. Ayrton is his debtor as well; as he saved me from drowning after the fall of the balloon, so he wrote the document, set the bottle afloat in the channel, and gave us information of our comrade’s condition. He stranded on Jetsam Point that chest, full of all that we needed; he lighted that fire on the heights of the island which showed you where to land; he fired that ball which we found in the body of the peccary; he immersed in the channel that torpedo which destroyed the brig; in short, he has done all those inexplicable things of which we could find no explanation. Whatever he is, then, whether a castaway or an exile, we should be ungrateful not to feel how much we owe him. Some day, I hope, we shall discharge our debt.”
“My friends,” Smith continued, “we can no longer doubt that there’s some mysterious being, maybe a castaway like us, living on our island. I mention this so Ayrton knows about all the strange things that have happened over the past two years. I can’t say who our unknown benefactor is or why he hides after helping us so much, but his help is very real, and it could only come from someone with incredible power. Ayrton owes him too; he saved me from drowning after the balloon crash, wrote the document, set the bottle afloat in the water, and informed us about our comrade’s situation. He left that chest at Jetsam Point, filled with everything we needed; he started that fire on the island’s heights to show you where to land; he shot that ball we found inside the peccary; he placed that torpedo in the channel that sank the brig; in short, he has done all those mysterious things without any clear explanation. No matter who he is, whether a castaway or an exile, we would be ungrateful not to acknowledge how much we owe him. I hope that someday, we’ll be able to repay our debt.”
“We may add,” replied Spilett, “that this unknown friend has a way of doing things which seems supernatural. If he did all these wonderful things, he possesses a power which makes him master of the elements.”
“We can also say,” replied Spilett, “that this mysterious friend has a way of doing things that feels supernatural. If he really did all these amazing things, he has a power that makes him in control of the elements.”
“Yes,” said Smith, “there is a mystery here, but if we discover the man we shall discover the mystery also. The question is this:—Shall we respect the incognito of this generous being, or should we try to find him? What do you think?”
“Yes,” said Smith, “there's a mystery here, but if we find the man, we'll also uncover the mystery. The question is this: Should we respect the anonymity of this generous person, or should we try to track him down? What do you think?”
“Master,” said Neb, “I have an idea that we may hunt for him as long as we please, but that we shall only find him when he chooses to make himself known.”
“Master,” Neb said, “I think we can search for him as long as we want, but we’ll only find him when he decides to reveal himself.”
“There’s something in that, Neb,” said Pencroff.
“There’s something to that, Neb,” said Pencroff.
“I agree with you, Neb,” said Spilett; “but that is no reason for not making the attempt. Whether we find this mysterious being or not, we shall have fulfilled our duty towards him.”
“I agree with you, Neb,” said Spilett; “but that’s no reason to avoid trying. Whether we find this mysterious figure or not, we will have done our duty to him.”
“And what is your opinion, my boy?” said the engineer, turning to Herbert.
“And what’s your opinion, kid?” said the engineer, turning to Herbert.
“Ah,” cried Herbert, his eye brightening; “I want to thank him, the man who saved you first and now has saved us all.”
“Ah,” shouted Herbert, his eyes lighting up; “I want to thank him, the guy who saved you first and now has saved us all.”
“It wouldn’t be unpleasant for any of us, my boy,” returned Pencroff. “I am not curious, but I would give one of my eyes to see him face to face.”
“It wouldn’t be bad for any of us, my boy,” Pencroff replied. “I’m not overly curious, but I’d give one of my eyes to see him in person.”
“And you, Ayrton?” asked the engineer.
“And you, Ayrton?” the engineer asked.
“Mr. Smith,” replied Ayrton, “I can give no advice. Whatever you do will be right, and whenever you want my help in your search, I am ready.”
“Mr. Smith,” Ayrton replied, “I can’t offer any advice. Whatever you decide will be the right choice, and whenever you need my help in your search, I’m here for you.”
“Thanks, Ayrton,” said Smith, “but I want a more direct answer. You are our comrade, who has offered his life more than once to save ours, and we will take no important step without consulting you.”
“Thanks, Ayrton,” Smith said, “but I need a more direct answer. You’re our comrade, who has risked your life more than once to save ours, and we won’t make any important decisions without talking to you first.”
“I think, Mr. Smith,” replied Ayrton, “that we ought to do everything to discover our unknown benefactor. He may be sick or suffering. I owe him a debt of gratitude which I can never forget, for he brought you to save me. I will never forget him!”
“I think, Mr. Smith,” replied Ayrton, “that we should do everything we can to find our unknown benefactor. He might be sick or in trouble. I owe him a debt of gratitude that I can never forget, because he brought you to save me. I will never forget him!”
“It is settled,” said Smith. “We will begin our search as soon as possible. We will leave no part of the island unexplored. We will pry into its most secret recesses, and may our unknown friend pardon our zeal!”
“It’s decided,” said Smith. “We’ll start our search as soon as we can. We won’t leave any part of the island unexplored. We’ll dig into its deepest secrets, and may our unknown friend forgive our enthusiasm!”
For several days the colonists were actively at work haymaking and harvesting. Before starting upon their exploring tour, they wanted to finish all their important labors. Now, too, was the time for gathering the vegetable products of Tabor Island. Everything had to be stored; and, happily, there was plenty of room in Granite House for all the riches of the island. There all was ranged in order, safe from man or beast. No dampness was to be feared in the midst of this solid mass of granite. Many of the natural excavations in the upper corridor were enlarged by the pick, or blown out by mining, and Granite House thus became a receptacle for all the goods of the colony.
For several days, the colonists worked hard on making hay and harvesting. Before embarking on their exploration trip, they wanted to wrap up all their important tasks. Now was also the time to gather the crops from Tabor Island. Everything needed to be stored away, and luckily, there was plenty of space in Granite House for all the treasures of the island. Everything was organized and safe from both people and animals. There was no worry about dampness in the solid granite structure. Many of the natural cavities in the upper corridor were expanded with picks or blown out through mining, allowing Granite House to serve as a storage area for all the colony's goods.
The brig’s guns were pretty pieces of cast-steel, which, at Pencroff’s instance, were hoisted, by means of tackle and cranes, to the very entrance of Granite House; embrasures were constructed between the windows, and soon they could be seen stretching their shining nozzles through the granite wall. From this height these fire-breathing gentry had the range of all Union Bay. It was a little Gibraltar, to whose fire every ship off the islet would inevitably be exposed.
The brig's guns were nice cast-steel pieces that, at Pencroff's request, were lifted using tackle and cranes to the entrance of Granite House. They built embrasures between the windows, and soon the shiny barrels were sticking out through the granite wall. From this height, these guns could hit anything in Union Bay. It was like a little Gibraltar, and every ship near the island would be definitely in the line of fire.
“Mr. Smith,” said Pencroff one day—it was the 8th of November—“now that we have mounted our guns, we ought to try their range.”
“Mr. Smith,” Pencroff said one day—it was November 8th—“now that we’ve set up our guns, we should test their range.”
“For what purpose?”
"What's the purpose?"
“Well, we ought to know how far we can send a ball.”
“Well, we should figure out how far we can throw a ball.”
“Try, then, Pencroff,” answered the engineer; “but don’t use our powder, whose stock I do not want to diminish; use pyroxyline, whose supply will never fail.”
“Go ahead, Pencroff,” replied the engineer, “but don’t use our powder since I don’t want to reduce our supply; use pyroxyline instead, as we’ll never run out of that.”
“Can these cannon support the explosive force of pyroxyline?” asked the reporter, who was as eager as Pencroff to try their new artillery.
“Can these cannons handle the explosive power of pyroxyline?” asked the reporter, who was just as eager as Pencroff to test out their new artillery.
“I think so. Besides,” added the engineer, “we will be careful.”
“I think so. Besides,” the engineer added, “we'll be careful.”
Smith had good reason to think that these cannon were well made. They were of cast steel, and breech-loaders, they could evidently bear a heavy charge, and consequently would have a long range, on account of the tremendous initial velocity.
Smith had good reason to believe that these cannons were well made. They were made of cast steel and were breech-loaders, meaning they could clearly handle a heavy charge, resulting in a long range due to the incredible initial velocity.
“Now,” said Smith, “the initial velocity being a question of the amount of powder in the charge, everything depends upon the resisting power of the metal; and steel is undeniably the best metal in this respect; so that I have great hope of our battery.”
“Now,” Smith said, “since the initial speed is determined by the amount of powder in the charge, everything relies on the metal's resistance; and steel is definitely the best metal for this purpose, so I’m very optimistic about our battery.”
The four cannon were in perfect condition. Ever since they had been taken out of the water, Pencroff had made it his business to give them a polish. How many hours had been spent in rubbing them, oiling them, and cleaning the separate parts! By this time they shone as if they had been on board of a United States frigate.
The four cannons were in great shape. Ever since they were taken out of the water, Pencroff had made it his mission to polish them. How many hours had been spent rubbing them down, oiling them, and cleaning the individual pieces? By now, they gleamed as if they had been on a U.S. Navy frigate.
That very day, in the presence of all the colony, including Jup and Top, the new guns were successively tried. They were charged with pyroxyline, which, as we have said, has an explosive force fourfold that of gunpowder; the projectile was cylindro-conical in shape. Pencroff, holding the fuse, stood ready to touch them off.
That same day, with the whole colony watching, including Jup and Top, the new guns were tested one after another. They were loaded with pyroxyline, which, as we mentioned, has an explosive power four times that of gunpowder; the projectile was shaped like a cylinder with a cone on top. Pencroff, holding the fuse, was ready to light them.
Upon a word from Smith, the shot was fired. The ball, directed seaward, passed over the islet and was lost in the offing, at a distance which could not be computed.
Upon a signal from Smith, the shot was fired. The ball, aimed toward the sea, flew over the small island and was lost in the distance, at an uncountable range.
The second cannon was trained upon the rocks terminating Jetsam Point, and the projectile, striking a sharp boulder nearly three miles from Granite House, made it fly into shivers. Herbert had aimed and fired the shot, and was quite proud of his success. But Pencroff was prouder of it even than he. Such a feather in his boy’s cap!
The second cannon was aimed at the rocks at the end of Jetsam Point, and the projectile, hitting a sharp boulder almost three miles from Granite House, shattered it to pieces. Herbert had aimed and fired the shot and felt really proud of his accomplishment. But Pencroff was even prouder than he was. What a great achievement for his boy!
The third projectile, aimed at the downs which formed the upper coast of Union Bay, struck the sand about four miles away, then ricocheted into the water. The fourth piece was charged heavily to test its extreme range, and every one got out of the way for fear it would burst; then the fuse was touched off by means of a long string. There was a deafening report, but the gun stood the charge, and the colonists, rushing to the windows, could see the projectile graze the rocks of Mandible Cape, nearly five miles from Granite House, and disappear in Shark Gulf.
The third projectile, aimed at the hills that made up the upper coast of Union Bay, hit the sand about four miles away and then bounced into the water. The fourth one was loaded heavily to test its maximum range, and everyone moved out of the way fearing it might explode; then the fuse was ignited using a long string. There was a loud bang, but the gun withstood the blast, and the colonists, rushing to the windows, saw the projectile skim the rocks of Mandible Cape, nearly five miles from Granite House, and vanish into Shark Gulf.
“Well, Mr. Smith,” said Pencroff, who had cheered at every shot, “what do you say to our battery? I should like to see a pirate land now!”
“Well, Mr. Smith,” said Pencroff, who had cheered at every shot, “what do you think of our cannon? I’d love to see a pirate come ashore now!”
“Better have them stay away, Pencroff,” answered the engineer.
“It's better if they stay away, Pencroff,” replied the engineer.
“Speaking of that,” said the sailor, “what are we going to do with the six rascals who are prowling about the island? Shall we let them roam about unmolested? They are wild beasts, and I think we should treat them as such. What do you think about it, Ayrton?” added Pencroff, turning towards his companion.
“Speaking of that,” said the sailor, “what are we going to do about the six troublemakers who are wandering around the island? Should we just let them go about their business? They’re dangerous, and I think we should handle them accordingly. What do you think, Ayrton?” added Pencroff, looking over at his friend.
Ayrton hesitated for a moment, while Smith regretted the abrupt question, and was sincerely touched when Ayrton answered humbly:—
Ayrton paused for a moment, while Smith felt bad about the sudden question and was genuinely moved when Ayrton replied with humility:—
“I was one of these wild beasts once, Mr. Pencroff, and I am not worthy to give counsel.”
“I was one of those wild beasts once, Mr. Pencroff, and I’m not fit to offer advice.”
And, with bent head, he walked slowly away. Pencroff understood him.
And, with his head down, he walked away slowly. Pencroff got it.
“Stupid ass that I am!” cried he. “Poor Ayrton! and yet he has as good a right to speak as any of us. I would rather have bitten off my tongue than have given him pain! But, to go back to the subject, I think these wretches have no claim to mercy, and that we should rid the island of them.”
“Dumbass that I am!” he shouted. “Poor Ayrton! And he has just as much right to speak as any of us. I’d rather have bitten off my tongue than hurt him! But getting back to the topic, I believe these miserable people don’t deserve any mercy, and we should get rid of them from the island.”
“And before we hunt them down, Pencroff, shall we not wait for some fresh act of hostility?”
“And before we track them down, Pencroff, shouldn’t we wait for some new act of aggression?”
“Haven’t they done enough already?” said the sailor, who could not understand these refinements.
“Haven’t they done enough already?” said the sailor, who couldn’t grasp these complexities.
“They may repent,” said Smith.
"They might regret it," said Smith.
“They repent!” cried the sailor, shrugging his shoulders.
“They're sorry!” shouted the sailor, shrugging his shoulders.
“Think of Ayrton, Pencroff!” said Herbert, taking his hand. “He has become an honest man.”
“Think about Ayrton, Pencroff!” said Herbert, taking his hand. “He’s turned into a good man.”
Pencroff looked at his companions In stupefaction. He could not admit the possibility of making terms with the accomplices of Harvey, the murderers of the Speedy’s crew.
Pencroff stared at his companions in shock. He couldn't accept the idea of making a deal with the people who had teamed up with Harvey, the ones who had killed the crew of the Speedy.
“Be it so!” he said. “You want to be magnanimous to these rascals. May we never repent of it!”
"Fine!" he said. "You want to be generous to these troublemakers. Let's hope we never regret it!"
“What danger do we run if we are on our guard?” said Herbert.
“What danger are we in if we're being careful?” said Herbert.
“H’m!” said the reporter, doubtfully. “There are six of them, well armed. If each of them sighted one of us from behind a tree—”
“Hm!” said the reporter, uncertainly. “There are six of them, heavily armed. If each of them spotted one of us from behind a tree—”
“Why haven’t they tried it already?” said Herbert. “Evidently it was not their cue.”
"Why haven't they done it yet?" Herbert asked. "Clearly, it wasn't the right moment for them."
“Very well, then,” said the sailor, who was stubborn in his opinion, “we will let these worthy fellows attend to their innocent occupations without troubling our heads about them.”
“Alright, then,” said the sailor, who was set in his ways, “we’ll let these good people focus on their simple tasks without worrying about them.”
“Pencroff,” said the engineer, “you have often shown respect for my opinions. Will you trust me once again?”
“Pencroff,” the engineer said, “you’ve often shown respect for my views. Will you trust me one more time?”
“I will do whatever you say, Mr. Smith,” said the sailor, nowise convinced.
“I'll do whatever you say, Mr. Smith,” said the sailor, clearly not convinced.
“Well, let us wait, and not be the first to attack.”
"Well, let’s wait and not be the ones to attack first."
This was the final decision, with Pencroff in the minority. They would give the pirates a chance, which their own interest might induce them to seize upon, to come to terms. So much, humanity required of them. But they would have to be constantly on their guard, and the situation was a very serious one. They had silenced Pencroff, but, perhaps, after all, his advice would prove sound.
This was the final decision, with Pencroff in the minority. They would give the pirates a chance, which their own interest might lead them to take, to come to an agreement. This was the least humanity demanded of them. But they had to stay alert, and the situation was quite serious. They had quieted Pencroff, but maybe, after all, his advice would turn out to be wise.
CHAPTER XLVIII.
THE PROJECTED EXPEDITION—AYRTON AT THE CORRAL—VISIT TO PORT BALLOON—PENCROFF’S REMARKS—DESPATCH SENT TO THE CORRAL—NO ANSWER FROM AYRTON—SETTING OUT NEXT DAY—WHY THE WIRE DID NOT ACT—A DETONATION.
THE PLANNED EXPEDITION—AYRTON AT THE CORRAL—VISIT TO PORT BALLOON—PENCROFF’S COMMENTS—MESSAGE SENT TO THE CORRAL—NO RESPONSE FROM AYRTON—DEPARTING THE NEXT DAY—WHY THE WIRE DIDN'T WORK—A EXPLOSION.
Meanwhile the thing uppermost in the colonists’ thought was to achieve the complete exploration of the island which had been decided upon, an exploration which now would have two objects: —First, to discover the mysterious being whose existence was no longer a matter of doubt; and, at the same time to find out what had become of the pirates, what hiding place they had chosen, what sort of life they were leading, and what was to be feared from them.
Meanwhile, the main concern for the colonists was to fully explore the island as they had planned. This exploration now had two goals: first, to uncover the mysterious being whose existence was no longer in doubt; and at the same time, to find out what had happened to the pirates, where they had chosen to hide, what kind of life they were living, and what threats they posed.
Smith would have set off at once, but as the expedition would take several days, it seemed better to load the wagon with all the necessaries for camping out. Now at this time one of the onagers, wounded in the leg, could not bear harness; it must have several days’ rest, and they thought it would make little difference if they delayed the departure a week, that is, till November 20. November in this latitude corresponds to the May of the Northern Hemisphere, and the weather was fine. They were now at the longest days in the year, so that everything was favorable to the projected expedition, which, if it did not attain its principal object, might be fruitful in discoveries, especially of the products of the soil; for Smith intended to explore those thick forests of the Far West, which stretched to the end of Serpentine Peninsula.
Smith would have set off right away, but since the expedition would last several days, it seemed better to pack the wagon with all the essentials for camping. At that time, one of the onagers, injured in the leg, couldn't handle the harness; it needed several days of rest, and they thought it wouldn't matter much if they postponed the departure by a week, until November 20. November in this area is like May in the Northern Hemisphere, and the weather was nice. They were now in the longest days of the year, so everything was favorable for the planned expedition, which, even if it didn't achieve its main goal, could yield valuable discoveries, especially regarding local resources; Smith planned to explore those dense forests of the Far West that extended to the end of Serpentine Peninsula.
During the nine days which would precede their setting out, it was agreed that they should finish work on Prospect Plateau. But Ayrton had to go back to the corral to take care of their domesticated animals. It was settled that he should stay there two days, and leave the beasts with plenty of fodder. Just as he was setting out, Smith asked him if he would like to have one of them with him, as the island was no longer secure. Ayrton replied that it would be useless, as he could do everything by himself, and that there was no danger to fear. If anything happened at or near the corral, he would instantly acquaint the colonists of it by a telegram sent to Granite House.
During the nine days leading up to their departure, they agreed to finish work on Prospect Plateau. However, Ayrton needed to go back to the corral to take care of their domesticated animals. It was decided that he would stay there for two days and leave the animals with plenty of food. Just as he was about to leave, Smith asked him if he wanted one of the animals to accompany him since the island was no longer safe. Ayrton replied that it wouldn't be necessary because he could manage everything on his own, and there was no danger to worry about. If anything happened at or near the corral, he would immediately inform the colonists by sending a telegram to Granite House.
So Ayrton drove off in the twilight, about 9 o’clock, behind one onager, and two hours afterwards the electric wire gave notice that he had found everything in order at the corral.
So Ayrton drove off in the twilight, around 9 o’clock, behind one onager, and two hours later, the electric wire signaled that he had found everything in order at the corral.
During these two days Smith was busy at a project which would finally secure Granite House from a surprise. The point was to hide completely the upper orifice of the former weir, which had been already blocked up with stones, and half hidden under grass and plants, at the southern angle of Lake Grant. Nothing could be easier, since by raising the level of the lake two or three feet, the hole would be entirely under water.
During these two days, Smith worked on a project that would ultimately protect Granite House from any surprises. The plan was to completely conceal the upper opening of the old weir, which had already been filled with stones and was partially covered by grass and plants at the southern edge of Lake Grant. This was straightforward, since by raising the lake level by two or three feet, the opening would be completely submerged.
Now to raise the level, they had only to make a dam across the two trenches by which Glycerine Creek and Waterfall Creek were fed. The colonists were incited to the task, and the two dams, which were only seven or eight feet long, by three feet high, were rapidly erected of closely cemented stones. When the work had been done, no one could have suspected the existence of the subterranean conduit. The little stream which served to feed the reservoir at Granite House, and to work the elevator, had been suffered to flow in its channel, so that water might never be wanting. The elevator once raised, they might defy attack.
Now to raise the water level, all they needed to do was build a dam across the two trenches that fed Glycerine Creek and Waterfall Creek. The settlers were motivated to take on the task, and the two dams, which were only about seven or eight feet long and three feet high, were quickly built using tightly cemented stones. Once the work was finished, no one would have suspected the underground passage existed. The small stream that supplied the reservoir at Granite House and powered the elevator was allowed to flow in its channel, ensuring that there was always enough water. With the elevator raised, they could withstand any attack.
This work had been quickly finished, and Pencroff, Spilett, and Herbert found time for an expedition to Port Balloon. The sailor was anxious to know whether the little inlet up which the Good Luck was moored had been visited by the convicts.
This task was wrapped up quickly, and Pencroff, Spilett, and Herbert found time for a trip to Port Balloon. The sailor was eager to find out if the small cove where the Good Luck was anchored had been explored by the convicts.
“These gentry got to land on the southern shore,” he observed, “and if they followed the line of the coast they may have discovered the little harbor, in which case I wouldn’t give half a dollar for our Good Luck.”
“These people managed to land on the southern shore,” he said, “and if they followed the coastline, they might have found the little harbor, in which case I wouldn’t pay a dime for our Good Luck.”
So off the three went in the afternoon of November 10. They were well armed, and as Pencroff slipped two bullets into each barrel of his gun, he had a look which presaged no good to whoever came too near, “beast or man,” as he said. Neb went with them to the elbow of the Mercy, and lifted the bridge after them. It was agreed that they should give notice of their return by firing a shot, when Neb would come back to put down the bridge.
So off the three of them went in the afternoon of November 10. They were well armed, and as Pencroff loaded two bullets into each barrel of his gun, he had a look that suggested nothing good for anyone who dared come too close, “beast or man,” as he put it. Neb went with them to the bend of the Mercy and lifted the bridge after they left. It was agreed that they would signal their return by firing a shot, at which point Neb would come back to lower the bridge.
The little band walked straight for the south coast. The distance was only three miles and a half, but they took two hours to walk it. They searched on both sides of the way, both the forest and Tadorn’s Fens; but they found no trace of the fugitives. Arriving at Port Balloon, they saw with great satisfaction that the Good Luck was quietly moored in the narrow inlet, which was so well hidden by the rocks that it could be seen neither from sea nor shore, but only from directly above or below.
The small group headed straight for the south coast. The distance was just three and a half miles, but they took two hours to get there. They searched on both sides of the path, including the forest and Tadorn’s Fens, but they didn’t find any sign of the escapees. When they arrived at Port Balloon, they were pleased to see that the Good Luck was peacefully docked in the narrow inlet, which was so well concealed by the rocks that it couldn’t be seen from the sea or the shore, only from directly above or below.
“After all,” said Pencroff, “the rascals haven’t been here. The vipers like tall grass better, and we shall find them in the Far-West.”
“After all,” said Pencroff, “those rascals haven't been around. The vipers prefer tall grass, and we'll find them in the Far-West.”
“And it’s a fortunate thing,” added Herbert, “for if they had found the Good Luck, they would have made use of her in getting away, and we could never have gone back to Tabor Island.”
“And it’s a lucky thing,” Herbert added, “because if they had found the Good Luck, they would have used her to escape, and we could never have returned to Tabor Island.”
“Yes,” replied the reporter, “it will be important to put a paper there stating the situation of Lincoln Island, Ayrton’s new residence, in case the Scotch yacht should come after him.”
“Yes,” replied the reporter, “it will be important to have a document there outlining the situation of Lincoln Island, Ayrton’s new home, in case the Scottish yacht comes looking for him.”
“Well, here is our Good Luck, Mr. Spilett,” said the sailor, “ready to start with her crew at the first signal!”
“Well, here is our Good Luck, Mr. Spilett,” said the sailor, “ready to set off with her crew at the first signal!”
Talking thus, they got on board and walked about the deck. On a sudden the sailor, after examining the bit around which the cable of the anchor was wound, cried,
Talking like this, they boarded the ship and walked around the deck. Suddenly, the sailor, after checking the spot where the anchor cable was wrapped, shouted,
“Hallo! this is a bad business!”
“Hello! This is a terrible situation!”
“What’s the matter, Pencroff?” asked the reporter.
“What’s wrong, Pencroff?” asked the reporter.
“The matter is that that knot was never tied by me——”
“The thing is that knot was never tied by me——”
And Pencroff pointed to a rope which made the cable fast to the bit, so as to prevent its tripping.
And Pencroff pointed to a rope that secured the cable to the bit, keeping it from tripping.
“How, never tied by you?” asked Spilett.
“How, never tied by you?” Spilett asked.
“No, I can swear to it. I never tie a knot like that.”
“No, I can promise you. I’ve never tied a knot like that.”
“You are mistaken, Pencroff.”
"You're wrong, Pencroff."
“No, I’m not mistaken,” insisted the sailor. “That knot of mine is second nature with me.”
“No, I’m not wrong,” the sailor insisted. “That knot is second nature to me.”
“Then have the convicts been on board?” asked Herbert.
“Have the convicts been on board then?” asked Herbert.
“I don’t know,” said Pencroff, “but somebody has certainly raised and dropped this anchor!”
“I don't know,” Pencroff said, “but someone definitely raised and dropped this anchor!”
The sailor was so positive that neither Spilett nor Herbert could contest his assertion. It was evident that the beat had shifted place more or less since Pencroff had brought it back to Balloon Harbor. As for the sailor, he had no doubt that the anchor had been pulled up and cast again. Now, why had these manœuvres taken place unless the boat had been used on some expedition?
The sailor was so sure that neither Spilett nor Herbert could challenge his claim. It was clear that the location of the beat had changed somewhat since Pencroff had returned it to Balloon Harbor. As for the sailor, he had no doubt that the anchor had been raised and dropped again. Now, why had these actions occurred unless the boat had been used for some mission?
“Then why did we not see the Good Luck pass the offing?” said the reporter, who wanted to raise every possible objection.
“Then why didn’t we see the Good Luck come into view?” asked the reporter, who wanted to bring up every possible argument.
“But, Mr. Spilett,” answered the sailor, “they could have set out in the night with a good wind, and in two hours have been out of sight of the island.”
“But, Mr. Spilett,” replied the sailor, “they could have left during the night with a strong wind, and in two hours, they would have been out of sight of the island.”
“Agreed,” said Spilett, but I still ask with what object the convicts used the Good Luck, and why, after using her, they brought her back to port?”
“Agreed,” said Spilett, “but I still want to know what the convicts were using the Good Luck for, and why they brought her back to port after using her?”
“Well, Mr. Spilett,” said the sailor, “we will have to include that among our mysterious incidents, and think no more of it. One thing is certain, the Good Luck was there, and is here! If the convicts take it a second time, it may never find its way back again.”
“Well, Mr. Spilett,” said the sailor, “we'll have to add that to our list of mysterious events and not stress about it anymore. One thing's for sure, the Good Luck was there, and it's here now! If the convicts manage to grab it again, it might never come back.”
“Then, Pencroff,” said Herbert, “perhaps we had better take the Good Luck back and anchor her in front of Granite House.”
“Then, Pencroff,” said Herbert, “maybe we should take the Good Luck back and anchor it in front of Granite House.”
“I can hardly say,” answered the sailor, “but I think not. The mouth of the Mercy is a bad place for a ship; the sea is very heavy there.”
“I can hardly say,” the sailor replied, “but I don’t think so. The mouth of the Mercy is not a great spot for a ship; the sea is pretty rough there.”
“But by hauling it over the sand to the foot of the Chimneys——”
“But by dragging it across the sand to the base of the Chimneys——”
“Well, perhaps,” answered Pencroff. “In any case, as we have to leave Granite House for a long expedition, I believe the Good Luck will be safer here during oar absence, and he will do well to leave her here until the island is rid of these rascals.”
“Well, maybe,” replied Pencroff. “Either way, since we have to leave Granite House for a long trip, I think it’s safer to keep the Good Luck here while we’re gone, and it would be best to leave her here until the island is cleared of these troublemakers.”
“That is my opinion, too,” said the reporter. At least in case of bad weather, she will not be exposed as she would be at the mouth of the Mercy.”
“That’s my opinion, too,” said the reporter. “At least in bad weather, she won’t be exposed like she would be at the mouth of the Mercy.”
“But if the convicts should pay her another visit?” said Herbert.
“But what if the convicts come to see her again?” said Herbert.
“Well, my boy,” said Pencroff, “if they do not find the boat here they will search until they do find her; and in our absence there is nothing to prevent their carrying her off from the front of Granite House. I agree with Mr. Spilett that we had better leave her at Balloon Harbor; but if we have not rid the island of these wretches by the time we come back it will be more prudent to take our ship back to Granite House, until we have nothing more to fear from our enemies.”
“Well, my boy,” said Pencroff, “if they don’t find the boat here, they’ll keep looking until they do. And since we’re not here, there’s nothing stopping them from taking her right from in front of Granite House. I agree with Mr. Spilett that it’s better to leave her at Balloon Harbor; but if we haven't gotten rid of these scoundrels by the time we return, it will be smarter to take our ship back to Granite House until we no longer have to worry about our enemies.”
“All right,” said Spilett. “Let us go back now.”
“All right,” Spilett said. “Let’s head back now.”
When they returned to Granite House, they told Smith what had happened, and the latter approved their present and future plans. He even promised Pencroff he would examine that part of the channel situated between the island and the coast, so as to see if it would be possible to make an artificial harbor by means of a dam. In this way the Good Luck would be always within reach, in sight of the colonists, and locked up if necessary.
When they got back to Granite House, they filled Smith in on what had happened, and he approved their current and future plans. He even promised Pencroff that he would check out the section of the channel between the island and the shore to see if it would be possible to create an artificial harbor with a dam. This way, the Good Luck would always be accessible, visible to the colonists, and secured if needed.
On the same evening they sent a telegram to Ayrton, asking him to bring back from the corral a couple of goats, which Neb wished to acclimatize on the plateau. Strange to say, Ayrton did not acknowledge the receipt of this despatch, as was his custom to do. This surprised the engineer, but he concluded that Ayrton was not at the corral at the moment, and perhaps had started on his way back to Granite House. In fact, two days had elapsed since his departure; and it had been agreed that on the evening of the 10th or the morning of the 11th, at latest, he would return.
On the same evening, they sent a message to Ayrton, asking him to bring back a couple of goats from the corral, which Neb wanted to acclimatize on the plateau. Oddly enough, Ayrton didn’t respond to this message, which was unusual for him. This surprised the engineer, but he figured that Ayrton wasn't at the corral at that moment and might have started heading back to Granite House. In fact, two days had passed since his departure, and it had been agreed that he would return by the evening of the 10th or the morning of the 11th at the latest.
The colonists were now waiting to see Ayrton on Prospect Plateau. Neb and Herbert both looked after the approach by way of the bridge, so as to let it down when their companion should appear, but when 6 o’clock in the evening came, and there was no sign of Ayrton, they agreed to send another despatch, asking for an immediate answer.
The colonists were now waiting to see Ayrton on Prospect Plateau. Neb and Herbert both kept an eye on the approach via the bridge, ready to lower it when their companion arrived. However, when 6 PM hit and there was still no sign of Ayrton, they decided to send another message, requesting an immediate response.
The wire at Granite House remained silent.
The wire at Granite House stayed silent.
The uneasiness of the colonists was now extreme. What had happened? “Was Ayrton not at the corral? or, if there, had he not power over his own movements? Ought they to go in search of him on this dark night?
The colonists were now extremely uneasy. What had happened? “Was Ayrton not at the corral? Or, if he was there, did he not have control over his own movements? Should they go look for him on this dark night?
They discussed the point. Some were for going, and others for waiting.
They talked about the situation. Some were in favor of going, while others preferred to wait.
“But,” said Herbert, “perhaps some accident has happened to the wires which prevents their working.”
“But,” said Herbert, “maybe something happened to the wires that’s stopping them from working.”
“That may be,” said the reporter.
"That might be," said the reporter.
“Let us wait until to-morrow,” said Smith. “It is just possible that either Ayrton has not received our despatch, or we have missed his.”
“Let’s wait until tomorrow,” said Smith. “It’s possible that either Ayrton didn’t get our message, or we missed his.”
They waited, as may be imagined, with much anxiety. At daylight on the 11th of November, Smith sent a message across the wires, but received no answer. Again, with the same result.
They waited, as you can imagine, with a lot of anxiety. At dawn on November 11th, Smith sent a message over the wires but got no response. Again, it was the same result.
“Let us set off at once for the corral,” said he.
“Let’s head to the corral right now,” he said.
“Aid will armed,” added Pencroff.
"Aid will be armed," added Pencroff.
It was agreed that Granite House must not be deserted, so Neb was left behind to take charge. After accompanying his companions to Glycerine Creek, he put up the bridge again, and hid behind a tree, to wait either for their return or for that of Ayrton. In case the pirates should appear, and should attempt to force the passage, he would try to defend it with his gun; and in the last resort he would take refuge in Granite House, where, the elevator once drawn up, he would be in perfect safety. The others were to go direct to the corral, and failing to find Ayrton there, were to scour the neighboring woods.
It was decided that Granite House couldn't be abandoned, so Neb stayed behind to keep watch. After he took his friends to Glycerine Creek, he set up the bridge again and hid behind a tree, waiting for either their return or for Ayrton. If the pirates showed up and tried to cross, he would defend the bridge with his gun; as a last resort, he would retreat to Granite House, where he would be completely safe once the elevator was pulled up. The others were supposed to head straight to the corral, and if they didn’t find Ayrton there, they would search the nearby woods.
At 6 o’clock in the morning the engineer and his three companions had crossed Glycerine Creek, and Neb posted himself behind a low cliff, crowned by some large dragon trees on the left side of the brook. The colonists, after leaving Prospect Plateau, took the direct route to the corral. They carried their guns on their shoulders, ready to fire at the first sign of hostility. The two rifles and the two guns had been carefully loaded.
At 6 o’clock in the morning, the engineer and his three companions had crossed Glycerine Creek, and Neb positioned himself behind a low cliff, topped with some large dragon trees on the left side of the stream. The colonists, after leaving Prospect Plateau, took the straight path to the corral. They carried their guns on their shoulders, ready to shoot at the first sign of trouble. The two rifles and the two guns had been loaded with care.
On either side of the path was a dense thicket, which might easily hide enemies, who, as they were armed, would be indeed formidable. The colonists walked on rapidly without a word. Top preceded them, sometimes keeping to the path, and sometimes making a detour into the wood, but not appearing to suspect anything unusual; and they might depend upon it that the faithful dog would not be taken by surprise, and would bark at the slightest appearance of danger.
On either side of the path was a dense thicket that could easily conceal enemies, who, being armed, would be quite formidable. The colonists walked on quickly without saying a word. Top led the way, occasionally sticking to the path and sometimes taking a detour into the woods, but not seeming to sense anything out of the ordinary; they could rely on the loyal dog not to be caught off guard and to bark at the slightest hint of danger.
Along this same path Smith and his companions followed the telegraphic wires which connected the corral with Granite House. For the first two miles they did not notice any solution of continuity. The posts were in good condition, the insulators uninjured, and the wire evenly stretched. From this point the engineer noticed that the tension was less complete, and at last, arriving at post No. 74, Herbert, who was ahead of the others, cried, “The wire is broken!”
Along the same route, Smith and his friends followed the telegraph wires connecting the corral to Granite House. For the first two miles, everything looked fine. The posts were in good shape, the insulators were intact, and the wire was taut. After that, the engineer saw that the tension was decreasing, and finally, when they reached post No. 74, Herbert, who was ahead of the group, shouted, “The wire is broken!”
His companions hastened forward and arrived at the spot where the boy had stopped. There the overturned post was lying across the path. They had discovered the break, and it was evident that the dispatches from Granite House could not have been received at the corral.
His friends rushed ahead and reached the place where the boy had paused. There, the fallen post was lying across the path. They had found the break, and it was clear that the messages from Granite House couldn’t have gotten to the corral.
“It can’t be the wind that has overturned this post,” said Pencroff.
“It can’t be the wind that knocked over this post,” said Pencroff.
“No,” answered the reporter, “there are marks of footsteps on the ground; it has been uprooted by the hand of man.”
“No,” replied the reporter, “there are tracks on the ground; it has been disturbed by human hands.”
“Besides, the wire is broken,” added Herbert, showing the two ends of the wire which had been violently torn asunder.
“Besides, the wire is broken,” added Herbert, showing the two ends of the wire that had been violently ripped apart.
“Is the break a fresh one?” asked Smith.
“Is the break a new one?” Smith asked.
“Yes,” said Herbert, “it was certainly made a very short time ago.”
“Yes,” Herbert said, “it was definitely made not long ago.”
“To the corral! to the corral!” cried the sailor.
“To the corral! To the corral!” shouted the sailor.
The colonists were then midway between Granite House and the corral, and had still two miles and a half to go. They started on a run.
The colonists were halfway between Granite House and the corral and still had two and a half miles to cover. They took off running.
In fact, they might well fear that something had happened at the corral. Ayrton doubtless might have sent a telegram which had not arrived. It was not this which alarmed his companions, but a circumstance more remarkable. Ayrton, who had promised to come back the evening before, had not reappeared! The communication, between Granite House and the corral had been out with a sinister design.
In fact, they might actually worry that something had happened at the corral. Ayrton could have sent a telegram that just didn’t arrive. But it wasn't this that scared his companions; it was something even more concerning. Ayrton, who had promised to return the night before, hadn’t shown up! The connection between Granite House and the corral had been cut with a troubling intention.
They hurried on, their hearts beating quick with fear for their comrade, to whom they were sincerely attached; Were they to find him struck down by the hand of those he had formerly led?
They rushed on, their hearts racing with fear for their friend, to whom they were genuinely connected; Would they find him taken down by the very people he had once led?
Soon they reached the place where the road lay along by the little brook flowing from Red Creek, which watered the meadows of the corral. They had moderated their pace, so as not to be out of breath at the moment when a deadly struggle might occur. Their guns were uncocked, but loaded. Each of them watched one side of the woods. Top kept up an ill-omened growling.
Soon they reached the spot where the road ran alongside the small brook coming from Red Creek, which irrigated the meadows of the corral. They had slowed down their pace to avoid being out of breath when a life-or-death fight might break out. Their guns were loaded but uncocked. Each of them kept an eye on one side of the woods. Top continued to growl ominously.
At last the fenced enclosure appeared behind the trees. They saw no signs of devastation. The door was closed as usual; a profound silence reigned at the corral. Neither the accustomed bleatings of the sheep nor the voice of Ayrton was to be heard.
At last, the fenced enclosure came into view behind the trees. They saw no signs of destruction. The door was closed as usual; a deep silence hung over the corral. Neither the familiar bleating of the sheep nor Ayrton's voice could be heard.
“Let us go in,” said Smith, and the engineer advanced, while his companions, keeping guard twenty feet in the rear, stood ready to fire.
“Let’s go in,” said Smith, and the engineer moved forward, while his companions, standing guard twenty feet back, were ready to fire.
Smith raised the inner latch, and began to push back the door, when Top barked loudly. There was a report from behind the fence, followed by a cry of pain, and Herbert, pierced by a bullet, fell to the ground!
Smith lifted the inner latch and started to push the door open when Top barked loudly. There was a shot from behind the fence, followed by a cry of pain, and Herbert, hit by a bullet, collapsed to the ground!
CHAPTER XLIX
THE REPORTER AND PENCROFF IN THE CORRAL—MOVING HERBERT—DESPAIR OF THE SAILOR—CONSULTATION OF THE ENGINEER AND THE REPORTER—MODE OF TREATMENT—A GLIMMER OF HOPE—HOW TO WARN NEB—A FAITHFUL MESSENGER—NEB’S REPLY.
THE REPORTER AND PENCROFF IN THE CORRAL—MOVING HERBERT—DESPAIR OF THE SAILOR—CONSULTATION OF THE ENGINEER AND THE REPORTER—MODE OF TREATMENT—A GLIMMER OF HOPE—HOW TO WARN NEB—A FAITHFUL MESSENGER—NEB’S REPLY.
At Herbert’s cry, Pencroff, dropping his gun, sprang towards him.
At Herbert's shout, Pencroff dropped his gun and rushed over to him.
“They have killed him!” cried he. “My boy—they have killed him.”
“They’ve killed him!” he shouted. “My boy—they’ve killed him.”
Smith and Spilett rushed forward. The reporter put his ear to the boy’s heart to see if it were still beating.
Smith and Spilett hurried forward. The reporter pressed his ear to the boy’s chest to check if his heart was still beating.
“He’s alive,” said he, “but he must be taken—”
“He's alive,” he said, “but we have to take him—”
“To Granite House? Impossible!” said the engineer.
“To Granite House? No way!” said the engineer.
“To the corral, then,” cried Pencroff.
“To the corral, then,” shouted Pencroff.
“One moment,” said Smith, and he rushed to the left around the fence. There he found himself face to face with a convict, who fired at him and sent a ball through his cap. An instant later, before he had time to fire again, he fell, struck to the heart by Smith’s poniard, a surer weapon even than his gun.
“One moment,” said Smith, and he dashed to the left around the fence. There he came face to face with a convict, who shot at him and sent a bullet through his cap. A second later, before he could fire again, he collapsed, hit to the heart by Smith’s dagger, a more reliable weapon than his gun.
While this was going on, the reporter and Pencroff hoisted themselves up to the angle of the fence, strode over the top, jumped into the enclosure, made their way into the empty house, and laid Herbert gently down on Ayrton’s bed.
While this was happening, the reporter and Pencroff climbed up to the corner of the fence, stepped over the top, jumped into the enclosure, went into the empty house, and carefully placed Herbert down on Ayrton’s bed.
A few minutes afterwards Smith was at his side. At the sight of Herbert, pale and unconscious, the grief of the sailor was intense. He sobbed and cried bitterly; neither the engineer nor the reporter could calm him. Themselves over whelmed with emotion, they could hardly speak.
A few minutes later, Smith was by his side. When he saw Herbert, pale and unconscious, the sailor's grief was overwhelming. He sobbed and cried hard; neither the engineer nor the reporter could console him. They were also overcome with emotion and could barely speak.
They did all in their power to save the poor boy’s life. Spilett, in his life of varied experience, had acquired some knowledge of medicine. He knew a little of everything; and had had several opportunities of learning the surgery of gunshot wounds. With Smith’s assistance, he hastened to apply the remedies which Herbert’s condition demanded.
They did everything they could to save the poor boy’s life. Spilett, with his diverse life experiences, had picked up some medical knowledge. He knew a bit about everything and had several chances to learn about treating gunshot wounds. With Smith’s help, he rushed to apply the remedies that Herbert needed for his condition.
The boy lay in a complete stupor, caused either by the hemorrhage or by concussion of the brain. He was very pale, and his pulse beat only at long intervals, as if every moment about to stop. This, taken in conjunction with his utter loss of consciousness, was a grave symptom. They stripped his chest, and, staunching the blood by means of handkerchiefs, kept bathing the wounds in cold water.
The boy lay in a total daze, either from blood loss or a concussion. He was very pale, and his pulse barely beat, as if it might stop at any moment. This, along with his complete lack of consciousness, was a serious sign. They took off his shirt, and while stopping the bleeding with handkerchiefs, kept rinsing the wounds with cold water.
The ball had entered between the third and fourth rib, and there they found the wound. Smith and Spilett turned the poor boy over. At this he uttered a moan so faint that they feared it was his last breath. There was another wound on his back, for the bullet had gone clean through.
The bullet had gone in between the third and fourth ribs, and that’s where they found the injury. Smith and Spilett flipped the poor boy over. He let out a moan so weak that they worried it was his last breath. There was another wound on his back since the bullet had passed right through.
“Thank Heaven!” said the reporter, “the ball is not in his body; we shall not have to extract it.”
“Thank goodness!” said the reporter, “the ball isn’t in his body; we won’t have to take it out.”
“But the heart?” asked Smith.
“But what about the heart?” asked Smith.
“The heart has not been touched, or he would be dead.”
“The heart hasn't been affected, or he would be dead.”
“Dead!” cried Pencroff, with a groan. He had only heard the reporter’s last word.
“Dead!” groaned Pencroff. He had only caught the last word from the reporter.
“No, Pencroff,” answered Smith. “No he is not dead; his pulse still beats; he has even uttered a groan. For his sake, now, you must be calm. We have need of all our self-possession; you must not be the means of our losing it, my friend.”
“No, Pencroff,” Smith replied. “He’s not dead; his pulse is still beating; he even groaned. For his sake, you need to stay calm. We need to keep our composure; you can’t be the reason we lose it, my friend.”
Pencroff was silent, but large tears rolled down his cheeks.
Pencroff stayed quiet, but big tears streamed down his cheeks.
Meanwhile, Spilett tried to recall to memory the proper treatment of the case before him. There seemed no doubt that the ball had entered in front and gone out by the back; but what injuries had it done by the way? Had it reached any vital spot? This was a question which even a professional surgeon could not have answered at once.
Meanwhile, Spilett tried to remember the correct way to handle the situation in front of him. There was no doubt that the ball had entered from the front and exited from the back; but what damage had it caused along the way? Had it hit any vital areas? This was a question that even a professional surgeon couldn't have answered immediately.
There was something, however, which Spilett knew must be done, and that was to keep down the inflammation, and to fight against the fever which ensues upon a wound. The wound must be dressed without delay. It was not necessary to bring on a fresh flow of blood by the use of tepid water and compresses, for Herbert was already too weak. The wounds, therefore, were bathed with cold water.
There was something that Spilett knew he had to do: keep the inflammation down and fight the fever that follows a wound. The wound needed to be treated right away. It wasn't necessary to cause more bleeding by using warm water and compresses, since Herbert was already too weak. So, the wounds were rinsed with cold water.
Herbert was placed upon his left side and held in that position.
Herbert was positioned on his left side and kept in that stance.
“He must not be moved,” said Spilett; “he is in the position most favorable to an easy suppuration, and absolute repose is necessary.”
“Don’t move him,” Spilett said; “he’s in the best position for easy drainage, and he needs complete rest.”
“Cannot we take him to Granite House?” asked Pencroff.
“Can’t we take him to Granite House?” asked Pencroff.
“No, Pencroff,” said the reporter.
“No, Pencroff,” said the reporter.
Spilett was examining the boy’s wounds again with close attention. Herbert was so frightfully pale that he became alarmed.
Spilett was closely examining the boy’s wounds again. Herbert was so incredibly pale that it made him worry.
“Cyrus,” said he, “I am no doctor. I am in a terrible strait; you must help me with your advice and assistance.”
“Cyrus,” he said, “I’m not a doctor. I’m in a really tough spot; you need to help me with your advice and support.”
“Calm yourself, my friend,” answered the engineer, pressing his hand. “Try to judge coolly. Think only of saving Herbert.”
“Calm down, my friend,” the engineer replied, squeezing his hand. “Try to think clearly. Focus only on saving Herbert.”
Spilett’s self-possession, which in a moment of discouragement his keen sense of responsibility had caused him to lose, returned again at these words. He seated himself upon the bed; Smith remained standing, Pencroff had torn up his shirt and began mechanically to make lint.
Spilett's composure, which he had briefly lost due to his strong sense of responsibility in a moment of discouragement, returned when he heard those words. He sat down on the bed; Smith stayed standing, and Pencroff had torn up his shirt and was automatically making lint.
Spilett explained that the first thing to do was to check the hemorrhage, but not to close the wounds or bring on immediate cicatrization—for there had been internal perforation, and they must not let the suppurated matter collect within. It was decided therefore to dress the two wounds, but not to press them together. The colonists possessed a most powerful agent for quelling inflamation, and one which nature supplies in the greatest abundance; to-wit, cold water, which is now used by all doctors. It has, moreover, the advantage of allowing the wound perfect rest, and dispensing with the frequent dressing, which by exposing the wound to the air in the early stages, is so often attended with lamentable results.
Spilett explained that the first thing to do was to stop the bleeding, but not to close the wounds or rush the healing process—since there had been internal damage, they needed to prevent any infected fluid from building up inside. So, they decided to dress the two wounds but not to push them together. The colonists had a very effective remedy for reducing inflammation, which nature provides in abundance: cold water, which is now used by all doctors. Additionally, it has the benefit of allowing the wound to rest completely and eliminates the need for frequent dressing changes, which can expose the wound to air in the early stages and often leads to unfortunate outcomes.
Thus did Smith and Spilett reason, with clear, native good sense, and acted as the best surgeon would have done. The wounds were bandaged with linen and constantly soaked with fresh water. The sailor had lighted a fire in the chimney, and the house fortunately contained all the necessaries of life. They had maple-sugar and the medicinal plants which the boy had gathered on the shores of Lake Grant. From these they made a refreshing drink for the sick boy. His fever was very high, and he lay all that day and night without a sign of consciousness. His life was hanging on a thread.
So Smith and Spilett thought with clear, common sense and acted as the best surgeon would. They bandaged the wounds with linen and kept them soaked in fresh water. The sailor had lit a fire in the chimney, and luckily, the house had all the essentials for life. They had maple sugar and the medicinal plants the boy had collected on the shores of Lake Grant. From these, they made a refreshing drink for the sick boy. His fever was very high, and he lay all day and night with no sign of awareness. His life was hanging by a thread.
On the next day, November 12, they began to have some hopes of his recovery. His consciousness returned, he opened his eyes and recognized them all. He even said two or three words, and wanted to know what had happened. Spilett told him, and begged him to keep perfectly quiet; that his life was not in danger, and his wounds would heal in a few days. Herbert suffered very little, for the inflammation was successfully kept down by the plentiful use of cold water. A regular suppuration had set in, the fever did not increase, and they began to hope that this terrible accident would not end in a worse catastrophe.
On the next day, November 12, they started to feel hopeful about his recovery. He regained consciousness, opened his eyes, and recognized everyone. He even managed to say a few words and wanted to know what had happened. Spilett explained it to him and urged him to stay completely still, assuring him that his life wasn't in danger and that his wounds would heal in a few days. Herbert felt very little pain, as the inflammation was effectively controlled by the frequent application of cold water. A steady healing process had begun, the fever didn’t worsen, and they started to believe that this awful accident wouldn’t lead to a more serious disaster.
Pencroff took heart again; he was the best of nurses, like a Sister of Charity, or a tender mother watching over her child. Herbert had fallen into another stupor, but this time the sleep appeared more natural.
Pencroff felt encouraged again; he was the best caregiver, like a charity worker or a loving mother watching over her child. Herbert had slipped into another stupor, but this time the sleep seemed more natural.
“Tell me again that you have hope, Mr. Spilett,” said Pencroff; “tell me again that you will save my boy!”
“Tell me again that you have hope, Mr. Spilett,” Pencroff said; “tell me again that you’ll save my boy!”
“We shall save him,” said the reporter. “The wound is a serious one, and perhaps the ball has touched the lung; but a wound in that organ is not mortal.”
“We'll save him,” said the reporter. “The wound is serious, and maybe the bullet has grazed the lung; but a wound in that area isn’t necessarily fatal.”
“May God grant it!” answered the sailor.
“Hopefully, God will grant that!” replied the sailor.
As may be imagined, the care of Herbert had occupied all their time and thoughts for the first twenty-four hours at the corral. They had not considered the urgent danger of a return of the convicts, nor taken any precautions for the future. But on this day while Pencroff was watching over the invalid, Smith and the reporter took counsel together as to their plans.
As you can imagine, taking care of Herbert occupied all their time and thoughts for the first twenty-four hours at the corral. They hadn’t thought about the real danger of the convicts coming back or made any plans for the future. But on this day, while Pencroff was looking after the injured man, Smith and the reporter discussed their plans.
They first searched the corral. There was no trace of Ayrton, and it seemed probable that he had resisted his former companions, and fallen by their hands. The corral had not been pillaged, and as its gates had remained shut, the domestic animals had not been able to wander away into the woods. They could see no traces of the pirates either in the dwelling or the palisade. The only thing gone was the stock of ammunition.
They first checked the corral. There was no sign of Ayrton, and it seemed likely that he had fought back against his former friends and was killed by them. The corral had not been raided, and since its gates had stayed shut, the livestock had not been able to escape into the woods. They didn't see any signs of the pirates in the house or the fence. The only thing missing was the ammo supply.
“The poor fellow was taken by surprise,” said Smith, “and as he was a man to show fight, no doubt they made an end of him.”
“The poor guy was caught off guard,” said Smith, “and since he was someone who would stand his ground, they probably took him out.”
“Yes,” replied the reporter, “and then, no doubt, they took possession here, where they found everything in great plenty, and took to flight only when they saw us coming.”
“Yeah,” replied the reporter, “and then, I’m sure, they took control here, where they found everything in abundance, and only ran away when they saw us approaching.”
“We must beat the woods,” said the engineer, and rid the island of these wretches. But we will have to wait some time in the corral, till the day comes when we can safely carry Herbert to Granite House.”
“We need to clear the woods,” said the engineer, and get rid of these wretches on the island. But we’ll have to wait a while in the corral until the day comes when we can safely take Herbert to Granite House.”
“But Neb?” asked the reporter.
“But Neb?” asked the journalist.
“Neb’s safe enough.”
"Neb's good enough."
“Suppose he becomes anxious and risks coming here?”
“What if he gets anxious and decides to come here?”
“He must not come,” said Smith sharply. “He would be murdered on the way!”
“He can't come,” Smith said sharply. “He'd be killed on the way!”
“It’s very likely he will try.”
“It’s very likely that he will try.”
“Ah! if the telegraph was only in working order, we could warn him! But now it’s impossible. We can’t leave Pencroff and Herbert here alone. Well, I’ll go by myself to Granite House!”
“Ah! if the telegraph were working, we could warn him! But now it’s impossible. We can’t leave Pencroff and Herbert here alone. Well, I’ll go to Granite House by myself!”
“No, no, Cyrus,” said the reporter, “you must not expose yourself. These wretches are watching the corral from their ambush, and there would be two mishaps instead of one!”
“No, no, Cyrus,” said the reporter, “you can’t put yourself in danger. Those scoundrels are watching the corral from their hiding spot, and that would mean two disasters instead of just one!”
“But Neb has been without news of us for twenty-four hours,” repeated the engineer. “He will want to come.”
“But Neb hasn’t heard from us for twenty-four hours,” the engineer repeated. “He'll want to come.”
While he reflected, his gaze fell upon Top, who, by running to and fro, seemed to say, “Have you forgotten me?”
While he thought about it, he looked at Top, who, by running back and forth, seemed to say, “Have you forgotten me?”
“Top!” cried Smith.
“Awesome!” cried Smith.
The dog sprang up at this master’s call.
The dog jumped up at its owner's call.
“Yes, Top shall go!” cried the reporter, who understood in a flash. Top will make his way where we could not pass, will take our message and bring us back an answer.”
“Yes, Top is going!” shouted the reporter, who got it instantly. Top will go where we can’t follow, deliver our message, and bring us back a response.”
“Quick!” said Smith, “quick!”
"Quick!" said Smith, "hurry up!"
Spilett tore out a page of his note-book and wrote these lines:—
Spilett ripped a page out of his notebook and wrote these lines:—
“Herbert wounded. We are at the corral. Be on your guard. Do not leave Granite House. Have the convicts shown themselves near you? Answer by Top!”
“Herbert is hurt. We're at the corral. Stay alert. Don't leave Granite House. Have the convicts been seen near you? Respond by Top!”
This laconic note was folded and tied in a conspicuous way to Top’s collar.
This short note was folded and tied in a noticeable way to Top’s collar.
“Top, my dog,” said the engineer, caressing the animal, “Neb, Top, Neb! Away! away!”
“Top, my dog,” said the engineer, petting the animal, “Neb, Top, Neb! Go on! Get out of here!”
Top sprang high at the words. He understood what was wanted, and the road was familiar to him. The engineer went to the door of the corral and opened one of the leaves.
Top jumped up at the words. He knew what was needed, and the path was familiar to him. The engineer walked to the corral door and opened one of the gates.
“Neb, Top, Neb!” he cried again, pointing towards Granite House.
“Neb, Top, Neb!” he shouted again, pointing toward Granite House.
Top rushed out and disappeared almost instantly.
Top rushed out and vanished almost immediately.
“He’ll get there!” said the reporter.
“He'll get there!” said the reporter.
“Yes, and come back, the faithful brute!”
“Yes, and come back, you loyal beast!”
“What time is it?” asked Spilett.
“What time is it?” Spilett asked.
“Ten o’clock.”
"10 o'clock."
“In an hour he may be here. We will watch for him.
“In an hour he might arrive. We’ll keep an eye out for him.”
The door of the corral was closed again. The engineer and the reporter re-entered the house. Herbert lay in a profound sleep. Pencroff kept his compresses constantly wet with cold water. Spilett, seeing that just then there was nothing else to do, set to work to prepare some food, all the time keeping his eye on that part of the inclosure which backed up against the spur, from which an attack might be made.
The corral door was closed again. The engineer and the reporter went back into the house. Herbert was deep asleep. Pencroff kept his compresses soaked in cold water. Spilett, noticing there wasn't much else to do at the moment, started preparing some food while keeping an eye on that part of the enclosure that backed up against the spur, where an attack could come from.
The colonists awaited Top’s return with much anxiety. A little before 11 o’clock Smith andSpilett stood with their carbines behind the door, ready to open it at the dog’s first bark. They knew that if Top got safely to Granite House, Neb would send him back at once.
The colonists anxiously waited for Top to come back. Just before 11 o'clock, Smith and Spilett stood by the door with their rifles, ready to open it at the dog's first bark. They knew that if Top made it back to Granite House safely, Neb would send him back right away.
They had waited about ten minutes, when they heard a loud report, followed instantly by continuous barking. The engineer opened the door, and, seeing smoke still curling up among the trees a hundred paces off, he fired in that direction. Just then Top bounded into the corral, whose door was quickly shut.
They had waited for about ten minutes when they heard a loud bang, followed immediately by nonstop barking. The engineer opened the door and, seeing smoke still rising among the trees a hundred yards away, he shot in that direction. Just then, Top jumped into the corral, and the door was quickly shut.
“Top, Top!” cried the engineer, caressing the dog’s large, noble head. A note was fastened to his collar, containing these words in Neb’s sprawling handwriting:——
“Top, Top!” shouted the engineer, petting the dog’s big, noble head. A note was attached to his collar, with these words in Neb’s messy handwriting:——
“No pirates near Granite House. I will not stir. Poor Mr. Herbert!”
“No pirates near Granite House. I won't move. Poor Mr. Herbert!”
CHAPTER L.
THE CONVICTS IN THE NEIGHBORHOOD OF THE CORRAL—PROVISIONAL OCCUPATION—CONTINUATION OF HERBERT’S TREATMENT—PENCROFF’S JUBILATION—REVIEW OF THE PAST—FUTURE PROSPECTS—SMITH’S IDEAS.
THE CONVICTS NEAR THE CORRAL—TEMPORARY OCCUPATION—CONTINUATION OF HERBERT’S TREATMENT—PENCROFF’S CELEBRATION—LOOKING BACK AT THE PAST—FUTURE OPPORTUNITIES—SMITH’S THOUGHTS.
So, then, the convicts were close by, watching the corral, and waiting to kill the colonists one after another. They must be attacked like wild beasts, but with the greatest precaution, for the wretches had the advantage of position, seeing and not being seen, able to make a sudden attack, yet not themselves to be surprised.
So, the inmates were nearby, watching the corral and waiting to take down the colonists one by one. They had to be approached like wild animals, but very carefully, since the desperate ones had the upper hand. They could see everything without being seen, ready to strike suddenly but not caught off guard themselves.
So Smith made his arrangements to live at the corral, which was fully provisioned. Ayrton’s house was furnished with all the necessaries of life, and the convicts, frightened away by the colonists’ arrival, had not had time to pillage. It was most likely, as Spilett suggested, that the course of events had been this:—The convicts had followed the southern coast, and after getting over into Serpentine Peninsula, and being in no humor to risk themselves in the woods of the Far West, they had reached the month of Fall River. Then, walking up the right bank of the stream, they had come to the spur of Mount Franklin; here was their most natural place of refuge. And they had soon discovered the corral. They had probably installed themselves there, had been surprised by Ayrton, had overcome the unfortunate man, and—the rest was easily divined!
So, Smith made plans to stay at the corral, which was fully stocked. Ayrton’s house had all the essentials for living, and the convicts, scared off by the arrival of the colonists, hadn't had time to loot it. It was most likely, as Spilett suggested, that the series of events went like this: The convicts had traveled along the southern coast, and after crossing into Serpentine Peninsula, and not wanting to take risks in the Far West woods, they reached the mouth of Fall River. Then, walking up the right bank of the stream, they arrived at the base of Mount Franklin; this was their most logical place to hide. They must have quickly found the corral, set themselves up there, caught Ayrton by surprise, overpowered him, and—the rest was easy to guess!
Meanwhile the convicts, reduced to five, but well armed, were prowling in the woods, and to pursue them was to be exposed to their fire without the power either of avoiding or of anticipating them.
Meanwhile, the convicts, now down to five but well-armed, were lurking in the woods, and trying to chase them meant exposing oneself to their gunfire without the ability to dodge or predict their moves.
“There is nothing else to do but wait,” repeated Smith. “When Herbert is well again, we will beat the island, and have a shot at these rascals; while at the same time——”
“There’s nothing else to do but wait,” Smith said again. “When Herbert is better, we’ll deal with the island and take a shot at these scoundrels; while at the same time——”
“We search for our mysterious protector,” added Spilett, finishing the sentence. “Ah! we must confess, dear Cyrus, that, for once, his protection has failed us.”
“We're looking for our mysterious protector,” Spilett added, completing the sentence. “Ah! We have to admit, dear Cyrus, that this time, his protection has let us down.”
“We don’t know about that,” answered the engineer.
“We're not sure about that,” replied the engineer.
“What do you mean?” asked the reporter.
“What do you mean?” the reporter asked.
“We are not at the end of our troubles, my dear Spilett, and his powerful interference may still be exercised. But now we must think of Herbert.”
“We're not done with our troubles, my dear Spilett, and his strong influence could still come into play. But now we need to focus on Herbert.”
Several days passed, and the poor boy’s condition was happily no worse; and to gain time was a great thing. The cold water, always kept at the proper temperature, had absolutely prevented the inflammation of the wounds. Nay, it seemed to the reporter that this water, which contained a little sulphur, due to the neighborhood of the volcano, had a direct tendency towards cicatrization. The suppuration was much less copious, and, thanks to excellent nursing, Herbert had returned to consciousness, and his fever had abated. He was, moreover, strictly dieted, and, of course, was very weak; but he had plenty of broths and gruels, and absolute rest was doing him great good.
Several days went by, and thankfully, the poor boy’s condition didn’t worsen; buying time was a big plus. The cold water, kept at the right temperature, completely stopped the wounds from getting infected. In fact, the reporter thought that this water, which had a bit of sulfur from the nearby volcano, actually helped with healing. The discharge was much less, and thanks to excellent care, Herbert had regained consciousness, and his fever had gone down. He was also on a strict diet and felt very weak, but he was getting plenty of broths and gruels, and all the rest was really benefiting him.
Smith, Spilett, and Pencroff had become very skilful in tending him. All the linen in the house had been sacrificed. The wounded parts, covered with lint and compresses, were subjected to just enough pressure to cicatrize them without bringing on a reaction of inflammation. The reporter dressed the wounds with the greatest care, repeating to his companions the medical axiom that good dressing is as rare as a good operation.
Smith, Spilett, and Pencroff had become very skilled at taking care of him. All the linen in the house had been used up. The injured areas, covered with gauze and bandages, were under just the right amount of pressure to heal without causing inflammation. The reporter dressed the wounds with great care, reminding his companions of the medical saying that good dressing is as rare as a good operation.
At the end of ten days, by the 22d of November, Herbert was decidedly better. He had begun to take some nourishment. The color came back to his cheeks, and he smiled at his nurse. He talked a little, in spite of Pencroff, who chattered away all the time to keep the boy from saying a word, and told the most remarkable stories. Herbert inquired about Ayrton, and was surprised not to see him at the bedside; but the sailor, who would not distress his patient, answered merely that Ayrton had gone to be with Neb at Granite House in case the convicts attacked it. “Nice fellows they are,” said he. “To think that Mr. Smith wanted to appeal to their feelings! I’ll send them my compliments in a good heavy bullet!”
At the end of ten days, on November 22nd, Herbert was definitely feeling better. He had started eating again. The color returned to his cheeks, and he smiled at his nurse. He managed to chat a bit, despite Pencroff, who just kept talking to prevent the boy from saying much and shared the most incredible stories. Herbert asked about Ayrton and was surprised not to see him at the bedside; but the sailor, not wanting to upset his patient, simply said that Ayrton had gone to be with Neb at Granite House in case the convicts attacked. “What nice guys they are,” he said. “To think that Mr. Smith wanted to appeal to their feelings! I’ll send them my best wishes with a nice heavy bullet!”
“And nobody has seen them?” asked Herbert.
“And nobody has seen them?” Herbert asked.
“No, my boy,” answered the sailor, “but we will find them, and when you are well we shall see whether these cowards, who strike from behind, will dare to meet us face to face.”
“No, my boy,” the sailor replied, “but we’ll find them, and when you’re better, we’ll see if these cowards, who attack from behind, will actually have the guts to confront us face to face.”
“I am still very weak, dear Pencroff.”
“I’m still feeling really weak, dear Pencroff.”
“Oh! your strength will come back little by little. What’s a ball through the chest? Nothing to speak of. I have seen several of them, and feel no worse for it.”
“Oh! Your strength will return gradually. What’s a ball through the chest? It’s nothing to worry about. I’ve seen quite a few of them, and I’m no worse for wear.”
In fine, things were growing better, and it no unlucky complication occurred, Herbert’s cure might be regarded as certain. But what would have been the colonists’ situation if the ball had remained in his body, if his arm or leg had had to be amputated? They could not think of it without a shudder.
In short, things were improving, and barring any unfortunate complications, Herbert’s recovery was looking promising. But what would have happened to the colonists if the bullet had stayed in his body, if they had to amputate his arm or leg? They couldn't think about it without shivering.
It seemed to Smith that he and his companions, until now so fortunate, had entered upon an ill-omened time. For the two and a half years which had elapsed since their escape from Richmond they had succeeded in everything. But now luck seemed to be turning against them. Ayrton, doubtless, was dead, and Herbert severely wounded; and that strange but powerful intervention, which had done them such mighty services, seemed now to be withdrawn. Had the mysterious being abandoned the island, or himself been overcome?
It seemed to Smith that he and his friends, who had been so lucky until now, had entered a bad time. In the two and a half years since they escaped from Richmond, they had succeeded in everything. But now, it felt like luck was turning against them. Ayrton was probably dead, and Herbert was seriously injured; that strange but powerful help they had relied on seemed to be gone. Had the mysterious being left the island, or had it been defeated itself?
They could give no answer to these questions; but though they talked together about them, they were not men to despair. They looked the situation in the face; they analyzed the chances; they prepared themselves for every contingency; they stood firm and undaunted before the future; and if adversity should continue to oppress them, she would find them men prepared to do their utmost.
They couldn't answer these questions; but even though they discussed them, they weren't the type to give up hope. They faced the situation head-on; they assessed the possibilities; they got ready for any outcome; they remained strong and fearless in the face of the future; and if challenges continued to weigh on them, they'd be ready to do their best.
CHAPTER LI.
NO NEWS OF NEB—A PROPOSAL FROM PENCROFF AND SPILETT—THE REPORTER’S SORTIES—A FRAGMENT OF CLOTH—A MESSAGE—HURRIED DEPARTURE—ARRIVAL AT PROSPECT PLATEAU.
NO NEWS OF NEB—A PROPOSAL FROM PENCROFF AND SPILETT—THE REPORTER’S EXCURSIONS—A PIECE OF CLOTH—A MESSAGE—RUSHED DEPARTURE—ARRIVAL AT PROSPECT PLATEAU.
Herbert’s convalescence progressed steadily. Only one thing was left to wish for, to wit, that he would get well enough to be taken to Granite House. However well arranged and provisioned might be the dwelling in the corral, there was nothing like the solid comfort of their abode in the rock. Besides, they were not safe here, and, in spite of their watchfulness, they were always in dread of a shot from the woods. Whereas there in the midst of that unassailable and inaccessible mass of rock there would be nothing to fear. They waited, therefore, with impatience for the moment when Herbert could be carried, without danger to his wound, across the difficult route through Jacamar Woods.
Herbert’s recovery was going well. The only thing left to hope for was that he would get well enough to be taken to Granite House. No matter how well set up and stocked the shelter in the corral was, nothing could compare to the solid comfort of their home in the rock. Plus, they weren't safe here, and despite their vigilance, they always feared a shot from the woods. But there, in the middle of that impenetrable and inaccessible mass of rock, there would be nothing to worry about. So they waited impatiently for the moment when Herbert could be safely carried across the difficult path through Jacamar Woods without risking his wound.
Though without news of Neb, they had no fear for him. The brave negro, occupying a position of such strength, would not let himself be surprised. Top had not been sent back to him, for it seemed useless to expose the faithful dog to some shot which might deprive the colonists of their most useful helper. The engineer regretted to see his forces divided, and thus to play into the hands of the pirates. Since Ayrton’s disappearance, they were only four against five, for Herbert could not be counted. The poor boy knew and lamented the danger of which he was the cause.
Though they hadn't heard from Neb, they weren't worried about him. The brave man, in such a strong position, wouldn’t let himself be caught off guard. Top hadn't been sent back to him because it seemed pointless to put the loyal dog at risk of being shot, which could leave the colonists without their most valuable helper. The engineer regretted having his forces split up and thus playing into the pirates' hands. Since Ayrton's disappearance, there were only four of them against five, as Herbert couldn't be counted. The poor boy understood and felt sorrowful about the danger he had caused.
One day, November 29, when he was asleep, they discussed their plans of action against the convicts.
One day, November 29, while he was sleeping, they talked about their plans to take action against the convicts.
“My friends,” said the reporter, after they had talked over the impossibility of communicating with Neb, “I agree with you that to risk ourselves on the path leading from the corral would be a useless exposure. But why should we not beat the woods for these wretches?”
“My friends,” said the reporter, after they had discussed the impossibility of communicating with Neb, “I agree that it would be a pointless risk to head down the path from the corral. But why shouldn’t we search the woods for these poor souls?”
“That’s what I was thinking,” replied Pencroff. “We’re not afraid of a bullet, and for my part, if Mr. Smith approves, I am ready to take to the woods. Surely one man is as good as another!”
“That’s what I was thinking,” replied Pencroff. “We’re not scared of a bullet, and as for me, if Mr. Smith is on board, I’m ready to head into the woods. Surely one person is just as good as another!”
“But is he as good as five?” asked the engineer.
“But is he as good as five?” the engineer asked.
“I will go with Pencroff,’ answered the reporter, “and the two of us, well armed, and Top with us—”
“I'll go with Pencroff,” replied the reporter, “and the two of us, well armed, with Top along—”
“My dear Spilett, and you, Pencroff, let us discuss the matter coolly. If the convicts were in hiding in some place known to us, from which we could drive them by an attack, it would be a different affair. But have we not every reason to fear that they will get the first shot?”
“My dear Spilett, and you, Pencroff, let’s talk about this calmly. If the convicts were hiding in a place we knew, where we could force them out with an attack, it would be a different story. But don’t we have every reason to worry that they will take the first shot?”
“Well, sir,” cried Pencroff, “a bullet doesn’t always hit its mark!”
“Well, sir,” exclaimed Pencroff, “a bullet doesn’t always hit its target!”
“That which pierced Herbert did not go astray,” answered the engineer. “Besides, remember that if you both leave the corral, I shall be left alone to defend it. Can you answer that the convicts will not see you go off, that they will not wait till you are deep in the woods, and then make their attack in your absence upon a man and a sick boy?”
“That which struck Herbert didn’t miss,” replied the engineer. “Besides, keep in mind that if you both leave the corral, I’ll be left here alone to protect it. Can you guarantee that the convicts won’t see you leave, that they won’t wait until you’re deep in the woods, and then attack a man and a sick boy while you’re gone?”
There was nothing to say in answer to this reasoning, which went home to the minds of all.
There was nothing to say in response to this reasoning, which resonated with everyone.
“If only Ayrton was yet one of the party!” said Spilett. “Poor fellow! his return to a life with his kind was not for long!”
“If only Ayrton were still part of the group!” said Spilett. “Poor guy! His return to life with his people didn’t last long!”
“If he is dead!” added Pencroff, in a peculiar tone.
“If he’s dead!” added Pencroff, in a strange tone.
“Have you any hope that those rascals have spared him, Pencroff?” asked Spilett.
“Do you think those troublemakers let him go, Pencroff?” asked Spilett.
“Yes, if their interest led them to do so.”
“Yes, if that’s what they were interested in.”
“What! do you suppose that Ayrton, among his former companions in guilt, would forget all he owed to us—”
“What! do you think Ayrton would forget everything he owes us from his past associations in crime—”
“Nobody can tell,” answered the sailor, with some hesitation.
“Nobody can say,” replied the sailor, a bit uncertain.
“Pencroff,” said Smith, laying his hand on the sailor’s arm, “that was an unworthy thought. I will guarantee Ayrton’s fidelity!”
“Pencroff,” Smith said, placing his hand on the sailor’s arm, “that was an unworthy thought. I’ll vouch for Ayrton’s loyalty!”
“And I too,” added the reporter, decidedly.
“And I also,” added the reporter firmly.
“Yes, yes, Mr. Smith, I am wrong,” answered Pencroff. “But really I am a little out of my mind. This imprisonment in the corral is driving me to distraction.”
“Yes, yes, Mr. Smith, I’m wrong,” replied Pencroff. “But honestly, I’m a bit out of my mind. This confinement in the corral is driving me crazy.”
“Be patient, Pencroff,” answered the engineer. “How soon, my dear Spilett, do you suppose Herbert can be carried to Granite House?”
“Just be patient, Pencroff,” replied the engineer. “How soon, my dear Spilett, do you think Herbert can be taken to Granite House?”
“That is hard to say, Cyrus,” answered the reporter, “for a little imprudence might be fatal. But if he goes on as well as he is doing now for another week, why then we will see.”
“That’s hard to say, Cyrus,” the reporter replied, “because a little recklessness could be disastrous. But if things continue this way for another week, then we’ll see.”
At that season the spring was two months advanced. The weather was good, and the heat began to be oppressive. The woods were in fall leaf, and it was almost time to reap the accustomed harvest. It can easily be understood how this siege in the corral upset the plans of the colonists.
At that time, spring was already two months in. The weather was pleasant, but the heat was starting to become unbearable. The trees were shedding their leaves, and it was nearly time to gather the usual harvest. It’s easy to see how this situation in the corral threw off the colonists' plans.
Once or twice the reporter risked himself outside, and walked around the palisade. Top was with him, and his carbine was loaded.
Once or twice, the reporter stepped outside and walked around the fence. Top was with him, and his carbine was loaded.
He met no one and saw nothing suspicious. Top would have warned him of any danger, and so long as the dog did not bark, there was nothing to fear.
He didn’t meet anyone and didn’t see anything out of the ordinary. Top would have alerted him to any danger, and as long as the dog didn’t bark, there was nothing to worry about.
But on his second sortie, on the 27th of November, Spilett, who had ventured into the woods for a quarter of a mile to the south of the mountain, noticed that Top smelt something. The dog’s motions were no longer careless; he ran to and fro, ferreting about in the grass and thistles, as if his keen nose had put him on the track of an enemy.
But on his second outing, on November 27th, Spilett, who had ventured into the woods for a quarter of a mile south of the mountain, noticed that Top was sniffing something. The dog's movements were no longer careless; he darted back and forth, searching through the grass and thistles, as if his sharp nose had picked up the scent of an intruder.
Spilett followed the dog, encouraging and exciting him by his voice; his eye on the alert, his carbine on his shoulder, and availing himself of the shelter of the trees. It was not likely that Top had recognized the presence of a man, for in that case he would have announced it by a half-stifled but angry bark. Since not even a growl was to be heard, the danger was evidently neither near nor approaching.
Spilett followed the dog, encouraging him with his voice; he was alert, his carbine slung over his shoulder, taking advantage of the cover provided by the trees. It was unlikely that Top had sensed a man's presence because otherwise, he would have let out a muffled but angry bark. Since there wasn't even a growl, it was clear that the danger was neither close nor approaching.
About five minutes had passed in this way, Top ferreting about and the reporter cautiously following him, when the dog suddenly rushed towards a thicket and tore from it a strip of cloth. It was a piece from a garment, dirty and torn. Spilett went back with it to the corral. There the colonists examined it and recognized it as a piece of Ayrton’s waistcoat, which was made of the felt prepared only in the workshop at Granite House.
About five minutes had gone by like this, with Top sniffing around and the reporter carefully following him, when the dog suddenly dashed toward some bushes and pulled out a piece of cloth. It was a fragment of clothing, dirty and ripped. Spilett took it back to the corral. There, the colonists examined it and identified it as a piece of Ayrton's waistcoat, which was made from the felt that was only processed in the workshop at Granite House.
“You see, Pencroff,” observed Smith, “Ayrton resisted manfully, and the convicts dragged him off in spite of his efforts. Do you still doubt his good faith?”
“You see, Pencroff,” Smith pointed out, “Ayrton fought hard, but the convicts pulled him away despite his struggles. Do you still question his loyalty?”
“No, Mr. Smith,” replied the sailor; “I have long ago given up that momentary suspicion. But I think we may draw one conclusion from this fact.”
“No, Mr. Smith,” replied the sailor; “I gave up that fleeting suspicion a long time ago. But I think we can draw one conclusion from this fact.”
“What is that?”
"What's that?"
“That Ayrton was not killed at the corral. They must have dragged him out alive, and perhaps he is still alive.”
"That Ayrton wasn’t killed at the corral. They must have pulled him out alive, and maybe he’s still alive."
“It may be so,” said the engineer, thoughtfully.
“It could be,” said the engineer, pensively.
The most impatient of them all to get back to Granite House was Herbert. He knew how necessary it was for them all to be there, and felt that it was he who was keeping them at the corral. The one thought which had taken possession of his mind was to leave the corral, and to leave it as soon as possible. He believed that he could bear the journey to Granite House. He was sure that his strength would come back to him sooner in his own room, with the sight and the smell of the sea.
The one who couldn't wait to get back to Granite House was Herbert. He realized how important it was for all of them to be there and felt that he was the one holding them up at the corral. The only thing on his mind was to leave the corral and do it as quickly as possible. He believed he could handle the trip to Granite House. He was confident that his strength would return faster in his own room, surrounded by the sight and smell of the sea.
It was now November 29. The colonists were talking together in Herbert’s room, about 7 o’clock in the morning, when they heard Top barking loudly. They seized their guns, always loaded and cocked, and went out of the house.
It was now November 29. The colonists were chatting in Herbert’s room at around 7 o'clock in the morning when they heard Top barking loudly. They grabbed their guns, which were always loaded and ready, and went outside.
Top ran to the bottom of the palisade, jumping and barking with joy.
Top ran to the base of the fence, jumping and barking happily.
“Some one is coming!”
"Someone is coming!"
“Yes.”
"Yep."
“And not an enemy.”
“And not a foe.”
“Neb, perhaps?”
"Neb, maybe?"
“Or Ayrton?”
"Or Ayrton?"
These words had scarcely been exchanged between the engineer and his comrade, when something leaped the palisade and fell on the ground inside. It was Jup. Master Jup himself, who was frantically welcomed by Top.
These words had barely been exchanged between the engineer and his friend when something jumped over the fence and landed inside. It was Jup. Master Jup himself, who was excitedly greeted by Top.
“Neb has sent him!” said the reporter.
“Neb sent him!” said the reporter.
“Then he must have some note on him,” said the engineer.
“Then he must have a note on him,” said the engineer.
Pencroff rushed to the orang. Neb could not have chosen a better messenger, who could get through obstacles which none of the others could have surmounted. Smith was right. Around Jup’s neck was hung a little bag, and in it was a note in Neb’s handwriting. The dismay of the colonists may be imagined when they read these words:—
Pencroff hurried to the orang. Neb couldn't have picked a better messenger, one who could navigate obstacles that none of the others could have managed. Smith was correct. Around Jup's neck was a small bag, and inside it was a note in Neb's handwriting. The colonists' shock can only be imagined when they read these words:—
“FRIDAY, 6 A. M.”—The convicts are on the plateau. NEB.”
“FRIDAY, 6 A.M.”—The prisoners are on the plateau. NEB.
They looked at each other without saying a word, then walked back to the house. What was there to do? The convicts on Prospect Plateau meant disaster, devastation and ruin! Herbert knew at once from their faces that the situation had become grave, and when he saw Jup, he had no more doubt that misfortune was threatening Granite House.
They stared at each other in silence, then headed back to the house. What was there to do? The prisoners on Prospect Plateau brought disaster, destruction, and ruin! Herbert instantly understood from their expressions that things had gotten serious, and when he saw Jup, he had no doubt that trouble was looming over Granite House.
“Mr. Smith,” said he, “I want to go. I can bear the journey. I want to start.”
“Mr. Smith,” he said, “I want to go. I can handle the journey. I want to start.”
Spilett came up to Herbert and looked at him intently.
Spilett walked up to Herbert and stared at him closely.
“Let us start then,” said he.
“Let’s get started then,” he said.
The question of Herbert’s transportation was quickly decided. A litter would be the most comfortable way of travelling, but it would necessitate two porters; that is, two guns would be subtracted from their means of defense. On the other hand, by placing the mattresses on which Herbert lay in the wagon, so as to deaden the motion, and by walking carefully they could escape jolting him, and would leave their arms free.
The question of Herbert’s transport was quickly settled. A litter would be the most comfortable way to travel, but it would require two porters, which meant two guns would be taken away from their defense. On the other hand, by putting the mattresses where Herbert lay in the wagon to cushion the bumps and walking carefully, they could avoid jolting him and keep their arms free.
The wagon was brought out and the onagga harnessed to it; Smith and the reporter lifted the mattresses with Herbert on them, and laid them in the bottom of the wagon between the rails. The weather was fine, and the sun shone brightly between the trees.
The wagon was brought out and the donkey was harnessed to it; Smith and the reporter lifted the mattresses with Herbert on them and laid them in the bottom of the wagon between the rails. The weather was nice, and the sun shone brightly through the trees.
“Are the arms ready?” asked Smith.
“Are the weapons ready?” asked Smith.
They were. The engineer and Pencroff, each armed with a double-barrelled gun, and Spilett with his carbine, stood ready to set out.
They were. The engineer and Pencroff, each armed with a double-barreled gun, and Spilett with his carbine, stood ready to head out.
“How do you feel, Herbert?” asked the engineer.
“How are you feeling, Herbert?” asked the engineer.
“Don’t be troubled, Mr. Smith,” answered the boy, “I shall not die on the way.”
“Don’t worry, Mr. Smith,” the boy replied, “I won’t die on the way.”
They could see that the poor fellow was making a tremendous effort. The engineer felt a grievous pang. He hesitated to give the signal for departure. But to stay would have thrown Herbert into despair.
They could see that the poor guy was putting in a huge effort. The engineer felt a deep ache in his heart. He hesitated to give the signal to leave. But staying would have pushed Herbert into despair.
“Let us start,” said Smith.
“Let’s start,” said Smith.
The corral door was opened. Jup and Top, who knew how to be quiet on emergency, rushed on ahead. The wagon went out, the gate was shut, and the onagga, under Pencroff’s guidance, walked on with a slow pace.
The corral door opened. Jup and Top, who knew how to stay quiet in an emergency, raced ahead. The wagon rolled out, the gate closed, and the onager, under Pencroff’s direction, moved forward slowly.
It was necessary, on account of the wagon, to keep to the direct road from the corral to Granite House, although it was known to the convicts. Smith and Spilett walked on either side of the chariot, ready to meet any attack. Still it was not likely that the convicts had yet abandoned Prospect Plateau. Neb’s note had evidently been sent as soon as they made their appearance. Now this note was dated at 6 o’clock in the morning, and the active orang, who was accustomed to the way, would have got over the five miles from Granite House in three-quarters of an hour. Probably they would have no danger to fear till they approached Granite House.
It was necessary, because of the wagon, to stick to the direct road from the corral to Granite House, even though the convicts were aware of it. Smith and Spilett walked on either side of the cart, ready to face any attack. Still, it was unlikely that the convicts had abandoned Prospect Plateau yet. Neb’s note had clearly been sent as soon as they appeared. Now, this note was dated at 6 o’clock in the morning, and the active orang, who was familiar with the route, would have covered the five miles from Granite House in about forty-five minutes. They probably wouldn’t face any danger until they got closer to Granite House.
But they kept on the alert. Top and Jup, the latter armed with his stick, sometimes in front, and sometimes beating the woods on either side, gave no signal of approaching danger. The wagon moved on slowly, and an hour after leaving the corral, they had passed over four of the five miles without any incident.
But they stayed vigilant. Top and Jup, the latter with his stick in hand, sometimes leading the way and sometimes checking the woods on either side, didn't signal any imminent danger. The wagon moved slowly, and an hour after leaving the corral, they had covered four out of the five miles without any incidents.
They drew near the plateau another mile, and they saw the causeway over Glycerine Creek. At last, through an opening in the wood, they saw the horizon of the sea. But the wagon went on slowly, and none of its defenders could leave it for a moment. Just then Pencroff stopped the wagon and cried, fiercely,
They approached the plateau another mile and spotted the bridge over Glycerine Creek. Finally, through a gap in the trees, they glimpsed the sea on the horizon. However, the wagon continued to move slowly, and none of its protectors could step away from it, even for a moment. At that moment, Pencroff halted the wagon and shouted fiercely,
“Ah, the wretches!”
“Ah, the unfortunate ones!”
And he pointed to a thick smoke which curled up from the mill, the stables, and the buildings of the poultry-yard. In the midst of this smoke a man was running about. It was Neb.
And he pointed to a thick smoke rising from the mill, the stables, and the poultry yard buildings. In the middle of this smoke, a man was running around. It was Neb.
His companions uttered a cry. He heard them and rushed to meet them.
His friends shouted. He heard them and ran to join them.
The convicts had abandoned the plateau half an hour before, after having done all the mischief they could.
The prisoners had left the plateau half an hour earlier, after causing as much trouble as they could.
“And Mr. Herbert?” cried Neb.
“And Mr. Herbert?” shouted Neb.
Spilett went back to the wagon. Herbert had fainted.
Spilett returned to the wagon. Herbert had passed out.
CHAPTER LII.
HERBERT CARRIED TO GRANITE HOUSE—NEB RELATES WHAT HAD HAPPENED—VISIT OF SMITH TO THE PLATEAU—RUIN AND DEVASTATION—THE COLONISTS HELPLESS—WILLOW BARK—A MORTAL FEVER—TOP BARKS AGAIN.
HERBERT TAKEN TO GRANITE HOUSE—NEB TELLS WHAT HAPPENED—SMITH'S VISIT TO THE PLATEAU—DESTRUCTION AND DEVASTATION—THE COLONISTS ARE POWERLESS—WILLOW BARK—A DEADLY FEVER—TOP BARKS AGAIN.
The convicts, the dangers threatening Granite House, the ruin on the plateau, none of these were thought of, in the present condition of Herbert. It was impossible to say whether the transportation had occasioned some internal rupture, but his companions were almost hopeless.
The convicts, the dangers facing Granite House, the wreck on the plateau, none of these were on Herbert's mind in his current state. It was hard to tell if the transport had caused some internal injury, but his friends were nearly at a loss.
The wagon had been taken to the bend of the river, and there the mattress, on which lay the unconscious lad, was placed on a litter of branches, and within a few minutes Herbert was lying on his bed in Granite House. He smiled for a moment on finding himself again in his chamber, and a few words escaped feebly from his lips. Spilett looked at his wounds, fearing that they might have opened, but the cicatrices were unbroken. What, then, was the cause of this prostration, or why had his condition grown worse?
The wagon was brought to the bend of the river, where the mattress with the unconscious boy was laid on a bed of branches. Within minutes, Herbert was back in his room at Granite House. He smiled briefly upon realizing he was in his own space again, and a few weak words slipped from his lips. Spilett examined his wounds, worried they might have opened up, but the scars were intact. So, what was causing this weakness, or why had his condition deteriorated?
Soon the lad fell into a feverish sleep, and the reporter and Pencroff watched beside him.
Soon the boy fell into a feverish sleep, and the reporter and Pencroff watched over him.
Meantime, Smith told Neb of all that had happened at the corral, and Neb told his master of what had passed at the plateau.
Meantime, Smith told Neb everything that had happened at the corral, and Neb filled his master in on what had occurred at the plateau.
It was not until the previous night that the convicts had shown themselves beyond the edge of the forest, near Glycerine Creek. Neb, keeping watch near the poultry-yard, had not hesitated to fire at one of them who was crossing the bridge; but he could not say with what result. At least, it did not disperse the band, and Neb had but just time to climb up into Granite House, where he, at least, would be safe.
It wasn't until the night before that the convicts had revealed themselves beyond the edge of the forest, close to Glycerine Creek. Neb, who was on watch near the poultry yard, didn't hesitate to shoot at one of them crossing the bridge, but he couldn't tell if he hit his target. At the very least, it didn't scare the group away, and Neb barely had time to climb up into Granite House, where he would be safe.
But what was the next thing to do? How prevent the threatened devastation to the plateau? How could he inform his master? And, moreover, in what situation were the occupants of the corral?
But what was the next step? How could he stop the impending destruction of the plateau? How could he inform his master? And, on top of that, what was the situation of the people in the corral?
Smith and his companions had gone away on the 11th inst., and here it was the 29th. In that time all the information that Neb had received was the disastrous news brought by Top. Ayrton gone, Herbert badly wounded, the engineer, the reporter, and the sailor imprisoned in the corral.
Smith and his friends had left on the 11th, and now it was the 29th. During that time, all the news Neb had received was the terrible update from Top. Ayrton was gone, Herbert was seriously injured, and the engineer, the reporter, and the sailor were locked up in the corral.
The poor negro asked himself what was to be done. Personally, he had nothing to fear, as the convicts could not get into Granite House. But the works, the fields, all the improvements, were at the mercy of the pirates. Was it not best to let Smith know of the threatened danger?
The poor Black man wondered what he should do. He had nothing to fear personally, as the convicts couldn’t get into Granite House. But the repairs, the fields, and all the improvements were vulnerable to the pirates. Should he tell Smith about the potential danger?
Then Neb thought of employing Jup on this errand. He knew the intelligence of the orang. Jup knew the word “corral.” It was not yet daylight. The agile brute could slip through the woods unperceived. So the negro wrote a note, which he fastened round Jup’s neck, and taking the monkey to the door and unrolling a long cord, he repeated the words:—
Then Neb thought about using Jup for this task. He understood the orangutan's intelligence. Jup knew the word "corral." It wasn’t daylight yet. The agile creature could move through the woods unnoticed. So the man wrote a note, which he tied around Jup’s neck, and taking the monkey to the door and unrolling a long cord, he repeated the words:—
“Jup! Jup! To the corral! the corral!”
“Yep! Yep! To the corral! The corral!”
The animal understood him, and, seizing the cord, slid down to the ground, and disappeared in the darkness.
The animal understood him, grabbed the cord, slid down to the ground, and vanished into the darkness.
“You did well, Neb, although In not forewarning us perhaps you would have done better!” said Smith, thinking of Herbert, and how the carrying him back had been attended with such serious results.
“You did well, Neb, but maybe it would have been better if you had warned us first!” said Smith, thinking of Herbert and how bringing him back had such serious consequences.
Neb finished his recital. The convicts had not shown themselves upon the beach, doubtless fearing the inhabitants of Granite House, whose number they did not know. But the plateau was open and unprotected by Granite House. Here, therefore, they gave loose reins to their instinct of depredation and destruction, and they had left but half-an-hour before the colonists returned.
Neb finished his performance. The prisoners hadn’t appeared on the beach, probably because they were afraid of the people in Granite House, whose numbers they didn’t know. But the plateau was exposed and not defended by Granite House. So here, they let their instincts for looting and destruction take over, and they had left only half an hour before the colonists came back.
Neb had rushed from his retreat, and at the risk of being shot, he had climbed to the plateau and had tried to put out the fire which was destroying the inclosure to the poultry-yard. Ho was engaged in this work when the others returned.
Neb had hurried out from his hiding place, and at the risk of getting shot, he climbed up to the plateau and tried to put out the fire that was destroying the enclosure around the chicken coop. He was busy with this when the others returned.
Thus the presence of the convicts was a constant menace to the colonists, heretofore so happy, and they might expect the most disastrous results from them.
Thus, the presence of the convicts was a constant threat to the colonists, who had been so happy before, and they might anticipate the most disastrous outcomes from them.
Smith, accompanied by Neb, went to see for himself, the extent of the injury done. He walked along by the Mercy and up the left bank without seeing any trace of the convicts. It was likely that the latter had either witnessed the return of the colonists, and had gone back to the corral, now undefended, or that they had gone back to their camp to await an occasion to renew the attack.
Smith, along with Neb, went to check out the damage for himself. He walked along the Mercy and up the left bank, not spotting any sign of the convicts. It was likely that they had either seen the colonists come back and had retreated to the now undefended corral, or that they had returned to their camp to wait for another chance to attack.
At present, however, all attempts to rid the island of these pests were subject to the condition of Herbert.
At the moment, though, all efforts to get rid of these pests on the island depended on Herbert's condition.
The engineer and Neb reached the place. It was a scene of desolation. Fields trampled; the harvest scattered; the stables and other buildings burned; the frightened animals roaming at large over the plateau. The fowls, which had sought refuge on the lake, were returning to their accustomed place on its banks. Everything here would have to be done over again.
The engineer and Neb arrived at the location. It was a heartbreaking sight. The fields were trampled, the harvest was scattered, the stables and other buildings were burned, and the terrified animals were wandering freely across the plateau. The birds, which had taken shelter on the lake, were coming back to their usual spots along its banks. Everything here would need to be rebuilt.
The succeeding days were the saddest which the colonists had passed on the island. Herbert became more and more feeble. He was in a sort of stupor, and symptoms of delirium began to manifest themselves. Cooling draughts were all the remedies at the disposition of the colonists. Meantime, the fever became intermittent, and it was necessary to check, it before it developed greater strength.
The following days were the saddest that the colonists had spent on the island. Herbert grew weaker and weaker. He was in a kind of daze, and signs of delirium started to show. The only remedies the colonists had were cooling drinks. Meanwhile, the fever became intermittent, and it was essential to bring it under control before it got stronger.
“To do this,” said Spilett, “we must have a febrifuge.”
“To do this,” said Spilett, “we need a fever reducer.”
“And we have neither cinchonia nor quinine,” answered the engineer.
“And we have neither cinchona nor quinine,” replied the engineer.
“No, but we can make a substitute from the bark of the willow trees at the lake.”
“No, but we can make a substitute from the bark of the willow trees by the lake.”
“Let us try it immediately,” replied Smith.
“Let’s give it a try right now,” replied Smith.
Indeed, willow bark has been partly considered succedaneous to cinchonia, but since they had no means of extracting the salicin, the bark must be used in its natural state.
Indeed, willow bark has sometimes been seen as a substitute for cinchonia, but since they had no way of extracting the salicin, the bark has to be used in its natural form.
Smith, therefore, cut some pieces of bark from a species of black willow, and, reducing them to powder, this powder was given to Herbert the same evening.
Smith cut some pieces of bark from a type of black willow and ground them into powder, which was given to Herbert that same evening.
The night passed without incident. Herbert was somewhat delirious, but the fever did not manifest itself. Pencroff became more hopeful, but Spilett, who knew that the fever was intermittent, looked forward to the next day with anxiety.
The night went by without any problems. Herbert was a bit out of it, but the fever didn’t show up. Pencroff felt more optimistic, but Spilett, who was aware that the fever could come and go, faced the next day with worry.
They noticed that during the apyrexy, Herbert seemed completely prostrated, his head heavy, and subject to dizziness. Another alarming symptom was a congestion of the liver, and soon a more marked delirium manifested itself.
They noticed that during the fever-free period, Herbert seemed completely exhausted, his head felt heavy, and he experienced dizziness. Another concerning symptom was liver congestion, and soon a more pronounced delirium began to show.
Spilett was overwhelmed by this new complication. He drew the engineer aside and said to him:——
Spilett was taken aback by this new twist. He pulled the engineer aside and said to him:——
“It is a pernicious fever!”
"It's a vicious fever!"
“A pernicious fever!” cried Smith. “You must be mistaken, Spilett. A pernicious fever never declares itself spontaneously; it must have a germ.”
“A wicked fever!” shouted Smith. “You must be wrong, Spilett. A wicked fever doesn’t just appear out of nowhere; it has to come from a germ.”
“I am not mistaken,” replied the reporter. “Herbert may have caught the germ in the marshes. He has already had one attack; if another follows, and we cannot prevent a third—he is lost!”
“I’m not wrong,” the reporter said. “Herbert might have contracted the germ in the marshes. He’s already had one attack; if he has another, and we can’t stop a third—he’s done for!”
“But the willow bark?——”
“But the willow bark though?”
“Is insufficient. And a third attack of pernicious fever, when one cannot break it by means of quinine, is always mortal!”
“Is not enough. And a third bout of severe fever, when you can't break it with quinine, is always fatal!”
Happily Pencroff had not heard this conversation. It would have driven him wild.
Happily, Pencroff hadn’t heard this conversation. It would have driven him crazy.
Towards noon of the 7th, the second attack manifested itself. The crisis was terrible. Herbert felt that he was lost! He stretched out his arms towards Smith, towards Spilett, towards Pencroff! He did not want to die! The scene was heartrending, and it became necessary to take Pencroff away.
Towards noon on the 7th, the second attack occurred. The crisis was awful. Herbert felt like he was doomed! He reached out his arms toward Smith, toward Spilett, toward Pencroff! He didn't want to die! The scene was heartbreaking, and it became necessary to take Pencroff away.
The attack lasted five hours. It was plain that the lad could not support a third. The night was full of torture. In his delirium, Herbert wrestled with the convicts; he called Ayrton; he supplicated that mysterious being, that protector, who had disappeared but whose image haunted him—then he fell into a profound prostration, and Spilett, more than once, thought the poor boy was dead!
The attack lasted five hours. It was clear that the kid couldn’t handle a third wave. The night was filled with agony. In his fevered state, Herbert struggled with the convicts; he called out for Ayrton; he pleaded with that mysterious figure, that protector, who had vanished but whose image tormented him—then he lapsed into a deep exhaustion, and Spilett, more than once, feared the poor boy was dead!
The next day passed with only a continuation of the lad’s feebleness. His emaciated hands clutched the bed clothing. They continued giving him doses of the willow powder, but the reporter anticipated no result from it.
The next day went by with just a continuation of the boy’s weakness. His thin hands gripped the bedcovers. They kept giving him doses of the willow powder, but the reporter expected no results from it.
“If,” said he, “before to-morrow morning we cannot give him a more powerful febrifuge than this, Herbert will die!”
“If,” he said, “if we can’t give him a stronger fever reducer than this by tomorrow morning, Herbert will die!”
The night came—doubtless the last night for this brave lad, so good, so clever, whom all loved as their own child! The sole remedy against this pernicious fever, the sole specific which could vanquish it, was not to be found on Lincoln Island!
The night arrived—probably the last night for this brave boy, so kind, so smart, whom everyone loved like their own child! The only cure for this harmful fever, the one thing that could defeat it, couldn't be found on Lincoln Island!
During the night Herbert became frightfully delirious. He recognized no one. It was not even probable that he would live till morning. His strength was exhausted. Towards 3 o’clock he uttered a frightful cry. He was seized by a terrible convulsion. Neb, who was beside him, rushed, frightened, into the adjoining chamber, where his companions were watching.
During the night, Herbert became extremely delirious. He didn’t recognize anyone. It was unlikely that he would make it until morning. His strength was completely drained. Around 3 o’clock, he let out a horrifying scream. He was hit by a terrible convulsion. Neb, who was next to him, rushed, scared, into the neighboring room, where his friends were waiting.
At the same moment Top gave one of his strange barks.
At that moment, Top let out one of his weird barks.
All returned to the chamber and gathered round the dying lad, who struggled to throw himself from the bed. Spilett, who held his arms, felt his pulse slowly rising.
All returned to the room and gathered around the dying boy, who was trying to get off the bed. Spilett, who was holding his arms, felt his pulse steadily increasing.
Five o’clock came. The sun’s rays shone into the chambers of Granite House. A beautiful day, the last on earth for poor Herbert, dawned over Lincoln Island.
Five o’clock arrived. The sun's rays streamed into the rooms of Granite House. A beautiful day, the last on earth for poor Herbert, began over Lincoln Island.
A sunbeam crept on to the table beside the bed.
A sunbeam crept onto the table next to the bed.
Suddenly Pencroff, uttering an exclamation, pointed to something on that table.
Suddenly, Pencroff shouted and pointed to something on the table.
It was a small oblong box, bearing these words:——
It was a small rectangular box, with these words printed on it:——
Sulphate of quinine.
Quinine sulfate.
CHAPTER LIII.
AN INEXPLICABLE MYSTERY—HERBERT’S CONVALESCENCE—THE UNEXPLORED PARTS OF THE ISLAND—PREPARATIONS FOR DEPARTURE—THE FIRST DAY—NIGHT—SECOND DAY—THE KAURIS—CASSOWARIES—FOOTPRINTS IN THE SAND—ARRIVAL AT REPTILE END.
AN INEXPLICABLE MYSTERY—HERBERT’S RECOVERY—THE UNEXPLORED AREAS OF THE ISLAND—GETTING READY TO LEAVE—THE FIRST DAY—NIGHT—SECOND DAY—THE KAURIS—CASSOWARIES—FOOTPRINTS IN THE SAND—ARRIVAL AT REPTILE END.
Spilett took the box and opened it. It contained a white powder, which he tasted. Its extreme bitterness was unmistakable. It was indeed that precious alkaloid, the true anti-periodic.
Spilett took the box and opened it. It had a white powder inside, which he tasted. Its intense bitterness was unmistakable. It was indeed that valuable alkaloid, the real anti-periodic.
It was necessary to administer it to Herbert without delay. How it came there could be discussed later.
It was important to give it to Herbert right away. We could talk about how it ended up there later.
Spilett called for some coffee, and Neb brought a lukewarm infusion, in which the reporter placed eighteen grains of quinine and gave the mixture to Herbert to drink.
Spilett asked for some coffee, and Neb brought a lukewarm cup, in which the reporter added eighteen grains of quinine and handed the mixture to Herbert to drink.
There was still time, as the third attack of the fever had not yet manifested itself. And, indeed, it did not return. Moreover, every one became hopeful. The mysterious influence was again about them, and that too in a moment when they had despaired of its aid.
There was still time, since the third bout of the fever hadn't shown up yet. And, in fact, it didn't come back. Plus, everyone started to feel hopeful. The mysterious force was around them again, especially at a moment when they had given up on its help.
After a few hours, Herbert rested more quietly, and the colonists could talk of the incident. The intervention of this unknown being was more evident than ever, but how had he succeeded in getting in to Granite House during the night? It was perfectly inexplicable, and, indeed, the movements of this “genius of the island” were as mysterious as the genius himself.
After a few hours, Herbert settled down more peacefully, and the colonists were able to discuss the incident. The involvement of this unknown being was clearer than ever, but how had he managed to enter Granite House during the night? It was completely puzzling, and, in fact, the actions of this “genius of the island” were just as mysterious as the genius himself.
The quinine was administered to Herbert every three hours, and the next day the lad was certainly better. It is true he was not out of danger, since these fevers are often followed by dangerous relapses; but, then, here was the specific, and, doubtless, not far off, the one who had brought it. In two days more Herbert became convalescent. He was still feeble, but there had been no relapse, and he cheerfully submitted to the rigorous diet imposed upon, him. He was so anxious to get well.
The quinine was given to Herbert every three hours, and the next day he was definitely feeling better. It's true that he wasn't out of danger since these fevers often come with serious relapses, but he had the specific treatment, and surely the person who brought it wasn't far behind. In two more days, Herbert was on the road to recovery. He was still weak, but there had been no relapse, and he gladly followed the strict diet set for him. He was very eager to get better.
Pencroff was beside himself with joy. After the critical period had been safely passed he seized the reporter in his arms, and called him nothing but Doctor Spilett.
Pencroff was incredibly happy. After the crucial time had passed, he picked up the reporter and only referred to him as Doctor Spilett.
But the true physician was still to be found.
But the real doctor was still to be found.
““We will find him!” said the sailor.
“We will find him!” said the sailor.
The year 1867, during which the colonists had been so hardly beset, came to an end, and the new year began with superb weather. A fine warmth, a tropical temperature, moderated by the sea breeze. Herbert’s bed was drawn close to the window, where he could inhale long draughts of the salt, salubrious air. His appetite began to return, and what tempting savory morsels Neb prepared for him!
The year 1867, when the colonists faced so many challenges, came to an end, and the new year started with amazing weather. A pleasant warmth, a tropical temperature, softened by the sea breeze. Herbert’s bed was placed right next to the window, allowing him to breathe in deep breaths of the refreshing, salty air. His appetite started to come back, and Neb prepared some really delicious treats for him!
“It made one wish to be ill,” said Pencroff.
“It made you wish to be sick,” said Pencroff.
During this time the convicts had not shown themselves, neither was there any news of Ayrton. The engineer and Herbert still hoped to get him back, but the others thought that the unhappy man had succumbed. In a month’s time, when the lad should have regained his strength, the important search would be undertaken, and all these questions set at rest.
During this time, the convicts hadn’t made an appearance, nor was there any news of Ayrton. The engineer and Herbert still hoped to find him, but the others believed that the unfortunate man had perished. In a month’s time, when the boy should have regained his strength, the significant search would begin, putting all these questions to rest.
During January the work on the plateau consisted simply in collecting the grain and vegetables undestroyed in the work of devastation, and planting some for a late crop during the next season. Smith preferred to wait till the island was rid of the convicts before he repaired the damage to the mill, poultry-yard, and stable.
During January, the work on the plateau mainly involved gathering the grain and vegetables that survived the destruction and planting some for a late harvest in the coming season. Smith chose to wait until the island was clear of the convicts before fixing the damage to the mill, poultry yard, and stable.
In the latter part of the month Herbert began to take some exercise. He was eighteen years old, his constitution was splendid, and from this moment the improvement in his condition was visible daily.
In the later part of the month, Herbert started to get some exercise. He was eighteen years old, his health was excellent, and from this point on, the improvement in his condition was noticeable every day.
By the end of the month he walked on the shore and over the plateau, and strengthened himself with sea-baths. Smith felt that the day for the exploration could be set, and the 15th of February was chosen. The nights at this season were very clear, and would, therefore, be advantageous to the search.
By the end of the month, he walked along the shore and over the plateau, boosting his strength with sea baths. Smith felt it was time to schedule the exploration, and they chose February 15th. The nights this time of year were very clear, which would be helpful for the search.
The necessary preparations were begun. These were important, as the colonists had determined not to return to Granite House until their double end had been obtained—to destroy the convicts and find Ayrton, if he was still alive; and to discover the being who presided so efficiently over the destinies of the colony.
The essential preparations got underway. This was crucial, as the colonists were resolved not to go back to Granite House until they accomplished their two goals: to eliminate the convicts and locate Ayrton, if he was still alive; and to identify the person who effectively controlled the fate of the colony.
The colonists were familiar with all the eastern coast of the island between Claw Cape and the Mandibles; with Tadorn’s Fens; the neighborhood of Lake Grant; the portion of Jacamar Wood lying between the road to the corral and the Mercy; the courses of the Mercy and Red Creek, and those spurs of Mount Franklin where the corral was located.
The colonists knew the entire eastern coast of the island from Claw Cape to the Mandibles; they were acquainted with Tadorn’s Fens; the area around Lake Grant; the part of Jacamar Wood that was between the road to the corral and the Mercy; the paths of the Mercy and Red Creek; and the slopes of Mount Franklin where the corral was situated.
They had partially explored the long sweep of Washington Bay from Claw Cape to Reptile End; the wooded and marshy shore of the west coast, and the interminable downs which extended to the half-open mouth of Shark Gulf.
They had partially explored the long stretch of Washington Bay from Claw Cape to Reptile End; the wooded and marshy shore of the west coast, and the endless hills that reached to the partially open mouth of Shark Gulf.
But they were unacquainted with the vast woods of Serpentine Peninsula; all the right bank of the Mercy; the left bank of Fall River, and the confused mass of ravines and ridges which covered three-fourths of the base of Mount Franklin on the west, north, and east, and where, doubtless, there existed deep recesses. Therefore, many thousands of acres had not yet been explored.
But they didn't know the vast woods of Serpentine Peninsula; the entire right bank of the Mercy; the left bank of Fall River, and the tangled mass of ravines and ridges that covered three-quarters of the base of Mount Franklin on the west, north, and east, where, without a doubt, there were deep hidden areas. So, many thousands of acres had still not been explored.
It was decided that the expedition should cross the Forest of the Far West, in such a manner as to go over all that part situated on the right of the Mercy. Perhaps it would have been better to have gone at once to the corral, where it was probable the convicts had either pillaged the place or installed themselves there. But either the pillage was a work accomplished or the convicts had purposed to entrench themselves there, and it would always be time to dislodge them.
It was decided that the expedition would cross the Forest of the Far West, taking a route that covered all the area to the right of the Mercy. It might have been better to head straight to the corral, where it was likely the convicts had either looted the place or set up camp there. But either the looting had already happened, or the convicts intended to fortify their position there, and there would always be time to drive them out.
So the first plan was decided upon, and it was resolved to cut a road through these woods, placing Granite House in communication with the end of the peninsula, a distance of sixteen or seventeen miles.
So the first plan was agreed upon, and it was decided to create a road through these woods, connecting Granite House with the tip of the peninsula, a distance of about sixteen or seventeen miles.
The wagon was in perfect order. The onagers, well rested, were in excellent condition for a long pull. Victuals, camp utensils, and the portable stove, were loaded into the wagon, together with a careful selection of arms and ammunition.
The wagon was in great shape. The donkeys, well-rested, were ready for a long haul. Supplies, cooking gear, and the portable stove were loaded into the wagon, along with a careful selection of weapons and ammunition.
No one was left in Granite House; even Top and Jup took part in the expedition. The inaccessible dwelling could take care of itself.
No one was left in Granite House; even Top and Jup joined the expedition. The isolated home could handle itself.
Sunday, the day before the departure, was observed as a day of rest and prayer, and on the morning of the 15th Smith took the measures necessary to defend Granite House from invasion. The ladders were carried to the Chimneys and buried there, the basket of the elevator was removed, and nothing left of the apparatus. Pencroff, who remained behind in Granite House, saw to this latter, and then slid down to the ground by means of a double cord which, dropped to the ground, severed the last connection between the entrance and the shore.
Sunday, the day before they were set to leave, was a day for rest and prayer. On the morning of the 15th, Smith took the necessary steps to secure Granite House against any invasion. The ladders were taken to the Chimneys and buried there, the elevator's basket was removed, and nothing of the mechanism was left. Pencroff, who stayed behind in Granite House, took care of that, then slid down to the ground using a double cord, which, when dropped to the ground, cut the last connection between the entrance and the shore.
The weather was superb.
The weather was amazing.
“It is going to be a warm day,” said the reporter, joyfully.
“It’s going to be a warm day,” said the reporter, happily.
“But, Doctor Spilett,” said Pencroff, “our road is under the trees, and we will never see the sun!”
“But, Doctor Spilett,” Pencroff said, “our path is under the trees, and we'll never see the sun!”
“Forward!” said the engineer.
“Go ahead!” said the engineer.
The wagon was ready on the bank. The reporter insisted on Herbert taking a seat in it, at least for the first few hours. Neb walked by the onagers. Smith, the reporter, and the sailor went on ahead. Top bounded off into the grass; Jup took a seat beside Herbert, and the little party started.
The wagon was ready on the riverbank. The reporter insisted that Herbert take a seat in it, at least for the first few hours. Neb walked alongside the donkeys. Smith, the reporter, and the sailor moved on ahead. Top dashed off into the grass; Jup sat down next to Herbert, and the little group set off.
The wagon went up the left bank of the Mercy, across the bridge, and there, leaving the route to Balloon Harbor to the left, the explorers began to make a way through the forest.
The wagon moved up the left bank of the Mercy, crossed the bridge, and there, leaving the path to Balloon Harbor to the left, the explorers started to carve a path through the forest.
For the first two miles, the trees grew sufficiently apart to permit the wagon to proceed easily, without any other obstacle than here and there a stump or some bushes to arrest their progress. The thick foliage made a cool shadow over the ground. Birds and beasts were plenty, and reminded the colonists of their early excursions on the island.
For the first two miles, the trees were spaced far enough apart to allow the wagon to move easily, with only an occasional stump or some bushes hindering their progress. The dense foliage created a cool shade on the ground. There were plenty of birds and animals, reminding the colonists of their early adventures on the island.
“Nevertheless,” remarked Smith, “I notice that the animals are more timid than formerly. These woods have been recently traversed by the convicts, and we shall certainly find their traces.”
“However,” said Smith, “I can see that the animals are more skittish than before. These woods have recently been traveled by the convicts, and we will definitely find their signs.”
And, indeed, in many places, they saw where a party of men had passed, or built a fire, but in no one place was there a definite camp.
And in many places, they noticed where a group of men had gone by or made a fire, but there wasn't a specific campsite anywhere.
The engineer had charged his companions to abstain from hunting, so as not to make the convicts aware of their presence by the sound of firearms.
The engineer had instructed his companions not to hunt, so the convicts wouldn't be alerted to their presence by the noise of guns.
In the afternoon, some six miles from Granite House, the advance became very difficult, and they had to pass certain thickets, into which Top and Jup were sent as skirmishers.
In the afternoon, about six miles from Granite House, the progress became really tough, and they had to navigate through some thickets, sending Top and Jup ahead as scouts.
The halt for the night was made, nine miles from Granite House, on the bank of a small affluent to the Mercy, of whose existence they had been unaware. They had good appetites, and all made a hearty supper, after which the camp was carefully organized, in order to guard against a surprise from the convicts. Two of the colonists kept guard together in watches of two hours, but Herbert, in spite of his wishes, was not allowed to do duty.
The stop for the night was made nine miles from Granite House, by the bank of a small stream leading to the Mercy that they hadn’t known about before. They were all quite hungry and had a big dinner, after which the camp was set up carefully to prevent any surprises from the convicts. Two of the colonists took turns keeping watch for two hours, but Herbert, despite his eagerness, wasn’t allowed to take his turn.
The night passed without incident. The silence was unbroken save by the growling of jaguars and the chattering of monkeys, which seemed particularly to annoy Jup.
The night went by without any problems. The silence was interrupted only by the growling of jaguars and the chattering of monkeys, which seemed to especially irritate Jup.
The next day, they were unable to accomplish more than six miles. Like true “frontiersmen,” the colonists avoided the large trees and cut down only the smaller ones, so that their road was a winding one.
The next day, they were only able to cover about six miles. Like real "frontiersmen," the colonists dodged the big trees and chopped down only the smaller ones, making their path a winding one.
During the day Herbert discovered some specimens of the tree ferns, with vase-shaped leaves, and the algarobabeau (St. John’s bread), which the onagers eat greedily. Splendid kauris, disposed in groups, rose to a height of two hundred feet, their cylindrical trunks surmounted by a crown of verdure.
During the day, Herbert found some examples of tree ferns with vase-shaped leaves, and algarobabeau (St. John’s bread), which the onagers devoured hungrily. Magnificent kauris, arranged in clusters, stood towering at two hundred feet, their cylindrical trunks topped with a crown of greenery.
As to fauna, they discovered no new specimens, but they saw, without being able to approach them, a couple of large birds, such as are common in Australia, a sort of cassowary, called emus, which were five feet high, of brown plumage, and belonged to the order of runners. Top tried his best to catch them, but they outran him easily, so great was their speed.
As for the wildlife, they didn’t find any new species, but they spotted a couple of large birds from a distance—similar to those found in Australia—specifically a type of cassowary called emus. These birds were five feet tall, had brown feathers, and were part of the runner family. Top tried really hard to catch them, but they easily outran him because they were so fast.
The colonists again found traces of the convicts. Near a recently-extinguished fire they found footprints, which they examined with great attention. By measuring these tracks they were able to determine the presence of five men. The five convicts had evidently camped here; but—and they made minute search—they could not discover a sixth track, which would have been that of Ayrton.
The colonists once again discovered signs of the convicts. Near a recently put-out fire, they found footprints, which they examined closely. By measuring these tracks, they were able to confirm that five men were there. The five convicts had clearly set up camp here; however—and they searched thoroughly—they could not find a sixth track, which would have belonged to Ayrton.
“Ayrton is not with them!” said Herbert.
“Ayrton isn't with them!” said Herbert.
“No,” replied Pencroff, “the wretches have shot him.” But they must have a den, to which we can track them.”
“No,” Pencroff replied, “the bastards have shot him.” “But they have to have a hideout, and we can track them to it.”
“No,” replied the reporter. “It is more likely that they intend to camp about in places, after this manner, until they become masters of the island.”
“No,” replied the reporter. “It’s more likely that they plan to hang out in different spots like this until they take control of the island.”
“Masters of the island!” cried the sailor. “Masters of the island, indeed” he repeated in a horrified voice. Then he added:——
“Masters of the island!” shouted the sailor. “Masters of the island, really” he repeated in a shocked voice. Then he added:——
“The ball in my gun is the one which wounded Herbert and it will do its errand!”
“The bullet in my gun is the one that hurt Herbert, and it will do its job!”
But this just reprisal would not restore Ayrton to life, and the only conclusion to be drawn, from the footprints was that they would never see him again!
But this act of revenge wouldn’t bring Ayrton back to life, and the only conclusion from the footprints was that they would never see him again!
That evening the camp was made fourteen miles front Granite House, and Smith estimated that it was still five miles to Reptile End.
That evening, the camp was set up fourteen miles from Granite House, and Smith figured it was still five miles to Reptile End.
The next day this point was reached, and the full length of the forest had been traversed; but nothing indicated the retreat of the convicts, nor the asylum of the mysterious unknown.
The next day, this point was reached, and the entire length of the forest had been crossed; but there was no sign of the convicts' retreat, nor the hideout of the mysterious unknown.
CHAPTER LIV.
EXPLORATION OF REPTILE END—CAMP AT THE MOUTH OF FALL RIVER—BY THE CORRAL—THE RECONNOISSANCE—THE RETURN—FORWARD—AN OPEN DOOR—A LIGHT IN THE WINDOW—BY MOONLIGHT.
EXPLORATION OF REPTILE END—CAMP AT THE MOUTH OF FALL RIVER—BY THE CORRAL—THE RECONNAISSANCE—THE RETURN—FORWARD—AN OPEN DOOR—A LIGHT IN THE WINDOW—BY MOONLIGHT.
The next day, the 18th, was devoted to an exploration of the wooded shore lying between Reptile End and Fall River. The colonists were searching through the heart of the forest, whose width, bounded by the shores of the promontory, was from three to four miles. The trees, by their size and foliage, bore witness to the richness of the soil, more productive here than in any other portion of the island. It seemed as if a portion of the virgin forests of America or Central Africa had been transported here. It seemed, also, as if these superb trees found beneath the soil, moist on its surface, but heated below by volcanic fires, a warmth not belonging to a temperate climate. The principal trees, both in number and size, were the kauris and eucalypti.
The next day, the 18th, was spent exploring the wooded shore between Reptile End and Fall River. The colonists were investigating the heart of the forest, which stretched three to four miles wide, bordered by the shores of the promontory. The trees, with their size and foliage, showed just how rich the soil was, making this area more productive than anywhere else on the island. It felt like a piece of the untouched forests of America or Central Africa had been moved here. It also seemed like these magnificent trees found a warmth in the soil that was moist on the surface but heated below by volcanic activity, a warmth that didn’t belong to a temperate climate. The main types of trees, both in number and size, were the kauris and eucalypti.
But the object of the colonists was not to admire these magnificent vegetables. They knew already that, in this respect, their island merited a first place in the Canaries, called, formerly, the Fortunate Isles. But, alas! their island no longer belonged to them alone; others had taken possession, wretches whom it was necessary to destroy to the last man.
But the colonists weren't there to admire these amazing vegetables. They already knew that in this regard, their island deserved to be at the top in the Canaries, once called the Fortunate Isles. But, unfortunately, their island no longer belonged to just them; others had taken over, scoundrels who needed to be eliminated completely.
On the west coast they found no further traces of any kind.
On the west coast, they found no additional traces of any kind.
“This does not astonish me,” said Smith. “The convicts landed near Jetsam Point, and, after having crossed Tadorn’s Fens, they buried themselves in the forests of the Far West. They took nearly the same route which we have followed. That explains the traces we have seen in the woods. Arrived upon the shore, the convicts saw very clearly that it offered no convenient shelter, and it was then, on going towards the north, that they discovered the corral—”
“This doesn’t surprise me,” Smith said. “The convicts landed near Jetsam Point and, after crossing Tadorn’s Fens, they hid themselves in the forests of the Far West. They took almost the same route we’ve followed. That explains the signs we’ve seen in the woods. Once they reached the shore, the convicts realized that it didn’t provide any good shelter, and it was then, as they headed north, that they discovered the corral—”
“Where they may have returned,” said Pencroff.
“Where could they have gone back to?” said Pencroff.
“I do not think so,” answered the engineer, “as they would judge that our searches would be in that direction. The corral is only a provisional and not a permanent retreat for them.”
“I don’t think so,” replied the engineer, “since they would assume that our searches would be in that direction. The corral is just a temporary and not a permanent refuge for them.”
“I think so, too,” said the reporter, “and, further, that they have sought a hiding place among the spurs of Mount Franklin.”
“I think so, too,” said the reporter, “and, also, that they have tried to find a hiding place among the foothills of Mount Franklin.”
“Then let us push on to the corral!” cried Pencroff. “An end must be put to this thing, and we are only losing time here.”
“Then let’s get to the corral!” shouted Pencroff. “We need to put a stop to this, and we’re just wasting time here.”
“No, my friend,” replied the engineer.
“No, my friend,” replied the engineer.
“You forget that we are interested in determining whether the forests of the Far West do not shelter some habitation. Our exploration has a double end, Pencroff; to punish crime and to make a discovery.”
“You forget that we're trying to find out if the forests of the Far West have any kind of habitation. Our exploration has two purposes, Pencroff; to punish crime and to make a discovery.”
“That is all very well, sir,” replied the sailor, “but I have an idea that we will not discover our friend unless he chooses!”
“That’s all well and good, sir,” replied the sailor, “but I have a feeling we won’t find our friend unless he wants us to!”
Pencroff had expressed the opinion of the others as well as his own. It was, indeed, probable that the retreat of the unknown being was no less mysterious than his personality.
Pencroff shared not just his own thoughts but also those of the others. It was, in fact, likely that the retreat of the mysterious being was just as enigmatic as his character.
This evening the wagon halted at the mouth of Fall River. The encampment was made in the usual way, with the customary precautions. Herbert had recovered his former strength by this march in the fresh salt air, and his place was no longer on the wagon, but at the head of the line.
This evening, the wagon stopped at the entrance of Fall River. They set up camp as usual, taking all the necessary precautions. Herbert had regained his strength during the march in the fresh salt air, and he wasn’t riding in the wagon anymore; he was leading the line.
On the 19th, the colonists left the shore and followed up the left bank of Fall River. The route was already partially cleared, owing to the previous excursions made from the corral to the west coast. They reached a place six miles from Mount Franklin.
On the 19th, the colonists left the shore and made their way along the left bank of Fall River. The path was already somewhat cleared, thanks to earlier trips made from the corral to the west coast. They arrived at a spot six miles from Mount Franklin.
The engineer’s project was to observe with great care all the valley through which flowed the river, and to work cautiously up to the corral. If they should find it occupied, they were to secure it by main force, but if it should be empty, it was to be used as the point from which the explorations of Mount Franklin would be made.
The engineer’s project was to carefully observe the entire valley through which the river flowed and to cautiously approach the corral. If they found it occupied, they were to take it by force, but if it was empty, it would be used as the starting point for exploring Mount Franklin.
The road was through a narrow valley, separating two of the most prominent spurs of Mount Franklin. The trees grew closely together on the banks of the river, but were more scattered on the upper slopes. The ground was very much broken, affording excellent opportunities for an ambush, so that it was necessary to advance with great caution. Top and Jup went ahead, exploring the thickets on either hand, but nothing indicated either the presence or nearness of the convicts, or that these banks had been recently visited.
The road ran through a narrow valley that separated two of the most prominent ridges of Mount Franklin. The trees lined the river closely together but were more spread out on the upper slopes. The terrain was uneven, providing great chances for an ambush, so it was important to move forward very carefully. Top and Jup went ahead, checking the thickets on both sides, but there was no sign of the convicts or any indication that these banks had been visited recently.
About 5 o’clock the wagon halted 600 paces from the enclosure, hidden by a curtain of tall trees.
About 5 o'clock, the wagon stopped 600 paces from the enclosure, concealed by a curtain of tall trees.
It was necessary to reconnoitre the place, in order to find out whether it was occupied, but to do this in the day-time was to run the risk of being shot; nevertheless Spilett wanted to make the experiment at once, and Pencroff, out of all patience, wanted to go with him. But Smith would not permit it.
It was necessary to scout the area to see if it was occupied, but doing so during the day risked being shot; however, Spilett wanted to take the chance right away, and Pencroff, completely fed up, insisted on going with him. But Smith wouldn't allow it.
“No, my friends,” said he, “wait until nightfall. I will not allow one of you to expose yourselves in the daylight.”
“No, my friends,” he said, “wait until night. I won’t let any of you put yourselves at risk during the day.”
“But, sir,”—urged the sailor, but little disposed to obey.
“But, sir,” the sailor pressed, clearly not wanting to comply.
“Pray do not go, Pencroff,” said the engineer.
"Please don't go, Pencroff," said the engineer.
“All right,” said the sailor. But he gave vent to his anger by calling the convicts everything bad that he could think of.
“All right,” said the sailor. But he let out his frustration by calling the convicts every terrible name he could think of.
The colonists remained about the wagon, keeping a sharp lookout in the adjoining parts of the forest.
The colonists stayed around the wagon, keeping a close watch on the nearby areas of the forest.
Three hours passed in this manner. The wind fell, and absolute silence reigned over everything. The slightest sound—the snapping of a twig, a step on the dry leaves—could easily have been heard. But all was quiet. Top rested with his head between his paws, giving no sign of inquietude.
Three hours went by like this. The wind died down, and total silence hung over everything. Even the smallest sounds—a twig snapping, a footstep on the dry leaves—could have been heard easily. But it was completely quiet. Top lay with his head between his paws, showing no signs of restlessness.
By 8 o’clock the evening was far enough advanced for the reconnoissance to be undertaken, and Spilett and Pencroff set off alone. Top and Jup remained behind with the others, as it was necessary that no bark or cry should give the alarm.
By 8 o’clock, it was late enough in the evening for the reconnaissance to begin, so Spilett and Pencroff headed out alone. Top and Jup stayed back with the others since it was important that no noise or cry would alert anyone.
“Do not do anything imprudently,” urged Smith. “Remember, you are not to take possession of the corral, but only to find out whether it is occupied or not.”
“Don’t do anything reckless,” Smith urged. “Remember, you’re not supposed to take over the corral, just find out if it’s occupied or not.”
“All right,” answered Pencroff.
“Okay,” answered Pencroff.
The two set out, advancing with the greatest caution. Under the trees, the darkness was such as to render objects, thirty or forty paces distant, invisible. Five minutes after having left the wagon they reached the edge of the opening, at the end of which rose the fence of the enclosure. Here they halted. Some little light still illuminated the glade. Thirty paces distant was the gate of the corral, which seemed to be closed. These thirty paces which it was necessary to cross constituted, to use a ballistic expression, the dangerous zone, as a shot from the palisade would certainly have killed any one venturing himself within this space,
The two set out, moving very carefully. Under the trees, it was so dark that objects thirty or forty feet away were completely hidden. Five minutes after leaving the wagon, they reached the edge of the clearing, where the fence of the enclosure stood. They stopped here. Some light still filled the glade. Thirty feet away was the gate to the corral, which appeared to be closed. These thirty feet they needed to cross were, in military terms, the dangerous zone, as a shot from the palisade would definitely have killed anyone daring enough to enter this space.
Spilett and the sailor were not men to shirk danger, but they knew that any imprudence of theirs would injure their companions as well as themselves. If they were killed what would become of the others?
Spilett and the sailor weren't the type to avoid danger, but they understood that any reckless actions on their part could put their companions at risk as well as themselves. If they were to die, what would happen to the others?
Nevertheless, Pencroff was so excited in finding himself again close to the corral that he would have hurried forward had not the strong hand of Spilett detained him. “In a few minutes it will be dark,” whispered the reporter.
Nevertheless, Pencroff was so excited to find himself close to the corral again that he would have rushed forward if Spilett's strong hand hadn't held him back. “It’ll be dark in a few minutes,” the reporter whispered.
Pencroff grasped his gun nervously, and waited unwillingly.
Pencroff nervously held onto his gun and waited reluctantly.
Very soon the last rays of light disappeared. Mount Franklin loomed darkly against the western sky, and the night fell with the rapidity peculiar to these low latitudes. Now was the time.
Very soon the last rays of light vanished. Mount Franklin stood out ominously against the western sky, and night fell quickly, which is typical for these low latitudes. Now was the moment.
The reporter and Pencroff, ever since their arrival on the edge of the wood, had watched the corral. It seemed to be completely deserted. The upper edge of the palisade was in somewhat stronger relief than the surrounding shades, and nothing broke its outlines. Nevertheless, if the convicts were there, they must have posted one of their number as a guard.
The reporter and Pencroff, since they arrived at the edge of the woods, had been watching the corral. It looked completely deserted. The top of the palisade stood out more clearly against the surrounding shadows, and nothing interrupted its outline. Still, if the convicts were there, they must have stationed one of their own to keep watch.
Spilett took the hand of his companion, and crept cautiously forward to the gate of the corral. Pencroff tried to push it open, but it was, as they had supposed, fastened. But the sailor discovered that the outer bars were not in place. They, therefore, concluded that the convicts were within, and had fastened the gate so that it could only be broken open.
Spilett took his companion's hand and quietly moved toward the gate of the corral. Pencroff attempted to push it open, but it was, as they suspected, locked. However, the sailor noticed that the outer bars weren't in place. They concluded that the convicts were inside and had secured the gate in a way that would only allow it to be broken down.
They listened. No sound broke the silence. The animals were doubtless sleeping in their sheds. Should they scale the fence? It was contrary to Smith’s instructions. They might be successful or they might fail. And, if there was now a chance of surprising the convicts, should they risk that chance in this way?
They listened. No sound interrupted the silence. The animals were definitely sleeping in their shelters. Should they climb the fence? It went against Smith's instructions. They might succeed or they might fail. And, if there was a chance to surprise the convicts, should they take that risk like this?
The reporter thought not. He decided that it would be better to wait until they were all together before making the attempt. Two things were certain, that they could reach the fence unseen, and that the place seemed unguarded.
The reporter thought otherwise. He decided it would be better to wait until they were all together before trying. Two things were clear: they could get to the fence without being seen, and the area appeared to be unguarded.
Pencroff, probably, agreed to this, for he returned with the reporter to the wood, and a few minutes later Smith was informed of the situation.
Pencroff probably agreed to this, so he went back to the woods with the reporter, and a few minutes later, Smith was updated on the situation.
“Well,” said he after reflecting for a moment, “I don’t think that the convicts are here.”
“Well,” he said after thinking for a moment, “I don’t think the convicts are here.”
“We will find out when we have climbed in.” cried Pencroff.
“We'll find out when we get in,” shouted Pencroff.
“To the corral, my friends.”
“Let’s head to the corral, friends.”
“Shall we leave the wagon in the wood?” cried Neb.
“Should we leave the wagon in the woods?” shouted Neb.
“No,” said Smith, “it may serve as a defense in case of need.”
“No,” said Smith, “it might come in handy as a defense if necessary.”
The wagon issued from the wood and rolled noiselessly over the ground. The darkness and the silence were profound. The colonists kept their guns in readiness to fire. Jup kept behind, at Pencroff’s order, and Neb held Top.
The wagon came out of the woods and rolled silently over the ground. The darkness and silence were deep. The colonists kept their guns ready to fire. Jup stayed back at Pencroff's order, and Neb held Top.
Soon the dangerous zone was crossed, and the wagon was drawn up beside the fence. Neb stood at the head of the onagers to keep them quiet, and the others went to the gate to determine if it was barricaded on the inside.
Soon the risky area was crossed, and the wagon was pulled up next to the fence. Neb stood at the front of the donkeys to keep them calm, and the others went to the gate to see if it was blocked on the inside.
One of its doors was open!
One of its doors was open!
“What did you tell us?” exclaimed the engineer, turning to the sailor and Spilett.
“What did you tell us?” shouted the engineer, turning to the sailor and Spilett.
They were stupefied with amazement.
They were amazed.
“Upon my soul,” cried the sailor, “It was shut a minute ago!”
“Honestly,” exclaimed the sailor, “It was just closed a minute ago!”
The colonists hesitated. The convicts must have been in the corral when Pencroff and the reporter had made their reconnoissance; for the gate could only have been opened by them. Were they still there?
The colonists hesitated. The convicts must have been in the corral when Pencroff and the reporter did their reconnaissance; because the gate could only have been opened by them. Were they still there?
At this moment, Herbert, who had ventured some steps within the inclosure, rushed back and seized Smith’s hand.
At that moment, Herbert, who had taken a few steps inside the enclosure, rushed back and grabbed Smith’s hand.
“What have you seen?” asked the engineer.
“What have you seen?” the engineer asked.
“A light!”
“There's a light!”
“In the house?”
"At home?"
“Yes, sir.”
"Sure thing, sir."
All went forward and saw a feeble ray of light trembling through the windows of the building.
All moved ahead and saw a faint beam of light flickering through the windows of the building.
Smith determined what to do at once.
Smith quickly figured out what to do.
“It is a fortunate chance, finding the convicts shut up in this house not expecting anything! They are ours! Come on!”
“It’s a lucky break, discovering the convicts trapped in this house without expecting anything! They’re ours! Let’s go!”
The wagon was left under charge of Top and Jup, and the colonists glided into the enclosure. In a few moments they were before the closed door of the house.
The wagon was left in the care of Top and Jup, and the colonists smoothly entered the enclosure. In just a moment, they stood before the closed door of the house.
Smith, making a sign to his companions not to move, approached the window. He looked into the one room which formed the lower story of the building. On the table was a lighted lantern, Near by was Ayrton’s bed. On it was the body of a man.
Smith, signaling to his friends not to move, walked over to the window. He gazed into the single room that made up the ground floor of the building. On the table was a lit lantern. Nearby was Ayrton's bed. Lying on it was a man's body.
Suddenly, Smith uttered a stiffled exclamation.
Suddenly, Smith let out a muffled exclamation.
“Ayrton!” he cried.
“Ayrton!” he shouted.
And, at once, the door was rather forced than opened, and all rushed into the chamber.
And then, the door was pushed open rather forcefully, and everyone hurried into the room.
Ayrton seemed to be sleeping. His face showed marks of long and cruel suffering. His wrists and ankles were much bruised.
Ayrton appeared to be asleep. His face bore signs of long and harsh suffering. His wrists and ankles were heavily bruised.
Smith leaned over him.
Smith leaned over him.
“Ayrton!” cried the engineer, seizing in his arms this man found so unexpectedly.
“Ayrton!” the engineer shouted, grabbing the man he had found so unexpectedly in his arms.
Ayrton opened his eyes, and looked first at Smith, then at the others.
Ayrton opened his eyes and looked at Smith first, then at the others.
“You! Is it you?” he cried.
“You! Is that you?” he shouted.
“Ayrton! Ayrton!” repeated the engineer.
“Ayrton! Ayrton!” repeated the engineer.
“Where am I?”
“Where am I at?”
“In the corral.”
“In the pen.”
“Am I alone?”
“Am I the only one?”
“Yes.”
"Yep."
“Then they will come here!” cried Ayrton. “Look out for yourselves! Defend yourselves!” and he fell back, fainting.
“Then they’re coming here!” shouted Ayrton. “Watch out for yourselves! Defend yourselves!” and he collapsed, losing consciousness.
“Spilett,” said the engineer, “We may be attacked at any minute. Bring the wagon inside the enclosure, and bar the gate, and then come back here.”
“Spilett,” said the engineer, “We could be attacked any minute. Bring the wagon inside the enclosure, lock the gate, and then come back here.”
Pencroff, Neb, and the reporter hastened to execute the orders of the engineer. There was not an instant to be lost. Perhaps the wagon was already in the hands of the convicts!
Pencroff, Neb, and the reporter rushed to carry out the engineer's orders. There was no time to waste. The wagon might already be in the hands of the convicts!
In a moment the reporter and his companions had gained the gate of the enclosure, behind which they heard Top growling.
In a moment, the reporter and his friends reached the gate of the enclosure, behind which they heard Top growling.
The engineer, leaving Ayrton for a moment, left the house, and held his gun in readiness to fire. Herbert was beside him. Both scrutinized the outline of the mountain spur overlooking the corral. If the convicts were hidden in that place they could pick off the colonists one after the other.
The engineer, stepping away from Ayrton for a moment, left the house and got his gun ready to fire. Herbert was by his side. Both of them examined the shape of the mountain spur that looked over the corral. If the convicts were hiding there, they could take out the colonists one by one.
Just then the moon appeared in the east above the black curtain of the forest, throwing a flood of light over the interior of the corral, and bringing into relief the trees, the little water-course, and the grassy carpet. Towards the mountain, the house and a part of the palisade shone white; opposite it, towards the gate, the fence was in shadow.
Just then, the moon rose in the east above the dark forest, casting a bright light over the inside of the corral and highlighting the trees, the small stream, and the grassy ground. Toward the mountain, the house and part of the fence glowed white; on the other side, near the gate, the fence was in shadow.
A black mass soon showed itself. It was the wagon entering within the circle of light, and Smith could hear the sound of the gate closing and being solidly barricaded by his companions.
A dark mass soon appeared. It was the wagon moving into the circle of light, and Smith could hear the gate shutting and being securely blocked by his friends.
But at that moment Top, by a violent effort, broke his fastening, and, barking furiously, rushed to the extremity of the corral to the right of the house.
But at that moment, Top, with a sudden burst of strength, broke free from his restraints and, barking wildly, dashed to the far end of the corral to the right of the house.
“Look out, my friends, be ready!” cried Smith.
“Watch out, everyone, get ready!” shouted Smith.
The colonists waited, with their guns at the shoulder. Top continued to bark, and Jup, running towards the dog, uttered sharp cries.
The colonists waited, guns at the ready. Top kept barking, and Jup, sprinting toward the dog, shouted loudly.
The colonists, following him, came to the border of the little brook, overshadowed by large trees.
The settlers, following him, reached the edge of the small stream, shaded by tall trees.
And there, in the full moonlight, what did they see?
And there, in the bright moonlight, what did they see?
Five corpses lay extended upon the bank!
Five bodies lay stretched out on the bank!
They were the bodies of the convicts, who, four months before, had landed upon Lincoln Island.
They were the bodies of the prisoners who, four months earlier, had arrived on Lincoln Island.
CHAPTER LV.
AYRTON’S RECITAL—PLANS OF HIS OLD COMRADES—TAKING POSSESSION OF THE CORRAL—THE RULES OF THE ISLAND—THE GOOD LUCK—RESEARCHES ABOUT MOUNT FRANKLIN—THE UPPER VALLEYS —SUBTERRANEAN RUMBLINGS—PENCROFF’S ANSWER—AT THE BOTTOM OF THE CRATER-THE RETURN
AYRTON’S RECITAL—PLANS OF HIS OLD FRIENDS—TAKING OVER THE CORRAL—THE RULES OF THE ISLAND—THE GOOD LUCK—RESEARCH ON MOUNT FRANKLIN—THE UPPER VALLEYS—UNDERGROUND RUMBLINGS—PENCROFF’S RESPONSE—AT THE BOTTOM OF THE CRATER—THE RETURN
How had it happened? Who had killed the convicts? Ayrton? No, since the moment before he had feared their return!
How did this happen? Who killed the convicts? Ayrton? No, because just a moment ago he was afraid they would come back!
But Ayrton was now in a slumber from which it was impossible to arouse him. After he had spoken these few words, he had fallen back upon his bed, seized by a sudden torpor.
But Ayrton was now in a deep sleep that it was impossible to wake him from. After he had said these few words, he had collapsed back onto his bed, overcome by a sudden lethargy.
The colonists, terribly excited, preyed upon by a thousand confused thoughts, remained all night in the house. The next morning Ayrton awoke from his sleep, and his companions demonstrated to him their joy at finding him safe and sound after all these months of separation.
The colonists, filled with excitement and overwhelmed by a whirlwind of mixed thoughts, stayed in the house all night. The following morning, Ayrton woke up from his sleep, and his friends showed their happiness at finding him safe and sound after all these months apart.
Then Ayrton related in a few words all that had happened.
Then Ayrton briefly recounted everything that had happened.
The day after his return to the corral, the 10th of November, just at nightfall, he had been surprised by the convicts, who had climbed over the fence. He was tied and gagged and taken to a dark cavern at the foot of Mount Franklin, where the convicts had a retreat.
The day after he got back to the corral, November 10th, just as night was falling, he was caught off guard by the convicts, who had climbed over the fence. They tied him up and gagged him, then took him to a dark cave at the base of Mount Franklin, where the convicts had a hideout.
His death had been resolved upon, and he was to be killed the following day, when one of the convicts recognized him and called him by the name he had borne in Australia. These wretches, who would have massacred Ayrton, respected Ben Joyce.
His death had been decided, and he was scheduled to be killed the next day, when one of the inmates recognized him and called him by the name he had used in Australia. These criminals, who would have killed Ayrton, respected Ben Joyce.
From this moment Ayrton was subjected to the importunities of his old comrades. They wished to gain him over to them, and they counted upon him to take Granite House, to enter that inaccessible dwelling, and to become masters of the island, after having killed the colonists.
From that moment on, Ayrton faced the relentless pressure from his old friends. They wanted to win him back and were relying on him to take over Granite House, break into that unreachable place, and seize control of the island after getting rid of the colonists.
Ayrton resisted. The former convict, repentant and pardoned, would rather die than betray his companions.
Ayrton resisted. The former convict, remorseful and pardoned, would rather die than betray his friends.
For four months, fastened, gagged, watched, he had remained in this cavern.
For four months, tied up, gagged, and watched, he had stayed in this cave.
Meanwhile the convicts lived upon the stock in the corral, but did not inhabit the place.
Meanwhile, the convicts relied on the livestock in the corral for their survival, but they did not actually live there.
On the 11th of November, two of these bandits, inopportunely surprised by the arrival of the colonists, fired on Herbert, and one of them returned boasting of having killed one of the inhabitants. His companion, as we know, had fallen at Smith’s hand.
On November 11th, two of these bandits were unexpectedly caught off guard by the arrival of the colonists and shot at Herbert. One of them returned, bragging about having killed one of the locals. As we know, his partner had been killed by Smith.
One can judge of Ayrton’s despair, when he heard of Herbert’s death! It left but four of the colonists, almost at the mercy of the convicts!
One can imagine Ayrton’s despair when he heard about Herbert’s death! It left only four of the colonists, nearly at the mercy of the convicts!
Following this event, and during all the time that the colonists, detained by Herbert’s illness, remained at the corral, the pirates did not leave their cave; indeed, after having pillaged Prospect Plateau, they did not deem it prudent to leave it.
Following this event, and throughout the time that the colonists, held up by Herbert’s illness, stayed at the corral, the pirates didn’t leave their cave; in fact, after robbing Prospect Plateau, they didn’t think it was wise to leave.
The bad treatment of Ayrton was redoubled. His hands and feet still bore the red marks of the lines with which he remained bound, day and night. Each moment he expected to be killed.
The mistreatment of Ayrton intensified. His hands and feet still showed the red marks from the ropes that kept him tied up, day and night. Every moment, he feared for his life.
This was the third week in February. The convicts, awaiting a favorable opportunity, rarely left their retreat, and then only to a point in the interior or on the west coast. Ayrton had no news of his friends, and no hopes of seeing them again.
This was the third week of February. The convicts, waiting for a good chance, rarely left their hideout, and then only to a spot in the interior or on the west coast. Ayrton hadn’t heard from his friends and had no hope of seeing them again.
Finally, the poor unfortunate, enfeebled by bad treatment, fell in a profound prostration in which he neither saw nor heard anything. From this moment, he could not say what had happened.
Finally, the poor unfortunate, weakened by mistreatment, fell into a deep faint where he neither saw nor heard anything. From that moment on, he couldn't say what had happened.
“But, Mr. Smith,” he added, “since I was imprisoned in this cavern, how is it that I am here?”
“But, Mr. Smith,” he added, “since I’ve been trapped in this cave, how is it that I’m here?”
“How is that the convicts are lying there, dead, in the middle of the corral?” answered the engineer.
“How come the convicts are lying there, dead, in the middle of the corral?” the engineer replied.
“Dead!” cried Ayrton, half rising, notwithstanding his feebleness. His companions assisted him to get up, and all went to the little brook.
“Dead!” shouted Ayrton, half getting up despite his weakness. His friends helped him to his feet, and they all walked to the small stream.
It was broad daylight. There on the shore, in the position in which they had met their deaths, lay the five convicts.
It was bright daylight. There on the shore, in the spot where they had met their end, lay the five convicts.
Ayrton was astounded. The others looked on without speaking. Then, at a sign from Smith, Neb and Pencroff examined the bodies. Not a wound was visible upon them. Only after minute search, Pencroff perceived on the forehead of one, on the breast of another, on this one’s back, and on the shoulder of a fourth, a small red mark, a hardly visible bruise, made by some unknown instrument.
Ayrton was shocked. The others watched in silence. Then, at a signal from Smith, Neb and Pencroff investigated the bodies. There were no visible wounds. Only after a careful search did Pencroff notice a small red mark—a barely noticeable bruise—on one person's forehead, on another's chest, on the back of a third, and on the shoulder of a fourth, caused by some unknown object.
“There is where they have been hit!” said Smith.
“There is where they got hit!” said Smith.
“But with what sort of a weapon?” cried the reporter.
“But with what kind of weapon?” the reporter exclaimed.
“A destructive weapon enough, though unknown to us!”
“A powerful weapon, though unfamiliar to us!”
“And who has destroyed them?” asked Pencroff.
“And who’s destroyed them?” asked Pencroff.
“The ruler of the island,” answered Smith, “he who has brought you here, Ayrton, whose influence is again manifesting itself, who does for us what we are unable to do for ourselves, and who then hides from us.”
“The ruler of the island,” Smith replied, “the one who brought you here, Ayrton, whose influence is showing itself again, who does for us what we can’t do for ourselves, and who then disappears from our sight.”
“Let us search for him!” cried Pencroff.
“Let’s go look for him!” shouted Pencroff.
“Yes, we will search,” replied Smith; “but the being who accomplishes such prodigies will not be found until it pleases him to call us to him!”
“Yes, we will search,” replied Smith; “but the one who performs such wonders won't be found until it suits him to summon us!”
This invisible protection, which nullified their own actions, both annoyed and affected the engineer. The relative inferiority in which it placed him wounded his pride. A generosity which so studiously eluded all mark of recognition denoted a sort of disdain for those benefited, which, in a measure, detracted from the value of the gift.
This unseen protection, which rendered their actions meaningless, both irritated and impacted the engineer. The sense of inferiority it imposed on him hurt his pride. A generosity that deliberately avoided any sign of acknowledgment suggested a kind of contempt for those who benefited, which somewhat reduced the worth of the gift.
“Let us search,” he repeated, “and Heaven grant that some day we be permitted to prove to this haughty protector that he is not dealing with ingrates! What would I not give to be able, in our turn, to repay him, and to render him, even at the risk of our lives, some signal service!”
“Let’s search,” he repeated, “and I hope that one day we get the chance to show this arrogant protector that he’s not dealing with ungrateful people! What I wouldn’t give to be able, in return, to repay him, and to do him, even at the risk of our lives, some significant service!”
From this time, this search was the single endeavor of the inhabitants of Lincoln Island. All tried to discover the answer to this enigma, an answer which involved the name of a man endowed with an inexplicable, an almost superhuman power.
From this point on, this quest became the sole focus of the people living on Lincoln Island. Everyone attempted to find the solution to this mystery, a solution that involved the name of a man with an unexplainable, almost superhuman power.
In a short time, the colonists entered the house again, and their efforts soon restored Ayrton to himself. Neb and Pencroff carried away the bodies of the convicts and buried them in the wood. Then, Ayrton was informed by the engineer of all that had happened during his imprisonment.
In a little while, the colonists went back into the house, and their efforts quickly helped Ayrton regain his senses. Neb and Pencroff took the bodies of the convicts and buried them in the woods. Then, the engineer updated Ayrton on everything that had happened while he was imprisoned.
“And now,” said Smith, finishing his recital, “we have one thing more to do. Half of our task is accomplished; but if the convicts are no longer to be feared, we did not restore ourselves to the mastership of the island!”
“And now,” said Smith, wrapping up his story, “we have one more thing to do. We've completed half of our task; but if we no longer fear the convicts, we still haven't taken back control of the island!”
“Very well,” replied Spilett, “let us search all the mazes of Mount Franklin. Let us leave no cavity, no hole unexplored! Ah! if ever a reporter found himself in the presence of an exciting mystery. I am in that position!”
“Alright,” replied Spilett, “let’s search every corner of Mount Franklin. Let’s leave no crevice or hole unchecked! Ah! If there’s ever been a reporter faced with an exciting mystery, it's me in this moment!”
“And we will not return to Granite House,” said Herbert, “until we have found our benefactor.”
“And we’re not going back to Granite House,” said Herbert, “until we’ve found our benefactor.”
“Yes,” said Smith, “we will do everything that is possible for human beings to do—but, I repeat it, we will not find him till he wills it.”
“Yes,” said Smith, “we will do everything we can as humans—but, I want to emphasize, we won’t find him until he wants to.”
“Shall we stay here at the corral?” asked Pencroff.
“Should we stay here at the corral?” Pencroff asked.
“Yes,” replied the engineer, “let us remain here. Provisions are abundant, and we are in the centre of our circle of investigation, and, moreover, if it is necessary, the wagon can go quickly to Granite House.”
“Yes,” replied the engineer, “let’s stay here. We have plenty of supplies, and we’re at the center of our investigation area. Plus, if needed, the wagon can quickly head to Granite House.”
“All right,” said Pencroff. “Only one thing.”
"Okay," said Pencroff. "Just one thing."
“What is that?”
"What’s that?"
“Why, the fine weather is here, and we must not forget that we have a voyage to make.”
“Hey, the great weather is here, and we can't forget that we have a trip to take.”
“A voyage?” asked Spilett.
"Going on a trip?" asked Spilett.
“Yes, to Tabor Island. We most put up a notice, indicating our island, in case the Scotch yacht returns. Who knows that it is not already too late?”
“Yes, to Tabor Island. We should definitely put up a notice indicating our island, just in case the Scottish yacht comes back. Who knows, it might already be too late?”
“But, Pencroff,” asked Ayrton, “how do you propose to make this voyage?”
“But, Pencroff,” Ayrton asked, “how do you plan to make this journey?”
“Why, on the Good Luck!”
“Why, on the Good Luck!”
“The Good Luck!” cried Ayrton. “It’s gone!”
“The Good Luck!” shouted Ayrton. “It’s gone!”
“Gone!” shouted Pencroff, springing to his feet.
“Gone!” shouted Pencroff, jumping to his feet.
“Yes. The convicts discovered where the sloop lay, and, a week ago, they put out to sea in her, and—”
“Yes. The prisoners found out where the sloop was anchored, and a week ago, they set sail on it, and—”
“And?” said Pencroff, his heart trembling.
“And?” said Pencroff, his heart racing.
“And, not having Harvey to manage her, they ran her upon the rocks, and she broke all to pieces!”
“And since they didn’t have Harvey to guide her, they crashed her onto the rocks, and she fell apart completely!”
“Oh! the wretches! the pirates! the devils!” exclaimed the sailor.
“Oh! the wretches! the pirates! the devils!” shouted the sailor.
“Pencroff,” said Herbert, taking his hand, “we will build another, a larger Good Luck. We have all the iron, all the rigging of the brig at our disposal!”
“Pencroff,” said Herbert, shaking his hand, “we’ll build another, a bigger Good Luck. We have all the iron and all the rigging from the brig at our disposal!”
“But, do you realize,” answered Pencroff, “that it will take at least five or six months to build a vessel of thirty or forty tons.”
"But do you realize," Pencroff replied, "that it'll take at least five or six months to build a ship of thirty or forty tons?"
“We will take our time,” replied the reporter, “and we will give up our voyage to Tabor Island for this year.”
“We’ll take our time,” replied the reporter, “and we’ll skip our trip to Tabor Island this year.”
“We must make the best of it, Pencroff,” said the engineer, “and I hope that this delay will not be prejudicial to us.”
“We have to make the most of it, Pencroff,” said the engineer, “and I hope this delay won’t hurt us.”
“My poor Good Luck! my poor boat!” exclaimed the sailor, half broken-hearted at the loss of what was so dear to him.
“My poor Good Luck! My poor boat!” the sailor exclaimed, half broken-hearted over the loss of something so precious to him.
The destruction of the sloop was a thing much to be regretted, and it was agreed that this loss must be repaired as soon as the search was ended.
The destruction of the sloop was something to be regretted, and it was agreed that this loss needed to be fixed as soon as the search was over.
This search was begun the same day, the 19th of February, and lasted throughout the week. The base of the mountain was composed of a perfect labyrinth of ravines and gorges, and it was here that the explorations must be made. No other part of the island was so well suited to hide an inhabitant who wished to remain concealed. But so great was the intricacy of these places that Smith explored them by a settled system.
This search started on the same day, February 19th, and continued all week. The base of the mountain was a perfect maze of ravines and gorges, and it was here that the explorations had to take place. No other part of the island was as good at hiding someone who wanted to stay hidden. But the complexity of these areas was so great that Smith explored them following a set method.
In the first place, the colonists visited the valley opening to the south of the volcano, in which Fall River rose. Here was where Ayrton showed them the cavern of the convicts. This place was in exactly the same condition as Ayrton had left it. They found here a quantity of food and ammunition left there as a reserve by the convicts.
In the beginning, the colonists went to the valley that opened to the south of the volcano, where Fall River emerged. This is where Ayrton showed them the convict's cave. It was in the exact same state as Ayrton had left it. They discovered a stash of food and ammunition left there as a reserve by the convicts.
All this beautiful wooded valley was explored with great care, and then, the south-western spur having been turned, the colonists searched a narrow gorge where the trees were less numerous. Here the stones took the place of grass, and the wild goats and moufflons bounded among the rocks. The arid part of the island began at this part. They saw already that, of the numerous valleys ramifying from the base of Mount Franklin, three only, bounded on the west by Fall River and on the east by Red Creek, were as rich and fertile as the valley of the corral. These two brooks, which developed into rivers as they progressed, received the whole of the mountain’s southern water-shed and fertilized that portion of it. As to the Mercy it was more directly fed by abundant springs, hidden in Jacamar Wood.
All of this beautiful wooded valley was explored carefully, and then, after rounding the southwestern ridge, the settlers searched a narrow gorge where the trees were less dense. Here, stones replaced the grass, and wild goats and moufflons leaped among the rocks. The dry part of the island began here. They noticed that among the many valleys branching out from the base of Mount Franklin, only three, bordered on the west by Fall River and on the east by Red Creek, were as rich and fertile as the valley of the corral. These two streams, which grew into rivers as they flowed, collected all of the mountain's southern watershed and nourished that area. As for the Mercy, it was more directly supplied by abundant springs hidden in Jacamar Wood.
Now any one of these three valleys would have answered for the retreat of some recluse, who would have found there all the necessaries of life. But the colonists had explored each of them without detecting the presence of man. Was it then at the bottom of these arid gorges, in the midst of heaps of rocks, in the rugged ravines to the north, between the streams of lava, that they would find this retreat and its occupant?
Now any one of these three valleys would have been a perfect spot for a recluse, as they would have found everything they needed to live. But the colonists explored each of them and found no sign of anyone living there. So, would they find this retreat and its occupant at the bottom of these dry gorges, among piles of rocks, in the rough ravines to the north, or between the streams of lava?
The northern part of Mount Franklin had at its base two large, arid valleys strewn with lava, sown with huge rocks, sprinkled with pieces of obsidian and labradorite. This part required long and difficult exploration. Here were a thousand cavities, not very comfortable, perhaps, but completely hidden and difficult of access. The colonists visited sombre tunnels, made in the plutonic epoch, still blackened by the fires of other days, which plunged into the heart of the mountain. They searched these dark galleries by the light of torches, peering into their least excavations and sounding their lowest depths. But everywhere was silence, obscurity. It did not seem as if any human being had ever trodden these antique corridors or an arm displaced one of these stones.
The northern part of Mount Franklin had two large, dry valleys at its base, littered with lava, filled with huge rocks, and scattered with pieces of obsidian and labradorite. This area required extensive and challenging exploration. There were countless cavities, not particularly comfortable, but completely hidden and hard to reach. The colonists explored dark tunnels created during the plutonic era, still charred from past fires, which led deep into the mountain. They examined these shadowy passages by torchlight, investigating every nook and probing their deepest points. But all they found was silence and darkness. It felt like no human had ever walked these ancient corridors or disturbed any of these stones.
Nevertheless, if these places were absolutely deserted, if the obscurity was complete, Smith was forced to notice that absolute silence did not reign there.
Nevertheless, even if these places were completely empty, and the darkness was absolute, Smith couldn't help but notice that total silence wasn't present there.
Having arrived at the bottom of one of those sombre cavities, which extended several hundred feet into the interior of the mountain, he was surprised to hear deep muttering sounds which were intensified by the sonority of the rocks.
Having reached the bottom of one of those dark cavities that stretched several hundred feet into the mountain, he was surprised to hear deep rumbling sounds that were amplified by the resonance of the rocks.
Spilett, who was with him, also heard these distant murmurs, which indicated an awakening of the subterranean fires.
Spilett, who was with him, also heard these distant sounds, which signaled an awakening of the underground fires.
Several times they listened, and they came to the conclusion that some chemical reaction was going on in the bowels of the earth.
Several times they listened, and they concluded that some chemical reaction was happening deep within the earth.
“The volcano is not entirely extinct,” said the reporter.
“The volcano isn’t completely extinct,” the reporter said.
“It is possible that, since our exploration of the crater, something has happened in its lower regions. All volcanoes, even those which are said to be extinct, can, evidently, become active again.”
“It’s possible that since we explored the crater, something has happened in its lower regions. All volcanoes, even the ones that are considered extinct, can clearly become active again.”
“But if Mount Franklin is preparing for another eruption, is not Lincoln Island in danger?”
"But if Mount Franklin is getting ready to erupt again, isn't Lincoln Island in danger?"
“I don’t think so,” answered the engineer, “The crater, that is to say, the safety-valve, exists, and the overflow of vapors and lavas will escape, as heretofore, by its accustomed outlet.”
“I don’t think so,” replied the engineer, “The crater, the safety valve, is still there, and the overflow of gases and lava will continue to escape through its usual outlet, just like before.”
“Unless the lavas make a new passage towards the fertile parts of the island.”
“Unless the lava creates a new route to the fertile areas of the island.”
“Why, my dear Spilett, should they not follow their natural course?”
“Why, my dear Spilett, shouldn’t they just follow their natural course?”
“Well, volcanoes are capricious.”
“Well, volcanoes are unpredictable.”
“Notice,” said Smith, “that all the slope of the mountain favors the flow of eruptive matter towards the valleys which we are traversing at present. It would take an earthquake to so change the centre of gravity of the mountain as to modify this slope.”
“Notice,” said Smith, “that the entire slope of the mountain directs the flow of eruptive materials toward the valleys we’re currently crossing. It would take an earthquake to alter the center of gravity of the mountain enough to change this slope.”
“But an earthquake is always possible under these conditions.”
“But an earthquake can always happen under these conditions.”
“True,” replied the engineer, “especially when the subterranean forces are awakening, and the bowels of the earth, after a long repose, chance to be obstructed. You are right, my dear Spilett, an eruption would be a serious thing for us, and it would be better if this volcano has not the desire to wake up; but we can do nothing. Nevertheless, in any case, I do not think Prospect Plateau could be seriously menaced. Between it and the lake there is quite a depression in the land, and even if the lavas took the road to the lake, they would be distributed over the downs and the parts adjoining Shark Gulf.”
“True,” replied the engineer, “especially when the underground forces are stirring, and the depths of the earth, after a long rest, happen to be blocked. You’re right, my dear Spilett, an eruption would be a serious issue for us, and it would be better if this volcano stays dormant; but there’s nothing we can do. Still, in any case, I don’t think Prospect Plateau would be in serious danger. Between it and the lake, there’s quite a dip in the land, and even if the lava took the path to the lake, it would spread out over the hills and the areas near Shark Gulf.”
“We have not yet seen any smoke from the summit, indicating a near eruption,” said Spilett.
“We haven’t seen any smoke from the summit, which suggests an eruption might be coming,” said Spilett.
“No,” answered the engineer, “not the least vapor has escaped from the crater. It was but yesterday that I observed its upper part. But it is possible that rocks, cinders, and hardened lavas have accumulated in the lower part of its chimney, and, for the moment, this safety-valve is overloaded. But, at the first serious effort, all obstacles will disappear, and you may be sure, my dear Spilett, that neither the island, which is the boiler, nor the volcano, which is the valve, will burst under the pressure. Nevertheless, I repeat, it is better to wish for no eruption.”
“No,” replied the engineer, “not a bit of vapor has escaped from the crater. Just yesterday, I checked the upper part. However, it’s possible that rocks, cinders, and hardened lava have piled up in the lower part of the chimney, which means that this safety valve is currently overloaded. But, at the first serious attempt, all obstacles will be cleared, and you can be sure, my dear Spilett, that neither the island, which acts like a boiler, nor the volcano, which is the valve, will burst under the pressure. Still, I insist, it's better to hope for no eruption.”
“And yet we are not mistaken,” replied the reporter. “We plainly hear ominous rumblings in the depths of the volcano!”
“And yet we’re not wrong,” the reporter replied. “We can clearly hear ominous rumbles coming from deep within the volcano!”
“No,” replied the engineer, after listening again with the utmost attention, “that is not to be mistaken. Something is going on there the importance of which cannot be estimated nor what the result will be.”
“No,” replied the engineer, after listening carefully once more, “that’s unmistakable. Something significant is happening there, the importance of which can’t be determined, nor can we predict the outcome.”
Smith and Spilett, on rejoining their companions, told them of these things.
Smith and Spilett, upon reuniting with their friends, shared what had happened.
“All right!” cried Pencroff. “This volcano wants to take care of us! But let it try! It will find its master!”
“All right!” shouted Pencroff. “This volcano thinks it can take us on! But let it try! It’ll meet its match!”
“Who’s that?” asked the negro.
“Who’s that?” asked the man.
“Our genius, Neb, our good genius, who will put a gag in the mouth of the crater if it attempts to open it.”
“Our genius, Neb, our good genius, who will stop the crater from opening its mouth if it tries to.”
The confidence of the sailor in the guardian of the island was absolute, and, indeed, the occult power which had so far been manifested seemed limitless; but, thus far this being had escaped all the efforts the colonists had made to discover him.
The sailor had complete confidence in the guardian of the island, and the mysterious power that had shown itself so far seemed boundless; however, up to this point, this being had evaded all the attempts the colonists made to find him.
From the 19th to the 25th of February, the investigations were conducted in the western portion of Lincoln Island, where the most secret recesses were searched. They even sounded each rocky wall, as one knocks against the walls of a suspected house. The engineer went so far as to take the exact measure of the mountain, and he pushed his search to the last strata sustaining it. It was explored to the summit of the truncated cone which rose above the first rocky level, and from there to the upper edge of the enormous cap at the bottom of which opened the crater.
From February 19th to 25th, the investigations took place in the western part of Lincoln Island, where the most hidden areas were examined. They even tapped on each rocky wall, like someone knocking on the doors of a suspected house. The engineer went so far as to measure the mountain precisely and extended his search to the deepest layers supporting it. It was explored all the way to the top of the truncated cone that rose above the first rocky level, and from there to the upper edge of the massive cap with the crater at its base.
They did more; they visited the gulf, still extinct, but in whose depths the rumblings were distinctly heard. Nevertheless, not a smoke, not a vapor, no heat in the wall, indicated a near eruption. But neither there, nor in any other part of Mount Franklin, did the colonists find the traces of him whom they sought.
They did more; they visited the gulf, still extinct, but in its depths the rumblings were clearly heard. However, there was no smoke, no vapor, no heat in the wall, indicating an impending eruption. But neither there nor in any other part of Mount Franklin did the colonists find any signs of the person they were looking for.
Their investigations were then directed over all the tract of downs. They carefully examined the high lava walls of Shark Gulf from base to summit, although it was very difficult to reach the water level. No one! Nothing!
Their investigations were then focused on the entire stretch of hills. They thoroughly examined the tall lava walls of Shark Gulf from the bottom to the top, even though it was really hard to get down to the water level. No one! Nothing!
These two words summed up in brief the result of all the useless fatigues Smith and his companions had been at, and they were a trifle annoyed at their ill success.
These two words summed up the result of all the pointless efforts Smith and his friends had made, and they were a bit annoyed by their lack of success.
But it was necessary now to think of returning, as these researches could not be pursued indefinitely. The colonists were convinced that this mysterious being did not reside upon the surface of the island, and strange thoughts floated through their over-excited imaginations; Neb and Pencroff, particularly, went beyond the strange into the region of the supernatural. The 25th of February, the colonists returned to Granite House, and by means of the double cord, shot by an arrow to the door-landing, communication was established with their domain.
But they had to consider returning now, as they couldn’t keep exploring indefinitely. The colonists believed that this mysterious figure didn’t live on the island’s surface, and odd thoughts raced through their overactive minds; Neb and Pencroff, in particular, ventured from the unusual into the realm of the supernatural. On February 25th, the colonists returned to Granite House, and using the double cord shot by an arrow to the door-landing, they established communication with their home.
One month later, they celebrated the third anniversary of their arrival on Lincoln Island.
One month later, they celebrated the third anniversary of their arrival on Lincoln Island.
CHAPTER LVI.
AFTER THREE YEARS—THE QUESTION OF A NEW SHIP—ITS DETERMINATION—PROSPERITY OF THE COLONY—THE SHIPYARD—THE COLD WEATHER—PENCROFF RESIGNED—WASHING—MOUNT FRANKLIN.
AFTER THREE YEARS—THE QUESTION OF A NEW SHIP—ITS DETERMINATION—PROSPERITY OF THE COLONY—THE SHIPYARD—THE COLD WEATHER—PENCROFF RESIGNED—WASHING—MOUNT FRANKLIN.
Three years had passed since the prisoners had fled from Richmond, and in all that time their conversation and their thoughts had been of the fatherland.
Three years had gone by since the prisoners escaped from Richmond, and during that whole time, their conversations and thoughts had been focused on their homeland.
They had no doubt that the war was ended, and that the North had triumphed. But how? At what cost? What friends had fallen in the struggle? They often talked of these things, although they had no knowledge when they would be able to see that country again. To return, if only for a few days; to renew their intercourse with civilization; to establish a communication between their island and the mother country, and then to spend the greater part of their lives in this colony which they had founded and which would then be raised to a metropolis, was this a dream which could not be realized?
They were sure that the war was over and that the North had won. But how? At what cost? Which friends had been lost in the fight? They often discussed these things, even though they had no idea when they would be able to visit that land again. To go back, even for just a few days; to reconnect with civilization; to establish a link between their island and the homeland, and then to spend most of their lives in this colony they had created—would this dream ever come true?
There were but two ways of realizing it: either a ship would some day show itself in the neighborhood of Lincoln Island, or the colonists must themselves build a vessel staunch enough to carry them to the nearest land.
There were only two ways to make it happen: either a ship would eventually appear near Lincoln Island, or the colonists would have to build a sturdy enough vessel to take them to the nearest land.
“Unless our genius furnishes us with the means of returning home,” said Pencroff.
“Unless our genius gives us a way to get back home,” said Pencroff.
And, indeed, if Neb and Pencroff had been told that a 300-ton ship was waiting for them in Shark Gulf or Balloon Harbor, they would not have manifested any surprise. In their present condition they expected every thing.
And, in fact, if Neb and Pencroff had been told that a 300-ton ship was waiting for them in Shark Gulf or Balloon Harbor, they wouldn’t have shown any surprise. Given their current situation, they were ready for anything.
But Smith, less confident, urged them to keep to realities, and to build the vessel, whose need was urgent, since a paper should be placed on Tabor Island as soon as possible, in order to indicate the new abode of Ayrton.
But Smith, feeling less sure of himself, urged them to focus on the essentials and to construct the vessel, which was urgently needed, as a paper should be put on Tabor Island as soon as possible to indicate Ayrton's new home.
The Good Luck was gone. It would take at least six mouths to build another vessel, and, as winter was approaching, the voyage could not be made before the next spring.
The Good Luck was gone. It would take at least six months to build another ship, and with winter coming, the journey couldn’t happen until next spring.
“We have time to prepare ourself for the fine weather,” said the engineer, talking of these things with Pencroff. “I think, therefore, since we have to build our own ship, it will be better to make her dimensions greater than before. The arrival of the
“We have time to get ready for the good weather,” said the engineer, discussing this with Pencroff. “I think, since we need to build our own ship, it would be better to make her bigger than before. The arrival of the
Scotch yacht is uncertain. It may even have happened that it has come and gone. What do you think? Would it not be better to build a vessel, that, in case of need, could carry us to the archipelagoes or New Zealand?”
Scotch yacht is uncertain. It might even have happened that it has come and gone. What do you think? Wouldn’t it be better to build a ship that, if needed, could take us to the archipelagos or New Zealand?
“I think, sir, that you are as able to build a large vessel as a small one. Neither wood nor tools are wanting. It is only a question of time.”
“I believe, sir, that you are just as capable of building a large ship as you are a small one. You have all the wood and tools you need. It’s just a matter of time.”
“And how long would it take to build a ship of 250 or 300 tons?”
“And how long would it take to build a ship that weighs 250 or 300 tons?”
“Seven or eight months at least. But we must not forget that winter is at hand, and that the timber will be difficult to work during the severe cold. So, allowing for some weeks’ delay, you can be happy if you have your ship by next November.”
“Seven or eight months at least. But we can’t forget that winter is coming, and the wood will be hard to work with during the severe cold. So, considering a few weeks of delay, you can be glad if you have your ship by next November.”
“Very well, that will be just the season to undertake a voyage of some length, be it to Tabor Island of further.”
“Alright, that will be the perfect time to go on a longer journey, whether it's to Tabor Island or beyond.”
“All right, Mr. Smith, make your plans. The workmen are ready, and I guess that Ayrton will lend a helping hand.”
“All right, Mr. Smith, go ahead and make your plans. The workers are ready, and I think Ayrton will pitch in to help.”
The engineer’s project met the approval of the colonists, and indeed it was the best thing to do. It is true that it was a great undertaking, but they had that confidence in themselves, which is one of the elements of success.
The engineer’s project got the thumbs up from the colonists, and honestly, it was the best choice. It's true that it was a huge task, but they had that self-confidence, which is one of the keys to success.
While Smith was busy preparing the plans of the vessel, the others occupied themselves in felling the trees and preparing the timber. The forests of the Far West furnished the best oak and elm, which were carried over the new road through the forest to the Chimneys, where the ship-yard was established.
While Smith was busy getting the ship plans ready, the others focused on cutting down trees and prepping the wood. The forests of the Far West provided the best oak and elm, which were transported along the new road through the forest to the Chimneys, where the shipyard was set up.
It was important that the timber should be cut soon, as it was necessary to have it seasoning for some time. Therefore the workmen worked vigorously during April, which was not an inclement month, save for some violent wind storms. Jup helped them by his adroitness, either in climbing to the top of a tree to fasten a rope, or by carrying loads on his strong shoulders.
It was important to cut the timber soon, as it needed time to season. So the workers put in a lot of effort during April, which wasn’t a bad month, except for some strong windstorms. Jup assisted them with his skill, whether it was climbing to the top of a tree to tie a rope or carrying heavy loads on his strong shoulders.
The timber was piled under a huge shed to await its use; and, meanwhile, the work in the fields was pushed forward, so that soon all traces of the devastation caused by the pirates had disappeared. The mill was rebuilt, and a new inclosure for the poultry yard. This had to be much larger than the former, as the number of its occupants had increased largely. The stables contained five onagas, four of them well broken, and one little colt. A plough had been added to the stock of the colony, and the onagas were employed in tillage as if they were Yorkshire or Kentucky cattle. All the colonists did their share, and there were no idle hands. And thus, with good health and spirits, they formed a thousand projects for the future.
The timber was stacked under a big shed, waiting to be used; in the meantime, work in the fields continued, so that soon all signs of the damage caused by the pirates were gone. The mill was rebuilt, and there was a new enclosure for the poultry yard. This had to be much bigger than the last one since the number of residents had grown significantly. The stables held five onagas, four of which were well-trained, and one young colt. A plow was added to the colony's equipment, and the onagas were used for farming just like they would be in Yorkshire or Kentucky. Everyone in the colony contributed, and there were no lazy hands. And so, with good health and positive vibes, they came up with a thousand plans for the future.
Ayrton, of course, partook of the common existence, and spoke no longer of returning to the corral. Nevertheless, he was always quiet and uncommunicative, and shared more in the work than the pleasure of his companions. He was a strong workman, vigorous, adroit, intelligent, and he could not fail to see that he was esteemed and loved by the others. But the corral was not abandoned. Every other day some one went there and brought back the supply of milk for the colony, and these occasions were also hunting excursions. So that, Herbert and Spilett, with Top in advance, oftenest made the journey, and all kinds of game abounded in the kitchen of Granite House. The products of the warren and the oyster-bed, some turtles, a haul of excellent salmon, the vegetables from the plateau, the natural fruits of the forest, were riches upon riches, and Neb, the chief cook, found it difficult to store them all away.
Ayrton, of course, lived the ordinary life and stopped talking about going back to the corral. Still, he was always quiet and not very talkative, contributing more to the work than enjoying time with his friends. He was a strong worker—energetic, skilled, and smart—and he couldn’t help but notice that the others respected and cared for him. However, the corral wasn’t forgotten. Every other day, someone would go there and bring back milk for the colony, and those trips often turned into hunting adventures. So, Herbert and Spilett, with Top leading the way, made the journey most frequently, and all sorts of game ended up in the kitchen of Granite House. The bounty from the warren and the oyster bed, some turtles, a great catch of salmon, vegetables from the plateau, and the wild fruit from the forest were abundant treasures, and Neb, the head cook, struggled to store everything away.
The telegraph had been repaired, and was used whenever one of the party remained over night at the corral. But the island was secure now from any aggression—at least from men.
The telegraph was fixed and was used whenever one of the group stayed overnight at the corral. But the island was now safe from any attacks—at least from people.
Nevertheless, what had happened once might happen again, and a descent of pirates was always to be feared. And it was possible that accomplices of Harvey, still in Norfolk, might be privy to his projects and seek to imitate them. Every day the colonists searched the horizon visible from Granite House with the glass, and whenever they were at the corral they examined the west coast. Nothing appeared, but they were always on the alert.
Nevertheless, what had happened before could happen again, and a pirate invasion was always a real threat. It was possible that Harvey's accomplices, still in Norfolk, might know about his plans and try to copy them. Every day, the colonists scanned the horizon from Granite House with a telescope, and whenever they were at the corral, they checked the west coast. Nothing showed up, but they remained vigilant.
One evening the engineer told his companions of a project to fortify the corral. It seemed prudent to heighten the palisade, and to flank it with a sort of block house, in which the colonists could defend themselves against a host of enemies. Granite House, owing to its position, was impregnable, and the corral would always be the objective point of pirates.
One evening, the engineer shared with his companions a plan to strengthen the corral. It made sense to raise the palisade and add a kind of blockhouse, where the colonists could protect themselves from a large group of enemies. Granite House, because of its location, was invulnerable, and the corral would always be a target for pirates.
About the 15th of May the keel of the new vessel was laid, and the stem and stern posts raised. This keel was of oak, 110 feet long, and the breadth of beam was 25 feet. But, with the exception of putting up a couple of the frame pieces, this was all that could be done before the bad weather and the cold set in.
About May 15th, they laid the keel of the new ship and raised the stem and stern posts. The keel was made of oak, 110 feet long, and the beam was 25 feet wide. However, aside from installing a few of the frame pieces, this was all that could be accomplished before the bad weather and cold arrived.
During the latter part of the month the weather was very inclement. Pencroff and Ayrton worked as long as they were able, but severely cold weather following the rain made the wood impossible to handle, and by the 10th of June the work was given up entirely, and the colonists were often obliged to keep in-doors.
During the end of the month, the weather was really bad. Pencroff and Ayrton worked as long as they could, but the severe cold after the rain made it impossible to work with the wood. By June 10th, they completely stopped working, and the colonists often had to stay indoors.
This confinement was hard for all of them, but especially so for Spilett.
This confinement was tough for all of them, but it was especially difficult for Spilett.
“I’ll tell you what, Neb,” he said, “I will give you everything I own if you will get me a newspaper! All that I want to make me happy is to know what is going on in the world!”
“I’ll tell you what, Neb,” he said, “I’ll give you everything I own if you get me a newspaper! All I want to be happy is to know what’s happening in the world!”
Neb laughed.
Neb chuckled.
“Faith!” said he, “I am busy enough with my daily work.”
“Faith!” he said, “I’m already busy enough with my daily work.”
And, indeed, occupation was not wanting. The colony was at the summit of prosperity. The accident to the brig had been a new source of riches. Without counting a complete outfit of sails, which would answer for the new ship, utensils and tools of all sorts, ammunition, clothing, and instruments filled the store-rooms of Granite House. There was no longer a necessity to manufacture cloth in the felting mill. Linen, also, was plenty, and they took great care of it. From the chloride of sodium Smith had easily extracted soda and chlorine. The soda was easily transformed into carbonate of soda, and the chlorine was employed for various domestic purposes, but especially for cleaning the linen. Moreover, they made but four washings a year, as was the custom in old times, and Pencroff and Spilett, while waiting for the postman to bring the paper, made famous washermen!
And indeed, there was no shortage of work. The colony was thriving. The accident with the brig had brought a new wave of wealth. Besides a complete set of sails for the new ship, the storage rooms at Granite House were filled with utensils, tools, ammunition, clothing, and various instruments. There was no longer a need to produce cloth in the felting mill. Linen was also plentiful, and they took great care of it. Smith had easily extracted soda and chlorine from sodium chloride. The soda was easily turned into carbonate of soda, and the chlorine was used for different household tasks, especially cleaning the linen. Moreover, they only did laundry four times a year, as was the custom back in the day, and Pencroff and Spilett became well-known as laundrymen while waiting for the postman to deliver the newspaper!
Thus passed June, July, and August; very rigorous months, in which the thermometer measured but 8° Fahrenheit. But a good fire burned in the chimney of Granite House, and the superfluity of wood from the ship-yard enabled them to economize the coal, which required a longer carriage.
Thus passed June, July, and August; very harsh months, during which the thermometer read only 8° Fahrenheit. But a good fire burned in the chimney of Granite House, and the excess wood from the shipyard allowed them to save on coal, which needed a longer transport.
All, men and beasts, enjoyed good health. Jup, it is true, shivered a little with the cold, and they had to make him a good wadded wrapper. What servant he was! Adroit, zealous, indefatigable, not indiscreet, not talkative. He was, indeed, a model for his biped brethren in the New and the Old World!
All, humans and animals, enjoyed good health. Jupiter, it's true, shivered a bit from the cold, so they had to make him a nice warm wrap. What a servant he was! Skilled, eager, tireless, not indiscreet, not chatty. He was, truly, a role model for his fellow humans in both the New and the Old World!
“But, after all,” said Pencroff “when one has four hands, they cannot help doing their work well!”
“But, after all,” said Pencroff, “when you have four hands, you can't help but get the work done well!”
During the seven months that had passed since the exploration of the mountain nothing had been seen or heard of the genius of the island. Although, it is true, that nothing had happened to the colonists requiring his assistance.
During the seven months since the exploration of the mountain, no one had seen or heard anything from the island's genius. However, it's true that nothing had happened to the colonists that needed his help.
Smith noticed, too, that the growling of the dog and the anxiety of the orang had ceased during this time. These two friends no longer ran to the orifice of the well nor acted in that strange way which had attracted the attention of the engineer. But did this prove that everything had happened that was going to happen? That they were never to find an answer to the enigma? Could it be affirmed that no new conjunction of circumstances would make this mysterious personage appear again? Who knows what the future may bring forth?
Smith also noticed that the dog's growling and the orangutan's anxiety had stopped during this time. The two friends no longer rushed to the well's opening or behaved in that odd way that had caught the engineer's attention. But did this mean that everything that was going to happen had already happened? That they would never find an answer to the mystery? Could it be said that no new combination of circumstances would make this mysterious figure appear again? Who knows what the future might hold?
On the 7th of September, Smith, looking towards Mount Franklin, saw a smoke rising and curling above the crater.
On September 7th, Smith, looking toward Mount Franklin, saw smoke rising and curling above the crater.
CHAPTER LVII.
THE AWAKENING OF THE VOLCANO—THE FINE WEATHER—RESUMPTION OF WORK—THE EVENING OF THE 15TH OF OCTOBER—A TELEGRAPH—A DEMAND—AN ANSWER—DEPARTURE FOR THE CORRAL—THE NOTICE—THE EXTRA WIRE—THE BASALT WALL—AT HIGH TIDE—AT LOW TIDE—THE CAVERN—A DAZZLING LIGHT.
THE AWAKENING OF THE VOLCANO—THE GREAT WEATHER—RESUMPTION OF WORK—THE EVENING OF OCTOBER 15TH—A TELEGRAPH—A REQUEST—A RESPONSE—DEPARTURE FOR THE CORRAL—THE NOTICE—THE EXTRA WIRE—THE BASALT WALL—AT HIGH TIDE—AT LOW TIDE—THE CAVERN—A BLINDING LIGHT.
The colonists, called by Smith, had left their work, and gazed in silence at the summit of Mount Franklin.
The colonists, referred to by Smith, had paused their work and stared in silence at the peak of Mount Franklin.
The volcano had certainly awakened, and its vapors had penetrated the mineral matter of the crater, but no one could say whether the subterranean fires would bring on a violent eruption.
The volcano had definitely come to life, and its gases had seeped into the mineral content of the crater, but no one could tell if the underground fires would trigger a violent eruption.
But, even supposing an eruption, it was not likely that Lincoln Island would suffer in every part. The discharges of volcanic matter are not always disastrous. That the island had already been subjected to an eruption was evident from the currents of lava spread over the western slope of the mountain. Moreover, the shape of the crater was such as to vomit matter in the direction away from the fertile parts of the island.
But even if an eruption did happen, it was unlikely that Lincoln Island would be affected everywhere. Volcanic eruptions don't always lead to disaster. It was clear that the island had already experienced an eruption, given the lava flows covering the western slope of the mountain. Plus, the shape of the crater was such that it expelled material away from the island's fertile areas.
Nevertheless, what had been was no proof of what would be. Often the old craters of volcanoes close and new ones open. An earthquake phenomenon, often accompanying volcanic action, may do this by changing the interior arrangement of the mountain and opening new passages for the incandescent lavas.
Nevertheless, what has happened is no guarantee of what will happen. Often, old volcano craters close up and new ones form. An earthquake, which often occurs alongside volcanic activity, can cause this by altering the internal structure of the mountain and creating new paths for the molten lava.
Smith explained these things to his companions, and without exaggerating the situation, showed them just what might happen.
Smith explained these things to his friends, and without exaggerating the situation, showed them exactly what could happen.
After all, they could do nothing. Granite House did not seem to be menaced, unless by a severe earthquake. But all feared for the corral, if any new crater opened in the mountain.
After all, they couldn’t do anything. Granite House didn’t seem to be at risk, except from a major earthquake. But everyone was worried about the corral if any new crater opened up in the mountain.
From this time the vapor poured from the cone without cessation, and, indeed, increased in density and volume, although no flame penetrated its thick folds. The phenomenon was confined, as yet, to the lower part of the central chimney.
From this point on, the vapor flowed constantly from the cone, and in fact, it grew denser and larger, even though no flame could be seen through its thick layers. The phenomenon was still limited to the lower part of the central chimney.
Meanwhile, with good weather, the work out of doors had been resumed. They hastened the construction of the ship, and Smith established a saw-mill at the waterfall, which cut the timber much more rapidly.
Meanwhile, with nice weather, outdoor work had started up again. They sped up the construction of the ship, and Smith set up a sawmill at the waterfall, which processed the timber much faster.
Towards the end of September the frame of the ship, which was to be schooner-rigged, was so far completed that its shape could be recognized. The schooner, sheer forward and wide aft, was well adapted for a long voyage, in case of necessity, but the planking, lining, and decking still demanded a long time before they could be finished. Fortunately, the iron-work of the brig had been saved after the explosion, and Pencroff and Ayrton had obtained a great quantity of copper nails from the broken timber, which economized the labor for the smiths; nevertheless the carpenters had much to accomplish.
Towards the end of September, the frame of the ship, which was going to be rigged as a schooner, was mostly completed, and its shape could be recognized. The schooner, with a lifted bow and wide stern, was well-suited for a long journey if necessary, but the planking, lining, and decking still needed a lot of time before they could be finished. Fortunately, the iron work from the brig had been salvaged after the explosion, and Pencroff and Ayrton had gathered a large amount of copper nails from the damaged wood, which saved the blacksmiths some work; however, the carpenters still had a lot to do.
Often, however, after the day’s work was ended, the colonists sat late into the night, conversing together of the future and what might happen in a voyage in the schooner to the nearest land. But in discussing these projects they always planned to return to Lincoln Island. Never would they abandon this colony, established with so much difficulty, but so successfully, and which would receive a new development through communication with America.
Often, however, after the day's work was done, the colonists would sit late into the night, talking about the future and what might happen on a voyage in the schooner to the nearest land. But in discussing these plans, they always aimed to return to Lincoln Island. They would never abandon this colony, which had been established with so much effort, but so successfully, and which would receive new opportunities through communication with America.
Pencroff and Neb, indeed, hoped to end their days here.
Pencroff and Neb really hoped to spend the rest of their lives here.
“Herbert,” asked the sailor, “you would never abandon Lincoln Island?”
“Herbert,” the sailor asked, “you wouldn’t ever leave Lincoln Island, would you?”
“Never, Pencroff, especially if you made up your mind to remain.”
“Never, Pencroff, especially if you’ve decided to stay.”
“Then, it’s agreed, my boy. I shall expect you! You will bring your wife and children here, and I will make a jolly playmate for the babies!”
“Then it's settled, my boy. I'll be looking forward to it! You will bring your wife and kids here, and I'll make a fun playmate for the little ones!”
“Agreed,” answered Herbert, laughing and blushing at the same time.
“Agreed,” replied Herbert, laughing and blushing at the same time.
“And you, Mr. Smith,” continued the sailor, enthusiastically, “you will always remain governor of the island! And, by the way, how many inhabitants can the island support? Ten thousand, at the very least!”
“And you, Mr. Smith,” the sailor went on eagerly, “you will always be the governor of the island! By the way, how many residents can the island hold? At least ten thousand!”
They chatted in this way, letting Pencroff indulge in his whims, and one thing leading to another, the reporter finished by founding the New Lincoln Herald!
They talked like this, allowing Pencroff to indulge in his whims, and one thing led to another, resulting in the reporter starting the New Lincoln Herald!
Thus it is with the spirit of man. The need of doing something permanent, something which will survive him, is the sign of his superiority over everything here below. It is that which has established and justifies his domination over the whole world.
Thus it is with the spirit of man. The desire to create something lasting, something that will outlive him, is a mark of his superiority over everything in this world. This is what has established and validates his control over the entire earth.
After all, who knows if Jup and Top had not their dream of the future?
After all, who knows if Jup and Top didn't have their dreams of the future?
Ayrton, silent, said to himself that he wanted to see Lord Glenarvan, and show him the change in himself.
Ayrton, quiet, told himself that he wanted to see Lord Glenarvan and show him how he had changed.
One evening, the 15th of October, the conversation was prolonged longer than usual. It was 9 o’clock, and already, long, ill-concealed yawns showed that it was bed-time. Pencroff was about starting in that direction, when, suddenly, the electric bell in the hall rang.
One evening, October 15th, the conversation went on longer than usual. It was 9 o’clock, and long, obvious yawns were showing that it was time for bed. Pencroff was about to head that way when, suddenly, the electric bell in the hall rang.
Every one was present, so none of their party could be at the corral.
Everyone was there, so none of their group could be at the corral.
Smith rose. His companions looked as if they had not heard aright.
Smith stood up. His friends looked as if they couldn't believe what they just heard.
“What does he want?” cried Neb. “Is it the devil that’s ringing?”
“What does he want?” shouted Neb. “Is it the devil that's ringing?”
No one replied.
No one responded.
“It is stormy weather,” said Herbert; “perhaps the electric influence——”
“It’s stormy out,” said Herbert; “maybe the electric influence——”
Herbert did not finish the sentence. The engineer, towards whom all were looking, shook his head.
Herbert didn’t finish his sentence. The engineer, whom everyone was looking at, shook his head.
“Wait a minute,” said Spilett. “If it is a signal, it will be repeated.”
“Hold on a second,” said Spilett. “If it’s a signal, it’s going to be repeated.”
“But what do you think it is?” asked Neb.
“But what do you think it is?” Neb asked.
“Perhaps it——”
“Maybe it——”
The sailor’s words were interrupted by another ring.
The sailor's words were cut off by another ring.
Smith went to the apparatus, and, turning on the current, telegraphed to the corral:——
Smith went to the equipment, and, turning on the power, sent a message to the corral:——
“What do you want?”
"What do you need?"
A few minutes later the needle, moving over the lettered card, gave this answer to the inmates of Granite House:—
A few minutes later, the needle moved over the lettered card and provided this response to the residents of Granite House:—
“Come to the corral as quickly as possible.”
“Come to the corral as fast as you can.”
“At last!” cried Smith.
"Finally!" exclaimed Smith.
Yes! At last! The mystery was about to be solved! Before the strong interest in what was at the corral, all fatigue and need of repose vanished. Without saying a word, in a few minutes they were out of Granite House and following the shore. Only Top and Jup remained behind.
Yes! Finally! The mystery was about to be solved! With the strong curiosity about what was at the corral, all fatigue and need for rest disappeared. Without saying a word, in just a few minutes they were out of Granite House and walking along the shore. Only Top and Jup stayed behind.
The night was dark. The moon, new this day, had set with the sun. Heavy clouds obscured the stars, but now and then heat-lightning, the reflection of a distant storm, illuminated the horizon.
The night was dark. The new moon had already set with the sun. Thick clouds hid the stars, but occasionally, heat lightning from a distant storm flashed across the horizon.
But, great as the darkness was, it could not hinder persons as familiar with the route as were the colonists. All were very much excited, and walked rapidly. There could be no doubt that they were going to find the answer to the engineer, the name of that mysterious being, who was so generous in his influence, so powerful to accomplish! It could not be doubted that this unknown had been familiar with the least detail of their daily lives, that he overheard all that was said in Granite House.
But, as great as the darkness was, it couldn't stop people who knew the route as well as the colonists did. Everyone was really excited and walked quickly. There was no doubt they were on their way to uncover the identity of the engineer, the name of that mysterious figure who was so generous with his influence and so capable of making things happen! It was clear that this unknown person was well-acquainted with even the smallest details of their daily lives and that he listened to everything said in Granite House.
Each one, lost in his reflections, hurried onward. The darkness under the trees was such that the route was invisible. There was no sound in the forest. Not a breath of wind moved the leaves.
Each person, caught up in their thoughts, rushed forward. The darkness beneath the trees was so thick that the path was unseen. The forest was silent. Not even a gust of wind stirred the leaves.
This silence during the first quarter of an hour was uninterrupted, save by Pencroff, who said:——
This silence lasted for the first fifteen minutes without interruption, except for Pencroff, who said:——
“We should have brought a lantern.”
“We should have brought a flashlight.”
And by the engineer’s answer:——
And by the engineer’s response:——
“We will find one at the corral.”
“We'll find one at the corral.”
Smith and his companions had left Granite House at twelve minutes past 9. In thirty-five minutes they had traversed three of the five miles between the mouth of the Mercy and the corral.
Smith and his friends had left Granite House at 9:12. In thirty-five minutes, they had covered three of the five miles between the mouth of the Mercy and the corral.
Just then, brilliant flashes of lightning threw the foliage into strong relief. The storm was evidently about to burst upon them. The flashes became more frequent and intense. Heavy thunder rolled through the heavens. The air was stifling.
Just then, bright flashes of lightning illuminated the trees sharply. The storm was clearly about to hit them. The flashes grew more frequent and intense. Loud thunder rumbled through the sky. The air was suffocating.
The colonists rushed on, as if impelled by some irresistible force.
The colonists hurried forward, as if driven by some unstoppable force.
At a quarter past 9, a sudden flash showed them the outline of the palisade; and scarcely had they passed the gateway when there came a terrible clap of thunder. In a moment the corral was crossed, and Smith stood before the house. It was possible that the unknown being was here, since it was from this place that the telegraph had come. Nevertheless, there was no light in the window.
At 9:15, a sudden flash revealed the outline of the fence, and barely had they gone through the gate when a loud clap of thunder boomed. In an instant, they crossed the yard, and Smith stood in front of the house. It was possible that the unknown figure was here, since the telegraph had come from this place. Still, there was no light in the window.
The engineer knocked at the door, but without response.
The engineer knocked on the door, but there was no response.
He opened it, and the colonists entered the room, which was in utter darkness.
He opened it, and the colonists walked into the room, which was completely dark.
A light was struck by Neb, and in a moment the lantern was lit, and its light directed into every corner of the chamber.
A light was ignited by Neb, and soon the lantern was glowing, casting its light into every corner of the room.
No one was there, and everything remained undisturbed.
No one was there, and everything stayed untouched.
“Are we victims to a delusion?” murmured Smith.
“Are we victims of a delusion?” Smith whispered.
No! that was impossible! The telegraph had certainly said:——
No! That was impossible! The telegraph definitely said:——
“Come to the corral quickly as possible.”
“Come to the corral as quick as you can.”
He went to the table on which the apparatus was arranged. Everything was in place and in order.
He walked over to the table where the equipment was set up. Everything was ready and organized.
“Who was here last?” asked the engineer.
“Who was here last?” asked the engineer.
“I, sir,” answered Ayrton.
“I, sir,” replied Ayrton.
“And that was——”
“And that was—”
“Four days ago.”
“Four days ago.”
“Ah! here is something!” exclaimed Herbert, pointing to a paper lying on the table.
“Ah! Here’s something!” exclaimed Herbert, pointing to a paper on the table.
On the paper were these words, written in English:——
On the paper were these words, written in English:——
“Follow the new wire.”
“Follow the new cable.”
“Come on!” cried Smith, who comprehended in a moment that the dispatch had not been sent from the corral, but from the mysterious abode which the new wire united directly with Granite House.
“Come on!” shouted Smith, who quickly realized that the message hadn’t been sent from the corral, but from the mysterious place that the new wire connected directly to Granite House.
Neb took the lantern and all left the corral.
Neb grabbed the lantern and everyone left the corral.
Then the storm broke forth with extreme violence. Flashes of lightning and peals of thunder followed in rapid succession. The island was the centre of the storm. By the flashes of lightning they could see the summit of Mount Franklin enshrouded in smoke.
Then the storm erupted with incredible force. Lightning flashed and thunder rumbled one after the other. The island was at the heart of the storm. In the lightning strikes, they could see the peak of Mount Franklin wrapped in smoke.
There were no telegraph poles inside the corral, but the engineer, having passed the gate, ran to the nearest post, and saw there a new wire fastened to the insulator, and reaching to the ground.
There were no telegraph poles inside the corral, but the engineer, after passing through the gate, ran to the nearest post and saw a new wire attached to the insulator, reaching down to the ground.
“Here it is!” he cried.
“Here it is!” he shouted.
The wire lay along the ground, and was covered with some insulating substance, like the submarine cables. By its direction it seemed as if it went towards the west, across the woods, and the southern spurs of the mountain.
The wire lay on the ground, covered with some kind of insulating material, like the underwater cables. Judging by its direction, it looked like it stretched westward, across the woods and the southern foothills of the mountain.
“Let us follow it,” said Smith.
“Let’s check it out,” said Smith.
And sometimes by the light of the lantern, sometimes by the illumination of the heavens, the colonists followed the way indicated by the thread.
And sometimes by the lantern light, sometimes by the light of the stars, the colonists followed the path shown by the thread.
They crossed in the first place, the spur of the mountain between the valley of the corral and that of Fall River, which stream was crossed in its narrowest part. The wire, sometimes hanging on the lower branches of the trees, sometimes trailing along the ground, was a sure guide.
They first crossed the mountain ridge between the corral valley and Fall River valley, which stream was crossed at its narrowest point. The wire, sometimes hanging from the lower branches of the trees and other times trailing on the ground, was a reliable guide.
The engineer had thought that, perhaps, the wire would end at the bottom of the valley, and that the unknown retreat was there.
The engineer wondered if the wire might end at the bottom of the valley, and if the unknown retreat was located there.
But not so. It extended over the southwestern spur and descended to the arid plateau which ended that fantastic wall of basalt. Every now and then one or other of the party stooped and took the direction of the wire. There could be no doubt that it ran directly to the sea. There, doubtless, in some profound chasm in the igneous rocks, was the dwelling so vainly sought for until now.
But that wasn't the case. It stretched over the southwestern ridge and sloped down to the dry plateau that marked the end of that amazing wall of basalt. Every now and then, one of the group would bend down and check the direction of the wire. There was no doubt it led straight to the sea. There, no doubt, in some deep crevice in the volcanic rocks, was the home that had been so desperately searched for until now.
At a few minutes before 10, the colonists arrived upon the high coast overhanging the ocean. Here the wire wound among the rocks, following a steep slope down a narrow ravine.
At a few minutes before 10, the colonists arrived at the high coast overlooking the ocean. Here, the wire twisted among the rocks, following a steep slope down a narrow ravine.
The colonists followed it, at the risk of bringing down upon themselves a shower of rocks or of being precipitated into the sea. The descent was extremely perilous, but they thought not of the danger; they were attracted to this mysterious place as the needle is drawn to the magnet.
The colonists pursued it, risking a shower of rocks or a fall into the sea. The descent was very dangerous, but they didn't think about the risk; they were drawn to this mysterious place like a needle is attracted to a magnet.
At length, the wire making a sudden turn, touched the shore rocks, which were beaten by the sea. The colonists had reached the base of the granite wall.
At last, the wire made a sudden turn and touched the shore rocks, which were battered by the sea. The colonists had arrived at the base of the granite wall.
Here there was a narrow projection running parallel and horizontal to the sea. The thread led along this point, and the colonists followed. They had not proceeded more than a hundred paces, when this projection, by a south inclination, sloped down into the water.
Here, there was a narrow ledge running parallel and horizontal to the sea. The path extended along this point, and the colonists followed it. They had not gone more than a hundred steps when this ledge sloped down into the water at a southern angle.
The engineer seized the wire and saw that it led down into the sea.
The engineer grabbed the wire and noticed that it extended down into the ocean.
His companions stood, stupefied, beside him.
His friends stood, stunned, next to him.
Then a cry of disappointment, almost of despair, escaped them! Must they throw themselves into the water and search some submarine cavern? In their present state of excitement, they would not have hesitated to have done it.
Then a cry of disappointment, almost despair, escaped them! Did they have to jump into the water and search some underwater cave? In their current state of excitement, they wouldn't have hesitated to do it.
An observation made by the engineer stopped them. He led his companions to the shelter of a pile of rocks and said:——
An observation made by the engineer stopped them. He led his companions to the shelter of a pile of rocks and said:——
“Let as wait here. The tide is up. At low water the road will be open.”
“Let’s wait here. The tide is up. The road will be clear at low tide.”
“But how do you think—” began Pencroff.
“But how do you think—” began Pencroff.
“He would not have called us, unless the means of reaching him had been provided.”
“He wouldn’t have called us unless there was a way to reach him.”
Smith had spoken with an air of conviction, and, moreover, his observation was logical. It was, indeed, quite possible that an opening existed at low water which was covered at present.
Smith had spoken with confidence, and his point was logical. It was, in fact, quite possible that there was an opening at low tide that was currently covered.
It was necessary to wait some hours. The colonists rested in silence under their shelter. The rain began to fall in torrents. The echoes repeated the roaring of the thunder in sonorous reverberations.
It was necessary to wait a few hours. The colonists rested quietly under their shelter. The rain started to pour down heavily. The echoes carried the thunder's roar in deep reverberations.
At midnight the engineer took the lantern and went down to the water’s edge. It was still two hours before low tide.
At midnight, the engineer grabbed the lantern and went down to the water's edge. There were still two hours left until low tide.
Smith had not been mistaken. The entrance to a vast excavation began to be visible, and the wire, turning at a right angle, entered this yawning mouth.
Smith was right. The entrance to a huge excavation came into view, and the wire, making a right turn, went into this gaping opening.
Smith returned to his companions and said:——
Smith returned to his friends and said:——
“In an hour the opening will be accessible.”
“In an hour, the opening will be available.”
“Then there is one,” said Pencroff.
“Then there's one,” said Pencroff.
“Do you doubt it?” replied Smith.
“Do you really doubt it?” replied Smith.
“But it will be half full of water,” said Herbert.
“But it will be half full of water,” Herbert said.
“Either it will be perfectly dry,” answered the engineer, “in which case we will walk, or it will not be dry, and some means of transport will be furnished us.”
“Either it will be completely dry,” replied the engineer, “in which case we’ll walk, or it won’t be dry, and we'll have some form of transport provided for us.”
An hour passed. All went down through the rain to the sea. In these hours the tide had fallen fifteen feet. The top of the mouth of the opening rose eight feet above the water, like the arch of a bridge.
An hour went by. Everything moved through the rain to the sea. During that time, the tide dropped fifteen feet. The top of the opening rose eight feet above the water, similar to the arch of a bridge.
Looking in, the engineer saw a black object floating on the surface. He drew it toward him. It was a canoe made of sheet-iron bolted together. It was tied to a projecting rock inside the cavern wall. A pair of oars were under the seats.
Looking in, the engineer saw a black object floating on the surface. He pulled it closer. It was a canoe made of sheet metal bolted together. It was tied to a jutting rock inside the cave wall. A pair of oars was tucked under the seats.
“Get in,” said Smith.
"Hop in," said Smith.
The colonists entered the boat, Neb and Ayrton took the oars, Pencroff the tiller, and Smith, in the bows holding the lantern, lit the way.
The colonists got into the boat, Neb and Ayrton grabbed the oars, Pencroff took control of the tiller, and Smith, at the front holding the lantern, lit the way.
The vault, at first very low, rose suddenly; but the darkness was too great for them to recognize the size of this cavern, its heighth and depth. An imposing silence reigned throughout this granite chamber. No sound, not even the pealing of the thunder penetrated its massive walls.
The vault, which started out very low, suddenly rose; but it was too dark for them to see the size of this cavern, its height and depth. A heavy silence filled this granite chamber. No sound, not even the rumble of thunder, reached its thick walls.
In certain parts of the world there are immense caves, a sort of natural crypts which date back to the geologic epoch. Some are invaded by the sea; others contain large lakes within their walls. Such is Fingal’s Cave, in the Island of Staffa; such are the caves of Morgat on the Bay of Douarnenez in Brittany; the caves of Bonifacio, in Corsica; those of Lyse-Fjord, in Norway; such is that immense cavern, the Mammoth Cave of Kentucky, which is 500 feet high and more than twenty miles long!
In some parts of the world, there are huge caves that act as natural crypts from a geological period long ago. Some are filled with ocean water, while others have large lakes inside. A good example is Fingal’s Cave on the Island of Staffa; another is the Morgat caves on the Bay of Douarnenez in Brittany; then there are the caves of Bonifacio in Corsica and those at Lyse-Fjord in Norway; and let’s not forget the massive Mammoth Cave in Kentucky, which is 500 feet high and more than twenty miles long!
As to this cavern which the colonists were exploring, did it not reach to the very centre of the island? For a quarter of an hour the canoe advanced under the directions of the engineer. At a certain moment he said:——
As for this cave the colonists were exploring, didn't it lead right to the center of the island? For about fifteen minutes, the canoe moved forward under the engineer's guidance. At one point, he said:——
“Go over to the right.”
“Move to the right.”
The canoe, taking this direction, brought up beside the wall. The engineer wished to observe whether the wire continued along this side.
The canoe, heading this way, came up next to the wall. The engineer wanted to check if the wire ran along this side.
It was there fastened to the rock.
It was secured to the rock.
“Forward!” said Smith.
“Move forward!” said Smith.
The canoe kept on a quarter of an hour longer, and it must have been half a mile from the entrance, when Smith’s voice was heard again.
The canoe went on for another fifteen minutes, and it was probably half a mile from the entrance when Smith's voice was heard again.
“Halt!” he exclaimed.
"Stop!" he exclaimed.
The canoe stopped, and the colonists saw a brilliant light illuminating the enormous crypt, so profoundly hidden in the bowels of the earth.
The canoe came to a halt, and the colonists spotted a bright light shining in the massive crypt, buried deep within the earth.
They were now enabled to examine this cavern of whose existence they had had no suspicion.
They were now able to explore this cave that they hadn't even suspected existed.
A vault, supported on basaltic shafts, which might all have been cast in the same mould, rose to a height of 100 feet. Fantastic arches sprung at irregular intervals from these columns, which Nature had placed here by thousands. They rose to a height of forty or fifty feet, and the water, in despite of the tumult without, quietly lapped their base. The light noticed by the engineer seized upon each prismatic point and tipped it with fire; penetrated, so to speak, the walls as if they had been diaphanous, and changed into sparkling jewels the least projections of the cavern.
A vault, supported by basalt columns that all seemed to have been made from the same mold, reached a height of 100 feet. Amazing arches sprang up at random intervals from these columns, placed here by Nature in their thousands. They rose to about forty or fifty feet, and despite the chaos outside, the water gently lapped at their base. The light noticed by the engineer caught each prismatic point and illuminated it; it seemed to penetrate the walls as if they were sheer, transforming even the slightest protrusions of the cavern into sparkling jewels.
Following a phenomenon of reflection, the water reproduced these different lights upon its surface, so that the canoe seemed to float between two sparkling zones.
Following a reflective phenomenon, the water created these different lights on its surface, making it look like the canoe was floating between two sparkling areas.
They had not yet thought of the nature of irradiation projected by the luminous centre whose rays, straight and clear, were broken on all the angles and mouldings of the crypt. The white color of this light betrayed its origin. It was electric. It was the sun of this cavern.
They hadn’t yet considered the type of radiation coming from the bright center, whose straight and clear rays were reflected off all the angles and shapes of the crypt. The white color of this light revealed its source. It was electric. It was the sun of this cave.
On a sign from Smith, the oars fell again into the water, and the canoe proceeded towards the luminous fire, which was half a cable’s length distant.
On a signal from Smith, the oars dipped back into the water, and the canoe moved towards the bright fire, which was about half a cable's length away.
In this place, the sheet of water measured some 300 feet across, and an enormous basaltic wall, closing all that side, was visible beyond the luminous centre. The cavern had become much enlarged, and the sea here formed a little lake. But the vault, the side walls, and those of the apsis, all the prisms, cylinders, cones, were bathed in the electric fluid.
In this spot, the body of water was about 300 feet wide, and a massive basalt wall, blocking that side, could be seen beyond the glowing center. The cavern had grown significantly, and the sea created a small lake here. But the ceiling, side walls, and those of the apse, along with all the prisms, cylinders, and cones, were illuminated by electric light.
In the centre of the lake a long fusiform object floated on the surface of the water, silent, motionless. The light escaped from its sides as from two ovens heated to a white heat. This machine, looking like the body of an enormous cetacea, was 250 feet long, and rose ten to twelve feet above the water.
In the middle of the lake, a long, streamlined object floated on the surface of the water, silent and still. Light shone from its sides like two ovens heated to a bright white. This machine, resembling the body of a massive whale, was 250 feet long and stood ten to twelve feet above the water.
The canoe approached softly. In the bows stood Smith. He was greatly excited. Suddenly he seized the arm of the reporter.
The canoe glided in quietly. In the front stood Smith. He was very excited. Suddenly, he grabbed the reporter's arm.
“It is he! It can be no other than he.” he cried. “He!——”
“It’s him! It has to be him.” he shouted. “He!——”
Then he fell back upon the seat murmuring a name which Spilett alone heard.
Then he leaned back in the seat, murmuring a name that only Spilett heard.
Doubtless the reporter knew this name, for it affected him strangely, and he answered in a hoarse voice:——
Doubtless the reporter knew this name, for it affected him strangely, and he answered in a hoarse voice:——
“He! a man outlawed!”
“Hey! A man on the run!”
“The same!” said Smith.
"Me too!" said Smith.
Under the engineer’s direction the canoe approached this singular floating machine, and came up to it on its left side, from which escaped a gleam of light through a thick glass.
Under the engineer's guidance, the canoe drew closer to this unique floating machine and pulled up to its left side, where a beam of light shone through a thick piece of glass.
Smith and his companions stepped on to the platform. An open hatchway was there, down which all descended.
Smith and his friends stepped onto the platform. An open hatch was there, down which everyone went.
At the bottom of the ladder appeared the waist of the vessel lit up by electric light. At the end of the waist was a door, which Smith pushed open.
At the bottom of the ladder was the waist of the vessel illuminated by electric light. At the end of the waist was a door, which Smith pushed open.
A richly ornamented library, flooded with light, was rapidly crossed by the colonists. Beyond, a large door, also closed, was pushed open by the engineer.
A beautifully decorated library, filled with light, was quickly passed through by the colonists. Ahead, a large door, also closed, was opened by the engineer.
A vast saloon, a sort of museum, in which were arranged all the treasures of the mineral world, works of art, marvels of industry, appeared before the eyes of the colonists, who seemed to be transported to the land of dreams.
A large lounge, almost like a museum, held all the treasures of the mineral world, art pieces, and incredible industrial creations, all laid out for the colonists, who looked as if they were taken to a dreamland.
Extended upon a rich divan they saw a man, who seemed unaware of their presence.
Extended on a plush couch, they saw a man who appeared oblivious to their presence.
Then Smith raised his voice, and, to the extreme surprise of his companions, pronounced these words:——
Then Smith raised his voice, and, to the great surprise of his friends, said these words:——
“Captain Nemo, you have called us. Here we are.’
"Captain Nemo, you called us. Here we are."
CHAPTER LVIII.
CAPTAIN NEMO—HIS FIRST WORDS—HISTORY OF A HERO OF LIBERTY—HATRED OF THE INVADERS—HIS COMPANIONS—THE LIFE UNDER WATER—ALONE—THE LAST REFUGE OF THE NAUTILUS—THE MYSTERIOUS GENIUS OF THE ISLAND.
CAPTAIN NEMO—HIS FIRST WORDS—THE STORY OF A HERO OF FREEDOM—HATRED FOR THE INVADERS—HIS COMPANIONS—LIFE UNDER WATER—ALONE—THE FINAL HAVEN OF THE NAUTILUS—THE MYSTERIOUS GENIUS OF THE ISLAND.
At these words the man arose, and the light shone full upon his face: a magnificent head, with abundance of hair thrown back from a high forehead, a white beard, and an expression of haughtiness.
At these words, the man stood up, and the light shone brightly on his face: a striking head, with a lot of hair swept back from a high forehead, a white beard, and an air of arrogance.
This man stood, resting one hand upon the divan, from which he had risen. One could see that a slow disease had broken him down, but his voice was still powerful, when he said in English, and in a tone of extreme surprise:——
This man stood, resting one hand on the couch he had just gotten up from. You could tell that a lingering illness had worn him down, but his voice remained strong as he said in English, and with a tone of intense surprise:——
“I have no name, sir!”
“I don’t have a name, sir!”
“I know you!” answered Smith.
"I know you!" replied Smith.
Captain Nemo looked at the engineer as if he would have annihilated him. Then, falling back upon the cushions, he murmured:——
Captain Nemo looked at the engineer like he wanted to destroy him. Then, sinking back into the cushions, he muttered:——
“After all, what does it matter; I am dying!”
“After all, what does it matter? I’m dying!”
Smith approached Captain Nemo, and Spilett took his hand, which was hot with fever. The others stood respectfully in a corner of the superb saloon, which was flooded with light.
Smith approached Captain Nemo, and Spilett took his hand, which was hot with fever. The others stood respectfully in a corner of the stunning lounge, which was filled with light.
Captain Nemo withdrew his hand, and signed to Smith and the reporter to be seated.
Captain Nemo pulled back his hand and gestured for Smith and the reporter to take a seat.
All looked at him with lively emotion. Here was the being whom they had called the “genius of the island,” the being whose intervention had been so efficacious, the benefactor to whom they owed so much. Before their eyes, here where Pencroff and Neb had expected to find some godlike creature, was only a man-a dying man!
All of them looked at him with intense emotion. Here was the person they had called the “genius of the island,” the one whose help had been so effective, the benefactor to whom they owed so much. Right before their eyes, where Pencroff and Neb had expected to see some godlike figure, was only a man—a dying man!
But how did Smith know Captain Nemo? Why had the latter sprung up on hearing that name pronounced?
But how did Smith know Captain Nemo? Why did he react so strongly upon hearing that name?
The Captain had taken his seat upon the divan, and, leaning upon his arm, he regarded the engineer, who was seated near him.
The Captain had taken his seat on the couch, and, leaning on his arm, he looked at the engineer, who was sitting nearby.
“You know the name I bore?” he asked.
“You know the name I had?” he asked.
“I know it as well as I know the name of this admirable submarine apparatus.”
“I know it as well as I know the name of this amazing submarine device.”
“The Nautilus,” said the Captain, with a half smile.
“The Nautilus,” said the Captain, with a half-smile.
“The Nautilus.”
“The Nautilus.”
“But do you know-do you know, who I am?”
“But do you know—do you know who I am?”
“I do.”
"I do."
“For thirty years I have had no communication with the inhabited world, for thirty years have I lived in the depths of the sea, the only place where I have found freedom! Who, now, has betrayed my secret?”
“For thirty years I haven’t communicated with the outside world, for thirty years I’ve lived in the depths of the sea, the only place where I’ve found freedom! Who, now, has betrayed my secret?”
“A man who never pledged you his word, Captain Nemo, one who, therefore, cannot be accused of betraying you.”
“A man who never promised you anything, Captain Nemo, one who, therefore, can't be accused of betraying you.”
“The Frenchman whom chance threw in my way?”
“The Frenchman who chance brought into my life?”
“The same.”
"Same here."
“Then this man and his companions did not perish in the maelstrom into which the Nautilus had been drawn?”
“Then this man and his friends didn't drown in the whirlpool that the Nautilus had been pulled into?”
“They did not, and there has appeared under the title of Twenty Thousand Leagues Under the Sea, a work which contains your history.”
“They didn’t, and a work titled Twenty Thousand Leagues Under the Sea has come out, which includes your story.”
“The history of but a few months of my life, sir,” answered the Captain, quickly.
“The history of just a few months of my life, sir,” the Captain replied quickly.
“True,” replied Smith, “but a few months of that strange life sufficed to make you known—”
“True,” replied Smith, “but a few months of that strange life was enough to make you known—”
“As a great criminal, doubtless,” said Captain Nemo, smiling disdainfully. “Yes, a revolutionist, a scourge to humanity.”
“As a great criminal, for sure,” said Captain Nemo, smiling dismissively. “Yeah, a revolutionary, a plague on humanity.”
The engineer did not answer.
The engineer didn't respond.
“Well, sir?”
"What's up, sir?"
“I am unable to judge Captain Nemo,” said Smith, “at least in what concerns his past life. I, like the world at large, am ignorant of the motives for this strange existence, and I am unable to judge of the effects without knowing the causes, but what I do know is that a beneficent hand has been constantly extended to us since our arrival here, that we owe everything to a being good, generous, and powerful, and that this being, powerful, generous, and good, is you, Captain Nemo!”
“I can’t judge Captain Nemo,” Smith said, “at least not when it comes to his past. Like everyone else, I don’t understand the reasons behind his unusual life, and I can’t evaluate the results without knowing the reasons, but what I do know is that a kind hand has always helped us since we got here, that we owe everything to someone good, generous, and strong, and that this person, strong, generous, and good, is you, Captain Nemo!”
“It is I,” answered the captain, quietly.
“It’s me,” the captain replied softly.
The engineer and the reporter had risen, the others had drawn near, and the gratitude which swelled their hearts would have sought expression in words and gesture, when Captain Nemo signed to them to be silent, and in a voice more moved, doubtless, than he wished:—
The engineer and the reporter had stood up, the others had come closer, and the gratitude that filled their hearts was ready to be expressed in words and gestures, when Captain Nemo motioned for them to be quiet, and in a voice that was probably more emotional than he intended said:—
“When you have heard me,” he said. And then, in a few short, clear sentences, he told them the history of his life.
“When you’ve heard me,” he said. Then, in a few brief, clear sentences, he shared the story of his life.
The history was brief. Nevertheless, it took all his remaining strength to finish it. It was evident that he struggled against an extreme feebleness. Many times Smith urged him to take some rest, but he shook his head, like one who knew that for him there would be no to-morrow, and when the reporter offered his services—
The history was brief. Still, it took all his remaining strength to get through it. It was clear that he was fighting against extreme weakness. Several times, Smith urged him to take a break, but he shook his head, like someone who understood that there would be no tomorrow for him, and when the reporter offered his help—
“They are useless,” he answered, “my hours are numbered.”
“They're pointless,” he replied, “my time is limited.”
Captain Nemo was an Indian prince, the Prince Dakkar, the son of the rajah of the then independent territory of Bundelkund, and nephew of the hero of India, Tippo Saib. His father sent him, when ten years old, to Europe, where he received a complete education; and it was the secret intention of the rajah to have his son able some day to engage in equal combat with those whom he considered as the oppressors of his country.
Captain Nemo was an Indian prince, Prince Dakkar, the son of the rajah of the then independent area of Bundelkund, and the nephew of India's hero, Tippo Saib. When he was ten years old, his father sent him to Europe, where he received a full education; the rajah secretly intended for his son to one day be able to fight on equal terms with those he saw as the oppressors of his country.
From ten years of age until he was thirty, the Prince Dakkar, with superior endowments, of high heart and courage, instructed himself in everything; pushing his investigations in science, literature, and art to the uttermost limits.
From the age of ten until he turned thirty, Prince Dakkar, with exceptional talents, a brave heart, and a lot of courage, taught himself everything; pushing his exploration of science, literature, and art to the very limits.
He travelled over all Europe. His birth and fortune made his company much sought after, but the seductions of the world possessed no charm for him. Young and handsome, he remained serious, gloomy, with an insatiable thirst for knowledge, with implacable anger fixed in his heart.
He traveled all over Europe. His background and wealth made him a desired companion, but the temptations of the world held no appeal for him. Young and good-looking, he stayed serious and moody, with an unquenchable thirst for knowledge and a deep-seated anger in his heart.
He hated. He hated the only country where he had never wished to set foot, the only nation whose advances he had refused: he hated England more and more as he admired her. This Indian summed up in his own person all the fierce hatred of the vanquished against the victor. The invader is always unable to find grace with the invaded. The son of one of those sovereigns whose submission to the United Kingdom was only nominal, the prince of the family of Tippo-Saib, educated in ideas of reclamation and vengeance, with a deep-seated love for his poetic country weighed down with the chains of England, wished never to place his foot on that land, to him accursed, that land to which India owed her subjection.
He hated. He hated the only country he had never wanted to visit, the only nation whose advances he had turned down: he hated England more and more as he admired her. This Indian embodied all the fierce resentment of the defeated toward the conqueror. The invader is always detested by the invaded. The son of one of those rulers whose submission to the United Kingdom was just a formality, the prince of the family of Tippo-Saib, raised with ideals of reclamation and revenge, filled with a profound love for his poetic homeland burdened by England's chains, vowed never to set foot on that cursed land, the land to which India owed its oppression.
The Prince Dakkar became an artist, with a lively appreciation of the marvels of art; a savant familiar with the sciences; a statesman educated in European courts. In the eyes of a superficial observer, he passed, perhaps, for one of those cosmopolites, curious after knowledge, but disdaining to use it; for one of those opulent travellers, high-spirited and platonic, who go all over the world and are of no one country.
The Prince Dakkar became an artist, with a vibrant appreciation for the wonders of art; a scholar knowledgeable in the sciences; a politician educated in European courts. To a casual observer, he might have seemed like one of those cosmopolitan types, eager for knowledge but unwilling to put it to use; one of those wealthy travelers, adventurous and idealistic, who roam the globe and belong to no single country.
It was not so. This artist, this savant, this man was Indian to the heart, Indian in his desire for vengeance, Indian in the hope which he cherished of being able some day to re-establish the rights of his country, of driving on the stranger, of making it independent.
It wasn’t like that. This artist, this genius, this man was Indian at heart, Indian in his desire for revenge, Indian in the hope he held onto of one day being able to restore his country’s rights, driving out the outsider, and making it independent.
He returned to Bundelkund in the year 1849. He married a noble Indian woman whose heart bled as his did at the woes of their country. He had two children whom he loved. But domestic happiness could not make him forget the servitude of India. He waited for an opportunity. At length it came.
He went back to Bundelkund in 1849. He married a noble Indian woman whose heart ached just like his at the suffering of their country. He had two children whom he loved. But his happiness at home couldn't make him forget India's oppression. He waited for a chance. Finally, it arrived.
The English yoke was pressed, perhaps, too heavily upon the Indian people. The Prince Dakkar became the mouthpiece of the malcontents. He instilled into their spirits all the hatred he felt against the strangers. He went over not only the independent portions of the Indian peninsula, but into those regions directly submitted to the English control. He recalled to them the grand days of Tippo-Saib, who died heroically at Seringapatam for the defense of his country.
The English yoke was placed, perhaps, too heavily on the Indian people. Prince Dakkar became the voice of the dissatisfied. He filled them with all the anger he felt towards the foreigners. He traveled not only through the independent parts of the Indian peninsula but also into areas directly under English control. He reminded them of the great days of Tippo-Saib, who heroically died at Seringapatam defending his country.
In 1857 the Sepoy mutiny broke forth. Prince Dakkar was its soul. He organized that immense uprising. He placed his talents and his wealth at the service of that cause. He gave himself; he fought in the first rank; he risked his life as the humblest of those heroes who had risen to free their country; he was wounded ten times in twenty battles, and was unable to find death when the last soldiers of independence fell before the English guns.
In 1857, the Sepoy mutiny erupted. Prince Dakkar was its driving force. He organized that massive uprising. He dedicated his skills and his wealth to the cause. He gave everything; he fought bravely at the front lines; he risked his life like the most humble of the heroes who had risen to liberate their country; he was wounded ten times in twenty battles and couldn't find death when the last soldiers of independence fell to the English guns.
Never had British rule in India been in such danger; and, had the Sepoys received the assistance from without which they had hoped for, Asia would not to-day, perhaps, be under the dominion of the United Kingdom.
Never has British rule in India been in such danger, and if the Sepoys had received the external support they hoped for, Asia might not be under the control of the United Kingdom today.
At that time the name of Prince Dakkar was there illustrious. He never hid himself, and he fought openly. A price was put upon his head, and although he was not delivered up by any traitor, his father, mother, wife, and children suffered for him before he knew of the dangers which they ran on his account.
At that time, the name of Prince Dakkar was renowned. He never hid himself and fought openly. A bounty was placed on his head, and even though no traitor delivered him up, his father, mother, wife, and children suffered for him before he realized the dangers they faced because of him.
Once again right fell before might. Civilization never goes backwards, and her laws are like those of necessity. The Sepoys were vanquished, and the country of the ancient rajahs fell again under the strict rule of England.
Once again, what is right was defeated by what is powerful. Civilization never regresses, and its laws are as unchangeable as necessity. The Sepoys were defeated, and the land of the ancient rajahs returned to the firm control of England.
Prince Dakkar, unable to die, returned again to his mountains in Bundelkund. There, thenceforward alone, he conceived an immense disgust against all who bore the name of man—a hatred and a horror of the civilized world—and wishing to fly from it, he collected the wreck of his fortune, gathered together twenty of his most faithful companions, and one day disappeared.
Prince Dakkar, unable to die, returned once more to his mountains in Bundelkund. There, from then on alone, he developed a deep disgust for everyone who called themselves human—a hatred and fear of the civilized world—and wanting to escape it, he gathered what was left of his fortune, assembled twenty of his most loyal companions, and one day vanished.
Where did Prince Dakkar seek for that independence which was refused him upon the inhabited earth? Under the waters, in the depths of the seas, where no one could follow him.
Where did Prince Dakkar look for the freedom that was denied to him on land? Beneath the waves, in the depths of the oceans, where no one could reach him.
From a man of war he became a man of science. On a desert island of the Pacific he established his workshops, and there he constructed a submarine ship after plans of his own. By means which will some day be known, he utilized electricity, that incommensurable force, for all the necessities of his apparatus as a motor, for lighting and for heat. The sea, with its infinite treasures, its myriads of fishes, its harvests of varech and sargassum, its enormous mammifers, and not only all that nature held, but all that man had lost, amply sufficed for the needs of the Prince and his equipage;—and thus he accomplished his heart’s desire, to have no further communication with the earth. He named his submarine ship the Nautilus, he called himself Captain Nemo, and he disappeared under the seas.
From a warrior, he became a scientist. On a desert island in the Pacific, he set up his workshops and built a submarine based on his own designs. Using methods that will be understood someday, he harnessed electricity, that incredible force, for all the needs of his equipment as a motor, for lighting, and for heat. The ocean, with its endless treasures, countless fish, bounties of seaweed, its massive mammals, and not just what nature provided but everything humanity had lost, was more than enough for the Prince and his crew’s needs;—thus he fulfilled his deepest desire to cut off all communication with the land. He named his submarine the Nautilus, he called himself Captain Nemo, and he disappeared beneath the waves.
During many years, the Captain visited all the oceans, from one pole to the other. Pariah of the earth, he reaped the treasures of the unknown worlds. The millions lost in Vigo Bay, in 1702, by the Spanish galleons, furnished him with an inexhaustible mine of wealth, which he gave, anonymously, to people fighting for their independence.
Over the years, the Captain traveled across all the oceans, from one pole to the other. An outcast, he collected treasures from uncharted worlds. The millions that sank in Vigo Bay in 1702 with the Spanish galleons provided him with a never-ending source of wealth, which he gave anonymously to those fighting for their independence.
For years he had had no communication with his kindred, when, during the night of the 6th of November, 1866, three men were thrown upon his deck. They were a French professor, his servant, and a Canadian fisherman. These men had been thrown overboard by the shock of the collision between the Nautilus and the United States frigate Abraham Lincoln, which had given it chase.
For years he hadn’t communicated with his family when, on the night of November 6, 1866, three men were thrown onto his deck. They were a French professor, his servant, and a Canadian fisherman. These men had been thrown overboard by the impact of the collision between the Nautilus and the United States frigate Abraham Lincoln, which had been pursuing it.
Captain Nemo learned from the Professor that the Nautilus, sometimes taken for a gigantic mammifer of the cetacean family, sometimes for a submarine apparatus containing a gang of pirates, was hunted in every sea.
Captain Nemo learned from the Professor that the Nautilus, sometimes mistaken for a giant mammal from the cetacean family and other times for a submarine filled with pirates, was pursued in every ocean.
Captain Nemo could have thrown these three men, whom chance had thrown across his mysterious life, into the ocean. He did not do it, he kept them prisoners, and, during seven months, they were able to perceive all the marvels of a voyage of 20,000 leagues under the sea.
Captain Nemo could have thrown these three men, who fate had brought into his mysterious life, into the ocean. He didn’t do that; instead, he kept them captive, and for seven months, they were able to witness all the wonders of a journey of 20,000 leagues under the sea.
One day, the 22nd of June, 1867, these three men, who knew nothing of Captain Nemo’s past life, seized the boat belonging to the Nautilus and attempted to escape. But just then the Nautilus was upon the coast of Norway in the eddy of the Maelstrom, and the Captain believed that the fugitives, caught in its terrible vortex, had been swallowed up in the gulf. He was unaware that the Frenchman and his companions had been miraculously thrown upon the coast, that the fishermen of the Loffodin Islands had rescued them, and that the Professor, on his return to France, had published a book in which seven months of this strange and adventurous navigation was narrated.
One day, on June 22, 1867, three men who knew nothing about Captain Nemo’s past took the Nautilus’s boat and tried to escape. But at that moment, the Nautilus was off the coast of Norway, caught in the Maelstrom, and the Captain thought the escapees had been pulled into its deadly whirlpool. He didn’t know that the Frenchman and his friends had been miraculously cast ashore, rescued by the fishermen of the Loffodin Islands, and that the Professor, upon his return to France, had published a book detailing seven months of their strange and adventurous journey.
For a long time Captain Nemo continued this mode of life, traversing the sea. One by one his companions died and found their rest in the coral cemetery at the bottom of the Pacific, and in time Captain Nemo was the last survivor of those who had sought refuge in the depths of the oceans.
For a long time, Captain Nemo kept living this way, sailing the sea. One by one, his companions died and were laid to rest in the coral cemetery at the bottom of the Pacific. Eventually, Captain Nemo was the last survivor of those who had taken refuge in the depths of the oceans.
He was then sixty years old. As he was alone, it was necessary to take his Nautilus to one of those submarine ports which served him in former days as a harbor.
He was sixty years old at that time. Since he was alone, he needed to take his Nautilus to one of those underwater ports that had served him as a harbor in the past.
One of these ports was under Lincoln Island, and was the present asylum of the Nautilus. For six years the Captain had remained there awaiting that death which would reunite him with his companions, when chance made him witness to the fall of the balloon which carried the prisoners. Clothed in his impermeable jacket, he was walking under the water, some cables’ lengths from the shore of the islet, when the engineer was thrown into the sea. A good impulse moved Captain Nemo—and he saved Cyrus Smith.
One of these ports was beneath Lincoln Island, and it was the current hideout of the Nautilus. For six years, the Captain had stayed there waiting for the death that would reunite him with his friends, when by chance he saw the balloon carrying the prisoners fall. Wearing his waterproof jacket, he was walking underwater, a few cable lengths from the shore of the islet, when the engineer was thrown into the sea. A strong instinct drove Captain Nemo—and he saved Cyrus Smith.
On the arrival of these five castaways he wished to go from them, but his port of refuge was closed. Some volcanic action had raised up the basalt so that the Nautilus could not cross the entrance to the crypt, although there was still sufficient water for a boat of light draught.
On the arrival of these five castaways, he wanted to leave them, but his safe harbor was blocked. Some volcanic activity had lifted the basalt, preventing the Nautilus from crossing into the cove, although there was still enough water for a small boat.
Captain Nemo, therefore, remained and watched these men, thrown without resources upon a desert island, but he did not wish to be seen. Little by little, as he saw their honest, energetic lives, how they were bound together in fraternal amity, he interested himself in their efforts. In spite of himself, he found out all the secrets of their existence. Clothed in his impermeable jacket, he could easily reach the bottom of the well in Granite House, and climbing by the projections of the rock to its mouth, he heard the colonists talk of their past and discuss their present and future. He learned from them of the struggle of America against itself, for the abolition of slavery. Yes! these men were worthy to reconcile Captain Nemo with that humanity which they represented so honestly on the island.
Captain Nemo stayed and observed these men, stranded without resources on a deserted island, but he didn't want to be seen. Little by little, as he watched their honest, hardworking lives and how they supported each other like brothers, he became interested in their efforts. Despite himself, he uncovered all the secrets of their existence. Wearing his waterproof jacket, he could easily reach the bottom of the well in Granite House, and by climbing the rocky edges to the top, he listened as the colonists talked about their past and discussed their present and future. He learned from them about America's struggle with itself, fighting for the abolition of slavery. Yes! These men were worthy of reconciling Captain Nemo with the humanity they represented so genuinely on the island.
Captain Nemo had saved Smith. It was he who had led the dog to the Chimneys, who threw Top out of the water, who stranded the box of useful articles on Jetsam Point, who brought the canoe down the Mercy, who threw the cord from Granite House, when it was attacked by the monkeys, who made known the presence of Ayrton on Tabor Island by means of the paper inclosed in the bottle, who blew up the brig by means of a torpedo, who saved Herbert from certain death by bringing the quinine, who, finally, killed the convicts by those electric balls which he employed in his submarine hunting excursions. Thus was explained all those seemingly supernatural incidents, which, all of them, attested the generosity and the power of the Captain.
Captain Nemo had saved Smith. He was the one who led the dog to the Chimneys, who threw Top out of the water, who washed ashore the box of useful supplies at Jetsam Point, who brought the canoe down the Mercy, who threw the rope from Granite House when it was attacked by the monkeys, who revealed Ayrton's presence on Tabor Island through the paper enclosed in the bottle, who blew up the brig with a torpedo, who saved Herbert from certain death by bringing the quinine, and who ultimately eliminated the convicts using the electric balls he wielded during his underwater hunting trips. This explained all those seemingly supernatural events, which clearly demonstrated the Captain's generosity and power.
Nevertheless, this intense misanthrope thirsted to do good. He had some useful advice to give to his proteges, and moreover, feeling the approach of death, he had summoned, as we have seen, the colonists from Granite House, by means of the wire which reached from the corral to the Nautilus. Perhaps he would not have done it, had he thought that Smith knew enough of his history to call him by his name of Nemo.
Nevertheless, this intense misanthrope craved to do good. He had some valuable advice to share with his protégés, and additionally, sensing the approach of death, he had summoned, as we have seen, the colonists from Granite House, using the wire that connected the corral to the Nautilus. Maybe he wouldn’t have done it if he thought that Smith knew enough of his background to refer to him by his name, Nemo.
The Captain finished the recital of his life, and then Smith spoke. He recalled all the instances of the salutary influences exercised over the colonists, and then, in the name of his companions, and in his own, he thanked this generous being for all that he had done.
The Captain wrapped up sharing his life story, and then Smith spoke. He remembered all the ways this kind person had positively impacted the colonists, and then, on behalf of his fellow colonists and himself, he thanked this generous individual for everything he had done.
But Captain Nemo had never dreamed of asking any return for his services. One last thought agitated his spirit, and, before taking the hand which the engineer held out to him, he said:—
But Captain Nemo had never thought about asking for anything in return for his help. One final thought troubled his mind, and before taking the hand that the engineer extended to him, he said:—
“Now, sir, you know my life, judge of it!”
“Now, sir, you know my life, so judge for yourself!”
In speaking thus, the Captain evidently alluded to an incident of a serious nature which had been witnessed by the three strangers on the Nautilus—an incident which the French professor had necessarily recounted in his book, an incident whose very recital was terrible.
In saying this, the Captain clearly referred to a serious event that the three strangers on the Nautilus had seen—an event that the French professor had inevitably shared in his book, an event that was horrifying just to talk about.
In brief, some days before the flight of the professor and his companions, the Nautilus, pursued by a frigate in the North Atlantic, had rushed upon her like a battering-ram, and sunk her without mercy.
In short, a few days before the professor and his companions' flight, the Nautilus, chased by a frigate in the North Atlantic, charged at her like a battering ram and sank her without hesitation.
Smith, understanding this allusion, made no answer.
Smith, getting the reference, didn’t respond.
“It was an English frigate, sir!” cried Captain Nemo, becoming for the moment Prince Dakkar, “an English frigate, you understand! She attacked me! I was shut in, in a narrow and shallow bay; I had to pass out, and—I passed!”
“It was an English frigate, sir!” shouted Captain Nemo, momentarily taking on the persona of Prince Dakkar, “an English frigate, you get me! It attacked me! I was trapped in a narrow, shallow bay; I had to break out, and—I broke out!”
Then, speaking with more calmness:—
Then, speaking more calmly:—
“I had right and justice on my side,” he added. “I did good when I could, and evil when I must. All justice is not in forgiveness.”
“I had right and justice on my side,” he added. “I did good when I could, and I did what I had to do when it was necessary. Not all justice comes from forgiveness.”
Some moments of silence followed this response, and Captain Nemo asked again:—
Some moments of silence followed this response, and Captain Nemo asked again:—
“What do you think of me?”
“What do you think of me?”
Smith took the hand of the Captain, and answered him in a grave voice:—
Smith took the Captain's hand and replied in a serious tone:—
“Captain, your mistake has been in believing that you could bring back the old order of things, and you have struggled against necessary progress. It was one of those errors which some of us admire, others blame, but of which God alone can judge, and which the human mind exonerates. We can disagree with one who misleads himself in an intention which he believes laudable, and at the same time esteem him. Your error is of a kind which does not preclude admiration, and your name has nothing to fear from the judgment of history. She loves heroic follies, though she condemns the results which follow.”
“Captain, your mistake has been believing you could bring back the way things used to be, and you’ve fought against necessary progress. It’s one of those errors that some of us admire and others criticize, but only God can truly judge, and the human mind can forgive. We can disagree with someone who misleads themselves with a good intention and still respect them. Your mistake is the kind that doesn’t stop admiration, and your name has nothing to worry about from history’s judgment. History loves heroic mistakes, even if it condemns the outcomes that follow.”
The breast of Captain Nemo heaved; he raised his hand towards heaven.
The chest of Captain Nemo rose; he lifted his hand to the sky.
“Was I wrong, or was I right?” he murmured.
“Was I wrong, or was I right?” he whispered.
Smith continued:—
Smith continued:—
“All great actions return to God, from whom they came! Captain Nemo, the worthy men here, whom you have succored, will always weep for you!”
“All great actions lead back to God, who is their source! Captain Nemo, the honorable men here, whom you have helped, will always mourn for you!”
Herbert approached him. He knelt down and took the hand of the captain, and kissed it.
Herbert walked up to him. He knelt down, took the captain's hand, and kissed it.
A tear glistened in the eye of the dying man.
A tear shone in the eye of the dying man.
“My child,” he said, “bless you!”
“My child,” he said, “bless you!”
CHAPTER LIX.
THE LAST HOURS OF CAPTAIN NEMO—HIS DYING WISHES—A SOUVENIR FOR HIS FRIENDS—HIS TOMB—SOME COUNSEL TO THE COLONISTS—THE SUPREME MOMENT—AT THE BOTTOM OF THE SEA.
THE LAST HOURS OF CAPTAIN NEMO—HIS DYING WISHES—A SOUVENIR FOR HIS FRIENDS—HIS TOMB—SOME ADVICE TO THE COLONISTS—THE SUPREME MOMENT—AT THE BOTTOM OF THE SEA.
It was morning, though no ray of daylight penetrated the vault. The sea, at this moment high, covered the outlet. But the artificial light escaping in long rays from the sides of the Nautilus, had not diminished, and the sheet of water around the vessel glowed resplendent.
It was morning, but no sunlight broke through the ceiling. The sea, at this moment high, covered the opening. However, the artificial light streaming in long rays from the sides of the Nautilus hadn't faded, and the water around the ship shone brightly.
Captain Nemo, overcome by an extreme fatigue, fell back upon the divan. They did not dream of transporting him to Granite House, as he had shown a wish to remain among the priceless treasures of the Nautilus, awaiting that death which could not be long in coming.
Captain Nemo, completely exhausted, collapsed onto the couch. They didn't even consider taking him to Granite House, as he had expressed a desire to stay among the priceless treasures of the Nautilus, waiting for the death that couldn’t be far off.
Smith and Spilett observed with great attention his prostration. They saw that he was slowly sinking. His strength, formerly so great, was almost gone, and his body was but a frail envelope for the spirit about escaping. All life was concentrated at the heart and brain.
Smith and Spilett watched closely as he lay weak. They noticed that he was gradually fading away. His strength, which had once been so immense, was nearly gone, and his body felt like a delicate shell for the spirit that was about to leave. All his energy was focused in his heart and brain.
The engineer and the reporter consulted together in low tones. Could they do anything for the dying man? Could they, if not save him, at least prolong his life for a few days? He himself had said that there was no remedy, and he awaited death calmly and without fear.
The engineer and the reporter talked quietly together. Was there anything they could do for the dying man? Could they, if they couldn't save him, at least extend his life for a few more days? He had said himself that there was no cure, and he faced death calmly and without fear.
“We can do nothing,” said Spilett.
“We can’t do anything,” said Spilett.
“What is he dying of?” asked Pencroff.
“What is he dying from?” asked Pencroff.
“Of exhaustion,” answered the reporter.
“From exhaustion,” answered the reporter.
“Supposing we take him out into the open air, into the sunlight, perhaps he would revive?”
“Maybe if we take him outside, into the sunlight, he might come to?”
“No, Pencroff,” responded the engineer, “there is nothing to do. Moreover, Captain Nemo would not be willing to leave here. He has lived on the Nautilus for thirty years, and on the Nautilus he wishes to die.”
“No, Pencroff,” the engineer replied, “there’s nothing we can do. Besides, Captain Nemo wouldn’t want to leave this place. He has lived on the Nautilus for thirty years, and he wants to die on the Nautilus.”
Doubtless Captain Nemo heard Smith’s words, for, raising himself up a little, and speaking in a feeble but intelligible voice, he said:—
Doubtless, Captain Nemo heard Smith’s words, for, raising himself up a bit and speaking in a weak but clear voice, he said:—
“You are right. I wish to die here. And I have a request to make.”
“You're right. I want to die here. And I have a favor to ask.”
Smith and his companions had gathered round the divan, and they arranged the cushions so that the dying man was more comfortably placed.
Smith and his friends gathered around the couch and arranged the pillows to make the dying man more comfortable.
They saw that his gaze was fixed upon the marvels of the saloon, lit up by the rays of electric light sifting through the arabesques of the luminous ceiling. He looked upon the pictures, those chefs d’œuvre of Italian, Flemish, French, and Spanish masters, which hung on the tapestried walls, upon the marbles and bronzes, upon the magnificent organ at the opposite end of the saloon, upon the glasses arranged around a central vase in which were disposed the rarest products of the seas, marine plants, zoophytes, chaplets of pearls of an inappreciable value, and at length his attention was fixed upon this device, the device of the Nautilus inscribed upon the front of this museum:—
They noticed that his eyes were fixed on the wonders of the salon, illuminated by the beams of electric light filtering through the intricate designs of the glowing ceiling. He admired the paintings, those masterpieces of Italian, Flemish, French, and Spanish artists, that hung on the tapestry-covered walls, the marbles and bronzes, the stunning organ at the far end of the salon, the glasses arranged around a central vase filled with the rarest oceanic treasures, marine plants, sea creatures, and priceless pearl necklaces. Eventually, his attention was drawn to this emblem, the emblem of the Nautilus, inscribed on the front of this museum:—
MOBILIS IN MOBILI.
MOBILE IN MOTION.
It seemed as if he wished to caress with his regard, one last time, those chefs d’oeuvre of art and nature which had been ever visible to him in the years of his sojourn in the depths of the sea!
It looked like he wanted to take one last look at those chefs d’oeuvre of art and nature that he had always seen during his time in the depths of the sea!
Smith respected Captain Nemo’s silence. He waited for him to speak.
Smith respected Captain Nemo's silence. He waited for him to say something.
After some moments, during which passed before him, doubtless, his whole life, Cap-Nemo turned to the colonists and said:—
After a few moments, during which his whole life likely flashed before him, Captain Nemo turned to the colonists and said:—
“You wish to do me a favor?”
“You want to do me a favor?”
“Captain, we would give our lives to prolong yours!”
“Captain, we would sacrifice our lives to extend yours!”
“Well, then, promise me that you will execute my last wishes, and I will be repaid for all that I have done for you.”
“Okay, then, promise me that you’ll carry out my final wishes, and I’ll feel repaid for everything I’ve done for you.”
“We promise,” answered Smith, speaking for his companions and himself.
“We promise,” Smith replied, speaking for himself and his friends.
“To-morrow,” said the Captain, “to-morrow I will be dead.”
"Tomorrow," said the Captain, "tomorrow I will be dead."
He made a sign to Herbert, who was about to protest.
He signaled to Herbert, who was about to complain.
“To-morrow I will be dead, and I wish for no other tomb than the Nautilus. It is my coffin! All my friends rest at the bottom of the sea, and I wish to rest there also.”
“To-morrow I will be dead, and I want no other tomb than the Nautilus. It is my coffin! All my friends are at the bottom of the sea, and I want to rest there too.”
A profound silence followed the words of Captain Nemo.
A deep silence hung in the air after Captain Nemo spoke.
“Attend to what I say,” he continued. “The Nautilus is imprisoned in this grotto. But if she cannot leave this prison, she can at least sink herself in the abyss, which will cover her and guard my mortal remains.”
“Listen to what I’m saying,” he went on. “The Nautilus is trapped in this cave. But even if it can’t escape this prison, it can at least sink into the deep water, which will conceal it and protect my body.”
The colonists listened religiously to the words of the dying man.
The colonists listened intently to the words of the dying man.
“To-morrow, after I am dead, Mr. Smith,” continued the Captain, “you and your companions will leave the Nautilus, all of whose riches are to disappear with me. One single remembrance of Prince Dakkar, whose history you now know, will remain to you. That coffer, there, encloses diamonds worth many millions, most of them souvenirs of the time when, a husband and father, I almost believed in happiness, and a collection of pearls gathered by my friends and myself from the bottom of the sea. With this treasure, you will be able, some time, to accomplish good. In your hands and those of your companions, Mr. Smith, wealth will not be dangerous. I shall be ever present with you in your works.”
“Tomorrow, after I'm gone, Mr. Smith,” the Captain continued, “you and your companions will leave the Nautilus, taking with you all its treasures that will disappear along with me. Only one memory of Prince Dakkar, whose story you now know, will remain with you. That chest over there contains diamonds worth millions, most of which are mementos from a time when I, as a husband and father, almost believed in happiness, along with a collection of pearls gathered by my friends and me from the ocean floor. With this treasure, you will someday be able to do good. In your hands and those of your companions, Mr. Smith, this wealth won’t be harmful. I will always be with you in your endeavors.”
After some moments of rest, necessitated by his extreme feebleness, Captain Nemo continued as follows:—
After a short break, needed because he was really weak, Captain Nemo continued:—
“To-morrow, you will take this coffer, you will leave this saloon, and close the door; then you will ascend to the platform of the Nautilus and you will bolt down the hatchway.”
“Tomorrow, you will take this chest, leave this room, and close the door; then you will go up to the platform of the Nautilus and bolt down the hatch.”
“We will do it, sir,” replied Smith.
“We'll do it, sir,” Smith replied.
“Very well. You will then embark in the boat which brought you here. But, before abandoning the Nautilus, go to the stern, and there, open two large cocks which you will find at the water-line. The water will penetrate and the Nautilus will sink beneath the waves and rest upon the bottom of the abyss.”
“Alright. You will then get into the boat that brought you here. But before leaving the Nautilus, go to the back and open the two large valves you'll find at the waterline. Water will come in, and the Nautilus will sink beneath the waves and settle on the ocean floor.”
Then, upon a gesture from Smith, the Captain added:—
Then, at a signal from Smith, the Captain added:—
“Fear nothing! you will only be burying the dead!”
“Fear nothing! You’re just going to be burying the dead!”
Neither Smith nor his companions could say a word to Captain Nemo. These were his last wishes, and they had nothing else to do but obey them.
Neither Smith nor his friends could say anything to Captain Nemo. These were his final wishes, and they had no choice but to follow them.
“I have your promise?” asked Captain Nemo.
“I have your promise?” Captain Nemo asked.
“You have it, sir,” answered the engineer.
"You've got it, sir," the engineer replied.
The Captain made a sign thanking them, and then motioned to be left alone for a few hours. Spilett insisted on remaining with him, in case of an emergency, but the other refused, saying:—
The Captain signaled his thanks to them, then gestured to be left alone for a few hours. Spilett insisted on staying with him in case of an emergency, but the Captain declined, saying:—
“I will live till morning, sir.”
“I'll be here until morning, sir.”
All left the salon, passing through the library, the dining-room, and reached the forward part of the vessel, where the electric apparatus, furnishing heat, light, and motive power to the Nautilus was placed.
All left the lounge, passing through the library and the dining room, and arrived at the front part of the vessel, where the electrical equipment providing heat, light, and propulsion for the Nautilus was located.
The Nautilus was a chef-d’oeuvre containing chefs-d’oeuvre, which filled the engineer with amazement.
The Nautilus was a masterpiece containing masterpieces, which left the engineer in awe.
The colonists mounted the platform, which rose seven or eight feet above the water. Then they saw a thick lenticular glass closing up a sort of bull’s-eye, through which penetrated a ray of light. Behind this bull’s-eye was the wheel-house, where the steersman stood when directing the Nautilus under the sea, by means of the electric light.
The colonists climbed onto the platform, which was about seven or eight feet above the water. Then they noticed a thick, lens-shaped glass covering a kind of bull’s-eye, through which a beam of light came through. Behind this bull’s-eye was the wheelhouse, where the helmsman stood while steering the Nautilus underwater using the electric light.
Smith and his companions stood here in silence, impressed by what they saw, and what they had heard, and their hearts bled to think that he, their protector, whose arm had been so often raised to aid them, would soon be counted among the dead.
Smith and his friends stood here quietly, struck by what they saw and what they had heard, and their hearts ached at the thought that he, their protector, whose arm had often been raised to help them, would soon be among the dead.
Whatever would be the judgment of posterity upon this, so to say, extra-human existence, Prince Dakkar would always remain one of those strange characters who cannot be forgotten.
Whatever judgment future generations might make about this, let's say, otherworldly existence, Prince Dakkar will always be remembered as one of those unique figures who can't be forgotten.
“What a man!” said Pencroff. “Is it credible that he has lived so at the bottom of the ocean! And to think that he has not found rest even there!”
“What a guy!” said Pencroff. “Can you believe he has lived all the way at the bottom of the ocean? And to think he hasn’t found peace even there!”
“The Nautilus,” observed Ayrton, “would, perhaps, have served us to leave Lincoln Island and gain some inhabited country.”
“The Nautilus,” Ayrton noted, “might have helped us leave Lincoln Island and reach some populated place.”
“A thousand devils!” cried Pencroff. “You couldn’t get me to steer such a craft. To sail over the seas is all very well, but under the seas,—no, sir!”
“A thousand devils!” cried Pencroff. “You couldn’t pay me to steer such a boat. Sailing on the surface is one thing, but under the waves—no way!”
“I think, Pencroff,” said the reporter, “that it would be easy to manage a submarine apparatus like the Nautilus, and that we would soon get accustomed to it. No storms, no boarding to fear. At some little distance under the waves the waters are as calm as those of a lake.”
“I think, Pencroff,” said the reporter, “that it would be easy to handle a submarine device like the Nautilus, and that we would quickly get used to it. No storms, no risk of being boarded. Just a short distance below the surface, the water is as calm as a lake.”
“That’s likely enough,” answered the sailor, “but give me a stiff breeze and a well rigged ship. A ship is made to go on the water and not under it.”
“That's probably enough,” replied the sailor, “but give me a strong breeze and a well-equipped ship. A ship is meant to sail on the surface, not beneath it.”
“My friends,” said the engineer, “it is useless, at least as far as the Nautilus is concerned, to discuss this question of submarine vessels. The Nautilus is not ours, and we have no right to dispose of it. It could not, moreover, serve us under any circumstances. Aside from the fact that it cannot get out of this cavern, Captain Nemo wishes it to be engulfed with him after his death. His wish is law, and we will obey it.”
“My friends,” said the engineer, “there's no point in discussing submarine vessels when it comes to the Nautilus. The Nautilus doesn't belong to us, and we have no authority over it. Besides, it’s not going to be of any use to us anyway. For one, it can’t leave this cavern, and Captain Nemo wants it to be swallowed up with him after he dies. His wish is final, and we will respect it.”
Smith and his companions, after talking for a while longer, descended into the interior of the Nautilus. There they ate some food and returned to the salon.
Smith and his friends, after chatting a bit longer, went down into the interior of the Nautilus. There they had some food and then went back to the salon.
Captain Nemo had recovered from his prostration, and his eyes had regained their brilliancy. They saw a smile upon his lips.
Captain Nemo had recovered from his exhaustion, and his eyes had regained their sparkle. He had a smile on his lips.
The colonists approached him. “Sirs,” said the Captain, “you are brave men, and good and honest. You have given yourselves up to the common cause. I have often watched you. I have loved you. I do love you!—Give me your hand, Mr. Smith.”
The colonists walked up to him. “Gentlemen,” said the Captain, “you are courageous, and you’re good and honest people. You’ve dedicated yourselves to a shared cause. I’ve observed you many times. I care for you. I care for you!—Shake my hand, Mr. Smith.”
Smith gave his hand to the Captain, who pressed it affectionately.
Smith shook hands with the Captain, who squeezed it warmly.
“That is well!” he murmured. Then he added:—
“That’s great!” he said quietly. Then he added:—
“But I have said enough about myself. I wish to speak of yourselves and of Lincoln Island, on which you have found refuge. You want to leave it?”.
“But I’ve said enough about myself. I want to talk about you and Lincoln Island, where you’ve found safety. Do you want to leave it?”
“To come back again!” said Pencroff eagerly.
“To come back again!” said Pencroff excitedly.
“To return?—Oh! yes, Pencroff,” answered the Captain, smiling, “I know how much you love this island. It has been improved by your care, and it is, indeed, yours.”
“To return?—Oh! yes, Pencroff,” replied the Captain, smiling, “I know how much you love this island. You've taken such good care of it, and it really is yours.”
“Our project, Captain,” added Smith, “would be to make it over to the United States, and to establish a station, which would be well situated here in this part of the Pacific.”
“Our project, Captain,” added Smith, “is to hand it over to the United States and set up a station that would be ideally located here in this part of the Pacific.”
“You think of your country,” replied the Captain. “You work for her prosperity, for her glory. You are right. The Fatherland! It is there we wish to return! It is there we wish to die! And I, I die far from everything that I have loved!”
“You think about your country,” replied the Captain. “You work for her success, for her honor. You’re right. The homeland! That's where we want to go back to! That's where we want to die! And I, I’m dying far from everything I have loved!”
“Have you no last wish to have executed,” asked the engineer earnestly, “no souvenir to send to those friends you left in the mountains of India?”
“Do you have any last requests you want to make?” the engineer asked sincerely. “Is there a keepsake you’d like to send to your friends back in the mountains of India?”
“No, Mr. Smith, I have no friends! I am the last of my race—and I die long after those whom I have known.—But to return to yourselves. Solitude, isolation are sorrowful things, beyond human endurance. I die from having believed that man could live alone!—You wish to leave Lincoln Island and to return to your country. I know that these wretches have destroyed your boat-”
“No, Mr. Smith, I have no friends! I am the last of my kind—and I will die long after those I have known. But let’s get back to you. Solitude and isolation are heartbreaking, more than anyone can bear. I’m dying because I thought that a person could live alone!—You want to leave Lincoln Island and go back to your country. I know that these miserable people have destroyed your boat—”
“We are building a ship,” said Spilett, “a ship large enough to take us to the nearest country; but if sooner or later we leave the island, we will come back again. Too many associations attach us to the place, for us ever to forget it.”
“We're building a ship,” said Spilett, “a ship big enough to take us to the nearest country; but if we leave the island eventually, we'll come back. We have too many connections to this place for us to ever forget it.”
“Here we met Captain Nemo,” said Smith.
“Here we met Captain Nemo,” Smith said.
“Here only will we find the perfect remembrance of you!” added Herbert.”
“Here is where we’ll find the perfect memory of you!” added Herbert.
“It is here that I will rest in an eternal sleep, if—” answered the Captain.
“It is here that I will rest in an eternal sleep, if—” answered the Captain.
He hesitated, and, instead of finishing his sentence, said:—
He hesitated and, instead of finishing his sentence, said:—
“Mr. Smith, I wish to speak with you,—with you alone.”
“Mr. Smith, I need to talk to you—just you.”
The companions of the engineer retired, and Smith remained for some time alone with Captain Nemo. He soon called back his friends, but said nothing to them of the secrets which the dying prince had confided to him.
The engineer's companions left, and Smith stayed alone with Captain Nemo for a while. He eventually called back his friends but didn't mention any of the secrets the dying prince had shared with him.
Spilett observed the Captain with extreme attention. He was evidently living by the strength of his will, which could not long hold out against his physical weakness.
Spilett watched the Captain closely. It was clear he was relying on sheer willpower, which wouldn't last much longer against his physical weakness.
The day ended without any change manifesting itself. The colonists did not leave the Nautilus. Night came, although unseen in this crypt.
The day ended without any noticeable changes. The colonists stayed on the Nautilus. Night arrived, though it was unseen in this crypt.
Captain Nemo did not suffer pain, but sunk slowly. His noble face, pale by the approach of death, was perfectly calm. Now and then he spoke, incoherently, of events in his strange existence.—All saw that life was retreating. His feet and hands were already cold.
Captain Nemo didn't feel pain, but was sinking slowly. His noble face, pale from the approach of death, was completely calm. Occasionally, he spoke incoherently about events from his unusual life. Everyone could see that life was slipping away. His feet and hands were already cold.
Once or twice, he spoke a word to the colonists who were about him, and he looked upon them with that smile which remained when he was no more.
Once or twice, he said something to the colonists around him, and he looked at them with that smile that stayed even when he was gone.
At last, just after midnight, Captain Nemo made a supreme effort, and crossed his arms upon his breast, as if he wished to die in that attitude.
At last, just after midnight, Captain Nemo made a final effort and crossed his arms over his chest, as if he wanted to die in that position.
Towards 1 o’clock all the life that was left was concentrated in his expression. One last spark burned in that eye which had formerly flashed fire! Then, murmuring these words, “God and Fatherland,” he expired quietly.
Towards 1 o’clock, all the life that remained was focused in his expression. One last spark glimmered in that eye which had once flashed with intensity! Then, murmuring the words, “God and Fatherland,” he passed away peacefully.
Smith, stooping down, closed the eyes of him who had been Prince Dakkar, who was no more even Captain Nemo.
Smith, bending down, closed the eyes of the one who had been Prince Dakkar, who was no longer even Captain Nemo.
Herbert and Pencroff wept. Ayrton wiped away a furtive tear. Neb was on his knees near the reporter, who was immobile as a statue.
Herbert and Pencroff cried. Ayrton wiped away a secret tear. Neb was on his knees next to the reporter, who was as still as a statue.
Smith raising his hand above the head of the dead man:—
Smith raised his hand above the head of the dead man:—
“May God receive his soul!” he said, and then, turning towards his friends, he added:—
“May God take his soul!” he said, and then, turning to his friends, he added:—
“Let us pray for him whom we have lost!”
“Let’s pray for the one we have lost!”
Some hours later, the colonists, in fulfillment of their promise, carried out the last wishes of the dead.
Some hours later, the colonists, keeping their promise, fulfilled the last wishes of the deceased.
They left the Nautilus, taking with them the sole souvenir of their benefactor, the coffer containing a hundred fortunes.
They left the Nautilus, taking with them the only souvenir from their benefactor, the chest filled with a hundred fortunes.
The marvellous salon, still flooded with light, was carefully closed. The cover to the hatchway was bolted down in such a manner that not a drop of water could penetrate to the inner chambers of the Nautilus. Then the colonists entered the boat, which was moored beside the submarine ship.
The amazing salon, still filled with light, was carefully sealed. The hatch cover was bolted down in a way that not a single drop of water could get into the inner sections of the Nautilus. Then the colonists got into the boat, which was tied up next to the submarine.
The boat was taken to the stern. There, at the water-line, they opened the two large cocks which communicated with the reservoirs designed to immerse the apparatus.
The boat was taken to the back. There, at the waterline, they opened the two large valves that connected to the tanks meant to submerge the equipment.
The cocks were opened, the reservoirs filled, and the Nautilus, sinking slowly, disappeared beneath the sea.
The valves were opened, the tanks were filled, and the Nautilus, slowly sinking, vanished beneath the waves.
But the colonists were able still to follow her coarse through the lower depths. Her strong light lit up the transparent waters, as the crypt became darkened. Then at length the vast effusion of electric effulgence was effaced, and the Nautilus, the tomb of Captain Nemo, rested upon the bottom of the sea.
But the colonists were still able to follow her path through the lower depths. Her bright light illuminated the clear waters, while the crypt grew dark. Finally, the intense burst of electric light faded away, and the Nautilus, the resting place of Captain Nemo, lay on the sea floor.
CHAPTER LX.
THE REFLECTIONS OF THE COLONISTS—RENEWAL OF WORK—THE 1ST OF JANUARY, 1869—A SMOKE FROM THE VOLCANO—SYMPTOMS OF AN ERUPTION AYRTON AND SMITH AT THE CORRAL—EXPLORATION OF THE CRYPT DAKKAR —WHAT CAPTAIN NEMO HAD SAID TO THE ENGINEER.
THE REFLECTIONS OF THE COLONISTS—RENEWAL OF WORK—THE 1ST OF JANUARY, 1869—A SMOKE FROM THE VOLCANO—SYMPTOMS OF AN ERUPTION AYRTON AND SMITH AT THE CORRAL—EXPLORATION OF THE CRYPT DAKKAR—WHAT CAPTAIN NEMO HAD SAID TO THE ENGINEER.
In the early morning the colonists reached the entrance of the cavern, which they called Crypt Dakkar, in remembrance of Captain Nemo. The tide was low, and they easily passed under the archway, whose piers were washed by the waves.
In the early morning, the colonists arrived at the entrance of the cave, which they named Crypt Dakkar, in honor of Captain Nemo. The tide was low, and they easily walked under the archway, with the pillars being washed by the waves.
The iron boat could remain in this place without danger from the sea; but as additional precaution they drew it up on a little beach on one side of the crypt.
The iron boat could stay here safely without worrying about the sea; however, as an extra precaution, they pulled it up onto a small beach beside the crypt.
The storm had ceased during the night. The last mutterings of the thunder were dying away in the west. It was not raining, although the sky was still clouded. In short, this month of October, the beginning of the southern spring, did not come in good fashion, and the wind had a tendency to shift from one point of the compass to another, so that it was impossible to say what the weather would be.
The storm had stopped during the night. The last rumbles of thunder were fading away in the west. It wasn't raining, although the sky was still overcast. In short, this October, the start of the southern spring, didn't arrive in a good way, and the wind kept shifting from one direction to another, making it impossible to predict the weather.
Smith and his companions, on leaving Crypt Dakkar, went towards the corral. On the way Neb and Herbert took care to take up the wire which had been stretched by Captain Nemo, as it might be useful in the future.
Smith and his friends, after leaving Crypt Dakkar, headed toward the corral. Along the way, Neb and Herbert made sure to pick up the wire that Captain Nemo had stretched, as it could be useful later.
While walking the colonists spoke but little. The incidents of this night had made a vivid impression upon them. This unknown, whose influence had protected them so well, this man whom they imagined a genii, Captain Nemo, was no more. His Nautilus and himself were buried in the depths of the abyss. It seemed to each one of them that they were more isolated than before. They were, so to speak, accustomed to count upon this powerful intervention which to-day was wanting, and Spilett, and even Smith, did not escape this feeling. So, without speaking, they followed the road to the corral.
While walking, the colonists hardly spoke at all. The events of that night had left a strong impression on them. This unknown figure, whose influence had protected them so effectively, this man they imagined to be a genius, Captain Nemo, was gone. His Nautilus and he were buried deep in the ocean. Each of them felt more isolated than before. They had become accustomed to relying on his powerful intervention, which was now absent, and Spilett, as well as Smith, felt this sense of loss. So, without saying a word, they made their way to the corral.
By 9 o’clock the colonists were in Granite House again.
By 9 o’clock, the colonists were back in Granite House.
It had been agreed that the construction of the ship should be pushed forward as rapidly as possible, and Smith gave the work more of his time and care than ever before. They did not know what the future might bring forth, and it would be a guarantee of safety for them to have a strong vessel, able to stand rough weather, and large enough to carry them, if need be, a long distance. If, when it was finished, the colonists decided not to leave the island they could at least make the voyage to Tabor Island and leave a notice there. This was an indispensable precaution in case the Scotch yacht returned to these seas, and it must on no account be neglected.
It was agreed that the ship's construction should be accelerated as much as possible, and Smith dedicated more time and attention to the work than ever before. They didn’t know what the future would hold, so having a sturdy vessel that could handle rough weather and was large enough to take them a long distance if necessary would ensure their safety. If, once it was completed, the colonists chose not to leave the island, they could at least make the trip to Tabor Island and leave a message there. This was a crucial precaution in case the Scotch yacht returned to these waters, and it must not be overlooked.
The work was undertaken at once. All worked at it without ceasing, except to prosecute other necessary work. It was important to have the new ship finished in five months, if they wished to make the voyage to Tabor Island before the equinoxial storms would render it impracticable. All the sails of the Speedy had been saved, so that they need not trouble themselves about making rigging.
The work began immediately. Everyone worked continuously, only stopping for other essential tasks. It was crucial to have the new ship ready in five months if they wanted to reach Tabor Island before the equinox storms made it impossible. They had saved all the sails from the Speedy, so they didn't have to worry about making new rigging.
The year ended in the midst of this work. At the end of two months and a half the ribs had been put in place and the planking began, so that they were able to see that Smith’s plans were excellent. Pencroff worked with ardor, and always grumbled when any of the others left off work to go hunting. It was, nevertheless, necessary to lay in a stock of provisions for the approaching winter. But that made no difference. The honest sailor was unhappy unless every one was at work in the ship-yard. At these times he grumbled and did—he was so put out—the work of half a dozen men.
The year wrapped up while they were busy with this project. After two and a half months, the ribs were installed and the planking started, proving that Smith’s designs were spot on. Pencroff worked with enthusiasm and always complained when the others took breaks to go hunting. Still, it was essential to stock up on supplies for the coming winter. But that didn’t matter to him. The dedicated sailor felt unhappy unless everyone was busy in the shipyard. During those times, he grumbled and ended up doing the work of six men.
All this summer season was bad. The heat was overpowering, and the atmosphere, charged with electricity, discharged itself in violent storms. It was seldom that the distant muttering of the thunder was unheard. It was like a dull, but permanent murmur, such as is produced in the equatorial regions of the globe.
All summer long was terrible. The heat was intense, and the charged atmosphere erupted in violent storms. The distant rumble of thunder was rarely missed. It was like a low, constant hum, similar to what you find in the equatorial regions of the world.
On the 1st of January, 1869, a terrific storm burst over the island, and the lightning struck in many places. Tall trees were shattered, and among them was one of the enormous micocouliers which shaded the poultry-yard. Had this meteoric storm any relation to the phenomena which were occurring In the bowels of the earth? Was there a sort of connection between the disturbances in the air and those in the interior of the globe. Smith believed it to be so, since the development of these storms was marked by a recrudescence of the volcanic symptoms.
On January 1, 1869, a violent storm hit the island, with lightning striking in several spots. Tall trees were shattered, including one of the massive micocouliers that provided shade for the poultry yard. Did this storm have any connection to the events happening deep within the earth? Was there a link between the disturbances in the atmosphere and those in the planet's interior? Smith thought so, as the emergence of these storms coincided with a resurgence of volcanic activity.
On the 3d of January, Herbert, who had gone at daybreak to Prospect Plateau to saddle one of the onagers, saw an immense black cloud rolling out from the summit of the volcano.
On January 3rd, Herbert, who had gone at dawn to Prospect Plateau to saddle one of the onagers, saw a huge black cloud emerging from the top of the volcano.
Herbert hastened to inform the others, who came at once to look at the mountain.
Herbert rushed to tell the others, who quickly came to check out the mountain.
“Ah!” said Pencroff, “it is not vapor this time! It seems to me that the giant is not content to breathe, he must smoke!”
“Ah!” said Pencroff, “it's not vapor this time! It seems to me that the giant isn't just breathing; he's smoking!”
The image employed by the sailor expressed with exactness the change which had taken place at the mouth of the volcano. For three months the crater had been emitting vapors more or less intense, but there had been no ebullition of mineral matters. This time, instead of vapors, a thick column of smoke rose, like an immense mushroom, above the summit of the mountain.
The image used by the sailor accurately conveyed the change that had occurred at the volcano's mouth. For three months, the crater had been releasing varying degrees of vapor, but there hadn't been any bubbling of mineral substances. This time, instead of vapor, a thick column of smoke shot up, like a giant mushroom, above the mountain's peak.
“The chimney is on fire!” said Spilett.
“The chimney is on fire!” Spilett shouted.
“And we cannot put it out!” answered Herbert.
“And we can’t put it out!” replied Herbert.
“It would be well to sweep the volcanoes,” said Neb, in good earnest.
“It would be a good idea to clean up the volcanoes,” said Neb, seriously.
“All right, Neb,” said Pencroff, laughing. “Will you undertake the job?”
“All right, Neb,” Pencroff said with a laugh. “Are you going to take on the job?”
Smith looked attentively at the thick smoke, and at the same time he listened as if he expected to detect some distant rumbling. Then, turning towards his companions, who were at some little distance, he said:—
Smith watched the thick smoke closely, and at the same time, he listened as if he were expecting to hear some distant rumbling. Then, turning to his companions, who were a little ways off, he said:—
“In truth, my friends, it cannot be denied that an important change has taken place. The volcanic matters are not only in a state of ebullition, they have taken fire, and, without doubt, we are threatened with an eruption!”
“In truth, my friends, it cannot be denied that a significant change has occurred. The volcanic issues are not just boiling over; they have ignited, and, without a doubt, we are facing the threat of an eruption!”
“Very well, sir; we will witness this eruption,” cried Pencroff, “and we will applaud it if it is a success! I don’t think that anything over there need worry us!”
“Alright, sir; we will watch this eruption,” shouted Pencroff, “and we will cheer if it goes well! I don’t think we need to be concerned about anything over there!”
“No, Pencroff,” answered Smith, “for the old course of the lava is open, and, thanks to its position, the crater has heretofore discharged towards the north. Nevertheless—”
“No, Pencroff,” replied Smith, “because the old path of the lava is clear, and, due to its location, the crater has previously released its contents to the north. However—”
“Nevertheless, since there is nothing to be gained by an eruption, it would be better not to have it,” said the reporter.
“Still, since there’s nothing to gain from an eruption, it would be better to avoid it,” said the reporter.
“Who knows?” replied the sailor. “There may be some useful and precious matter in the volcano, which it will be good enough to throw up, which will be advantageous for us!”
“Who knows?” replied the sailor. “There might be some valuable and useful materials in the volcano that it might kindly erupt, which could benefit us!”
Smith shook his head, as a man who anticipated nothing good from this phenomenon. He did not think so lightly of the consequences of an eruption. If the lava, on account of the position of the crater, did not menace the wooded and cultivated portions of the island, other complications might arise. Eruptions are often accompanied by earthquakes, and an island formed, like Lincoln Island, of such different materials: basalt on one side, granite on another, lavas to the north, a mixed soil inland, material which, therefore, could not be solidly bound together, ran the risk of being torn asunder. If, therefore, the outpouring of volcanic substances did not threaten serious results, any movement in the framework upholding the island might be followed by the gravest consequences.
Smith shook his head, like someone who expected nothing good from this situation. He didn't take the consequences of an eruption lightly. If the lava, due to the crater's location, didn't threaten the forested and cultivated areas of the island, other issues could still arise. Eruptions are often paired with earthquakes, and an island like Lincoln Island, made up of such different materials—basalt on one side, granite on another, lava to the north, and mixed soil inland—could be at risk of being torn apart because these materials couldn't hold together solidly. So, if the outpouring of volcanic material didn't pose serious dangers, any shifts in the structure supporting the island could lead to severe consequences.
“It seems to me,” said Ayrton, who was kneeling down, with his ear to the ground, “it seems to me that I hear a noise, like the rattling of a wagon, loaded with iron bars.”
“It feels to me,” said Ayrton, who was kneeling down with his ear to the ground, “it feels to me like I hear a noise, like the rattling of a wagon loaded with iron bars.”
The colonists listened carefully, and were convinced that Ayrton was not mistaken. With the rumbling mingled subterranean roaring, making a sort of “rinfordzando,” which died away slowly, as if from some violent cleavage in the interior of the globe. But no detonation was heard, and it was fair to conclude that the smoke and vapor found a free passage through the central chimney, and, if the escape-pipe was sufficiently large, no explosion need be feared.
The colonists paid close attention and were convinced that Ayrton was right. They heard a deep rumbling mixed with underground roaring, creating a kind of “rinfordzando” that faded slowly, as if there had been some violent shift deep within the Earth. However, there was no explosion heard, so it seemed reasonable to conclude that the smoke and vapor had a clear path through the central chimney, and if the escape pipe was big enough, there was no need to worry about an explosion.
“Come,” said Pencroff at length, “shall we not go back to work? Let Mount Franklin smoke, brawl, moan, and vomit fire and flames as much as it chooses, but that is no excuse for us to quit work! Come, Ayrton, Neb, all of you, we want all hands to-day! I want our new Good Luck—we will keep the name, will we not?—to be moored in Balloon Harbor before two months are passed! So there is not an hour to be lost!”
“Come on,” Pencroff finally said, “shouldn’t we get back to work? Let Mount Franklin smoke, erupt, moan, and spew fire and flames as much as it wants, but that’s no reason for us to stop working! Come on, Ayrton, Neb, everyone, we need all hands on deck today! I want our new Good Luck—we're keeping that name, right?—to be anchored in Balloon Harbor within the next two months! So we can’t waste any time!”
All the colonists went down to the shipyard and worked steadily all day without giving too much thought to the volcano, which could not be seen from the beach before Granite House. But once or twice heavy shadows obscured the sunlight, and, as the was day perfectly clear, it was evident that thick clouds of smoke were passing between the sun’s disc and the island. Smith and Spilett noticed these sombre voyagers, and talked of the progress that the volcanic phenomenon was making, but they did not cease work. It was, moreover, of great importance, in every sense, that the ship should be finished with as little delay as possible. In the presence of events which might happen, the security of the colonists would be better assured. Who could say but that this ship might not, some day, be their sole refuge?
All the colonists went down to the shipyard and worked steadily all day, not thinking too much about the volcano, which could not be seen from the beach in front of Granite House. But every once in a while, heavy shadows obscured the sunlight, and since the day was perfectly clear, it was obvious that thick clouds of smoke were passing between the sun and the island. Smith and Spilett noticed these dark clouds and talked about the progress the volcanic activity was making, but they didn’t stop working. It was also very important, in every way, that the ship be finished as quickly as possible. With potential events looming, the safety of the colonists would be better ensured. Who could say that this ship might not someday be their only refuge?
That evening, after supper, Smith, Spilett, and Herbert climbed to the plateau. It was already dark, and they would be able to distinguish whether flames or incandescent matter was mingled with the smoke and vapor of the volcano.
That evening, after dinner, Smith, Spilett, and Herbert climbed up to the plateau. It was already dark, and they would be able to see if there were flames or glowing materials mixed in with the smoke and vapor from the volcano.
“The crater is on fire!” cried Herbert, who, more active than his companions, had reached the plateau the first.
“The crater is on fire!” shouted Herbert, who was more active than his friends and had reached the plateau first.
Mount Franklin, six miles distant, appeared like a gigantic torch, with fuliginous flames twisting about its summit. So much smoke, such quantities of scoriæ and cinders, perhaps, were mingled with the flames, that their light did not glare upon the shades of night. But a sort of dull yellow glow spread over the island, making dimly visible the higher masses of forest. Enormous clouds obscured the heavens, between which glittered a few stars.
Mount Franklin, six miles away, looked like a huge torch, with dark flames swirling around its peak. There was so much smoke and so many ashes and cinders mixed with the flames that their light didn’t shine brightly in the darkness. Instead, a kind of dull yellow glow spread across the island, faintly illuminating the taller trees. Massive clouds covered the sky, with a few stars shining through the gaps.
“The progress is rapid,” said the engineer.
“The progress is quick,” said the engineer.
“It is not astonishing,” answered the reporter. “The volcano has been awake for some time already. You remember, Cyrus, that the first vapors appeared about the time we were searching the mountain for the retreat of Captain Nemo. That was, if I am not mistaken, about the 15th of October.
“It’s not surprising,” the reporter replied. “The volcano has been active for a while now. Remember, Cyrus, the first fumes appeared around the time we were looking for Captain Nemo’s hideout on the mountain. That was, if I’m not mistaken, around October 15th.”
“Yes” replied Herbert, “two months and a half ago.”
“Yeah,” Herbert replied, “two and a half months ago.”
“The subterranean fires have been brooding for ten weeks,” continued Spilett, “and it is not astonishing that they develop now with this violence.”
“The underground fires have been simmering for ten weeks,” continued Spilett, “and it’s not surprising that they are bursting forth with this intensity now.”
“Do not you feel certain vibrations in the ground?” asked Smith.
“Don't you feel certain vibrations in the ground?” asked Smith.
“I think so,” replied Spilett, “but an earthquake—”
“I think so,” replied Spilett, “but an earthquake—”
“I did not say that we were menaced by an earthquake,” said Smith, “and Heaven preserve us from one! No. These vibrations are due to the effervesence of the central fire. The crust of the earth is nothing more than the covering of a boiler, and you know how the covering of a boiler, under pressure, vibrates like a sonorous plate. That is what is happening at this moment.”
“I didn’t say we were threatened by an earthquake,” Smith said, “and may we be protected from one! No. These vibrations are caused by the bubbling of the core. The Earth's crust is just like the outer layer of a boiler, and you know how the outer covering of a boiler vibrates like a resonant plate under pressure. That’s what’s happening right now.”
“What magnificent flames!” cried Herbert, as a sheaf of fire shot up, unobscured by the vapors, from the crater. From its midst luminous fragments and bright scintillations were thrown in every direction. Some of them pierced the dome of smoke, leaving behind them a perfect cloud of incandescent dust. This outpouring was accompanied by rapid detonations like the discharge of a battery of mitrailleuses.
“What amazing flames!” shouted Herbert, as a burst of fire shot up, clear of the smoke, from the crater. From its center, glowing fragments and bright sparks were sent flying in all directions. Some of them broke through the smoke dome, leaving behind a perfect cloud of glowing dust. This eruption was accompanied by quick explosions like the firing of a machine gun.
Smith, the reporter, and the lad, after having passed an hour on Prospect Plateau, returned to Granite House. The engineer was pensive, and so much preoccupied that Spilett asked him if he anticipated any near danger.
Smith, the reporter, and the boy, after spending an hour on Prospect Plateau, returned to Granite House. The engineer was deep in thought and so distracted that Spilett asked him if he expected any immediate danger.
“Yes and no,” responded Smith.
“Definitely and definitely not,” responded Smith.
“But the worst that could happen,” said the reporter, “would be an earthquake, which would overthrow the island. And I don’t think that is to be feared, since the vapors and lava have a free passage of escape.”
“But the worst that could happen,” said the reporter, “would be an earthquake that could take down the island. And I don’t think that’s something to worry about, since the gases and lava have a clear path to escape.”
“I do not fear an earthquake,” answered Smith, “of the ordinary kind, such as are brought about by the expansion of subterranean vapors. But other causes may bring about great disaster.”
“I’m not afraid of an earthquake,” replied Smith, “the usual kind that happens because of the expansion of underground gases. But other factors could lead to major disasters.”
“For example?”
“Like what?”
“I do not know exactly—I must see—I must visit the mountain. In a few days I shall have made up my mind.”
“I’m not sure—I need to see—I need to visit the mountain. In a few days, I’ll have made my decision.”
Spilett asked no further questions, and soon, notwithstanding the increased violence of the volcano, the inhabitants of Granite House slept soundly.
Spilett didn't ask any more questions, and soon, despite the volcano getting more violent, the people in Granite House slept peacefully.
Three days passed, the 4th 5th, and 6th of January, during which they worked on the ship, and, without explaining himself further, the engineer hastened the work as much as possible. Mount Franklin was covered with a sinister cloud, and with the flames vomited forth incandescent rocks, some of which fell back into the crater. This made Pencroff, who wished to look upon the phenomenon from an amusing side, say—
Three days went by: the 4th, 5th, and 6th of January. During that time, they worked on the ship, and without giving any more details, the engineer sped up the progress as much as he could. Mount Franklin was shrouded in an ominous cloud, and it belched out flames and glowing rocks, some of which tumbled back into the crater. This caused Pencroff, who wanted to see the event in a lighthearted way, to say—
“Look! The giant plays at cup and ball! He is a juggler.”
“Look! The giant is playing with a cup and ball! He’s a juggler.”
And, indeed, the matters vomited forth fell back into the abyss, and it seemed as if the lavas, swollen by the interior pressure, had not yet risen to the mouth of the crater. At least, the fracture on the northeast, which was partly visible, did not pour forth any torrent on the western side of the mountain.
And, indeed, the things that were spewed out fell back into the abyss, and it seemed like the molten rock, pushed up by the pressure from inside, hadn’t yet reached the top of the crater. At least, the crack on the northeast, which could be partly seen, didn’t send any flow down the western side of the mountain.
Meanwhile, however pressing the ship-building, other cares required the attention of the colonists in different parts of the island. First of all, they must go to the corral, where the moufflons and goats were enclosed, and renew the provisions for these animals. It was, therefore, agreed that Ayrton should go there the next day, and, as it was customary for but one to do this work, the others were surprised to hear the engineer say to Ayrton:——
Meanwhile, as urgent as the shipbuilding was, the colonists had other responsibilities across the island that needed their attention. First and foremost, they had to head to the corral, where the moufflons and goats were kept, to restock the supplies for these animals. It was decided that Ayrton would go there the next day, and since it was usual for only one person to handle this task, the others were surprised to hear the engineer tell Ayrton:——
“As you are going to the corral to-morrow, I will go with you.”
“As you’re heading to the corral tomorrow, I’ll go with you.”
“Oh! Mr. Smith!” cried the sailor, “our time is very limited, and, if you go off in this way, we lose just that much help!”
“Oh! Mr. Smith!” shouted the sailor, “we have very little time, and if you leave like this, we're losing that much support!”
“We will return the next day,” answered Smith, “but I must go to the corral—I wish to see about this eruption.”
“We’ll come back tomorrow,” Smith replied, “but I need to head to the corral—I want to check on this eruption.”
“Eruption! Eruption!” answered Pencroff, with a dissatisfied air. “What is there important about this eruption? It don’t bother me!”
“Eruption! Eruption!” responded Pencroff, looking dissatisfied. “What’s so significant about this eruption? It doesn’t bother me!”
Notwithstanding the sailor’s protest, the exploration was decided upon for the next day. Herbert wanted to go with Smith, but he did not wish to annoy Pencroff by absenting himself. So, early the next morning, Smith and Ayrton started off with the wagon and onagers.
Not caring about the sailor’s objections, they decided to go ahead with the exploration the next day. Herbert wanted to join Smith, but he didn’t want to upset Pencroff by leaving him behind. So, early the next morning, Smith and Ayrton set off with the wagon and onagers.
Over the forest hung huge clouds constantly supplied from Mount Franklin with fuliginous matter. They were evidently composed of heterogeneous substances. It was not altogether the smoke from the volcano that made them so heavy and opaque. Scoriæ in a state of powder, pulverized puzzolan and grey cinder as fine as the finest fecula, were held in suspension in their thick folds. These cinders remain in air, sometimes, for months at a time. After the eruption of 1783, in Iceland, for more than a year the atmosphere was so charged with volcanic powder that the sun’s rays were scarcely visible.
Over the forest loomed massive clouds continuously fed by Mount Franklin with dark, grimy substances. They were clearly made up of various materials. It wasn’t just the smoke from the volcano that made them so dense and opaque. Ash in powdered form, crushed volcanic rock, and gray cinders as fine as the finest starch were suspended in their thick layers. These cinders can stay in the air for months. After the eruption in Iceland in 1783, the atmosphere was so filled with volcanic ash that the sun’s rays were barely visible for over a year.
Usually, however, these pulverized matters fall to the earth at once, and it was so in this instance. Smith and Ayrton had hardly reached the corral, when a sort of black cloud, like fine gunpowder, fell, and instantly modified the whole aspect of the ground. Trees, fields, everything was covered with a coating several fingers deep. But, most fortunately, the wind was from the northeast, and the greater part of the cloud was carried off to sea.
Usually, though, these powdered substances land on the ground right away, and that’s exactly what happened this time. Smith and Ayrton had barely made it to the corral when a kind of black cloud, resembling fine gunpowder, descended and quickly changed the entire look of the ground. Trees, fields, everything was blanketed with a layer several inches deep. Fortunately, the wind was blowing from the northeast, and most of the cloud was swept out to sea.
“That is very curious,” said Ayrton.
"That's really interesting," Ayrton said.
“It is very serious,” answered Smith. This puzzolan, this pulverized pumice stone, all this mineral dust in short, shows how deep-seated is the commotion in the volcano.
“It is very serious,” replied Smith. This puzzolan, this ground pumice stone, all this mineral dust in short, shows how deep-rooted the agitation in the volcano is.
“But there is nothing to be done.”
“But there’s nothing we can do.”
“Nothing, but to observe the progress of the phenomenon. Employ yourself, Ayrton, at the corral, and meanwhile I will go up to the sources of Red Creek and examine the state of the mountain on its western side. Then——”
“Nothing, but to watch the progress of the phenomenon. Work at the corral, Ayrton, and in the meantime, I’ll head up to the sources of Red Creek and check out the condition of the mountain on its west side. Then——”
“Then, sir?”
“What's next, sir?”
“Then we will make a visit to Crypt Dakkar—I wish to see—Well, I will come back for you in a couple of hours.”
“Then we’ll visit Crypt Dakkar—I want to see—Well, I’ll return for you in a couple of hours.”
Ayrton went into the corral, and while waiting for the return of the engineer occupied himself with the moufflons and goats, which showed a certain uneasiness before these first symptoms of an eruption.
Ayrton entered the corral, and while he waited for the engineer to come back, he kept himself busy with the moufflons and goats, which seemed a bit anxious about the early signs of an eruption.
Meantime Smith had ventured to climb the eastern spurs of the mountain, and he arrived at the place where his companions had discovered the sulphur spring on their first exploration.
Meantime, Smith had taken the risk of climbing the eastern slopes of the mountain, and he reached the spot where his friends had found the sulfur spring during their first exploration.
How everything was changed! Instead of a single column of smoke, he counted thirteen escaping from the ground as if thrust upward by a piston. It was evident that the crust of earth was subjected in this place to a frightful pressure. The atmosphere was saturated with gases and aqueous vapors. Smith felt the volcanic tufa, the pulverulent cinders hardened by time, trembling beneath him, but he did not yet see any traces of fresh lava.
How everything had changed! Instead of just one column of smoke, he counted thirteen rising from the ground as if pushed up by a piston. It was clear that the earth's crust in this area was under intense pressure. The air was filled with gases and water vapor. Smith felt the volcanic tufa, the crumbly cinders hardened over time, shaking beneath him, but he still didn't see any signs of fresh lava.
It was the same with the western slope of the mountain. Smoke and flames escaped from the crater; a hail of scoriæ fell upon the soil; but no lava flowed from the gullet of the crater, which was another proof that the volcanic matter had not attained the upper orifice of the central chimney.
It was the same with the western slope of the mountain. Smoke and flames poured out from the crater; a shower of debris fell on the ground; but no lava flowed from the mouth of the crater, which was further evidence that the volcanic material hadn't reached the upper opening of the central chimney.
“And I would be better satisfied if they had!” said Smith to himself. “At least I would be certain that the lavas had taken their accustomed route. Who knows if they may not burst forth from some new mouth? But that is not the danger! Captain Nemo has well foreseen it! No! the danger is not there!”
“And I’d feel a lot better if they had!” Smith thought to himself. “At least I’d know that the lava had followed its usual path. Who knows if it might erupt from a different spot? But that’s not the real danger! Captain Nemo has anticipated that! No! The danger is somewhere else!”
Smith went forward as far as the enormous causeway, whose prolongation enframed Shark Gulf. Here he was able to examine the ancient lava marks. There could be no doubt that the last eruption had been at a far distant epoch.
Smith walked up to the huge causeway, which extended around Shark Gulf. Here, he was able to look at the old lava marks. There was no doubt that the last eruption had happened a long time ago.
Then he returned, listening to the subterranean rumblings, which sounded like continuous thunder, and by 9 o’clock he was at the corral.
Then he came back, listening to the low rumblings, which sounded like constant thunder, and by 9 o’clock he arrived at the corral.
Ayrton was waiting for him.
Ayrton was waiting for him.
“The animals are attended to, sir,” said he.
“The animals are taken care of, sir,” he said.
“All right, Ayrton.”
“Okay, Ayrton.”
“They seem to be restless, Mr. Smith.”
“They seem to be restless, Mr. Smith.”
“Yes, it is their instinct, which does not mislead them.”
“Yes, it’s their instinct, which doesn't steer them wrong.”
“When you are ready—”
“When you’re ready—”
“Take a lantern and tinder, Ayrton, and let us go.”
“Grab a lantern and some matches, Ayrton, and let’s go.”
Ayrton did as he was told. The onagers had been unharnessed and placed in the corral, and Smith, leading, took the route to the coast.
Ayrton did what he was instructed. The onagers had been unharnessed and put in the corral, and Smith, leading the way, took the path to the coast.
They walked over a soil covered with the pulverulent matter which had fallen from the clouds. No animal appeared. Even the birds had flown away. Sometimes a breeze passed laden with cinders, and the two colonists, caught in the cloud, were unable to see. They had to place handkerchiefs over their eyes and nostrils or they would have been blinded and suffocated.
They walked over soil covered with the fine dust that had fallen from the sky. No animals were in sight. Even the birds had disappeared. Occasionally, a breeze swept through, full of ash, and the two colonists, caught in the cloud, couldn’t see. They had to cover their eyes and noses with handkerchiefs, or they would have been blinded and suffocated.
Under these circumstances they could not march rapidly. The air was heavy, as if all the oxygen had been burned out of it, making it unfit to breathe. Every now and then they had to stop, and it was after 10 o’clock when the engineer and his companion reached the summit of the enormous heap of basaltic and porphyrytic rocks which formed the northwest coast of the island.
Under these circumstances, they couldn't walk quickly. The air was thick, as if all the oxygen had been used up, making it hard to breathe. Every now and then, they had to take a break, and it was after 10 o’clock when the engineer and his companion reached the top of the massive pile of basalt and porphyry rocks that made up the northwest coast of the island.
They began to go down this abrupt descent, following the detestable road, which, during that stormy night had led them to Crypt Dakkar. By daylight this descent was less perilous, and, moreover, the covering of cinders gave a firmer foothold to the slippery rocks.
They started to go down this steep slope, following the awful road that had taken them to Crypt Dakkar during that stormy night. In daylight, this descent was less dangerous, and the layer of cinders provided better grip on the slick rocks.
The projection was soon attained, and, as the tide was low, Smith and Ayrton found the opening to the crypt without any difficulty.
The projection was soon reached, and, since the tide was low, Smith and Ayrton easily found the entrance to the crypt.
“Is the boat there?” asked the engineer.
“Is the boat there?” the engineer asked.
“Yes, sir,” answered Ayrton, drawing the boat towards him.
“Yes, sir,” Ayrton replied, pulling the boat closer to him.
“Let us get in, then, Ayrton,” said the engineer.
“Let’s get in, then, Ayrton,” said the engineer.
The two embarked in the boat. Ayrton lit the lantern, and, placing it in the bow of the boat, took the oars, and Smith, taking the tiller, steered into the darkness.
The two got into the boat. Ayrton lit the lantern and set it in the front of the boat, grabbed the oars, while Smith took the tiller and steered into the darkness.
The Nautilus was no longer here to illuminate this sombre cavern. Perhaps the electric irradiation still shone under the waters, but no light came from the abyss where Captain Nemo reposed.
The Nautilus was no longer here to light up this dark cave. Maybe the electric glow still sparkled beneath the waves, but no light came from the depths where Captain Nemo lay.
The light of the lantern was barely sufficient to permit the engineer to advance, following the right hand wall of the crypt. A sepulchral silence reigned in this portion of the vault, but soon Smith heard distinctly the mutterings which came from the interior of the earth.
The light from the lantern was barely enough for the engineer to move forward, keeping close to the right wall of the crypt. An eerie silence filled this part of the vault, but soon Smith clearly heard the murmurs coming from deep within the earth.
“It is the volcano,” he said.
“It’s the volcano,” he said.
Soon, with this noise, the chemical combinations betrayed themselves by a strong odor, and sulphurous vapors choked the engineer and his companion.
Soon, with this noise, the chemical reactions revealed themselves with a strong smell, and sulfurous fumes suffocated the engineer and his companion.
“It is as Captain Nemo feared,” murmured Smith, growing pale. “We must go on to the end.”
“It is just as Captain Nemo was afraid,” Smith murmured, growing pale. “We have to continue to the end.”
Twenty-five minutes after having left the opening the two reached the terminal wall and stopped.
Twenty-five minutes after leaving the entrance, the two arrived at the terminal wall and paused.
Smith standing on the seat, moved the lantern about over this wall, which separated the crypt from the central chimney of the volcano. How thick was it? Whether 100 feet or but 10 could not be determined. But the subterranean noises were too plainly heard for it to be very thick.
Smith, standing on the seat, moved the lantern around over the wall that separated the crypt from the central chimney of the volcano. How thick was it? Whether it was 100 feet or just 10 couldn't be figured out. But the underground noises were loud enough to suggest it wasn't very thick.
The engineer, after having explored the wall along a horizontal line, fixed the lantern to the end of an oar and went over it again at a greater height.
The engineer, after checking the wall along a straight line, attached the lantern to the end of an oar and examined it again from a higher position.
There, through scarcely visible cracks, came a pungent smoke, which infected the air of the cavern. The wall was striped with these fractures, and some of the larger ones came to within a few feet of the water.
There, through barely noticeable cracks, came a strong smoke that filled the air of the cave. The wall was marked with these splits, and some of the bigger ones were just a few feet away from the water.
At first, Smith rested thoughtful. Then he murmured these words:—
At first, Smith sat quietly, deep in thought. Then he softly said these words:—
“Yes! Captain Nemo was right! There is the danger, and it is terrible!”
“Yes! Captain Nemo was right! There’s the danger, and it’s awful!”
Ayrton said nothing, but, on a sign from the engineer, he took up the oars, and, a half hour later, he and Smith came out of Crypt Dakkar.
Ayrton stayed silent, but, upon a signal from the engineer, he grabbed the oars, and, half an hour later, he and Smith emerged from Crypt Dakkar.
CHAPTER LXI
SMITH’S RECITAL—HASTENING THE WORK—A LAST VISIT TO THE CORRAL—THE COMBAT BETWEEN THE FIRE AND THE WATER—THE ASPECT OF THE ISLAND—THEY DECIDE TO LAUNCH THE SHIP—THE NIGHT OF THE 8TH OF MARCH.
SMITH’S RECITAL—HURRYING THE WORK—A FINAL VISIT TO THE CORRAL—THE BATTLE BETWEEN THE FIRE AND THE WATER—THE LOOK OF THE ISLAND—THEY DECIDE TO LAUNCH THE SHIP—THE NIGHT OF MARCH 8TH.
The next morning, the 8th of January, after a day and night passed at the corral, Smith and Ayrton returned to Granite House.
The next morning, January 8th, after spending a day and night at the corral, Smith and Ayrton headed back to Granite House.
Then the engineer assembled his companions, and told them that Lincoln Island was in fearful danger—a danger which no human power could prevent.
Then the engineer gathered his friends and told them that Lincoln Island was in serious danger—a danger that no human effort could stop.
“My friends,” said he,—and his voice betrayed great emotion,—“Lincoln Island is doomed to destruction sooner or later; the cause is in itself and there is no means of removing it!”
“My friends,” he said—with his voice showing deep emotion—“Lincoln Island is bound for destruction sooner or later; the cause is inherent, and there's no way to change that!”
The colonists looked at each other. They did not understand him.
The colonists exchanged glances. They didn’t understand him.
“Explain yourself, Cyrus,” said Spilett.
“Explain yourself, Cyrus,” Spilett said.
“I will, or rather I will give you the explanation which Captain Nemo gave me, when I was alone with him.”
“I will, or more accurately, I will share with you the explanation that Captain Nemo provided me when I was alone with him.”
“Captain Nemo!” cried the colonists.
“Captain Nemo!” shouted the colonists.
“Yes; it was the last service he rendered us before he died.”
“Yes, it was the last thing he did for us before he passed away.”
“The last service!” cried Pencroff. “The last service! You think, because he is dead, that he will help us no more!”
“The last service!” exclaimed Pencroff. “The last service! You think that just because he’s dead, he won’t help us anymore!”
“What did he say?” asked the reporter.
“What did he say?” the reporter asked.
“This, my friends,” answered the engineer. “Lincoln Island is not like the other islands of the Pacific, and a particular event, made known to me by Captain Nemo, will cause, sooner or later, the destruction of its submarine framework.”
“This, my friends,” replied the engineer. “Lincoln Island isn’t like the other islands in the Pacific, and a specific event, which Captain Nemo informed me about, will eventually lead to the destruction of its underwater structure.”
“Destruction of Lincoln Island! What an idea!” cried Pencroff, who, in spite of his respect for Smith, could not help shrugging his shoulders.
“Destroying Lincoln Island! What a concept!” exclaimed Pencroff, who, despite his respect for Smith, couldn’t help but shrug his shoulders.
“Listen to me, Pencroff,” continued the engineer. “This is what Captain Nemo ascertained and what I verified yesterday In Crypt Dakkar. The crypt extends under the island as far as the volcano, and is only separated from the central chimney by the wall. Now this wall is seamed with fractures and cracks, through which the sulphurous gas is already escaping.”
“Listen to me, Pencroff,” the engineer continued. “This is what Captain Nemo discovered and what I confirmed yesterday in Crypt Dakkar. The crypt stretches beneath the island all the way to the volcano and is only separated from the central chimney by a wall. This wall is filled with fractures and cracks, through which the sulfurous gas is already leaking out.”
“Well?” asked Pencroff, wrinkling his forehead.
"Well?" asked Pencroff, frowning.
“Well, I have ascertained that these fractures are widening under the pressure from within, that the basalt wall la gradually bursting open, and that, sooner or later, it will give a passage to the waters of the sea.”
“Well, I’ve determined that these cracks are expanding under the pressure from within, that the basalt wall is gradually breaking apart, and that, sooner or later, it will allow the waters of the sea to pass through.”
“That’s all right!” exclaimed Pencroff, trying still to make light of the subject. “That’s all right! The sea will put out the volcano, and that will be the end of it.”
“That’s fine!” exclaimed Pencroff, still trying to downplay the situation. “That’s fine! The sea will extinguish the volcano, and that will be that.”
“Yes, that will be the end of it!” answered Smith. “On the day that the sea rushes through the wall and penetrates by the central chimney to the bowels of the island, where the eruptive matter is boiling, on that day, Pencroff, Lincoln Island will go up, as Sicily would go up, if the Mediterranean was emptied into Aetna!”
“Yes, that will be the end of it!” replied Smith. “The day the sea breaks through the wall and flows through the central chimney into the depths of the island, where the volcanic material is bubbling, on that day, Pencroff, Lincoln Island will erupt, just like Sicily would if the Mediterranean poured into Mount Etna!”
The colonists made no reply. They understood the threatened danger.
The colonists didn't respond. They recognized the looming threat.
It was no longer doubtful that the island was menaced by a frightful explosion. That it would last only as long as the wall to Crypt Dakkar remained intact. This was not a question of months, nor of weeks, bat of days, of hours, perhaps!
It was no longer in doubt that the island was threatened by a terrifying explosion. It would last only as long as the wall to Crypt Dakkar stayed intact. This wasn't a matter of months or weeks, but of days, maybe even hours!
The first sensation the colonists experienced was one of profound sorrow. They did not think of the peril which menaced them directly, but of the destruction of that land which had given them asylum, of that island which they had cultivated, which they loved, which they wished to render so prosperous some day! All their labor uselessly employed, all their work lost!
The first feeling the colonists had was deep sadness. They didn’t focus on the immediate danger threatening them, but on the devastation of the land that had provided them refuge, of the island they had nurtured, loved, and hoped to make prosperous one day! All their hard work was in vain, all their efforts wasted!
Pencroff did not attempt to hide the tears which rolled down his cheeks.
Pencroff didn't try to hide the tears streaming down his face.
They talked for some little time longer. The chances which they might count upon were discussed; but, in conclusion, they realized that not an hour was to be lost; that the ship must be completed as soon as possible, as, now, it was the only chance of safety left, to the inhabitants of Lincoln Island!
They talked for a little while longer. They discussed the chances they could rely on; but in the end, they realized there was not a moment to waste. The ship needed to be finished as soon as possible, as it was now the only remaining option for safety for the people of Lincoln Island!
All hands were required. Where was the use, now, of sowing, or harvesting, of hunting or increasing the reserve at Granite House? The present contents of the magazine were sufficient to provision the ship for as long a voyage as she could make! What was necessary was that these should be at
All hands were needed. What was the point now of planting or gathering crops, hunting, or increasing the supplies at Granite House? The current stock in the storage was enough to supply the ship for as long as she could sail! What was needed was that these should be at
the disposal of the colonists before the accomplishment of the inevitable catastrophe.
the removal of the colonists before the eventual disaster was achieved.
The work was undertaken with feverish eagerness. By the 23d of January the ship was half planked. Up to this time there had been no change in the volcano. It was always the vapors, the smoke mixed with flames and pierced by incandescent stones, which escaped from the crater. But during the night of the 23d the upper cone, which formed the cap of the volcano, was lifted off by the pressure of the lava, which had reached the level of the lower cone. A terrible noise was heard. The colonists, believing that the island was going to pieces, rushed out of Granite House.
The work was done with intense enthusiasm. By January 23rd, the ship was halfway planked. Until that point, there had been no change in the volcano. It consistently released vapors, smoke mixed with flames, and glowing rocks from its crater. However, during the night of the 23rd, the upper cone, which was the volcano's cap, got blown off by the pressure of the lava that had reached the level of the lower cone. A loud noise erupted. The colonists, thinking the island was falling apart, rushed out of Granite House.
It was 2 o’clock in the morning. The heavens were on fire. The upper cone—a mass a thousand feet high, and weighing thousands of millions of pounds—had been thrown upon the island, making the earth tremble. Happily, this cone leaned to the north, and it fell upon the plain of sand and tufa which lay between the volcano and the sea. The crater, by this means greatly widened, threw towards the sky a light so intense, that, by the simple effect of reverberation, the atmosphere seemed to be incandescent. At the same time a torrent of lava swelled up over this new summit, falling in long streams, like water escaping from an overflowing vase, and a thousand fiery serpents writhed upon the talus of the volcano.
It was 2 o'clock in the morning. The sky was ablaze. The upper cone—a mass a thousand feet high, weighing millions of tons—had been hurled onto the island, making the ground shake. Fortunately, this cone tilted to the north and landed on the sandy and tufa plain between the volcano and the sea. The crater, as a result, widened significantly and sent a light so bright into the sky that, due to the way it reflected, the atmosphere looked like it was glowing. At the same time, a torrent of lava surged over this new peak, flowing in long streams, like water spilling from an overflowing vase, while a thousand fiery serpents twisted on the slope of the volcano.
“The corral! The corral!” cried Ayrton.
“The corral! The corral!” shouted Ayrton.
It was, indeed, towards the corral that the lava took their way, following the slope of the new crater, and, consequently, the fertile parts of the island. The sources of Red Creek, and Jacamar Wood were threatened with immediate destruction.
It was, in fact, toward the corral that the lava flowed, following the slope of the new crater and, as a result, the fertile areas of the island. The sources of Red Creek and Jacamar Wood were facing imminent destruction.
At the cry of Ayrton, the colonists had rushed towards the stable of the onagers, and harnessed the animals. All had but one thought. To fly to the corral and let loose the beasts confined there.
At Ayrton's shout, the colonists hurried to the onager stable and hitched up the animals. They were all thinking the same thing: to rush to the corral and set free the animals locked up there.
Before 3 o’clock they were there. Frightful cries indicated the terror of the moufflons and goats. Already a torrent of incandescent matter, of liquified minerals, fell over the mountain spur upon the plain, destroying that side of the palisade. The gate was hastily opened by Ayrton, and the animals, wild with terror, escaped in every direction.
Before 3 o’clock, they arrived. Horrifying screams showed how terrified the moufflons and goats were. Already, a cascade of molten material, made up of liquefied minerals, was pouring down the mountain ridge onto the plain, destroying that part of the palisade. Ayrton quickly opened the gate, and the animals, panicked with fear, scattered in all directions.
An hour later the boiling lava filled the corral, volatilizing the water of the little brook which traversed it, firing the house, which burned like a bit of stubble, devouring to the last stake the surrounding palisade. Nothing was left of the corral.
An hour later, the bubbling lava filled the corral, vaporizing the water from the small brook that ran through it, igniting the house, which burned like dry grass, consuming every last stake of the surrounding fence. Nothing remained of the corral.
The colonists wanted to struggle against this invasion; they had tried it, but foolishly and uselessly: man is helpless before these grand cataclysms.
The colonists wanted to fight against this invasion; they had attempted it, but foolishly and in vain: people are powerless against these massive disasters.
The morning of the 24th arrived. Smith and his companions, before returning to Granite House, wished to observe the definite direction which this inundation of lava would take. The general slope of the ground from Mount Franklin was towards the east coast, and it was to be feared that, notwithstanding the thick Jacamar Woods, the torrent would extend to Prospect Plateau.
The morning of the 24th arrived. Smith and his friends, before heading back to Granite House, wanted to see the exact path this lava flow would take. The overall slope of the land from Mount Franklin sloped toward the east coast, and there was concern that, despite the dense Jacamar Woods, the flow might reach Prospect Plateau.
“The lake will protect us,” said Spilett.
“The lake will keep us safe,” said Spilett.
“I hope so,” answered Smith. But that was all he said.
“I hope so,” Smith replied. But that was all he said.
The colonists would have liked to have advanced as far as the place on which the upper cone of Mount Franklin abutted, but their passage was barred by the lavas, which followed, on the one hand, the valley of Red Creek, and, on the other, the course of Fall River, vaporizing these two streams in their passage. There was no possible way of crossing this stream; it was necessary, on the contrary, to fly before it. The flattened volcano was no longer recognizable. A sort of smooth slab terminated it, replacing the old crater. Two outlets, broken in the south and east sides, poured forth unceasing streams of lava, which formed two distinct currents. Above the new crater, a cloud of smoke and cinders mixed with the vapors of the sky, and hung over the island. Peals of thunder mingled with the rumbling of the mountain. Burning rocks were thrown up thousands of feet, bursting in the sky and scattering like grape-shot. The heavens answered with lightning-flashes the eruption of the volcano.
The colonists wanted to move as far as the spot where the upper cone of Mount Franklin met the land, but they were blocked by the lava flows. These flows followed the valley of Red Creek on one side and the path of Fall River on the other, vaporizing both streams as they moved. There was no way to cross the streams; instead, they had to escape from them. The flattened volcano was unrecognizable. A smooth slab had taken the place of the old crater. Two openings on the south and east sides continuously released streams of lava, creating two separate flows. Above the new crater, a cloud of smoke and cinders mixed with the vapors in the sky, hanging over the island. Thunder rolled along with the rumbling of the mountain. Burning rocks were thrown thousands of feet into the air, bursting in the sky and scattering like buckshot. The heavens responded with flashes of lightning to the eruption of the volcano.
By 7 o’clock the colonists were no longer able to keep their position on the edge of Jacamar Wood. Not only did the projectiles begin to fall about them, but the lavas, overflowing the bed of Red Creek, threatened to cut off the road from the corral. The first ranks of trees took fire, and their sap, vaporized, made them explode like fire-crackers; while others, less humid, remained intact in the midst of the inundation.
By 7 o'clock, the colonists could no longer hold their position at the edge of Jacamar Wood. Not only were projectiles starting to rain down around them, but the lava overflowing from Red Creek threatened to block the road from the corral. The first rows of trees caught fire, and their sap vaporized, causing them to explode like firecrackers, while others, which were less moist, stayed unharmed amidst the flooding.
The colonists started back. The torrent, owing to the slope of the land, gained eastward rapidly, and as the lower layers of lava hardened, others, boiling, covered them.
The colonists headed back. The rushing water, because of the slope of the land, flowed eastward quickly, and as the lower layers of lava cooled, other layers, bubbling, covered them.
Meantime the principal current in the Red Creek Valley became more and more threatening. All that part of the forest was surrounded, and enormous clouds of smoke rolled above the trees, whose roots were already in the lava.
Meantime, the main current in the Red Creek Valley grew increasingly threatening. That entire section of the forest was surrounded, and massive clouds of smoke billowed above the trees, whose roots were already in the lava.
The colonists stopped at the lake shore, half a mile from the mouth of Red Creek. A question of life or death was about to be decided for them. Smith, accustomed to think and reason in the presence of danger, and aware that he was speaking to men who could face the truth, whatever it might be, said to them:—
The colonists paused at the lakeshore, half a mile from the mouth of Red Creek. A life-or-death decision was about to be made for them. Smith, used to thinking and reasoning in the face of danger, and knowing he was talking to men who could handle the truth, whatever it might be, said to them:—
“Either the lake will arrest this current, and a part of the island will be preserved from complete devastation, or the current will invade the forests of the Far West, and not a tree, not a plant will be left upon the face of the ground. We will have, upon these rocks stripped of life, the prospect of a death which the explosion of the island may anticipate!
“Either the lake will stop this current, and some of the island will be saved from total destruction, or the current will sweep through the forests of the Far West, leaving not a tree or plant on the ground. We will be left with these lifeless rocks, facing a death that the island's explosion might bring sooner!”
“Then,” cried Pencroff, crossing his arms and stamping his foot on the ground, “it is useless to work on the ship! Isn’t that so?”
“Then,” shouted Pencroff, crossing his arms and stomping his foot on the ground, “it's pointless to work on the ship! Right?”
“Pencroff,” answered Smith, “it is necessary to do one’s duty to the end.”
“Pencroff,” Smith replied, “it’s important to do your duty until the very end.”
At this moment, the flood of lava, after having eaten its way through the splendid trees of the forest, neared the lake. There was a certain depression in the ground, which, if it had been larger, might, perhaps, suffice to hold the torrent.
At this moment, the flow of lava, after burning through the beautiful trees of the forest, approached the lake. There was a small dip in the ground, which, if it had been bigger, might have been able to contain the stream.
“Let us try!” cried Smith.
"Let's give it a try!" cried Smith.
The idea of the engineer was instantly understood by all. It was necessary to dam, so to speak, this torrent and force it into the lake.
The concept of the engineer was quickly grasped by everyone. It was essential to, so to speak, block this flood and redirect it into the lake.
The colonists ran to the shipyard and brought back from there shovels, picks, and hatchets, and by means of earthworks and hewn trees they succeeded, in a few hours, in raising a barrier three feet high and some hundreds of feet long. It seemed to them, when they had finished, that they had not worked more than a few minutes!
The colonists hurried to the shipyard and returned with shovels, picks, and hatchets. Using dirt and cut trees, they managed to build a three-foot-high barrier that stretched for several hundred feet in just a few hours. When they were done, it felt to them like they had only worked for a few minutes!
It was time. The liquified matter already reached the extremity of the barrier. The flood spread like a swollen river seeking to overflow its banks and threatening to break down the only obstacle which could prevent its devastating all the Far West. But the barrier was sufficient to withstand it, and, after one terrible moment of hesitation, it precipitated itself into Lake Grant by a fall twenty feet high.
It was time. The liquefied substance had already reached the edge of the barrier. The flood spread like an overloaded river trying to overflow its banks, threatening to break down the only thing that could stop it from destroying the entire Far West. But the barrier held strong, and after one intense moment of doubt, it plunged into Lake Grant from a height of twenty feet.
The colonists, breathless, without a word, without a gesture, looked upon this struggle of the elements.
The colonists, out of breath, speechless, and motionless, watched this battle of the elements.
What a sight was this, the combat between fire and water! What pen can describe this scene of marvellous horror; what pencil can portray it? The water hissed and steamed at the contact of the boiling lavas. The steam was thrown, whirling, to an immeasurable height in the air, as if the valves of an immense boiler had been suddenly opened. But, great as was the mass of water contained in the lake, it must, finally, be absorbed, since it was not renewed, while the torrent, fed from an inexhaustible source, was ceaselessly pouring in fresh floods of incandescent matter.
What a sight this was, the battle between fire and water! What words can really capture this scene of amazing terror; what artist can paint it? The water hissed and steamed when it met the boiling lava. The steam shot up, swirling into the sky as if the valves of a giant boiler had suddenly burst open. But despite the large amount of water in the lake, it would eventually be absorbed since it wasn’t being replenished, while the torrent, fed by an endless source, kept pouring in fresh waves of molten matter.
The first lavas which fell into the lake solidified at once, and accumulated in such a manner as soon to emerge above the surface. Over these slid other lavas, which in their turn became stone, forming a breakwater, which threatened to fill up the lake, which could not overflow, as its surplus water was carried off in steam. Hissings and shrivellings filled the air with a stunning noise, and the steam, carried off by the wind, fell to the ground in rain. The jetty spread, and where formerly had been peaceable waters appeared an enormous heap of smoking rocks, as if some upheaval of the ground had raised these thousands of reefs. If one can imagine these waters tossed about by a storm, and then suddenly solidified by cold, he will have the appearance of the lake three hours after the irresistible torrent had poured into it.
The first lava that flowed into the lake solidified immediately and built up in a way that soon made it rise above the surface. Other layers of lava slid over these, which also turned into rock, creating a barrier that threatened to fill the lake, which couldn't overflow because its excess water was released as steam. Hissing and crackling filled the air with a deafening noise, and the steam, blown away by the wind, came back down as rain. The jetty expanded, and where there had once been calm waters, there now stood a massive pile of smoking rocks, as if some shifting of the ground had pushed up these thousands of reefs. If you can imagine these waters being tossed around by a storm, then suddenly frozen by cold, that's what the lake looked like three hours after the unstoppable torrent had flowed into it.
This time the water had been overcome by the fire.
This time, the fire had triumphed over the water.
Nevertheless, it was a fortunate thing for the colonists that the lavas had been turned into the lake. It gave them some days’ respite. Prospect Plateau, Granite House, and the ship-yard were safe for the moment. In these few days they must plank and caulk the vessel, launch it, and take refuge upon it, rigging it after it was on the sea. With the fear of the explosion menacing the destruction of the island, it was no longer safe to remain on land. Granite House, so safe a retreat up to this time, might, at any moment, fall!
Nevertheless, it was a lucky break for the colonists that the lava had formed a lake. It gave them a few days of relief. Prospect Plateau, Granite House, and the shipyard were safe for the time being. During these days, they needed to plank and caulk the vessel, launch it, and seek refuge on it, rigging it once it was on the sea. With the threat of an explosion hanging over the island, staying on land was no longer safe. Granite House, which had been such a secure hideout until now, could collapse at any moment!
During the next six days, the colonists worked on the ship with all their might. Sleeping but little, the light of the flames from the volcano permitted them to work by night as well as by day. The eruption continued without cessation, but, perhaps, less abundantly. A fortunate circumstance, since Lake Grant was nearly full; and if fresh lavas had slid over the surface of the former layers, they would inevitably have spread over Prospect Plateau and from there to the shore.
During the next six days, the colonists worked on the ship with everything they had. They slept very little, using the light from the volcano’s flames to work both day and night. The eruption kept going non-stop, though maybe not as intensely. This was a lucky break because Lake Grant was almost full; if fresh lava had flowed over the previous layers, it would have definitely spread over Prospect Plateau and reached the shore.
But while this part of the island was partially protected it was otherwise with the west coast.
But while this part of the island was somewhat protected, the same couldn’t be said for the west coast.
The second current of lava, following the valley of Fall River, met with no obstacle. The ground on either side of the bank was low, and the incandescent liquid was spread through the forest of the Far West. At this season of the year the trees were dried by the warmth of the summer and took fire instantly, and the high interlacing branches hastened the progress of the conflagration. It seemed as if the current of flame traversed the surface of the forest more swiftly than the current of lavas its depths.
The second flow of lava, following the valley of Fall River, faced no barriers. The land on either side of the bank was low, and the glowing liquid spread through the forest of the Far West. During this time of year, the trees were dried out from the summer heat and caught fire immediately, with the tall intertwining branches speeding up the spread of the blaze. It felt like the wave of flames moved through the forest faster than the lava did beneath the surface.
The beasts and birds of the woods sought refuge on the shore of the Mercy and in the marshes of Tadorn’s Fens. But the colonists were too busy to pay any attention to these animals. They had, moreover, abandoned Granite House; they had not even sought refuge in the Chimneys, but they camped in a tent near the mouth of the Mercy.
The animals and birds from the woods found safety on the banks of the Mercy and in the marshes of Tadorn’s Fens. But the colonists were too occupied to notice them. In fact, they had left Granite House; they didn’t even take shelter in the Chimneys, but set up camp in a tent near the mouth of the Mercy.
Every day Smith and Spilett climbed up to Prospect Plateau. Sometimes Herbert went with them, but Pencroff never. The sailor did not wish to look upon the island in its present condition of devastation.
Every day, Smith and Spilett climbed up to Prospect Plateau. Sometimes, Herbert joined them, but Pencroff never did. The sailor didn't want to see the island in its current state of destruction.
It was, indeed, a desolate spectacle. All its wooded part was now denuded. One single group of green trees remained on the extremity of Serpentine Peninsula. Here and there appeared some blackened stumps. The site of the forests was more desolate than Tadorn’s Fens. The invasion of the lavas had been complete. Where formerly had been a pleasant verdure, was now nothing but a waste covered with volcanic tufa. The valleys of Fall River and Red Creek contained no water, and if Lake Grant had been completely filled up, the colonists would have had no means to slack their thirst. But fortunately its southern extremity had been spared, and formed a sort of pool, which held all the fresh water remaining on the island. To the northwest the spurs of the mountain, in jagged outline, looked like a gigantic claw grasping the ground. What a doleful spectacle! What a frightful aspect! How grevious for the colonists, who, from a domain, fertile, wooded,
It was truly a bleak sight. The entire wooded area was now stripped bare. Only one small group of green trees remained at the tip of Serpentine Peninsula. Here and there, blackened stumps could be seen. The area that once had forests was more desolate than Tadorn’s Fens. The lava invasion was total. Where there used to be lush greenery was now just a wasteland covered in volcanic tufa. The valleys of Fall River and Red Creek were dry, and if Lake Grant had filled up completely, the colonists would have had no way to quench their thirst. Luckily, the southern end of the lake was untouched, forming a pool that held all the fresh water left on the island. To the northwest, the mountain's jagged peaks resembled a gigantic claw clutching the ground. What a sorrowful sight! What a terrifying image! How heartbreaking for the colonists, who had once thrived in a land that was fertile and wooded.
traversed by water-courses, enriched by harvests, found themselves, in an instant, reduced to a devastated rock, upon which, without their stores, they would not have had the means of living.
traversed by waterways, enriched by crops, suddenly found themselves reduced to a barren rock, on which, without their supplies, they would not have been able to survive.
“It is heart-breaking!” said the reporter.
"It’s so heartbreaking!" said the reporter.
“Yes, Spilett,” answered the engineer. And pray heaven that we are given time to finish the ship, which is now our sole refuge!”
“Yes, Spilett,” replied the engineer. “And I hope we get enough time to finish the ship, as it's our only hope!”
“Does it not seem to you, Cyrus, that the volcano is subsiding? It still vomits lava, but, I think, less freely!”
“Doesn’t it seem to you, Cyrus, that the volcano is calming down? It’s still spewing lava, but I think it’s doing so less freely!”
“It matters little,” answered Smith. “The fire is still fierce in the bowels of the mountain, and the sea may rush in there at any moment. We are like persons on a ship devoured by a fire which they cannot control, who know that sooner or later the flames will reach the powder magazine. Come, Spilett, come, we have not an hour to lose!”
“It doesn’t really matter,” replied Smith. “The fire is still raging deep inside the mountain, and the sea could break in there at any moment. We're like people on a ship consumed by a fire they can't control, knowing that sooner or later the flames will reach the gunpowder. Come on, Spilett, let’s move; we don’t have an hour to waste!”
For eight days longer, that is to say until the 8th of February, the lavas continued to flow, but the eruption confined itself to the limits described. Smith feared more than anything else an overflow of the lavas on to the beach, in which case the ship-yard would be destroyed. But about this time the colonists felt vibrations in the ground which gave them the greatest uneasiness.
For eight more days, until February 8th, the lava kept flowing, but the eruption stayed within the described boundaries. Smith was mostly worried about the lava spilling over onto the beach, which would destroy the shipyard. Around this time, the colonists started feeling vibrations in the ground that made them very anxious.
The 20th of February arrived. A month longer was necessary to fit the ship for sea. Would the island last that long? It was Smith’s intention to launch her as soon as her hull should be sufficiently caulked. The deck, lining, arranging the interior, and the rigging could be done afterwards, but the important thing was to secure a refuge off the island. Perhaps it would be better to take the vessel round to Balloon Harbor, the point farthest from the eruptive centre, as, at the mouth of the Mercy, between the islet and the granite wall, she ran the risk of being crushed, in case of a breaking up of the island. Therefore, all the efforts of the workmen were directed to completing the hull.
The 20th of February arrived. It would take another month to prepare the ship for sea. Would the island last that long? Smith intended to launch her as soon as the hull was sufficiently caulked. The deck, lining, interior arrangements, and rigging could be done later, but the priority was to secure a refuge off the island. It might be better to move the vessel to Balloon Harbor, the point farthest from the eruptive center, since at the mouth of the Mercy, between the islet and the granite wall, she risked being crushed if the island broke apart. So, all the workmen's efforts were focused on completing the hull.
On the 3d of March they were able to calculate that the ship could be launched in twelve days.
On the 3rd of March, they figured out that the ship could be launched in twelve days.
Hope returned to the hearts of these colonists, who had been so sorely tried during this fourth year of their sojourn on Lincoln Island! Even Pencroff was roused from the taciturnity into which he had been plunged by the ruin and devastation of his domain. He thought of nothing else but the ship, on which he concentrated all his hopes.
Hope returned to the hearts of these colonists, who had been so severely tested during this fourth year of their stay on Lincoln Island! Even Pencroff was pulled out of the silence he had fallen into because of the destruction of his land. He thought of nothing else but the ship, on which he focused all his hopes.
“We will finish her!” he said to the engineer, “we will finish her, Mr. Smith, and it is high time, for you see how far advanced the season is, and it will soon be the equinox. Well, if it is necessary, we will winter at Tabor Island! But Tabor Island after Lincoln Island! Alas! how unlucky I am! To think that I should live to see such a thing as this!”
“We’re going to finish her!” he told the engineer. “We’re going to finish her, Mr. Smith, and it’s about time. Just look at how far along the season is; the equinox is almost here. If we need to, we can spend the winter at Tabor Island! But Tabor Island after Lincoln Island! What bad luck I have! To think I’d live to see something like this!”
“Let us make haste!” was the invariable answer of the engineer.
“Let’s hurry!” was the engineer's usual response.
And every one worked unceasingly.
And everyone worked non-stop.
“Master,” asked Neb, some days later, “if Captain Nemo had been alive, do you think this would have happened?”
“Master,” Neb asked a few days later, “if Captain Nemo were still alive, do you think this would have happened?”
“Yes, Neb,” answered the engineer.
“Yes, Neb,” replied the engineer.
“I don’t think so!” whispered Pencroff to the negro.
“I don't think so!” whispered Pencroff to the guy.
“Nor I!” replied Neb.
"Me neither!" replied Neb.
During the first week in March Mount Franklin became again threatening. Thousands of threads of glass, made by the fluid lavas, fell like rain to the ground. The crater gave forth fresh torrents of lava that flowed down every side of the volcano. These torrents flowed over the surface of hardened lava, and destroyed the last vestiges of the trees which had survived the first eruption. The current, this time following the southwest shore of Lake Grant, flowed along Glycerine Creek and invaded Prospect Plateau. This last calamity was a terrible blow to the colonists; of the mill, the poultry-yard, the stables, nothing remained. The frightened inhabitants of these places fled in every direction. Top and Jup gave signs of the utmost terror, and their instinct warned them of an impending disaster. A large number of animals had perished in the first eruption, and those which survived had found their only refuge in Tadorn’s Fens, and on Prospect Plateau. But this last retreat was now closed from them, and the torrent of lava having reached the edge of the granite wall, began to fall over on to the shore in cataracts of fire. The sublime horror of this spectacle passes all description. At night it looked like a Niagara of molten matter, with its incandescent spray rising on high and its boiling masses below!
During the first week of March, Mount Franklin became threatening again. Thousands of glass threads, created by the flowing lava, fell to the ground like rain. The crater released fresh torrents of lava that cascaded down every side of the volcano. These torrents spread over the hardened lava surface, destroying the last remnants of the trees that had survived the initial eruption. This time, the flow followed the southwest shore of Lake Grant, traveled along Glycerine Creek, and invaded Prospect Plateau. This latest disaster was a huge blow to the colonists; nothing was left of the mill, the poultry yard, or the stables. The terrified residents fled in every direction. Top and Jup showed extreme fear, and their instincts warned them of an impending disaster. Many animals had died in the first eruption, and those that survived had found refuge in Tadorn’s Fens and on Prospect Plateau. But now, this last refuge was cut off from them, and as the lava torrent reached the edge of the granite wall, it began to spill over onto the shore in streams of fire. The awe-inspiring horror of this sight is beyond description. At night, it resembled a Niagara of molten material, with its glowing spray rising high and its boiling masses below!
The colonists were driven to their last refuge, and, although the upper seams were uncaulked, they resolved to launch their ship into the sea!
The colonists were pushed to their last safe place, and even though the upper seams weren't sealed, they decided to set their ship adrift into the ocean!
Pencroff and Ayrton made the preparations for this event, which was to take place on the morning of the next day, the 9th of March.
Pencroff and Ayrton got everything ready for this event that was set to happen on the morning of the next day, March 9th.
But, during that night, an enormous column of steam escaped from the crater, rising in the midst of terrific detonations to a height of more than 3,000 feet. The wall of Crypt Dakkar had given way under the pressure of the gas, and the sea, pouring
But that night, a huge column of steam shot out from the crater, rising amid loud explosions to a height of over 3,000 feet. The wall of Crypt Dakkar had collapsed under the pressure of the gas, and the sea, pouring
through the central chimney into the burning gulf, was turned into steam!
through the central chimney into the burning pit, was turned into steam!
The crater was not a sufficient vent for this vapor!
The crater wasn’t enough to release this vapor!
An explosion, which could have been heard a hundred miles away, shook the very heavens! Fragments of the mountain fell into the Pacific, and, in a few minutes, the ocean covered the place where Lincoln Island had been!
An explosion that could be heard a hundred miles away shook the skies! Pieces of the mountain plunged into the Pacific, and within minutes, the ocean swallowed up the spot where Lincoln Island used to be!
CHAPTER LXII.
AN ISOLATED ROCK IN THE PACIFIC—THE LAST REFUGE OF THE COLONISTS—THE PROSPECT OF DEATH—UNEXPECTED SUCCOR—HOW AND WHY IT CAME—THE LAST GOOD ACTION—AN ISLAND ON TERRA FIRMA-THE TOMB OF CAPTAIN NEMO.
AN ISOLATED ROCK IN THE PACIFIC—THE LAST REFUGE OF THE COLONISTS—THE PROSPECT OF DEATH—UNEXPECTED HELP—HOW AND WHY IT CAME—THE LAST GOOD DEED—AN ISLAND ON LAND—THE TOMB OF CAPTAIN NEMO.
An isolated rock, thirty feet long, fifteen feet wide, rising ten feet above the surface of the water, this was the sole solid point which had not vanished beneath the waves of the Pacific.
An isolated rock, thirty feet long, fifteen feet wide, rising ten feet above the surface of the water, this was the only solid point that hadn’t disappeared beneath the waves of the Pacific.
It was all that remained of Granite House! The wall had been thrown over, then broken to pieces, and some of the rocks of the great hall had been so heaped together as to form this culminating point. All else had disappeared in the surrounding abyss: the lower cone of Mount Franklin, torn to pieces by the explosion; the lava jaws of Shark Gulf; Prospect Plateau, Safety Islet, the granite of Balloon Harbor; the basalt of Crypt Dakkar; Serpentine Peninsula—had been precipitated into the eruptive centre! All that remained of Lincoln Island was this rock, the refuge of the six colonists and their dog Top.
It was all that was left of Granite House! The wall had been knocked down and shattered into pieces, and some of the rocks from the great hall had been piled up to create this peak. Everything else had vanished into the surrounding void: the lower cone of Mount Franklin, shattered by the explosion; the lava cliffs of Shark Gulf; Prospect Plateau, Safety Islet, the granite of Balloon Harbor; the basalt of Crypt Dakkar; Serpentine Peninsula—had all been dropped into the eruptive center! All that remained of Lincoln Island was this rock, the refuge for the six colonists and their dog Top.
All the animals had perished in the catastrophe. The birds as well as the beasts, all were crashed or drowned, and poor Jup, alas! had been swallowed up in some crevasse in the ground!
All the animals had died in the disaster. The birds and the beasts, all were crushed or drowned, and poor Jup, unfortunately! had been swallowed up in some crack in the ground!
Smith, Spilett, Herbert, Pencroff, Neb, and Ayrton had survived, because, being gathered together in their tent, they had been thrown into the sea, at the moment when the debris of the island rained down upon the water.
Smith, Spilett, Herbert, Pencroff, Neb, and Ayrton had made it through, because while they were all together in their tent, they had been tossed into the sea just as the island's debris was falling into the water.
When they came again to the surface they saw nothing but this rock, half a cable length away, to which they swam.
When they resurfaced, they saw nothing except this rock, half a cable length away, and they swam to it.
They had been here nine days! Some provisions, brought from the magazine of Granite House before the catastrophe, a little soft water left by the rain in the crevice of the rock—this was all that the unfortunates possessed. Their last hope, their ship, had been broken to pieces. They had no means of leaving this reef. No fire, nor anything with which to make it. They were doomed to perish!
They had been here for nine days! A few supplies, taken from the store of Granite House before the disaster, and a little fresh water left by the rain in the crack of the rock—this was all the unfortunate people had. Their last hope, their ship, had been wrecked. They had no way to escape this reef. No fire, and nothing to create one. They were doomed to die!
This day, the 18th of March, there remained a supply of food, which, with the strictest care, could last but forty-eight hours longer. All their knowledge, all their skill, could avail them nothing now. They were entirely at God’s mercy.
This day, the 18th of March, there was still some food left, which, with the utmost care, could only last another forty-eight hours. All their knowledge and skill couldn’t help them now. They were completely at God’s mercy.
Smith was calm, Spilett somewhat nervous, and Pencroff, ready to throw himself into the sea. Herbert never left the engineer; and gazed upon him, as if demanding the succor which he could not give. Neb and Ayrton were resigned after their manner.
Smith was calm, Spilett was a bit nervous, and Pencroff felt like jumping into the sea. Herbert never left the engineer's side and looked at him as if expecting help that he couldn’t provide. Neb and Ayrton accepted the situation in their own way.
“Oh, misery! misery!” repeated Pencroff. “If we had but a walnut-shell to take us to Tabor Island! But nothing; not a thing!”
“Oh, what misery! What misery!” Pencroff repeated. “If only we had a walnut shell to take us to Tabor Island! But we have nothing; absolutely nothing!”
“And Captain Nemo is dead!” said Neb.
“And Captain Nemo is dead!” said Neb.
During the five days which followed, Smith and his companions ate just enough of the supply of food to keep them from famishing. Their feebleness was extreme. Herbert and Neb began to show signs of delirium.
During the five days that followed, Smith and his companions ate just enough of the food supply to prevent starvation. Their weakness was severe. Herbert and Neb started to show signs of delirium.
In this situation had they a shadow of hope? No! What was their sole chance? That a ship would pass in sight of the rock? They knew, by experience, that ships never visited this part of the Pacific. Could they count, then, by a coincidence which would be truly providential, upon the Scotch yacht coming just at this time to search for Ayrton at Tabor Island? It was not probable. And, moreover, supposing that it came, since the colonists had placed no notice there indicating the place where Ayrton was to be found, the captain of the yacht, after a fruitless search of the island, would proceed at once to regain the lower latitudes.
In this situation, did they have any hope? No! What was their only chance? That a ship would happen to pass by the rock? They knew from experience that ships rarely came to this part of the Pacific. Could they really rely on the Scotch yacht just coincidentally showing up at this moment to look for Ayrton at Tabor Island? That didn’t seem likely. Plus, even if it did show up, since the colonists hadn’t left any notice there about where Ayrton could be found, the captain of the yacht would just move on to lower latitudes after searching the island in vain.
No! they could entertain no hope of being saved, and a horrible death, a death by hunger and thirst, awaited them upon this rock!
No! they had no hope of being saved, and a terrible death, a death by hunger and thirst, was waiting for them on this rock!
Already they lay stretched out, inanimate, unconscious of what was going on around them. Only, Ayrton, by a supreme effort, raised his head, and cast a despairing look over this desert sea!
Already they lay stretched out, lifeless, unaware of what was happening around them. Only Ayrton, with a tremendous effort, lifted his head and cast a hopeless glance over this desolate sea!
But, behold! on this morning of the 24th of March, Ayrton extended his arms towards some point in space; he rose up, first to his knees, then stood upright; he waved his hand—
But, look! on the morning of March 24th, Ayrton lifted his arms toward a spot in the air; he got up, first onto his knees, then stood up straight; he waved his hand—
A ship was in sight of the island! This ship did not sail these seas at hap-hazard. The reef was the point towards which she directed her course, crowding on all steam, and the unfortunates would have seen her many hours before, had they had the strength to scan the horizon!
A ship was now in sight of the island! This ship didn't just sail these waters randomly. The reef was the destination she was steering toward, pushing full steam ahead, and the unfortunate souls would have spotted her many hours earlier if they had the strength to look across the horizon!
“The Duncan!” murmured Ayrton, and then he fell senseless upon the rock.
“The Duncan!” whispered Ayrton, and then he collapsed unconscious onto the rock.
When Smith and his companions regained consciousness, thanks to the care lavished upon them, they found themselves in the cabin of a steamer, unaware of the manner in which they had escaped death.
When Smith and his friends woke up, thanks to the attention they received, they discovered they were in the cabin of a steamer, not knowing how they had survived.
A word from Ayrton was sufficient to enlighten them.
A word from Ayrton was enough to clarify things for them.
“It is the Duncan,” he murmured.
“It’s the Duncan,” he whispered.
“The Duncan!” answered Smith. And then, raising his arms to heaven, he exclaimed:—
"The Duncan!" replied Smith. Then, raising his arms to the sky, he exclaimed:—
“Oh, all powerful Providence! thou hast wished that we should be saved!”
“Oh, all-powerful Providence! You have willed that we should be saved!”
It was, indeed, the Duncan, Lord Glenarvan’s yacht, at this time commanded by Robert, the son of Captain Grant, who had been sent to Tabor Island to search for Ayrton and bring him home after twelve years of expatriation!
It was, indeed, the Duncan, Lord Glenarvan’s yacht, at this time commanded by Robert, the son of Captain Grant, who had been sent to Tabor Island to search for Ayrton and bring him home after twelve years of living abroad!
The colonists were saved, they were already on the homeward route!
The colonists were rescued; they were already heading home!
“Captain Robert,” asked Smith, “what suggested to you the idea, after leaving Tabor Island, where you were unable to find Ayrton, to come in this direction?”
“Captain Robert,” Smith asked, “what made you think, after leaving Tabor Island where you couldn’t find Ayrton, to come this way?”
“It was to search, not only for Ayrton, Mr. Smith, but for you and your companions!”
“It was to search for not just Ayrton, Mr. Smith, but for you and your friends too!”
“My companions and myself?”
"My friends and I?"
“Doubtless! On Lincoln Island!”
"Definitely! On Lincoln Island!"
“Lincoln Island!” cried the others, greatly astonished.
“Lincoln Island!” the others exclaimed, very surprised.
“How did you know of Lincoln Island?” asked Smith. “It is not on the maps.”
“How did you find out about Lincoln Island?” asked Smith. “It’s not on the maps.”
“I knew of it by the notice which you left on Tabor Island,” answered Grant.
“I found out about it from the notice you left on Tabor Island,” Grant replied.
“The notice?” cried Spilett.
"Did you see the notice?" cried Spilett.
“Certainly, and here it is,” replied the other, handing him a paper indicating the exact position of the Lincoln Island, “the actual residence of Ayrton and of five American colonists.”
“Of course, here it is,” replied the other, handing him a piece of paper showing the exact location of Lincoln Island, “the current home of Ayrton and five American colonists.”
“Captain Nemo!” said Smith, after having read the notice, and recognized that it was in the same handwriting as the paper found at the corral.
“Captain Nemo!” said Smith, after reading the notice and realizing it was written in the same handwriting as the paper found at the corral.
“Ah!” said Pencroff, “it was he who took our Good Luck, he who ventured alone to Tabor Island!”
“Ah!” said Pencroff, “he’s the one who took our Good Luck, the one who went alone to Tabor Island!”
“To place this notice there!” answered Herbert.
"To put this notice there!" replied Herbert.
“Then I was right when I said,” cried the sailor, “that he would do us a last service even after his death!”
“Then I was right when I said,” exclaimed the sailor, “that he would help us one last time even after he was gone!”
“My friends,” said Smith, in a voice moved by emotion, “may the God of sinners receive the soul of Captain Nemo; he was our savior!”
“My friends,” said Smith, his voice filled with emotion, “may the God of sinners welcome the soul of Captain Nemo; he was our savior!”
The colonists, uncovering as Smith spake thus, murmured the name of the captain.
The colonists, hearing Smith speak like this, murmured the captain's name.
Then Ayrton, approaching the engineer, said to him, simply:—
Then Ayrton, walking up to the engineer, said to him, simply:—
“What shall be done with the coffer?”
“What should we do with the chest?”
Ayrton had saved this coffer at the risk of his life, at the moment when the island was engulfed. He now faithfully returned it to the engineer.
Ayrton had saved this chest at the risk of his life when the island was going down. He now returned it to the engineer without hesitation.
“Ayrton! Ayrton!” exclaimed Smith, greatly affected.
“Ayrton! Ayrton!” yelled Smith, deeply moved.
Then addressing Grant:—
Then speaking to Grant:—
“Captain,” he said, “where you left a criminal, you have found a man whom expiation has made honest, and to whom I am proud to give my hand!”
“Captain,” he said, “where you left a criminal, you’ve found a man whom redemption has made honest, and I’m proud to shake hands with him!”
Thereupon Grant was informed of all the strange history of Captain Nemo and the colonists of Lincoln Island. And then, the bearings of this remaining reef having been taken, Captain Grant gave the order to go about.
Thereafter, Grant was told about the unusual history of Captain Nemo and the colonists of Lincoln Island. Then, after noting the location of the remaining reef, Captain Grant ordered the crew to change direction.
Fifteen days later the colonists landed in America, which they found at peace after the terrible war which had ended in the triumph of justice and right. Of the wealth contained in the coffer, the greater part was employed in the purchase of a vast tract of land in Iowa. One single pearl, the most beautiful of all, was taken from the treasure and sent to Lady Glenarvan in the name of the castaways, who had been rescued by the Duncan.
Fifteen days later, the colonists arrived in America, where they found peace after the terrible war that had ended with the victory of justice and righteousness. Most of the wealth in the chest was used to buy a large piece of land in Iowa. One single pearl, the most beautiful of all, was taken from the treasure and sent to Lady Glenarvan on behalf of the castaways who had been rescued by the Duncan.
To this domain the colonists invited to labor—that is, to fortune and to happiness—all those whom they had counted on receiving at Lincoln Island. Here they founded a great colony, to which they gave the name of the island which had disappeared in the depths of the Pacific. They found here a river which they called the Mercy, a mountain to which they gave the name of Franklin, a little lake which they called Lake Grant, and forests which became the forests of the Far West. It was like an island on terra-firma.
To this land, the colonists welcomed everyone willing to work—seeking wealth and happiness—just as they had anticipated receiving at Lincoln Island. They established a large colony, naming it after the island that had sunk into the Pacific. They discovered a river they named Mercy, a mountain called Franklin, a small lake known as Lake Grant, and forests that became the forests of the Far West. It was like an island on solid ground.
Here, under the skillful hand of the engineer and his companions, everything prospered. Not one of the former colonists was missing, for they had agreed always to live together, Neb wherever his master was, Ayrton always ready to sacrifice himself, Pencroff a better farmer than he had been a sailor, Herbert who finished his studies under Smith’s direction, Spilett who founded the New Lincoln Herald, which was the best edited journal in the whole world.
Here, under the skilled guidance of the engineer and his team, everything thrived. None of the former colonists were missing because they had all agreed to live together, Neb wherever his master was, Ayrton always willing to make sacrifices, Pencroff now a better farmer than he had been a sailor, Herbert who completed his studies under Smith’s supervision, and Spilett who started the New Lincoln Herald, which was the best-edited newspaper in the entire world.
Here Smith and his companions often received visits from Lord and Lady Glenarvan, from Captain John Mangles and his wife, sister to Robert Grant, from Robert Grant himself, from Major MacNabbs, from all those who had been mixed up in the double history of Captain Grant and Captain Nemo.
Here, Smith and his friends often had visits from Lord and Lady Glenarvan, Captain John Mangles and his wife, who is Robert Grant’s sister, Robert Grant himself, Major MacNabbs, and everyone else involved in the intertwined stories of Captain Grant and Captain Nemo.
Here, finally, all were happy, united in the present as they had been in the past; but never did they forget that island upon which they had arrived poor and naked, that island which, for four years, had sufficed for all their needs, and of which all that remained was a morsel of granite, beaten by the waves of the Pacific, the tomb of him who was Captain Nemo!
Here, at last, everyone was happy, connected in the present as they had been in the past; but they never forgot the island where they had arrived poor and defenseless, that island which, for four years, had provided for all their needs, and of which all that was left was a piece of granite, worn by the waves of the Pacific, the resting place of Captain Nemo!
THE END.
THE END.
GLOSSARY.
GLOSSARY.
AGOUTI. A genus of rodent animals, the size of a rabbit, but more like the squirrel in appearance, with the exception of the tail, which is a short, bare stump. When at rest, they sit upon their haunches, holding their food between their fore-paws.
AGOUTI. A genus of rodent animals, about the size of a rabbit, but looking more like a squirrel, except for their tail, which is just a short, hairless stub. When resting, they sit on their hind legs, holding their food between their front paws.
ALBATROSS. A genus of large, web-footed, acquatic birds, possessing prodigious powers of flight. Its wings, when extended, sometimes measure 15 feet.
ALBATROSS. A type of large, web-footed, aquatic bird, known for its incredible flying abilities. Its wings can stretch up to 15 feet when fully extended.
ALGAROBA BEANS. The seeds of the algaroba or carob tree. These seeds were formerly used by jewellers as weights, and the sweetish honey in the seed-pod is supposed by some to be the wild honey upon which St. John lived in the wilderness. Animals, especially horses, are fond of the bean.
ALGAROBA BEANS. The seeds of the algaroba or carob tree. These seeds were once used by jewelers as weights, and the slightly sweet honey in the seed pod is thought by some to be the wild honey that St. John lived on in the wilderness. Animals, especially horses, enjoy the bean.
AI. The three-toed sloth. The only animal which can neither walk nor stand. It is herbivorous, and lives in trees, moving suspended from a branch by its long and powerful arms.
AI. The three-toed sloth. The only animal that can neither walk nor stand. It eats plants and lives in trees, hanging from a branch with its long and strong arms.
ANTHROPOMORPHI. Animals resembling human beings in form.
ANTHROPOMORPHI. Animals that look like humans in shape.
APYREXY. The intermission of a fever.
APYREXY. The break from a fever.
ARADS. An order of plants of which dragon-root, or jack-in-the-pulpit is a familiar example. Portland sago is made from the corms of some of these plants.
ARADS. A group of plants that includes well-known examples like dragon-root, or jack-in-the-pulpit. Portland sago is produced from the corms of some of these plants.
ARGALL. A species of moufflon or wild sheep.
ARGALL. A type of moufflon or wild sheep.
AZOTH. The old name for nitrogen.
AZOTH. The old name for nitrogen.
BALEEN. The substance called whale-bone.
BALEEN. The substance known as whale bone.
BALLISTIC. Relating to engines for throwing missiles; such as the ancient ballista.
BALLISTIC. Related to engines designed for launching missiles, like the ancient ballista.
BANKSIA. A genus of plants remarkable for the beauty of their flowers and their evergreen foliage. They are sometimes called honey-suckle trees.
BANKSIA. A group of plants known for their beautiful flowers and evergreen leaves. They are sometimes referred to as honey-suckle trees.
BUSTARD. A kind of wild turkey inhabiting the open plains of Europe, Asia and Africa.
BUSTARD. A type of wild turkey that lives in the open plains of Europe, Asia, and Africa.
CABIAI. The largest known rodent. Hystricidæ. from its aquatic habits it is sometimes called a water-hog.
CABIAI. The largest known rodent. Hystricidæ. Because of its aquatic habits, it is sometimes referred to as a water-hog.
CARAPACE. A thick, solid shell covering some reptiles, as the turtle.
CARAPACE. A tough, solid shell that covers certain reptiles, like turtles.
CASAURINÆ. Tropical plants, so named on account of the resemblance their leaves bear to the drooping feathers of the cassowary. For this reason they are sometimes called cassowary trees.
CASAURINÆ. Tropical plants, named because their leaves look like the drooping feathers of a cassowary. For this reason, they are sometimes referred to as cassowary trees.
CASSOWARY. A large, long-legged bird of the ostrich family, famous for its speed in running.
CASSOWARY. A large, long-legged bird from the ostrich family, known for its running speed.
CATACLYSM. An inundation or deluge.
CATACLYSM. A flood or disaster.
CELLULOSE. Called also celluline. A substance which constitutes the cellular tissue of all plants.
CELLULOSE. Also known as celluline. A substance that makes up the cellular tissue of all plants.
CEMENTATION. The process of changing the properties of bodies by heating them in contact with the powder of other substances.
CEMENTATION. The process of altering the properties of materials by heating them in contact with the powder of different substances.
CETACEA. The name of the genus of marine animals which includes whales, dolphins, etc.
CETACEA. The name of the group of marine animals that includes whales, dolphins, and so on.
CINCHONIA. A vegetable alkali found in the cinchona,—a genus of trees found in Peru,—the bark of which is much used as a febrifugal, and is known as Peruvian Bark. Cinchonia is not much used in medicine.
CINCHONIA. A plant-based alkali found in cinchona—a type of tree native to Peru—whose bark is widely used as a fever reducer and is known as Peruvian Bark. Cinchonia isn't commonly used in medicine.
COCKATOO. A genus of birds of the parrot family, distinguished from all other parrots by a crest of feathers on the head, which the bird can raise or depress at pleasure.
COCKATOO. A type of bird in the parrot family, recognized from all other parrots by a feather crest on its head, which the bird can raise or lower at will.
CONIFERS. Coniferæ. An order of cone-bearing plants, including fir-trees, pines, cedars, junipers, etc.
CONIFERS. Coniferæ. A group of cone-bearing plants, including firs, pines, cedars, junipers, and others.
CO-ORDINATES. A system of lines and angles by which the position of any point may be determined with reference to a fixed point.
CO-ORDINATES. A system of lines and angles that allows you to determine the location of any point in relation to a fixed point.
CORM. The solid, underground stem of a plant, like the bulb of a tulip; differing, however, from a bulb in being solid.
CORM. The solid, underground stem of a plant, similar to a tulip bulb; however, it differs from a bulb because it is solid.
COUROUCOUS. Birds of the warbler family, which, excepting the humming bird family, contains the smallest birds in the world. The Nightingale, Wood wren and Golden-crests are familiar examples.
COUROUCOUS. Birds from the warbler family, which, aside from the hummingbird family, includes the smallest birds on the planet. The Nightingale, Wood wren, and Golden-crests are well-known examples.
CURASSOW. A gallinaceous bird, about the size of turkeys, and capable of domestication.
CURASSOW. A chicken-like bird, about the size of turkeys, and able to be domesticated.
CYCAS. A genus of trees intermediate between the palms and the ferns, cultivated in China, and valued for its pith, which furnishes a kind of sago.
CYCAS. A type of tree that's between palms and ferns, grown in China, and prized for its pith, which provides a type of sago.
DEODAR. The Himalayan cedar. A genus of trees belonging to the order Pinaccæ; the same order as the cedars of Lebanon, celebrated for its beauty, its longevity, its magnitude, and the durability of its timber.
DEODAR. The Himalayan cedar. A type of tree in the order Pinaccæ; the same order as the cedars of Lebanon, known for its beauty, long life, size, and the strength of its wood.
DUGONG. An herbivorous mammal having an elongated body, with flippers near the head, and terminated by a crescent-shaped tail. It drags itself along the shore and browses on the herbage that grows along the banks of the rivers which it frequents.
DUGONG. A plant-eating mammal with a long body, flippers near its head, and a crescent-shaped tail. It pulls itself along the shore and feeds on the plants that grow along the riverbanks it visits.
ECHIDNA. A genus of ovoviparous mammals, which have the general form of the ant-eater, but the body is covered with spines like a porcupine; hence they are sometimes called porcupine ant-eaters.
ECHIDNA. A group of egg-laying mammals that resemble anteaters but have bodies covered in spines like porcupines; that's why they're sometimes called porcupine anteaters.
EMUE. A species of cassowary found principally in Australia, and sometimes called Australian cassowary.
EMUE. A type of cassowary mainly found in Australia, also known as the Australian cassowary.
EUCALYPTUS. A genus of plants of the myrtle family, which grow to a prodigious height. Its leaves exude a substance resembling manna, which falls to the ground in pieces as large as nuts. The trees are sometimes called gum trees.
EUCALYPTUS. A genus of plants from the myrtle family that can grow to impressive heights. Its leaves release a substance similar to manna, which drops to the ground in chunks the size of nuts. These trees are often referred to as gum trees.
FEBRIFUGE. A medicine to drive away or allay fever.
FEBRIFUGE. A medicine that reduces or alleviates fever.
FECULA. A term applied to the substance obtained from plants; also called starch or farina.
FECULA. A term used for the substance derived from plants; also known as starch or flour.
FULGURITE. A vitrified sand-tube made by the action of lightning.
FULGURITE. A glassy sand tube created by the impact of lightning.
FULIGINOUS. Resembling smoke; smokey.
Smoky.
FUSIFORM. Spindle-shaped.
Fusiform. Spindle-shaped.
GARGOYLE. A projecting water-spout, often grotesquely carved, attached to old gothic buildings.
GARGOYLE. A protruding water spout, often weirdly designed, that is attached to ancient gothic buildings.
HYDROGRAPHY. As opposed to orography; the water system of a country.
HYDROGRAPHY. In contrast to orography; the water system of a country.
IZARD. The chamois of the Pyrenees.
IZARD. The chamois of the Pyrenees.
JACAMAR. A genus of climbing birds, closely allied to the kingfishers, that live in forests, feed on insects, and build in low bushes. Their plumage has a carious metallic lustre.
JACAMAR. A group of climbing birds, closely related to kingfishers, that live in forests, eat insects, and nest in low bushes. Their feathers have a shiny metallic luster.
JETSAM. Goods coming to land which have been thrown overboard from a ship in distress.
JETSAM. Items washed ashore that were tossed overboard from a ship in trouble.
KAOLINE. The Chinese name for a kind of porcelain clay.
KAOLINE. The Chinese term for a type of porcelain clay.
GLOSSARY.
GLOSSARY.
KOULAS. See Ai.
KOULAS. See AI.
LARDIZABALACEÆ. An order of twining shrubs, some of which furnish our greenhouses with pretty evergreen climbers.
LARDIZABALACEÆ. An order of climbing shrubs, some of which provide our greenhouses with attractive evergreen vines.
LENTICULAR. Having the form of a double convex lens.
LENTICULAR. Shaped like a double convex lens.
LIANA. A name used to designate the climbing, twining plants which abound in tropical forests, often growing to an immense size, and forming a perfect network of branches, impenetrable without the aid of a hatchet. They are comparatively rare in our climate, but honeysuckles may be mentioned as familiar examples.
LIANA. A term used to refer to climbing, twining plants that are abundant in tropical forests, often growing to a massive size and creating a dense network of branches that is almost impossible to get through without a hatchet. They are relatively uncommon in our climate, but honeysuckles can be mentioned as familiar examples.
LILIACKÆ. Plants of the order of amaryllids, growing to an enormous size. They are commonly known as the giant Lily. The stem is leafy, 15 or 20 feet high, and bears at the top a cluster of superb large crimson blossoms.
LILIACKÆ. Plants from the amaryllid family that grow to a massive size. They’re commonly called the giant Lily. The stem is leafy, reaching 15 to 20 feet high, and at the top, it has a cluster of stunning large crimson flowers.
LITHODOMI. Molluscous animals which form holes in the solid rocks, in which they lodge themselves. One species (Lithodomus Lithophagus) is esteemed as an article of food, and is known by the name of the sea-date shell.
LITHODOMI. Mollusks that create holes in solid rocks where they settle. One species (Lithodomus Lithophagus) is valued as food and is commonly called the sea-date shell.
LORIES. Birds belonging to the parrot family, remarkable for their soft beaks.
LORIES. Birds that are part of the parrot family, known for their soft beaks.
MACAUCO. A genus of four-handed animals, resembling the monkey tribe.
MACAUCO. A genus of four-handed animals that are similar to monkeys.
MACRODACTYLS. Long-toed wading birds.
MACRODACTYLS. Long-toed shorebirds.
MAGOT. A small species of ape, sometimes called the Barbary ape.
MAGOT. A small type of monkey, sometimes referred to as the Barbary monkey.
MALACOLOGIST. One who treats of mollusks.
MALACOLOGIST. A person who studies mollusks.
MANNIFERS. A name synonymous with mammals; meaning animals which suckle their young.
MANNIFERS. A name synonymous with mammals; referring to animals that nurse their young.
MANATEE. A marine animal closely related to the dugong. It Is sometimes called lamantine or sea-cow.
MANATEE. A sea creature closely related to the dugong. It is sometimes called lamantine or sea cow.
MARGARINE. A fatty solid matter obtained from oil.
MARGARINE. A solid fat made from oil.
MOUFFLON. Caprovis Mussimon. Resembling the mountain sheep of Arizona. It is the size of a deer; covered with hair which assumes a woolly character in winter.
MOUFFLON. Caprovis Mussimon. It looks like the mountain sheep from Arizona. It’s about the size of a deer and has hair that becomes woolly in the winter.
OLEINE. The fluid portion of fats and oils.
OLEINE. The liquid part of fats and oils.
ONAGER. Another name for the wild ass.
ONAGER. Another term for the wild donkey.
OROGRAPHY. As opposed to hydrography; the description of the mountain system of a country.
OROGRAPHY. Unlike hydrography; the study of a country's mountain system.
PALMIPEDS. Web-footed fowl.
Wading birds. Web-footed birds.
PECCARY. An animal resembling a hog, sometimes called Mexican hog, or tajacu.
PECCARY. An animal that looks like a pig, sometimes referred to as the Mexican hog, or tajacu.
PELLICAN. A largo aquatic bird, having a long, straight and very strong bill. It lives upon fish, which It carries for some time in a pouch or bag attached to the lover mandible.
PELLICAN. A large water bird with a long, straight, and very strong beak. It feeds on fish, which it carries for a while in a pouch or bag attached to its lower jaw.
PIROGUE. A canoe, usually formed of a hollowed tree.
PIROGUE. A canoe, typically made from a hollowed-out tree trunk.
POLYPORUS. A genus of fungi, allied to mushrooms, toad-stools, sap-balls, etc.; used in Germany to make the tinder called Amadon.
POLYPORUS. A type of fungus related to mushrooms, toadstools, sap-balls, and similar species; used in Germany to produce a tinder known as Amadon.
PTEROPODA. A class of mollusks which live In the open sea, and have a pair of flippers or wings, by which they pass rapidly through the water.
PTEROPODA. A class of mollusks that live in the open ocean and have a pair of flippers or wings, allowing them to move quickly through the water.
PULP. The common name for marine animals of the genus octopus, such as the cuttle-fish. They have eight feet or arms around the head, with which they swim, creep, and seize their prey. It is the Pieuvre of Victor Hugo.
PULP. The common name for marine animals in the octopus genus, like the cuttlefish. They have eight limbs or arms around their head, which they use to swim, crawl, and catch their prey. It is the Pieuvre of Victor Hugo.
PUZZOLAN. Fine volcanic ashes, which harden under water, forming a kind of cement.
PUZZOLAN. Fine volcanic ash that hardens in water, creating a type of cement.
PYROXYLINE. Called also gun-cotton. It burns In the open air with a flash, though without smoke or report; but It is violently explosive when fired in a confined space.
PYROXYLINE. Also known as gun-cotton. It burns in the open air with a flash, but without smoke or sound; however, it is extremely explosive when ignited in a confined space.
QUADRUMANA. Animals having four hands, as apes, baboons, etc.
QUADRUMANA. Animals with four hands, like apes, baboons, and so on.
QUININE. The most important of the vegetable alkaloids found In the cinchona (see CINCHONIA). It is one of the most valuable antiperiodics and febrifuges known.
QUININE. The most important of the plant alkaloids found in cinchona (see CINCHONIA). It is one of the most valuable antiperiodics and fever reducers known.
RECRUDESENCE. The state of becoming sore again.
RECRUDESENCE. The condition of becoming sore again.
RINFORDZANDO. A musical sign denoting an Increase of sound. Usually expressed by the abbreviation rf.
RINFORDZANDO. A musical term indicating an increase in volume. Typically shown by the abbreviation rf.
RUMINANT. An animal that chews the cud.
RUMINANT. An animal that regurgitates and re-chews its food.
SAGOIN. A species of sapajo. The squirrel monkey; so called on account of its hairy tail.
SAGOIN. A type of squirrel monkey. It’s called that because of its furry tail.
SALICIN. A white and very bitter substance, obtained from the bark of the willow and other trees.
SALICIN. A white, extremely bitter substance extracted from the bark of the willow and other trees.
SAPAJOS. The proper name for tailed monkeys, as distinguishing them from apes, baboons and gorillas, which are tailless.
SAPAJOS. The correct term for tailed monkeys, to set them apart from apes, baboons, and gorillas, which have no tails.
SEXTANT. An Instrument for measuring angles by reflection.
SEXTANT. A tool for measuring angles using reflection.
SPHENISCUS. Penguins; a sub-family of auks. Oceanic birds remarkable for their short legs, very short wings—which are useful only In swimming; and their upright position when at rest.
SPHENISCUS. Penguins; a sub-family of auks. These oceanic birds are known for their short legs and very short wings, which are only useful for swimming, and their upright stance when at rest.
STEARINE. The most abundant of the solid constituents of fats and oils. Also a popular name for stearic acid, used in candles.
STEARINE. The most common solid component found in fats and oils. It's also a widely used term for stearic acid, which is used in candles.
SUCCEDANEOUS. Supplying the place of something else.
SUCCEDANEOUS. Taking the place of something else.
TALUS. A sloping heap of fragments accumulated at the foot of a steep rock, from the face of which they have been broken off by the action of the weather.
TALUS. A sloping pile of broken pieces gathered at the base of a steep rock, from which they've been chipped off due to weathering.
TETRA. Tetraonieda, or grouse. The bird here described resembles the pinated grouse, or prairie-chicken.
TETRA. Tetraonieda, or grouse. The bird described here looks like the pinated grouse, or prairie-chicken.
TINAMONS. A family of birds belonging to the order gallinæ. They are about the size of quail.
TINAMONS. A family of birds in the order gallinæ. They are roughly the size of quail.
TOURACO-LORIES. Climbing birds of the parrot family.
TOURACO-LORIES. Birds that climb, belonging to the parrot family.
TRAGOPANS. A large species of pheasant.
TRAGOPANS. A large kind of pheasant.
TUFA. A name given to volcanic dust, cemented by the Infiltration of water into a porous rock.
TUFA. A term used for volcanic ash that has been solidified by water seeping into a porous rock.
[Illustration: Lincoln Island]
[Illustration: Lincoln Island]
END OF TRANSLATION OF THE MYSTERIOUS ISLAND
Download ePUB
If you like this ebook, consider a donation!